530 ScheduALL AdministratorsGuide

ScheduALL for Windows
ScheduLINK for Windows
Administrators Guide
v5.32
Website netinsight.net
Last Updated December 2018
Customer Care
Website support.netinsight.net
E-mail support@netinsight.net
U.S. Support (954) 334-5409
Europe Support 44 (0) 20 7436 6655
Copyright
ScheduALL ® Copyright 1989-2018 by Net Insight AB. All rights reserved.

No part of this manual may be copied, distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated to any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic,
manual, or otherwise, without the express written permission of VizuAll, Inc. d/b/a Net Insight. This manual is
governed by the ScheduALL Software License Agreement entered into between your company and
VizuAll, Inc. d/b/a Net Insight.
ScheduALL, and ScheduLINK are registered trademarks, and ScheduALL Chorus, ScheduALL Smart Media,
and ScheduALL Portal are trademarks, of VizuAll, Inc. d/b/a Net Insight.
Adobe, Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
Avid is a registered trademark, and Avid Unity is a trademark, of Avid Technology, Inc.
SAP® Crystal Reports® is the trademark or registered trademark of SAP SE in Germany and in several other
countries.
SAP® Crystal Reports® Runtime is the trademark or registered trademark of SAP SE in Germany and in several
other countries.
Licensee agrees not to (a) use the Runtime Product to create for distribution a competitive product or (b) use the
Runtime Product to create for distribution a product that converts the report file format (.RPT) to an alternative.
dotConnect for Oracle – Copyright © 2002–2010, Devart
Licensees are not allowed to use the Software independently from the ScheduALL solution, and for use of the
Software within a development environment, ScheduALL Licensees need to purchase the appropriate license
from Devart.
Html Agility Pack: http://htmlagilitypack.codeplex.com/, http://htmlagilitypack.codeplex.com/license.
MasterCard is a registered trademark of MasterCard International Incorporated in the United States.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Microsoft Ajax Minifier, http://ajaxmin.codeplex.com/, http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0, Copyright
2012 by Microsoft Corp.
Microsoft Developer Code – Copyright © 2008, Microsoft Corporation
Certain components or modules included in the Software may be provided by Microsoft Corporation. Copyright
2009 Microsoft Corporation. “Microsoft” and related marks are the property of Microsoft Corporation. All
limitations and disclaimers herein shall apply to protect Microsoft Corporation and its affiliates to the fullest extent
permitted by laws.
Telerik – Copyright © 2002–2011, Telerik. All Rights Reserved.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
UPS is a registered trademark of United Parcel Service of America, Inc.
Visa is a registered trademark of VISA International Service Association.
Developer Tree Control Software Component – Copyright © 2000–2008 Developer Express Inc.
Mindfusion Flowchartx Software Component – Copyright © MindFusion LLC.
GeoNames (Creative Commons)
Some silk icons provided by http://www.famfamfam.com/lab/icons/silk/ (Creative Commons), who does not
endorse ScheduALL or our use of the work.
Part of the Simple JSON Library: (MIT license) Copyright © 2010, Mike Anchor
Certain components included in the Software provided by:
• Full Calendar: Copyright (c) 2013 Adam Shaw.
• jQuery Easing v1.3: Copyright © 2008 George McGinley Smith. All rights reserved.
• jQuery Cookie: Copyright 2013 Klaus Hartl.
• Certain fonts and icons: http://icomoon.io/: © 2014 - 2015 Roonas. Creative Commons. Other fonts and icons
are created by ScheduALL or third parties and are the property of their respective owner.
• SIL Open Font, © 2003 - 2013 SIL International, all rights reserved.
• http://cdnjs.cloudflare.com/ajax/libs/jstimezonedetect/1.0.4/jstz.js, Copyright © Jon Nylander: http://
opensource.org/licenses/mit-license.php
• AutoMapper: Copyright © 2010 Jimmy Bogard
• jQuery base component: jQuery pub/sub plugin by Peter Higgins (dante@dojotoolkit.org).
• CodeMirror: Copyright © 2015 by Marijn Haverbeke and others. (marijnh@gmail.com)
• DDay.iCal library: Copyright 2007 Douglas Day doug@ddaysoftware.com
• Smartheap Software Component: portions copyright © 1991 – 1997, CompuWare Corporation.
• Moment.js
• JInt: Copyright © 2013, Sebastien Ros. All rights reserved.
• RoboHELP (Extension for WinHelp). © 1997 - 1999, Blue Sky Software Corp.
• Borland Memory Manager © 1996, 1999 Inprise Corp.
• Golden Layout: Copyright © 2016 deepstream.io
• Extended WPF Toolkit™
• Swashbuckle: Copyright © 2013, Richard Morris
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express limited warranty (if any) set forth in your license agreement, the software and the software
products (and all upgrades and additional developments, if any) are provided on an "as is" basis without any other
warranties, express or implied. ScheduALL expressly disclaims any and all other warranties, express or implied,
including, without limitation, warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ScheduALL does not
warrant that the software or software products will be error-free or operate without interruption. ScheduALL is not
responsible for your data (other than duties of non-disclosure in your applicable license agreement provided that
you have complied with ScheduALL's sensitive data protection policies), and you are solely responsible for backing
up and restoring your data. You are solely responsible for obtaining and maintaining systems necessary for hosting
and accessing the software and associated data, and for storing, transferring and handling data in compliance with
laws.
ScheduALL Sensitive Data Protection Policy
ScheduALL has implemented this Sensitive Data Protection Policy to establish a procedure which ensures a higher
level of protection for Client sensitive data.
1.0 Policy:
The Client agrees it shall not provide its uncleansed sensitive data to ScheduALL. This includes, without limitation,
in connection with any Customer Care Ticket and Statement of Work. If Client provides its uncleansed sensitive
data, then Client understands it assumes risk and it shall indemnify and defend ScheduALL and its affiliates.
If Client provides sensitive data to ScheduALL, Client shall first run the ScheduALL Data Desensitizing Script as
outlined below.
2.0 Purpose:
The purpose of this policy is as follows:
1. To make the Client aware of their responsibility regarding the "handling" (transmission, processing, and
transport) of Client data - in particular "sensitive data".
2. To provide procedures for handling sensitive data.
3.0 What is Sensitive Data?
Client sensitive data includes any information that can be tied to a specific business or individual, and may include
information which can be used for unintended purposes outside of the ScheduALL application. Sensitive data
includes “personally identifiable information”, such as information that can be used on its own or with other
information to identify, contact or locate a person, or to identify an individual in context. Examples, in addition to
information described by applicable laws, include:
• Name, alternate/trade name, street address, billing address, shipping address, email address, and
telephone/fax information stored in the ScheduALL database for businesses or individuals identified as
clients, contacts, agencies, personnel resources, account executives, producers, or vendors.
• Birthdates, hire dates, and Social Security Numbers/Personal IDs stored in the ScheduALL database for
personnel resources.
• Company, department, or business unit names stored in the ScheduALL database as company information.
4.0 Data Handling Guidelines:
1. ScheduALL has no obligation to accept any Client sensitive data. If Client data is required for testing, trouble-
shooting or configuration, the Client must execute the ScheduALL Data Desensitizing Script against a back-
up system to alter the data prior to providing it to ScheduALL.
This script is to be executed only on a back-up of the data at the Client's site before it is made available or
transmitted to ScheduALL.
Up-to-date Scripts are available from ScheduALL Client Services Group. Note that scripts will only apply to
known fields, and Client is solely responsible for checking that all sensitive data is cleansed prior to delivery
to ScheduALL.
By continuing to use ScheduALL services, you are confirming: a) You are authorized to bind your Company; b)
You received and agree to the Sensitive Data Protection Policy; and c) You will notify and train your appropriate
Company employees of the requirement to comply with this Policy; and (d) you will promptly notify ScheduALL and
take corrective actions if any sensitive data is shared. Client's acknowledgement is also valid for any future
applicable Customer Care tickets and Statements of Work.
This Policy is subject to change from time to time. ScheduALL will provide a copy upon request and make
reasonable efforts to post the policy online.
Client acknowledges its failure to comply with this policy is at Client's sole risk, ScheduALL assumes no liability for
the data provided, and Client shall indemnify and hold harmless ScheduALL and its affiliates from any wrongdoing.
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Contents
Contents
Copyright 2
About This Documentation 21
Overview 22
Structure 22
Conventions 22
History 23
Additional Information 23
Help Menu 24
Selecting List Items 24
Ch. 1 Setup 26
Overview 27
Module Specific 27
Setup Changes 27
Test Early to Avoid Surprises 27
Advanced Planning 28
Planning Rooms and Resources 28
Planning Resource Groups 28
Planning Categories and Types 29
Planning Services 29
Client Rates and Rate Cards 29
Initial Setup Sequence 31
Common Setup Areas 31
ScheduLINK Setup Areas 32
Rates and Prices 33
Rate Cards 33
Adding a Rate Card 34
Managing Rate Cards 34
Billing Rates and Price Maintenance 35
Set Price Rates 35
Price Maintenance Organizer 36
Price Maintenance 37
Pricing Methods 37
Price Rate Setup 39
Pricing Method Examples 41
Case 1: Day/Night with No Quantity Pricing 41
Case 2: Day/Night with Absolute Pricing 42
Case 3: Day/Night with Progressive Pricing 42
Case 4: Time of Day with No Quantity Pricing 42
Case 5: Time of Day with Progressive Pricing 43
Pricing Points Setup 43
Managing Pricing Points 44
Displaying Pricing Points 45
Cancellation Rate Cards and Cancellation Rates 47
Managing Cancellation Rate Cards 49
Managing Cancellation Rates 50
Adding a Cancellation Rate 50
Selecting Resources and Services 51
Defining Cancellation Rates 51
ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 5

Deleting a Cancellation Rate 53

Accounting Setup 54
Configuring the Accounting Module 54
Tax Structures 55
Adding a Tax Structure 55
Managing Tax Structures 57
Accounting Period 57
Adding an Accounting Period 58
Deleting an Accounting Period 58
Alternate Currencies and Exchange Rates 58
Managing Alternate Currencies 58
Currency Exchange Rate Setup 59
Adding an Exchange Rate 59
Managing Exchange Rates 60
Account Code Setup 60
Adding an Account Code 61
Managing Account Codes 61
External Compensation Factors 62
Adding Compensation Factors 62
Managing Compensation Factors 63
Shift Rules 63
Adding Shift Rule Sets 64
Managing Shift Rule Sets 67
Adding Shift Rules to a Rule Set 67
To add a Base Rule: 67
To add a Split Rule: 70
To add a Penalty Rule: 71
Pay Scale Setup 71
Adding Pay Scales 71
Defining Pay Scale Costs 72
Managing Pay Scales 74
Rooms and Resources 75
Resources 75
Resource Category Setup 76
Category Maintenance Dialog 76
Category Maintenance – Main 77
Category Maintenance – Resource Questions 78
Deleting a Resource Category 79
Resource Type Setup 79
Resource Type Setup - Main Tab 79
Deleting a Resource Type 81
Managing Resources 81
Adding a Resource 82
Editing a Resource 82
Deleting an Unused Resource 83
Deleting a Booked Resource 83
Resource Catalog Setup 84
Availability Setup 86
General Resource Setup 87
General Resource – Main 88
General Resource – Accounting 92

General Resource – Connector 95

General Resource – Other 96
Alarm Notification 99
Include in Notifications 100
Notes Editor 100
General Resource – Resource Questions 100
General Resource – Trail 100
General Resource Properties – Collection 101
Room Resource Setup 103
Room Properties – Main 104
Room Properties – Accounting 107
Room Properties – Connector 109
Room Properties – Services 109
Room Properties – Preferences 110
Room Properties – Other 111
Room Properties – Resource Questions 114
Room Properties – Trail 114
Personnel Setup 114
Personnel Properties – Main 115
Personnel Properties – Accounting 119
Personnel Properties – Shift Style 121
Adding a Shift Style 122
Editing or Removing a Shift Style 125
Personnel Properties– Identification 125
Personnel Properties – Other 126
Personnel Properties – Resource Questions 128
Personnel Properties – Trail 128
Personnel Properties – Connector 128
Stock Resource Setup 129
Stock Properties – Main 129
Stock Properties – Accounting 131
Stock Properties – Other 133
Stock Properties – Resource Questions 134
Stock Properties – Trail 134
Abstract Resource Setup 135
Adding an Abstract Resource 135
Abstract Resource Properties – Main 136
Abstract Resource Properties – Auto Schedule 138
Resource Classification Setup 140
Resource Groups 142
Resource Group Setup 143
Edit, Copy, or Delete a Resource Group 144
Personnel Shift Rotations/Patterns 145
Service Setup 145
Overview 145
Adding a Service 146
Service Properties – Main 146
Specifying Capacity for a Resource in a Service 148
Resource to Auto-Include, Main Tab 149
Resource to Auto-Include, Link Tab 151
Service Properties – Accounting 153

Service Properties – Capable Rooms 155

Service Properties – Service Questions 156
Service Properties – Other 157
Service Properties – Path Management 158
Service Properties – Trail 158
Pivot Services 159
Creating a Pivot Service 160
Edit, Copy, or Delete a Service 162
Producers, Account Executives, and Directors 163
Overview 163
Adding a Producer, Account Executive, or Director 163
Edit, Copy, or Delete a Producer, Account Executive, or Director 164
Client, Contact, and Agency Setup 165
Ownership 165
Client Setup 165
Client Properties – Main 166
Client Properties – Billing Information 168
Client Properties – Billing Terms 170
Client Properties – Custom Pricing 171
Custom Price Setup 173
Custom Pricing for ScheduLINK Services 174
Client Properties – Producers 174
Client Properties – Aliases 175
Client Properties – Other 176
Client Properties – Activity Log 177
Client Properties – Custom Cxl 178
Client Properties – Preferences 179
Client Properties – Contracts 180
Client Properties - Seasons 181
Managing Seasons and Episodes 182
Client Properties - Attachment 182
Agency Setup 183
Agency Properties – Main 184
Agency Properties – Billing Information 185
Agency Properties – Other 187
Agency Properties – Custom Pricing 187
Contact Setup 188
Contact Properties – Main 188
Contact Properties – Billing Information 189
Contact Properties – Other 190
Contact Properties – Custom Pricing 191
Contact Catalog Setup 191
Edit, Copy, or Delete a Client, Contact, or Agency 192
Client Groups 192
Client Group Setup 192
Edit, Copy, or Delete a Client Group 193
Miscellaneous Setup 194
Holiday Calendar and Region Setup 194
Holiday Regions 194
Adding a Holiday Region 194
Holiday Region Maintenance 194

Holiday Setup 195

Deleting a Holiday 196
Locations Setup 196
Location Setup 196
Satellite Locations 197
Locations Setup - Main 198
Locations Setup - Levels 200
Locations Setup - User Fields 201
Display View Setup 202
Display View Preferences and Permissions 202
Display View and Flyover Display View 203
Display View for Resource Flyover - ScheduALL 203
Display View for Resource Flyover - ScheduLINK 204
Display View Maintenance for the Schedule Calendar 206
Display Block Setup 208
Display Block Column Properties 209
Display Blocks for Resources 211
Display Blocks for Media Assets 211
Viewing the XML Log 212
Contract Type Setup 213
Report Group Setup 213
Resource Capabilities Setup 215
ScheduALL Connector Configuration 216
ScheduALL Connector Mapping Setup 216
Viewing Connector Mappings 216
Managing Connector Mappings 217
Requesting Information from Subscribers 217
Sending Information to Subscribers 218
Replying to a Publisher's Request for Information 219
Accepting Information from a Publisher 219
Notifying Subscribers of Mapping Changes 219
Subscribing to iCalendars 219
Configuring SSL 220
Creating and Managing Single Point of Failure Catalogs 220
Adding a Collection Catalog 221
Managing Collection Catalogs 223
ScheduALL WebApp Setup 224
Adding, Editing, and Deleting Banners 224
Configuring ScheduALL Smart Time User Accounts 225
Disabling Mobile Login 226
Single Sign On and Active Directory 226
Enabling the Book Now Feature 226
Setting the Book Now Pause Duration 227
ScheduALL Portal Setup 227
Configuring Client Users 227
Settings for Terrestrial Portal Bookings 228
Configuring Resources and Services 228
Configuring Terminals 229
Configuring Destinations 229
Setting Transponder Offset Values 230
Modifying Quick Add Duration Values 230

Modifying Time Increment Values 232

Disabling Manual Portal Time Entry 234
Displaying Transmission Status 234
Specifying Portal Booking Lead Time 235
Creating a Portal Service 236
Modifying ScheduALL Portal Dialogs 239
Adding the Permission to Use Command 240
Modifying Resource Dialogs to Configure Terminals or Destinations 240
Adding the Portal Type List to the Service Properties Dialog 241
Adding Controls for Is Portal Booking Type 241
Updating the Service Catalog Properties Dialog 241
Enhancing Security Settings 242
Ch. 2 Program Administration 244
Overview 245
Supervisor Account 245
System Preference Setup 246
General System Preferences 246
System Preferences - Main Tab 246
System Preferences – Overtime Tab 250
System Preferences – Multi-Region Tab 251
System Preferences – General Tab 253
System Preferences – General Settings 253
Client Status 254
Work Order Status 255
Project Status 255
Phase Status 256
General Labels 256
General Work Order Labels 260
General Client Labels 260
Personnel Resources 260
General Trouble Ticket Labels 261
General Rental Booking Status Labels 261
Master Project Status 262
Master Project Forms 262
Ledger Setup 263
Units of Measure 263
Overtime Types 264
Accounts Receivable 264
Session Types 265
Acct. Codes for Paid Activities 266
Acct. Codes for Unpaid Activities 266
Payable Status 267
Polarity Modes 267
Live Shot Types 267
Polarity Restrictions 268
Pay Status 268
Visual Flags (User Defined) 269
Dub Order Status 269
Event Status 270
Explicit Confirmation Status 270

Vehicle 270
Travel Type 270
Contract Status 271
Shift Rule Trigger Type 271
Pricing Point Labels 271
Operations Manager 272
Extended Operations 272
MCR Status 273
Working Time Manager Rules 273
Working Time Manager Security 273
Auxiliary Status 273
System Preferences – System Options Tab 274
System Options 275
Schedule Options 302
Availability Calculation Options 324
Portal Options 325
Connector Options 325
Interop Options 329
Workflow Options 329
Accounting Options 330
Credit Limit 332
Active Directory 334
Email 334
NMS 334
Notification Manager 334
Password Options 335
PIN Password Options 339
Time Capture/Smart Time Options 341
Account Code Defaults 342
SMS 342
Ingest 343
Content Verification System 343
Pay Translator/Working Time Manager 344
iCalendar Options 346
SSRS Info 346
Using Auto-Select 346
System Preferences: System Colors 347
Editing Color Entry Properties 348
ScheduLINK Specific Colors 349
Colors for Shared Work Order Booking Blocks 350
System Preferences: System Fonts 350
Printing System Preferences 351
User Preferences 352
Simple Mode and Advanced Mode 352
User Preferences: General 352
General User Preferences – Navigation Bar 353
General User Preferences – Scheduling 356
General User Preferences – Cursor Guides 360
General User Preferences – Conflict Warnings 361
General User Preferences – Options 363
General User Preferences, Options Tab, Scheduling Options 363

General User Preferences, Options Tab, Miscellaneous Options 396

General User Preferences, Options Tab, Email Options 405
General User Preferences, Options Tab, Visible Desktops Options 405
General User Preferences, Options Tab, SMS Options 406
Alarms and Locales 406
Printing User Preferences 407
User Preferences: Desktops 407
Creating a New Desktop 407
Desktop Maintenance - Public Desktops 409
Desktop Maintenance - Private Desktops 410
User Preferences: Change Password 411
User Preferences: Override System Fonts 411
Custom Home Page 412
User Profiles and Security 413
Overview 413
ScheduALL User Accounts 414
Adding ScheduALL Users 415
User Groups and Profiles Overview 423
User Account and Profile Tasks 424
Managing User Groups 425
Managing Client Users 426
Add User Groups and Define a Parent Profile 426
Defining User Group Access Levels 430
Printing Security Settings 431
Client and Agency Users 431
Daily Access Schedule 433
Permissions 434
Scheduling Area Profile 435
Project Manager 463
Quotes Manager 467
Invoicing 470
External Costs Manager 472
Personnel Manager 474
Working Time Manager 476
Library 476
Duplication 482
Maintenance & Setup Areas 483
Shipping 494
Time Capture/Smart Time 494
Location Types 500
Administrative Options 501
Contract Manager 503
SMS Agent 504
Connector 504
Security for WebApp Project Templates 504
Room and Resource Groups 505
Client Groups 507
Companies 508
MCR 508
Vendor Group 509
External Pay Status 510

Trouble Ticket Status 510

Extended Operation Labels 510
Contract Types 511
Room and Resource Groups Cost Access 511
Client Groups Cost Access 513
Client Groups Cost Access Level 513
Report Groups 514
Client Groups External Cost Access 514
Configuring Maximum Number of Users 515
Viewing Active Users 515
Audit Trail 518
Work Order Audit Trail 518
System Audit Trail 519
Purge and Archive the Audit Trail 520
Extended Trail 520
Report Catalog Maintenance 522
Set SQL Passwords 525
Other Supervisor Options 525
File Operations 526
E-mail Services 526
E-mail Services Overview 526
E-Mail Requirements 526
E-mail Profile in System Preferences 527
E-mail Profile in User Preferences 529
Email User Preferences 531
Ch. 3 ScheduLINK Setup 533
General Resource Properties for ScheduLINK 534
General Resource – Satellite 534
General Resource – Uplink Path/Downlink 537
General Resource – Path Management 539
General Resource – Circuit 542
General Resource – Sub-Resources 545
General Resource – Predecessor 546
General Resource – Successor 546
General Resource – Uplink Predecessor 546
General Resource – Uplink Successor 546
General Resource – Antenna Matrix 546
General Resource – Satellite 2 547
Room Resource Properties for ScheduLINK 548
Room Properties – Satellite 548
Room Properties – Uplink Truck 551
Room Properties – Fixed Dish 554
Room Properties – Path Management 556
Room Properties – Sub-Resources 558
Room Properties – Predecessor 559
Room Properties – Successor 561
Room Properties – Uplink Predecessor and Successor 562
Uplink Predecessor 562
Uplink Successor 562
Room Properties – Antenna Matrix 563

BandPLAN Resource Setup 566

Adding or Editing BandPLAN Resources 566
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Main 566
BandPLAN Catalogs 570
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Satellite 571
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Accounting 574
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Services 576
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Other 577
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Path Management 579
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Connector 581
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Resource Questions 581
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Predecessor 582
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Successor 582
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Trail 582
Band Plans 582
Band Extensions 583
Sub-Bands 586
Sub-Band Properties – Main 586
Sub-Band Properties – Default TX Parameters 589
Band Segments 590
BandPLAN Pricing 593
Defining Billing Rates for BandPLAN Resources 593
Assigning Billing Entries to BandPLAN Sub-Bands 595
BandPLAN Vendor Assignments 596
Operations Manager Setup 598
Configuring Browser Columns 598
Resize Row Height 600
Fly-Over Text 600
Events Pane Multi Sort 601
Predefined Circuit and Circuit Group Setup 601
Satellite Transmission Parameters Setup 601
Master Control Room Setup 602
Ch. 4 Module Specific Setup 603
Production Workflow Manager 604
User Permissions and Security 604
System Preferences 604
Master Project Form Setup 604
Media Manager 605
Asset Media Manager Setup Sequence 605
System Preferences 605
Modifying Library Label Freehand Defaults 607
Defining Library Media Formats 608
Defining Library Media Categories 609
Library Categories - Main 610
Library Categories - User Fields 611
Library Categories - Classifications 611
Library Categories - Formats Tab 612
Media Classification 613

Container Type Hierarchy 613

Library Storage Locations 614
Library Location Hierarchy 614
Updating the Media Manager Interface 615
Adding Open Container Child Controls 615
Adding the Location Scan Archival Menu Item 615
Adding the Revision Number 616
Updating the Audio Tab 616
Creating a Library Audio Form 617
Updating the Library Metadata Dialog 617
Updating Dialogs for Library Template Association 619
Updating Work Order Dialogs for Templates 620
Barcode Scanner 622
Scanning Hardware 622
Barcode Protocols and Requirements 623
Barcode Fonts 623
Scanner Configuration 623
ScheduALL Barcode Scanner Setup 624
Configuring the Local Barcode Scanner 625
Configuring the Local Scanner Location 626
Enabling and Disabling a Local Scanner 626
Enable/Disable a Local Scanner Location 626
Multi-Company 627
Migrating from a Single-Company System 627
Company Setup 627
Displaying the Company Setup Dialog 627
Entering Company Information 628
Setting Counters 628
Selecting Default Rate Card and Company Color 628
Company-Specific Counters 629
Company-Specific Rooms and Shared Resources 630
Shared Rooms and Resources 630
Default Company Assigned by User Login 631
Personnel Manager Preferences and Permissions 632
Pay Categories 633
Pay Category Setup 633
Personnel Pay Category Setup – Overtime 634
Personnel Pay Category Setup – Differentials Page 1 636
Personnel Pay Category Setup – Other 641
Defining the Payment Method 644
Adding Warn If Cancelled Within (hours) 645
Assign Personnel to Pay Categories 646
Personnel Shift Rotations and Patterns 647
Overview 648
Adding or Modifying a Shift Rotation 648
Set the Day Properties 649
Deleting a Shift Rotation 651
Activity Templates 651

Sub-Activities 652
Adding the Overtime Mode Menu Option 653
External Cost Manager 654
Vendor Setup 654
Adding or Editing a Vendor 654
Deleting a Vendor 654
Vendor Properties – Main 655
Vendor Properties – Payment Information 656
Vendor Properties – Resources Provided 657
Vendor Properties – Aliases 658
Vendor Properties – Other 660
Managing Vendor Groups 661
External Cost Resource Setup 662
Adding an External Cost Resource 663
Configuring Vendor Costs 663
Cost Entry Setup 665
Organizing External Cost Resources 666
Shipping 668
Shipping Setup Tasks 668
Adding a Shipping Service 668
Adding Client Shipping Information 669
Adding a Shipping Address 670
Shipping Address Setup - Main 670
Shipping Address Setup - Other 672
Trouble Tickets 673
Setting Up the Trouble Ticket Room 673
Setting Up Trouble Ticket Access 673
Setting Up Trouble Ticket System Preferences 673
Setting Up Trouble Ticket Filters 673
Ch. 5 Using Developer’s Toolkit 675
Developers Toolkit Overview 676
Customizing a Browser Column 676
Displaying Column Commands 676
Column Properties 677
Column Size 679
Customizing a Dialog 680
Editing a Dialog 680
Right-Click Menu 681
Control Tools 682
Activating Control Tools 683
Picture Button Control 686
Static Control 687
Edit Controls 688
Checkbox Control 689
Time and Date Controls 690
Listbox and Combobox Controls 691
Horizontal and Vertical Line Controls 691
Browser Controls 692
Set Tab Order 692

Pick List Controls 693

Picture Control 694
Multimedia Controls 695
Linked PickList Button 695
Working with Controls 697
Aligning and Sizing Controls 699
Dialog Format Conventions 700
Controlling Height and Width 701
Pixel to Character Equivalents 701
Aligning, Sizing, and Positioning Controls 701
Using Group Boxes and Group Box Labels 703
Customizing a Toolbar 705
Creating or Editing a Toolbar 705
Toolbar Configuration 707
Button Layout 708
Button Widths 709
Button Text 710
Icon Selection 711
Customizing a Menu 712
Modifying a Menu 712
Defining Menu Item Properties 713
Inserting a New Command 713
Inserting a Popup Menu 714
Customize a Report 714
Standard Settings 715
Import or Export DTK Forms 716
Predefined Hotkey Combinations 716
Recommended Hotkeys 717
Ch. 6 Updating the ScheduALL Interface 718
Modifying Dialogs for Smart Work Orders 719
Adding the Toggle and Save/Change Properties Buttons 719
Adding Date and Duration Fields 720
Modifying Dialogs for Smart Time 721
Modifying Dialogs and Menus for Setup 722
Modifying Dialogs for Ignore Conflicts 722
Modifying Dialogs for Resource Category/Type Flags 722
Modifying Dialogs for Alternate Contact Catalog 723
Adding the Unidirectional Ethernet Checkbox 725
Adding Agency field to the Media Manager Main Dialog 725
Adding the Permission Required Option 725
Adding Pricing Points Setup 726
Modifying Work Order Dialogs 727
Displaying the Chorus Listener Log Tree 727
Adding Create Quote to the Work Order Form 727
Adding Release Successor Controls 727
Adding the Print Work Order Command 728
Adding Secondary Agency, Client, and Contact 729
Updating Browsers and Dialogs for Capabilities 731
Prize Resource and Load Balancing 731
Capabilities Assigned 731

Ch. 7 Updating the ScheduLINK Interface 734

Band Segment Information 735
Recommended Changes to Dialogs 736
Recommended Changes to Display Views 737
Client Form 738
Master Control Rooms 739
Required Changes to Menus 739
Required Changes to Dialogs 740
General Resource Setup 740
MCR Setup 741
ScheduLINK Work Order Forms 741
Recommended Changes to Ops Manager (WO) 741
Recommended Changes to Display Views 743
Circuit Selection and Network Graphical Map 744
Required Changes to Menus and Toolbars 744
Updating the Client Form for Circuit Selection 745
Updating Dialogs for VLAN Mode 746
Required Changes for Pre-defined Circuit with Path Protection 749
Pivot Services 750
Recommended Changes to Reports 751
Resource Setup 751
Modifying Dialogs for Is Ethernet 752
Modifying Dialogs for Port Affinity 753
Adding Settings for Variable Capacity 754
Adding Settings for Multi-Stream Services 756
Adding the Move Antenna Command 757
Adding Settings for File Size Conversion 757
Ch. 8 Labor Manager 758
Labor Manager Overview 759
Pay Translator 760
Pay Translator Overview 760
Pay Translator System Preferences 761
Setting Account Codes 761
Adding Compensation Factors 761
Assigning Overtime Type Labels 761
Defining Shift Days 762
Accessing Pay Scales 762
Assigning a Shift Style to a Personnel Resource 762
Creating Rule Sets 762
Adding Claimed Time Fields 762
Working Time Manager Overview 764
Working Time Manager Setup 764
Managing Rule Sets 765
Managing Time Rules 765
Adding a Time Rule 765
Changing or Removing Time Rules 768
Creating a Shift Day 768

Setting Override Hours 770

Associating an Activity to a Shift Day 770
Tracking Employee Working Days 771
Shift Work Period and Break Quantity 771
Rule Triggers 772
Rule Type A – Break Periods 772
Rule Parameters 772
Rule Type B – Rest Periods 772
Rule Parameters 773
Rule Type C – Workday Durations 773
Rule Parameters 774
Rule Type D – Work Day Limits 774
Rule Parameters 774
Rule Type E – Short Notice 774
Rule Parameters 775
Rule Type F – Wellness Check 775
Rule Parameters 775
Displaying Yearly and Monthly Shift Work Counters 776
Ch. 9 Circuit Selection 777
Overview 778
Circuit Selection Setup 778
Circuit Selection Resource Setup 779
Creating a Node Resource 782
Setting Path Priority 782
Creating a Line Resource 783
Disabling an Existing Line Resource 785
Creating an Encoder Resource 785
Creating a Decoder Resource 786
Creating a Combination Encoder/Decoder Resource 787
Creating or Modifying a Predefined Protected Circuit 788
Service Setup – Path Management 789
Predefined Circuit Setup 792
Creating a Predefined Circuit 792
Creating a Predefined Circuit with Path Protection 794
Deleting a Predefined Circuit 795
Circuit Group Setup 796
Viewing the Interop Message Log 797
Menu and Toolbar Options 797
File Menu Options 797
Work Order Menu Options 797
Sample Data 798
Worksheets 800
Node, Line, Encoder/Decoder 801
Ch. 10 Graphical Map Setup 804
Overview 805
Graphical Map Files Setup 806
Graphical Map Resource Setup 809
Desktop Setup 809
Ch. 11 Database Purge Guide 810
Overview 811

Qualifying Items 811

Work Orders 811
Activities 811
Projects 811
Invoices 812
Unassigned Credits and Unassigned Payments 812
Payables 812
Vendor Invoices 812
Purge Process 813
Test Purge 813
Normal Purge 814
Log File 816
Index 817

About This
Documentation
This chapter includes information about this document, including an outline of the document structure and
contents, a list of updates to the current version, and a list of other sources for product information.
In This Chapter:
Overview 22
Structure 22
Conventions 22
History 23
Additional Information 23
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide About This Documentation
Overview
This document describes the setup and administrative tasks and processes for the ScheduALL® and
ScheduLINK applications. It provides step-by-step instructions for these tasks.
All ScheduALL and ScheduLINK documentation assumes that readers are familiar with the basic
operation of a personal computer in the Microsoft® Windows® environment, including basic
Windows concepts and elements, and the use of a mouse with toolbars and menus.
This document is provided in Portable Document Format (PDF). The Adobe Acrobat® Reader®
allows a reader to view information online and search for specific information by keyword. Active
elements in the document allow readers to jump to different sections of the document and access
World Wide Web addresses. Acrobat Reader also allows a reader to print the entire document, or
specific pages or sections. Acrobat Reader is available for download from the Adobe Systems, Inc.
Web site at http://www.adobe.com.
The information contained in this document may not apply to specific installations. Feature and
module availability, menu and toolbar options, and dialog contents and field names vary depending on
the licensed capabilities, security and preference settings, and interface customizations. In most
cases, this document refers to the standard default dialogs, sample data set, and sample license file
provided with the ScheduALL and ScheduLINK evaluation versions.
For information on using the ScheduALL and ScheduLINK systems, such as starting the application,
features, general overviews, and Quick Tours, refer to the ScheduALL Users Guide and the
ScheduLINK Users Guide.
Structure
This document is composed of the following sections:
l Setup
l Program Administration
l ScheduLINK Setup
l Module Specific Setup
l Using Developer’s Toolkit
l Updating the ScheduALL Interface
l Updating the ScheduLINK Interface
l Labor Manager
l Circuit Selection
l Graphical Map Setup
l Index provides an alphabetic listing of the major topics in this document.
Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
Convention Description
Cross-references Active links to figures, tables, and other sections within this
document.
Commands Menu selections and button names.

ScheduLINK for Windows v5.32
Convention Description
Document Titles References to other documents.
Link Active links to Internet e-mail or Web site addresses.
Link Active links to other help topics.
“the Supervisor” For simplicity, instructions and descriptions in this document that
refer to “the supervisor” refer to any account that has supervisory
rights, or the appropriate security permissions to the applicable
area or feature. Refer to Supervisor Account for more
information.
[fieldname] On some dialogs, a field is displayed where the field label is not
displayed. Parentheses denote a field label that is not displayed.
footnote Footnotes are used to identify a field that is displayed or
discussed in the document but does not display on standard
(default) dialogs.
History
This document includes a significant number of revisions to structure, content, and style as
compared to the previous edition. This document includes the following revisions to structure and
content:
l Additional and/or renamed User and System Preferences and User Security Permissions in
the Program Administration chapter.
l The Working Time Manager chapter has been renamed to Labor Manager, and now includes
setup and other information for the Pay Translator module.
l Updated Shift Rule information and new dialog images.
Additional Information
Documents are available in PDF from the ScheduALL Web site at netinsight.net.
l ScheduALL Minimum System Requirements and Guidelines – contains information
about the minimum hardware, operating system, and database server requirements of the
ScheduALL for Windows software.
l ScheduALL Installation/Update Guide and Revision History – contains information about
installing the ScheduALL for Windows software and upgrading existing installations. This
document also lists changes to existing functionality and describes new modules and
features, and contains information about installing, registering, configuring, troubleshooting,
and removing ScheduALL services designed for the Microsoft .NET environment.
l ScheduALL Technical Reference Guide – contains information about configuring a SQL
Server or Oracle® database server to operate with the ScheduALL for Windows software, and
detailed information about the ScheduALL database schema and tables.
l ScheduALL Sample Reports Package – contains samples of standard ScheduALL reports.
l ScheduALL Up and Running – contains an outline of setup tasks with printable
worksheets.
l ScheduALL Users Guide – contains general information about the ScheduALL system,
setting up the application environment, and using the features of the ScheduALL application.

l ScheduLINK Users Guide– contains supplemental information to the ScheduALL Users

Guide, and describes the features, interfaces, and capabilities specific to the ScheduLINK
management solution for satellite and transmission operations.
l ScheduALL Chorus Setup and Configuration Guide – contains information about using
the ScheduALL Interop Service to send information to, and optionally receive information from,
a third-party Network Management System.
l The Help Menu allows access to system information.
l For information on selecting choices from lists, refer to Selecting List Items.
Help Menu
The ScheduALL and ScheduLINK applications offer an online help system in addition to printable
documentation. Use the Help menu to access other information about how to use the ScheduALL
system most efficiently.
l Click ScheduALL Contents to access the ScheduALL help system, which is designed to
provide descriptions and instructions for using the ScheduALL application.
l Click ScheduLink Contents to access the ScheduLINK help system, which is designed to
provide descriptions and instructions for using the ScheduLINK module.
l Click ScheduALL Manual to access the ScheduALL Users Guide in PDF. By default the
PDF file is not copied to the local system, but can be copied from the distribution CD or
downloaded from the ScheduALL Web site, and must be placed in the Help sub-folder of the
local installation (i.e. C:\SchedWin\Help).
l Click About to view information such as the application version number, important licensing
information, and the location of the ScheduALL database.
l Click Release Notes to open a text-only version of the Installation/Update Guide and
Revision History.
l Click ScheduALL Website to visit the ScheduALL World Wide Web site.
l Click Add Comment to Log to insert a comment into the application log file.
Selecting List Items

In many dialogs the ScheduALL interface presents choices in a list. For example, to remove
resources from a work order, you select an item in the Resource list and click Remove. In some lists,
it is possible to use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move a red outline to other items in a list after
making a selection. Here are some important things to keep in mind:
l To select an item in a list click that item with the mouse. Selected items are shown with a
shaded background.
l To highlight an item press the arrow keys on the keyboard to move a red outline to another
item. The item does not have a shaded background, and that item is not selected. In some
lists pressing the Enter key when an item is highlighted displays the properties of the item.
To take an action on an item in a list, that item must be selected, not highlighted. If an item is
selected, and then the highlight is moved to another item (the item is surrounded by a red rectangle)
and an action is taken, the action will be performed on the selected item, not the highlighted item.

In this example, the list of resources is displayed in a work order. The resource named
Betacam VTR1 is selected in the list. Note that this item has a shaded background. The user then
moved the highlight (using the down arrow key) to the resource named Dave Lee, which has a red
border. If the user then clicks Remove, the Betacam VTR1 resource is deleted from the work order,
not Dave Lee.
Figure 1. Selecting Items in List

Ch. 1 Setup
This chapter includes general information about the process of setting up the ScheduALL and ScheduLINK
systems to match a particular facility or business, and an outline of the setup process. It includes detailed
instructions for creating the standard items, and links to instructions in other chapters for creating items used by
optional modules.
In This Chapter
Overview 27
Advanced Planning 28
Planning Categories and Types 29
Initial Setup Sequence 31
Rates and Prices 33
Accounting Setup 54
Rooms and Resources 75
Service Setup 145
Producers, Account Executives, and Directors 163
Client, Contact, and Agency Setup 165
Miscellaneous Setup 194
ScheduALL WebApp Setup 224
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Ch. 1 Setup
Overview
This chapter describes the process of entering data about your facility and client base into the
ScheduALL system, and translating your business functions into the ScheduALL and ScheduLINK
frameworks.
During the setup process, gather all the necessary information about the facility, including equipment,
personnel, clients, and rates, and enter this basic information into the program. To begin the initial
setup, look at your existing operation and make the following decisions:
l Which rooms and equipment will be used, and what personnel will be working in the facility?
l How will the various resources be grouped and organized?
l What services will be offered, and the rates at which they are available?
l Display settings used to provide additional levels of detail on the calendar board
l Which satellites, uplinks, and communications personnel will be needed (Link only)
l Structure of subdivisions within a transmission path (Link only)
These are basic decisions that affect the viability of your business. During initial setup, make sure the
data is entered accurately, and that it reflects the nature of your business. In addition, System
Preferences allow authorized users to customize many of the application’s dialogs and screens to
change field labels to match the terminology of the business or facility.
Note: For simplicity, instructions and descriptions in this chapter that refer to “the supervisor” refer to
any account that has supervisory rights, or the appropriate security permissions to the
applicable area or feature.
Module Specific
Some setup items are specific to licensed modules in ScheduALL. Setup instructions for those
modules are contained in Module Specific Setup.
Setup Changes
Working facilities require constant changes to setup data, and the ScheduALL system allows
authorized users to make these changes quickly, whenever the need arises. In many cases, setup
features are available directly from the appropriate selection browsers. Examples of setup changes
include:
l Adding a new client.
l Changing a rate card or cancellation rate card.
l Adding services, or changing the definition of a standard service.
Test Early to Avoid Surprises

Prior to setting up the complete facility, it is a good idea to create some test work orders and process
them into invoices. This allows you to test the billing process and the initial approach to naming,
categorizing, typing, grouping or pricing various items. It is best to make these kinds of changes
early.
To test the initial setup:
1. Create basic rate cards.
2. Create resource entries for the resources typically scheduled into one of the rooms.
3. Create a room entry for the room.

4. Create two services and associate them with the room.

5. Create a few client listings.
6. Book some work orders, and then reconcile those work orders.
7. Print billing authorizations from the reconciled work orders.
8. Check the pricing to be sure the rate cards performed as intended.
Advanced Planning
To start booking work orders immediately, set up and name a few rooms and resources. However, to
get maximum benefit from the program’s capabilities, spend some time planning the full list of setup
items and the overall organization of each area. Advanced planning areas include the following:
Planning Rooms and Resources

A room is any work area used for scheduling, billing, or management, and a resource is any staff
member, piece of equipment, or quantity of tape stock.
You can invent unlimited types of rooms and resources to define items to be tracked, managed,
and/or invoiced. You may want to define some resources that aren’t vital to scheduling, but are useful
for tracking expenses. For example, create a “Conference Call” room to log telephone conversations
in order to track associated charges and client interaction.
Rooms and resources must be defined according to your specific business or management purposes.
They are not arbitrary; they are descriptions of the work you do. However, new resources can be
added at any time, so it is not necessary to create every possible resource before putting the
application to work.
Planning Resource Groups

Resource groups combine different categories and types of resources into a related group. This
additional method of grouping resources makes the task of booking work orders on the calendar board
more efficient.
For example, create a resource group named “All Personnel” that includes all personnel resources,
regardless of category or type. When you elect to view that resource group on screen, your personnel
are still broken down into categories and types, but they are accessible all at once.
Additional benefits of creating resource groups include:
l Resource groups allow the supervisor to limit user access, by basing the user's permissions
and rights on the resource group to which they belong. For example, it is possible to limit
personnel in the Production Group to only have access to the schedule for that resource group.
l Resource groups allow reports and schedules to filter information.

Planning Categories and Types

Within the ScheduALL framework, resource groups are divided into resource categories. Categories
are further divided into resource types.
l Categories collect similar types of resources into broad groupings. For example, a collection
of personnel might include categories such as editors, colorists, and engineers.
l Types divide resource categories into more specific groupings. For example, an editor
category may have staff editors and free lance editors.
The ScheduALL system provides the ability to set prices at the category, type or resource description
level. Pricing at the most detailed level takes precedence.
Planning Services
Doing work for a client generally requires a combination of resources, including equipment, personnel,
and possibly tape stock. The ScheduALL system allows the supervisor to group this combination
together into a service in order to speed up the process of booking work orders, and define standard
billing rates. It is not necessary to bundle every possible combination of resources into services.
Define the most common combinations, and add resources where necessary.
Client Rates and Rate Cards

The ScheduALL system allows the supervisor to define flexible rate structures, based on the level at
which a rate is assigned, the client’s rate card, and the time of day or volume of the booking.
Rate Priority
Prices and rates charged to clients can be indexed and manipulated in many ways. The ScheduALL
system offers the ability to build different rates into every category, type, resource item, and service
in the system.
Rates are applied in the following order, from highest to lowest priority:
l Client-specific Custom Rates
l Service (if resources are set to Standard)
l Resource (description)
l Type
l Category
For example, prices specified at the resource description override prices specified at the type or
category level. If no prices are defined at the description level, prices specified at the type level (if
any) override prices specified at the category level. This reduces administration by applying the most
common price to the largest number of resources, while providing specific prices for specific
resources.
Rate Cards
Guidelines for establishing rate cards:
l Set the “A Rate” structure to reflect published or standard rates. Use additional rate structures
to create pricing systems for favored accounts, promotions, or sister companies.
l Assign a rate card to each client when the client is defined. You can even set differing rates for
various contacts at the same client company.
l You can also override all of the scheduled rates. You can specify a new rate or apply a
discount to rates that display on the work order.

Day and Night Rates

The ScheduALL system allows a rate card to have both day and night rates. Day rates are the rates
entered for each resource and applied during normal daily working hours. Night rates are optional,
differential rates applied to resources used during night hours.
To implement optional night rates:
l Define the night period in System Preferences. Refer to General System Preferences.
l Establish the night rates for each resource.
l Select the clients that qualify for night rates.
l For each work order, accept or override night rates.

Initial Setup Sequence

The ScheduALL database has many layers. We suggest the following setup order for your facility.
From the File menu, click Setup to begin the setup process for each item.
Common Setup Areas

The following setup areas apply to both ScheduALL and ScheduLINK.
Table 1. Common Setup Areas
Area Setup
Currencies Set up the alternate currencies and their exchange rates. Refer
toAlternate Currencies and Exchange Rates.
Rate Cards Establish the basic rate card labels. Refer to Rate Cards.
Cancellation Rate Requires the Invoicing module. Establish pricing structures applied
Cards when a booked resource or work order is canceled. Refer to
Cancellation Rate Cards and Cancellation RatesCancellation Rate
Cards and Cancellation Rates.
Tax Structures Define tax levels applied to prices. Refer to Tax Structures.
Accounting Periods Define the time periods used for accounting and reporting purposes.
Refer to Accounting Period.
Companies Requires the Multi-Company Module. Define the companies between
which billing or resources are divided. Companies should be defined
before Rooms, in order to assign rooms to the appropriate company.
Refer to the Multi-Company chapter of the ScheduLINK User Guide.
Resources Define all equipment and personnel as resources, and divide the
resources into convenient categories and types. Define the available
rooms, and divide them into convenient types, such as on-line editing,
audio, or graphics. Refer to Rooms and Resources.
Services Define the available services, the resources used to provide them, the
pricing structures, and the rooms from which they will be available.
Refer to Service Setup.
Producers and Account Define the contact information for the producers and account
Executives executives. Refer to Producers, Account Executives, and Directors.
Vendors Requires the External Costs Manager. Define the external vendors who
will provide goods and services. Refer to Vendor Setup.
Clients, Contacts and Define the contact, billing, and custom pricing information for each client
Agencies in the client base. Refer to Client, Contact, and Agency Setup.
Client Groups Gather client records into functional groupings used to limit access and
generate reports. Refer to Client Groups.
Resource Groups Gather resources into functional groupings, similar to departments.
Design resource groups by scheduling convenience, profit center, or
billing classification. Refer to Resource Groups.

Table 1. Common Setup Areas (continued)

Area Setup
Holiday Calendar and Define the days on which goods and services are not available or trigger
Holiday Regions additional differentials, due to observed holidays. Refer to Holiday
Calendar and Region Setup.
Sub-Activities Set up sub-types for resource activities. Refer to Sub-Activities.
Pay Categories Requires the Personnel Manager. Set up the pay categories used to
generate costs and payroll information for personnel. Refer to Pay
Categories.
Personnel Shifts and Requires the Personnel Manager. Define the shifts and shift rotations
Shift Rotations for personnel, and assign personnel to the shifts and rotations. Refer to
Personnel Shift Rotations/Patterns.
Activity Templates Requires the Personnel Manager. Set up standard patterns of meals and
breaks for personnel activities. Refer to Activity Templates.
Library Structure Requires the Media Manager System. Set up the library categories,
media formats, locations, and freehand defaults. Refer to Media
Manager.
Bar Code Scanner Requires the Media Manager System or Rental Module. Set up the
preamble and postamble used to identify bar codes used to log Library or
Rental items into or out inventory. Refer to Barcode Scanner.
Shipping Addresses Requires the Shipping Module. Set up the people and addresses to
which parcels will be shipped. Refer to Shipping Related Setup in the
ScheduALL Users Guide.
Display Views Set ways to view information on the scheduling calendar and in visual
reports. Refer to Display Views in the ScheduALL Users Guide.
ScheduLINK Setup Areas

The following setup areas apply to ScheduLINK only.
Table 2. ScheduLINK Setup Areas
Area Setup
Band Plans Define the ways in which the capacity of resources can be allocated into
work orders. Refer to Band Plans and Resource Setup.
Satellite Resources Define the satellites satellite trucks fixed dishes transponders and
network hardware used to book transmissions. Refer to Rooms and
Resources.
Services Define the parameters specific to a path management service. Refer to
Services.
Vendors Define the outside seller or service provider from whom resources or
services are acquired for some interval.
Display Views Configure the scheduling screen display settings for satellite and
transmission resources and bookings. Refer to Display View Setup.
Operations Manager Modify the Operations Manager interface to suit the needs of the
Operations Center. Refer to Operations Manager Setup.

Rates and Prices

Rate Cards
Rate Cards allow the administrator to define standard pricing levels for each billable resource and
service. The necessary number of rate cards is determined by the number of different pricing levels in
the company. Resource definitions determine the actual monetary price for a service, room, or
resource, as described in Set Price Rates. Refer to Adding a Rate Card and Managing Rate
Cards,
The system calculates the price of an item by taking the Rate Card associated with a booking, and
applying the prices defined for that Rate Card for each item. Rate cards can be associated to a
booking as either a default or an override in one of the following ways:
l Each Agency, Client, and Contact entry in the system can be assigned a default Rate Card,
as described in Default Rate Card.
l The user can select the Rate Card when creating or modifying a work order, as described in
the Rate Card field in the Work Order, Other Tab Settings table in the Work Orders chapter of
the ScheduALL Users Guide.
l The user can select the Rate Card when creating or modifying a Project or Production, as
described in the Rate Card field in the Project Properties, Billing Tab Settings table in the
Project Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide.
l The user can select the Rate Card when creating or modifying a Quote, as described in the
Rate Card field in the Quote Dialog, Main Tab Settings table in the Quotes Manager chapter of
the ScheduALL Users Guide.
For example:
Rate A = standard prices with no discounts
Rate B = discounted prices for long-term clients
Rate C = heavily discounted prices for short-term promotional deals
Figure 2. Rate Cards

Adding a Rate Card

To add a rate card:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Rate Cards. The Rate Maintenance dialog
displays.
Figure 3. Rate Maintenance Dialog

2. To define a new rate card, click New. The Rate Card Setup dialog displays.
Figure 4. Rate Card Setup Dialog

3. Enter the Rate Card Description.
4. Select (check) Set as Default Rate Card to use this rate card as the default rate card for the
entire system. Only one rate card can be selected as the system default at any given time.
The System Preference Assign Default Rate Card to new Work Order determines whether
the default rate card is applied automatically.
5. Select (check) Public (Show in Connector) to display the rate card to a facility that
subscribes to a resource that includes this rate card.
6. Select an Alternate Currency to use a currency other than the base currency for this rate
card.
7. Click OK to save the rate card and return to the Rate Maintenance dialog.
Managing Rate Cards
To change, delete, or copy a rate card:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Rate Cards. The Rate Maintenance dialog
displays.
2. Select the rate card in the Rate Cards dialog and do one of the following:
l To change a rate card click Edit. The Rate Card Setup dialog displays. Make your changes
and click OK.
l To delete a rate card, click Delete.
l To make a copy of a rate card, click Copy. The Rate Card Setup dialog displays. Enter a
new description and make any other changes. Click OK.

Billing Rates and Price Maintenance

The ScheduALL system offers significant pricing flexibility. Define pricing after configuring rate cards.
Set price rates for an entire category of resources, for a certain type of resource, for individual
resources, or for resources bundled together as services.
You can also set day rate and night rate prices, build in progressive pricing, and offer bulk rate pricing.
The ScheduALL system also allows you to offer one price based on hourly bookings, and another
price for a booking that lasts a full day.
The ScheduALL system uses the most detailed price available. For example, if prices for all VTRs
have the same price rate, set type level pricing. If a specific VTR requires a different price, set
resource level pricing for only that VTR. When the specific VTR is booked, the system applies the
resource-level price; if any other VTR is booked, the system applies the type-level price.
Set Price Rates
The Price Maintenance dialog defines the billing rates that are applied to different items. Use one of
the following methods to access the Price Maintenance Organizer dialog:
l On the Category Maintenance dialog, click Category Level Billing Rates to define prices for
a resource category.
l On the Type Maintenance dialog, click Type Level Billing Rates to define prices for a
resource type.
l On the Main tab of a resource Properties dialog (General Resource, Equipment, Personnel
Properties, and Stock), click Billing Rates to define prices for an individual resource.
l On the Service Properties dialog, click Billing Rates to define prices for a service.

Price Maintenance Organizer

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Price Maintenance. The Price Maintenance
organizer dialog displays a tree structure of associated resource categories, resource types,
and resource entries.
Figure 5. Price Maintenance Dialog
2. Click the Expand icon ( ) to the left of Services to display the list of services.
3. Click the Expand icon ( ) to the left of a resource category to expand the tree branch and
display the resource types associated with that category.
4. Click the Expand icon ( ) to the left of a resource type to expand the tree branch and display
the resources associated with that category.
5. Select a service entry, resource category, resource type, or resource entry and click Edit to
modify the pricing information for the appropriate level. The Price Maintenance dialog displays.

Price Maintenance
The Price Maintenance dialog is used to set billing rates for a service, resource category, resource
type, or individual resource. This dialog is also used to set client resource pricing from the Client
Properties dialog – Custom Pricing tab. Refer to Client Properties – Custom Pricing.
To display this dialog, from the File menu, select Setup and click Price Maintenance.
Figure 6. Price Maintenance Dialog

Refer to Pricing Methods to determine whether pricing based on the time of day, booked volume, or
a combination of both.
Pricing Methods
The pricing methods determine whether the system determines pricing based on the time of day,
booked volume, or a combination of both.
To set the pricing methods for an item:
1. Select the Time Method.
l Select Day/Night to define one rate for daytime hours, and a second rate for night or non-
business hours. The system enforces night rates for a specific period of time defined for the
entire system in System Preferences. Refer to General System Preferences.
l Select Time of Day to set two or more rates that take effect during specified hours. The
system enforces Time of Day rates during the specified hours on a per-resource basis,
allowing each resource to have different Time of Day periods.

2. Select the Quantity Price Method of this price rate. Quantity pricing determines the price
based on the number of items ordered, and is generally used to establish volume discount
pricing for larger orders. For example, configure the price of each VHS tape to $10 per unit for 1
to 10 units, and $8 per unit for 11 to 20 units.
l Select Do not use to disable quantity pricing. All items are billed at the same rate
regardless of the volume.
l Select Absolute to apply the price of the highest applicable quantity category to all items.
In the example above, if the client uses 15 items (which is within the Quantity range 11-20),
the Unit Price of $8 is used to price all items. When using Absolute pricing, the user
preference to reevaluate the price when a quantity is changed must be set to Yes. If it is not,
the system displays an information dialog and asks if you want to enable this feature. Click
Yes. Refer to Re-Evaluate Extended Price upon Quantity Change.
l Select Progressive to apply each applicable level of quantity pricing to the appropriate
number of items. In the example above, the client would pay $10 for the first ten items, and
$8 for the next ten.
Figure 7. Price Maintenance, Quantity Pricing Method

Note: Absolute and Progressive methods affect all rate cards for the resource, and require at
least one absolute or progressive pricing rate for each rate card.
Note: If one rate uses Time of Day and Progressive pricing, and another rate uses only Time
of Day (no Progressive) pricing, you must still set up a progressive rate for each time
range in the second rate. Enter the same price for each time range.
3. Select the Default Unit of Measure for all rates assigned to this item. This setting is used to
populate the Unit Of Measure column of individual rate entries.
4. Select (check) Extend Decimal Precision to extend the precision of the price field to five
places to the right of the decimal point. (The default precision is two places to the right of the
decimal point.)
5. Select a rate card, and click Add to create a new billing rate. Refer to Price Rate Setup.
6. Select an existing rate and click Delete to remove an existing billing rate.
7. Click OK to save all changes.

A comparison between Absolute and Progressive pricing methods is shown here.

Table 3. Pricing Method Comparison
Quantity Unit Price Used Absolute Price Progressive Price

1-10 $10 5 $50 $50
(5 x $10) (5 x $10)
10 $100 $100
(10 x $10) (10 x $10)
11-20 $8 15 $120 $140
(15 x $8) ((10 x $10.00 = $100) +
(5 x $8.00 = $40))
20 $160 $180
(20 x $8) ((10 x $10.00 = $100) +
(10 x $8.00 = $80))
Price Rate Setup

This topic describes the available settings for price rate entries.
Table 4. Rate Settings
Column Description
Description The description column displays a tree structure. The first level of the
tree structure displays the rate card names for all rate cards in the
system. The second level of the tree structure displays individual price
rates assigned to a rate card.
When defining prices at the type level, the Description column shows
the name of any prices defined at the Category level.
When defining prices at the resource level, the Description column
shows the name of any prices defined at the Category or
Category/Type level.
When defining prices at the service level, the dialog displays only
pricing specified at the service level.
Unit Of Measure Specifies the standard of measurement used to evaluate the numeric
Quantity.
Note: The Unit Of Measure specified for a rate overrides the Default
Unit of Measure set in System Preferences.
Quantity The minimum number of units for which the Unit Price will apply.
This column displays only when Quantity Price Method is set to
Absolute or Progressive.

Table 4. Rate Settings(continued)
Column Description
Unit Price/Markup % The amount that the client will be charged per unit for the specified
Quantity.
l If Markup Price? is set to No, enter a fixed currency amount.
l If Markup Price? is set to Yes, enter the percentage by which the
item will be marked up. For example, enter “20” to set the price to
be 120% of the cost.
Night Unit Price The amount that the client will be charged per unit for the specified
Quantity during the hours when Night Rates are in effect.
This column displays only when Time Method is set to Day/Night.
Markup Price? Determines if a rate is specified as a fixed price or as a markup to the
specified cost.
l Select No to set the price per unit in the Unit Price/Markup %
field as a fixed numeric value.
l Select Yes to set the price per unit in the Unit Price/Markup %
field as a markup percentage of the item’s cost. If the cost
markup pricing method is used, night rates cannot be configured
for this price rate.
Zero Price Determines if the price of a specific rate entry is set to no charge. This
allows the system to charge regular prices under certain conditions,
and not charge under other conditions.
l Select Yes and enter “0” in Unit Price/Markup % to verify that
the price is “0” for this rate.
l Select No if the Unit Price/Markup % field is any value other
than “0”. (Default.)
Effective Date Calendar date on which the rate takes effect. If the current rate follows
a rate that has an Expiration Date specified, the Effective Date must
be the same as the previous Expiration Date.
l Enter a date, or select the field and click the Calendar icon to
specify a date.
l Right-click the field and click Clear to remove the date.

Table 4. Rate Settings(continued)
Column Description
Expiration Date Calendar date on which the rate no longer applies. If the current rate
precedes a rate that has an Effective Date specified, the Expiration
Date must be the same as the following Effective Date.
specify a date.
Start Time at which the rate takes effect. The Start and End times of one
rate cannot overlap the Start and End times of different rate on the
same day.
This column displays only when Time Method is set to Time of Day.
l Enter a time, or use the up/down arrows to specify a time.
l Right-click the field and click Clear to remove the Start time.
End Time after which the rate no longer applies.
M, T, W ... S Days of the week on which the rate takes effect.
Premium Determines if this price entry is used to charge an initial amount based
on the time period in which the work order begins. Only the first
applicable Premium rate is applied to a work order if the work order
spans more than one Time of Day definition.
The Start and End times of a premium rate may overlap the Start and
End times of a non-premium rate on the same day.
The Start and End times for two premium rates cannot overlap on the
same day, and the Start and End times for two non-premium rates
cannot overlap on the same day.
For example, specify normal rates from 6 a.m. to 9 p.m., specify a
$150 premium rate from 6 a.m. to 8 a.m., and specify a $100 premium
rate from 8 a.m. to 9 a.m. A work order from 7 a.m. to 3 p.m. is
charged the $150 premium, plus normal rates. A work order from
8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. is charged the $100 premium, plus normal
rates.
This column displays only when Time Method is set to Time of Day
and Quantity Price Method is set to Progressive.
Pricing Method Examples

The following scenarios describe five examples of pricing methods:
Case 1: Day/Night with No Quantity Pricing
1. Set Time Method to Day/Night.
2. Set Quantity Price Method to Do not use.
3. Set the Default Unit of Measure.

4. Select a rate card in the rates browser, and click Add to create a new row.
5. Set Markup Price? to No and enter a currency value in Unit Price/Markup %, OR
Set Markup Price? to Yes and enter a percentage value in Unit Price/Markup %.
6. Enter the Night Unit Price, if applicable.
7. Enter the Effective Date and Expiration Date to offer the pricing for a limited time span.
8. Select (check) all the days of the week (M, T, W ... S) on which the rate will apply. For
example, to set different weekday and weekend rates, create one rate and select only week
days, then create a second rate and select only weekend days.
9. Repeat as necessary, changing the days of the week and Unit Price/Markup % to cover all
days of operation.
Case 2: Day/Night with Absolute Pricing
1. Set the Time Method to Day/Night.
2. Set the Quantity Price Method to Absolute.
5. Enter the initial Quantity for the first rate to be in effect. For example, enter 1 to apply the rate
to quantities of 1 or more. (For simplicity, enter the lowest quantities first.)
6. Set Markup Price? and enter a value in Unit Price/Markup %.
9. Select (check) all the days of the week (M, T, W ... S) on which the rate will apply.
11. Enter the initial Quantity for the second rate to be in effect. This also ends the range for which
a previous rate applies. For example, enter 10 to apply the rate to quantities of more than 10.
12. Repeat as necessary, changing the Quantity and Unit Price/Markup % to cover all levels of
quantity pricing.
Case 3: Day/Night with Progressive Pricing
1. Set the Time Method to Day/Night.
2. Set the Quantity Price Method to Progressive.
5. Enter the Quantity for the first rate to be in effect. For example, enter 1 to apply the rate to
quantities of 1 or more.
10. Click Add. An additional row displays below the first row.
11. Enter the initial Quantity for the second rate to be in effect. This also ends the range for which
a previous rate applies. For example, enter 10 to apply the rate to quantities of more than 10.
12. Repeat as necessary, changing the Quantity and Unit Price/Markup % to cover all levels of
quantity pricing.
Case 4: Time of Day with No Quantity Pricing
1. Set Time Method to Time of Day.

2. Set Quantity Price Method to Do not use.

7. Set the Start and End times for the time period during which the first rate is in effect.
9. Repeat as necessary, changing the Start and End times and Unit Price/Markup % to cover
the full range of operating hours.
Case 5: Time of Day with Progressive Pricing
1. Set Time Method to Time of Day.
2. Set the Quantity Price Method to Progressive.
5. Enter the initial Quantity for the first rate to be in effect. For example, enter 1 to apply the rate
to all quantities of 1 or more.
8. Set the Start and End times for the time period during which the first rate is in effect.
10. Select (check) Premium to identify this rate as a one-time premium for the specific time slot.
11. Click Add. An additional row displays below the first row.
12. Enter the next Quantity for the second rate to be in effect. For example, enter 10 to apply the
rate to all quantities of more than 10. If less than 10 items are booked, the previous rate is
applied.
13. Repeat as necessary, changing the Start and End times to cover the full range of operating
hours, changing the Quantity and Unit Price/Markup % to cover all levels of quantity pricing,
and applying the Premium flag as necessary to identify premiums.
Pricing Points Setup
Pricing for a given booking inside a work order includes the option of assigning up to four additional
properties known as Price Points. These price points are used in conjunction with the existing criteria
of Resource, Rate Card, Quantity, and Unit of Measure to determine the appropriate per-unit price of
a given booking.
For example, when booking a transcoding service, the facility can now use a single service, rate card,
quantity, and unit of measure, but differentiate between multiple Bit Rates, or between multiple Bit
Rates and multiple Formats.
The following points must be considered to configure a Price Point:
l In System Preferences, use the General Label tab to define the label for each Price Point. This
allows each facility to determine their own price point terminology; however, the same four
price point labels apply to the entire system. Refer to Displaying Pricing Points.
l Use the Pricing Points Setup area to define the available price point items. Refer to Managing
Pricing Points.

l Use the Price Maintenance dialog to enable price points and define pricing for the appropriate
resource, service, resource category, or resource type. Facilities that do not wish to use price
points do not need to perform any additional configuration or maintenance to their existing
settings, and facilities that wish to use price points only for certain resources, or collections of
resources, can do so without affecting the normal pricing method of other resources.
l Use the Price Maintenance dialog to enable price points and define custom client pricing for
the appropriate resource, service, resource category, or resource type.
Managing Pricing Points

To add a pricing point:
1. From the File menu, select Setup, and then select Pricing Points Setup. The Price Point
Setup dialog displays.
Figure 8. Price Point Setup Dialog

2. Click a Price Point. The Pricing Point dialog displays.
Figure 9. Pricing Point Setup Dialog

3. Click New. The General Pick List Entry dialog displays.
Figure 10. General Pick List Entry (Pricing Point) Dialog

4. Enter the Description to identify the pricing point.
5. Click OK to save the pricing point and return to the Pricing Point dialog.
To change, delete, or copy a pricing point:

1. From the File menu, select Setup, and then select Pricing Points Setup. The Price Point
Setup dialog displays as shown in Price Point Setup Dialog.
2. Click a Price Point. The Pricing Point dialog displays as shown in Pricing Point Setup
Dialog.
3. Select a pricing point and do one of the following:
l To change a pricing point description click Edit. The General Pick List Entry dialog, shown
in General Pick List Entry (Pricing Point) Dialog, displays. Change the description and
click OK.
l To delete a pricing point, click Delete.
l To copy an item, select it and click Copy. The General Pick List Entry dialog, shown in
General Pick List Entry (Pricing Point) Dialog, displays. Enter a new description and
click OK to save the new entry.
Displaying Pricing Points

To display pricing points in the work order dialog an administrator or user with administrative rights
needs to add columns for each of the applicable Pricing Point fields (“Pricing Point 1”, “Pricing Point
2”, etc.). The added columns must be made editable (using the Editable checkbox on the Advanced
tab). The column title displays the General Label assigned to the pricing point.
To display pricing points on the work order dialog:

1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, Developer's Toolkit, and then select
Dialog Editor.
2. Edit the desired Work Order Form.
3. Click the Pricing tab.
4. Right-click a browser column and click Append a New Column.

5. Configure the column properties as shown below.
Figure 11. Pricing Point Column Properties

6. Click the Advanced tab.
7. Select Editable.
Figure 12. Pricing Point Column Properties, Editable

8. Repeat for additional fields.
9. Click OK.
To change pricing point labels:

1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, System Preferences, and then select
General.
2. Click the General tab.

3. Locate the Pricing Point Labels section and change the Description for each pricing point.
Figure 13. Pricing Point Labels

4. Click OK.
Cancellation Rate Cards and Cancellation Rates

Cancellation rate cards and their associated cancellation rates allow the administrator to specify the
amount that the client is charged when work is canceled prior to completion. The system applies
those charges based on the defined cancellation rates, the status of the work order at the time of
cancellation, and how many days or hours remain until the start time of the event being canceled.
Cancellation rate cards reduce the amount of administration necessary to change the standard
cancellation charges for existing items or when adding new resources, services, and clients.
For example, an administrator might configure the system so that the following cancellation charges
apply when a Confirmed booking is canceled:
l between 3 and 7 days from the start time, the client pays 50% of the original price.
l between 1 and 3 days from the start time, the client pays 75% of the original price.
l within one day (24 hours) of the start time, the client pays 100% of the original price.
Figure 14. Cancellation Rates

The Cancellation Rate Card Description is a label used to identify which set of rates is used to
determine the amount billed, allowing the administrator to define multiple cancellation rates for the
same item. For example, a rate card named Cxl Rate A is shown here.

Figure 15. Cancellation Rate Card Setup

Cancellation rates allow the administrator to define cancellation ranges and percentages within each
rate card. Figure 16 shows an example of defining new cancellation rates in the cancellation rate
card named Cxl Rate B for the resource Mary White. When the Cxl Rate B rate card is assigned to a
work order and Mary White is booked in the work order her cancellation rate will be determined by the
highlighted row.
Figure 16. Resource Cancellation Rates

The system selects the appropriate rate card to use based on a hierarchy:
l The System-level Cancellation Rate Card is selected by default.
l The Client Default Cancellation Rate Card is used if one is assigned to the client record. This
selection overrides the system-level Cancellation Rate Card.
l The Work Order Cancellation Rate Card is used if one is assigned to the work order. This
selection overrides the System-level and the Client Default Cancellation Rate Cards, but does
not override individual custom client cancellation rates.
In addition to the standard cancellation structures, administrators can assign custom cancellation
rates to a specific client for individual items. These custom client rates override standard cancellation
rate cards for the appropriate individual items only. Refer to Client Properties – Custom Cxl.
Note: Standard cancellation rates do not apply to Stock resources.
Refer to Managing Cancellation Rate Cards and Managing Cancellation Rates.

Managing Cancellation Rate Cards

This section describes the procedures to add, edit, delete, or copy cancellation rate cards.
To create a cancellation rate card:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Cancellation Rate Cards. The Cancellation Rate
Maintenance dialog displays.
Figure 17. Cancellation Rate Maintenance Dialog

2. Click New. The Cancellation Rate Card Setup dialog displays.
Figure 18. Cancellation Rate Card Setup Dialog

3. Enter the Cancellation Rate Card Description.
4. Select (check) Set as System Level Cancellation Rate Card (optional) to make this rate
card the system-wide default. The system-wide default rate card is applied when neither the
client assigned to a work order, nor the work order itself, have an associated cancellation rate
card.
5. If the cancellation rate card you are adding is the system-level card, click Define System-
Level Cancellation Rate Card to define the system-wide default cancellation rates. Refer to
Managing Cancellation Rates.
To change, delete, or copy a cancellation rate card:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Cancellation Rate Cards. The Cancellation Rate

2. Select the cancellation rate card and do one of the following:

l To change a cancellation rate card, select it in the Cancellation Rate Maintenance dialog
and click Edit. The Cancellation Rate Card Setup dialog shown in Figure 18 displays.
Make your changes and click OK.
l To delete a cancellation rate card, select it in the Cancellation Rate Maintenance dialog and
click Delete.
l To make a copy of a cancellation rate card, select it in the Cancellation Rate Maintenance
dialog and click Copy. The Cancellation Rate Card Setup dialog shown in Figure 18
displays. Enter a new description and make any other changes. Click OK.
Managing Cancellation Rates

The system allows the administrator to define cancellation rates at multiple levels of operation. The
system uses the most specific set of cancellation rates available, which allows the administrator to
configure generic rates that apply to the majority of the resource and client base, and set custom
rates for specific resources, services, or clients as needed. Cancellation rates can be defined at the
following levels, from most specific (and highest priority) to least specific (and lowest priority):
l Custom Client Rates
l Service-level Rates
l Resource-level Rates
l Resource Type-level Rates
l Resource Category-level Rates
l System-level Rates
Administrators must configure all applicable rates at a particular level. If the system finds a
cancellation rate at a particular level, it only uses the rates defined at that level, whether or not the
cancellation is within the specified date range. For example, if the administrator specifies a single
resource-level rate for 0 to 30 days, and a booking which contains that resource is canceled at 31
days, the system does not check for rates at the Type, Category, or System level for that resource.
Cancellation percentages are calculated using the actual price a client would have paid the price
listed in the work order after all discounts, markups, custom client prices, and extended pricing
changes have been made.
The Cancellation Rate Card Setup dialog is used to define cancellation rates. The dialog is accessed
in different ways depending on which type of cancellation rates are being defined.
l To define system cancellation rates, refer to Managing Cancellation Rate Cards.
l To define client custom cancellation rates, refer to Client Properties – Custom Cxl.
l To define resource or service cancellation rates, refer to the information in this section.
Adding a Cancellation Rate
To add a cancellation rate to a rate card:
1. From the File menu, select Setup, and then select Cancellation Maintenance.
2. Select the category, category/type, resource, or service to which you want to add a
cancellation rate. Click Edit. Refer to Selecting Resources and Services.
3. Select a cancellation rate card. In this example, Cxl Rate B is selected.
4. Click Add. The new cancellation rate displays below the cancellation rate card. Select the
appropriate values as described in Defining Cancellation Rates.
5. Click OK when you are finished adding rates.

Selecting Resources and Services

The Cancellation Maintenance Organizer allows the user to select a category, category/type,
resource, or service entry to define cancellation rates for that entry.
Figure 19. Cancellation Maintenance

To access cancellation rates, complete the following steps.
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Cancellation Maintenance. The Cancellation
Maintenance dialog displays a tree structure of services, resource categories, resource types,
and resource entries.
l Click the Expand icon ( ) to the left of Services to display the list of services.
l Click the Expand icon ( ) to the left of a resource category to expand the tree branch and
display the resource types associated with that category.
l Click the Expand icon ( ) to the left of a resource type to expand the tree branch and
display the resources associated with that type. In the example shown the Editors category
and Freelance type are expanded, displaying the freelance editors.
2. Select a service entry, resource category, resource type, or resource entry and click Edit to
modify the cancellation information for that entry. The Cancellation Rate Card Maintenance
dialog displays.
Defining Cancellation Rates
The Cancellation Rate Card Setup dialog allows the administrator to define cancellation ranges and
percentages. The system applies a rate entry when the duration between the date and time of the
cancellation process and the start of the booking is less than the Quantity field and associated Unit
of Measure, and greater than or equal to the Qty field and associated . The percentage is
determined by the status of the work order at time of cancellation, and the percentage defined in the
corresponding status field for that rate entry.

Figure 20. Cancellation Rate Card Setup

Table 5. Cancellation Rate Card Setup Items
Item Description
Trigger Method Determines the method of calculating the duration
between the cancellation and the booking:
l Start Time triggers cancellation charges based on the
number of hours between the cancellation date/time
stamp and the start date/time of the work order or item
booking.
l Start Date triggers cancellation charges based on the
number of days between the cancellation date stamp
to the calendar date of the work order or item booking.
Description Displays the cancellation rate card name, a tree structure
of cancellation rates, and the rule to start of the
cancellation range. Rates are calculated and displayed
from highest quantity to lowest quantity. (Close and re-
open the dialog to re-sort the list.)
Unit of Measure Determines the standard of measurement (Day or Hour)
used to determine the start of the cancellation range. If the
Trigger Method is Start Time, each Day equals 24 hours in
calculations.
Quantity Enter the quantity for the start of the cancellation range.
This quantity is evaluated based on the specified Unit of
Measure.
Rule Displays the rule applied to the end of the cancellation
range for reference purposes.

Table 5. Cancellation Rate Card Setup Items (continued)

Item Description
UOM Displays the standard of measurement used to determine
the end of the cancellation range. This field is display only;
the system automatically determines the end of the
cancellation range based on the next-lowest rate entry.
Qty Displays the quantity for the end of the cancellation rate
range. This quantity is evaluated based on the UOM. This
field is display only; the system automatically determines
the end of the cancellation range based on the next-lowest
rate entry.
Status A through Enter the percentage of the extended price to charge for
Status F each appropriate status. Charges are calculated using
price listed in the work order after all discounts, markups,
custom prices, and extended pricing changes have been
made.
Add Creates a new cancellation rate entry under the selected
cancellation rate card.
Delete Permanently removes the selected rate from the
cancellation rate card.
Deleting a Cancellation Rate

To delete a cancellation rate:
1. Select the category, category/type, resource, or service from which you want to remove a
cancellation rate. Click Edit. Refer to Selecting Resources and Services.
2. Select a cancellation rate.
3. Click Delete. The rate is removed. The system does not request confirmation to verify this
action.

Accounting Setup
Configuring the Accounting Module
Prior to using this module for the first time, it is necessary to configure certain parameters in order to
be compatible with an external accounting system. Refer to the following information to configure
accounting options.
User Permissions and Security

Permissions determine the extent to which a user has access to certain areas and features in the
External Costs module. Refer to User Profiles and Security for general information. Refer to
Invoicing for permissions which apply specifically to the Billing and Receivables module.
GL Account Numbers for Resources

The ScheduALL system uses a ledger hierarchy for the greatest flexibility in tracking revenue:
l The system posts the revenue to that GL account number to the GL account number
associated with the Resource, or associated with the Category or Type Override.
l The system posts the revenue to the Parent Service if the Resource level is blank.
l The system posts the revenue to the GL account number associated with the ScheduALL
Room if the Resource level is blank and the Resource has no Parent Service.
l The system generates a warning if a Work Order is reconciled without any GL account.
Default Account Names

Set up the names of default ledger accounts. This is a Supervisor function.
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, click System Preferences, and then click
General. The System Preferences dialog displays.
2. Click the General tab to bring that page forward, and locate the Ledger Setup category.
3. Change the names of ledger items to fit the descriptions in the external accounting system.
Figure 21. System Preferences Dialog, General Tab

Default Tax Structure Ledger Names

Tax structure ledger names are maintained using the Setup selection from the File menu, and then
selecting Tax Structures. To set up the ledgers for your tax structure, refer to Adding a Tax
Structure.
Accounting Period Setup

Set up the accounting periods in the ScheduALL system to match the periods set up in your
accounting program. Normally, accounting periods are set up monthly. At the end of the month you
close out the period. Refer to Accounting Period for more information.
Rate Cards, Pricing, and Cost Setup

The normal setup process establishes rate cards and pricing for each resource, type, category and
description, which determine what prices are applied to each billing. Refer to Rate Cards and
Service Setup for more information.
The normal setup process also establishes costs for each resource, type, and category, to track
internal costs. Refer to Rooms and Resources for more information.
Tax Structures
The ScheduALL system offers the ability to define tax structures, which can be used to:
l Specify one default tax setting for the entire system
l Specify a default tax setting for each client record
l Specify the tax setting applied to a work order
Tax rates are calculated automatically and added to the totals on the work order. Refer to Adding a
Tax Structure and Managing Tax Structures.
Adding a Tax Structure
To create tax structures:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Tax Structures. The Tax Structures Maintenance
dialog displays.
Figure 22. Tax Structure Maintenance Dialog

2. Click New to define a tax structure. The Tax Structure Setup dialog displays.
Figure 23. Tax Structure Setup, Main Tab

3. Enter the Description to identify the tax structure.
4. Enter the Tax 1 % from 0.001 to 99.999 to identify the percentage amount of the first tax level,
such as federal sales tax.
5. Enter the Optional Tax 2 % from 0.001 to 99.999 to identify the percentage amount of the
second tax level, such as state or local sales tax.
6. Enter the Optional Tax 3 % from 0.001 to 99.999 to identify the percentage amount of the
third tax level, such as state or local sales tax.
7. Select (check) Compound 2nd Tax to apply Tax 2 % to the sum of the original cost and
Tax 1 %. Deselect (clear) Compound 2nd Tax to apply Tax 2 % only to the original cost.
8. Select (check) Set as Default Tax Structure to apply this tax structure to all clients by
default.
9. Click the Ledger tab to bring that page forward and enter the Ledger names for the chart of
accounts for the taxes applicable to your business. These fields contain descriptions for the
tax transactions involving this tax structure, and are used for reporting purposes only. If these
descriptions are left blank, reports display the default ledger descriptions specified in System
Preferences. Refer to Ledger Setup.
Figure 24. Tax Structure Setup, Ledger Tab

10. Enter the Sales (Tax 1), Sales (Tax 2),and Sales (Tax 3) text descriptions to identify tax
transactions for invoiced sales.
11. Enter the Payments (Tax 1), Payments (Tax 2), and Payments (Tax 3) text descriptions to
identify payments made against tax balances.

12. Enter the Credits (Tax 1), Credits (Tax 2), and Credits (Tax 3) text descriptions to identify
credits applied against tax balances.
Managing Tax Structures
To change, delete, or copy a tax structure:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Tax Structures. The Tax Structures Maintenance
dialog displays.
2. Select the tax structure from the Tax Structures Maintenance dialog and do one of the
following:
l To change a rate card click Edit. The Tax Structure Setup dialog displays. Make your
changes and click OK.
l To delete a tax structure, click Delete. (The system does not request confirmation to verify
this action.) Deleting a tax structure permanently removes the tax structure from the
database, and from any work orders that were assigned the tax structure.
l To make a copy of a tax structure, click Copy. The Tax Structure Setup dialog displays.
Enter a new description and make any other changes. Click OK.
Accounting Period
An accounting period is a fixed length of time used for accounting and reporting purposes. Each
period has a specific start and end date. Typically, accounting periods are monthly. Accounting
periods must be contiguous.
Figure 25. Accounting Periods Setup

Adding an Accounting Period

To add a new accounting period:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Accounting Periods. The Periods Setup dialog
displays.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the list. Click Add to create a new entry. The system creates a new
one-month period at the end of the list based on the ending date of the previous period.
3. To change the month, date, or year, click the part of the date to be changed and use the
directional arrows on the keyboard to increase or decrease the date, OR
Click the calendar button at the right edge of the entry to open the calendar dialog and choose
a date. Click OK on the calendar dialog when done.
4. Click OK to save changes, or click Cancel to exit without saving any changes.
Deleting an Accounting Period
To permanently remove an accounting period, select it and click Delete.
Note: The system does not request confirmation to verify this action.
Alternate Currencies and Exchange Rates

The ScheduALL system provides the ability to calculate pricing and generate invoices in a currency
other than the default or “base” currency used at the system-wide level as described in Base
Currency. The base currency is always referred to as “<base>” in the system.
To bill clients in currencies other than the base, set up alternate currencies and their rates of
exchange (to the base currency). Rate Card and Client entries provide default currency settings, and
the Extended Work Order screen allows the user to apply an override currency at the work order level.
Refer to Extended Work Order – Pricing in the ScheduALL Users Guide for more information.
For more information, refer to Managing Alternate Currencies and Currency Exchange Rate
Setup.
Managing Alternate Currencies
To set up alternate currencies:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Currency Setup. The Currency Setup dialog
displays.
Figure 26. Currency Setup Dialog

2. Click New at the bottom of the dialog to define a new currency, OR

Select a currency and click Edit to modify a currency. The General Pick List Entry dialog
displays.
Figure 27. General Pick List Entry (Alternate Currency) Dialog

3. Enter the Description to identify the alternate currency.
4. Select the Currency name or point of origin from the list of currencies.
5. Click Set Icon to select an icon. The Select Icon dialog displays. The icon list includes
approximately 30 national flags for currency settings. Click the desired icon and click Select.
6. Select (check) the Format as European Monetary Unit (Euro) option to display the currency
in Euro Dollar format.
7. Click OK to save the currency and return to the Currency Setup dialog.
To delete a currency, select it and click Delete.
Currency Exchange Rate Setup
Currency Exchange Rates define the rate of exchange between each alternate currency and the base
currency. Administrators must define and maintain exchange rates manually.
Adding an Exchange Rate
To add and Exchange Rate:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Currency Exchange Rates. The Currency
Exchange dialog displays.
Figure 28. Currency Exchange Dialog

2. Click New at the bottom of the dialog to define a new currency exchange rate. The Currency
Exchange Setup dialog displays.
Figure 29. Currency Exchange Setup Dialog

3. Select a Currency from the list of available currencies.
4. Enter the Effective Date to specify the date on which the rate will take effect, OR
Click the calendar icon next to the Effective Date field to select a date from the calendar.
5. Enter the Exchange Rate of the new currency as compared to the base currency. (1 unit of
base currency = exchange rate of the alternate currency.)
6. Click OK to save changes and return to the Currency Exchange dialog.
System Preferences determine the point at which to “lock” the exchange rate. Refer to Lock Price
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate at for more information.
Managing Exchange Rates
To change, delete, or make a copy of and Exchange Rate:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Currency Exchange Rates to display the
Currency Exchange dialog.
2. Select an exchange rate and do one of the following:
l To change an item, click Edit. The Currency Exchange Setup dialog displays. Make your
l To delete an item, click Delete.
l To make a copy of an item, click Copy. The Currency Exchange Setup dialog displays.
Select a currency and make any other changes. Click OK.
Account Code Setup

Account codes are assigned to an event and used to link disassociated events together in a day.
These codes are associated to Pay Translator Rule Set rules that are used to perform calculations
against similar assignments.
Account codes are assigned to an activity or sub-activity in System Preferences. Administrators
must add and manage account codes. Refer to Account Code Defaults. A user must have
permission to set up account codes. Refer to Allow Access To Account Code Setup?.
When a sub-activity is assigned to an activity it receives that account code instead of the default
account code for the activity. When using account codes all sub-activities must have an account
code assignment if it is intended that a different rule set is to be used.
All events that are to be included in a Pay Translator calculation must have an account code. The
default account code is only assigned during the creation phase or when a sub-activity is assigned
and is not changed on any other updates.

Adding an Account Code
To add and Account Code:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Account Code Setup. The Account Code Setup
dialog displays.
Figure 30. Account Code Setup Dialog

2. Click New at the bottom of the dialog to define a new account code. The Account Code dialog
displays.
Figure 31. Account Code Dialog

3. Enter the Description of the account code.
4. Enter an Abbreviation (Abv) for the new code.
5. Enter the Account Code.
6. If splits and penalties are allowed, select (check) Splits / Penalties Allowed.
7. Click OK to save changes and return to the Account Code Setup dialog.
Managing Account Codes
To change or delete an account code:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Account Code Setup to display the Account
Code Setup dialog

2. Select an account code and do one of the following:

l To change an item, click Edit. The Account Code dialog displays. Make your changes and
click OK.
l To delete an item, select it and click Delete.
External Compensation Factors

(Requires Pay Translator module) Compensation Factors provide a method to add additional details
to activities and events that affect resource payment. For example, these factors can be used to
provide additional payment or to waive certain factors such as holiday or overtime pay.
Adding Compensation Factors
To add a compensation factor:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click External Compensation Factors. The External
Compensation Factors dialog displays.
Figure 32. External Compensation Factor Dialog

2. Click New at the bottom of the dialog to define a new account code. The External
Compensation Factor dialog displays. Table 6 describes the available settings.
Figure 33. External Compensation Factor Dialog

Table 6. External Compensation Factors Dialog Item Descriptions
Item Description
Description Enter a descriptive name for the compensation factor.
Is Disable Factor This compensation factor is added to an event so that the associated
rule can be disabled.
Is Call Back Factor Identifies this factor as an activity where the employee has ended a
previous shift and is called back with a gap between the assignments.
This handles the gap time period and issues a trigger for that gap
amount.
Code Enter a unique code that identifies the compensation factor.
Cost Enter the cost associated with this compensation factor.
Unit of Measure Select the unit of time associated with the cost. For example, entering
50.00 in the Cost field and selecting Hour from the list would mean
that this compensation factor cost $50 per hour.
Managing Compensation Factors
To change or delete a compensation factor:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click External Compensation Factors. The External
Compensation Factors dialog displays.
2. Select a compensation factor and do one of the following:
l To change an item, click Edit. The External Compensation Factor dialog displays. Make
your changes and click OK.
Shift Rules
(Requires Pay Translator module) Rule sets are used to determine the pay translation rules that, in
certain circumstances, will be used in place of a resource’s existing pay category. These rules are
added to the pay scale as default rule sets. Refer to Pay Scale Setup. There are three types of rules:
l Base Rules are the first rules that are interpreted when:
o events are processed and
o an account code has been associated with the activity and
o the employee has been associated with the rule set.
l Split Rules can be added to any base rule and a Split rule can be added to any other Split.
Splits cannot be added to a penalty rule. This allows the previously interpreted record to break
apart into smaller components.
l Penalty Rules a set of rules that are used to make additional payments against an existing
base or split rule. Like a split they can be controlled using a quantity or time period. This
method can be applied as well to manage how the penalty is applied once the trigger is
generated.
Refer to Adding Shift Rule Sets, Managing Shift Rule Sets, and Adding Shift Rules to a Rule
Set.

Adding Shift Rule Sets

1. From the File menu, select Personnel Manager and click Shift Rules. The Rule Set dialog
displays.
Figure 34. Rule Set Dialog

2. Click New at the bottom of the dialog to define a new shift rule set. The Shift Rule Set dialog
displays.
Main Tab
Figure 35. Shift Rule Set Dialog, Main Tab

Table 7. Shift Rule Set Dialog, Main Tab Item Descriptions
Item Description
Main Tab
Description Enter a descriptive name for the rule set. This rule is used when
associating a shift style assignment to an employee.
User Field 1,2 User defined text fields. Click the small filled square to access an
internal text editor. Refer to Notes Editor.
Status The state of the rule set. If Active then it can be assigned. Rules many
be set to Inactive, but are still operational if the employee has been
assigned to a rule set and the assignments still fall within the shift
style time period.

Translator Tab
Figure 36. Shift Rule Set Dialog, Translator Tab

Table 8. Shift Rule Set Dialog, Translator Tab Item Descriptions
Item Description
Translator Tab
Meals Paid Select (check) to pay the resource for meal times as part of this shift
rule.
Breaks Paid Select (check) to pay the resource for break times as part of this shift
rule.
Daily Hours Enter the number of hours in a work day for this shift rule.
Default Hourly Cost Enter the cost paid per hour for this shift rule. This cost is used if no
other cost can be found in the pay scale.
Holiday Region Select a region from the list to associate the region with this shift rule.
Add Base Rule A base rule is a level that is directly associated with an account code.
This is the first level that is assigned to an event and is always directly
linked to the Standard Time (Overtime Type=0). Click to add a base
rule to the rule set.
Add Split Rule Select a base rule and click to add a split rule to the base rule.
Add Penalty Rule Select a base rule and click to add a penalty rule to the base rule.
Edit Rule Select a base rule, split rule, or penalty rule and click to modify the rule
information.
Delete Rule Select a base rule, split rule, or penalty rule and click to delete the rule.

Time Manager Tab
Figure 37. Shift Rule Set Dialog, Time Manager Tab

Table 9. Shift Rule Set Dialog, Time Manager Tab Item Descriptions
Item Description
Time Manager Tab
Description Enter a descriptive name for the rule set. This rule is used when
associating a shift style assignment to an employee.
Status The state of the rule set. If Active then it can be assigned. Rules many
be set to Inactive, but are still operational if the employee has been
assigned to a rule set and the assignments still fall within the shift
style time period.
Add Time Rule Displays the Shift WTM Rules dialog. Refer to Managing Time
Rules.
Edit Rule Select a shift rule and click to modify the rule information.
Delete Rule Select a shift rule and click to delete the rule.
Rule Code A unique numeric code that is assigned to a rule set. This is the value
applied against the shift style assignments that are applied against the
employee.

Resources Tab
Figure 38. Shift Rule Set Dialog, Resources Tab

Table 10. Shift Rule Set Dialog, Resources Tab Item Descriptions
Item Description
Resources Tab
Description Displays the resources that have been assigned this rule set.
Effective Date
Expiration Date, etc.
Managing Shift Rule Sets

To change or delete a shift rule:
displays.
2. Select a rule set and do one of the following:
l To change an item, click Edit. The Shift Rule Set dialog displays. Make your changes and
click OK.
l To copy an item, select the rule set and click Copy. The Shift Rule Set dialog displays a
duplicate of the original item’s information. Enter a new description and make any
necessary changes. Click OK to save all changes to the new entry.
Adding Shift Rules to a Rule Set
Follow these steps for all rule sets types. Then follow the steps for each specific type.
displays.
2. Select a rule set and click Edit.
3. Click the Translator tab.
To add a Base Rule:
displays.
2. Select a current rule set or click New. The Shift Rule Set dialog displays.
3. Click the Translator tab. See Figure 36.

4. To add a Base shift rule, click Add Base Rule. The Select Account Code dialog displays.
Figure 39. Select Account Code Dialog

5. Select an account code and click Select. The Shift Rule dialog displays.
Figure 40. Shift Rule Dialog

Table 11. Shift Rule Dialog Item Descriptions
Item Description
Description Enter a descriptive name for the rule set.
Overtime Type The Overtime Type is set to Straight Time and cannot be
changed.
Account Code Displays the preselected code and its short name based on the
rule type being created.

Table 11. Shift Rule Dialog Item Descriptions(continued)
Item Description
Trigger Alert Determines if an entry is made in the Alerts Browser window if
the rule is triggered.
Code Override Select an account code to override the original code if
necessary.
Trigger
Type Select the type of rule trigger from the list.
N/A Not Applicable
Monday-Sunday, All l These are time related rules.
Days l The Split field is disabled and the time fields are enabled.
l They can be used with penalty and split rules only and can
be assigned to any overtime type.
Holiday l These are time related rules.
l The Split field is disabled and the time fields are enabled.
l They can be used with penalty and split rules only and can
be assigned to any overtime type.
Displace Meal l Enables functionality to trigger when meal scheduled and
actual times are offset.
l This selection can only be used with penalty rules.
l The Rule Type is modified.
l The Overtime Type is fixed.
Outside Roster l Enables functionality for 'Outside of Roster' triggers.
l Changes the rule type.
l Can be used as a split or penalty rule.
Forward Turnaround l Enables forward looking short turnaround.
l Can only be used with penalty rule type.
Backward Turnaround l Enables backward looking short turnaround.
l Can only be used with penalty rule type.
Split Turnaround l Enables a method to perform a split for the turnaround
period. Defaults to apply a penalty to the back end offender.
Can have a 'force turnaround' trigger code on the previous
event which then moves the split to that event.
l Can only be used with a split type.
l Changes rule type.
Call Back l Enables 'call back' on an activity that has been identified as
a call back event. This is an activity where the employee
has ended a previous shift and is called back with a gap
between the assignments. This handles the 'gap' time
period and issues a trigger for that gap amount.

Table 11. Shift Rule Dialog Item Descriptions(continued)
Item Description
Start/End The times during which the rule is in effect.
Split Hours Enter any split time in hours and minutes.
Method Defines how the trigger is applied to the rule. Select a method
from the list.
l Intercept Time Only
l Entire Booking
l From Trigger On
Refer to Defining the Payment Method.
Time Period for Next Select (check) this box to indicate that the time applied is for the
Day following day.
Interval Method Determines whether the rule trigger is dependent on the value of
the start or end times falling into the rule's time period.
l All – triggers the rule when any part of the event intersects
the rule time period.
l Start – triggers the rule when the start time of the event
intersects the rule time period.
l End – triggers the rule when the end time of the event
intersects the rule time period.
Penalty Flat Cost
Use Flat Uses the flat rate instead of the hourly cost method associated
with the resource for the period of the rule.
Amount Enter the unit cost for this shift rule.
Multipliers
Cost Enter the numerical Cost Multiple to set the differential rate paid
to the employee to offer the employee a percentage rate applied
to their base pay.
Unit Price Multiplier Enter the numerical Sales Multiple for the rule.
Code Buttons These buttons associate a compensation factor to a rule.
Disable Prevents the rule from running if the quantity is 0. If a value has
been entered then it is added to the split value so that the rule is
extended by that amount. If the split was 8 hours and the user
entered 2 in the comp factor then the split occurs after 10 hours.
Standard Add the value entered to the split for billing.
Trigger Reserved.
Unpaid Adds the value entered to the split for costs.
6. Enter the required information and click OK to return to the Shift Rule Set dialog.
To add a Split Rule:
1. In the Translator tab, select a Base rule.
2. Click Add Split Rule. The Shift Rule dialog displays.

3. Enter the appropriate information as described in To add a Base Rule:.

4. Click OK.
Note: The account code of the Base rule selected must have the Splits/Penalties Allowed option
selected. If it is not the error "Account Code cannot be used for Split type Rule" displays.
To add a Penalty Rule:
1. In the Translator tab, select a Base rule.
2. Click Add Penalty Rule. The Shift Rule dialog displays.
3. Enter the appropriate information as described in To add a Base Rule:.
4. Click OK.
Note: The account code of the Base rule selected must have the Splits/Penalties Allowed option
selected. If it is not the error "Account Code cannot be used for Penalty type Rule" displays.
Pay Scale Setup

This feature provides a method to set up costs for a pay scale. It is similar to vendor cost
maintenance (refer to Configuring Vendor Costs in the External Cost Manager chapter of the
ScheduALL Users Guide). Also, there is a cost code (similar to the sales code) in the browser that
allows a unit of measure for each cost code to be set up.
The Pay Scale dialog displays a Main tab and a Resources Provided tab. The Resources Provided
tab displays a browser that lists the resources currently assigned of the pay scale via the pay catalog.
Select a resource and click Open Selected Resource to view resource details.
This feature requires the optional Pay Translator module. The security permission Can access Pay
Scales? must be set to Yes for a user to add, edit, or delete pay scales.
Adding Pay Scales
To add pay scales to the system:
1. From the File menu, select Personnel Manager and then click Pay Scales Setup. The Pay
Scales dialog displays.
Figure 41. Pay Scales Dialog

2. Click New at the bottom of the dialog to define a new Pay Scales. The Pay Scale dialog
displays.
Figure 42. Pay Scale Dialog, Main Tab

Table 12. Pay Scale Dialog, Main Tab Item Descriptions
Item Description
Pay Scale Description Enter a descriptive name for the Pay Scale.
Pay Scale Costs Determines the costs associated with the pay scale. Click to select or
add pay scale costs.
Default Rule Set Click to associate a rule set to this pay scale. Refer to Shift Rules
Status Determines the status of the pay scale. Selections include:
l Active - The pay scale is currently in use. Only pay scales with a
status of Active will display in other lists.
l Inactive - The pay scale is not currently in use.
l Closed - The pay scale is closed and cannot be used again.
Currency Select the currency for this pay scale from the list.
Notes User-defined notes about the pay scale. Refer to Notes Editor.
The Resources Provided tab displays a browser that lists the resources currently assigned of the pay
scale via the pay catalog. Select a resource and click Open Selected Resource to view resource
details.
Defining Pay Scale Costs
To define costs within a pay scale:
2. Select a Pay Scale and click Edit.

3. In the Pay Scale dialog, click Pay Scale Costs to define pay rates. The Pay Rates
Figure 43. Pay Rates Maintenance Dialog

4. Select the Pay Scale in the Description column. Click Add to add a Pay Rate. A new row is
added under the Pay Scale.
Figure 44. Pay Rates Maintenance

5. Enter the appropriate information in each field and click OK.
Table 13. Pay Rates Maintenance Dialog Item Descriptions
Item Description
Time Method l Day/Night to define one rate for daytime hours, and a
second rate for night or non-business hours.
l The Time of Day setting is reserved.
Quantity Price Method Quantity pricing determines the price based on the number of
items ordered.
l Do not use disables quantity pricing. All items are billed at
the same rate regardless of the volume.
l The Absolute and Progressive settings are reserved.
applies the price of the highest applicable quantity category
to all items.
Default Unit of Measure The default unit if fixed at Hour.
Extended Decimal Select (check) Extend Decimal Precision to extend the
Precision precision of the cost fields to five places to the right of the
decimal point. (The default precision is two places to the right of
the decimal point.)
Use Additional Price Reserved.
Points

Table 13. Pay Rates Maintenance Dialog Item Descriptions (continued)
Item Description
Pay Scale Costs Browser
Description Describes the name of the pay scale.
Unit of Measure Select the unit (such as Hour) for this pay rate.
Band Level Enter descriptive text to create a band level. These are pay
levels and can be set up for a time period (for example, a union
contract that may span over several years). Employees normally
are assigned a band level based on their seniority. Labels
entered in this column populate the Band Level list for the pay
scale on the Pay Trans Rule tab of the Pay Category Catalog
dialog. Refer to Personnel Properties – Shift Style.
Unit Cost Enter the unit cost for this pay scale.
Night Unit Cost Enter the unit night cost for this pay scale.
Markup Cost? Select Yes if this is a markup cost.
Zero Cost? Select Yes if this is a no-cost pay scale.
Effective Date Click this field and then click the calendar icon to select the date
that this pay scale begins to be in effect.
Expiration Date Click this field and then click the calendar icon to select the date
that this pay scale ceases to be in effect.
Effective Days Select each day of the week to which this pay scale will apply.
Click OH for Observed Holiday and UH for Unobserved Holiday.
Currency Select the monetary unit in which this pay scale will be paid.
Created Info. Displays the name of the person who created the pays scale and
the date and time it was created.
Modified Info. Displays the name of the person who last changed the pays
scale and the date and time it was changed.
Managing Pay Scales

To change or delete a pay scale:
2. Select a pay scale and do one of the following:
l To change an item, click Edit. The Pay Scale dialog displays. Make your changes and click
OK.
l To delete an item, click Delete. If the pay scale has been used in the pay catalog it cannot
be deleted.
l To copy an item, select the pay scale and click Copy. The Pay Scale dialog displays a
duplicate of the original item’s information. Enter a new description and make any
necessary changes. Click OK to save all changes to the new entry.

Rooms and Resources

This section describes setup procedures for rooms and resources.
Resources
Resources are the individual components of a facility that are brought together to provide services to
clients, including the work spaces, people, equipment, and expendable stock used to perform
services. The classifications used to define the facility are:
Table 14. Resource Classifications
General Resource General Resource entries identify the equipment used to provide services,
Setup such as cameras, editing workstations, or lighting kits. General Resource
entries are also used to identify miscellaneous costs and expenses such
as travel fees, catering, or location fees.
In the ScheduLINK system, use Room entries to define satellites and
sites for satellite operations, and network elements for data transmission
operations.
Room Resource Setup Rooms are the physical or conceptual areas where work services are
performed. In the ScheduALL system, each work order must be
associated with a room entry. A room is the container that holds other
resources needed to perform work.
Personnel Setup Personnel resource entries identify the employees, contractors, and free
lance personnel involved in providing services.
Stock Resource Setup Stock resource entries identify the expendable items that are purchased,
inventoried, and sold as part of a booking, such as audio tape, film, or
video cassettes.
BandPLAN Resource BandPLAN entries identify the band plans used to allocate portions of a
Setup transmission signal. Refer to BandPLAN Resource Setup.
(LINK only)
Abstract Resource Abstract resources are resources that “bundle” other resources under one
Setup resource name. Abstract resources are generally made up of categories
and types, but not individual resources. When a subscriber books an
abstract resource, the system allocates the next available resource within
that category and type.

Resource Category Setup

Resource categories collect similar resources into broad categories. For example, a broad category
of personnel might include editors, colorists, and engineers. Categories are then divided into resource
types.
To add or modify a resource category:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Rooms & Resources. The Resource
Figure 45. Resource Maintenance

2. Click the Resources by Category tab to bring that page forward.
3. Click New at the bottom of the Category column, OR
Select a category to modify, and click Edit. The Category Maintenance dialog opens.
Refer to Category Maintenance Dialog and Deleting a Resource Category.
Category Maintenance Dialog
The Category Maintenance dialog displays the following tabs:
l Category Maintenance – Main
l Category Maintenance – Resource Questions
The ScheduLINK system uses information from the Predecessor and Successor tabs. Refer to the

Category Maintenance – Main

The Main tab contains the core settings for the category. Table 15 describes the available settings.
To display this dialog, from the File menu, select Setup and click Rooms & Resources, and then
click New.
Figure 46. Category Maintenance, Main Tab

Table 15. Category Maintenance, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Category Enter the Category name in the text box.
User Field 1 & 2 Enter information in User Field 1 and User Field 2. User-defined field
(optional) data may be used in display views or reports. Refer to Display View
Setup for information.
Default Resource Group Select the group with which the new resource category will be
associated. The default is <none>.
Category Level Billing Click this button to set category-level pricing for this category. The
Rates Price Maintenance dialog displays. Pricing at the category level is
optional. Refer to Rate Priority and Price Maintenance for more
information.
Category Level Click the this button to set customized cancellation charges for this
Cancellation Rates category. The Cancellation Rate Card Setup dialog displays all the
defined system-level cancellation rates. Cancellation rates at the
category level are optional. Refer to Managing Cancellation Rates
for more information.
l Select a cancellation rate card and click Add to specify a custom
cancellation rate.
l Enter the Quantity and Unit of Measure for the start of the
cancellation range.
l In the appropriate Status field, enter the percentage of the
extended price to charge.
l Repeat as necessary for each rate card and cancellation rate.
Click OK to save all changes.

Category Maintenance – Resource Questions

The Resource Questions tab allows the user to enter questions about the resource that must be
answered each time the resource is booked. When the resource is booked, a dialog is displayed so
the user can enter answers to the questions. Refer to Standard Work Order – Resources in the
ScheduALL Users Guide . Table 16 describes the available settings.
To display this dialog, from the File menu, select Setup and click Rooms & Resources. Click a
category and click New or Edit, and then click the Resource Questions tab.
Figure 47. Category Maintenance, Resource Questions Tab

Table 16. Category Maintenance, Resource Questions Tab Items
Item Description
Resource Questions Select (check) to allow use of resource questions when booking the
Enabled resource.
Copy From Resource Click to copy questions already defined for an existing resource.
Select the resource to copy questions from and click Select.
Copy From Cat/Type Click to copy questions already defined at the Category or Type level.
Select the category or type to copy questions from and click OK.
[Mandatory (checkboxes)] Select (check) to require an answer to the corresponding question.
The work order cannot be advanced beyond the status defined in
System Preferences unless the question is answered.
[Question Fields 1-10] Enter questions in these fields.

Deleting a Resource Category

Deleting a category removes all resource types associated with the category. If a resource is only
associated with one category, the resource is deleted; if the resource is associated with multiple
categories, the resource will remain in the other categories.
3. In the Category column, select a resource category, and click Delete at the bottom of the
Category column. A confirmation dialog displays.
4. Click Yes to proceed with the operation, or No to cancel the operation.
5. Click Close to exit the Resource Maintenance dialog.
Resource Type Setup

The Resource Type Setup dialog displays the following tabs:
l Main - Refer to Resource Type Setup - Main Tab.
l Resource Questions - Refer to Category Maintenance – Resource Questions for more
information and an illustration of this tab.
The ScheduLINK system uses information from the Predecessor and Successor tabs. Refer to the
To add a new resource type:
3. Click New at the bottom of the Type column. The Create a New Resource Type dialog
displays.
4. Select the Category with which the new type will be associated.
5. Enter a Description for the new type.
6. Click OK to save the new type.
7. To edit a new or existing resource type, select the resource type and click Edit. The Resource
Type Setup dialog displays.
Resource Type Setup - Main Tab
The Main tab contains the core settings for the resource type, including the type name, type level
billing and cancellation rates, and type defaults. Table 17 describes the available settings.
To display this dialog:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and then click Rooms & Resources.
2. Click New at the bottom of the Type column.

Figure 48. Resource Type Setup, Main Tab

Table 17. Resource Type Setup, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Type Modify the Type field if necessary to change the type description.
User Field 1 & 2 Enter information in User Field 1 and User Field 2. User-defined field
(optional) data may be used in display views or reports. Refer to Display View
Setup for information.
Color Click Color to select a default resource color for all resources in the
type, or click Clear Color to remove a color association from the
resource type. User Preferences determine if the calendar board
displays bookings by resource color. Refer to Select View Colors.
Type Level Billing Rates Click Type Level Billing Rates to set type-level pricing for this type.
The Price Maintenance dialog displays. Pricing at the type level is
optional. Refer to Rate Priority and Price Maintenance for more
information.

Table 17. Resource Type Setup, Main Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Type Level Cancellation Click Type Level Cancellation Rates to set customized cancellation
Rates charges for this type. The Cancellation Rate Card Setup dialog
displays all the defined system-level and category-level cancellation
rates. Cancellation rates at the type level are optional. Refer to
Managing Cancellation Rates for more information.
l Select a cancellation rate card and click Add to specify a custom
cancellation rate.
l Enter the Quantity and Unit of Measure for the start of the
cancellation range.
l In the appropriate Status field, enter the percentage of the
extended price to charge.
l Repeat as necessary for each rate card and cancellation rate.
Click OK to save all changes.
Type Level Defaults Set the Type Level Defaults:
(optional) l Enter a default Cost for resources in this type.
l Select a default Unit of Measure for resources in this type.
l Select a default Resource Group.
l Click Capacity Required and select the capacity default required
for this type.
Assign Vendor/Vendor Click Assign Vendor to assign a vendor to this resource type. Select
Costs a vendor from the list and click Select. To change the pricing
associated with a vendor, select the vendor name and click
Edit Costs. To remove a vendor from the list, select the vendor and
click Release.
Note: Vendor assignment and vendor costs defined at the Type level
apply to BandPlan resources ONLY.
Deleting a Resource Type

To delete a resource type:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Rooms and Resources. The Resource
3. Select the appropriate Category and Type.
4. Click Delete at the bottom of the Type column. A confirmation dialog displays.
Managing Resources
The Resource Properties dialog allows you to add, edit, and delete resources in your system. This
section describes these actions. Configuring specific resources is discussed later.

Adding a Resource
To add a new resource entry:
3. Select the appropriate Category and Type to which the resource will belong.
4. Click New at the bottom of the Description column. The Resource Types dialog displays.
Figure 49. Resource Types

5. Select the resource type:
l Select General Resource and click OK to add a piece of equipment. Refer to General
Resource Setup.
l Select Room and click OK to add a work space. Refer to Room Resource Setup.
l Select Personnel and click OK to add an employee entry. Refer to Personnel Setup.
l Select Stock and click OK to add film stock or other media. Refer to Stock Resource
Setup.
l Select BandPLAN and click OK to add a BandPLAN resource. Refer to BandPLAN
Resource Setup.
l Select Abstract and click OK to add an Abstract resource. Refer to Abstract Resource
Setup.
Editing a Resource
To change an existing resource:
2. Click the Resources by Description tab to bring that page forward.

3. Select a resource and click Edit to modify the resource entry, OR

Select a resource and click Copy to modify a duplicate of the resource. The appropriate
Properties dialog displays. Refer to General Resource Setup, Room Resource Setup,
Personnel Setup, or Stock Resource Setup for specific resource properties dialogs.
Note: Click Browse [...] to search a list by name or with wildcard expressions. Refer to Using
Wildcards in the Scheduling chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more
information.
4. Make any necessary changes.
5. Click OK to save the changes.
Deleting an Unused Resource
An unused resource is a resource that has not been booked into any work orders. To delete this type
of resource:
3. Select the appropriate resource and click Delete. A confirmation dialog displays.
Deleting a Booked Resource
If a resource has been booked in a work order, you must reassign the resource you are deleting to
another resource before you can delete the original. This minimizes data loss when deleting a booked
resource. Before proceeding, create a General resource (this will become an archive “room”) to use
when reassigning a deleted resource. Refer to Managing Resources.
3. Select the appropriate resource and click Delete. A confirmation dialog displays.
4. Click Yes to proceed with the operation. A warning dialog displays.
Figure 50. Delete Booked Resource Dialog

5. Click Yes. The Select Target Resource dialog displays.
Figure 51. Select Target Resource Dialog

6. To reassign the resource you are deleting, select a general (non-room) resource. To filter the
list click Select Items to View.
7. Click Select.
8. Click Close to close the Resource Maintenance dialog.
Resource Catalog Setup
The default ledger assignments for a resource are set on the Accounting tab of the resource
properties dialog. ScheduALL provides the ability to add multiple Category/Type assignments to a
single resource. For example, a room resource may have a default assignment as Audio, but may
also be used for Graphics for some clients. When the room is being used for graphics, sales and cost
ledgers may differ from the default settings for the audio use.
To add additional Category/Type assignments to a resource:
1. Click the Main tab on the resource properties dialog.
2. Click Add to the right of the Category/Type browser.
Figure 52. Resource Properties, Add Category and Type

3. The Category & Type Selection dialog displays. Select a category and type and click OK.

To assign different sales and cost ledgers to the added category and type:
1. In the Category/Type browser, select the new category and type.
2. Click Category Overrides. The Resource Catalog Setup dialog displays.
Figure 53. Resource Catalog Setup Dialog

3. To override the resource’s default sales and costs ledgers for this category and type, enter the
appropriate ledger numbers.
4. Click OK. A confirmation dialog displays.
l Click Yes to ripple (change all) resources in the same category and type to the ledger
account numbers.
l Click No to set the ledger account numbers for this individual resource only.
Note: The ScheduALL system now allows the administrator or other authorized user to assign an
icon to a specific Resource Category/Resource Type combination for a specific resource. The
assigned icon is then displayed on any booking block in which the specified resource is booked
under the appropriate Category/Type combination. For information on adding the required
controls for this feature, refer to Modifying Dialogs for Resource Category/Type Flags.

Availability Setup
The Availability Setup dialog displays a grid with the hours in a day along the top (X axis), and the
days of the week along the side (Y axis). Click Availability Setup on the Other tab of a resource
setup dialog.
Figure 54. Resource Availability Setup Dialog

To determine resource availability:
l Click and drag the mouse to select a block of time, and then click Available, Possibly
Available, or Not Available to set the availability. The color of a time block indicates
availability: red blocks are Not Available, green blocks are Available, and yellow blocks are
Possibly Available.
In this example, the resource is available on Sunday from midnight to 7 a.m. but unavailable
after that. On Monday it is not available until 7 a.m., then possibly available from 7 a.m. to
noon, and then available after that. On Wednesday it is not available all day.
l Click Copy From and select a resource to import the availability settings from another
resource.
l Click Copy To and select a resource to export the current availability settings to another
resource.
l Click OK to save all changes.

General Resource Setup

The ScheduALL and ScheduLINK systems use information from the following tabs of the General
Resource Properties dialog:
Table 18. General Resource Setup Tabs
System Tabs
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK
General Resource – Main
General Resource – Accounting
General Resource – Connector
General Resource – Other
General Resource – Resource Questions
General Resource – Trail
General Resource Properties – Collection
ScheduLINK Only
General Resource – Satellite
General Resource – Uplink Path/DownlinkGeneral
Resource – Uplink Path/Downlink
General Resource – Path Management
General Resource – Circuit
General Resource – Sub-Resources
General Resource – Predecessor
General Resource – Successor
General Resource – Uplink Predecessor
General Resource – Uplink Successor
General Resource – Antenna Matrix

General Resource – Main

The Main tab contains core properties for the resource, including the categories and types to which
the resource belongs, access to billing and cancellation rates, and the specified billing, tax, and
cancellation options. Table 19 lists the available settings.
To display this dialog, refer to Managing Resources.
Figure 55. General Resource Properties, Main Tab

Table 19. General Resource Properties, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Description Enter the descriptive name of the resource.
Category and Type Lists the category group and type group to which the resource
Add belongs. (It is not recommended to add a general resource to more
Release than one category or type.)
l Click Add to associate this resource with additional categories
and/or types.
l Select a category/type association and click Release to remove
the association.
Note: The ability to add or release a category/type is determined by
user security settings. Refer to Can Add/Release Resources to
Category/Type? in Maintenance & Setup Areas.
Billing Rates Click this button to set the billing rates for this individual resource. The
Price Maintenance dialog displays. Refer to Price Maintenance.

Table 19. General Resource Properties, Main Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Resource Groups Click this button to view the resource groups to which the resource is
assigned, or to add this resource to one or more Resource Groups.
Refer to Resource Group Setup.
Category Overrides Click this button to set ledger account numbers. Refer to Resource
Catalog Setup.
Cancellation Rates Click this button to configure the cancellation rates applied to this
resource. The Cancellation Rate Card Setup dialog displays. Refer to
Check Availability Select (check) to force the system to verify if the resource is available
when adding the resource to a work order. The system generates a
conflict warning if a user attempts to book this resource when the
resource is not available. Refer to General Resource – Other to set
the available and unavailable times.
Default to Standard Select (check) to indicate that there is no charge to book or use this
item by default.
Independent Confirmation Select (check) to require confirmation before the resource can be
used. For example, use this option for a resource shared between two
sites so that schedulers know to confirm the resource’s availability.
When the resource is booked, the system sets the Explicit
Confirmation field on the resource booking dialog to Needs
Confirmation, and displays the Needs Confirmation flag ( ) on the
calendar block and resource browsers. The status of a work order
cannot be changed if any resource in the work order needs
confirmation.
Refer to the Explicit Confirmation field in the Resource Details, Main
Tab Settings table in the Work Orders chapter of the ScheduALL
Users Guide for more information.
Notify Engineering Select (check) to include item in reports which detail schedules by
resource. These reports are designed to allow engineering staff to plan
equipment set up and maintenance.
From the Report menu, click Print Schedules by Resource to run
the report.
Taxable (First Tax) Select (check) to apply “Tax 1 %” of the assigned Tax Structure to this
service when used in booking.
Default to Overage Select (check) to identify prices as “overages” on work orders, quotes,
and projects. (Quote and project features require the optional Quotes
Manager and Project Manager modules, respectively.)
Overages are used to identify costs that cannot always be foreseen,
and list them separately on work orders. Generally only Stock
resources are defined as overages.

Item Description
Requires Explicit Select (check) to force the system to require that a resource have an
Availability Available Block defined in order to book the resource. Refer to
Resource Activities in the Scheduling chapter of the ScheduALL
Users Guide for more information on available blocks.
Bill when Cancelled Select (check) to evaluate this resource for possible cancellation
charges if a booking which contains the resource is canceled.
Estimate Availability Select (check) to display shading on the Scheduling calendar to show
estimated availability for this resource.
Ignore Conflicts in Same Normal conflict checking will display a conflict warning when a
WO resource is booked more than once in the same work order. Select
(check) this item to disable this type of conflict checking. When
selected, no warning is displayed if a resource is booked more than
once in the same work order unless any of the bookings overlap. If one
or more bookings overlap then the normal conflict warning is
displayed.
Refer to Modifying Dialogs for Ignore Conflicts for information on
adding the controls required for this feature.
Permission Required Determines whether the resource requires permission from the client
to be used in a booking. Refer to Permission to Use.
Hold (for Review) Select one of the following:
l No to allow the resource to be invoiced.
l Always to automatically hold the resource from being invoiced
until after it has been reviewed.
l Only when Cancelled to hold the resource from being invoiced
when the work order is Cancelled until after it has been reviewed.
Required EIRP Identifies the signal strength necessary for this resource when used in
the ScheduALL Portal system. The EIRP (Equivalent Isotropically
Radiated Power) value is the amount of power that an isotropic
antenna would emit to produce peak power density.

Item Description
Joinable (Circuit Bookings) For circuit bookings, this setting determines the default setting of the
Joinable setting on the Path Detail tab of a work order. The Joinable
setting in the work order determines if other work orders can use all or
part of a transmission work order. Other work orders can utilize the
feed at a point between the source and destination. If the resource has
Is Node, Is Encoder, or Is Decoder enabled on the Circuit tab then the
following selections are available:
l Never Joinable - Sets the default Joinable setting of a circuit
work order using this resource as the source to Never Joinable.
The user will not be able to change this status at the work order
level.
l Default to Flexible Joins - Sets the default Joinable setting of a
work order using this resource as the source to Allow Flexible
Joins. This allows joins on a work order without restrictions to the
start and end times of the join work order as long as the two
overlap by at least one minute.
l Default to Not Joinable - Sets the default Joinable setting of a
work order using this resource as the source to Not Joinable. This
setting prevents joins from occurring on the work order.
l Default to Strict Joins - Sets the default Joinable setting of a
work order using this resource as the source to Allow Strict Joins.
This setting allows joins on the work order, but the start and end
times of the join work order must fit within the start and end times
of the source work order.
Joinable (Non-Circuit For non-circuit resources (those that do not have Is Node, Is Encoder,
Bookings) or Is Decoder enabled on the Circuit tab) then the following selections
are available:
l Yes - Sets the Joinable status of the resource to Yes. The
resource can be joined.
l No - Sets the Joinable status of the resource to No. The
resource cannot be joined.
These settings do not affect the defaults in non-circuit bookings.

Item Description
Additional Resources to Lists the resources or requirements which the system automatically
Book adds to a booking whenever the current resource is booked. For
Add example, require an editor when booking a piece of editing equipment.
Requirement l Click Add to open the Resource Maintenance dialog and select
Edit specific resources to book. Double-click the category, type, and
Release individual resource to select the exact resource. Double-click a
category, or category and type, to allow the system to
automatically select a matching resource at booking time.
l Click Requirement to select a resource category or
category/type as a mandatory item. Refer to Using Requirements
in the Scheduling chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
l Select a resource and click Edit to modify the resource
information, such as changing the quantity.
l Select an additional resource and click Release to remove the
association.
General Resource – Accounting

The Accounting tab contains properties related to the costs of providing the resource. Table 20
describes the available settings.
Figure 56. General Resource Properties, Accounting Tab Items

Table 20. General Resource Properties, Accounting Tab Items
Item Description
Billing Description Enter the resource description for invoice and billing reports.
Default Company Click to associate a default company with the resource. The Select
Company dialog displays. Select a company and click Select. (If user
permissions are set by company, the list of companies may be
limited.) Click Clear ( ) to remove the assignment.
Default Cost Enter the cost to the facility or business to offer the use of this piece of
equipment. Select the unit of measure from the list to the right of the
currency amount.
Alt Currency Click to select an alternate currency for the resource.
Effective Date Enter the date on which the resource was (or will be) first available for
booking. Any dates prior to the Effective Date are shaded in red on
visual calendars. The system generates a conflict message when a
user attempts to book the resource prior to this date.
Expiration Date Enter the date after which the resource was (or will be) no longer
available for booking. Any dates following the Expiration Date are
shaded in red on visual calendars. The system generates a conflict
message when a user attempts to book the resource after this date.
Rolling Window Settings Click Rolling Window Settings to allow booking outside of the
rolling access period for the clients specified. The Select Clients
dialog displays. Select one of the following:
l None - Booking outside the rolling access period is not allowed.
l All - Booking outside the rolling access period is allowed for all
clients.
l Selected - Booking outside the rolling access period is allowed for
selected clients only. Click Select Clients. The Select Clients
dialog displays. Select one or more clients and click Select. Click
OK.
(Rolling Access) Days Determines a period after which a resource cannot be booked, based
on the current date. The visual calendar and Resources List dialogs
display red shading after the specified number of days for resources
with a rolling expiration period, and the system generates a conflict
message if a user attempts to book the resource after that period. All
bookings must begin and end prior to the beginning of the rolling
access period. For example, if Rolling Access is set to 7, any attempt
to book a resource 8 or more days from today generates a conflict
warning.
Active Displays the number of clients selected in the Rolling Window
Settings dialog. If None is selected, 0 displays. If All is selected,
1 displays.
Commission % Enter the percentage of commission, from 0.001 to 99.99, that the
Account Executive will receive for a booking which uses this
resource.

Table 20. General Resource Properties, Accounting Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Maximum Discount Enter the maximum percentage by which the price of this resource can
be reduced or discounted. The Limit Discounts option must be
selected (checked) to enforce this value.
External Cost Select (check) if the resource is rented or purchased from an outside
vendor. The resource is flagged in all browsers with a rightward
pointing arrow.
The optional External Costs Manager module provides additional
features for tracking external costs. Refer to the External Cost
Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more
information.
Requires Special Security Select (check) to display cost information as asterisks if the user does
to See Cost not have permissions to view hidden cost information. Refer to Can
View Hidden Cost Information?.
Generate an Automatic P.O. (Requires External Costs Manager.) Select (check) to automatically
generate a purchase order for this resource when it is booked in a work
order. Refer to External Cost Entries / Purchase Orders in the External
Cost Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
Note: If the Apply Vendor Costs without Creation Of
Payable/PO? system preference is set to Yes, this setting is
ignored. Refer to Apply Vendor Costs without Creation Of
Payable/PO?.
Requires Vendor (Requires External Cost Manager module.) Select (check) to display
Notification the vendor notification flag ( ) on the calendar block and resource
browsers after a Purchase Order has been created for the resource
booking.
The system generates a vendor notification for the booking when the
user opens a work order, selects the Work Order menu, and clicks
Send Pending Vendor Notifications.
Client Provided Select (check) to indicate that this resource is provided by the client.
Do not select when booking Select (check) to force the system to ignore this resource when
Cat/Type automatically selecting a resource by category or category and type.
Shippable Item Select (check) if this item can be shipped using a shipping service.
The optional Shipping module provides additional features for
managing shippable items and shipping services.
Not Commissionable Select (check) if the resource does not generate any commission.
Limit Discounts Select (check) to limit the discount that can be offered to the
Maximum Discount amount.
Taxable (Second Tax) Select (check) to apply “Optional Tax 2 %” of the assigned Tax
Structure to this service when used in booking.

Table 20. General Resource Properties, Accounting Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Assign Tax Jurisdiction Click to select a tax jurisdiction location from the Select Tax
Jurisdiction dialog. Select the desired location and click Select. The
selected tax jurisdiction location and its associated tax structure are
displayed. Click Clear ( ) to remove the assigned tax jurisdiction and
its associated tax structure.
For information on creating a tax jurisdiction and assigning a tax
structure, refer to Locations Setup.
Ledger Entries Enter the ledger account numbers for Sales and Costs entries for
Internal Clients and External Clients.
General Resource – Connector

The ScheduALL Connector™ tab displays information about published or subscribed resources used
in the Connector module. Table 21 describes the available settings. To display this dialog, refer to
Managing Resources.
Note: If the Connector license is not installed, this tab does not display.
Figure 57. General Resource Properties, Connector Tab

Table 21. General Resource Properties, Connector Tab Item Descriptions
Item Description
Subscribed Resource
Publisher Displays the name of the publisher (owner) of the subscribed
resource. This value displays only on the subscriber’s system.

Table 21. General Resource Properties, Connector Tab Item Descriptions (continued)
Item Description
Publisher Settings
Explicit Availability Select (check) this option to restrict the availability of the resource to
Required at Subscriber certain times that the publisher identifies by creating Available blocks
on the scheduling calendar. If a subscriber tries to book the resource
outside of an available block, they will receive a message stating that
the resource is not available.
This selection is not available on the subscriber’s system.
Informational Bookings Select (check) this option to indicate that when this resource is
Required for Subscriber booked by a subscriber a read-only copy of the booking is placed on
Blocks the publisher's calendar. This informs the publisher about the booking,
but the publisher cannot edit the booking.
Circuit Provider Resource ScheduALL customers who manage terrestrial fiber and IP transport
networks using ScheduALL Circuit Selection can use this option to
make their network available for direct subscriber booking using
ScheduALL Connector.
General Resource – Other

The Other tab contains miscellaneous resource properties. Table 22 describes the available settings.
Refer to Alarm Notification and Notes Editor
Figure 58. General Resource Properties, Other Tab

Table 22. General Resource Properties, Other Tab Items
Item Description
Serial Number Enter the serial number for a piece of equipment.
ScheduALL ID Identification number assigned by the system. This field is for
information purposes only and cannot be edited.
External Reference Enter a code or identifier for linking to other software applications.
Bar Code (Requires Rental module.) Displays the bar code used to scan the
item into and out of inventory.
Minimum Qty Sold Enter the smallest allowed quantity that can be booked.
System Preferences determine whether the system enforces this
setting. Refer to Use Minimum Quantity/Quantity Increment.
Minimum Increment Enter minimum number that can be booked. Select the unit of measure
(Increment Unit) from the list to the right of the field.
Location Click to select the current location of the resource.
Concatenate Description Selecting a choice other than None will combine the resource type
name or the type and category names with the resource booking
description.
l None displays the normal booking description.
l Concatenate Type combines the resource type description with
the booking description.
l Concatenate Cat/Type combines the resource category and type
descriptions with the booking description.
Note: The Concatenated Description is a separate field that can be
added to display views in Setup, and can be added to browsers,
dialogs, etc. using Developers Toolkit.
Vendor Browser Lists the vendors that supply the resource if you rent or purchase from
an outside vendor.
Select Vendors Click to display the Select Vendors dialog and select a vendor for this
resource. Repeat as necessary.
Edit Costs Click to access the Vendor Cost Maintenance dialog and edit the
costs to you of renting or purchasing the resource.
Release Click to remove the selected vendor from the list of suppliers.
Notes Enter any additional information about this resource, or click the small
filled square to access an internal text editor to type notes. Refer to
Notes Editor.
Select Resource Color Displays the Color dialog. Select a color to associate the color with
the current resource. From the View menu, select Display in
Resource Colors to filter the display by resource color.
Clear Clears the color associated with this resource.

Table 22. General Resource Properties, Other Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Pop-up to Notes to Resource Notes can be displayed on the scheduler’s screen when a
Schedulers user books the resource. The Pop-up to Schedulers setting allows the
system to determine whether notes will be displayed to users logged
in as Internal users as well as users logged in as External clients,
Internal users only, or no notes are displayed.
l Internal and External displays pop-up notes to users who log on
to the system internally as well as external clients who log on to
the system remotely.
l Internal Only displays pop-up notes to users who log on to the
system internally. Users who log on as external clients will not
see pop-up notes.
l None does not display pop-up notes to any users.
Notifications:
Include in E-mail Determines whether the system sends a notification to the specified
Notifications addresses when a user generates an e-mail report which includes
addressees linked to resources (All Resources, or the appropriate
Category, Type, or Resource). Refer to Alarm Notification for more
information.
Generate Alarms for Select (check) to create a notification message in the database for this
E-mail Notifications resource. Refer to Alarm Notification for more information.
Address The e-mail address to which notifications are sent for this resource. To
enter multiple e-mail addresses, use a semicolon (;) to separate each
address. Refer to Alarm Notification for more information.
iCalendar Enabled Determines if the resource is available to iCal calendars and allows
the user to specify the calendar name. Refer to Subscribing to
iCalendars.
Default Lead Time (Mins) Enter the default number of minutes to reserve for this resource before
a booking begins.
Default Bumper Time (Mins) Enter the Bumper Time, in minutes, to reserve a block of time after the
end of the work order and before any cleanup time. This time is not
billed to the client.
The bumper time displays on the work order block on the calendar
board and will trigger a conflict warning if you attempt to book a work
order that cuts into the bumper time.
Bumper time can also be added on a per-work order basis and does
not have to be specified in the general properties.

Table 22. General Resource Properties, Other Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Default Clean Up Time Enter the Cleanup Time, in minutes, to reserve a block of time after
(Mins) the Bumper Time. This time can be used to reset equipment, change
staff in an edit suite, etc. This time is not billed to the client.
Clean-up time displays as part of the work order block on the calendar
board, and triggers a conflict warning when booking a work order that
cuts into the Clean-up time. Clean-up time can also be added on a per-
work order basis and does not have to be added to the general
properties.
Extended Trail Enabled Select (check) to allow the room to write information to the extended
trail. Refer to Extended Trail.
Note: Extended Trail requires the NMS licensed module.
Note: This check box is not displayed on the standard dialog. The
check box can be add using the Developer’s Tool Kit. For more
information, refer to Customizing a Dialog.
Availability Setup Click to access the Resource Availability dialog. Refer to Availability
Setup.
Is Portal Booking Type Determines if this resource can be used in portal bookings.
Portal Type Determines the resource portal type. Select the portal type for the
resource from the list.
Alarm Notification
E-mail or Calendar notifications occur when Generate Notifications is enabled for a resource and a
notification trigger occurs. For example:
l If the Work Order Times Changed event trigger is enabled, and
l a personnel resource (with Generate Notifications enabled) is booked in a work order, and
l the work order times are changed, then
l e-mail information is entered into a database table.
The table contains one record for each notification message, and includes both sent and pending
messages. Rule sets contain triggers that determine when the ScheduALL system adds a message
record to the database table, and the recipients, settings, and contents of each message. Triggers are
configured in Notification Manager Setup, which is accessed from the System Preferences area.
Refer to Notification Manager.
When Generate Notifications for a resource is initially enabled, notification information is sent to the
database table as needed. If Generate Notifications is subsequently turned off, the system will stop
sending entries to the database for that resource. However, notification records inserted into the
database during the time when Generate Notifications was enabled are not deleted. Any notification
records in the database not marked as “sent” will still be sent when the system processes
notifications.

Include in Notifications
This setting is used to enable or disable the sending of notifications related to the resource. When
selected, the system processes and sends any notifications if there is an entry in the alarms table.
If this setting is not selected, the Notification Manager service does not process or send any unsent
e-mails for the specified resource until the “Include in Notifications” setting is re-enabled.
Notes Editor
The internal text editor application provides expanded text capabilities for several note, log, and
address fields in the ScheduALL system. To access the editor, click the filled square in a note field
within a dialog.
Figure 59. ScheduALL Editor

l Click Import to retrieve text from an external file.
l Click Print to send all text in the Editor to the printer.
l Click Export to write all text in the Editor to an external text file.
l Click Time Stamp to add a text label to the end of the text with the user name, day of the
week, full date, and time. Select Top or Bottom to determine the placement of the time
stamp.
General Resource – Resource Questions

Refer to Category Maintenance – Resource Questions for more information and an illustration of
this tab.
General Resource – Trail
The Trail tab displays an audit trail showing changes that occur in resource setup. For example, if the
Description field is updated, the Trail displays a line item with the following information:
l the date and time the change was made
l the name of the user making the change
l a description of what information was changed

Figure 60. General Resource Properties, Trail Tab

To enable audit trail logging, you must set the System Preference Log on Audit Trail changes to
Resources/Stock/Services Setup? to Yes. Refer to Log on Audit Trail changes to
Resources/Stock/Services Setup?. Changes are tracked for creating, deleting, or updating a
resource. Only those fields associated with resource properties are logged on the Trail tab.
Examples of resource setup changes that are logged:
l Change of description
l Change of Category/Type
l Change of resource group
l Change of price or cost
Note: Log entries are not made if a resource is released from its category/type in the resource setup
browser.
General Resource Properties – Collection
The Collection tab displays a list showing single point of failure resource collections. To display this
dialog, refer to Managing Resources.
Figure 61. General Resource Properties, Collection Tab

To add collections to the tab:

1. Click Assign Collection. The Select Collection Entry dialog displays.
Figure 62. Select Collection Entry Dialog

2. Select a collection from the list.
3. Click Select. The collection is added to the Collections tab.
Table 23. General Resource Properties, Select Collection Entry Items
Item Description
Description Displays the name of the collection catalog.
Affinity Level Displays the affinity level for the collection. This value determines
whether a line assigned the given single point of failure is considered
for the secondary route if the same single point of failure is already
assigned to one or more lines in the primary route.
Active Displays whether the collection is considered in new bookings. This
allows collection to be temporarily deactivated, if needed, without
having to delete it from the catalog.
Included Resources Displays the resources associated with the collection.
To remove a collection, select it and click Release Collection.

Room Resource Setup

Refer to Managing Resources for instructions on creating a new resource. Select Room in the
Resource Types dialog. The Room Properties dialog displays the following tabs in ScheduALL or
ScheduLINK:
Table 24. Room Resource Setup Tabs
System Tabs
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK
Room Properties – Main
Room Properties – Accounting
Room Properties – Connector
Room Properties – Services
Room Properties – Preferences
Room Properties – Other
Room Properties – Resource Questions
Room Properties – Trail
ScheduLINK Only
Room Properties – Satellite
Room Properties – Uplink Truck
Room Properties – Fixed Dish
Room Properties – Path Management
Room Properties – Sub-Resources
Room Properties – Predecessor
Room Properties – Successor
Room Properties – Uplink Predecessor and Successor
Room Properties – Antenna Matrix

Room Properties – Main

The Main tab contains core settings for the room, including the categories and types to which the
room belongs, access to billing and cancellation rates, and specified billing, tax, and cancellation
options. Table 25 describes the available settings.
Figure 63. Room Properties, Main Tab Items

Table 25. Room Properties, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Room Description Enter the descriptive name of the room.
Assign Location Displays the Select Location dialog. Select the physical location of the
room.
Category and Type Lists the category group and type group to which the room belongs.
Add l Click Add to associate this room with additional categories
Release and/or types.
the association.
Note: It is not recommended to add a room to more than one category
or type.
user security settings. Refer to Can Add/Release Rooms to

Table 25. Room Properties, Main Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Price Maintenance dialog displays. Refer to Price Maintenance for
more information.
Refer to Resource Group Setup for more information.
Catalog Setup.
room. The Cancellation Rate Card Setup dialog displays. Refer to
Check Availability Select (check) to force the system to verify if the resource is available
when adding the resource to a work order. The system generates a
conflict warning if a user attempts to book this resource when the
resource is not available. Refer to Room Properties – Other to set
the available and unavailable times.
item by default.
used. The scheduling screen displays a small question mark symbol
on any work order block for this item. For example, use this option for
a resource shared between two sites so that schedulers know to
confirm the resource’s availability.
confirmation.
Notify Engineering Select (check) to include item in the report detailing schedules by
resource. Useful for engineering staff to plan equipment and room set
up and maintenance.
To run the report, click the Report menu and choose Schedules by
Resource.

Table 25. Room Properties, Main Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Availability Available Block defined in order to book the resource. Refer to Refer to
Bill When Cancelled Select (check) to evaluate this resource for possible cancellation
charges, if a booking which contains the resource is Cancelled.
Joinable Select (check) to allow this resource to be booked in overlapping work
orders as a common source.
Ignore Conflicts in the Normal conflict checking will display a conflict warning when a
Same WO resource is booked more than once in the same work order. Select
selected, no warning is given if a resource is booked more than once in
the same work order.
Permission Required Determines whether the resource requires permission from the client
to be used in a booking. Refer to Permission to Use.
Hold Select (check) to automatically hold the room from being invoiced until
after it has been reviewed.
Add example, associate equipment with the room in which it permanently
Requirement resides.
Edit l Click Add to open the Resource browser and select specific
Release resources to book. Double-click the category, type, and individual
resource to select the exact resource. Double-click a category, or
category and type, to allow the system to automatically select a
matching resource at booking time.
association.

Room Properties – Accounting

The Accounting tab contains settings related to the costs of providing the room. Table 26 describes
the available settings.
Figure 64. Room Properties, Accounting Tab

Table 26. Room Properties, Accounting Tab Items
Item Description
Billing Description Enter the description for invoice and billing reports purposes.
Default Company (Multi-Company module only.) Click to assign the room to a specific
company. Click Clear ( ) to remove the assignment.
Default Cost Enter the cost to the facility or business to offer the use of this piece of
equipment, and select the unit of measure from the list to the right of
the currency amount.
Booking Availability
Availability Available Block defined in order to book the resource. Refer to
Effective (Date) Enter the date on which the resource was (or will be) first available for

Table 26. Room Properties, Accounting Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Expiration (Date) Enter the date after which the resource was (or will be) no longer
clients.
OK.
warning.
Active Displays the number of clients selected in the Rolling Window
Settings dialog. If None is selected, 0 displays. If All is selected,
1 displays.
Commission (for Acct The amount of commission the Account Executive will receive for a
Executive) booking using this room.
Maximum Discount Enter the maximum percent discount rate that can be applied to this
room.
pointing arrow. Refer to the External Cost Manager chapter of the
ScheduALL Users Guide for more external cost features.
to see Cost not have permissions to view hidden cost information. Refer to Can

Table 26. Room Properties, Accounting Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Requires Vendor (Requires External Cost Manager module.) Select (check) to display a
Notification flag on work order block when the resource is booked, to indicate that
the resource is supplied by an outside vendor who requires
notification. The flag displays as the letter “N” after a payable has been
created.
Not Commissionable Select (check) this option if the room is not a commissionable item.
Limit Discounts Select (check) this option to limit the discount that can be offered to
the Maximum Discount amount.
Ledger Entries Enter the ledger account numbers for Internal Clients and External
Clients.
Room Properties – Connector

Refer to General Resource – Connector for more information and an illustration of this tab.
Room Properties – Services
The Services tab lists the services which can be performed in the room. Table 27 lists the available
settings.
Note: The Capable Rooms tab of the Service Properties dialog is also used to associate rooms and
available services, and changes made to one dialog are automatically reflected in the
corresponding dialog. Refer to Service Properties – Capable Rooms.

Figure 65. Room Properties, Services Tab

Table 27. Room Properties, Services Tab Items
Item Description
Services Available in Room Lists the services that can be carried out in this room.
Add Click to make a service available in the current room. The Select
Service for Room dialog displays. Select a service and click Select.
Release Click to remove the association with the selected service.
Room Properties – Preferences

The Preferences dialog contains properties related to the automatic selection of resources, such as
when booking a service or automatically replacing a requirement. Table 28 describes the available
settings.
Figure 66. Room Properties, Preferences Tab

Table 28. Room Properties, Preferences Tab
Item Description
Category, Type, Displays a list of resource preferences associated with the room.
Description, Action
Prefers to Use Click to specify resources that the system books if they are available.
The system selects another resource if the Preferred resource is not
available.
Must Use Click to specify resources that the system selects automatically; if a
Must Use resource is unavailable, the system generates a conflict
warning.
Cannot Use Click to specify resources that cannot be used in the room, and is
ignored when assigning resources automatically. Users who attempt
to book the resource in the room are notified that the resource cannot
be used in the room.
Alternate Preferred Click to specify resources that the system ignores if another resource
is available. The system books the Alternate Preferred resource only if
no other resource is available.
Remove Permanently deletes the currently selected preference entry.
Room Properties – Other

The Other tab contains miscellaneous room properties, including vendor information for external
costs. Table 29 describes the available settings.
Figure 67. Room Properties, Other Tab

Table 29. Room Properties, Other Tab Items
Item Description
Default Lead Time (Minutes) Enter the number of minutes to add as lead time for a work order.
The lead time displays on the scheduling calendar as a shaded area on
the left side of the work order block. User Preferences determine
whether Lead time triggers a conflict warning with new work orders.
(Refer to General User Preferences – Conflict Warnings.)
Lead time can also be added on a per-work order basis and does not
have to be added to the room properties.
Default Bumper Time Enter the Bumper Time, in minutes, to reserve a block of time after the
(Minutes) end of the work order and before any cleanup time. This time is not
billed to the client.
The bumper time displays on the work order block on the calendar
board and will trigger a conflict warning if you attempt to book a work
order that cuts into the bumper time.
Bumper time can also be added on a per-work order basis and does
not have to be added to the room properties.
Default Clean Up Time Enter the Cleanup Time, in minutes, to reserve a block of time after
(Minutes) the Bumper Time. This time can be used to reset equipment, change
staff in an edit suite, etc. This time is not billed to the client.
Clean-up time displays as part of the work order block on the calendar
board, and triggers a conflict warning when booking a work order that
cuts into the Clean-up time. Clean-up time can also be added on a per-
work order basis and does not have to be added to the room
properties.
Minimum Quantity Sold Enter minimum quantity allowed for bookings (used in conjunction with
Minimum Increment).
Minimum Increment Enter the number and unit of measure for a minimum increment by
(Increment Unit) which the room can be booked. Select the unit of measure from the list
to the right of the field.

Table 29. Room Properties, Other Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Concatenate Description Selecting a choice other than None will combine the resource type
name or the type and category names with the resource booking
description.
l None displays the normal booking description.
l Concatenate Type combines the resource type description with
the booking description.
l Concatenate Cat/Type combines the resource category and type
descriptions with the booking description.
Notes Enter any additional information about this room, or click the small
Notes Editor.
Pop-up to Schedulers Resource Notes can be displayed on the scheduler’s screen when a
user books the resource. The Pop-up to Schedulers setting allows the
see pop-up notes.
Scratch Pad Room Flags the room as a “holding place” in the Scheduling screen for work
(Link only) orders waiting for an available time slot in a transponder. The scratch
pad allows schedulers to arrange multiple work orders with no
conflicts while rearranging a schedule.
Generally only one Scratch Pad Room is defined per system. Scratch
Pads are user-specific; each scheduler sees only the items they have
moved to their own Scratch Pad, and does not see items in the
Scratch Pad of any other scheduler.
E-mail
Include in Notifications Select (check) to send notifications to the specified E-Mail Address.
Refer to Include in Notifications for more information.
Generate Notifications Select (check) to create a notification message in the database for this
resource. Refer to Alarm Notification.
Address Enter the e-mail address to which notifications will be sent. Use a
semicolon (;) to separate multiple e-mail addresses. Refer to Alarm
Notification for more information. Click the small filled square to
access an internal text editor. Refer to Notes Editor.

Table 29. Room Properties, Other Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
iCalendars.
Extended Trail Enabled Select (check) to allow the room to write information to the expanded
Note: This check box is not displayed on the d dialog. The check box
can be add using the Developer’s Tool Kit. For more
Vendor Browser
Vendor Name (Requires External Cost Manager.) Lists the outside vendor that
supplies a rented or leased room.
Vendor (Requires External Cost Manager.) Displays the Select Vendor
browser. Select the vendors from which rooms are rented or leased.
Edit Costs (Requires External Cost Manager.) Displays the Vendor Cost
Maintenance dialog. Refer to the Explicit Confirmation field in the
Resource Details, Main Tab Settings table in the Work Orders chapter
of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more information.
Release (Requires External Cost Manager.) Click to remove the selected
vendor from the list of suppliers.
Is Portal Booking Type Determines if this resource can be used in portal bookings.
Portal Type Determines the resource portal type. Select the portal type for the
resource from the list.
Setup.
Room Properties – Resource Questions

this tab.
Room Properties – Trail
Refer to General Resource – Trail for more information and an illustration of this tab.
Personnel Setup
The Personnel Properties dialog consists of the following tabs:
Personnel Properties – Main 115

Personnel Properties – Accounting 119
Personnel Properties – Shift Style 121
Adding a Shift Style 122

Editing or Removing a Shift Style 125
Personnel Properties– Identification 125

Personnel Properties – Other 126
Personnel Properties – Resource Questions 128
Personnel Properties – Trail 128
Personnel Properties – Connector 128
Personnel Properties – Main

the resource belongs, access to billing rates, and the specified billing and tax options. Table 30
Figure 68. Personnel Properties, Main Tab

Table 30. Personnel Properties, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Name Enter the name of the resource.
Address Enter the resource’s street address. Click the small filled square to

Table 30. Personnel Properties, Main Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
City, State, Zip, Telephone, Enter the information for each field, including an alternate phone
Alt. number if available.
E-mail Enter the e-mail address to which notifications will be sent. To enter
multiple e-mail addresses, use a semicolon (;) to separate each
address. Refer to Alarm Notification for more information. Click the
small filled square to access an internal text editor. Refer to Notes
Editor.
Assign Location Displays the Select Location dialog. Select a location for the resource
and click Select.
Check Availability Forces the system to check whether this person is available to be
used for a booking time. The system generates a conflict message
when a user attempts to book this person if the person is not available.
Refer to Availability Setup to define hours of availability.
Default to Standard Select (check) to indicate that there is no charge to book this person
by default.
confirmation.
Do not book without a shift Select (check) to trigger conflict warning if user attempts to schedule
person without a shift being scheduled first.

Item Description
Include in Notifications Select (check) to send notification messages stored in the database to
this resource. Refer to Include in Notifications for more information.
Open a Work Order and click the Save and Send E-Mail Notification
button on the toolbar to send a Work Order report to personnel flagged
with this option.
Generate Notifications Select (check) to create a notification message in the database for this
resource. Refer to Alarm Notification.
Requires Explicit Used for rooms and resources you share with other facilities or
Availability companies.
Calendar Enabled Determines if the resource is enabled to receive entries on their e-mail
calendar from the Notification Manager.
Ignore Conflicts in Same Normal conflict checking will display a conflict warning when a
WO resource is booked more than once in the same work order. Select
selected, no warning is given if a resource is booked more than once in
the same work order.
iCalendars.
Category/Type Browser Displays the categories and types to which the person is assigned.
Add Group the person into one or more categories and types. Click to
access the category and type selection browser.
user security settings. Refer to Can Add/Release People to
Release Select a category and type entry in the Category/Type browser and
click to remove the association.
user security settings. Refer to Can Add/Release People to
Category Overrides Click this button to set ledger account numbers and pay category.
Refer to Resource Catalog Setup and Multi-Role Personnel in the
Personnel Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .

Item Description
Cancellation Rates Click this button to display the Cancellation Rate Card dialog to
configure cancellation rates for the resource.
Book Browser adds to a booking whenever the current resource is booked. For
Add example, require a camera when booking a camera operator.
Requirement l Click Add to open the Resource browser and select specific
Edit resources to book. Double-click the category, type, and individual
Release resource to select the exact resource. Double-click a category, or
association.

Personnel Properties – Accounting

Figure 69. Personnel Properties, Accounting tab

Table 31. Personnel Properties, Accounting Tab Items
Item Description
Billing Description Description of personnel for invoice and billing reports purposes.
Pay Category Displays the Select Pay Category dialog and allows the user to select
the pay category for this resource. Click Clear ( ) to remove the
assignment. Requires the Personnel Manager module. Refer to the
Personnel Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more
information.
Hourly Cost (Overrides Pay The cost to you (in currency) for offering the use of this person’s labor.
Category)

Table 31. Personnel Properties, Accounting Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
clients.
OK.
warning.
Active Displays information on the client selection made in the Rolling
Window Settings dialog.
l None indicates that no clients were selected.
l All indicates that all clients were selected.
l Client Specific indicates that one or more clients were selected.
Commission % The amount of commission the Account Executive will receive for a
booking using this person.
Maximum Discount Enter a maximum percent discount rate that can be applied to what
you charge for this person’s labor.
to see Cost not have permissions to view hidden cost information. Refer to Can
External Cost Select (check) if the resource is a free lance or temporary employee
provided by an outside vendor. The resource is flagged in all browsers
with a rightward pointing arrow.
If you have the External Costs Manager module, you can further track
external costs.
created.

Table 31. Personnel Properties, Accounting Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Not Commissionable Select (check) if the resource is not a commissionable item.
Ledger Entries Enter your ledger account numbers for Internal Clients and External
Clients.
Personnel Properties – Shift Style

A shift style is a catalog of entries that manages the assignment of a ‘pay category’, ‘pay translator’ or
a ‘working time’ rule set. Each are assigned independently. A ‘pay translator’ and ‘working time’
assignment can be assigned to the same rule set. A shift style is in effect for a period of time and only
one shift style can be valid on any specific date. When an event is created a process will look for a
‘shift style’ record for this date and extract the properties to allow interpretation of the event under any
of the shift style methods. If it cannot find a shift style then the resource pay category will be used
only, if assigned. Table 32 describes the available settings. This tab does not display if the Working
Time Manager or Pay Translator licenses are not installed.
Figure 70. Personnel Properties, Shift Style Tab

Table 32. Personnel Properties, Shift Style Tab Items
Item Description
Pay Category Click to assign a pay category to this resource. The Select Pay
Category dialog displays.
Clear if set in Shift Styles When a shift style is created, the resource's default pay category is
assigned to the style. If you want that assign the pay category in the
shift style, click this button to remove the default pay category.
Add Style Click to add a new shift style. Refer to Adding a Shift Style.
Style List Displays the existing styles.
Description Displays information about the style.
Effective Date Displays the date that the style begins to be enforced.
Expiration Date Displays the date that the style ends being enforced.
Edit Style Click to make changes to the style. Refer to Editing or Removing a
Shift Style.
Remove Style Click to delete the selected style from this personnel.
Adding a Shift Style

To create a new shift style:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and then select Rooms & Resources.
2. Edit a personnel resource.
3. In the Personnel Properties dialog, click the Shift Style tab.
4. Click Add Style. The Pay Category Catalog dialog displays.
Figure 71. Pay Category Catalog, Main Tab

5. Enter information on each tab, as described below.

Main Tab Items

Table 33. Pay Category Catalog, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Description Displays information about the style.
Effective Date Displays the date that the shift style begins to be enforced.
Expiry Date Displays the date that the shift style ends being enforced.
Pay Category Click to select a pay category for the style from the Select Pay
Category dialog. Pay Category is used for the immediate interpretation
of the booking rules.
Override Displays and Category/Type overrides set up in Personnel Properties.
Category/Type
WTM Rule Tab Items

Working Time Manager (WTM) rules are used for the schedulers rules of making the booking. Click
the WTM Rule tab to display these items.
Figure 72. Pay Category Catalog, WTM Rule Tab

Table 34. Pay Category Catalog, WTM Rule Tab Items

Item Description
Rule Set Click to select a rule set for this style from the Select Working Time
Manager Rule Set dialog. Refer to Shift Rules.
User 1 and User 2 Enter any additional information in these fields. Click the filled square
to enter text in the ScheduALL Editor or click the unfilled square to
enter text in the ScheduALL HTML Editor.
Enabled This option is automatically selected when a rule set is chosen. To
disable a rule click Release to remove the rule set and clear this
option.
Pay Trans Rule Tab Items

Pay Translator is used for the final interpretation of booking rules (which encompasses the entire day,
previous and next days), which will replace any pay category interpretation. Click the Pay Trans
Rule tab to display these items.
Figure 73. Pay Category Catalog, Pay Trans Rule Tab

Table 35. Pay Category Catalog, Pay Trans Rule Tab Items
Item Description
Rule Set Click to select a rule set for this style from the Select Rule Set dialog.
Refer to Shift Rules.
User 1 and User 2 Enter any additional information in these fields. Click the filled square
to enter text in the ScheduALL Editor or click the unfilled square to
enter text in the ScheduALL HTML Editor.

Table 35. Pay Category Catalog, Pay Trans Rule Tab Items(continued)
Item Description
Enabled This option is automatically selected when a rule set is chosen. To
disable a rule click Release to remove the rule set and clear this
option.
Pay Scale Click to display the Select Pay Scale dialog and select a pay scale to
associate with this rule.
Band Level Select a band level from the list. A band level is a pay level, such as
those that apply a pay rate based on seniority, or union rules. Refer to
Defining Pay Scale Costs.
Editing or Removing a Shift Style

To change a shift style:
2. Select a personnel resource and click Edit. The Personnel Properties dialog displays.
3. Click the Shift Style tab.
4. Select a shift style from the list and click Edit Style. The Pay Category Catalog dialog
displays.
5. Make any necessary changes and click OK.
To delete a shift style:
2. Select a personnel resource and click Edit. The Personnel Properties dialog displays.
3. Click the Shift Style tab.
4. Select a shift style from the list and click Remove Style.
Personnel Properties– Identification
The Identification tab contains properties related to credentials of the personnel resource. Table 36
Figure 74. Personnel Properties, Identification Tab

Table 36. Personnel Properties, Identification Tab Settings
Item Description
Full Name Enter the person’s full, legal name.
Employee ID Enter the employee’s company-assigned employee number.
External Reference Enter a reference code for linking to other software applications.
Date of Birth Enter person’s date of birth. Click the calendar icon to access the pop-
up calendar dialog, or click one part of the date to select it, and type
over the existing text.
Hire Date Enter person’s date of hire. Click the calendar icon to access the pop-
up calendar dialog, or click one part of the date to select it, and type
over the existing text.
Photo Click to access the Open file dialog box, select the photo file for the
employee. The photo is displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the
Person dialog.
Internal Notes Enter any additional information about this resource, or click the small
Notes Editor.
Personnel Properties – Other

The Other tab contains miscellaneous personnel properties. Table 37 describes the available
settings.
Figure 75. Personnel Properties, Other Tab

Table 37. Personnel Properties, Other Tab Items
Item Description
Display Day Events in Select the period of time in which you want to display day events in
the Extended Monthly View and other summary information. This
setting is only effective if the system preference Default Day Based
Activities To Full Day is set to Yes.
l None does not change the default day events.
l Days displays the event as the number of hours defined in the
system preference Work Hours in a Day. If the preference is set
to 8, then the event displays as 8 hours.
l Hours displays the event as 24 hours.
Vacation Days/Year Enter the number of vacation days the employee is allowed per
calendar year. If a scheduler attempts to create more Vacation
activities than specified, the system generates a conflict warning.
Note: The Paid Day Off and Unpaid Day Off activities do not observe
this limitation.
Sick Days/Year Enter the number of sick days the employee is allowed per calendar
year. If a scheduler attempts to create any combination of Paid Sick
Day and Unpaid Sick Day activities that exceed the specified limit,
the system generates a conflict warning.
Sabbatical Days/Year Enter the number of sabbatical days the employee is allowed per
calendar year. If a scheduler attempts to create more Sabbatical
activities than specified, the system generates a conflict warning.
Days in Lieu/Year Enter the number of days in lieu the employee is allowed per calendar
year. If a scheduler attempts to create more Day In Lieu activities than
specified, the system generates a conflict warning.
Minimum Increment).
Minimum Increment Enter the minimum increment allowed for bookings. Select the unit of
(Increment Unit) measure from the list to the right of the field.
Notes Editor.

Table 37. Personnel Properties, Other Tab Items (above)
Item Description
Pop-up to Notes Schedulers Resource Notes can be displayed on the scheduler’s screen when a
see pop-up notes.
Extended Trail Enabled Select (check) to allow the room to write information to the extended
Note: This check box is not displayed on the standard dialog. The
check box can be add using the Developer’s Tool Kit. For more
Vendor Name (Requires External Cost Manager.) Lists the vendors that supply
personnel that is acquired from an outside vendor.
Select Vendors (Requires External Cost Manager.) Displays the Vendor browser.
Select the vendors from which personnel resources are acquired.
Repeat as necessary.
Maintenance dialog. Refer to Configuring Vendor Costs.
Setup.
Personnel Properties – Resource Questions

The Resource Questions tab of Personnel Properties dialog displays the same information as the
same tab in the Category Maintenance dialog. Refer to Category Maintenance – Resource
Questions for more information and an illustration of this tab and descriptions of each item.
Personnel Properties – Trail
Personnel Properties – Connector
Refer to General Resource – Connector for more information and an illustration of this tab.

Stock Resource Setup

Stock is a consumable item, and the system keeps a running total of stock quantities as items are
reserved for bookings. Use the Stock Properties dialog to check the available amount, or to add
inventory when a new shipment is received. Stock items are generally not used in ScheduLINK.
The Stock Properties dialog consists of the following tabs:
Stock Properties – Main
The Main tab contains core properties for stock resources, including inventory counts, categories and
types to which the stock belongs, access to billing rates, and the specified billing and tax options.
Table 38 describes the available options.
Figure 76. Stock Properties, Main Tab

Table 38. Stock Properties, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Description Enter a detailed description of the stock item.
Quantity Arrived Enter the quantity to add to the inventory when a shipment of stock
items is received. When the Stock dialog is closed, the Quantity
Arrived is added to the Quantity Available field and the value is reset to
0.
Note: Adding stock to inventory using the Quantity Arrived field does
not automatically lower the Quantity on Order.
Quantity Available Total amount of stock items in inventory. This information may also be
displayed on the Resource Availability indicator of the scheduling
calendar, as determined by System and User Preferences (Display
Resource Availability in Scheduling, and Stock).
Quantity on Order Enter or modify the quantity when ordering stock from a vendor to
prevent over-ordering, or when stock is received from a vendor.

Table 38. Stock Properties, Main Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
item by default.
and list them separately on work orders.
Category and Type Lists the category group and type group to which the stock belongs.
Refer to Resource Category Setup and Resource Type Setup.
Assign Group the stock into a category and type. Click to access the category
and type selection browser.
user security settings. Refer to Can Add/Release Stock to
Release When the current category and type entry is selected, click to remove
category and type group association.
user security settings. Refer to Can Add/Release Stock to
Catalog Setup.

Stock Properties – Accounting

describes the available options.
Figure 77. Stock Properties, Accounting Tab

Table 39. Stock Properties, Accounting Tab Items
Item Description
Billing Description Description of stock for invoice and billing reports purposes.
Default Cost Enter the cost to the facility or business to provide this stock. Select
the unit of measure from the list to the right of the currency amount.
Commission % Not applicable to stock.
Maximum Discount Enter a maximum percent discount rate that can be applied to this
stock item.
Require Special Security to Select (check) to display cost information as asterisks if the user does
See Cost not have permissions to view hidden cost information. Refer to Can
pointing arrow.
If you have the External Costs Manager module, you can further track
external costs.

Table 39. Stock Properties, Accounting Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
created.
Shippable Item Click to identify this as a resource that may be shipped when booked
into a work order. The resource will then be displayed on the Shippable
Items browser on the Shipping tab of the work order.
Not Commissionable Does not apply to stock resources.
Clients.

Stock Properties – Other

The Other tab contains miscellaneous stock properties, including minimum quantities and vendor
information for external costs. Table 40 describes the available settings.
Figure 78. Stock Properties, Other Tab

Table 40. Stock Properties, Other Tab Items
Item Description
External Reference Enter a code or ID for linking to other software applications.
Minimum Increment).
Minimum Increment Enter minimum increment allowed for bookings. Select the unit of
(Increment Unit) measure from the list to the right of the field.
setting. Use Minimum Quantity/Quantity Increment
Notes Editor.

Table 40. Stock Properties, Other Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Pop-up Notes to Schedulers Resource Notes can be displayed on the monitor of a scheduler when
a user books the resource. The Pop-up to Schedulers setting allows
the system to determine whether notes will be displayed to users
logged in as Internal users as well as users logged in as External
clients, Internal users only, or no notes are displayed.
see pop-up notes.
Vendor Name (Requires External Cost Manager.) Lists the vendors that supply
stock that is rented or purchased from an outside vendor.
Select Vendors (Requires External Cost Manager.) Displays the Vendor browser.
Select the vendors from which stock is rented or purchased. Repeat
as necessary.
Maintenance dialog. Refer to Configuring Vendor Costs in the External
Stock Properties – Resource Questions

this tab.
Stock Properties – Trail

Abstract Resource Setup

Abstract resources are resources that “bundle” other resources under one resource name. Abstract
resources are generally made up of categories and types, but not individual resources. When a
subscriber books an abstract resource, the system allocates the next available resource within that
category and type.
To allow ScheduALL’s conflict checking feature to correctly identify resource scheduling conflicts the
following scenarios are not recommended:
l creating an Abstract Resource without any other bundled resources
l bundling one Abstract Resource inside another Abstract Resource
Capacity checking for abstract resources applies to the resources directly subordinate to it. Checking
does not apply to resources bundled within a subordinate resource. For example, if an Abstract
Resource has bundled entries for Room/Online Edit, Editors/Staff, and VTR/Digital, the ScheduALL
system checks capacity for all three category/type combinations. However, if an Abstract Resource
has a bundled entry for Room/Online Edit, and that room has a bundled editor, the ScheduALL
system only checks conflicts and capacity for the room.
Adding an Abstract Resource
To add an abstract resource:
2. At the bottom of the Description column, click New. The Resource Types dialog displays.
3. Click Abstract, and then click OK. The Abstract Resource Setup dialog displays. The
ScheduALL system uses information from the following tabs of the Abstract Resource Setup
dialog:
l Abstract Resource Properties – Main
l Abstract Resource Properties – Auto Schedule
l Abstract Resource Properties – Accounting – Refer to Room Properties – Accounting.
l Abstract Resource Properties – Preferences – Refer to Room Properties – Preferences.
l Abstract Resource Properties – Other – Refer to Room Properties – Other.
l Abstract Resource Properties – Resource Questions – Refer to Category Maintenance
Dialog.
l Abstract Resource Properties – Trail – Refer to Room Properties – Trail.
l Abstract Resource Properties – Connector – Refer to Room Properties – Connector.
l Abstract Resource Properties – Services – Refer to Room Properties – Services.
4. Enter the necessary information on these tabs and click OK to save the changes.

Abstract Resource Properties – Main

The Main tab contains properties related to the core information about the abstract resource. Table 41
lists the available settings.
Figure 79. Abstract Resource Properties, Main Tab

Table 41. Abstract Properties, Main Tab Settings
Item Description
Room Description Enter the descriptive name of the room.
Assign Location Displays the Select Location dialog. Select the physical location of the
room.
Category/Type Lists the category group and type group to which the room belongs.
Add l Click Add to associate this room with additional categories and/
Release l or types.
the association.
user security settings. Refer to Can Add/Release Resources to
Price Maintenance dialog displays. Refer to Price Maintenance for
more information.

Table 41. Abstract Properties, Main Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Catalog Setup.
room. The Cancellation Rate Card Setup dialog displays. Refer to
item by default.
Confirmation, and displays the Needs Confirmation flag () on the
confirmation.
Notify Engineering Select (check) to include item in the report detailing schedules by
resource. Useful for engineering staff to plan equipment and room set
up and maintenance.
To run the report, click the Report menu and choose Schedules by
Resource.
Availability Available Block defined in order to book the resource. Refer to Refer to
charges, if a booking which contains the resource is canceled.

Table 41. Abstract Properties, Main Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Portal Type Lists the booking type options for bookings used in the Portal feature
of the ScheduALL WebApp system. Select an option from the list.
l General Booking displays the booking path for non-transmission
bookings.
l Satellite displays the booking path for satellite transmission
bookings.
l Terrestrial displays the booking path for terrestrial transmission
bookings.
Hold Select (check) to automatically hold the room from being invoiced until
after it has been reviewed.
Add example, associate equipment with the room in which it permanently
Requirement resides.
Edit l Click Add to open the Resource browser and select specific
Release resources to book. Double-click the category, type, and individual
resource to select the exact resource. Double-click a category, or
association.
Abstract Resource Properties – Auto Schedule

The Auto Schedule tab contains settings for the abstract resource when included in an Auto
Scheduled work order. Table 42 lists the available settings.

Figure 80. Abstract Resource Properties, Auto Schedule Tab

Table 42. Abstract Properties, Auto Schedule Tab Settings
Item Description
Default Duration Enter the amount of time normally scheduled for this abstract
resource. From the unit of measure list, select Day, Hour, Minute, or
Week.
Default Priority From the Default Priority list, select the scheduling importance for the
resource. Priority settings are from 1 (Highest) to 9 (Lowest).
Default Start Time Determines the time that will be entered in the Earliest Start Time field
of an auto-scheduled work order when this resource is booked as the
master resource.
Default Deadline Time Determines the time that will be entered in the Deadline Time field of
an auto-scheduled work order when this resource is booked as the
master resource.
Schedule Window This setting determines when the system will begin to search for a
[value/unit of time] before time to schedule a work order containing this resource. Enter the
earliest start amount of time before the earliest start of an auto scheduled work
order when the system will start to try to schedule it. From the unit of
measure list, select Day, Hour, Minute, or Week.
Note: Leaving this value blank or entering 0 will result in the work
order being placed on the scheduling calendar immediately.
For example, if the work order in which this resource is booked has an
earliest start date on February 14th at 1 p.m. and you enter 1 Week
here, the system will start trying to schedule the work order on
February 7th at 1 p.m.
Note: The Scheduling Window must be set before the Freeze
Schedule setting.

Table 42. Abstract Properties, Auto Schedule Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Freeze Schedule [value/unit This setting determines the point at which the system can no longer
of time] before actual start move an auto scheduled work order containing this resource. Enter the
amount of time before the actual start of the work order when the
booking time will be finalized and the booking immovable. From the
unit of measure list, select Day, Hour, Minute, or Week.
For example, if the work order in which this resource is booked is
scheduled to start at 1 p.m. on Thursday and you enter 2 Days here,
the work order cannot be moved by the system after Tuesday at
1 p.m.
Reserve Capacity Only Select (check) this option to prevent this resource from being auto
(Schedule Manually) scheduled. The resource can only be used in a work order with a set
date and time.
Resource Classification Setup

The Classification setting (Link only) available within the resource properties dialogs (such as Room
Properties and General Resource Properties) determine the icon used to represent the resource on
the Visual Path diagram, and the lines used to connect the resource to other resources in the visual
path.
To create or modify a Resource Classification:
2. Select a resource Category (such as Terrestrial Network) and Type (such as Backbone)
that contain Room or General Resource items.
3. Double-click an existing Room or General Resource, such as Net Backbone.
4. Click the Path Mgmt tab to bring that page forward.
5. Click Classification. The Resource Classification dialog displays.
Figure 81. Resource Classification Browser

6. Click New to create a new Resource Classification, OR
Select an existing Resource Classification and click Edit.

7. The Resource Classification Properties dialog displays in Edit mode.
Figure 82. Resource Classification Properties Dialog

8. Enter a Classification description; this value is visible when selecting the Classification in
Resource Setup, and should generally indicate the kind of resource for which it is intended.
9. Click Source Icon to select the icon displayed on the visual path when a resource of this
classification is booked as a Source in a network path or circuit. The Select Icon dialog
displays the list of icons available within the ScheduLINK system; select an icon appropriate
to this type of resource. For example, set an Antenna classification to the Uplink, Uplink 2,
Antenna Up, or Mast.
Note: Most icons related to network classifications are between one-third and one-half of the
way down the list of icons.
10. Click Destination Icon to select the icon displayed on the visual path when a resource of this
classification is booked as a Destination in a network path or circuit. The Select Icon dialog
displays the list of icons available within the ScheduLINK system; select an icon appropriate
to this type of resource. For example, set an Antenna classification to the Downlink,
Downlink 2, Antenna Down, or Mast.
11. Determine the line style to be used when connecting this resource to another resource; select
only one line style per classification.
a. Click Horizontal Lines (e.g. terrestrial resource) to connect this resource to other
resources by displaying an icon of a horizontal line, and select an appropriate icon, such as
Fiber 1, Fiber 2, Comm Link, Fibre 1, or Fibre 2.
b. Click Angled Lines (e.g. satellite resource) to connect this resource to other resources
using system-generated angled lines.

12. The ScheduLINK system automatically sets the User Field 1 value based on the line style.
Changing this setting is not recommended.
l When set to use the Horizontal line style (User Field 1 = 0), the ScheduLINK system
displays the resource Source Icon or Destination Icon at the same vertical position (“ground
level”) as other resources set to use horizontal lines.
l When set to use the Angled line style (User Field 1 = 50), the ScheduLINK system displays
the resource Source Icon or Destination Icon at a vertical position (“satellite level”) slightly
above the other resources set to use horizontal lines (“ground level”).
Note: The Visual Path diagram shown in Figure 83 only displays space for “satellite height”
resources if a path contains one or more resources set to the Angled line style, such as
in Path 1. Adding an Angled line style resource (i.e. Galaxy 26) to the second path after
NY Hub would display the resource in a new Satellite Height area below the Ground
Height for Path 1 area, and above the Ground Height for Path 2 area, with a line
connecting from NY Hub up to Galaxy 11.
Figure 83. Visual Display of Height Levels

13. Click OK to save all changes to the resource classification.
Resource Groups
Resource groups combine related resources into a single item to simplify certain tasks. While
resource categories and types are used to identify resources that are similar to each other in nature,
such as all staff editors, resource groups are used to identify resources that are similar to each other
in function, such as all edit suites, editors, and machinery related to Editing tasks. Resource groups
are used to filter resources in the following areas of the system:
Scheduling screen — Selecting a resource group limits the amount of information displayed on the
calendar board, to group resources that are consistently booked together.
Resources List — Selecting a resource group limits the resources available in the resource browsers
used to add resources to services, work orders, and more.
Reporting — Selecting a resource group limits the amount of information displayed in reports. All
reports in ScheduALL can be filtered for specific resource groups, which provides a method to track
information relating to revenue, usage, and production for subsections of the business. For example,
group resources by geographic region to run revenue reports for each region.
Refer to Resource Group Setup and Edit, Copy, or Delete a Resource Group.

Resource Group Setup

To create a new resource group:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Resource Groups. The Resource Group
Figure 84. Resource Group Maintenance

2. Click New.
3. Enter the Group Name to identify this group. (By default the Select Group list box displays
approximately 18-20 characters on most standard dialogs.)
4. Click to select the appropriate categories, types and resources to add to the Resource Group:
l Select a category from the Category column to add the category (with all associated types
and resources).
l Select a type within a category from the Type column to add all associated resources.
l Select a resource within a category and type from the Description columns to add specific
resources.

5. Click Add to add the selected items to the group, OR

Click Float to add a floating category/type combination to a resource group. When resources
are added to (or removed from) the appropriate category/type, the system automatically
updates the resource group.
The Resource Description list displays the resources added to the group. Resource categories
are shown in red, resource types are shown in blue, and individual resources are shown in
black.
Figure 85. Resource Group, Resource Description List

6. Set the default display setting of categories and types. In the Selected column:
l Select (check) a category or type to automatically display the category or type on the
scheduling calendar when the resource group is selected.
l Deselect (clear) a resource to prevent it from automatically displaying in the resource list on
the scheduling calendar when the resource group is selected. Users can still display these
items manually by selecting them in the Category and Type browsers.
In this example all rooms (Online Edit and Offline Edit) will be displayed on the scheduling
calendar when the Edit Group is selected. Editors will not be automatically displayed.
7. Set the display order of group members.
l To set display order manually, drag a category, type, or resource to a new location.
l To sort types or resources alphabetically (by the first letter), select the category or type to
be sorted and click Sort Item.
l To sort all items in the listing, click Sort All.
8. To remove a resource from the group, select the resource and then click Remove.
9. Click Save to save the group, or click Abandon Changes to cancel.
Edit, Copy, or Delete a Resource Group
To modify, duplicate, or permanently remove an existing resource group:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Resource Groups. The Resource Group
2. Select a group from the Current Group list.
3. To modify an existing group, click Edit. Add or remove categories, types, or resources as
described in Resource Group Setup, and click Save.
4. To create a new group based on the existing group, click Copy. Add or remove categories,
types, or resources as described in Resource Group Setup, modify the Group Name, and
click Save.

5. To permanently remove the resource group, click Delete. A confirmation dialog displays; click
Yes to delete the group.
Note: Deleting a resource group does not remove the resource entries assigned to the group.
Refer to Deleting an Unused Resource for information on deleting individual
resources.
Personnel Shift Rotations/Patterns

Shift rotations and patterns are pre-defined patterns of activities that starts on a specified date, end
on a specified date, and contain a repeating series of one or more repeating activities within the
specified period. Refer to Personnel Shift Rotations and Patterns for information on setting up this
feature.
Service Setup
Overview
The ScheduALL system allows supervisors to create pre-defined services by bundling resources or
requirements together, and specify combined billing rates for a service.
Services save time by allowing a scheduler to apply the service to a work order, rather than assigning
the same set of individual resources over and over. For example, the administrator can create a
“Digital Editing” service which includes a staff editor, two DigiBeta VTRs, and a Chyron. When a
client needs to book a work order to digitally edit a piece of work, the scheduler can select the service
rather than adding each individual resource.
Services can be extremely flexible. You can, for example, set up a service that specifies only a
certain type of resource (any staff editor, for example), or that specifies a particular resource (editor
John Doe, for example). If you specify a type of resource, the system will book the first available
resource of that type. If you specify a particular resource and it is not available, the system will inform
you of the conflict.
Note: For information regarding Pivot Services, refer to the Pivot Services.
An additional method of bundling resources is ScheduALL’s Abstract Resource feature. For more
information, refer to Abstract Resource Setup.

Adding a Service
To add a service to the system:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Services. The Service Maintenance dialog
displays.
2. Click New. The Service Properties dialog displays. The ScheduALL system uses information
from the following tabs of the Service Properties dialog:
l Service Properties – Main
l Service Properties – Accounting
l Service Properties – Capable Rooms
l Service Properties – Service Questions
l Service Properties – Other
l Service Properties – Path Management (Link only)
l The Dub tab is used by the Duplication Module. Refer to Service Properties – Dub in the
Duplication chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide . The Dub tab only displays when Is
Dub Service is checked. Refer to Is Dub Service?.
Service Properties – Main
The Main tab of the Service Properties dialog provides core information about the service, including
service descriptions, bundled resources, and access to billing, tax, and cancellation rates associated
with the service. Table 43 describes all fields and buttons.
To display this dialog, refer to Adding a Service.
Figure 86. Service Properties, Main Tab

Table 43. Service Properties, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Service Description Descriptive name of the service.
Billing Description Description of service to be used on invoices.
Engineering Description Description for engineering department. This field can be displayed on
reports if you have Developers Toolkit.
item by default.
and projects. (Quote and project features require the Quotes Manager
and Project Manager modules, respectively.)
charges if a booking which contains the resource is canceled.
Include in Self-Provisioning Select (check) to make the resource available in the Portal feature of
the ScheduALL WebApp system.
Allow Portal Additional Select (check) to allow a user to add resources in addition to those
Resources contained in the service when creating a ScheduALL Portal™ booking.
WebApp Service Type Determines the booking path in WebApp based on which service is
selected.
l General Booking displays the booking path for non-transmission
bookings.
l Satellite displays the booking path for satellite transmission
bookings.
l Terrestrial displays the booking path for terrestrial transmission
bookings.
Billing Rates Click this button to set prices for the service using the Price
Maintenance dialog.
Service prices override default category, type, and resource level
prices when a resource is booked as part of a service. Service prices
do not affect the prices of individual resources when those resources
are not booked as part of the service.
Refer to Service Setup.

Table 43. Service Properties, Main Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
service. The Cancellation Rate Card Setup dialog displays. Refer to
Resources to Include Displays the resources or requirements which the system
Browser automatically adds to a work order whenever the current service is
Add booked. For example, booking an edit service includes an editor and
Requirement editing equipment, while booking a transmission service includes the
Edit appropriate source, relays, and destination.
Remove l Click Add to open the Resource Maintenance browser and select
BandPlan specific resources to add to the service. Double-click the
category, type, and individual resource to select the exact
resource. Double-click a category, or category and type, to allow
the system to automatically select a matching resource at
booking time.
information, such as changing the quantity. Refer to Resource to
Auto-Include, Main Tab.
l Select a resource or requirement and click Remove to remove the
item from the service.
l Click BandPLAN to open the Select BandPLAN Resource
browser and select BandPLAN resources to add to the service.
Refer to Resource to Auto-Include, Main Tab.
Specifying Capacity for a Resource in a Service

To include a BandPLAN resource in a service (Link only):
1. On the Main tab of the Service Properties dialog click BandPLAN. The Select BandPLAN
dialog displays.
2. Double-click a BandPLAN resource. The capacity selector dialog displays.
Figure 87. Capacity Selector Dialog

3. Double-click the appropriate amount of bandwidth required for this BandPLAN.

To define the capacity for each non-BandPLAN resource in a service:

1. In the Resources to Include list (refer to Service Properties – Main) double-click a non-
BandPLAN resource. The Resource to Auto-Include dialog displays.
2. Click the LINK tab to bring that page forward. Enter the desired capacity in the Capacity Req’d
field.
Figure 88. Resource to Auto-Include

Resource to Auto-Include, Main Tab
The Resource to Auto-Include dialog allows the user to specify the properties applied to a resource
booking generated by a service. To display this dialog double-click a resource in the Resources to
Include browser. Refer to Resources to Include Browser.
The Main tab contains basic information about the resource included in the service. Table 44
describes all settings.
Figure 89. Resource to Auto-Include Dialog, Main Tab

Table 44. Resource to Auto-include Dialog, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Category (Read only.) Displays the Resource Category of the requirement,
resource placeholder, or selected resource.
Type (Read only.) Displays the Resource Type of the requirement, resource
placeholder, or selected resource. This field is blank for requirements
and resource placeholders that are specified by category only.
Description (Read only.) Displays the Description of the selected resource. This
field is blank for requirements, and resource placeholders specified by
category or category/type.
Quantity Displays the count of separate resources that will be booked when the
service is booked. The system creates the specified number of
bookings for the current requirement, placeholder, or resource. (In
general, the Quantity field should be used primarily for requirements
and resource placeholders, and should not be used when booking
specific Room or Personnel type resources.)
For example, if Category is Editors, Type is Staff, and Quantity is 3,
the system will create three separate bookings for the specified
category and type.
Standard (Do not Bill) Determines whether the system calculates a price for the item. This
field overrides the setting at the resource level for resources booked
using the service only.
l Selected (checked) identifies the resource booking as Std, and
does not calculate pricing information for the booking. Generally
this setting is used to indicate that pricing is calculated for the
entire service, rather than for each resource within the service.
l Deselected (cleared) determines the price of the booking as usual
when the when the service is booked into a work order, or the
service-based requirement is fulfilled.
User Select Determines whether the system allows the user to select the resource
at the time the service is booked. This field is only applicable for
resource placeholders specified by category or category/type.
l Selected (checked) prompts the user to select a resource of the
appropriate category (or category and type) when the service is
booked into a work order. If the user does not select a resource,
the system offers the option to create a requirement or
automatically select a matching resource.
l Deselected (cleared) automatically selects a resource that
matches the specified category or category/type when the
service is booked into a work order.
Master Determines whether the resource is designated as the master event
when automatically booked into a work order from an existing queue in
a host scheduling system.

Table 44. Resource to Auto-include Dialog, Main Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
No Cost Resource Determines whether the resource calculates a cost for this item.
l Selected (checked) identifies the resource booking as No Cost,
and does not calculate cost information for the booking. Generally
this setting is used to indicate that costs are calculated for the
entire service, rather than for each resource within the service.
l Deselected (cleared) determines the cost of the booking as usual
when the when the service is booked into a work order, or the
service-based requirement is fulfilled.
Note: When the No Cost Resource option is selected, the Cost figure
for the resource is displayed in the Costs tab of the work order.
However, the Total Cost for the resource is 0.
Preferred Determines whether the bandwidth segment has preferred status.
l Selected (checked) identifies the resource as a preferred pool in
the ScheduALL Portal system.
l Deselected (cleared) identifies the resource as a non-preferred
pool in the ScheduALL Portal system.
Pool ID Identifies the number of the segment of bandwidth.
Resource to Auto-Include, Link Tab

The LINK tab contains information related to ScheduLINKBandPLAN and path management
features. The ScheduLINK license is required to display this tab.Table 45 describes all settings.
Figure 90. Resource to Auto-Include Dialog, LINK Tab

Table 45. Resource to Auto-Include Dialog, LINK Tab Settings
Item Description
Add only if not already Determines whether the system adds the resource to the work order if
present in work order a booking for the resource already exists.
l Selected (checked) adds the current resource only if the specified
resource is not already booked in the work order.
l Deselected (cleared) always books the resource.
Insert Before Parent (Visual Determines whether the system positions the resource in a Visual
Path) Path in front of its parent resource.
l Selected (checked) positions the resource in front of its parent
resource.
l Deselected (cleared) does not change the position of the
resource in the Visual Path.
Set Availability Concern Determines whether the system includes this resource when
calculating the availability of the abstract resource to which it is
bundled.
l Selected (checked) includes this resource when calculating
availability of the abstract resource.
l Deselected (cleared) does not includes this resource when
calculating availability of the abstract resource.
Xmit Role Determines the transmission role of the resource within the booking,
and overrides the default role specified for the resource. Refer to the
ScheduLINK Users Guide for more information about transmission
role descriptions, the Default Transmission Role defined for a
resource, and the Transmit Role specified for a resource within in a
circuit.
l N/A indicates there is no transmission role for the resource in the
current service. (Default setting.)
l Any role applies the appropriate transmission role to the current
resource when the service is booked.

Table 45. Resource to Auto-Include Dialog, LINK Tab Settings(continued)
Item Description
Branch Path at Determines the “parent” resource within the current service at which
an additional path is created.
l N/A creates either zero or one path only. (Default setting.)
l Any resource creates an additional path or branch at the
selected resource, with the current resource as the first node of
the branch. Each branch within the service should have a
separate destination, but may include additional resources
between the branch and the destination.
Capacity Req’d Determines the amount of capacity reserved against the current
resource for the booking. Refer to the ScheduLINK Users Guide for
more information about the Total Capacity defined for a resource, and
the Capacity Used by a resource booking.
l 0.000 indicates that no capacity is required by the resource.
l Any number reserves the specified amount of capacity against
the current resource when the service is booked.
Service Properties – Accounting

The Accounting tab of the Service Properties dialog contains information related to the costs of
providing the service. Table 46 describes the available settings.
Figure 91. Service Properties, Accounting Tab

Table 46. Service Properties, Accounting Tab Items
Item Description
Billing Description Description of service for invoice and billing reports purposes (you can
enter the billing description here or on the Main page).
Default Cost Enter the cost to the facility or business to offer this service. Select
the unit of measurement from the list to the right of the currency
amount.
Is Dub Service? (Requires Duplication Module.) Select (check) to configure the current
service as a Duplication service. The Dub tab described in Service
Properties – Dub in the Duplication chapter of the ScheduALL Users
Guide is visible only for Dub Services.
Is Ship Service? (Requires Shipping Module.) Select (check) to configure the current
service as a Shipping service and make it available to the Shipping
areas of the Work Order and Dub Order forms.
Is Shippable? (Requires Shipping Module.) Select (check) to configure the current
service as a shippable item or asset which can be added to shipping
parcels.
Cost Select (check) to indicate the service is provided by an outside
vendor. In the work order, resource browsers on Main and Resources
tabs display an External Cost flag ( ), and the External column of the
Costs tab displays “Yes” if the resource is an external cost.
The optional External Costs Manager module also allows the facility to
track additional information related to external costs. Refer to the
External Cost Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
Notification flag on work order block when the service is booked, to indicate that
the service is supplied by an outside vendor who requires notification.
The flag displays as the letter “N” after a payable has been created.
Commission % Enter percentage account executive will receive if service is booked in
a work order.
Not Commissionable Select (check) if the service is not subject to commission.
Maximum Discount Enter a maximum percent discount rate that can be applied to this
service.

Table 46. Service Properties, Accounting Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Clients.
Service Properties – Capable Rooms

The Capable Rooms tab displays the rooms in which this service can be booked. Table 47 describes
Note: The Services tab of the Room Properties dialog is also used to associate rooms and available
services, and changes made to one dialog are automatically reflected in the corresponding
dialog. Refer to Room Properties – Services.
Figure 92. Service Properties, Capable Rooms Tab

Table 47. Service Properties, Capable Rooms tab items
Item Description
Available in these Rooms Displays the list of rooms in which the service can be booked.
Available in All Rooms Select (check) to make the service available in all rooms.
Add to List Displays the Select Rooms for Service dialog and allows the user to
select one or more rooms in which the service can be booked.
Remove from List Removes the currently selected room from the list of rooms in which
the service can be booked.

Service Properties – Service Questions

The Service Questions tab allows a user to create questions that will be answered when a service is
booked as part of a work order.
Figure 93. Service Properties, Service Questions Tab

When the service is booked in a work order the questions display on the Main tab.
Figure 94. Work Order Dialog, Main Tab, Service Questions

Answers to these questions are saved as part of the work order, and questions and answers are also
displayed on the report “Standard Work Order - (with Service Questions)” (WO_BASE3.RPT). To
access this report, from the Reports menu select Print Work Orders & Billing Authorizations.
The system allows a user to import service questions from another service. Importing questions from
another service overwrites any existing questions. Click Copy Questions from another Service
and select a service from the Service Maintenance dialog. The service questions from the selected
service are imported into the fields of the current service.

Service Properties – Other

The Other tab contains information about minimum quantities, additional notes, and external vendors.
Table 48 describes all fields and buttons.
Figure 95. Service Properties, Other Tab

Table 48. Service Properties, Other Tab Items
Item Description
Minimum Increment). System Preferences determine whether the
system enforces this setting. Refer to Use Minimum
Quantity/Quantity Increment.
Minimum Increment Enter minimum increment allowed for bookings. Select the unit of
(Increment Unit) measure from the list to the right of the field. System Preferences
determine whether the system enforces this setting. Refer to Use
Minimum Quantity/Quantity Increment.
Assign to Category/Type Click to group the service into a resource category or category and
type. This is strictly for display and grouping purposes in areas such
as quotes and project trees, and does not result in any added
functionality such as pricing or ledger overrides.
Notes Enter any additional information about this service, or click the small
Notes Editor.

Table 48. Service Properties, Other Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Pop-up to Schedulers Service Notes can be displayed on the scheduler’s screen when a
see pop-up notes.
Vendor Name Lists the vendors that supply the service, if the service is provided by
an outside vendor.
Select Vendors Click to access the Vendor browser and select vendor for this service.
Repeat as necessary.
Edit Costs Access the Vendor Cost Maintenance dialog to edit the costs to you of
renting or purchasing the service.
Service Properties – Path Management

A service is the starting point for a booked circuit, and Circuit Selection functionality requires some
additional information at the service level. The Path Management tab is described in Service Setup –
Path Management.
Service Properties – Trail
The Trail tab of the Service Properties dialog contains a list of changes made to the service. For
example, if the Description field is updated, the Trail displays a line item with the following
information:
l the date and time the change was made
l the name of the user making the change
l a description of what information was changed

The information displayed is read-only and cannot be changed.
Figure 96. Service Properties, Trail Tab

To enable audit trail logging, you must set the System Preference Log on Audit Trail changes to
Resources/Stock/Services Setup? to Yes. Refer to Log on Audit Trail changes to
Resources/Stock/Services Setup?. Changes are tracked for creating, deleting, or updating a
resource. Only those fields associated with resource properties are logged on the Trail tab.
Pivot Services
When defining services that create a transmission path in the ScheduLINK system, the user must
configure the service to include resources in order, from Source (first resource) to Destination (last
resource). By default, the system “explodes the service” (i.e. books the service’s resources into the
work order) in the same order, starting with the Source and ending with the Destination.
For example, in Sample Data the Chicago to LA - Audio Only service includes five resources. If
the two Hubs are replaced with User Select resources, the user is prompted to select the Source first,
and then the Destination.
Table 49. Service Setup - “Resources to Include” for Chicago to LA - Audio Only
Category Type Description Transmit Order

Type
Terrestrial Network Hubs Chicago Hub Source 1
Net Encoders CG (auto-select) Relay Point 2
Terrestrial Network Backbone Net Backbone Relay Point 3
Net Decoders LA (auto-select) Relay Point 4
Terrestrial Network Hubs LA Hub Destination 5
In comparison, making a service a Pivot Service allows the administrator to specify a different order
for the service explosion (and user prompts), allowing the system to apply Compatible Resource logic
and User Prompts beginning with the most important part of the circuit. For example, in an end-to-end
satellite booking, the highest priority may be to select the satellite space, and build the circuit around
it.
When creating Pivot Services, the administrator should observe the following limitations:

l A pivot service should not contain any resource that contains its own bundled resource(s).
l A service should not contain a Pivot Service as a bundled item.
l A ‘Pivot Service’ cannot automatically create predefined circuit branches. Users can manually
add branches to the circuit once the Service has been booked.
l Extended Operations commands relating to this new Pivot Service. e.g. users will not be able
to apply the Pivot Service to multiple Work Orders through Extended Operations.
l A Pivot Service can only be booked into a work order from within a Work Order form. For
example, the user cannot right-click a booking block and click Add Service to select a Pivot
Service.
l For bundled Resources in a Pivot Service:
l The Quantity field must not be greater than 1
l The ‘book before parent’ flag cannot be used and should be left clear
l Requirements within the Service Explosion List are excluded from the Pivot functionality.
Refer to Creating a Pivot Service.

Creating a Pivot Service
To create a Pivot Service:
1. Modify the Service Setup dialog as described in Pivot Services.
2. Log on as a supervisor, or with permission to create and modify services.
displays.
4. Click New to create a new service. The Service Properties dialog displays.
5. Enter a Service Description.
7. Select (check) Is Pivot Service?.

8. Optionally select (check) Book Backwards from Pivot then Forward to determine the
booking order from the Pivot Resource. For example, in the service shown in Table 50, Order
A indicates the order where Book Backwards from Pivot then Forward is cleared, and
Order B indicates the booking order when the setting is selected.
When this option is deselected (cleared), the service:
l Books the resource flagged as the Pivot Resource.
l Inserts the next resource after the pivot resource, and continues booking each resource
after the previous resource to the last resource in the service.
l Inserts the next resource before the pivot resource, and continues booking each resource
before the previous resource, to the first resource in the service.
When this option is selected (checked), the service:
l Books the resource flagged as the Pivot Resource.
l Inserts the next resource before the pivot resource, and continues booking each resource
before the previous resource, to the first resource in the service.
l Inserts the next resource after the pivot resource, and continues booking each resource
after the previous resource, to the last resource in the service.
If any of the resources are flagged as a User Select, the system generates the appropriate
user prompt if necessary. Click the Main tab to bring that page forward.
Table 50. Service Setup - “Resources to Include” for End to End Service
Category Type Description Pivot Transmit Order A Order B

Type
Satellite Encoder (User Select) Source 5 3
Services
Satellite Up/Dwn (auto-select) Relay Point 4 2
Services
BandPlan Link 6 (User Select) Yes Relay Point 1 1
Satellite Up/Dwn (auto-select) Relay Point 2 4
Services
Satellite Decoder (User Select) Destination 3 5
Services
9. Add resources to the Resources to Include list:
l Click BandPlan to add a BandPlan resource, such as a satellite or fiber line, to the circuit.
lClick Add, select a Category, optionally select a Type, and click the (Select) icon to
add a general resource, such as an antenna, encoder, or decoder to the circuit.
10. Verify that the service will build a valid circuit:
a. Double-click the first resource that will serve as the circuit source, click the LINK tab to
bring that page forward, and change the Xmit Role to Source.
b. Double-click the first resource that will serve as the circuit destination, click the LINK
tab to bring that page forward, and change the Xmit Role to Destination.
c. Double-click all other resources in the service that will participate in the circuit, click the
LINK tab to bring that page forward, and change the Xmit Role to Relay Point.
11. To prompt the user to select a resource when the service is booked, double-click the resource,
select (check) User Select, and click OK.

12. To identify the first resource booked when the service is exploded (i.e. the Pivot Resource),
double-click the resource, click the LINK tab to bring that page forward, and select (check)
Pivot Resource.
Note: Each Pivot Service must have one, and only one, resource identified as the Pivot
Resource.
13. Click OK to save the service.
Edit, Copy, or Delete a Service

displays.
2. To edit a service, select the service and click Edit. Click Browse [...] to search the list by
name or with wildcard expressions. Refer to Using Wildcards in the Scheduling chapter of the
ScheduALL Users Guide for more information. The Service Maintenance dialog displays.
Make any necessary changes to the following tabs, and click OK to save all changes.
l Service Properties – Main.
l Service Properties – Accounting.
l Service Properties – Capable Rooms.
l Service Properties – Service Questions.
l Service Properties – Other.
l The Dub tab is used by the Duplication Module. Refer to Service Properties – Dub in the
Duplication chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
l The Path Mgmt tab is used by the ScheduLINK system. Refer to the ScheduLINK Users
Guide.
3. To copy an entry, select the service and click Copy. The Service Maintenance dialog displays
a duplicate of the original entry’s information. Make any necessary changes, and click OK to
save all changes to the new entry.
4. To delete an entry, select the service and click Delete. A confirmation dialog displays; click
Yes to delete the entry.

Producers, Account Executives, and Directors

Overview
The ScheduALL system stores address, telephone, and e-mail information for producers, account
executives, and directors. The system also provides the ability to associate producers and account
executives with a work order or project, and the ability to associate directors with a work order.
Producers generally supervise the overall creation and presentation of a film, broadcast program, or
similar work, and are generally in charge of finding financial backing for the work.
The ScheduALL system provides the flexibility to use producers in several ways. Establish a
proprietary relationship between a client and one or more producers to make the producers client-
specific. Client-specific producers are only available for activity involving their source client. (Refer to
Client, Contact, and Agency Setup for information about establishing producer-client relationships
and setting default producers for clients and contacts.) Or, establish a pool of general producers who
are available for any activity, regardless of client. Producers can be taken from the general pool and
made client-specific, and then changed back when the relationship is no longer valid.
The Supervisor setting in the Production Workflow Manager module uses a Producer entry tied to
ScheduALL user login to assign ownership of a project or production. Refer to Link to Producer and
Supervisor in the Master Project Dialog, Main Tab Settings table in the Production Workflow Manager
chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
Account Executives are generally involved in the financial details of creating and presenting a film,
broadcast program, or similar work. Create account executive entries to keep track of name, address,
and telephone information. Assign account executives to clients as defaults, or assign account
executives directly to work orders and projects.
Directors generally supervise and control the actors, action, lighting, and recording in the production
of a program or similar work. Create director entries to keep track of name, address, and telephone
information. Then assign directors to work orders.
Note: To bill for labor or track costs associated with a producer, account executive, or director,
create a Personnel resource entry instead. Refer to Managing Resources.
The setup dialogs for adding, editing, copying, and deleting entries for producers, account executives,
and directors are similar. Select the desired item from the Setup menu to manage these entries.
Producer setup was selected for these examples.
Adding a Producer, Account Executive, or Director

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Producers, Account Executives, or Director
Setup. The maintenance dialog for the selected item displays. The Producers Maintenance
dialog is displayed in Figure 97.

Figure 97. Producers Maintenance Dialog

2. Click New at the bottom of the dialog. The dialogs for the Producer, Account Executive, or
Director setup are identical. The Director Setup dialog is displayed in Figure 98 displays.
Figure 98. Director Setup Dialog

3. Enter the Name, Address, City, State, ZIP/Postal Code, Phone number, Alternate Phone
number, Fax number, and Email address. To enter multiple e-mail addresses, use a semicolon
(;) to separate each address.
4. Click OK when done.
Edit, Copy, or Delete a Producer, Account Executive, or Director

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Producers, Account Executives, or Director
Setup. The Maintenance dialog for the selected item displays.
2. To edit an entry, select it from the list and click Edit. The Setup dialog displays. Make any
necessary changes, and click OK to save all changes.
3. To copy an entry, select the it from the list and click Copy. The Setup dialog displays a
duplicate of the original entry’s information. Make any necessary changes, and click OK to
save all changes to the new entry.
4. To delete an entry, select the it from the list and click Delete. A confirmation dialog displays;
click “Yes” to delete the entry.

Client, Contact, and Agency Setup

The ScheduALL system provides the power to build, track and maintain a client base by defining
Clients, Contacts, and Agencies.
Clients are the companies or individuals who order, and are billed for, work. Client records are
required by the system to perform core features such as work order pricing and invoicing.
Agencies are companies that manage multiple clients. Agencies are optional.
Contacts are individual people or departments inside a client or agency organization. Contacts are
optional.
Ownership
System Preferences control whether agencies, clients, and contacts are used in a hierarchy of
ownership. With ownership enabled, contacts are associated with specific clients or agencies, and
clients are associated with specific agencies. With ownership disabled, the system maintains
separate lists of contacts, clients, and agencies with no enforced hierarchy. Refer to System
Options for more information.
Client Setup
To create client entries:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Clients, Contacts & Agencies. The Client
Figure 99. Client Maintenance

2. Click the Client tab to bring that page forward and then click New at the bottom of the dialog.

3. The client properties dialog displays the following tabs:

l Client Properties – Main
l Client Properties – Billing Information
l Client Properties – Custom Pricing
l Client Properties – Producers
l Client Properties – Aliases
l Client Properties – Other
l Client Properties – Activity Log
l Client Properties – Custom Cxl
l Client Properties – Preferences
l Client Properties – Contracts
l Client Properties - Seasons
l Client Properties - Attachment
l The Shipping tab of the Client Properties dialog is used by the optional Shipping Module.
Refer to the Shipping chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more information.
Client Properties – Main
The Main tab of the Client Properties dialog is used to configure general information about the client.
Figure 100 describes the fields and buttons on the Main page.
To display this dialog, from the File menu, select Setup and click Clients, Contacts & Agencies.
Click the Clients tab and double-click a client name or click New.
Figure 100. Client Properties, Main Tab

Table 51. Client Properties, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Client Enter the client’s name. If the client operates under more than one
name, refer to Client Properties – Aliases.
Street Address Enter the client’s street address. Click the small filled square to
City, State, Zip, Country Enter the city, state, zip, and country address of the client.
Phone, Alternate Phone, Enter the telephone numbers and fax number of the client.
Fax
E-Mail Enter the current, valid e-mail address of the client. This field allows
schedulers to send e-mail notification reports to clients from within the
ScheduALL system. To enter multiple e-mail addresses, use a
semicolon (;) to separate each address. Refer to Alarm Notification
Refer to E-mail Services for additional configuration information.
Client Notes Enter any additional information about this client, or click the small
Notes Editor.
Account Executive Click to assign an account executive to the client.
Account Status Click to assign a status (Active, Open, Inactive, or Closed) to the
client’s account. Define these levels in a manner useful to your
facility. The system generates a warning when a user attempts to
book a client with a status of inactive or closed.
User permissions also allow the supervisor to prevent various user
groups from booking inactive and/or closed client accounts. Refer to
Can Book Inactive Clients? and Can Book Closed Clients?.
Agency Click to assign the client to an agency. System Preferences
determine if the relationship between the agency and the client is
enforced. Refer to Disregard Agency/Client Ownership.
Default Producer Click to choose a producer to be assigned to this client whenever the
client books a work order.
Contacts List Lists the contacts associated with this client.
Click Select to assign an existing contact to the client.
Click Add New to create a new client from within the Client Setup
dialog. This contact will be added to the pool of contacts, but will be
associated with this client.
Select a contact and click Edit to modify an existing contact.
Select a contact and click Release to remove the association
between this client and the contact. The contact remains in the pool of
contacts, but is no longer associated with a client.
Select a contact and click Delete to remove a contact from the pool of
contacts.

Client Properties – Billing Information

The Billing Information tab of the client properties displays detailed billing information related to the
client, including information such as currency, billing terms, and assignments for standard pricing,
tax, and cancellation structures.
Figure 101. Client Properties, Billing Information Tab

Table 52. Client Properties, Billing Information Tab Items
Item Description
Bill Attention: Enter the name of the person responsible for billing transactions.
Billing Address Enter the client’s billing address if it differs from the Street Address
entered on the Main tab. The billing address is printed on invoices
instead of the main address. Click the small filled square to access an
City, State, Zip, Country Enter the city, state, zip, and country used for billing. The billing
address is printed on invoices instead of the main address.
Billing E-mail Enter the client’s e-mail address used for billing.
Default Rate Card Click to assign a default rate card, described in Rate Cards. The
client’s default rate card is assigned to a work order automatically
when the client is assigned.
Connector Rate Card Click to assign a rate card to be used instead of the Default Rate Card
when a subscriber makes a booking directly through the ScheduALL
Connector. This allows for different pricing for bookings that are self-
made by a subscriber.

Table 52. Client Properties, Billing Information Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Default Cxl Rate Card Click to assign a default cancellation rate card, described in
Cancellation Rate Cards and Cancellation Rates. This rate card
overrides the System Level Cancellation Rate Card for work orders
associated with this Client.
To unassign the rate card, select the Client Properties menu and
click Release Cancellation Rate Card.
Billing Terms Click to access a list of billing terms. The Select Billing Terms dialog
displays. Select a billing term entry and click Select to assign the
terms to the current client.
Refer to Client Properties – Billing Information for more
information on creating billing term entries.
Tax Rate Click to assign a default tax structure.
Enable Credit Limit Select (check) to enforce the Credit Limit field.
Credit Limit Enter the maximum amount of billable, unpaid work the client can
book. System Preferences determine whether the credit limit
generates warnings or other restrictions as described in Credit Limit.
Tax 1 Exemption ID, Enter exemption identification numbers for the appropriate tax
Tax 2 Exemption ID percentages.
Alternate Currency Select a currency other than the system’s base currency for billing.
Note: Use the Extended Work Order dialog to display prices in the
alternate currency.
Tape Release Select a tape release status for the client.
l Do not release Tapes - Media assets assigned to this client are
not to be checked out of the library system.
l Tapes can be Released - Media assets assigned to this client
can be checked out of the library system.
l Requires Approval - Media assets assigned to this client need
approval before they can be checked out of the library system.
Do Not Confirm without a Select (check) to prevent users from changing a work order status to
P.O. Number “Confirmed” until a purchase order (P.O.) number is entered on the
Main page of the work order.
Note: If this setting is selected for a user’s default client, then the
user’s Can Change Existing WK Orders up to: security setting
must be set to Confirmed or higher. Refer to Default Client
when creating Work Orders and Can Change Existing Wk
Orders up to:.
Apply Late Charges Select (check) to apply penalty charges for late payment of invoices.
Note: Currently this flag is used for display purposes only. The field
may also be used in customized reports (refer to Customize a
Report).

Table 52. Client Properties, Billing Information Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Do Not Send Statement Select (check) to indicate that a monthly statement should not be
provided to the client.
Internal Account Select (check) to designate the client as internal. The client type
(internal or external) can be used to filter client bookings for invoicing
and reporting.
Send Invoices to Agency Select (check) to print the agency’s address on invoices, if the client is
associated with an agency.
Do Not Bill Overtime Select (check) to prevent client from being charged overtime. The
client will be billed the standard rates for any overtime hours.
If you do not want to set this as a default for the client, you can also
prevent overtime from being charged on individual work orders.
Do Not Bill During Meals Select (check) to deduct any time specified as a meal from the billable
duration.
Do Not Bill During Breaks Select (check) to deduct any time specified as a break from the
billable duration.
Can Use Night Rates Select (check) to allow client to use defined night rates.
Refer to Price Maintenance for information on specifying night rates
as part of pricing. Refer to Apply Night Rates for information on
configuring night rate hours.
Client Properties – Billing Terms

To add or modify a new billing terms entry:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Clients, Contacts & Agencies. Click the
Clients tab and double-click a client name or click New.
2. Click the Billing Information tab.
3. Click Billing Terms.
4. Click New to create a billing term entry, OR
Select an existing billing term entry and click Edit. The Billing Terms Setup dialog displays.
5. Enter the Description of the category, such as “Net 30" or similar.
6. Enter the number of Days for invoice to become Due.
7. Enter a number of days in If paid within __ days and enter the Discount % to specify a
discount for early payment. (This field is for informational purposes only, and does not affect
billed or invoiced prices.)
To delete a billing terms entry, select an existing entry and click Delete. A confirmation dialog
displays.

Client Properties – Custom Pricing

The Custom Pricing tab allows the administrator to configure special pricing for a client, such as a
general discount percentage for all prices on the client’s rate card, or custom pricing for services,
resource categories, resource types, or individual resources.
Click the Clients tab and double-click a client name or click New, and then click the Custom Pricing
tab.
Figure 102. Client Properties, Custom Pricing Tab

Table 53. Client Properties, Custom Pricing Tab Items
Item Description
General Rate Card Enter percentage amount to apply to all prices on client’s rate card.
Discount %
Custom Price List Lists all resources with custom pricing for this client (the list is sorted
alphabetically by the entry in the Description column).
If there is an entry in the Category column, the custom price is applied
to any category level pricing for the resource.
If there is an entry in the Type column, the custom price is applied to
any type level pricing for the resource.
Services with custom pricing are listed in the Description column.

Table 53. Client Properties, Custom Pricing Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
New To add an item to the Custom Price List and configure pricing for that
Resource Price item:
Category/Type Price 1. Click the appropriate New button.
Service Price 2. Select an item to add from the list and click Select.
Depending on the setting of the system preference Use Price
Maintenance Dialog for Custom Pricing, one of the following dialogs
displays when creating or editing client custom pricing:
l If the preference is set to No, the Custom Price Setup dialog
displays. This dialog provides single, flat fee pricing or a set
percentage off a rate card. Refer to Custom Price Setup .
l If the preference is set to Yes, the Price Maintenance dialog
displays. This dialog provides multi-tiered pricing, with Day/Night,
Time of Day, Absolute, and Progressive pricing options. Refer to
Price Maintenance.
New Service Price To add a service to the Custom Price List and configure pricing for that
service:
1. Click New Resource Price. The Select Services dialog
displays.
2. Select a service from the list and click Select.
Edit Custom Price To change the pricing for a resource listed in the Custom Pricing tab:
1. Select a resource from the Custom Price List.
2. Click Edit Custom Price.
Depending on the setting of the system preference Use Price
Maintenance Dialog for Custom Pricing, one of the following dialogs
displays when creating or editing client custom pricing:
l If the preference is set to No, the Custom Price Setup dialog
displays. This dialog provides single, flat fee pricing or a set
percentage off a rate card. Refer to Custom Price Setup .
l If the preference is set to Yes, the Price Maintenance dialog
displays. This dialog provides multi-tiered pricing, with Day/Night,
Time of Day, Absolute, and Progressive pricing options. Refer to
Price Maintenance.
Delete Click to permanently remove a selected custom price entry.
To add custom pricing for ScheduLINK services refer to Custom Pricing for ScheduLINK
Services.

Custom Price Setup

The Custom Price Setup dialog displays when creating or editing custom pricing when the system
preference Use Price Maintenance Dialog for Custom Pricing is set to No.
Figure 103. Custom Price Setup Dialog

To set custom pricing for a resource using this dialog:
1. From the Client Properties, Custom Pricing tab, click the Custom Pricing tab. Refer to
Client Properties – Custom Pricing.
2. Click New Resource Price. Click a resource in the Resources List and click Select. The
Custom Price Setup dialog displays.
3. Set a custom fixed amount price, or a discount percentage to be applied to the rate card price
for the service or resource.
To set custom pricing using fixed amounts:
a. The current list price is displayed in the Custom Price (Day) field. Specifying a custom
price will replace the current list price.
b. Enter a custom price to be applied to any night rates in the Custom Price (Night) field.
c. Choose a Unit of Measure from the list.
d. Enter a cut off date in the Good Through text box or click the calendar icon to offer the
custom price for a limited time.
To set custom pricing using a discount percentage (for this resource only):
a. Enter the discount percentage in the Discount % field.
b. Select (check) Discount by % Off Rate Card. Checking this box disregards any
settings in the Custom Price (Day, Night), Unit of Measure, and Good Through fields.
Any values entered in those fields will remain but are ignored.
4. Verify the rate card to use for this client. To change the rate card price structure used for this
resource, click Rate Card and select the new rate card from the list (this does not change the
default rate card assigned to the client on the Billing Information page).
5. Assigned by and Last Modified by are informational fields that display the name of the user
who created the custom price entry, the name of the user who most recently modified the
entry, and the dates for each.

Custom Pricing for ScheduLINK Services

The Custom Pricing tab displays custom pricing overrides for the current client, and allows the
administrator to specify custom pricing for the current client. In addition to standard ScheduALL
functionality related to Resources, Resource Categories and Types, and standard Services, the New
ScheduLINK Service Price button allows an administrator to specify a client-specific price for the
ScheduLINK services used to create network circuits as described in Circuit Services in the Circuit
Selection chapter of the ScheduLINK Users Guide.
To specify a custom price for a ScheduLINK service:
1. Modify the Client Form dialog as described in Updating the Client Form for Circuit
Selection.
2. Log on as a supervisor, or with permission to create and modify clients.
3. From the File menu, select Setup and click Clients, Contacts & Agencies.
4. Double-click a client entry. The Client Properties dialog displays.
5. Click the Custom Pricing tab to bring that page forward.
6. Click the New ScheduLINK Service Price button. The list of ScheduLINK network services
displays. (Refer to Service Setup – Path Management for more information.)
7. Double-click a ScheduLINK network service. The Custom Price Setup dialog displays, with
the selected service’s description at the top (such as Circuit - New York, to LA 10 Mbt).
8. Continue configuring the pricing as described in Custom Price Setup .
Client Properties – Producers
The Producers tab defines the producers that are specific to the current client.
Figure 104. Client Properties, Producers Tab

Table 54. Client Properties, Producers Tab Items
Item Description
Add New Displays the Producer Setup dialog and allows the user to create a
new producer that is specific to this client.
Assign Existing Click to access the general pool of producers (those not assigned to
clients). Select a producer to make specific to this client. Refer to
Producers, Account Executives, and Directors for information on
the general pool of producers.
Edit Displays the Producer Setup dialog for the currently selected entry.
Refer to Producers, Account Executives, and Directors.
Release Removes the association between the selected producer and the
client, but does not remove the producer entry. The producer can be
assigned to a different client.
Delete Displays a confirmation dialog and deletes the selected producer from
the system. The producer is not returned to the general pool.
Client Properties – Aliases

The Aliases tab of the client properties dialog allows the user to specify additional names for a client
record, such as trade names or names of acquired subsidiaries.
To display this dialog:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Clients, Contacts & Agencies. Click the
Clients tab and double-click a client name or click New.
Figure 105. Client Properties, Aliases Tab

2. Client Properties, Aliases Tab
3. Click Add Alias to enter a new name by which the client is known.
4. Select an existing alias and click Delete to permanently remove an alias.

Client Properties – Other

The Other tab of the client properties dialog specifies additional information and notes. Table 55
Figure 106. Client Properties, Other Tab

Table 55. Client Properties, Other Tab Items
Item Description
Optional Short Name Enter an optional name for the client.
Customer Since Enter the date the client placed their first order.
Time Zone (Region) Select the time zone in which the client resides from the list.
User Field 1 and 2 Enter any additional information about the client. System Preferences
determine the labels applied to user-defined fields. Refer to General
Labels.
Website Enter the client’s website address.
Note: The Website address on this tab is not related to the website
address entered on the Company tab on the Settings page in
the WebApp application. The Website field shown here is
stored in a different location.
Assign a Color to this Client Click to select a color for the client. The Color palette displays.
From the View menu, click Display in Client Colors instead of
Status Colors to display work orders by client color.
Clear Color Click to remove the color association to this client.

Table 55. Client Properties, Other Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Client Groups Click to display the groups to which this client belongs. Refer to
Client Groups.
Pop-Up Notes to Scheduler Enter any additional information about this client, or click the small
filled square to access an internal text editor to type notes. The notes
pop up on the screen when a user assigns the client to a work order.
Refer to Notes Editor.
Pop-Up Notes to Librarian Enter any additional information regarding library entries associated
with this client. The system displays this information in a pop-up
dialog when a user modifies a library entry by assigning a Client, or by
assigning a Work Order or Project associated with the client.
Shipping Instructions Enter instructions for shipping items to the client.
Ship Via Enter shipping method for client.
Account # Enter client’s account number for their shipping vendor.
Client Properties – Activity Log

The Activity Log tab is used to create reminders to pop up on the screen on a user-defined date, or to
write comments about client activity.
Click the Clients tab and double-click a client name or click New. Click the Activity Log tab.
Figure 107. Client Properties, Activity Log Tab

On the Activity Log page, select one of the following:
l Click New Activity to create a new entry. The Client Activity Log dialog displays.
l Select an entry (or entries) and click Delete to delete an activity.
l Select an entry (or entries) and click Edit to edit an activity. The Client Activity Log dialog
displays.

Client Properties – Custom Cxl

The Custom Cxl tab of the client properties dialog is used to specify client-specific cancellation rates.
Table 56 describes the available settings.
Figure 108. Client Properties, Custom Cxl Tab

Table 56. Client Properties, Custom Cxl Tab Items
Item Description
Category Displays the Resource Category of the custom cancellation rate. This
field is display-only.
Type Displays the Resource Type of the custom cancellation rate, if
applicable. This field is display-only.
Resource Displays the resource description of the custom cancellation rate, if
applicable. This field is display-only.
New Resource Cancellation Click to add a custom cancellation rate for an individual resource. The
Rate Resources List displays. Select a resource. The Cancellation Rate
Card Setup dialog displays. Refer to Managing Cancellation Rates
for information on cancellation rates.
New Category/Type Click to add a custom cancellation rate at the Category or Type level.
Cancellation Rate Select a category, or select a category and type. The Cancellation
Rate Card Setup dialog displays. Refer to Managing Cancellation
Rates for information on cancellation rates.
Edit Cancellation Rate Click to modify the selected custom cancellation rate. Refer to
Managing Cancellation Rates for information on cancellation rates.
Delete Cancellation Rate Click to permanently remove the selected custom cancellation rate.

Client Properties – Preferences

The Preferences tab contains resources booked by default for the client, as well as client-specific
preferences. Table 57 describes the available settings.
Figure 109. Client Properties, Preferences Tab

Table 57. Client Properties, Preferences Tab Items
Item Description
Additional Resources to Book
(Browser Pane) Displays the resource category, type, and name, the Quantity (Qty) to
include, and whether or not the resource is set to Standard (do not bill).
This list determines what resources are automatically added to work
orders for the client.
Add Resource Click to select a specific resource to add to every booking associated
with the client. The system generates a conflict warning if the
specified resource is not available.
Add Requirement Click to select a resource category, or category/type combination,
from which the first available resource will be added to every booking
associated with the client.
Edit Click to modify the settings for an existing entry:
l Enter a Quantity to change the number of resources booked
automatically.
l Select (check) Standard (Do not Bill) to ignore resource pricing
information when the resource is booked as a client preference.
l Select (check) User Select to populate the Resources List with
only the specified category or category/type combination.
Remove Click to delete an existing resource or requirement entry.

Table 57. Client Properties, Preferences Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Resource Preferences
(Browser Pane) Displays the resource category, type, and name, and the preference
applied to the resource. This list determines what resources can be
booked in work orders for the client.
Cannot Use Click to select a resource that cannot be booked in a work order, or
used to fulfill a requirement, for the associated client.
Must Use Click to select a resource that is automatically assigned to a matching
requirement when a scheduler uses the Auto-Assign Resource
feature. If the resource is not available to fill the requirement, the
system generates a conflict warning. Refer to Auto-Assign Resource
in the Work Orders chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more
information.
Prefer to Use Click to select a resource that is automatically assigned to a matching
requirement when a scheduler uses the Auto-Assign Resource
feature. If the resource is not available to fill the requirement, the
system selects a different resource automatically. Refer to Auto-
Assign Resource in the Work Orders chapter of the ScheduALL
Permission to Use Click to select a resource that can be used in a booking that has this
client assigned. If a resource has the attribute Permission Required
set to True, that resource cannot be used in a booking for this client
unless it is added to the Resource Preferences list using the
Permission to Use button. Refer to Permission Required.
Remove Click to delete an existing preference entry.
Client Properties – Contracts

The Contracts tab displays a list of contracts associated with the client. Table 58 describes the
available settings. (Requires the Contract Manager module. For more information, refer to the
Contract Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .)
Figure 110. Client Properties, Contract Tab

Table 58. Client Properties, Contract Tab Items
Item Description
(Browser Pane) Displays the contract name, effective and expiration dates, and
contract status.
Edit Contract Displays the selected contract in the Contract Manager dialog.
Default Contract Displays a list of valid contracts assigned to the client. Select a
contract from the list. The selected contract displays in the field to the
right of the button. Click to release the selected contract.
When the client is assigned to a work order this contract is
automatically selected. If the client has multiple valid contracts then
another contract can be selected in the work order.
Contract Required for this Select (check) to ensure that a contract exists for this client when
Client booking work orders. If selected (checked) and there is no contract
assigned to the client, the following message is displayed when
booking a work order: Cannot Save Work Order. Contract required for
this Client!
Client Properties - Seasons

In the Media Manager module, each media asset can be assigned to a Season and Episode of a
production. Seasons and episodes can also be associated with a client, allowing them to be selected
in a work order, project, or media asset that is assigned that client. Table 59 describes the available
settings.
Figure 111. Client Properties, Seasons Tab

Table 59. Client Properties, Seasons Tab Items
Item Description
Description Displays a tree view with the client name at the top. Seasons are
displayed below. Episodes associated with a season are displayed
the below the season name. To view episodes associated with a
season, click the expand icon ( ) next to the season name.
Create New Click to add a new season or episode. Refer to Managing Seasons
and Episodes.
Delete Click to delete a season or episode. Refer to Managing Seasons and
Episodes.
Edit Click to change the description of a season or episode. Refer to
Managing Seasons and Episodes.
Managing Seasons and Episodes

A tree view of the seasons and episodes associated with the client are shown in the Description area
of the dialog. To view episodes associated with a season, click the expand icon ( ).
To manage seasons:
l To add a new season to the client, select the client name and click Create New. Enter the
season description and click OK.
l To delete a season, select it and click Delete. All episodes associated with the season must
be deleted first.
l To change the description of a season, select it and click Edit. Modify the season description
and click OK.
To manage episodes:
l To add a new episode to a season, select the season name and click Create New. Enter the
episode description and click OK.
l To delete an episode, select it and click Delete.
l To change the description of an episode, select it and click Edit. Modify the episode
description and click OK.
Client Properties - Attachment

The Attachment tab allows the user to attach files from outside the system that contain additional
information about the client.
Note: The maximum size of an attached file is 40Mb.

Figure 112. Client Properties, Attachment Tab

Table 60. Client Properties, Attachment Items
Item Description
View Click to display the selected attachment. The attachment opens in a
separate application window.
Upload Click to upload a file to the system as an attachment to one or more
work orders.
Delete Click to delete selected attachment files from the system.
Select Click to select uploaded files to attach to one or more work orders. The
Select Shared Media dialog displays. Select the files to attach and
click Select.
Release Click to remove selected attachment files from the work order. This
does not delete the file from the system, and the released files are still
available to attach to other work orders.
File Details Click to display properties of the attached files. The File Details
dialog displays. To see the contents of a file, select the file to display
and click View.
Agency Setup
To create an agency entry:
2. Click the Agencies tab to bring that page forward, and click New at the bottom of the dialog.
3. The Agency Properties dialog displays the following tabs:
l Agency Properties – Main
l Agency Properties – Billing Information
l Agency Properties – Other
l Agency Properties – Custom Pricing
4. Enter the appropriate information and click OK to save all changes.

Agency Properties – Main

The Main tab contains general information about the agency, and lists the clients and contacts
associated with the agency. Table 61 describes the available settings.
Click the Agencies tab and double-click an agency name or click New.
Figure 113. Agency Properties, Main Tab

Table 61. Agency Properties, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Agency The agency’s name.
Street Address Enter the agency’s street address. Click the small filled square to
City, State, Zip, Country, Enter the agency’s city, state, zip, and country address information,
Phone, Alternate Phone, phone and fax numbers.
Fax
E-Mail Enter the current, valid e-mail address of the client. This field allows
schedulers to send e-mail notification reports to clients from within the
ScheduALL system. To enter multiple e-mail addresses, use a
semicolon (;) to separate each address. Refer to Include in E-mail
Notifications for more information.
Refer to E-mail Services for additional configuration information.
Account Executive Click to assign an account executive to the agency.
Notes Enter any additional information about this agency, or click the small
Notes Editor.

Table 61. Agency Properties, Main Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Account Status Click to assign a status (Active, Open, Inactive, or Closed) to the
agency account. Define these levels in a manner useful to your
book an agency with a status of Inactive or Closed.
User permissions also allow the supervisor to prevent various user
groups from booking inactive and/or closed Agency accounts. Refer to
Can Book Inactive Clients? and Can Book Closed Clients?.
Client List Lists the clients associated with this agency.
l Click Select to assign an existing client to the agency.
l Click Add New to create a new client from within the Agency
Setup dialog. This client will be added to the pool of clients, but
will be associated with this agency.
l Select a client and click Edit to modify client information.
l Select a client and click Release to remove the association
between this agency and the client. The client remains in the
pool of clients, but is no longer associated with an agency.
l Select a client and click Delete to permanently remove the
client from the system.
Contact List Lists the contacts associated with this agency.
l Click Select to assign an existing contact to the agency.
l Click Add New to create a new contact from within the Agency
Setup dialog. This contact will be added to the pool of contacts,
but will be associated with this agency.
l Select a contact and click Edit to modify contact information.
l Select a contact and click Release to remove the association
between this agency and the contact. The contact remains in
the pool of contacts, but is no longer associated with an
agency.
l Select a contact and click Delete to permanently remove the
contact from the system.
Agency Properties – Billing Information

The Billing Information tab contains the address, price rates, and tax rates used for billing. Table 62
Click the Agencies tab and double-click a agency name or click New.

Figure 114. Agency Properties, Billing Information Tab

Table 62. Agency Properties, Billing Information Tab Items
Item Description
Bill Attention Agency’s billing contact.
Billing Address Enter the agency’s billing address if it differs from the Street Address
Do Not Confirm without a Use to prevent confirmation of a work order without a purchase order
P.O. Number number from the agency entered on the work order. The user can
confirm a work order only after a P.O. number is entered on the work
order (Main page).
Internal Account Select (check) to designate the agency as internal. The type (internal
or external) can be used to filter client bookings for invoicing and
reporting.
Default Rate Card Click to attach a rate card to the agency.
Connector Rate Card Click to attach a rate card to the agency that will be used for all
transactions through the ScheduALL Connector.
Billing Terms Click to assign billing terms to the agency.
Tax Rate Click to assign a tax rate to this agency.
Tax 1 Exemption ID Enter exemption identification numbers for Tax 1 and Tax 2.
Tax 2 Exemption ID

Agency Properties – Other

The Other tab contains miscellaneous information about the agency. Table 63 describes the
available settings.
Click the Agencies tab and double-click a agency name or click New.
Figure 115. Agency Properties, Other Tab

Table 63. Agency Properties, Other Tab Items
Item Description
Optional Short Name Enter an optional name for the agency.
Customer Since Enter the date the agency placed their first order.
Pop-Up Notes to Scheduler Enter any additional information about this agency, or click the small
pop up on the screen when a user assigns the agency to a work order.
Agency Properties – Custom Pricing

The Custom Pricing tab allows the administrator to configure special pricing for an agency, such as a
general discount percentage for all prices on the agencies rate card, or custom pricing for services,
resource categories, resource types, or individual resources. Refer to Client Properties – Custom
Pricing for more information on custom pricing.

Contact Setup
To create a contact entry:
2. Click the Contacts tab to bring that page forward, and then click New at the bottom of the
dialog. The Contact Properties dialog displays the following tabs:
l Contact Properties – Main
l Contact Properties – Billing Information
l Contact Properties – Other
l The Shipping tab of the Contact Properties dialog is used by the optional Shipping Module.
Refer to the Shipping chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more information.
l Contact Properties – Custom Pricing
3. Enter the contact’s information and click OK.
Contact Properties – Main
The Main tab contains general information about the contact. Table 64 describes the available
settings.
Click the Contacts tab and double-click a contact name or click New.
Figure 116. Contact Properties, Main Tab

Table 64. Contact Properties, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Contact Name The contact’s name.
Street Address Enter the contact’s street address. Click the small filled square to
City, State, Zip, Country Enter the contact’s city, state, zip, and country.
Salutation Enter the appropriate salutation (Mr., Mrs., Ms., etc.).
Phone, Alternate Phone, Enter the contact’s telephone and fax numbers.
Fax

Table 64. Contact Properties, Main Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
E-Mail Enter the current, valid e-mail address of the contact. To enter multiple
e-mail addresses, use a semicolon (;) to separate each address.
This field allows schedulers to send e-mail notification reports from
within the ScheduALL system. Refer to E-mail Services for additional
configuration information.
Account Executive Click to assign an account executive to the contact.
Account Status Click to assign a status (Active, Open, Inactive, and Closed) to the
contact’s account. Define status levels in a manner useful to your
book an contact with a status of inactive or closed.
Use security permissions to prevent selected user groups from
booking inactive and/or closed client accounts. Refer to Can Book
Inactive Clients? and Can Book Closed Clients?.
From Lists the client with which the contact is associated.
Producer Click to assign a default producer for contact.
Primary Contact Check to designate the contact as the primary contact for the
associated client. Can be used to filter primary contact in reports.
Notes Enter any additional information about the contact, or click the small
Notes Editor.
Contact Properties – Billing Information

The Billing Information tab contains the address, price rates, and tax rates used for billing. Table 65
Figure 117. Contact Properties, Billing Information Tab

Table 65. Contact Properties, Billing Information Tab Items
Item Description
Bill Attention: Contact’s billing contact.
Billing Address Enter the contact’s billing address if it differs from the Street Address
Do Not Confirm without a Use to prevent confirmation of a work order without a purchase order
P.O. Number number from the contact entered on the work order. The user can
confirm a work order only after a P.O. number is entered on the work
order (Main page).
Default Rate Card Click to attach a rate card to the contact.
Billing Terms Click to assign billing terms to the contact.
Tax Rate Click to assign a tax rate to this contact.
Credit Limit Enter credit limit for contact. A user receives a warning if an attempt is
made to book a work order that would send the contact over its credit
limit.
Tax 1 Exemption ID, Enter exemption identification numbers for tax 1 and tax 2.
Tax 2 Exemption ID
Contact Properties – Other

The Other tab contains miscellaneous information about the agency. Table 66 describes the
available settings.
Figure 118. Contact Properties, Other Tab

Table 66. Contact Properties, Other Tab Items
Item Description
Optional Short Name Enter an optional name for the contact.
Customer Since Enter the date the contact placed their first order.
Pop-Up Notes to Scheduler Enter any additional information about this contact, or click the small
pop up on the screen when a user assigns the contact to a work order.
Internal Account Select (check) to designate the contact as internal. The type (internal
or external) can be used to filter client bookings for invoicing and
reporting.
Send Bills to Client/Agency Select (check) to use the associated client or agency’s billing address.
Contact Properties – Custom Pricing

The Custom Pricing tab allows the administrator to configure special pricing for a contact, such as a
general discount percentage for all prices on the contact’s rate card, or custom pricing for services,
resource categories, resource types, or individual resources. Refer to Client Properties – Custom
Pricing for more information on custom pricing.
Contact Catalog Setup

The scheduling system now supports the ability to create a Contact Catalog that allows you to
associate one contact entry to multiple client entries and resource entries, and to define up to two
default contacts for each resource. Use of this feature is a prerequisite for the Client Association,
Contact Association, and Resource Association dialogs.
As a result of this feature:
l It is no longer necessary to create duplicate contact entries to establish ownership if the same
contact is available for two (or more) similar clients.
l Contact entries can be associated to resources and maintained in the contact list, rather than
replicating contact information across multiple resource entries.
l When booking a resource in a work order, the default contact(s) for that resource are
automatically assigned to the corresponding Default Event Contact fields.
Contacts are defined as part of the Agency, Client, and Contact setup. Associations between a
Client and Contact can be defined from either the Client Setup or the Contact Setup areas.
Associations between a resource and contact can be defined from either the Resource Setup or the
Contact Setup areas. Default contacts for a resource must be defined in Resource Setup.
In order to use the new Contact association system:
1. The existing System Preferences Disregard Client/Contact Ownership must be set to Yes.
l When assigning a Contact to a work order, the Select Contact dialog will provide the list of
client-specific contacts on one tabbed page, and the full list of contacts in the system on the
All tabbed page.

l When assigning a Contact to a resource booking, the Select Contact dialog will provide the
list of default resource-specific contacts on the Scoped tabbed page, and the full list of
contacts in the system on the All tabbed page.
2. The new System Preference Use Alternate Contact Catalog must be set to Yes.
3. Pricing cannot be defined at the Contact level.
4. A Client must be assigned to a Work Order for the Work Order to be valid.
5. Changes must be made to existing dialogs using the Developer’s Toolkit module as described
in Modifying Dialogs for Alternate Contact Catalog.
Edit, Copy, or Delete a Client, Contact, or Agency

In some circumstances, clients, contacts, or agencies have many properties in common. To save
time, copy the item and make the necessary changes.
2. To edit an existing client, contact, or agency, select the entry and click Edit. The appropriate
properties dialog displays. Make any necessary changes, and click OK to save all changes.
3. To copy a client, contact, or agency, select the entry and click Copy. The appropriate
Properties dialog displays a duplicate of the original entry’s information. Make any necessary
changes, and click OK to save all changes to the new entry.
4. To delete an entry, select the entry and click Delete. A confirmation dialog displays; click
“Yes” to delete the entry.
Client Groups
Client groups combine clients, contacts, and agencies for filtering and reporting purposes. Clients
can belong to more than one group. Several dialogs, screens, and reports offer the ability to filter
clients by group, and display small groups instead of long lists containing hundreds of clients. For
example, group clients by client type, such as commercial, government, and non-profit, to identify
existing markets, or group clients by geographic area to generate regional sales reports.
Client Group Setup
To create a new client group:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Client Groups. The Client Group Maintenance
dialog displays.

Figure 119. Client Group Maintenance

2. Click New.
3. Click the All, Agencies, Clients or Contacts tabs to display the appropriate tabs. Select a
client, contact, or agency and click Add. (Assigning an agency automatically includes all
associated clients and contacts; assigning a client automatically includes associated
contacts.)
4. Enter a Group Name to identify the client group.
The selected items display in the Item Description list. The tree structure reflects all
associations between agencies, clients, and contacts, and displays agency names in red,
client names in blue, and contact names in black.
5. Click Save to save the changes, or click Abandon Changes to cancel the operation.
6. Click Close to close the dialog box.
Edit, Copy, or Delete a Client Group
To modify, duplicate, or permanently remove an existing client group:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Client Groups. The Client Group Maintenance
dialog displays.
2. To edit an existing client group, select the group from the Current Group list, and click Edit.
Make any necessary changes, and click Save to save all changes.
3. To create a new client group based on an existing group, select the group from the Current
Group list. Click Edit and make any necessary changes and type a name for the new group in
the Group Name field. Click Save As to save the new client group.
4. To delete a client group, select the group from the Current Group list, and click Delete. A
confirmation dialog displays; click Yes to permanently delete the client group.
Note: Deleting a client group does not remove the client, contact, or agency entries assigned
to the group. Refer to Edit, Copy, or Delete a Client, Contact, or Agency for
information on deleting individual clients, contacts or agencies.

Miscellaneous Setup
Holiday Calendar and Region Setup
Holidays identify specific days of the year on which work is not usually performed for national,
cultural, or religious reasons. The ScheduALL system allows the administrator to specify both
observed and unobserved holidays to assist with scheduling activities. The calendar board displays
an observed holiday with a red time scale, and red shading in the main calendar area. The calendar
board displays an unobserved holiday with a yellow time scale.
When used with the Personnel Manager module, booking a personnel resource on an observed
holiday triggers the Observed Holiday differential. Refer to Personnel Pay Category Setup –
Differentials Page 1 for more information.
Note: Holidays in the ScheduALL system are not used to indicate vacation time for personnel. Refer
to Resource Activities in the Scheduling chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for
information on specifying vacation time.
Holiday Regions
Holiday regions allow the administrator to create additional groups of holidays which correspond to
geographic, cultural, national, or corporate guidelines. Holiday Regions are created in addition to, and
separate from, the <Base> default region. User Preferences determine which holiday region applies
to each user. (Refer to Default Holiday Region.)
For example, when a business has office locations in the United States, Europe, and Japan, each
office celebrates different holidays, or celebrates the same holidays (such as New Year’s Day) on
different dates. Defining holiday regions to fit each separate set of holidays allows each office
location to use holiday-based conflict checking and differentials without interfering with other
locations.
Adding a Holiday Region
To create a holiday region:
Figure 120. Holiday Region Maintenance Dialog

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Holiday Region Setup. The Holiday Region
2. Click New to add a holiday region.
3. Enter the Description and click OK. The new region displays in the list.
Holiday Region Maintenance
l To change the description of a region, select it and click Edit.
l To delete a region, select it and click Delete.

Holiday Setup
To define holidays used by the ScheduALL system:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Holiday Calendar. The Holiday Maintenance
calendar displays.
Figure 121. Holiday Maintenance

2. Click Reg: <Base> in the top right corner to select the Holiday Region in which to create the
holiday. If a holiday applies to more than one Holiday Region, it must be created separately in
each Region, including the <Base> region.
3. Click the arrow buttons to scroll through the months and years to display the date of the
holiday.
4. Double-click the desired date. The Holiday Details dialog displays.
Figure 122. Holiday Details

5. Enter the Name or description of the holiday. The specified text displays in the Scheduling
calendar’s time scale on the appropriate day and in calendar flyovers.
6. Select (check) Recurring if the holiday occurs on the same date every year. (Create separate
holiday entries for holidays that do not occur on the same day every year.)
7. Select (check) Observed to display the holiday on the calendar, generate conflict messages,
and trigger holiday differentials, or deselect (clear) Observed to display the holiday on the
calendar, without generating conflict messages or triggering holiday differentials.
8. Click OK to save all changes, or click Cancel to exit without saving any changes.

Deleting a Holiday
To permanently remove a holiday from the system:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Holiday Calendar. The Holiday Maintenance
calendar displays.
2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the years and months until the desired date is
displayed.
3. Click the holiday to delete, and press Delete on the keyboard, OR
Double-click the holiday to display the Holiday Details dialog. Click Delete. A confirmation
dialog displays; click Yes to delete the entry.
Locations Setup
Locations Setup allow the administrator to define a three-level structure to describe the physical or
virtual spaces or addresses used to track the past, current, or future location of a resource, media
asset, or other item. These locations work in conjunction with location scanning functionality to
provide geographic availability information and plan the movements of resources.
Locations are created at a particular level (Level 1, 2, or 3) to identify their relative granularity, with
Level 3 being the least granular, and Level 1 being the most granular. Locations can be assigned one
or more types to differentiate between different types of locations, including:
l General entries is used to describe common, general-purpose places.
l Library entries is used to describe locations of physical or digital media, such as video tapes,
audio recordings, and film, generally referred to as media assets or simply assets.
l Rental locations is used to describe sites at which rental resources may be located while in
use, such as lots, sets, stages, or client sites.
l Is Check Out Location is used to describe a location to which items can be checked out (a
source location).
l Is Check In Location is used to describe a location to which items can be checked in (a
destination location).
l Is Tax Jurisdiction is used to describe a location that encompasses a taxable area.
l Is Broadcast entries can be used to describe places for broadcast activities, such as studios,
writing offices, or control booths.
l Is Satellite locations can be used to describe sites used to generate or receive satellite feeds.
Note: The list of Locations is separate from the lists of Library Storage Locations and Library
Location Hierarchy.
Location Setup
To define locations using the Location Setup dialog, the following security settings must be in place
for the user or the group to which the user belongs:
l To display the Location Setup item in the File menu, at least one of the Location Types must
be set to View Only or Follow Profile. If all of the Location Types are set to No Access, the
Location Setup item in the File menu does not display. Setting <All Locations> to View Only or
Follow Profile does not display the menu item. Location Type permissions are defined as
described in Location Types.
l Security permissions must be granted to view, add, edit, or delete locations. Refer to Can
View Locations?, etc., described in Scheduling Area Profile.

l Security permissions must be granted to view, add, edit, or delete locations with a certain
Level definition. Refer to Can View Level 1 Locations?, etc., described in Maintenance &
Setup Areas.
Note: Location Setup requires the Locations license and one of the following modules: Library,
Rental, or ScheduLINK.
To define locations in the ScheduALL system:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Location Setup. The Location Setup dialog
displays.
2. Click the appropriate Level tab.
3. Click New. The Locations Setup dialog displays.
4. Enter the properties of the location on the Main tab as described in Locations Setup - Main.
5. Select the higher-level (parent) and lower-level (child) locations linked to the current location as
described in Locations Setup - Levels.
6. Enter the properties of the location on the User Fields tab as described in Locations Setup -
User Fields.
7. Click OK.
Satellite Locations
For the ScheduLINK system, locations are used to define the orbital position of a satellite. During
scheduling processes, the location of the satellite is compared to the arc range and arc restrictions of
an uplink or downlink dish. To create a satellite location, refer to Locations Setup - Main. To define
the location as a satellite location:
1. Enter the Location Name.
2. Select (check) Is Satellite Location.
3. Enter the Orbital Position in degrees.
4. In the Reference list, select Degrees East or Degrees West to indicate the satellite’s position
relative to the Prime Meridian.

Locations Setup - Main

The Main tab contains core properties for the location. Table 67 describes the available settings.
To display this dialog, from the File menu, select Setup and click Location Setup. Click the
appropriate level and double-click an entry or click New.
Figure 123. Locations Dialog

Table 67. Locations Dialog Settings
Setting Description
Location Name Name or description of the location.
Location Code A unique code identifying the location.
Location Level Displays the level selected on the Location Setup dialog. Refer to
Location Setup.
Barcode Number or text equivalent of the barcode associated with the location
for scanning purposes.
Address 1, Address 2, Street or mailing address of the location.
Address 3, City, State,
ZIP/Postal Code
County Region or sub-division between city and state associated with the
location.
Phone, Alt. Phone Telephone and/or fax numbers associated with the location.
Email E-mail address related to the location.
Latitude Global location, measured as a distance in degrees North or South of
the Earth’s equator.

Table 67. Locations Dialog Settings(continued)
Setting Description
Longitude Global location, measured as a distance in degrees to the East or
West of the Earth’s Prime Meridian.
Location Type The location type determines whether the location is included or
General excluded by Location Type filters, such as the Location list on the
Library Location Setup dialog. A location may belong to more than one type,
and if no Type is selected, the location is displayed only when the “All
Rental
Location Types” option is selected.
Check Out
The selected locations are displayed above the Location Type section.
Check In
Is Tax Jurisdiction
Is Broadcast
Is Satellite (Link only)
Assign Tax Structure Displays the Select Tax Structure dialog, which is used to associate a
tax structure with a tax jurisdiction when the Tax Jurisdiction option is
selected. Select a tax structure to assign to the this location and click
Select. Click Clear ( ) to remove the assigned tax structure.
Note: When a tax structure is selected, the Is Tax Structure option is
selected automatically.
Orbital Position The position of a satellite location.
(Link only)
Reference Select Degrees East or Degrees West to indicate the satellite’s
(Link only) position relative to the Prime Meridian.

Locations Setup - Levels

The Levels tab contains other locations related to the current location. Table 68 describes the
available settings.
To display this dialog, from the File menu, select Setup and click Location Setup. Click the
appropriate level and double-click an entry or click New.
Figure 124. Locations Setup Dialog, Levels Tab

Table 68. Locations Setup Dialog, Levels Tab Settings
Setting Description
Location Name Displays the name or description of the location entered on the Main
tab.
Location Code Displays a unique code identifying the location entered on the Main
tab.
Location Level Displays the level entered on the Main tab.
Parent Locations Browser
Location Name Lists the name of the parent location.
City Lists the city in which the location resides.
State Lists the state in which the location resides.
Assign Parent Displays the Select Parent Location dialog, and allows the user to
select an existing location as a parent location. (The location must be
one level higher than the current location; it is not possible to select a
parent for a Level 3 location.)
Edit Parent Displays the Locations Setup dialog and allows the user to change the
details of the selected parent location.
Delete Parent Permanently removes the selected parent location and all
associations to the location.

Table 68. Locations Setup Dialog, Levels Tab Settings (continued)
Setting Description
Add New Parent Creates a new location record one level higher than the current
location and automatically associates the new record to the current
location. (It is not possible to add a parent from a Level 3 location.)
Release Parent Removes the association between the current location and the parent
location.
Child Locations Browser
Location Name Lists the name of the child location.
City Lists the city in which the location resides.
State Lists the state in which the location resides.
Assign Child Displays the Select Child Location dialog, and allows the user to
select an existing location as a child location. The location must be
one level lower than the current location; it is not possible to select a
child for a Level 1 location.
Edit Child Displays the Locations Setup dialog and allows the user to change the
details of the selected child location.
Delete Child Permanently removes the selected child location and all associations
to the location.
Add New Child Creates a new location record one level lower than the current location
and automatically associates the new record to the current location. (It
is not possible to add a child from a Level 1 location.)
Release Child Removes the association between the current location and the child
location.
Locations Setup - User Fields

The User Fields tab displays user-defined information.
Figure 125. Locations Setup Dialog, User Fields

Display View Setup

Display Views allow the administrator to combine pieces of information into named sets, and tailor
the information displayed on the scheduling screen. Display views determine what information is
displayed on specific graphical elements of the scheduling calendar and reports. The system applies
display views to:
l Colored blocks on the visual calendar that represent scheduled work orders and activities
l “Flyovers” displayed when the mouse pointer is positioned over a block on the visual calendar
l Graphical work order blocks in certain schedule-based reports
Each user may select a different display view for work orders and for flyovers, based on their job
requirements. For example, the administrator could create the following:
l Default display view with the client, work order number, job name, start time, and end time
l Editing display view with the job name, start and end time, and media format
l Account representative view with the job title, client name, contact name, contact phone
number, and agency
For the ScheduLINK system, the administrator could create the following:
l A default satellite display view which presents the main satellite resource, client name, start
time, end time, approx out time, source city and state, and account contact name and
telephone number.
l A detailed display view which presents the main satellite resource, start time, end time,
approx out time, source city and state, destination city and state, account contact name and
telephone number, name of the person who created the work order, and name of the person
who last updated the work order.
Each display view is a group of four display blocks, which specify the information for four types of
objects: Rooms, Resources, Personnel and Activities. Each display block consists of static label
text to identify the information presented, and field codes which retrieve information from selected
tables in the scheduling database.
For the ScheduLINK system, the following apply:
l Display blocks assigned to Rooms and Resources will be visible for satellites, uplink trucks,
fixed dishes, satellite transponders, and path management resources.
l Display blocks assigned to Activities will be visible for Available Blocks used to specify
explicit availability as described in Explicit Availability in the Scheduling chapter of the
Display View Preferences and Permissions

The following preferences and permissions apply to display views:
l User Preferences determine the default display view. Refer to Default Display View.
l User Profiles determine if a user can add, edit, or modify display views, and/or select a
different display view. Refer to Can Add/Edit/Delete Display Views? and Can Change
Display View?.
l User Preferences determine if the system displays flyovers in the Scheduling and Personnel
Manager areas. Refer to Enable Fly-Over Text in Personnel Manager and Enable Fly-Over
Text in Scheduling.

l System Preferences determine the default browser flyovers for different resource
classifications. Refer to Default Browser Flyover for ... and flyover settings for other
resources.
l User Preferences determine the override browser flyovers for different resource
classifications. Refer to Override Browser Flyover for Rooms and flyover override settings
for other resources.
Display View and Flyover Display View

Users with the appropriate permissions can change the display view and flyover display view at any
time. To change the current display view for work orders and activities on the scheduling calendar:
1. Open a Schedule or Extended Schedule.
2. Click the View menu.
3. Click Select Display View, and select a view from the list, OR
Click FlyOver Display View and select a view from the list to override the default flyover
view.
Display View for Resource Flyover - ScheduALL
By default, display blocks for resources are not displayed in the Scheduling module.
To select a display block for resources:
1. Open the main scheduling calendar.
2. Right click the Description column heading of the resource browser list.
3. Click Column Properties.
4. Click the Advanced tab to bring that page forward.
Figure 126. Column Properties, Advanced Tab

5. Select (check) Flyover Text? to apply a display block as a flyover.
6. From the Source list, select the source table. Table 69 lists the tables available for use in
resource flyovers.

7. Select the source type.

l Select Fields to retrieve data from the selected field of the specified table. For example, in
the Resource Catalog table, “Type” contains text data.
l Select Functions to retrieve the result of a predefined action, such as calculations, counts,
or other formulas. For example, for VR: Stock, “Quantity Available” displays the difference
between the amount in inventory and the amount booked in work orders.
l Select References to retrieve information from a field in a related or linked table. For
example, in the R: Resource Base table, “Company Name” retrieves information stored in
the Company table.
l Select Display Views to retrieve a display block designed for resources. Select a display
block from the list. This list corresponds to the list on the Resources tab of the Display
Views dialog. Refer to Display Blocks for Resources. When using this option, you must
select Resource Base from the Source list.
8. Select the data type. The list of available data types varies based on the selected source field.
9. Specify a Field Length and Decimal Length for numeric fields, if necessary.
10. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to exit without saving any changes.
Table 69. Source Tables, Resource Flyover
List Item Table Name Description

R: Resource Base RSRCE Generic properties for resources and services.
Resource Catalog RESCTLG Links specific resources to related structures, such
as membership in resource categories, types, and
groups.
TR: Resource Link RES_LINK Properties of resource connections, such as data
network or satellite transmissions.
TR: Resource User RES_USER User-defined fields for resources and services.
TR: Resource Vendor VENDOR Properties of the vendor associated with an external
resource.
VR: Equipment EQUIP Properties specific to General and BandPLAN
resources.
VR: Personnel PERS Properties specific to Personnel resources.
VR: Rooms ROOM Properties specific to Room resources.
VR: Stock STOCK Properties specific to Stock resources.
Display View for Resource Flyover - ScheduLINK

Resource fly-overs display additional information about resources, similar to standard fly-overs for
work orders and activities. In the ScheduLINK system, resource fly-overs can display essential
information such as signal type (analog or digital), uplink and downlink frequencies and polarities,
access center name and telephone number, inclined orbit status, and resource-specific notes.
Refer to the ScheduALL Users Guide for information on creating resource fly-overs.
To apply a resource fly-over:
1. From the File menu, select ScheduLINK and click ScheduLINK Screen.
2. From the Select Group list, select a resource group that contains satellite resources.
3. Right-click the Resource column heading and click Column Properties. The Column
Properties dialog displays.


5. Select (check) Fly-Over Text?
6. In the Source list box, select Resource Base.
7. Select the Display Views option.
Figure 127. Column Properties Dialog, Resource Fly-Over

8. Select the appropriate display view, such as Transponder Info for satellite operations or
ATM/Capacity Mgmt for data network operations.

10. Hover the mouse cursor over a resource block in the Resource column to test the resource
fly-over.
Figure 128. Resource Fly-Over, Transponder Information
Display View Maintenance for the Schedule Calendar

The Visual Path browser in the ScheduLINK work order form, and the Production Timeline dialog of
the Production Workflow Manager module, use the standard Detailed View as the default flyover
display. Changes to this display view will impact flyover information in these dialogs.
To create display views and display blocks:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Display View Maintenance. The list of existing
display views displays.
2. Click the Schedule Calendar tab to manage display views applied to the scheduling
calendar.

3. Click New on the right side of the dialog to create a new display view, OR
Select an existing display view and click Edit to change a display view, OR
Select an existing display view and click Copy to create a display view based on an existing
display view. The View Properties dialog displays.
Figure 129. View Properties

4. Enter the View Name to identify this view. This name displays in the Select Display View
menu, and should be unique.
5. Select a Room display block from the list to specify the information displayed on a work order
entry that displays in a Room row on the scheduling calendar.
6. Select a Resource display block from the list to specify the information displayed on a work
order entry that displays in a general resource row on the scheduling calendar.
7. Select a Personnel display block from the list to specify the information displayed on a work
order entry in a Personnel row on the scheduling calendar.
8. Select an Other Activity display block from the list to specify the information displayed on
Activity items, such as blocks used to indicate shifts, maintenance periods, and explicit
availability.
9. To create, modify, or delete display blocks, click Display Block Maintenance. The list of
display blocks displays.

Display Block Setup

To set up display blocks:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Display View Maintenance.
2. Click Display Block Maintenance. The Display Blocks dialog displays.
3. Click New on the right side of the dialog, OR
Select an existing display block and click Copy to duplicate it. Enter a new name, and make
any necessary changes. The Display Block Properties dialog displays.
Figure 130. Display Block Properties

4. Enter the Display Block Name to identify the display block.

5. Specify the Display Block Properties.

a. Click in the text block and enter letters and numbers to specify static label text.
b. Use the arrow keys to navigate between different fields.
c. Right-click a field and select Font 1 or Font 2 to apply a different font to the entire line,
based on the fonts defined for Schedule Calendar Session and Schedule Calendar Session
2 (respectively) in ScheduALL System Preferences. Refer to System Preferences:
System Fonts.
d. Double-click a field to select it.
e. Drag a selected field to change the order of the fields.
f. Press the Enter key to insert carriage returns to wrap text. The text block displays [CR] to
indicate carriage returns.
g. Click Add Field to create a field which retrieves data from certain tables and fields in the
ScheduALL database. Refer to Display Block Column Properties for more information.
Note: If a line contains only a [CR], or text or spaces and a [CR], the (potentially blank)
line is displayed. If a line contains one or more Field elements, and all Field
elements in a line are empty (i.e. have no data to display), the system automatically
removes these lines (including any static label text) in the Display View or Flyover
View. For example, the standard “Start & Stop, Client, Job Info, Service, People”
block displays the Client Name, the Project Name, and the Job Name as
successive lines; if a work order has a Job Name but does not have a Project
assigned, this block shows the Client Name followed by the Job Name.
h. Select a field and click Edit Field to modify a field which retrieves data from certain tables
and fields in the ScheduALL database. Refer to Display Block Column Properties for
more information.
i. Double-click an existing field and click Delete Field to remove a field from the display
block.
6. In the Apply to section, select the item types to which the display block will be available.
l Select (check) Room to add this display block to the list of display blocks which may be
applied to rooms.
l Select (check) Resource to add this display block to the list of display blocks which may be
applied to general resources.
l Select (check) Other Activity to add this display block to the list of display blocks which
may be applied to activities.
l Select (check) Personnel to add this display block to the list of display blocks which may
be applied to personnel.
To set up display blocks for resources, refer to Display Blocks for Resources. To set up display
blocks for media assets, refer to Display Blocks for Media Assets.
Display Block Column Properties
The Column Properties dialog allows a user to create and modify the data fields used in display
blocks. Data fields retrieve information from the ScheduALL database and display the information as
part of a Display View.
To configure the Field properties:
1. In the Display Block Properties dialog select a field and click Edit Field. The Column

Figure 131. Column Properties Dialog

2. Select the Source database table that contains the desired information from the list.
Table 70. Source Tables, Display Blocks
List Item Table Name Description

Work Orders WO Fields from the Work Orders table.
WO: TE and WO:TR Table extensions and table references.
Resource Bookings (Events) SEVT Events table fields.
EV: TE and EV: TR Table extensions and table references.
Client Table CLNT Fields from the Client table
CL: TE and CL: TR Table extensions and table references.
Projects PROJECTS Fields from the Projects table.
Resource Base RSRCE Fields from the Resource Base table.
RS: TE and RS: TR Table extensions and table references.
3. Select the type of data to retrieve from the Source table:

l Select Field to retrieve data from the selected field of the specified table. For example, in
the Work Orders table, “Job Name” contains text data.
l Select Function to retrieve the result of a predefined action, such as calculations, counts,
or other formulas. For example, in the Work Orders table, “External Cost Total” calculates
the sum of external costs.
l Select Reference to retrieve information from a field in a related or linked table. For
example, in the Work Orders table, Client Address retrieves information stored in the Client
table.
4. Select the name of the field to retrieve.

5. In the Main tab area:

a. Select the data type. The list of available data types varies based on the selected
source field.
b. Specify a Field Length and Decimal Length for numeric fields, if necessary.
c. Select Left Justified to align text on the left margin of the block, OR
Select Right Justified to align text on the right margin of the block.
Display Blocks for Resources
To define the display blocks available to resource flyovers:
2. Click the Resources tab to manage display blocks used for resource browser columns.
3. Click New on the right side of the dialog to create a new display block, OR
Select an existing display view and click Edit to change a display block.
The Display Block Properties dialog displays.
4. Modify the display block as described in Display Block Setup.
5. Click OK to save changes or click Cancel to exit without saving any changes.
Note: The Copy command is not available on this tab.
Refer to Default Browser Flyover for ... and Override Browser Flyover for Rooms for
information on how to display resource flyovers in the Scheduling Calendar.
Display Blocks for Media Assets
The Media Assets tab is used to define the display blocks for the contents of the Details of selection
section on the Asset Media Manager dialog. This section displays details of the entry selected in the
Query Results list. Refer to the Media Manager System chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for
more information.
To define the display blocks:
2. Click the Media Assets tab to manage display blocks used for media assets.
3. Click New on the right side of the dialog to create a new display block, OR
Select an existing display view and click Edit to change a display block.
The Display Block Properties dialog displays.
4. Modify the display block as described in Display Block Setup.
5. Click OK to save changes or click Cancel to exit without saving any changes.
Note: The Copy command is not available on this tab.

Viewing the XML Log

The View XML Log command displays a dialog containing XML messages sent by the ScheduALL
legacy NMS application to an external system, as well as response messages returned by the
external system. Messages are displayed in the Message Log dialog. Table 71 describes the
available items.
To display the message log click File, click Setup, and then click View XML Log.
Figure 132. Message Log Dialog

Table 71. Message Log Descriptions
Item Description
Message Time Displays the time that the message was sent to the external system.
Message Sender Displays the name of the service that originated the message.
Message Recipient Displays the e-mail address to which the message was sent.
Message XML Displays the outgoing message content in XML format.
Response XML Displays the incoming response message content in XML format.
Device ID Displays the identifier of the device in the external system.

Contract Type Setup

(Requires Contract Manager)
Contract Types allow you to create types and assign them to contracts. Contract types can be
displayed in lists containing contract information. The Contract Type Setup dialog allows you to
create, edit, and delete contract types.
Figure 133. Contract Type Setup Dialog

To create a new contract type:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Contract Type Setup. The Contract Setup dialog
displays.
2. Click New at the bottom of the dialog.
3. Enter the Description to identify the contract type in the dialog that displays.
4. Click OK to save the contract type and return to the Contract Setup dialog.
To change or delete a contract type:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Contract Type Setup. The Contract Setup dialog
displays.
2. Select the contract type and do one of the following:
l To change a contract type description click Edit. The General Pick List Entry dialog
displays. Change the description and click OK.
l To delete a contract type, click Delete.
Report Group Setup

Report groups combine related reports into a group. For example, to create a report group for Ageing
reports, name the new group Ageing and then select all of the reports that begin with "Ageing". Click
Add.
Additional benefits of creating report groups include:
l Report groups allow the supervisor to limit user access to reports by the report group to which
they belong.
l Report groups allow reports to be filtered by group.

The Report Group Maintenance dialog allows you to create, modify, copy, or delete report groups.
Figure 134. Report Group Maintenance
To create a new report group:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and then click Setup Report Groups. The Report Group
2. Click New.
3. Enter a Group Name to identify the report group.
4. Select one or more reports to add to the group and click Add. The selected items display in the
Item Description list.
To modify, copy, or permanently remove an existing report group:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Setup Report Groups. The Report Group
2. To edit an existing report group, select the group from the Current Group list, and click Edit.
Make any necessary changes, such as adding or removing reports from the group or changing
the group name. Click Save to save all changes.
3. To delete a report group, select the group from the Current Group list and click Delete. A
confirmation dialog displays. Click Yes to permanently delete the report group.
Note: Deleting a report group does not remove the report entries assigned to the group.
4. To create a new report group based on an existing group, select the group from the Current
Group list. Click Edit and make any necessary changes. Type a name for the new group in
the Group Name field. Click Save As to save the new report group.

Resource Capabilities Setup

Resource Capabilities are used to create and assign specific capability tags to a resource (port) and
to service levels. Upon initiating a booking via Network Circuit Selection, designated resources will
be validated against the capabilities required by the specific service level assigned in the booking and
will be scheduled only if all required capabilities are matched.
The purpose of the load balance feature is to make sure the processing load is balanced (and failure
risk is diminished) across all cards in the node rather than one module or card being fully loaded (all its
ports booked) before scheduling moves to another card. The Load Balance checkbox is used with the
Load Balance Group field in Resource Setup. The load balance functionality cycles through the
various Load Balance Groups for resources which belong to a given Node. The different Load Balance
Group IDs define which ports belong to a given module or card. Load balance can be enabled on one
or many individual Resource Capabilities.
The Use Last/Prized setting is used to designate a capability which is the most valuable or perhaps
the rarest, so that resources which do NOT have the Prized capability as one of their assigned
Resource Capabilities are booked before a resource which does have this capability.
To create new Resource Capabilities:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Resource Capabilities Setup. The Resource
Capabilities Setup dialog displays.
Figure 135. Resource Capabilities Setup Dialog

2. Click New at the bottom of the dialog. The Resource Capabilities Setup dialog displays.
Figure 136. Resource Capabilities Setup, Capability Description Dialog

3. Enter the Capability description to identify the entry.
4. Select Use Last/Prized Capability to enable this feature.
5. Select Load Balance to make sure the processing load is balanced across all cards in the
node.
6. Click OK to save the entry.
To change or delete Resource Capabilities:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Resource Capabilities Setup. The Resource
Capabilities Setup dialog.

2. Select the appropriate entry and do one of the following:

l To change a capability description click Edit. The Resource Capabilities Setup dialog
displays. Change the description and click OK.
l To delete an entry, click Delete.
ScheduALL Connector Configuration

When using Windows Server Fail-over Clustering with the Connector system, it is important that
MSMQ services are on-line and running prior to starting ScheduALL Application Services. Failure to
do this could prevent Application Services from reading messages in the queue.
ScheduALL Connector Mapping Setup

Connector Mapping Setup allows transparent data exchange when booking through Connector
without requiring additional forms or data entry. The publisher can request mapping information from a
subscriber and can send information to the subscriber that they may want to use. The subscriber can
reply to a publisher's request for information, or they can accept information sent from the publisher.
Viewing Connector Mappings

To display this dialog, log in to ScheduALL with supervisor permissions. From the File menu click
Supervisor Options and then click Connector Mapping Setup.
Figure 137. Connector Mapping Setup Dialog, Publisher View

Table 72. Connector Mapping Setup Items, Publisher View
Item Description
Description Displays the Description entered by the publisher.
Field Description Displays the description of the field from the database.

Figure 138. Connector Mapping Setup Dialog, Subscriber View

Table 73. Connector Mapping Setup Items, Subscriber View
Item Description
Description Displays the Description entered by the publisher.
Field Description Displays the description of the field from the database.
Map Status Displays information about whether the information has been mapped.
Description This field is blank if the information has not been mapped.
Managing Connector Mappings

Using the Connector Mapping Setup feature you can manage the following types of mappings:
l Publisher
l Request from subscribers - allows the publisher to ask subscribers for information that
will be stored in a specific field in the publisher's database.
l Send to subscribers - allows the publisher to send information from a database field or
display view to subscribers .
l Subscriber
l Reply to publisher's request - allows the subscriber to answer the publisher's request
by specifying a database field or display view that contains the requested information.
l Accept from publisher - allows the subscriber to determine the database field in which
to store the information sent from the publisher.
The Connector Mapping dialog is used to request, send, reply to, or accept mapping information.
Figure 139. Connector Mapping Dialog
Requesting Information from Subscribers

A publisher can request mapping information from subscribers by specifying a database field name.
For example, the publisher can ask which field in the subscriber's system maps to the publisher's Job
Number field.
To create a publisher request:

1. In the Connector Mapping Setup dialog (refer to ScheduALL Connector Mapping Setup)
click the Pub: Request from Subscribers tab.
2. Click New. The Connector Mapping dialog displays. Refer to Managing Connector
Mappings.
3. Enter a description for the request. For example, Provide mapping for Job Number.
4. Select an option from the Mandatory list.
l No indicates that a reply to the request does not need to be received before bookings can be
made on the publisher's site.
l At Confirmed indicates that a reply to the request must be received before bookings can
be updated to Confirmed status.
l Always indicates that a reply to the request must be received before bookings can be
created on the publisher's site.
5. Click Select Database Field to choose the field about which you are requesting information.
Select the Source table and then select the field from the Fields list. The Database Field, Field
Description, and Data Type Requested entries are populated automatically.
Note: The Select Display View option is not available for this action.
6. Click OK.
A new entry displays in the Connector Mapping Setup dialog. Double-click the entry to make
changes.
Sending Information to Subscribers
A publisher can send mapping information to subscribers by specifying a database field name or
display view. In this way the publisher can inform subscribers about information contained in their
database.
To send information to subscribers:
click the Pub: Send to Subscribers tab.
2. Click New. The Connector Mapping dialog displays. Refer to Managing Connector
Mappings
3. Enter a description for the information being provided.
4. Click Select Database Field to choose the field containing the information you are sending.
Select the Source table and then select the field from the Fields list. The Database Field, Field
Description, and Data Type Requested entries are populated automatically.
OR
Click Select Display View to select a display view, which allows you to send information
about more than one field. The display view name and Data Type Requested entries are
populated automatically.
5. Click OK.
A new entry displays in the Connector Mapping Setup dialog. Double-click the entry to make
changes.

Replying to a Publisher's Request for Information

A subscriber can reply to a publisher's request for mapping information. For example, the subscriber
can reply to a request for mapping of the subscriber's Job Number field.
To reply to a publisher request:
click the Sub: Send to Subscribers tab.
2. Double-click a request in the list.
3. Click Select Database Field to choose the field which fulfills the request from the publisher.
Select the Source table and then select the field from the Fields list.
OR
Click Select Display View to select a display view, which allows you to reply with more
information than one field.
4. Click OK.
Accepting Information from a Publisher
A subscriber can accept information from a publisher and map that information to the subscriber's
database.
To accept information from a publisher:
click the Sub: Accept from Publisher tab.
2. Double-click an entry in the list.
3. Click Select Database Field to choose the field which maps to the information from the
publisher. Select the Source table and then select the field from the Fields list.
Note: The Select Display View option is not available for this action. If the publisher sends
information from a display view, a significant amount of information may be transferred.
The subscriber should ensure that the database field selected is large enough to contain
the data sent.
4. Click OK.
Notifying Subscribers of Mapping Changes
When a publisher makes changes in the Connector Mapping Setup dialog the publisher's subscribers
need to be notified of the changes.
To notify subscribers:
1. Click Notify Subscribers to display the HTML Editor.
2. Enter the text to tell subscribers of the changes made.
3. Click Submit. Notifications are sent to all of the publisher's subscribers.
Subscribing to iCalendars
The ScheduALL iCalendar Creator allows the ScheduALL system to publish calendar information in a
standard format as iCalendar-compatible feeds. Applications or systems outside the ScheduALL
system can then connect to the feeds to retrieve booking information.
ScheduALL iCalendar Creator generate a series of calendar files based on work order and event
bookings in ScheduALL. iCalendars are displayed by any programs that allow internet calendar
subscriptions, such as Microsoft Outlook® or Google Google Calendar™. Refer to product
documentation for instructions on subscribing to internet calendars.

These calendars display a time slice to show scheduled events for a fixed period of time. They do not
receive live updates from the scheduling system. They are intended to show the user what was
booked at the time the calendar was created. The calendar updates within the configured time
window.
The calendar displays the same bookings seen in ScheduALL. They are a part of any subscriber’s
personnel calendars and are common to all users who subscribe.
To include resources in iCalendars edit the resource setup. Refer to the iCalendar Enabled entry in
the following topics:
l General Resource – Other
l Personnel Properties – Main
l Room Properties – Other
For more detailed information refer to iCalendar Creator in the Installation/Update Guide and
Revision History.
Configuring SSL
To enable web applications such as WebScheduler and WebApp to use certain features in SSL the
user needs to make changes to the Web.config file for the appropriate application. To make changes
to this file open it in a text editor, such as Notepad.
Requiring Secure Cookies

Add <httpCookies requireSSL="true" /> to the appropriate Web.config file. When https is
also running the application operates properly and cookies are encrypted.
Using SSL for WebApp

To enable SSL for WebApp, add the following setting to the Web.config file in the WebApp folder:
<setting name="UseSSL" serializeAs="String">
<value>True</value>
</setting>
Securing SSL Over the Web

To secure communication between Application Services and any other ScheduALL .net applications
over the web, add the following setting to the appropriate Web.config file:
<setting name="IsHTTPPortSSL" serializeAs="String">
<value>True</value>
</setting>
Creating and Managing Single Point of Failure Catalogs

The Single Point of Failure Catalog feature enhances route diversity for protected path bookings by
adding physical diversity validation to the existing logical diversity validation.
The diversity of a route was previously determined by rules related to logical routing, such as by the
end points. This created a primary path moving from node to node across a set of lines (trunks) which
are configured as a direct connection between the specifically-named nodes (line source to line
destination). A diverse secondary path was then created by avoiding the specific trunks and nodes or
node clusters which were used in the primary path.

These routes are diverse in the logical sense, as described and plotted on a map by the start and end
point of each line in the routes. However, these lines may not be physically diverse. They may share
hidden touch points which make them vulnerable as a single point of failure. The single point of failure
catalog adds the functionality to bring diversity assurance at the physical routing level, not just the
logical routing level.
The catalog can contain several collections of resources. These collections are accessed using the
following methods:
l Collection Setup – Refer to Adding a Collection Catalog and Managing Collection
Catalogs.
l Resource Setup – Refer to General Resource Properties – Collection.
Adding a Collection Catalog

A single point of failure catalog is a collection of resources. These catalogs are created and managed
from the Setup menu. For more information on single point of failure collections, refer to Creating and
Managing Single Point of Failure Catalogs.
To create a collections catalog:
1. From the File menu, select Setup, and then select Collections Setup1. The Collections
Figure 140. Collections Setup Dialog
1Some dialogs, tabs, and controls referenced in this section may not display on factory dialogs, but can be added using
Developer’s Toolkit.

2. Click New to create a new collection catalog. The Collections Catalog dialog displays.
Figure 141. Collections Catalog Dialog

3. Enter a descriptive name for the catalog in the Description field.
4. Select an Affinity Level from the list.
l Excluded indicates that if any line in the primary route has this single point of failure
assigned, then no line that has this same single point of failure assigned can be used in
the secondary route.
l Last Option indicates that if any line in the primary route has this single point of failure
assigned, creation of the secondary route will be first attempted on lines which do not
have this same single point of failure assigned. If no secondary route can be found with
these lines excluded, then the lines which have this same single point of failure will be
added back to the pool as a last option in the attempt to create a protected path.
l Neutral is a reserved setting.
5. To allow this catalog to be considered in new bookings select Active. To temporarily
deactivate the catalog, clear this option.
6. To add resources to the catalog click Assign Resource. The Resource Maintenance dialog
displays. Select resources and click Select to add them. The resources display in the Included
Resources list.
7. To remove resources previously added, select them and click Release Resource.

Managing Collection Catalogs

The Collections Setup dialog is used to change or remove a collection catalog.
To manage collection Catalogs:
1. From the File menu, select Setup, and then select Collections Setup1. The Collections
Setup dialog displays. Refer to Adding a Collection Catalog for an example of this dialog.
2. To change and existing catalog select it and click Edit. The Collections Catalog dialog
displays. Refer to Adding a Collection Catalog for a description of the settings in the dialog.
Make any necessary changes and click OK.
3. To remove a catalog select it in the list and click Delete.
1Some dialogs, tabs, and controls referenced in this section may not display on factory dialogs, but can be added using
Developer’s Toolkit.

ScheduALL WebApp Setup

This section contains configuration options and procedures for the ScheduALL WebApp program.
Some of the fields and features described here are not part of the default dialogs. Information on
adding them is found in Modifying ScheduALL Portal Dialogs.
Adding, Editing, and Deleting Banners

Banners display in the Portal page of ScheduALL WebApp. The dates that a banner starts and ends,
and the wording of the banner are configured here. When a banner expires, the text will no longer be
displayed.
Figure 142. Portal Page, Banner Area
To add a banner:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and then select Banner Maintenance.
2. Click New. The Banners Setup Dialog displays.
Figure 143. Banners Setup Dialog

3. The Date Created field shows the current date and is not editable.
4. Enter the date when you want to start displaying the banner in the Start Date field.
5. Enter the date when you want to stop displaying the banner in the End Date field.
6. Type the wording of the banner in the Banner Text field. Click the small filled square to access
an internal text editor. Refer to Notes Editor.
7. Click OK.
Note: The dates of one banner may not overlap the dates of another. An error is displayed.

To change a banner:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and then select Banner Maintenance. The Banner
Figure 144. Banner Maintenance Dialog

2. Select a banner from the list and click Edit or double-click the banner name. The Banners
Setup Dialog displays.
3. Make the necessary changes to the Start Time, End Time, or Banner Text.
4. Click OK.
To delete a banner:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and then select Banner Maintenance. The Banner
2. Select a banner from the list and click Delete.
3. Click Yes when prompted.
Configuring ScheduALL Smart Time User Accounts

The ScheduALL Smart Time™ function allows users to view their existing work events on a calendar
and manage those events. It can also allow a manager to view and approve work for their employees.
To allow user accounts to access the Smart Time tab in ScheduALL WebApp the account must be
correctly configured. This section outlines the necessary items.
l Smart Time is licensed as a module. A license must be purchased and the license file in
ScheduALL will need to be updated.
l In User Profiles & Security, on the Add or Modify User dialog, the user must have a Link to
Resource item selected to have access to the Smart Time tab, even if they are managers.
Refer to Adding ScheduALL Users.
l In User Profiles & Security, in the appropriate user or group Permissions settings dialog, the
Work Area Visibility (ScheduALL WebApp Only) setting must allow the user to access the
Smart Time tab. Refer to Work Area Visibility (ScheduALL WebApp Only).
l In User Profiles & Security, in the appropriate user or group Permissions settings dialog, the
options under the Time Capture section must be reviewed and adjusted. Refer to Time
Capture/Smart Time.

Disabling Mobile Login

When accessing ScheduALL from a mobile device the user has the option of viewing a mobile version
of the application. To disable this feature and remove the option from the Log In screen change the
MobileSupport setting in the Web.config file to False.
Follow these steps to disable mobile login.
1. Using a text editor open the Web.config file, located in the WebApp folder in your ScheduALL
installation folder (ScheduALL5 is the default).
2. Locate the NCS.Properties.Settings section.
3. Change the MobileSupport setting in the Web.config file to False.
Example:
<setting name="MobileSupport" serializeAs="String">

<value>False</value> </setting>
Single Sign On and Active Directory

WebApp does not support Single Sign On in the same way that the ScheduALL desktop application
does. The user must log on from the WebApp web page.
Active Directory integration can remove the need for administrators to manually add new users to the
domain. Also, users will be allowed to use their Windows user name and password to log on to
WebApp, and manage their password through Windows. The user would not have to manage two
passwords.
Administrators can use Active Directory to create new ScheduALL accounts given the following:
l The “Automatically create ScheduALL Account upon login” feature must be enabled.
l A user template that has Working Areas for WebApp predefined must be present.
Creating a Windows Domain account will automatically create a matching account inside the
ScheduALL system. The user may need to log on to the ScheduALL application at least once before
launching WebApp.
Enabling the Book Now Feature

Enabling the Book Now feature in ScheduALL Portal requires the supervisor to modify the Web.config
file located in the WebApp folder of the folder where ScheduALL5 is installed. Follow these steps to
enable the Book Now button.
1. Locate the Web.config file.
2. Open the file using a text editor, such as Notepad.
3. Locate the NCS.Portal.Properties.Settings section.
4. Change the value for BookNowEnabled to "true".
5. Save the file.
Example:
<NCS.Portal.Properties.Settings portalTimeSelectorIncrement="30"
disableManualPortalTimeEntry="No" portalBookingLeadTime="0"
bookNowEnabled="true">

Setting the Book Now Pause Duration

The Book Now feature in ScheduALL Portal sets the start and end time of the new booking to the
current date and time plus the number of minutes specified in the Book Now Pause Duration system
preference. For example, if the current time is 09:45 and the system preferences is set to 15 minutes,
then the start and end time will be set at 10:00. Follow these steps to set the system preference.
1. Open the ScheduALL application.
2. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, and then select System Preferences.
3. Select General, and then select System Options.
4. Locate the Portal Options section.
5. Change the number of minutes in the Book Now Pause Duration field.
6. Click OK to save your changes.
ScheduALL Portal Setup

This section contains configuration options and procedures for the ScheduALL Portal™ feature.
Configuring Client Users
A client user is a ScheduALL user that is associated with a client record. The Portal feature of
ScheduALL WebApp can only be accessed by client users. Refer to Link Client/Agency for
information on creating a client user.
Granting the User Permission to Access Portal

Security settings must be configured to allow the user or user group access to Portal. The Portal
setting is mandatory, while other tabs such as Accounting and Settings are optional. To set
permissions to access the Portal tab, refer to Work Area Visibility (ScheduALL WebApp Only).
Client Account Resource Permissions

If a terminal or destination can only be used by certain clients then that resource is marked as
Permission Required. Refer to Configuring Terminals. The client account must be given
permission to use those resources. This is done by adding terminals or destinations that the client
can access to the Resource Preferences list. Follow the steps below to add resources to that list.
1. From the File menu, select Setup, and then select Clients, Accounts, and Agencies. Edit
the client record.
2. Click the Preferences tab.
3. Click Permission to Use. The Select Preferred Resources dialog displays. If this button is
not available on the dialog, refer to Adding the Permission to Use Command.
4. Select the resources to add to the list of terminals or destinations that this client has
permission to use.

5. Click Select. The resource is added to the Resource Preferences list.
Figure 145. Client Setup, Preferences Tab, Resource Preferences, Permission to Use

6. When you are finished adding resource preferences, click OK to save the client information.
Settings for Terrestrial Portal Bookings

For Terrestrial bookings, the Portal knows which services to offer the user based on the room
configured as the Request Room in System Preference. To set the Request Room:
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, select System Preferences, and then
select General.
2. Click the System Options tab.
3. In the System Options section, locate the Request Room setting.
4. Select the desired room and click OK.
User or user group permissions need to be edited to allow the user or group to create Portal bookings
using the Portal Booking Wizard.
Configuring Resources and Services
Resources and services need certain settings so that they are available in Portal. These settings are
configured in the Setup area in the ScheduALL application. The settings are shown here.
Resource Setup
l On the Main tab:
l Select Is Portal Booking Type (Refer to Adding Controls for Is Portal Booking
Type for instructions on adding these controls.)
l Select a Portal Type
l On the Services tab:
l Select the appropriate services

Service Setup
l On the Main tab:
l Select Include in Self Provisioning
l Select Allow Portal Additional Resources (optional)
l Select a WebApp Service Type
l On the Capable Rooms tab:
l Add rooms -OR-
Select Available in All Rooms
Configuring Terminals
A terminal is the initiation point (or uplink) of a transmission path, also known as the source.
Terminals are client specific and need to be configured so that only authorized clients can view and
book from authorized terminals.
A terminal is a room type resource. Create a new room and enter the name of the terminal in the
Room Description field. Refer to Room Resource Setup. Configure the room as follows:
On the Main tab:
1. Select (check) Check Availability.
2. Select (check) Permission Required if the terminal can only be used by certain clients. For
example, if a terminal is used only by Client A, Requires Permission should be selected and
permissions to the resource should be granted for Client A. For a client to use a resource that
requires permission, the Client Account Resource Permissions needs to be set for the
resource. Refer to Client Account Resource Permissions.
3. On the Path Mgmt tab, select (check) Can be a Source. If this is an Ethernet resource, also
select (check) Can be a Destination.
Configuring Destinations
A destination is the optional end, or target, of a transmission path. The destination receives a signal
and provides it to an external system for distribution, storage, or playback.
A destination is a General type resource. Create a new general resource and enter the name of the
destination in the Room Description field. Refer to General Resource Setup. Configure the resource
as follows:
On the Main tab:
2. Select (check) Permission Required if the destination can only be used by certain clients.
For example, if a destination is used only by Client A, Requires Permission should be selected
and permissions to the destination resource should be granted for Client A. For a client to use
a resource that requires permission, the Client Account Resource Permissions needs to be
set for the resource. Refer to Client Account Resource Permissions.
3. Enter the minimum EIRP value that needs to be achieved to close a feed in the Required
EIRP field.
4. On the Path Mgmt tab, select (check) Can be a Destination.

Setting Transponder Offset Values

For some users, when using General or BandPLAN resources in ScheduALL Portal, you may need to
enter the offset values for the resources. The BandPLAN Resource Properties Dialog, Path
Management Tab is used to enter these values.
Figure 146. BandPLAN Resource Properties Dialog, Path Management Tab

Complete the following steps to enter transponder values.
2. Select the BandPLAN or General resource to modify and click Edit.
3. Click the Path Mgmt tab.
4. Enter the TX Offset and RX Offset values. These settings determine the following:
l RX Offset - the signal power gain or loss due to the transponder receiver.
l TX Offset - the signal power gain or loss due to the transponder transmitter.
5. Click OK.
Modifying Quick Add Duration Values
ScheduALL Portal users can use Quick Add Duration buttons to select the duration for a transmission
booking. Default values are shown here (in minutes):
Figure 147. Quick Add Durations, Default Values

Follow these steps to change duration selection values.

Figure 148. WebApp Web.config NCS Portal Properties Settings

3. Modify the QuickAddValue settings to change the behavior of the Quick Add Duration buttons.
EXAMPLE
To change the fourth button from 15 minutes to 20, change the fourth value to 20.

4. If all six buttons are not required, change the value to 0 to hide a button.
EXAMPLE
To hide the 60 minute duration button change the value to 0.
5. Save your changes.

Modifying Time Increment Values
When you set the start or end time of a portal booking by selecting from the time list, the default
increment between time selections is 30 minutes. This interval can be changed by editing the
Web.config file.
Follow these steps to change time increment values and restrict manual entry.

Figure 149. WebApp Web.config NCS Portal Properties Settings

3. To change the time increment modify the portalTimeSelectorIncrement setting. The default is
30 . Save your changes.
EXAMPLE
To change the time increment value to 15.

Disabling Manual Portal Time Entry

Setting the time for a portal booking can be done by typing values for hours and minutes or selecting
times from a list by clicking the clock icon. Both methods are shown here.
Figure 150. Portal Booking Time Entry

An administrator may want to disable manual time entry so that the user must select times from the
time list or Quick Add Duration buttons. To do this change disableManualPortalTimeEntry in the
Web.config file to Yes and then save your changes.
3. Change the value of disableManualPortalTimeEntry to Yes.
4. Save the file.
EXAMPLE
NCS.Portal.Properties.Settings portalTimeSelectorIncrement="30"
disableManualPortalTimeEntry="Yes" portalBookingLeadTime="0"
Displaying Transmission Status

Portal users who wish to display the current transmission status on the My Bookings tab can do so by
modifying the WebApp Web.config file.
To modify the Web.config file:
3. Add the attribute displayTransmissionOrderStatus="true".
4. Save the file.

The transmission status column is added to the My Bookings tab. The filled square displays the
transmission status color.
Figure 151. Transmission Order Status Column
EXAMPLE
<NCS.Portal.Properties.Settings portalTimeSelectorIncrement="30"
disableManualPortalTimeEntry="No" portalBookingLeadTime="0"
bookNowEnabled="false" displayTransmissionOrderStatus="true">
Specifying Portal Booking Lead Time

Portal Booking Lead Time allows an administrator to add a specific amount of time to the default start
and end times of a new booking. The lead time is added to the current time and the start and end
times are set to the next available increment past the calculated value.
Example:
l If the current time is 10:25 a.m.

l and the Portal Booking Lead Time is 3 minutes
l and the Time Selector Increment is 10 minutes
l then the start and end time would be 10:30 a.m.
This is determined by adding the 3 min Portal Booking Lead Time to 10:25a (Now) which
results in a time of 10:28a. Given 10 minimum increments (i.e. 10:00, 10:10, 10:20, 10:30), the
next available increment is 10:30. If the Service Lead Time is changed to 6 minutes, the
selected time would be increased to 10:40 a.m. (10:25 + 6 = 10:31, so the next available
interval is 10:40).
To specify the Portal Booking Lead Time:

3. Change the value of portalBookingLeadTime to the desired value.
4. Save your changes.

Example:
NCS.Portal.Properties.Settings portalTimeSelectorIncrement="30"
disableManualPortalTimeEntry="Yes" portalBookingLeadTime="3"
Creating a Portal Service

The ScheduALL system allows supervisors to create pre-defined services by bundling resources or
requirements together, and specify combined billing rates for a service. Services can be used in the
Portal system by modifying some of the service properties. This section discusses the general steps
for creating a service and specific steps for configuring both Terrestrial and Satellite services.
1. From the File menu, select Setup and then select Services.
2. Click New to create a new service or select the service to modify and click Edit. The Service
3. Enter the Service Description. This is the service name that will display in the list of services
when creating a portal booking. Enter the Billing Description and Engineering Description if
desired. For more information on creating services, refer to Service Setup.
Continue with either Terrestrial Service Setup or Satellite Service Setup.
Terrestrial Service Setup

Services used with Terrestrial bookings must have the portal type set to Terrestrial. The service
should also have the same settings as a Circuit service.
1. On the Main tab of the Service Properties dialog Select (check) Include in Self-Provisioning
to enable the service.
2. From the WebApp Service Type list, select Terrestrial.
3. Click the Capable Rooms tab. The Available in these Rooms list displays.
Figure 152. Service Properties, Capable Rooms

4. Click Add to List. The Select Rooms for Service dialog displays.
5. Select the room selected in the Request Room preference to add to the service and click
Select. The selected Request Rooms are displayed in the Available in these Rooms list.
Refer to Settings for Terrestrial Portal Bookings.
6. Click OK.

Note: If the WebApp Service Type list does not display, refer to Adding the Portal Type List to the
Service Properties Dialog.
Satellite Service Setup

Follow the steps below to configure Services used with Satellite bookings.
1. On the Main tab of the Service Properties dialog select (check) Include in Self-Provisioning
to enable the service.
2. From the WebApp Service Type list, select Satellite.
Note: If the WebApp Service Type list does not display, refer to Adding the Portal Type List
to the Service Properties Dialog.
3. Add resources to be used in the service. Refer to Resources to Include Browser. Add
resources as described in the next step. Each resource must have the RX Offset and TX
Offset values set in resource setup. Refer to Setting Transponder Offset Values.
4. Configure Bandwidth Pools for the service. Each service can have a list of "bandwidth
potentials" associated to it that will be evaluated during booking time for the system to select
the best available space for the request. The best available logic evaluates the preferred
status of the proposed bandwidth as well as its ability to close the feed to each of the selected
destinations. A Pool will return one resource as the best available. The following can be used
in a pool:
l Click BandPlan to select a band from a BandPlan resource. Select the resource to add and
click Select. Select a capacity from the list and click OK.
l Click Band Segment to select a specific Band Segment. Double-click a BandPlan
resource and select a segment from the Select Segment for Resource... list and click OK.
For information on modifying the Band Segment dialog, refer to Band Segment
Information.
l Click Add to select a General resource.

5. While the Service can have multiples pools defined, the Satellite Portal only needs one pool
per service. Double-click the resources you added. The Resource to Auto-Include dialog
displays. Enter a non-zero numeric identifier in the Pool Group # field.
Figure 153. Resources to Auto-Include Dialog
CAUTION: Do not accept the default value of 0. This will cause an error.
6. Select (check) Preferred to identify this resource as a preferred bandwidth segment, if
desired.
7. Click OK.

8. Click the Capable Rooms tab. The Available in these Rooms list displays.
Figure 154. Service Properties, Capable Rooms

9. To make terminals (rooms) available to this service, click Add to List. The Select Rooms for
Service dialog displays. You can select multiple rooms.
10. Select the rooms to add to the service and click Select. The selected rooms are displayed in
the Available in these Rooms list.
11. Double-click the rooms you added. The Service Catalog Properties dialog displays.
Figure 155. Service Catalog Properties Dialog

12. Enter a value in the Service TX Power field:
l Enter zero to bypass power checking, or
l Enter a value of one or more to set the base power for that terminal (room) at a particular
service level.
13. Enter values for Start TX Power and Max TX Power, if desired.
14. Click OK, and then click OK again.
Modifying ScheduALL Portal Dialogs

This section contains instructions for making changes to dialogs used to configure ScheduALL
Portal.

Adding the Permission to Use Command

If a terminal or destination can only be used by certain clients then that resource is marked as
Permission Required. The client account must be given permission to use those resources. To do
this, the Add Permission to Use command button must be added to the Client Properties dialog if it is
not already present.
To create the dialog controls required for or related to this feature, log in to the ScheduALL system as
a supervisor or with permissions to the Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the specified form by
adding the specified controls:
Dialog / Form Control Type Control Details Notes

Client Form Picture Button Caption: Permission to Use Location: Preferences tab,
Command: Add Permission to Resource Preferences
Use section
Icon: Blue Plus/Add
Modifying Resource Dialogs to Configure Terminals or Destinations

Several of the fields required to set up terminals and destinations need to be added to the ScheduALL
dialogs. This section discusses how to make the necessary additions.
If a terminal or destination can only be used by certain clients the Permission Required option must
be selected. This option must be added if it is not displayed on the appropriate setup dialogs. To
create the dialog controls required for or related to this feature, log in to the ScheduALL system as a
supervisor or with permissions to the Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the specified form by
adding the specified controls:

General Resource Setup Checkbox Source: Resource Base Location: Main tab
Room Setup Type: Fields
Field: Permission
Required
Title: Permission Required
To display the Pool Id and the Preferred in Pool values in the Resources to Include list in the Service
Properties dialog, add those columns to the list. To create the dialog controls required for or related to
this feature, log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with permissions to the Developer’s
Toolkit Module, and modify the specified form by adding the specified controls.

Service Properties Browser Add columns: Recommended
l Pool Id - Resource location: Main tab
Explosion Table,
Fields, Pool Id
l Preferred in Pool -
Resource Explosion
Table, Fields,
Preferred in Pool

Adding the Portal Type List to the Service Properties Dialog

A portal service needs to be configured as either a Satellite or Terrestrial service. To do this, add the
Portal Type list to the Service Properties dialog. To create the dialog controls required for or related to
Toolkit Module, and modify the specified form by adding the specified controls.
Note: As of version 5.10 this list is included in the default Service Setup dialog.

Service Catalog Properties Combobox Source: Resource Base Create Static control for title.
Field: Portal Type Location: Main tab
Title: WebApp Service Type
Adding Controls for Is Portal Booking Type

The Is Portal Booking Type checkbox and Portal Type combo box controls are used to identify
whether resources (e.g. Rooms and General Resources) can be used to create General Bookings in
ScheduALL Portal. To add the controls required for this feature, use the Developers Toolkit module to
modify the General Resource Setup and Room setup dialogs by adding the following controls:
Dialog/Form Control Type Control Details Notes
General Resource Checkbox Source: Resource Base Recommended Location: Other Tab
Setup Type: Fields
Room Setup Field: Is Portal Booking Type
Title: Portal Booking Type
Combobox Source: Resource Base
Control Type: Fields
Field:Portal Type
These controls have special functionality with respect to resource group security. Contact your
ScheduALL representative for more information.
Updating the Service Catalog Properties Dialog
The Service Catalog Properties Dialog allows the user to specify power settings for the Terminals in
the Capable Rooms tab of the Service Properties dialog. To create the dialog controls required for or
related to this feature, log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with permissions to the
Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the specified form by adding the specified controls:


Service Catalog Properties Edit Source: Service Room Create Static controls for
Catalogue titles.
Field: Service EIRP
Title: Service TX Power
Edit Source: Service Room
Catalogue
Field: Start EIRP
Title: Start TX Power
Edit Source: Service Room
Catalogue
Field: Max EIRP
Title: Max TX Power
Enhancing Security Settings

New parameters can be added to the Web.config file in the WebApp folder to enhance the standard
security. These parameters are listed here. Open the Web.config file with a text editor and add the
required parameters.
Disable HTTP Compression (If Compression Module Installed)

Installation Defaults:
<system.webServer>
<urlCompression doStaticCompression="true" doDynamicCompression="true"
/>
</system.webServer>
To Disable Compression:
<system.webServer>
<urlCompression doStaticCompression="false" doDynamicCompression="false"
/>
</system.webServer>
Disable Frameable Pages

<system.webServer>
<httpProtocol>
<customHeaders>
<add name="X-Frame-Options" value="ALLOW" />
</customHeaders>
</httpProtocol>
</system.webServer>
To Disable Framing:
<system.webServer>
<httpProtocol>
<customHeaders>

<add name="X-Frame-Options" value="DENY" />

</customHeaders>
</httpProtocol>
</system.webServer>
Enable Secure Cookies for use with SSL Only

<system.web>
<authentication mode="None">
<forms requireSSL="false" />
</authentication>
<httpCookies requireSSL="false" />
</system.web>
To Enable Secure Cookies:
<system.web>
<authentication mode="None">
<forms requireSSL="true" />
</authentication>
<httpCookies requireSSL="true" />
</system.web>
Redirecting to HTTPS
It is recommended that if the options above are enabled and SSL is being used, ensure that SSL is
able to redirect from HTTP to HTTPS.
<NCS.Properties.Settings>
<setting name="UseSSL" serializeAs="String">
<value>True</value>
</setting>
</NCS.Properties.Settings>

Ch. 2 Program
Administration
This chapter includes information about the system settings and preferences by which the ScheduALL and
ScheduLINK systems operates. It includes information about the security profiles and permissions used to grant
or deny access to program areas and features. It also includes information about the maintenance tasks required
to manage the report library and file system.
In This Chapter
Overview 245
Supervisor Account 245
System Preference Setup 246
User Profiles and Security 413
Configuring Maximum Number of Users 515
Viewing Active Users 515
Audit Trail 518
Extended Trail 520
Report Catalog Maintenance 522
Set SQL Passwords 525
Other Supervisor Options 525
File Operations 526
E-mail Services 526
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Ch. 2 Program Administration
Overview
The ScheduALL and ScheduLINK systems operates within a framework of preferences and
permissions. The highly flexible framework allows administrators to configure multiple aspects of
system behavior to suit the needs of a facility or business.
System Preferences control the program’s behavior and display properties on a system-wide basis.
User Preferences are invoked for each user when the user logs in, and control the program’s behavior
and display properties for that user only. In cases where an option is available in both System
Preferences and User Preferences, the user’s choice will override the system default.
Security Settings define the application and access permissions of each login account. The
Supervisor can block the user’s access to the User Preferences through the user’s security profile.
Refer to User Profiles and Security.
Other important administrative tasks involve management of the report library, maintenance of the
database and logical file system, and configuration and maintenance of the e-mail services used by
the ScheduALL system to send outgoing e-mail.
Supervisor Account
The ScheduALL system requires regular administration for optimum performance, such as the
creation of new user accounts, the selection of system settings, and the execution of routine file
maintenance. To ensure program security and data integrity, the ScheduALL system is designed to
limit access to administrative functions to only those accounts with the correct permissions.
The installation process creates the Supervisor account automatically. The Supervisor account has
full access to all areas of program settings, file maintenance, and program security. Profile settings
also allow the Supervisor account to grant full supervisory rights to other user accounts or user
groups. Refer to User Profiles and Security for more information about user accounts and
passwords.
Note: By default the Supervisor account does not have a password, so it is recommended to specify
a password as quickly as possible.
For simplicity, instructions and descriptions in this document that refer to “the supervisor” refer to any
account that has supervisory rights, or the appropriate access permissions for the specified feature or
application area.

System Preference Setup

System Preferences are the main program settings which define operational behavior for the entire
application and all user accounts. These settings are divided into three main groups:
l General preferences determine operating behavior such as workflow rules, automatic
numbering systems, time zones, customized field labels, and system options.
l Colors determine the colors used to display visual calendar elements, dialog boxes, text, and
effects such as shadows and highlights.
l Fonts determine the typeface settings used to display text in application dialogs.
General System Preferences

The System Preferences dialog allows access to the settings described in this section.
System Preferences - Main Tab
The Main tab defines settings applied to work orders and certain accounting features. Table 74
1. To display the Main tab, from the File menu select Supervisor Options, select System
Preferences, and then click General. The System Preferences dialog displays.
2. The Main tab contains settings for work order behavior, automatic numbering systems,
accounting options, and ledger settings. Make any necessary changes.
3. Click Print to open the standard text editor and view all System Preference selections and
their current settings as plain text. Refer to Printing System Preferences.
Note: Preferences that require a particular module can be configured at any time, but do not provide
the functionality described if the required module is not enabled.
Figure 156. System Preferences, Main Tab

Table 74. SYSTEM PREFERENCES, MAIN TAB SETTINGS
Preference Description
Begin Assigning Work Sets the status at which the system assigns a work order number to a
Order Numbers from: work order. (If the Multi-Company module is used to share all rooms
and resources across multiple companies, work order numbers cannot
be assigned at the Request stage.)
Choices include all possible status options. Default is Request.
Note: If the label for a status level is changed on the General tab of
System Preferences, the item labels in the status list do not
change until the System Preferences dialog is closed and
reopened.
Default Unit Of Measure: Sets the default standard of measurement applied to rooms,
resources, or services in a work order, if the item does not have a
Billing Rate/Price defined when the Rate Card is assigned to the work
order. (Prices cannot be calculated without a unit of measure. Refer to
Price Maintenance for information on price rates.)
Choices are all possible units of measure. Default is Hour.
Work Order Items Sort Determines the method used to display the list of resources assigned
Order: to a work orders.
l <Do not Sort> lists resources in the order in which they were
applied. (Default.)
l Category/Type/Resource groups resources first by category and
then by type, and then sorts them alphabetically by description.
l By Resource lists resources alphabetically by description.
l People First lists all personnel at the top of the list of applied
resources.
l People First (Alphabetize) lists all personnel at the top of the list
of applied resources (listed alphabetically).
l By Start Time lists resources in the order of their Start Time
within the work order, earliest start times first.
Job Number Encoding Sets whether the Job Number is automatically populated with the
project number when a work order is created from within a project.
l User Defined does not automatically populate the Job Number
field. (Default.)
l Place Project Number In Job Number Field automatically
copies the project number into the Job Number field. (Requires
Project Manager.)
l Set Next Job Number When Needed displays a numeric input
field. The “Assign Next Job Number” command on the Work
Order menu assigns the value to a work order and increments the
counter. Refer to Menus and Toolbars, Work Order in the Work
Orders chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more
information.

Table 74. System Preferences, Main Tab Settings (continued)
Use Minimum Determines whether to enforce the Minimum Qty Sold and Minimum
Quantity/Quantity Increment fields in the resource properties. (Refer to Managing
Increment Resources, Resource Properties dialog, Other tab).
l Selected (checked) enforces minimum quantities and quantity
increments when scheduling a work order. (Default.)
l Deselected (cleared) does not enforce minimum quantities or
quantity increments in a work order.
Allow more than one Room Determines whether more than one room can be booked in a single
in a Work Order work order. In the ScheduLINK system, bandwidth management and
uplink or downlink work orders may require more than one room.
l Selected (checked) allows a user to assign more than one room
to a single work order.
l Deselected (cleared) prevents a user from assigning more than
one room to a single work order. (Default.)
Use Company specific (Requires Multi-Company Module.) Determines whether work order
counters and invoice numbers configured in the Company properties are used to
generate company-specific work order and invoice numbers.
l Selected (checked) uses a separate counter, and prepends the
Company ID to work order numbers, for each company that
has a custom counter defined. Refer to Company-Specific
Counters in the Multi-Company chapter of the ScheduALL
Users Guide for information.
l Deselected (cleared) uses the standard (master counter) work
order and invoice counters for all companies. (Default.)
Apply Night Rates Determines if night rate differentials are applied to work orders. Night
rates are configured as part of the rate card for each resource, using
the Day/Night time method.
l Selected (checked) applies night rates for hours specified by the
“Between...and...” input fields. Refer to Price Maintenance for
information about defining night rates.
l Deselected (cleared) does not apply night rates. (Default.)
Between, and When Apply Night Rates is enabled (checked), determines the times
at which the Night Differential period starts and ends. All resources
configured for Day/Night pricing use the same period to determine
which price to apply.
Enter the hour and minute at which night rates begin and end.

Set Counters
Next Invoice Number (Requires Billing Module.) Opens the Set Next Invoice Number
window, which sets the master counter value used to generate the
Invoice Number value of the next generated invoice.
When licensed for the Multi-Company module, enabling company-
specific counters overrides this counter when a counter is defined in
company properties. (Companies that do not have a company-specific
counter continue to use the master counter.) Refer to Company-
Specific Counters in the Multi-Company chapter of the ScheduALL
Next Project Number (Requires Project Manager.) Opens the Set Next Project Number
window, which sets the master counter value used to generate the
Project Number value of the next project.
Next Asset Barcode (Requires Media Manager System module.) Opens the Set Next
Number Asset Barcode Number window, which sets the master counter value
used to generate the asset barcode value of the next media asset.
Next Work Order Number Opens the Set Next Work Order Number window, which sets the
master counter used to generate the next Work Order Number value of
the next work order. Work order numbers are assigned when a work
order reaches the status selected in the Begin Assigning Work
Order Numbers from: setting.
When licensed for the Multi-Company module, enabling company-
specific counters overrides this counter when a counter is defined in
company properties. (Companies that do not have a company-specific
counter continue to use the master counter.) Refer to Company-
Specific Counters in the Multi-Company chapter of the ScheduALL
Master Library Counter (Requires Media Manager System module.) Opens the Set Master
Library Counter window, which sets the value assigned to the Tape #
field of the next library item.
GL Offsets
GL Offsets (Requires Accounts Receivable module.) Opens the GL Offset dialog,
which sets the internal and external ledger offsets used to reconcile
ScheduALL invoices with the General Ledger accounts used by
external accounting systems.
Individual fields define the offsetting account code or “other side of the
entry” for each transaction type. These offset codes are required to
generate balanced journal transactions. Refer to the Billing and
Receivables chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more
information.
Extended Trail

Settings Opens the Extended Trail Settings dialog and allows the user to
control the items added to the extended trail. Refer to Extended Trail.
Notification Manager
Setup Opens the Notification Manager Setup dialog and allows the user to
control triggers used to send notifications using the ScheduALL
Notification Manager service. Refer to the Notification Manager
chapter of the Installation/Update Guide and Revision History.
SAP Seq. Number
Setting Reserved.
Refresh App Services Diagnostics
Setting Allows a service (such as the Application Service) to re-read its
configuration setting without restarting the service.
Login Groups
Login Group – Seat Count Opens the Login Groups dialog and allows the user to enter up to 20
user groups and define the maximum number of seats available in
each group. The seat count for each group reduces the number of non-
grouped users that can log on. The Pooled Users field displays the
number of seats available for users who are not associated with a
login group. Users are associated with a login group in user setup.
Refer to Login Group.
For example:
l Total number of user seats=50
l Login Group A=10 seats
l Login Group B=25 seats
l Pooled Users=15 seats
When the seat count of a group is exceeded, other users in that group
will not be able to log on. In the example above, after 10 users who are
associated with Login Group A have logged in, the next user from that
group will be unable to log on.
The seat count is also dependent on the number of client users defined
in the system. The maximum number of client users is defined in the
system license. Refer to Client and Agency Users.
System Preferences – Overtime Tab

The Overtime tab defines system-wide settings applied to generating reports that display overtime.
Note: Overtime triggers only apply to bookings that use the Hours unit of measure.

Figure 157. System Preferences, Overtime Tab

Table 75. System Preferences, Overtime Tab Settings
Statuses to Ignore in Determines the status levels used to filter out work orders when
Overtime running reports that display overtime information. Options include all
work order status levels. Cancelled is selected by default.
Note: If the label for a status level is changed on the General tab of
System Preferences, the Overtime tab options do not change
until the System Preferences dialog is closed and reopened.
System Preferences – Multi-Region Tab

The Multi-Region Settings tab determines the base time zone of the ScheduALL and ScheduLINK
systems, and the region settings available to other parts of the application. Table 76 describes the
available settings.
Note: For correct operation, it is recommended to always have Region 5 set to
(UTC) Coordinated Universal Time which is never adjusted for Daylight Savings Time. By
default, ScheduLINK calendars display information based on the time zone selected in Region
5.
Figure 158. System Preferences, Multi-Region Tab

Table 76. System Preferences, Multi-Region Settings
Base Region Determines the time zone used as the system default region. The
Base Time Zone should be in sync with the server where the
Application Service is running.
Notes:
l It is necessary to select a Base Region when the network
contains ScheduALL components.
l If no Base Region is selected, users will be unable to log on
after changing their password.
Region 1 through 50 Determines the time zones or regions available within the system. For
example, Regions can be assigned to clients and system users.
Alternate time zones are displayed in certain dialogs and reports. For
example, the Extended Work Order form displays the work order time
according to both the base time zone, and the client’s assigned time
zone.
STD Determines the short description of the appropriate time zone during
Standard (non-daylight savings) time. This description is displayed by
certain dialogs and reports, such as the Bottom Time Line on visual
reports described in Schedules Setup Tab in the Reports chapter of
the ScheduALL Users Guide .
DST Determines the short description of the appropriate time zone during
Daylight Savings Time displayed by certain dialogs and reports.
The Main tab of the ScheduLINK Work Order form (both standard and extended) displays the work
order times according to the base time zone, Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), and the client’s assigned
time zone.
Figure 159. Region Settings, Extended Work Order Form

System Preferences – General Tab

The General tab defines the descriptive labels displayed on various dialogs and reports that can be
customized centrally.
To change a label:
1. Click the appropriate field in the Description column, type the new label, and press Enter. For
fields with associated program behavior, such as warnings or additional processes, changing
the label text does not modify the behavior.
l To remove an item from pick lists, delete all text from the Description field for that item.
(Note: Pick lists for users with Supervisor Rights always display all items.)
2. To reset a label to the default, click the label name in the Default Description column to
select it, and click Clear at the bottom of the dialog.
3. Click OK to apply the changes.
Figure 160. System Preferences, General Tab

System Preferences – General Settings
Label descriptions are listed in the order in which they appear in the dialog.
l Client Status
l Work Order Status
l Project Status
l Project Milestones
l Phase Status
l General Labels
l General Work Order Labels
l General Client Labels
l Personnel Resources
l General Trouble Ticket Labels
l General Rental Booking Status Labels
l Master Project Status

l Master Project Forms

l Ledger Setup
l Units of Measure
l Overtime Types
l Accounts Receivable
l Session Types
l Acct. Codes for Paid Activities
l Acct. Codes for Unpaid Activities
l Payable Status
l Polarity Modes
l Live Shot Types
l Polarity Restrictions
l Pay Status
l Visual Flags (User Defined)
l Dub Order Status
l Event Status
l Explicit Confirmation Status
l Vehicle
l Travel Type
l Contract Status
l Shift Rule Trigger Type
l Pricing Point Labels
l Operations Manager
l Extended Operations
l MCR Status
l Working Time Manager Rules
l Working Time Manager Security
Client Status
Default Label Description
Client Status
Active Text label for account status settings applied to agency, client, and
Closed contact accounts, as described in Account Status.
Inactive
Open

Work Order Status

Work Order Status
The hierarchy of status levels is different from the label display order. The hierarchy order
(from lowest to highest) is Request, Fourth Hold, Third Hold, Second Hold, First Hold,
Unconfirmed, Confirmed, Completed, Pending Approval, Reconciled, and Cancelled.
Note: Refer to Auxiliary Status for information on Auxiliary Status fields.
Reconciled Text label used to indicate that the work order is ready for billing. This
status also locks the work order to prevent accidental editing. Refer to
Work Order Life Cycle in the Work Orders chapter of the ScheduALL
Users Guide .
Cancelled Text label of the Cancelled work order status setting. This status is
used to trigger a cancellation process. Refer to Work Order Life Cycle
in the Work Orders chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
Pending Approval Text label used to indicate that the work order is waiting on final
approval before confirmation.
Completed Text label used to indicate that the work order has been completed,
but has not been reconciled in preparation for final billing.
Confirmed Text label used to indicate that the work order has been confirmed with
the client. This status may be used to trigger work order locks. Refer
to Lock Work Order Original Times upon Confirm.
Unconfirmed Text label used to indicate that the work order is not yet confirmed.
First Hold Text label used to indicate that the work order is on hold.
Second Hold Text label used to indicate that the work order is on hold.
Third Hold Text label used to indicate that the work order is on hold.
Fourth Hold Text label used to indicate that the work order is on hold.
New Text label used to indicate that the work order has not been reviewed
or confirmed. This field contains “Request” by default.
Project Status
Project Status
(Requires Project Manager)
The hierarchy of status levels is different from the label display order. The hierarchy order
(from lowest to highest) is Unconfirmed, Pending, Initiated, Confirmed, Completed,
Reconciled, and Cancelled.
Cancelled Text label used to indicate that the project has been canceled. This
status is used to trigger an optional cancellation of all work orders
associated with the project. Refer to Work Order Life Cycle in the
Work Orders chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
Completed Text label used to indicate that the project has been completed.


Confirmed Text used to indicate that the project has been confirmed with the
client.
Initiated Text label used to indicate that the project has started.
Pending Text label used to indicate that the project has not started.
Reconciled Text label used to indicate that a project that was billed as a package
has been verified and is waiting for billing/invoicing.
Unconfirmed Text label used to indicate that the project is not yet confirmed.
Project Milestones
Project Milestones
Milestone 1–6 Determines the labels displayed on dialogs for each one of six
milestone fields.
Phase Status
Phase Status
Active Determines the labels shown for phase status levels within Production
Completed Workflow Manager, for each of the default status names (Active,
Confirmed Completed, Confirmed, Conflict, Defined, Problem, and Scheduled).
Conflict
Defined
Problem
Scheduled
General Labels
General Labels
General labels are used to define the text displayed as labels for buttons, dialog titles, list
boxes, tabs, tree structures, and other interface elements that cannot be customized
through Developers Toolkit.
Label for “<Join Existing Text label related to the service list label on the Connector form which
Booking>” allows the user to select the service they want to join.
Label for “Account Text label related to a single account executive, such as the title of the
Executive” Select Account Exec dialog.
Label for "Ad Hoc Portal Text label to identify Ad Hoc Portal Bookings, such as Space Only
Bookings" bookings.
Label for “Agencies” Text label related to multiple agencies, such as the Agencies tab in the
Client Maintenance dialog.


Label for “Agency” Text label related to a single agency, such as the title of the Select
Agency for Work Order dialog.
Label for “City” Text label related to the City field, such as in the Client Properties
dialog.
Label for “Client” Text label related to a single client, such as the title of the Select
Client for Work Order dialog.
Label for “Clients” Text label related to multiple clients, such as the Clients tab in the
Label for “Contact” Text label related to a single contact, such as the title of the Select
Contact for Work Order dialog.
Label for “Contacts” Text label related to multiple contacts, such as the Contacts tab in the
Label for "Day Off" Reserved
Label for “Director” Text label related to a director, such as in the Other tab in the Work
Order dialog.
Label for “Job Name” Text label related to the Job Name field of the Work Order table.
Label for “Job Number” Text label related to the Job Number field of the Work Order table.
Label for “Job Type” Text label related to the Job Type field, such as displayed on the Work
Orders tab of the Work Order Query dialog.
Label for “Master Project” Text label related to Master Projects, such as the Master Projects tab
in the Project Manager dialog.
Label for “Notes” Reserved
Label for “P.O. Number” Text label related to the P.O. Number field, such as displayed on the
Work Orders tab of the Work Order Query dialog.
Label for “Producer” Text label related to the Producer field of a Library entry, such as in the
Library Query dialog.
Label for “Product” Text label related to the Product field of a Library entry, such as in the
Library Query dialog.
Label for “Project” Text label related to Projects, such as the Projects tab in the Project
Manager dialog.
Label for “Rental” Replaces the default label displayed for the Rental field used on the
Operations Manager Settings dialog and the Work Order Query.
Label for “Reversal Replaces the default label displayed for the Reversal Reason field
Reason” used on dialogs such as the Void dialog.
Label for “ScheduLINK Alt.” Replaces the default label displayed for the Rental field used on the
Operations Manager Settings dialog, the Work Order Query, and the
Work Order Query Summary.
Label for “ScheduLINK” Replaces the default label displayed for the Rental field used on the
Operations Manager Settings dialog and the Work Order Query.
Label for "Sick Day" Reserved


Label for “State” Text labels used to identify the state in an address, such as on the
Main tab of the Client Maintenance dialog.
Label for “Subtitle” Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as Library Query.
Label for "Title" Replaces the default label displayed for the Title field used on dialogs
such as the List By and Extended Query button.
Label for "Vacation" Reserved
Label for “Void” Text related to a transaction that has been voided, such as the Void
value in the Transaction Type column of the View Invoices by Invoice
Number dialog.
Label for “Void” (Verb) Text related to the act of voiding or reversing transactions, such as the
title of the Void Transactions <By Invoice Number> dialog in the
Accounts/Receivable module.
Label for “Zip Code” Text labels used to identify the postal code in an address, such as on
the Main tab of the Client Maintenance dialog.
Label for Auto Status Replaces the default label displayed used on dialogs such as the
Advance Work Order Query Option box and in the Preview box.
Label for Impact Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as the Trouble
Ticket Event dialog.
Label for Library Detail Text label used to identify the Find By option for the Code,
“Code” Description, and Keywords fields of the Cuts/Detail record in the
Label for Library Detail Library Navigator dialog. Refer to Using the Library Navigator and
“Description” Library Element (Cuts) - Audio in the Library chapter of the
Label for Library Detail ScheduALL Users Guide .
“Keywords”
Label for Library Detail Text labels used to identify optional user-defined fields in the Library
User Field 1 through 6 Elements (Cuts) dialog.
Label for Library Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as Asset Media
Distribution Copy Manager and Asset Media Manager Query.
Label for “Bar Code 2” Text label used to identify the Find By option for the specified fields of
Label for “Bar Code” the library entry in the Library Navigator dialog. Refer to Using the
Label for “Category” Library Navigator and Media Manager Entry Dialogs in the Library
Label for “Date Made”
Label for “Media Format”
Label for “Storage
Location”
Label for “Tape Number”
Label for Library Entry User Text label used to identify optional the user-defined date field in the
Date 1 Library Entry dialog. Refer to Media Manager Entry Dialogs in the
Library chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .


Label for Library Entry User Text labels used to identify optional user-defined fields in the Library
Field 1 through 30 Entry dialog. Refer to Media Manager Entry Dialogs in the Library
Label for Library Episode Text label related to the Episode field of a Library entry, such as the
Library Episode dialog title. Refer to Episode in the Library chapter of
Label for Library Season Text label related to the Season field of a Library entry, such as the
Library Season dialog title.
Label for Location Level 1, Text label used to identify the three levels of locations in the location
Label for Location Level 2, hierarchy. Refer to Location Setup.
Label for Location Level 3
Label for Resource Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as Resource
Barcode Query.
Label for Resource Replaces the default button label displayed on dialogs such as
Category Resource Query.
Classification Query.
Description Query.
Disabled Query.
Effective Date Query.
Engineering Description Query.
Expiration Date Query.
Label for Resource Explicit Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as Resource
Availability Query.
External Id Query.
Location Query.
Label for Resource Type Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as Resource
Query.
Label for Resource User Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as Resource
Date 1 Query.
Date 2 Query.
Field 1 – 10 Query.


Label for Severity Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as the Trouble
Ticket Event dialog.
Label for Sub-Class User Labels used to identify the sub-class fields on the Edit Sub-Class
Field 1 – 9 dialog.
Label for Unpaid prefix Replaces the default label displayed before items such as Sick Day or
Day Off. Examples: Unpaid Sick Day and Unpaid Day Off.
Label for Vendor Group Text label related to vendor groups. Refer to Vendor Groups in the
External Cost Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
Label for Work Break Replaces the default label for the amount of Break Time in a Work
Shift displayed on Personnel Portal dialogs.
General Work Order Labels

General Work Order Labels
Label for Work Order User Replaces the default label displayed on work order dialogs.
Field 1 through 66
Note: Fields 1–23 can be found in Source: Work Orders and 24–66 in
Source: TE: Work Order User.
Label for Work Order User Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as Work Order.
Flag 1 through 30
General Client Labels

General Client Labels
Label for Client User Field 1 Modifies the label displayed for user-defined fields in the Client dialog.
through 26
Personnel Resources
Personnel Resources
Label for Personnel Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as the Resource
Address Query.
Label for Personnel City Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as the Resource
Query.
Label for Personnel Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as the Resource
Employee ID Query.
Label for Personnel State Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as the Resource
Query.
Label for Personnel Tel 1 Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as the Resource
Query.


Label for Personnel Tel 2 Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as the Resource
Query.
Label for Personnel User 1– Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as the Resource
9 Query.
Label for Personnel Zip Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as the Resource
Query.
Label for Resource E-mail Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as the Resource
Address Query.
Label for Resource Notes Replaces the default label displayed on dialogs such as the Resource
to Scheduler Query.
General Trouble Ticket Labels

General Trouble Ticket Labels
Label for Control Center Text label related to the Control Center field on the Main tab of the
Trouble Ticket Work Order dialog.
Label for Service Type Text label related to the Service Type field on the Main tab of the
Label for Transmission Text label related to the TX Type field on the Main tab of the Trouble
Mode Ticket Work Order dialog.
Label for Trouble Cause Text label related to the Cause field on the Main tab of the Trouble
Ticket Work Order dialog.
Label for Trouble Source Text label related to the Problem Source field on the Main tab of the
General Rental Booking Status Labels

General Rental Booking Status Labels
Label for Active Reserved
Label for Complete Reserved
Label for Late Return Reserved
Label for NOT Ready Reserved
Label for OVERDUE Reserved
Label for Prep Complete Reserved
Label for Ready Reserved
Label for Reserved Reserved

Master Project Status

Master Project Status
(Requires Production Workflow Manager.)
Cancelled Text used to identify the seventh (highest) project status level. This
status is used to trigger an optional cancellation of all work orders
associated with the project. Refer to Work Order Life Cycle in the
Completed Text used to identify the fifth project status level.
Confirmed Text used to identify the fourth project status level.
Initiated Text used to identify the third project status level.
Pending Text used to identify the second project status level.
Reconciled Text used to identify the sixth project status level. Master projects
cannot be invoiced or reconciled. Selecting this status displays the
following dialog.
Unconfirmed Text used to identify the first (lowest) project status level.
Master Project Forms

Master Project Forms
(Requires Production Workflow Manager.)
<default> Name of the default Master Project dialog form.
Form 1 through Form 5 Name of the custom Master Project dialog form used when displaying
master projects. Refer to Master Project Forms in the Production
Workflow Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .

Ledger Setup
Ledger Setup
Adjustments Text label for adjustments to an account.
American Express Text label for payments to an American Express account.
Credits Issued (External Text label for credits issued to external clients.
Clients)
Credits Issued (In-House Text label for credits issued to internal clients.
Clients)
Credits to Tax #1, #2, #3 Text label for credit amounts applied to taxes.
Debit Memos Text label for debit memo amounts.
Deposit Invoices Text label for deposit invoice amounts.
Deposits to Tax #1, #2, #3 Text label for deposit amounts applied to taxes.
Early Payment Discount Text label for credits for early payment.
Credits
Late Charges Assessed Text label for charges applied to late payments.
Operating Account Text label for amounts allocated to an operating account.
Payments to Invoices - Text label for amounts posted to invoice accounts.
Account 4 – 15
Payments to Tax #1, #2, #3 Text label for payment amounts applied to taxes.
Sales Tax #1, #2, #3 Text label for sales tax amounts.
Unallocated Cash Receipts Text label for cash receipts that have not been allocated.
Unallocated Credits Issued Text label for credit amounts that have not been allocated.
Visa MC Text label for payments to a Visa® or Mastercard® account.
Units of Measure
Units of Measure
1/2 Day, 10Hr Day, 8Hr Day, Text labels used to identify the standard of comparison for items of the
Day, Feet, Hour, Kilometer, same kind, by which quantities and prices are specified.
Meter, Mile, Minute, Second,
Unit, Week Enter text to override the default values.

Overtime Types
Overtime Types
Activity Overlap Text labels used to identify overtime values. Overtime Levels 1–9 are
Adjustment for overtime splits and all others are for penalties.
Booking Overlap Enter text to override the default values.
Continuous Tour
Cost Point
Day Adjustment
Down Time
Ext. Comp. Factor
Holiday Differential
Meal Expense 1-2
Meal Charge
Mileage 1-8
Night Differential
Overtime Level 1-9
Period Turnaround
Price Point
Short Turnaround
Straight Time
Time Differential 1-4
Travel 1-6
Travel Flat
Travel Hours
Travel Miles
Travel Money
User 1-3
Weekend Diff.
Worked Days Diff.
Accounts Receivable
Accounts Receivable
Close Accounting Period Text labels used for the appropriate buttons on the Accounts
Edit Ledger Allocations Receivable Navigator dialog.
Post Credits
Post Payments
Post a Debit Memo
Queries and Reports
Reverse Transactions
View Invoices

Session Types
Session Types
Antenna Move Replaces the default label displayed for this session type, such as in
selection lists. (Refer to Creating a Move Antenna Activity in the
ScheduLINK Users Guide.)
Available Block Text label which identifies an activity booking for a block of explicit
availability. This activity is available to both personnel and non-
Booking Text label used to identify a resource booking, such as a single person
or piece of equipment that is part of a work order. This activity is
available to both personnel and non-personnel resources.
Comp Day Text label which identifies an activity booking for paid time off
allocated to an employee, in exchange for an equal amount of time
previously worked outside of normal hours. This activity can be
booked for personnel resources only.
Company Holiday Text label which identifies an activity booking for a company holiday.
This activity is available to personnel resources only.
Note: Company Holidays affect straight time and overtime
calculations differently from other activities.
Day Off Text label which identifies an activity for a day off. This activity is
available to personnel resources only.
Day in Lieu Text label which identifies an activity for paid time off allocated to an
employee, in exchange for working on a day off. This activity is
available to personnel resources only.
Explicit Available Text label which identifies a block of time during which the resource is
known to be available. This activity is available to personnel resources
only.
Explicit Unavailable Text label which identifies a block of time during which the resource is
known to not be available. This activity is available to personnel
resources only.
Maintenance Text label which identifies an activity related to keeping the specified
equipment or facility in good working order. This activity is available to
non-personnel resources only.
Non-Conflicting Activity Text label which identifies the Non-Conflicting Activity type, such as
in the Select Activity Type dialog.
Other Text label which identifies an activity not covered by the other activity
descriptions. This activity is available to both personnel and non-
Other Non Paid Activity 1 Text label which identifies an unpaid activity not covered by the other
through 3 unpaid activity descriptions. These items only display if the label has
been defined.

Other Paid Activity 1 Text label which identifies a paid activity not covered by the other paid
through 3 activity descriptions. These items only display if the label has been
defined.
Out of Service Text label which identifies an activity block during which a resource is
not available. This activity is available to non-personnel resources
only.
Sabbatical Text label which identifies an activity block for time off on sabbatical.
Shift Text label which identifies an activity block during which a personnel
resource is scheduled to work. This activity is available to personnel
resources only.
Sick Day Text label which identifies an activity block for a paid sick day. This
activity is available to personnel resources only.
Uncommitted Text label which identifies an pending activity block.
Unpaid Day Off Text label which identifies an activity for a day off without pay. This
activity is available to personnel resources only.
Unpaid Sick Day Text label which identifies an activity block for an unpaid sick day.
Vacation Text label which identifies an activity block for a paid vacation day.
Account Codes for Paid Activities

Acct. Codes for Paid Activities
Available Block, Booking, Codes which identify each paid activity for external accounting
Comp Day, etc. applications.
Account Codes for Unpaid Activities

Acct. Codes for Unpaid Activities
Antenna Move, Available Codes which identify each unpaid activity for external accounting
Block, Booking, Comp Day, applications.
etc.

Payable Status
Payable Status
Check Pending Text labels which identify status levels for external cost payables.
Invoice Approved The hierarchy of status levels, from lowest to highest, is different from
Invoice Paid the label display order. In hierarchy order, the status levels include
Invoice Received P.O. Request, P.O. Approved, P.O. Fulfilled, Invoice Received,
Invoice Sent Invoice Approved, Invoice Sent, Check Pending, Invoice Paid, P.O.
Committed, and P.O. Cancelled.
P.O. Approved
P.O. Cancelled
P.O. Committed
P.O. Fulfilled
P.O. Request
Polarity Modes
Polarity Modes
Text labels used to indicate the polarity of a Satellite Transponder/Channel in the Resource
Properties dialog. The system matches polarity settings with Polarity Restrictions to
ensure that a signal source and signal receiver are compatible. Changing a label text does
not modify the requirement/compatibility behavior. For example, enter “Clockwise” in the
Right Hand field to indicate a clockwise polarity, and modify the corresponding Polarity
Restriction.
l Horizontal, Left Hand, Right Hand, and Vertical identify specific polarities.
l None indicates the signal is not polarized.
Live Shot Types

Live Shot Types
Live - Guest Text label which identifies the different live-shot reporter type.
Live - Network
Correspondent
Live - Own Reporter
Pre-Tape - Guest
Pre-Tape - Network
Correspondent
Pre-Tape - Own Reporter

Polarity Restrictions
Polarity Restrictions
Text labels used to indicate the single-path polarity requirements of an Uplink Truck or
Fixed Dish in the Resource Properties dialog. The system matches polarity restrictions
with Polarity Modes to ensure that a signal source and signal receiver are compatible.
Changing a label text does not modify the requirement/compatibility behavior. For
example, enter “Requires Clockwise” in the Requires Right Hand field to indicate a
clockwise polarity requirement, and modify the corresponding Polarity Mode.
l Requires Horizontal, Requires Left Hand, Requires Right Hand, and Requires Vertical
identify specific requirements.
l None indicates no requirements are enforced.
Pay Status
Pay Status
Actualized Text labels which identify a pay status level.
Client Approved
Employee Approved
Error in Transfer
Locked
Spare Level 1
Supervisor Approved
System Transferred
Unpaid
Waiting for Timecard

Visual Flags
Visual Flags (User Defined)
Default Visual flags are used to add emphasis to booking blocks (work orders
Visual Flag 1 or activities) on visual calendars. System flags (such as Requirement
Visual Flag 2 or Needs Confirmation) are displayed as needed. (Refer to Anatomy of
a Booking Block in the Scheduling chapter of the ScheduALL Users
Visual Flag 3
Guide for more information on system visual flags.) User-defined
Visual Flag 4
flags, such as to identify live shot broadcasts or other special events,
Visual Flag 5 can be displayed on the booking block by the user.
The default visual flag is automatically applied to all work orders and
activities. To apply a specific visual flag (1 through 5), open the
scheduling calendar, right-click the booking, and select the appropriate
flag. Refer to Display Visual Flags in Schedule Calendar to enable
or disable the display of visual flags.
To configure the five user-defined visual flags:
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, and then select
System Preferences.
2. Select General.
3. Click the General tab.
4. Locate the Visual Flags section.
5. Enter a Description (a text label for the flag), for administrative
purposes only. This text does not display on the calendar.
6. Click the Bitmap field below the Description to select the
ScheduALL icon file to use as the visual flag.
Note: To automatically assign a flag to new bookings, enter a
description and select a bitmap for the Default flag. If additional
flags are defined, the user has the option of changing the flag
after the booking is created. This option does not allow the user
to clear the assigned flag.
Note: To enable the Clear Flag option, leave the Default flag
description and bitmap blank. Start defining flags with Visual
Flag 1. To remove a flag, right-click the booking and select
Clear Flag.
The visual flags described here are shown for all bookings. To
configure visual flags and icons for specific Resource
Category/Resource Type combinations for a specific resource, refer
to Modifying Dialogs for Resource Category/Type Flags.
Dub Order Status

Dub Order Status
Confirmed, In Progress, (Requires Duplication Module.) Text labels which identify the stages
New, Packaged, Shipped of a duplication order.

Event Status
Event Status
Approved Text labels which identify approval status levels applied to resource
Modified bookings (events).
None
ReSubmitted
Rejected
Submitted
Explicit Confirmation Status

Explicit Confirmation Status
Confirmed Replaces the default labels displayed in the Confirmation list on the
Deny Activity dialog and the Explicit Confirmation list on the work order
Needs Confirmation Resource dialog.
Not Needed
Vehicles
Vehicle
None Replaces the default label displayed in the Vehicle combo box.
Personal Auto Replaces the default label displayed in the Vehicle combo box.
Travel Time 1 Replaces the default label displayed in the Vehicle combo box.
Travel Time 2 Replaces the default label displayed in the Vehicle combo box.
Travel Type
Travel Type
None Replaces the default label displayed in the Travel Type combo box.
Travel From Replaces the default label displayed in the Travel Type combo box.
Travel To Replaces the default label displayed in the Travel Type combo box.
Vehicle Check From Replaces the default label displayed in the Travel Type combo box.
Vehicle Check To Replaces the default label displayed in the Travel Type combo box.

Contract Status
Contract Status
Approved Text labels which identify status levels applied to contracts. Refer to
Cancelled Contract Properties – Main in the Contract Manager chapter of the
Completed ScheduALL Users Guide .
Confirmed
Pending
Shift Rule Trigger Type

Shift Rule Trigger Type
All days Text labels which identify shift rule trigger types.
Backward Turnaround
Call Back
Displace Meal
Forward Turnaround
Friday
Holiday
Monday
N/A
Outside Roster
Saturday
Split Turnaround
Sunday
Thursday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Pricing Point Labels

Pricing Point Labels
Pricing point 1–4 Text labels which identify pricing points.

Operations Manager
Operations Manager
Label for “...” button Text labels which display on the buttons used in the Operations
Ack/Clr Sel Manager module.
Carrier Up
Clear Ack’d
Complete Evt
Complete WO
Goodnight
Hold
New Event Alert
On Air
Extended Operations
Extended Operations
(Label for Assign Tax Allows an administrator to change the text displayed for operations in
Structures, Discount Work the “Select Operations” list of the Extended Operations dialog. The
Order %, Add Extended Operations dialog is displayed by clicking the Operations
Requirements, etc.)
button on the Results tab of the Work Order Query dialog.
For example, if the facility has re-labeled all “Account Executive” fields
to “Sales Rep”, the “Label for Assign Account Executive” entry allows
the administrator to change the extended operation to “Assign Sales
Representative” to remain consistent with other areas of the
application.
To apply a new label, type the new text in the input field to the right of
the default operation label. To use the default label, select an operation
and click Clear at the bottom of the window.
When specifying labels, keep the following in mind:
l Changing the label of an operation may change the location of the
operation in the Select Operation combo box of the Extended
Operations window, which sorts operation labels alphabetically.
In general, the priority from highest to lowest is:
l Labels beginning with special characters (spaces, dashes, etc. in
ASCII order)
l Labels beginning with numerical digits (1, 2, 3, etc); however,
labels are sorted character-by-character, so a label that begins
with 11 will have a higher priority than one that begins with 2.
l Labels beginning with upper-case letters
l Labels beginning with lower-case letters
l Certain operations are tied to certain licenses or license points
and may not appear in all Extended Operation lists.

Master Control Room (MCR) Status

MCR Status
Acknowledged Text labels which identify status levels applied to MCRs.
New
No Action Required
None
Preparing
Ready
Working Time Manager Rules

Working Time Manager Rules
Break Periods Text labels which identify rules applied to Working Time Manager
Rest Periods Rules.
Short Notice, etc.
Working Time Manager Security

Working Time Manager Security
Security Option 1–10 Text labels which identify security options applied to Working Time
Manager Security.
Auxiliary Status
Each Work Order status can have up to five auxiliary status fields. For example, the Pending
Approval status might have auxiliary status fields labeled Pending Accounting and
Pending Production to indicate that approval must be given by one of those departments. Colors can
be assigned to the auxiliary status fields. Refer to System Preferences: System Colors.
Note: Auxiliary colors do not display in results from the Find command or in Interactive Web Reports.
Note: Auxiliary status fields are displayed in reverse order in the Status Category list.
Figure 161. Auxiliary Status Display Order

System Preferences – System Options Tab

The System Options tab defines system-wide options. To display this dialog, from the File menu,
select Supervisor Options, select System Preferences,
and then click General. Click the System Options tab.
Figure 162. System Preferences, General, System Options Tab

Settings are described in the following sections:
System Options 275

Schedule Options 302
Availability Calculation Options 324
Portal Options 325
Connector Options 325
Interop Options 329
Workflow Options 329
Accounting Options 330
Credit Limit 332
Active Directory 334
Email 334
NMS 334
Notification Manager 334

Password Options 335

PIN Password Options 339
Time Capture/Smart Time Options 341
Account Code Defaults 342
SMS 342
Ingest 343
Content Verification System 343
Pay Translator/Working Time Manager 344
iCalendar Options 346
SSRS Info 346
Using Auto-Select 346
System Options
Table 77. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, System Options
Option Description
Reset Resource Level MCR Status Determines whether the MCR status is reset to the lowest
upon booking change status when a booking is modified.
l Yes allows the MCR status to be reset when a booking is
changed. (Default.)
l No does not allow the MCR status to be reset.
Lock Price Foreign Currency Determines the time at which a currency exchange rate is
Exchange Rate at applied to pricing, to allow for frequent updates to exchange
rates.
l Book Time uses the currency exchange rate in effect at
the point in time the session is booked. Subsequent
changes to the exchange rate are not reflected on the
work order.
l Work Order Date uses the currency exchange rate in
effect at the work order start time. (Default.)
l Reconciled Date uses the currency exchange rate in
effect when the work order is reconciled.

Table 77. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, System Options (continued)
Option Description
Lock Cost Foreign Currency Determines the time at which a currency exchange rate is
Exchange Rate at applied to cost, to allow for frequent updates to exchange
rates.
l Book Time uses the currency exchange rate in effect at
the point in time the session is booked. Subsequent
changes to the exchange rate are not reflected on the
work order.
l Work Order Date uses the currency exchange rate in
effect at the work order start time.
l Current Date uses the currency exchange rate in effect
on the current day and time. (Default.)
Buttons to Close User-Defined Determines the buttons that display on dialogs edited or
Dialogs created with the Developers Toolkit.
l ‘OK’ displays the OK button to save changes.
l 'OK' and 'Cancel' displays an OK button to save
changes and a Cancel button to exit the dialog without
saving any changes. (Default.)
Disregard Agency/Client Determines if the relationship between an agency and a client
Ownership is enforced.
l Yes allows the user to select any client, even when an
agency is selected.
l No limits the list of possible clients to only the clients
owned by the agency, when an agency is selected in a
work order, project, or quote. (Default.)
Note: If a client is selected with no agency selected, the
client’s parent agency is automatically assigned. The
Disregard Agency/Client Ownership preference does
not affect this behavior.
Disregard Client/Contact Determines if the relationship between a client and a contact is
Ownership enforced.
l Yes allows the user to select any contact, even when a
client is selected.
l No limits the list of possible contacts to only the contacts
owned by the client, when a client is selected in a work
order, project, or quote. (Default.)
Note: If a contact is selected with no client selected, the
contact’s parent client is automatically assigned. The
Disregard Client/Contact Ownership preference does
not affect this behavior.

Option Description
Set Default Agency when assigning Determines whether a work order’s agency field is populated
Client with the value from the client’s parent agency.
When running the Extended Operation, "Re-evaluate to
Current Client Profile":
l Yes sets the target work orders to the assigned client's
parent (Agency) ID.
l No retains the current target's Agency ID. (Default.)
When running the Extended Operation, "Reassign Client":
l Yes sets the target work orders to the assigned client's
parent (Agency) ID.
l No If pref is No, retains current target's Agency ID (i.e. no
change). (Default.)
When explicitly assigning a Client to a Work Order:
l Yes If pref is Yes, sets the target work order to the
assigned client's parent (Agency) ID.
l No sets Agency ID to 0 (i.e. clears the field). (Default.)
Filter Projects at Client Level Determines which projects are listed in the Project Manager
dialog when a user clicks the Project button on the Main page
of a work order.
l Yes displays only projects associated with the Client
assigned to the work order. (If no Client is assigned, the
Project Manager displays all projects.) (Default.)
l No displays all projects, whether or not a Client is
assigned to the work order.
Show Time Zone Information in Determines whether the system displays time zone
Caption Bar information in right side of the ScheduALL toolbar.
l Yes displays system time zone information in the
ScheduALL toolbar based on three settings. If all three
settings are the same, the time is displayed with a blue
background, and if any setting is different from the base
zone, the time is displayed with a red background. These
settings are:
The host computer’s date and time as defined in the
Windows Control Panel.
The Base Region selected in System Preferences. Refer
to Base Region.
The user’s time zone defined on the Options page of the
User Preferences dialog.
l No does not display time zone information. (Default.)

Option Description
Default new Project to Packages (Requires Project Manager) Determines the initial setting of
the Bill as Package flag in the Project Properties dialog. (Users
are allowed to select or deselect the option manually.)
l Yes automatically selects the “Bill as Package” option for
new projects. (Default.)
l No does not select the “Bill as Package” flag for new
projects.
Auto PO Generation Method (Requires External Costs Manager.) Determines the method
for automatically generating payable entries for external cost
resources. Refer to Auto Generate Payables for Work
Orders starting From: for more information.
For example, three cameras are rented from the same
equipment rental vendor and added to a work order.
l None – The system does not automatically generate
purchase orders for external resources. (Default.)
l Always Create – The system generates a purchase order
for each individual resource added to a work order. In the
stated example, the system generates three separate
purchase orders.
l Group by Work Order – The system generates a
purchase order for all external cost resources from the
same vendor that are added to the same work order. In the
stated example, the system generates one purchase order
for the three cameras.
l Group by Vendor – The system generates one purchase
order for the associated vendor when external cost
resources are added to a work order. Until the P.O. status
is changed to “PO Approved,” all subsequent bookings of
the external resources from the same vendor are added to
the open PO, and a running total is kept.
Note: If the Apply Vendor Costs without Creation Of
Payable/PO? system preference is set to Yes, this
setting is ignored. Refer to Apply Vendor Costs
without Creation Of Payable/PO?.
Check for Duplicate Tapes and (Requires Media Manager System.) Determines if the Media
Cuts? Manager System allows more than one tape to use the same
Tape #, and more than one Cut entry to use the same Code.
l Yes generates a warning when a user attempts to assign
a Tape # or Code that is already in use.
l No does not generate any warning if a Tape # or cut Code
is already in use. (Default.)

Option Description
Show Media Type (Format) from (Requires Media Manager System.) Determines the
Library in Work Order information displayed in the Type column for a library tape by
the Work Order dialog resource browsers:
l Yes displays the title and media type (format) of the library
item.
l No displays the title of the library item only. (Default.)
Log on Audit Trail when a Work Determines whether the system creates an entry in the Audit
Order is Printed Trail whenever a work order report is printed. An entry is also
created on the History tab of the work order. Refer to Audit
Trail.
l Yes creates an audit trail and History tab entry whenever
a work order is printed.
l No does not create an entry. (Default.)
Method for Multiple Client Determines the method used when allocating a booking to
Allocations more than one client or project. Refer to Allocate a Work Order
to Multiple Clients in the Work Orders chapter of the
ScheduALL Users Guide .
l By Time divides the price of a work order by time.
l By % (enforce 100%) divides the price of a work order by
percentage, where the total percentage must equal 100.
l By % (more than 100%) divides the price of a work order
by percentage, where the total percentage can be greater
than 100.
Minutes To Close Inactive Locked Determines the number of minutes inactive work orders are
WorkOrders allowed to remain open before the user is prompted to close all
(0 to disable) inactive work orders.
l 0 disables the limit and does not generate a prompt.
(Default.)
l Any number closes a Work Order dialog after it has been
inactive for the specified number of minutes.
Maximum Number Of Open Work Determines the maximum number of work orders a user can
Orders open at one time. When a user attempts to open more than the
(0 to disable) defined maximum, the system generates a warning message.
l 0 disables the limit and does not generate a warning.
(Default.)
l Any number prevents the user from opening more than
the specified number of Work Order dialogs.

Option Description
Warn when Reconciling Work Order Determines whether the system generates a warning if the
with No Ledger Entry user attempts to reconcile a work order for which the Sales
Ledger field is empty (null).
l Yes generates a the following warning when a work order
does not have any associated ledger entries:
No Ledger identifier exists for Work Order #####.
Reconcile anyway?.
l No does not generate ledger warnings. (Default.)
Refer to Warn when Reconciling Work Order with Ledger
Code at Resource level for ledger checking at the resource
level.
Move Meals And Breaks With Determines if the system attempts to move the start and end
Event times of meals and breaks relative to the start and end of the
work order.
l Yes preserves meals and breaks relative to the original
time. For example, a booking is scheduled from 9:00 a.m.
to 5:00 p.m. with a meal from noon to 1:00 p.m. (3 hours
into the booking). The booking is moved to occur from
10:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. The meal is kept with the booking,
but moved in proportion to the original schedule. In this
case, the meal will now be from 1:00 p.m. to 2:00 p.m.
l No leaves the meal where it was originally scheduled.
(Default.)
Track Cost And Price Changes In Determines whether the system creates an entry in the Audit
Audit Trail? Trail whenever a user changes a cost or price field. Refer to
Audit Trail.
l Yes creates an audit trail entry whenever a change is
made.
l No does not create an audit trail entry. (Default.)
Check for Schedule Conflicts when Determines whether the system generates a warning when a
Checking Out Tapes? user attempts to perform a Check Out for a tape that is
assigned to a Work Order between the Check Out date and the
Date Due Back.
l Yes generates a warning that the tape is booked when the
Check Out request is submitted. (Default.)
l No allows the user to perform a Check Out without
generating a warning.

Option Description
Assign Sub-Activity Determines if the system allows or requires the user to select
a sub-activity when booking a resource activity. Refer to
Resource Activities in the Scheduling chapter of the
l No does not display the sub-activity list when booking an
activity. (Default.)
l Yes (Optional) displays the sub-activity list and provides
the option to select a Sub-Activity at the time of creating
an Activity.
l Yes (Mandatory) displays the sub-activity list and
requires the user to select a Sub-Activity in order to create
an Activity.
Enforce Resource Group in Work Determines whether the system prevents a user from viewing
Order Security or modifying a work order based on their access to resource
groups. (If no resource groups have been defined, this
preference does not enforce any restrictions.)
l Yes requires the user to have the appropriate access to all
groups to which resources in the work order belong.
l No does not require the user to have the appropriate
access to any group to which resources in the work order
belong. (Default.)
Base Currency Displays the base currency of the system, used to define
pricing. If necessary, this setting should be set once during the
initial setup.
Note: It is not recommended to change the base currency for
an established installation using this preference. A
separate conversion process is available for
installations with existing data.
l <base> indicates that the system is using the currency
defined in the Windows Regional Settings. (Default.)
l Any Alternate Currency indicates that the specified
currency will be used as the base currency. Refer to
Managing Alternate Currencies.

Option Description
Default Day Based Activities To Determines whether the following activities default to a 24-
Full Day hour duration: Comp Day, Day in Lieu, Paid Sick Day, Unpaid
Sick Day, Paid Day Off, Unpaid Day Off, and Sabbatical.
l Yes automatically sets the duration of the applicable
activities to 24 hours. (Default.)
l No assigns the duration specified by the booking Start
and End times to the applicable activities.
Note: Regardless of this setting, the Shift, Other, Available
Block, and Company Holiday activities never default to
a full day. The Vacation activity is controlled by the
setting Default Vacation To Full Day?.
Allow User Profile Overrides? Determines whether the system allows an administrator to
modify a user’s security profile when the user has an assigned
Parent Profile.
l Yes allows an administrator to override individual
permissions in the security profile even if a parent profile
is assigned.
l No does not allow a user to override individual items in a
security profile if a parent profile is assigned. (Default.)
Note: The assigned parent profile must be committed before
making modifications to the User Override profile.
Group for 'Add Command 1-6' Defines the resource group displayed in the Resource List
dialog when the appropriate Add menu option is selected from
the Work Orders menu or right-click menu. For example, if
Group for Add Command 1 is set to the Editors resource group,
the menu command “Add Editors” displays all members of the
Editors group.
l Options include all resource groups in the system. Default
is blank/empty.
Meals to consider Determines if meal times are "considered" for deduction from
payable hours and payroll.
l All deducts the meal time from payable hours for all work
orders and shift activities. (Default.)
l Work Orders Only deducts the meal time from payable
hours for all work orders.
l Shifts Only deducts the meal time from payable hours for
all shift activities.

Option Description
Breaks to consider Determines if break times are "considered" for deduction from
payable hours and payroll.
l All deducts the break time from payable hours for all work
orders and shift activities. (Default.)
l Work Orders Only deducts the break time from payable
hours for all work orders.
l Shifts Only deducts the break time from payable hours
for all shift activities.
Currency Decimal Places To Use In (Requires Quotes Manager.) Determines the number of digits
Quotes to the right of the decimal point displayed by currency fields
(price and cost) in the Quotes Manager module.
l Options include numbers from 2 to 5. The default value is
2.
Check Tape No. When Scanning (Requires Media Manager) Allows the user (using Barcode
Barcodes Scan) to search the Tape Number field after the Barcode
Override field is searched.
l Yes searches both the Tape Number and Barcode
Override fields for the stock item.
l No only scans the Barcode Override field. (Default.)
Enforce Duplication workflow (Requires Duplication.) Determines whether the Status of a
Dub Order must follow a predefined order of steps.
l No allows the user to assign any status at any time in any
order. (Default.)
l Yes limits the ways in which the user can assign the
status, according to the rules described in Duplication
Workflow in the Duplication chapter of the ScheduALL
Users Guide .
Allow Duplicate Barcodes in (Requires Media Manager System.) Determines if the Media
Library Module? Manager System allows more than one tape to use the same
bar code value.
l Yes generates a warning when a user attempts to assign
a bar code number that is already in use.
l No does not generate any warning if a bar code number is
already in use.
Media Log Files Location: Determines the location of files used by the Media Manager
System for import purposes.
Enter the path to the appropriate folder, or click Browse [...]
and click the folder icon to view the file structure and select a
folder.

Option Description
Auto-Populate Library Date Made (Requires Media Manager System.) Determines whether the
Media Manager System automatically populates the Date
Produced field.
l Yes automatically enters the current date in the Date
Produced field.
l No leaves the Date Produced field empty until the user
specifies a date.
Project/Master Project Approval (Requires Project Manager.) Defines the status applied to a
Status Master Project when all approval criteria are met. Users
cannot manually change a Master Project to this status or
higher until all approval criteria has been met.
l Options include all project status levels. Default is
Pending.
Change WO Status upon New Defines the status applied to a work order when a change
Change Request to: request is applied to the work order.
l Options include all work order status levels. Default is
Fourth Hold.
Show Client Pop-Up Notes for Determines whether pop-up notes defined in the Client
Inactive Clients Properties will display for client accounts set to the Inactive
status.
l Yes displays pop-up notes for all clients, including
inactive clients.
l No ignores pop-up notes assigned to inactive clients.
Auto-Apply Cancellation to Determines whether the system automatically applies
Shortened Work Orders cancellation rates to a portion of a resource line item within a
work order, when the duration of the work order is shortened.
Refer to Apply Cancellation Rates to Shortened Resource
Bookings in the Work Orders chapter of the ScheduALL
l Yes automatically applies cancellation rates when a
booking that matches cancellation criteria is shortened.
Refer to Cancellation Rate Cards and Cancellation
Rates.
l No does not automatically apply cancellation rates when
a booking is shortened.
Note: If the work order contains subscribed resources, the
cancellation notices are not sent to the publisher of
those resources.

Option Description
Can Re-assign Client to Reconciled Determines whether users can delete a client record when the
Work Orders client is assigned to reconciled work orders.
l Yes allows a user to change the client assigned to
reconciled work orders when deleting the client originally
l No prevents a user from reassigning the client of
reconciled work orders; if a client has reconciled work
orders, the user will be unable to delete the client.
(Default.)
Assign Master Project Approval Determines whether the approval fields in the Master Project
parameters to Sub Project? also affect (or “ripple down to”) the projects within the master
project when assigning a master project to a sub-project or
when creating a sub-project from a master project.
Warn if Work Order is Greater Than Determines whether the system generates a warning when a
(0 to disable): user attempts to save a work order from inside the Work Order
form, and the total price of the Work Order in the base
currency, including taxes if taxes are applied, exceeds the
specified numeric value.
The warning message is informational only, and does not
prevent the user from booking the work order. The system also
does not display a warning if the user changes the billable
quantity by dragging a booking block from the Scheduling
calendar.
l 0 disables the warning message. (Default.)
l A numeric value greater than 0 displays a warning when
the user attempts to save a work order, and the total price
exceeds the specified value.

Option Description
Approx Out Billing Method (Requires ScheduLINK.) Determines how the system
calculates billed time for work orders that extend into the
Approx Out period:
l Minimum Increment bills only the amount of Approx Out
time used, rounded up to the nearest Minimum Increment,
if the Goodnight feature (or Change Time dialog) is used to
change the billable time. Work orders in the past that were
never “Goodnighted” or modified using the Change Time
dialog are billed the full Approx Out period. (Default.)
l Entire Approx bills the entire amount of Approx Out time
booked in the work order when any amount of Approx Out
time is used, whether or not the work order was
Goodnighted before the end of the Approx Out period.
l Actual Usage bills the actual approx out as set by the
user. When the Goodnight command is used and the
Goodnight Time entered in the Goodnight dialog falls
within the Approx Out portion of the booking then the
specific Goodnight Time will set the Actual Usage for the
overall event.
Populate Default Values set in DTK Determines whether the specified Default Initial Value
when copying Work Orders overrides a user-specified value when a user copies a work
order. The Default Initial Value is an optional field-specific
setting configured in the Dialog Editor of Developers Toolkit. (If
a field does not have a Default Initial Value, the user-specified
value is always copied into the target work order.)
l Yes populates each field in the target work order with the
Default Initial Value, and ignores any user-specified
values. (Default.)
l No populates each field in a the target work order with the
user-specified value of the source work order, and ignores
any specified Default Initial Values.

Option Description
Allow Concurrent User Sessions Determines whether the same User Name can establish
Under the .NET Framework multiple sessions with the ScheduALL system at the same
time, using ScheduALL applications.
l Yes allows a User Name to open more than one session
or connection to the ScheduALL system using
ScheduALL applications. For example, the user could
log on to the ScheduALL system from two different
machines using the ScheduALL Thin Client on each, or
log on using two different ScheduALL client applications
on the same machine (Default.)
l No prevents a User Name from opening more than one
concurrent session. One User Name cannot establish a
second session using the same application, or log on
using a different application, if an active session already
exists.
Assign Copy Id upon Work Order Determines whether an ID number is assigned to copied work
Copy orders (Quick Copy or Extended Copy).
l Yes assigns a Copy ID number to all copies of a work
order.
l No does not assign a Copy ID number to copies of a work
order (Default.) The Copy ID number of copied work
orders is 0.
Create Visual Path Image in Determines whether a visual path image is available to Work
Reports Order-based reports.
l Yes allows Work Order-based report to print a visual path
image, if the work order contains visual path elements,
and the report file is configured to print the image.
l No ignores visual path information when printing Work
Order reports. (Default.)
Maximum Visual Path Image Width Determines the maximum width of Path Detail images created
(In Pixels) in the database. If the visual path image created for a particular
work order is less than the specified width, the system fills in
the remaining area with white space, allowing images to print
uniformly in different reports. If the visual path image is larger
than the specified width, the image is scaled proportionally to
fit the specified width.
l A numeric value from 1 to 2,000 sets the image width to
the specified maximum. (Default is 800.)
l 0 indicates no maximum value; the image width is
determined by the contents of the visual path.

Option Description
Disregard Library Episode Determines if the relationship between a Library Season and a
Ownership Library Episode is enforced.
l Yes ignores any possible relationship between Seasons
and Episodes. This allows the user to assign any Episode
(of the same client) in the system to a library entry.
l No enforces a relationship between a Season and one or
more Episodes. When a Season is assigned to a library
entry, the user must select an episode that is associated
to that season. (Default.)
Note: Seasons and episodes are also related to Clients, and
seasons or episodes associated to one client cannot be
assigned to a library entry for a different client.
Login Method for Switch User Determines the method used to validate the current user.
Feature:
l User Name/Password requires the normal ScheduALL
user name and password. (Default.)
l PIN Number requires the PIN assigned to the new user’s
profile. The user account must be assigned a PIN; refer to
Adding ScheduALL Users.
Note: Refer to Prevent Creation and Modifications of
Bookings for Assets? for information on requiring PIN
identification.
Enable Alternate Vendor Invoice Determines if alternate invoice reconciliation is used.
Reconcile Method
l Yes will not load the Unallocated Costs for the vendor into
memory upon the initial selection of the Vendor. Instead,
the records will be loaded when the user selects either the
Allocate Vendor Invoice command or Allocate Vendor
Invoice via Query command in the Vendor Invoice form.
l No loads the Unallocated Costs for the vendor into
memory upon the initial selection of the Vendor. (Default.)
Assign Cost Unit of Measure per Determines if the Cost Unit of Measure per Default as defined
Default set in Vendor Cost in Vendor Cost Maintenance is assigned.
Maintenance
l Yes sets the unit of measure for a scheduled event to the
default unit of measure defined in Vendor Cost
Maintenance for that resource. If a resource is replaced
and a new vendor is assigned then the unit of measure for
the scheduled event will be set to the default unit of
measure defined in Vendor Cost Maintenance for that
resource.
l No retains the Cost Unit of Measure assigned to the
resource. (Default.)

Option Description
Allow Duplicate Vendor Invoices Determines if two vendor invoices with the same Invoice and
with Unique Invoice Dates Remit To Address Id fields are allowed.
l Yes allows two vendor invoices with the same Invoice
and Remit To Address Id fields only if the Invoice Dates of
the two records are different.
l No does not allow two vendor invoices with the same
Invoice and Remit To Address Id fields. (Default.)
Prevent Duplicate Invoice # for Determines if invoice entry allows two or more invoices with
same Vendor the same invoice number for a specific vendor.
l Yes allows a vendor to have two or more invoices with the
same number.
l No does not allow duplicate invoice numbers. (Default.)
Prompt to Print Label when Determines whether, after a new library entry is saved, a
Committing/Saving New Library prompt is displayed asking if the user wants to print labels.
Entry
l Yes displays the prompt.
l No does not display the prompt. (Default.)
Resource Cache Expiration Time Determines the amount of time (in minutes) before resource
(minutes) cache information is cleared. Default is 30 minutes.
In Service Setup, suppress Determines whether the Service Setup dialog applies filtering
filtering in the Add Services to the list of services shown when the user attempts to bundle
browser? an additional service into the current service as one of the
Resources to Include.
l Yes presents an unfiltered list of services. This option
presents the list of services faster, but displays some
items that are not necessarily valid selections.
l No filters out certain service types, such as ScheduLINK,
Shipping, QC, and Engineering services. This option
presents only valid services for selection, but takes longer
to display the list of services to the user. (Default.)
Assign Default Cancellation Rate Determines whether the default cancellation rate card is
Card to new Work Order automatically applied on the Cancellation tab of a new work
order. Refer to Cancellation Rate Cards and Cancellation
Rates.
l Yes applies the cancellation rate card to the new work
order.
l No does not apply the default cancellation rate card to the
new work order. The user can select a rate card. (Default.)
Volume Pricing Work Order Reserved.
Status
Request Room Determines the Room type resource used to create work order
requests.

Option Description
Request Room 2 Determines the Room type resource used to create work order
requests.
Default Resource for Circuit API Determines the resource used as the master event resource
WO Creation for the CircuitOrderCreate API command, when the command
does not specify a valid MasterResourceID as part of the
command itself.
l Click the field and then click [...] to display the Select
Resource dialog. Select a resource (such as a Circuit
Booking Room) to use that resource as the master event
resource when a CircuitOrderCreate API call does not
provide its own master resource. (If the
CircuitOrderCreate command specifies a valid
MasterResourceID, the specified ID overrides the system
preference value.) Click Select.
l Click X to clear the selected resource. Each
CircuitOrderCreate API call will be required to provide its
own master resource.
Quote Attachment File: Determines the default search location for attaching files or
documents to quotes.
Mandatory Resource Questions Determines the status at which a user is required to answer
Must be Answered by Status: any resource questions identified as Mandatory.
Append new Work Order/Trouble (Requires Trouble Ticket module.) Determines the position of
Ticket Notes to: new notes within the notes fields on the Notes tab of the
Trouble Tickets Work Order.
l <Top of List> Appends new text at the beginning of the
existing note.
l <Bottom of List> Appends new text at the end of the
existing note.
Default Status for Trouble Ticket: (Requires Trouble Ticket module.) Determines the default
status assigned to new trouble ticket work orders.
l Options include all status settings. Default is Request.
Default Trouble Ticket Client (Requires Trouble Ticket module.) Determines the default
client assigned to new trouble ticket work orders. Click the ...
button and select the client from the Select Client list and
click Select.
Set to Hold for Review at statuses: Determines if the work order is automatically set to Hold for
Review when certain statuses are assigned. Click in the
Value column to select the status(es) that will change to work
order to Hold for Review when assigned. The default value is
no status selected (0 status(es)).
Enforce Booking of Volume Reserved
Resources to Count > 0

Option Description
Use Alternate Contact Catalog Allows the user to add a tab to the Contact dialog to associate
multiple clients to one contact (requires the DTK module). This
allows the user to select a contact in a work order whose main
association is to a client that is different from the client
l Yes allows the user to associate multiple clients to one
contact.
l No does not allow the user to associate multiple clients to
one contact. (Default.)
Refer to the Modifying Dialogs for Alternate Contact
Catalog for information on adding Alternate Contact
commands to the appropriate forms.
Library Navigation and Traffic Determines the library mode that displays when the user
Mode selects Media Manager System from the File menu.
l Media Manager displays the Asset Media Manager
library mode.
l Library displays the classic library mode.
Enforce Library Classification Determines whether the user must assign a Classification to a
library entry.
l Yes automatically presents the Select Library
Classification dialog when inserting a new media entry
and requires that a classification is assigned before
continuing. (Default.)
l No does not require that a classification is assigned.
Note: If the Enforce Library Classification system preference
is set to Yes, when a user enters Persistent Insert Mode
and selects a Classification, the system displays the
prompt, "Retain this Classification for all entries made
during the Persistent Insert session?"
l Yes applies the selected Classification to all media asset
entries created during the current Persistent Insert
operation, without prompting the user for each asset.
l No applies the selected Classification to the next media
asset entry only, then displays the Classification list to
select the Classification for the following entry.
Enforce ‘In Care Of’ Assignment for Determines whether the user must assign a Primary Location
Library Location Scan to a library entry.
l Yes presents an information dialog and requires that a
primary location is assigned before continuing. (Default.)
l No does not require that a primary location is assigned.

Option Description
Initial Record Count to load in Determines the number of records returned when a library
Library Query query is run. 5000 is the default.
Initial Record Count to load in Determines the number of records returned when a project
Project Query query is run. 5000 is the default.
Initial Record Count to load in Determines the number of records returned when a resource
Resource Browser browser is displayed. 5000 is the default.
Open Library Result Records in Determines if library records that are displayed from a query
View Mode are initially displayed in View Mode.
l Yes displays library records in View Mode.
l No displays the initial library record in Edit Mode.
(Default.)
Note: This preference only affects library records displayed by
double clicking the record in the query results area or
selecting a record and clicking Go to. Subsequent
records displayed by using the navigation buttons are
displayed in View mode.
Omit Confirmation of each Library Determines whether the library dialog for each scanned item is
Item after Check-In automatically displayed when scanning library items and
performing a location scan check-in.
l Yes does not display the library dialog.
l No displays the library dialog. (Default.)
Note: This preference takes effect only when the Open Library
Result Record in View Mode is set to Yes. Refer to
Open Library Result Records in View Mode.
Enable Needs Confirmation Logic Determines if the user can change the status of a work order if
for Resources any resources booked in the work order have Explicit
Confirmation set to Needs Confirmation or Deny.
l Yes prevents the user from changing the work order
status if any resources booked in the work order have
Explicit Confirmation set to Needs Confirmation or Deny.
l No allows the user to change the work order status if any
resources booked in the work order have Explicit
Confirmation set to Needs Confirmation or Deny.
(Default.)
Leave Project company Determines whether the company field of a project is changed
unassigned when adding WO with when assigning a work order to a project.
assigned Company
l Yes does not update the company field.
l No Updates the company field with the value assigned in
the work order. (Default.)

Option Description
Show Data Privacy Splash Screen Determines if the Privacy Statement dialog displays when
ScheduALL starts.
l Yes displays the Privacy Statement dialog.
l No does not display the Privacy Statement dialog.
(Default.)
Refer to the Revision History Archive for version 4.62 for
more information about this option and how to enable it.
Use Internal Ledger Codes by Determines which ledger codes are used for a work order that
default for WOs with no Client has no assigned client.
l Yes assigns internal ledger codes.
l No assignees external ledger codes. (Default.)
Abandon changes to User-Defined Determines if changes made to information in a dialog are
dialogs when ESC key is pressed saved when the user presses the ESC key.
l Yes displays a message asking if the user wants to save
changes. The user can select Yes to save changes, No to
exit the dialog without saving any changes, or Cancel to
return to the dialog.
l No does not display a message. The changes are saved
when the ESC key is pressed. (Default.)
Clear External Costs Flag on Client Determines if the system clears the External Cost check box
Provided Resources on the Main tab of the Resource Details dialog when the
resource is identified as a Client Provided Resource.
l Yes clears the External Cost check box when a resource
that is identified as a Client Provided Resource is booked
in a work order.
l No does not clear the External Cost check box when a
resource that is identified as a Client Provided Resource
is booked in a work order. (Default.)
Refer to the Resource Details, Main in the Work Orders
chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide , General Resource
– Accounting, and Room Properties – Accounting for more
information.
Explicit Confirmation Setting for Determines the initial Explicit Confirmation setting for a
Client Provided Resource resource booking in a work order when the resource is supplied
by a client.
l N/A does not assign a setting. (Default.)
l Confirmed sets the initial setting to Confirmed.
l Needs Confirmation sets the initial setting to Needs
Confirmation.
l Deny sets the initial setting to Deny.
l Not Needed sets the initial setting to Not Needed.

Option Description
Status of Clients to suppress from Determines if client accounts that are Inactive or Closed are
display in Selection browsers displayed in browsers that allow the user to select a client.
l None displays Inactive or Closed clients in selection
browsers. When Inactive or Closed clients are selected,
an information dialog displays the status of the client
account. The user can click Yes to proceed with the client
selection or No to ignore the selection.
l Inactive prevents client accounts with the status Inactive
from displaying in selection browsers.
l Closed prevents client accounts with the status Closed
from displaying in selection browsers.
l Inactive and Closed prevents client accounts with the
status Inactive or Closed from displaying in selection
browsers.
View Prices in Price Maint. in Determines how pricing levels are displayed on the Price
ascending effective date order Maintenance dialogs for Resource, Services, Resource
Categories, or Resource Types.
l No displays pricing entries grouped by Unit of Measure in
the order they were added to the system. (Default.)
l Yes displays pricing entries grouped by Unit of Measure,
from oldest Effective Date (top) to the most recent
Effective Date (bottom).
Auto populate Contact Name from In Contact Setup, determines if the system automatically
First and Last Name enters the Contact Name field based on the entries in the First
Name and Last Name fields.
l None does not automatically enter the Contact Name.
(Default.)
l First, Last automatically enters the Contact Name with
the First Name listed first, a space, and then the Last
Name.
l Last, First automatically enters the Contact Name with
the Last Name listed first, followed by a comma and a
space, and then the First Name.
Note: The Contact Name is not populated until the user clicks
OK in the contact setup dialog. The First Name and Last
Name controls do not display on the standard contact
setup dialog, but can be added using Developers
Toolkit.
Create Credit Note/Ledger Entry Determines whether the system creates a credit note and a
for quantity reduction of non- ledger entry for non-standard items with a price of zero.
standard items with 0 Price

Option Description
Create location scan on Initial Determines whether a scan record is created when an item is
Default Location? originally scanned for default location.
l Yes creates a scan record. (Default.)
l No does not create a scan record.
Retain Work Order Job Number Determines whether the content of the Job Number field in the
when Project is released work order dialog is deleted when the project linked to the work
order is removed.
l Yes deletes the content of the Job Number field when the
Project is removed.
l No does not delete the content of the Job Number field.
(Default.)
Select Extended Library Query Determines the arrangement of fields and the number of tabs
Style available in the Library Extended Query dialog.
l Option 1 displays the Main, Cuts, Traffic, and Results
tabs. (Default.)
l Option 2 displays the tabs in Option 1 and an additional
Audio/Details tab. Some of the fields on the Main tab in
Option 1 are moved to the Audio/Details tab when using
Option 2.
Note: The Cuts, Traffic, and Results tabs are identical in the
two options.
Item Number/Barcode to log when Determines whether the Item Number or the Barcode is used
creating library item when a library item is created.
l Barcode logs the barcode when the item is created.
l Item number logs the item number when the item is
created. (Default.)
Library destroyed authorized by Determines whether a name must be entered in the Destroy
field required? Authorized by (User) field when a date is entered in the Date
Destroyed field.
l Yes requires an entry in the Destroy Authorized by (User)
field.
l No does not require an entry in the field. (Default.)
Restore Last Recycled Category Determines if the Library Catalog Recycle field is used to
when recycled? populate the library catalog entry.
l Yes populates the library catalog entry with the current
value in the Library Catalog Recycle field.
l No does not change the library catalog entry. (Default.)

Option Description
Reset to Default UOM on Rate Card Determines if the system automatically changes the Unit of
change? Measure to the default when the Rate Card is changed by the
user.
l Yes automatically changes the Unit of Measure to the
default when the Rate Card is changed.
l No does not reset the Unit of Measure. (Default.)
Disable requirement and swap Determines if the Requirement and Swap buttons display on
buttons on conflict dialogs the Conflicts List dialog.
l Yes does not display the buttons on the dialog.
l No displays the buttons and makes them available to the
user. (Default.)
Display Login History Determines if the system displays the Login History dialog to
each user upon successful login. The Login History dialog
remains visible for roughly 3-5 seconds, and contains the date
and time at which the user Last Logged In, the Number of
Failed Login Attempts, and the number of Days Until
Password Expiration.
l Yes displays the Login History dialog to each user upon
login if the system preference Number of Failed Login
Attempts to Disable a User Account is also a number
greater than 0.
l No does not display the Login History dialog. (Default.)
Log on Audit Trail changes to Determines if the system tracks changes to Activities in the
Activities? Audit Trail and on the History tab.
Note: This option only affects the ScheduALL for Windows
application; changes are not tracked for other
ScheduALL services, Web services, or Web
applications.
l Yes adds an entry to the Audit Trial when a user changes
an activity, allowing the system to display a history of
changes in the View Audit Trail dialog, the Other Activity
Booking Properties dialog, and on the History tab of the
activity.
l No does not add an entry to the Audit Trail when a user
changes an activity; no history information is available
through the View Audit Trail dialog, the Other Activity
Booking Properties dialog, or on the History tab of the

Option Description
Log on Audit Trail changes to Determines whether the system creates an entry in the Audit
Resources/Stock/Services Setup? Trail whenever a resource, stock, or service is changed. An
entry is also created on the Trail tab of the resource, stock, or
service.
l Yes logs resource, stock, or service setup changes to the
Audit Trail and the Trail tab.
l No does not log setup changes. (Default.)
Track Resource Requirement IDs Determines whether the system assigns unique ID values to
in a Project/Production resource requirements in Work Orders.
l Yes assigns unique ID values to each requirement, which
enables certain optional functionality, such as the
Graphical Display of Scheduled Requirements feature,
but may cause certain operations to require additional
time.
l No does not identify each requirement with a unique ID
value. (Default.)
Enable Circuit Standards Determines whether the Standards Conversion tab and the
Conversion? Requires Conversion checkbox is available in the Select
Services dialog.
l Yes displays the Standards Conversion tab and the
Requires Conversion checkbox in the Select Services
dialog.
l No does not display the Standards Conversion tab and
the Requires Conversion checkbox. (Default.)
Convertor Resource Questions Allows the user to select a Category/Type combination from
Cat/Type source: which resource questions for a convertor will be retrieved that
will display on the Standards Conversion tab of the Select
Services dialog. Refer to Enable Circuit Standards
Conversion?.
Click to select a category and type from the Category and
Type Selection dialog. The default is None (blank).
Copy TX Parameters upon JOIN Determines whether resource transmission parameters are
of primary source copied to a joined resource from the primary resource when
creating a new JOIN chain.
l Yes copies resource transmission parameters to a joined
resource from the primary resource when creating a new
JOIN chain.
l No does copy transmission parameters. (Default.)

Option Description
Max time allowed for automatic Determines the number of minutes that the system is allowed
circuit generation logic to generate automatic circuit logic. The system will stop
(minutes) searching for a circuit path after the number of minutes
entered.
l Enter a number greater than 1. Default is 5.
l Enter 0 for no maximum. The system will search until a
path is found.
Use Price Maintenance Dialog for Determines whether the system displays the Price
Custom Pricing Maintenance dialog or the Custom Price Setup dialog when
configuring custom pricing at the client level. Either of these
dialogs are displayed when creating or editing custom pricing
from the Custom Pricing tab of the client properties dialog.
Refer to Client Properties – Custom Pricing.
l Yes displays the Price Maintenance dialog when
configuring custom pricing at the client level. Provides
multi-tiered pricing, with Day/Night, Time of Day,
Absolute, and Progressive pricing options.
l No displays the Custom Price Setup dialog when
configuring custom pricing at the client level. (Default.)
Provides single, flat fee pricing or a set percentage off a
rate card.
Note: When set to Yes, the Default Unit of Measure must be
the same as the price entry Unit type. If it is not, the
system displays the regular price, not the custom price.
Status Levels for Projects work Determines which work orders in the project are included in the
order counter: Work Order Count. Click the count to display the list of Work
Order Status levels. (If no status levels are selected, the Work
Order Count function field will always display 0. (Default.)
l Select (check) a status level to include Work Orders at
that status and assigned to the project in the work order
count for that project.
l Deselect (clear) a status level to exclude Work Orders at
that status and assigned to the project from the work order
count for that project.

Option Description
Activate Enhanced Access Rights Determines whether the system applies the security settings
for Costs? from the Room and Resource Group Cost Access, Client
Group Cost Access, Client Group Cost Access Level, and
Report Groups settings to augment the system-level
permissions related to viewing and editing cost information.
l Yes allows the specified sections to determine access
rights at the resource group or client group level.
l No ignores the specified sections and determines access
rights based only upon the system-level permissions.
(Default.)
Remove library history on When changes are made to library items the changes are
deletion? stored in the system. This preference determines whether this
information is erased when an item is removed from the library.
l Yes removes information about changes to an item when
the item is removed from the library.
l No preserves the information about changes to an item
when the item is removed from the library. (Default.)
Automatically sort floating Determines whether resources added to a floating resource
resource group types? group Type are automatically sorted in the Description column
of the Resource Maintenance dialog.
l Yes sorts resource names in alphabetical order for floating
resource group Types.
l No does not alphabetize resource names. (Default.)
Continue to Track Library History If the Track History option in the History tab of a library item is
on Recycle? selected, this preference determines whether the option
remains selected when the item is recycled.
l Yes retains the selected state of the Track History option
when the item is recycled.
l No clears the Track History option so that history is no
longer tracked after the item is recycled. (Default.)
Use External Reference for Determines if the system uses the value in the External
resource duplication validations? Reference field of the Other tab of resource setup when
determining if a resource is a duplication.
l Yes uses the value in the External Reference field of the
Other tab of resource setup when determining if a
resource is a duplication.
l No does not use the value in the External Reference field
of the Other tab. Resource validation is done using the
resource Description. (Default.)

Option Description
Clear Billable Times on Un- Determines whether the billable start and end times are set to
reconciled Work Orders? null when the Unreconcile command is issued in a work order.
l Yes sets the billable time to null when the Unreconcile
command is issued in a work order.
l No does not change the billable time when the
Unreconcile command is issued in a work order. (Default.)
Calendar Border Width Setting Determines the width of the outside border of booking blocks
on the scheduling calendar for the following items:
l Work Orders
l Activities
l Selected Work Orders
l Selected Activities
Select a border width between 1 and 10 from the list.
Requires User Preference settings for the items listed above.
Refer to the Enable wide borders on ... settings in Base
Region.
Let Auto-Select use random Determines whether the Auto-Select resources function
assignment pattern? assigns resources randomly.
l Yes allows random auto-selection of resources regardless
of how the list of resources is sorted.
l No selects resources based on the category/type sort
order at the All Resources group level. For example, if the
first resource in the list is not available, the next resource
in the list is selected. (Default.)
Refer to Using Auto-Select for more information about this
feature.
Show Location Level 1-3 Determines which Location Levels are displayed in the
ScheduALL Portal area or in ScheduALL Connector.
l Yes shows a filter control for the appropriate location level
in the Select Source and Select Destination pages.
(Default)
l No hides the filter control for the appropriate location level.
Threshold for Capacity Change Determines the minimum delay between when a user begins
Repricing (seconds) the process of changing capacity, and when they commit that
change. Default is 60 seconds.

Option Description
Delete InterOp entries when Determines if any related rows in the InteropListenerLog,
deleting a Work Order InteropMessageLog and InteropPayload tables should be
deleted when a work order is deleted.
Note: Do not delete work orders that are within the Interop
Window of Interest.
l Yes removes related rows in the InteropListenerLog,
InteropMessageLog and InteropPayload tables when a
work order is deleted.
l No does not delete rows from the tables. (Default.)
Delete Trail entries when Determines if any related rows in the Trail table should be
deleting a Work Order deleted when a work order is deleted.
l Yes removes related rows in the Trail table when a work
order is deleted.
l No does not delete rows from the table. (Default.)
Threshold to Suppress Determines the number of events that can be processed and
Rendered Calendar Events (per displayed on the scheduling calendar for each resource line on
Resource) any ScheduALL calendar.
l If the number of items processed exceeds the threshold
limit selected, the booking data will not be collected and
the calendar will display a red shaded area on the calendar
for that resource.
l If the number of items processed is less than or equal to
the threshold, then it will collect the booking data and
display the bookings on the calendar.
l If the threshold is set to 0 (default) then all booking data is
displayed.

Schedule Options
Table 78. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Schedule Options
Option Description
Work Hours in a Day (Requires Personnel Manager.) Defines the
number of hours in a standard work day, used
to reconcile payments for personnel work
days. Any paid activity more than the Work
Hours in a Half Day limit, and less than the
full day limit, is paid as a full day.
l Choices are from 1 hour to 24 hours, or
<none>.
l 8 hrs is the default.
Work Hours in a Half Day (Requires Personnel Manager.) Defines the
number of hours in a standard work half-day,
used to reconcile payments for personnel
work days. Any paid activity less than the half
day limit is paid as a half day.
l Choices are from 1 hour to 12 hours, or
<none>.
l 4 hrs is the default.
Re-evaluate Bumper Time upon Room Change When set to Yes, the system adjusts the
bumper time for a booking to the default
bumper time of the room to which a booking is
moved.
Notify Scheduler of Birthdays When set to Yes, the system displays a
message when a user attempts to schedule a
person into a work order or Shift on their
birthday.

Table 78. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Schedule Options (continued)
Option Description
Change WO from Confirmed to Unconfirmed upon Determines whether the system changes the
Time Change status of a work order from Confirmed to
Unconfirmed when a work order is moved.
“Moved” in this case refers to any of the
following:
l Moved – change of both Start and End
l Extended – moving Start or End out
l Shortened – moving Start or End in
Select an option from the list:
l <none> retains the Confirmed status
when a work order is moved.
l 1 hour to 72 hours defines the period
within which a work order can be moved
and remain the Confirmed status. Default
is 1 hrs.
l always sets a Confirmed work order to
Unconfirmed any time the work order is
moved.
If a time period is specified (1–72 hours) and
the start of the work order, or the end of the
work order, or both, are changed by more than
the specified amount, then the work order is
changed to UnConfirmed. Example: A work
order is scheduled from 2 p.m. to 6 p.m., and
the time period is set to one hour. If the start
time is changed to 4 p.m. (a change of more
than one hour) the status is changed to
UnConfirmed.
Note: If the start time and the end time are
changed by less than the specified
period and the combined time of those
changes is more than the period
specified, then the status is not
changed.
Example: Start time is 2 p.m. and end
time is 6 p.m. Start time is changed to
1:15 p.m. (45 minute change) and end
time is changed to 6:45 p.m. (45
minute change). The time period is set
to one hour. The combined time
change is 1.5 hours, but since neither
the start or end time changed by more
than an hour, the status is not
changed.

Option Description
A user preference exists with the same title.
These two preferences interact in the
following ways:
l If the user preference is set to Follow
System Preference, then the setting in
the system preference is used.
l If the user preference is set to any
other option, then the user preference
overrides the system preference
setting.
Refer to Change WO from Confirmed to

Unconfirmed upon Time Change.
Conflict with Observed Holidays Determines whether the system generates
conflict warnings when a user attempts to
schedule a booking on a date marked as an
observed holiday.
Note: The system generates warnings for
overtime and observed holiday
differentials under both settings.
l Yes generates a conflict warning for
observed holidays.
l No does not generate warnings for the
observed holiday.
Conflict with Unobserved Holidays Determines whether the system generates
conflict warnings when a user attempts to
schedule a booking on a date marked as an
unobserved holiday.
observed holidays.
l No does not generate warnings for the
observed holiday.
Attempt to Preserve Overridden Times When set to Yes, the system attempts to
retain time difference characteristics if
logically possible. For example, if a resource
booked time differs from the overall session
booked time, and the overall session time is
changed, the program will attempt to preserve
the time difference characteristics. This is not
always possible.

Option Description
Prices/Costs Effective Date Trigger by Allows the user to select a method for price
changes to take effect:
l Current Date – prices will change on the
date entered in “effective date” (on the
resource price dialog), regardless of
when the work order was created.
l Work Order Date – prices will change
only for work orders created on or after
the effective date.
Period Overtime Trigger (Requires Personnel Manager.) Determines
the method for calculating overtime.
Note: Overtime differentials an all other
Personnel Pay Category calculations
apply only to bookings based on the
“hour” unit of measure.
l Total Hours calculates overtime based
on all hours worked, including non-
overtime hours and per-day overtime
hours.
l Straight Hrs Only calculates period
overtime based on the number of straight
hours an employee works, and does not
count daily overtime hours toward
fulfilling the period overtime trigger.
Display Resource Availability in Scheduling Determines if the main scheduling calendar
uses shading to indicate when a resource is
Available, Possibly Available, or Not
Available based on the settings in the
resource properties for most resources, or
based on the Quantity Available amount for
stock items.
l Yes displays yellow shading on the
calendar board to indicate the resource is
Possibly Available, and red shading to
indicate the resource is Not Available.
l No does not display shading for
availability settings on the calendar
board.
Refer to Availability Setup.

Option Description
Accumulate Day exceptions from: (Requires Personnel Manager.) Allows the
user to select a method to accumulate
vacation and sick days.
l Calendar Year begins accumulation of
vacation and sick time on January 1st.
l Date Hired begins accumulation of
vacation and sick time based on the
employee’s Hire Date. Refer to
Personnel Properties– Identification
Apply Minimum Hours Adjustment to Straight Time (Requires Personnel Manager.) If the
only? minimum hours paid per pay period is set to
40 but an employee worked less than 40
hours, an adjustment is made so that the
employee is paid for 40 hours.
Note: Overtime triggers only apply to
bookings that use the Hours unit of
measure.
l Yes counts only hours worked at straight
time toward the minimum hours per pay
period requirement (set value on the
Overtime Page of the Pay Category
setup dialog).
l No counts all hours worked toward
minimum hours requirement (including
any per day overtime hours).
Default Vacation To Full Day? (Requires Personnel Manager.) In Activity by
Person or Activity by Category view, when
scheduling a vacation day:
l Yes enters the start time as 12:00 a.m.,
and the end time as 11:59 p.m.
l No sets the start and end times based on
the employee’s shift assignment.
Default Vacation Days To Single Session (Requires Personnel Manager.) In Activity by
Person or Activity by Category view, when
scheduling a Vacation activity that includes
more than one consecutive day:
l Yes creates one combined Activity
booking for the entire duration, with the
appropriate Start and End dates.
l No creates separate Activity bookings
for each day in the overall vacation

Option Description
Re-evaluate Service upon Room Change During the setup process for rooms, the user
determines which services can be performed
in a room (on the Services page of the Room
Properties dialog).
l Yes informs the user that the new room
does not support the service when the
user attempts to move the session to
another room.
l No allows a user to move a booked
service to a room that does not support
the service, without generating a
warning.
Ignore Show Start Only for Vacations? (Requires Personnel Manager.) Determines
whether the Personnel Manager dialogs
observe, or override, the View filter “Show
Activities in Start Day Only” for Vacation
activities that span more than one day.
l Yes overrides the view filter, and
displays each day of an activity that
spans more than one day.
l No displays the activity as determined
by the view filter setting.
Ignore Show Start Only for Sick Days? (Requires Personnel Manager.) Determines
whether the Personnel Manager dialogs
observe, or override, the View filter “Show
Activities in Start Day Only” for Sick Day
activities that span more than one day.
l Yes overrides the view filter, and
displays each day of an activity that
spans more than one day.
l No displays the activity as determined
by the view filter setting.
Reprice WorkOrders Upon Copy Determines if the system re-evaluates all
pricing information for a new work order, when
a new work order is created as a copy of an
existing work order. For example, if a work
order is scheduled for a week day, and copied
to a weekend day, different rates may apply.
l Yes re-evaluates pricing based on the
dates and times, and other information
for the new, duplicate work order.
l No retains the original pricing. (Default.)

Option Description
Reprice WorkOrders Upon Move Determines if the system re-evaluates all
pricing information for a work order, when a
work order is moved to a different time. For
example, if a work order is scheduled for
daytime hours, and moved to night hours,
different rates may apply.
l Yes re-evaluates pricing based on the
dates, times, and other information for
the work order.
Refer to Keep Billing and Cost Qty in
Sync.
Re-evaluate WorkOrders Cost Upon Copy Determines if the system re-evaluates all
cost information for a new work order, when a
new work order is created as a copy of an
existing work order. For example, if a work
order is scheduled for a week day, and copied
to a weekend day, different costs may apply.
l Yes re-evaluates costs based on the
for the new, duplicate work order.
Re-evaluate WorkOrders Cost Upon Move Determines if the system re-evaluates all
cost information for a work order, when a
work order is moved to a different time. For
example, if a work order is scheduled for
daytime hours, and moved to night hours,
different costs may apply.
l Yes re-evaluates costs based on the
for the work order.
Refer to Keep Billing and Cost Qty in
Sync.
Force Conflicts Check Upon Status Change? Determines whether the system checks the
work order for conflicts each time the Status
field is changed.
l Yes checks for conflicts each time the
Status field is changed.
l No allows the user to change the Status
without checking for conflicts. (Default.)

Option Description
Assign Default Rate Card to new Work Order Determines if the system automatically
applies the system-level default rate card to a
new work order. (Refer to Adding a Rate
Card.)
l Yes applies the default rate card
automatically upon work order creation.
l No does not assign a rate card by
default.
Default Browser Flyover for ... Determines the resource flyover displayed by
Rooms default for Room, General Resource,
General Resources Personnel, and BandPLAN entries
(respectively) in the main scheduling calendar
Personnel
and the ScheduLINK extended Scheduling
Band Plan Resources
calendar.
l <none> does not display a browser
flyover. (Default.)
l Any resource display block displays
the information specified in the assigned
block. Refer to Display Blocks for
Resources.
Refer to Override Browser Flyover for
Rooms and other corresponding user
preferences for user-level overrides.
Allow Room Assignments To Activities (Requires Personnel Manager.) Determines
whether a user can associate a personnel
activity (such as a shift) with a Room
resource in the Personnel Manager module.
l Yes displays the Select Room button on
the New Activity dialog in Personnel
Manager. Refer to Create an Activity in
the Personnel Manager chapter of the
l No prevents the user from assigning an
activity to a room.

Option Description
Open Requirements Allowed up to: Determines the maximum status level which
allows open requirements. The user cannot
change a work orders status to any status
level above the specified status if an open
requirement exists. Also, the user cannot add
an open requirement to the work order if the
work order status is above the specified
status.
l Options include all work order status
levels. Default is Unconfirmed.
l <none> disables conflict warnings for
open requirements.
Auto Generate Payables for Work Orders starting Determines the status level at which the
From: system automatically generates payables.
Refer to Auto PO Generation Method for
information on how these payables are
generated.
levels. Default is Request.
Note: If the system preference Apply
Vendor Costs without Creation Of
Payable/PO?, is set to Yes, this
setting is ignored.
Level of Audit Trail History in Work Orders: Determines the amount of information stored
in the work order audit trail.
l Summary stores basic information.
l Detailed stores extended information.
Level of Audit Trail History in Projects: Determines the amount of information stored
in the project audit trail.
l Summary stores basic information.
l Detailed stores extended information.
Populate Original Volume Booked field Up to: [Work (Requires the Rental module) Determines the
Order Status] status up to which the system will update the
original quantity based on the volume count.
l All Work Order Statuses

Option Description
Lock Work Order Original Times upon Confirm Determines if the system automatically locks
a work order when the work order status is
changed to Confirmed. Refer to Lock or
Release a Work Order in the Work Orders
l Yes automatically locks the work order
when the status is changed to
Confirmed.
l No does not automatically lock the work
order.
In version 4.64R2 and later, when the
preference is set to Yes and the Start Time of
the work order is in the future, the following
behavior is applied:
l If the work order is created at, or changed
to, a Confirmed status (including the
base Confirmed status and the five
optional auxiliary Confirmed status
levels) the Start Time (Booked) and End
Time (Booked) are locked so long as the
work order stays at a Confirmed status.
l If the work order is changed to a status
lower than the Confirmed (or an auxiliary
Confirmed) status, the Start Time
(Booked) and End Time (Booked) are
unlocked and updated as necessary. Any
changes to the work order start and end
time will update the Booked times while
the status is lower than a Confirmed
status. (This includes any time the
Unconfirm confirmed work orders upon
Time changes system preference
automatically changes the work order
status.)
l Each time the work order is changed
from a status lower than Confirmed to the
Confirmed (or an auxiliary Confirmed)
status, the Start Time (Booked) and End
Time (Booked) are updated and re-
locked.

Option Description
l The Start Time (Booked) and End Time
(Booked) remain locked and do not
change for any of the following status
changes:
l If the work order is changed from
one Confirmed status (base or
auxiliary) to any other Confirmed
status (base or auxiliary).
any Confirmed status to any
status higher than Confirmed
(such as Completed, Pending
Approval, Reconciled, or
Cancelled).
any status higher than Confirmed
(Completed, Pending Approval,
etc.) back to Confirmed.
In addition, the behavior for locking the Start
Time (Booked) and End Time (Booked) fields
are now consistent between different
operations, such as changing the work order
times via the Scheduling Calendar or using
the Change button inside the Work Order
form.
Note: Once the current time passes the Start
time of the work order, the Start Time
(Booked) and End Time (Booked) are
locked automatically, regardless of the
current status or the current value of
the Lock Work Order Original Times
upon Confirm option.

Option Description
Keep Billing and Cost Qty in Sync Determines if manual changes to the Qty
column on the Resources and Prices tab of
the Work Order dialog are automatically
applied to the Qty column on the Costs tab of
the Work Order dialog.
l Yes updates the Cost tab Qty
automatically.
l No does not update the Cost tab Qty
automatically.
Note: This option only applies to Stock
resources.
Set this preference to No to prevent
reevaluation of cost when the quantity is
changed and there is a Unit of Measure
(UOM) price assigned.
Replace Master With Same Category Reserved.
Charge for Work Order Cancellation Calculated by Determines how the system calculates the
Interval to: cancellation interval for individual items
assigned to a work order.
For example, a work order is booked from
9 a.m. to 5 p.m., and a piece of equipment in
the work order is booked from 1 p.m. to 5 p.m.
l Work Order Start Time calculates the
interval based on the start time of the
work order. (Default.) In the example, the
cancellation interval for the resource is
calculated based on the 9 a.m. start time.
l Individual Event Start Time calculates
the interval based on the start time of
each individual resource or service. In
the example, the cancellation interval for
the resource is calculated based on the
1 p.m. start time.

Option Description
Enable Tab/Enter keys in browsers Determines how the system responds to the
Tab and Enter keys when editing fields in a
browser control, such as the table on the
Pricing tab of the Work Order dialog.
l Yes saves the change and edits the next
field in the browser when the user
presses the Tab or Enter key. (Default.)
l No saves the change and exits the field
without going to the next column when
the user presses the Tab or Enter key.
This allows the user to select a different
field, or save and exit the work order.
Warn when Reconciling Work Order with Ledger Determines whether the system generates a
Code at Resource level warning if the user attempts to reconcile a
work order that is missing a Sales Ledger
either at the work order level, or for any
resource that has a billable price.
l Yes generates a warning “There is no
SAP Ledger Code selected on Work
Order #####” when a work order does not
have a SAP Code Ledger entry either for
the whole work order, or for each
resource with a billable price.
l No allows the user to set a work order to
Reconciled whether or not ledgers have
been assigned. (Default.)
Refer to Warn when Reconciling Work
Order with No Ledger Entry for ledger
checking at the work order level only.
Copy parcel information when copying work orders? Determines whether the system includes
shipping parcel information when using the
Quick Copy or Extended Copy functions to
create new work orders.
l Yes creates a duplicate of each
parcel/recipient specified in the source
work order, without any assigned
shipped items.
l No drops all parcel and shipped item
information. (Default.)

Option Description
Enforce strict time gaps between Predecessors and Determines whether the system
Successors? automatically maintains the specified time
periods between a work order and its
assigned predecessor and successors when
the user moves a work order.
l Yes moves all related work orders
automatically to maintain the specified
time gaps between work orders.
l No allows the user to move one work
order in a chain without moving the items
identified as predecessors and
successors. (Default.)
Reset Operations Manager Start Trigger if Changed (Requires ScheduLINK) Determines whether
from Confirmed to Lower Status? the Start trigger is reset when the status of a
work order or event that is in progress and has
been acknowledged is changed from
Confirmed to a lower status. This allows the
work order or event to display in the Action
Pane again. For example, if a scheduler
extends the time of a work order after it has
been acknowledged (which sets the status to
Unconfirmed), and this preference is set to
Yes, the system will display an alert in the
Action Pane.
l Yes resets the start trigger.
l No does not reset the start trigger.
(Default.)
Operations Manager On Air function changes Work Determines the work order status level to
Order Status to: which a work order is changed when the user
clicks the On Air button in Operations
Manager.
l None does not change the work order
status. (Default.)
l Status changes the work order status to
the status selected when the On Air time
is modified.

Option Description
Allow changes to Closed Work Orders When the user issues the Change Work
Order Status to “Closed” command from the
Work Order menu, the work order is
reconciled and closed. The preference
determines if the Work Order dialog remains
open for editing after setting the work order to
Closed.
l Yes allows the Work Order dialog to
remain open for editing after the work
order is set to Closed. Changes can be
made to the work order only until the user
clicks OK. (Default.)
l No closes the Work Order dialog when
the work order is set to Closed. Further
changes are not allowed.
Validate capable room conflict for service with Determines whether the system generates
direct parent resource only conflict warnings based on booking a service
into a work order that has more than one
Room assigned to it.
booking a service only if the service is
not available in the Room identified as
the Master Event.
l No generates a conflict warning for
booking a service if the service is not
available in any Room in the work order.
(Default.)
For example, Edit Room 1 supports both
Digital and Basic Editing services, and Audio
Room 1 supports only voice-over services. A
user schedules a work order in Edit Room 1,
and then adds Digital Editing, Audio Room 1,
and Basic Editing (in that order). If the system
preference is set to Yes, the system ignores
the potential conflict between Basic Editing
and Audio Room 1; if the system preference
is set to No, the system generates a conflict
warning.

Option Description
Enforce Vendor Notifications upon Goodnight Determines whether the user can Goodnight a
work order without sending notifications to
each Vendor.
l Yes requires the user to send
notifications to all associated vendors
before the Goodnight process can be
completed.
l No allows the user to complete the
Goodnight process without sending
notifications to all associated vendors.
(Default setting.)
Use Approx Out Final Function in Work Orders? (Requires ScheduLINK.) Determines whether
the original Arrpox Out value is retained after
Goodnighting a work order.
l Yes retains the original Approx Out value
on the ScheduLINK Work Order dialog.
l No sets the Approx Out value on the
ScheduLINK Work Order dialog to zero.
(Default.)
Note: Using the Approx Out Final feature
requires dialog changes to the
ScheduLINK Work Order dialogs.
The existing function field “Approx Out
Duration” must be changed to the
function field “Approx Out Final
Duration”.
On the Event Times form, the existing
field “Approx Out Duration” must be
changed to the field “Approx Out Final
Duration”.

Option Description
Action when On-Air Time modified via On-Air Determines the changes made to the Work
function Order times when the user clicks the On Air
button in Operations Manager and modifies
the time using the “Change On Air Time”
command.
l Modify On-Air Only changes the On-Air
time only.
l On-Air with Hold changes the On-Air
time and sets the Hold for Review flag.
(Default setting.)
l Modify Billable changes the Billable
time only.
l Modify Billable with Hold changes the
Billable time and sets the Hold for
Review flag.
Work Order Status for Contract Early Termination Determines the status that must be assigned
to a work order before the work order is
removed from the affected work order list.
This list is generated when a contract is
terminated early and work orders would be
abandoned. Refer to Terminating a Contract
Early in the Contract Manager chapter of the
Apply Vendor Costs without Creation Of Determines whether vendor external costs
Payable/PO? can be applied to vendor invoices or external
cost allocations without creating a purchase
order.
l Yes allows the system to apply vendor
invoices or external cost allocations
without creating a purchase order.
l No does not allow the system to apply
vendor invoices or external cost
allocations without creating a purchase
order. (Default.)
Note: The External Cost option on the
relevant resource must be selected
(checked). Refer to General
Resource – Accounting for more
information.
Consider Mandatory Fields Reserved.

Option Description
Early Goodnight Billing Method Determines the billing method for bookings
where the Goodnight command was issued
before the original end of booking was
reached.
l Entire Firm Booked Portion bills the
entire booked portion of the work order
even when the work order is goodnighted
early.
l Percentage for Unused creates two
billing entries, one for used time and
another for unused time. The price for the
unused portion is calculated as a
percentage of the applicable rate card
pricing using the percentage value set in
the system preference Early Goodnight
Billing Percentage Applied to Unused
Time (if enabled).
l Minimum Increment When the
Goodnight Time entered in the Goodnight
dialog is earlier than the Approx Out
Time, then the Goodnight Time will set
the Quantity Used value and the Billable
Quantity will be determined by the
minimum increment setting for the
resource. Refer to Minimum Increment
(Increment Unit) found on the Other tab in
room and resource setup dialogs.
Early Goodnight Billing Percentage Applied to Determines the percentage of the applicable
Unused Time (if enabled) rate card pricing that is applied to unused
time. The default is 100%.
This System Preference is used only when
the associated system preference Early
Goodnight Billing Method (or client-level
override Early Goodnight Billing Method) is
set to Percentage for Unused.

Option Description
Calculate Credit Limit Including WorkOrders starting Determines the status level at (or above)
From: which the total price of a work order is
deducted from the client’s available credit, as
described in Credit Limit.
levels.
l <none> deducts the price of any work
order from the client’s available credit.
(Default.)
For example, select First Hold to allow a
client to book any amount of work at the
Request, Fourth Hold, Third Hold, or Second
Hold status levels, but limit the amount of
work at higher status levels based on the
credit limit.
Check Credit Limit upon reaching the following Determines the lowest status level at which
Status: the system compares the price of the work
order to the client’s available credit.
levels. The system checks the client’s
available credit when the work order is
set to the specified status. (Default is
Confirmed.)
l <none> does not check work orders
against the available credit.
Display all Cat/Types for selected Resources in Determines which bookings are displayed for
Extended Personnel Views? resources that are assigned to multiple
category/types. For example, a personnel
resource can be a Staff Editor (Editor/Staff)
and a Freelance Colorist (Colorist/Staff). If
the resource is booked into two work orders in
a day, four entries for that resource will show
in the Extended Personnel View (one for each
category/type for each day).
l Yes displays entries for all
category/types assigned to the resource.
l No displays only one entry for each
This setting controls the display on the
Personnel Extended View, Activity by
Category, and Monthly Calendar dialogs.

Option Description
Disregard Booking Conflicts on Zero Duration Work Determines whether the system generates
Orders conflict warnings when a booking conflicts
with a zero-duration work order. Refer to
Menus and Toolbars in the Project Manager
l Yes will disregard conflicts with zero
duration work orders.
l No will display a conflict warning when a
booking conflicts with a zero duration
work order. (Default.)
Apply Work Order Items Sort Order to Display View Determines whether the system uses the
Work Order Items Sort Order setting (from the
System Preferences Main tab) to sort the
display view.
Respect Cat/Type resource groups within Determines if the existing Default Resource
compatibility Group defined in the Category or Type setup
is used when displaying a Compatible
Resource list.
l Yes displays the existing Default
Resource Group.
l No does not display the existing Default
Resource Group. (Default.)

Option Description
Display Band Segments with same bandwidth, but Determines whether the ScheduLINK
different Sub Bands, simultaneously on scheduling calendar displays calendar rows for all
calendar views? segments of the selected bandwidth at the
same time, or only the segments that belong
to the selected bandwidth + sub-band, when
more than one sub-band in a BandPlan
contains segments of the same bandwidth.
l Yes lists all segments of the selected
bandwidth in the same BandPlan on the
scheduling calendar, even if they belong
to separate sub-bands.
l No lists only segments in the parent sub-
band of the selected bandwidth on the
scheduling calendar. (Default.)
Note: Though users will see both sets of
Band Segments when this preference
is set to Yes, they will only be able to
book on the Band Segments from the
Sub Band currently displayed in the
Bandwidth Selector. Being able to
access both sets of Band Segments
(same bandwidth from different Sub
Bands) requires entry of a Sub Band
Description. Otherwise users cannot
edit work orders for the second Sub
Band of same bandwidth. (The Sub
Band Description control may need to
be added to the Band Extension dialog
using the Developers Toolkit.)
Activity hatch pattern level Specifies the level of background hatching for
activity booking blocks. Select a percentage
from 5 to 100. Default is 20.
Reset Event Status on WO Activity copy to: Specifies the work order activity status that is
applied when an event is copied.
l N/A copies the current event status of
the activity. No changes are made.
(Default.)
l [event status] applies the selected event
status to the copy of the event. For
example, if Rejected is selected for this
system preference and the original event
status was set to Approved, the status of
the copied work order is changed to
Rejected.

Option Description
Allow Work Order to be GoodNighted multiple times? Specifies whether the Goodnight command in
ScheduLINK can be issued in a work order
more than once.
l Yes allows the Goodnight command in
ScheduLINK to be issued in a work order
more than once.
l No does not allow the Goodnight
command to be issued more than once.
(Default.)
Remove Ack’d bookings for all users from Determines whether work order events that
Operation Manager (Events)? have been acknowledged in Operations
Manager (Events) are cleared from the Action
Pane of all users (not just the user who
acknowledged the event).
l Yes clears acknowledged events from
the Events screen of all users.
l No clears acknowledged events only
from the Events screen of the user who
acknowledged the event. (Default.)
Remove Ack’d bookings for all users from Determines whether work order events that
Operation Manager (WO)? have been acknowledged in Operations
Manager (WO) are cleared from the Action
Pane of all users (not just the user who
acknowledged the event).
l Yes clears acknowledged events from
the WO screen of all users.
l No clears acknowledged events only
from the WO screen of the user who
acknowledged the event. (Default.)
Allow Multi Edit Determines whether multiple work orders can
be opened and edited from the work order
query Results tab.
l Yes allows the user to open and edit
multiple work orders listed in the work
order query Results tab.
l No does not allow opening of multiple
work orders. (Default.)
Note: Modifications made to open work
orders do not affect the work order
query results. After making changes to
work orders run the query again to view
the latest details.

Availability Calculation Options

Table 79. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Availability Calculation Options
Option Description
Requirement Search Depth Determines the level of requirement checking for resources.
l 0 (S4 Compatibility) No checking. (Default)
l 1 Level checks for conflicts using one resource category level. If
a resource is assigned to Category A and Category B and the
system tries to fill a requirement for Category A with that
resource, a conflict occurs if that resource is already booked. No
checking occurs at Category B level.
l 2 Levels checks for conflicts using two resource categories. If a
resource is assigned to Category A and Category B and the
system tries to fill a requirement for Category B with that
resource, a conflict occurs if that resource is already booked.
Checking occurs at both Category A and Category B levels.
Time Window Padding Determines the percentage used to calculate how wide the window of
(Percent) interest for bookings will be. For example, when booking a one hour
work order and entering the following values:
l 100 = a one hour window
l 200 = a two hour window
l 500 = a five hour window (Default)
Booking Increment Determines where, within a possible booking window for a smart work
order, the work order can be started.
l Range is 0–60.
Example: 0=anywhere (1:01 p.m.)
30=on the nearest half hour (1:30 p.m.)
60=on the nearest hour (2 p.m.)
Ignore Impossible Determines whether the capacity checking logic should ignore any
Bookings? portion of scheduled bookings that fall outside base availability.
l Yes ignores conflicts for these bookings and allows them to be
scheduled.
l No displays a conflict and does not allow the booking to be
scheduled. (Default.)

Portal Options
Table 80. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Portal Options
Option Description
Max Extension Search Determines the time range for each column in the Alternate Booking
(minutes) Options dialog.
Example: Setting the value to 30 would give a 30-minute time range for
each column.
Search Matrix Size Determines the number of columns before and after the requested time
(columns) range in the Alternate Booking Options dialog. A value of 3 would produce
a dialog similar to the one shown below.
Book Now Pause Determines the amount of time (in minutes) that is added to the start and
Duration (in minutes) end time of a portal booking (from the current time) . For example, if this
value is set to 5 and the user creates a booking at 11:44, then the start
time of the booking will be 11:49.
Enter a pause duration in minutes. Default is 1.
Connector Options
(Requires ScheduALL Connector.)

Table 81. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Connector Options
Option Description
Status for Publisher- Determines the status of a work order created by a publisher on a
Originated Orders subscriber’s system.
l Confirmed
l Unconfirmed
l First Hold
l Second Hold
l Third Hold
l Fourth Hold
l Completed
l Request (Default)
Work Order type for Determines the type of work order when a subscriber creates a work
Subscriber-Originated order on a publisher’s system.
Orders
l ScheduALL
l ScheduLINK
l ScheduLINK Alternate
Propagate Extended Price Determines whether pricing information is displayed to subscribers
To Subscribers? and shown on the History tab of a work order.
l Yes displays pricing information to subscribers and is shown on
the History tab of a work order. (Default.)
l No does not display pricing information to subscribers.
Default External State for ... Determines the default external availability state of activity blocks for
Activity published resources.
Vacation l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
External and Internal availability. (Default.)
l Internal Only designates the activity block for the activity as
Internal.
Sick Day l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
Internal.
Comp Day l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
Internal.
Day Off l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
Internal.

Table 81. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Connector Options (continued)
Option Description
Shift l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
Internal.
l External Only designates the activity block for the activity as
External.
Out of Service l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
External and Internal availability.
Maintenance l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
Internal.
Other l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
Internal.
External.
Day in Lieu l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
Internal.
Sabbatical l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
Internal.
Available Block l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
Internal.
External.
Other Paid Activity 1 l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
through 3 External and Internal availability. (Default.)
Internal.
Other Non Paid Activity 1 l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
through 3 External and Internal availability. (Default.)
Internal.

Option Description
Company Holiday l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
Internal.
Ownership Transfer Reserved.
Antenna Move l Both designates the activity block for the activity as both
External and Internal availability.
Non-Conflicting Activity l Internal Only designates the activity block for the activity as
Internal.
Display Availability of Determines how a work order booked by a publisher on his system is
[status] to Connections as shown on a subscriber’s system.
New
l Available – Allows a subscriber to book in the publisher’s work
Fourth Hold order block.
Third Hold l Not Available – Does not allow a subscriber to book in the
Second Hold publisher’s work order block.
First Hold l Possibly Available – Displays a shaded area on the subscriber’s
Unconfirmed calendar. Permission must be obtained from the publisher for the
subscriber to book.
Confirmed
For example, a publisher might set this system preference as follows:
Completed
Reconciled l Unconfirmed status to Available
l Confirmed status to Not Available.
Then the publisher books a two-hour work order in room Edit 1 and
sets the status to Unconfirmed. The publisher is not certain at this
time that the room will be needed. At this point a subscriber could book
Edit 1 in that two-hour work order. However, if the publisher changes
the work order status to Confirmed (before the subscriber tries to
book), the display on the subscriber’s system changes to Not
Available based on the system preference. The subscriber will not be
allowed to book in the work order.
Default Parent Profile for Determines the user group profile that is assigned when a new user
Users account is created when a subscriber requests an account from a
publisher.
l (blank) – no parent group profile is assigned.
l [group name] – assigns the selected parent group profile.

Option Description
Resource options when Determines how a resource is created on the subscriber’s system
subscribing to General when subscribing to a General or Room resource.
Resource or Room
l Preserve Published Resource – when subscribing to a General
or Room resource that resource will be added to the subscriber’s
system with the same properties as on the publisher’s system.
l Create As General Resource – when subscribing to a Room
resource that resource will be added to the subscriber’s system
as a General resource.
l Create As Room – when subscribing to a General resource that
resource will be added to the subscriber’s system as a Room
resource.
Display View to override Determines the display view to be used to display booking information
Joinable WO Information for each joinable booking.
l <none> – Does not replace work order information with a display
block.
l <display view> – Replaces work order information with the
selected display block.
Interop Options
Table 82. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Interop Options
Option Description
Statuses of Interest: Determines which work order statuses will be considered when
setting a workflow status to Ready based on Chorus triggers. Click
the value column and select the desired status(es) and click OK.
Refer to the Chorus Setup and Configuration Guide.
Workflow Options
Table 83. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Workflow Options
Option Description
Workflow State: Failed Determines the work order status that will cause the workflow state to
be changed to Failed. Select a work order status from the Value list.
Note: The values in this list are taken from the labels described in
Work Order Status and Auxiliary Status. To define additional
values for this list, enter values for Cancelled Aux. Status 1–5
in the Work Order Status section of the General tab of System
Preferences.
Workflow State: Ready Determines the work order status that will cause the workflow state to
be changed to Ready. Select a work order status from the Value list.
Note: The values in this list are taken from the labels described in
Work Order Status and Auxiliary Status. To define additional
values for this list, enter values for Confirmed Aux. Status 1–5
in the Work Order Status section of the General tab of System
Preferences.

Accounting Options
Table 84. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Accounting Options
Option Description
Tax Distribution for Choose the system default tax distribution method for payments. You
Payments can choose other options when posting payments.
l Prorate applies a proportional percentage of payments to the tax
total and invoice subtotal. (Default.)
l Pay Taxes First applies payments to the tax total first; remaining
funds are applied to the invoice subtotal.
l Pay Taxes Last applies payments to the invoice subtotal first;
remaining funds are applied to the tax total.
l Do Not Apply does not apply any payments to the tax total.
Tax Distribution for Credits Choose the system default tax distribution method for credits.
l Prorate applies a proportional percentage of credits to the tax
total and invoice subtotal. (Default.)
l Pay Taxes First applies credits to the tax total first; remaining
funds are applied to the invoice subtotal.
l Pay Taxes Last applies credits to the invoice subtotal first;
l Do Not Apply does not apply any credits to the tax total.
Tax Distribution for Debit Choose the system default tax distribution method for debit memos.
Memos
l Prorate applies a proportional percentage of debit memos to the
tax total and invoice subtotal. (Default.)
l Pay Taxes First applies debit memos to the tax total first;
remaining funds are applied to the invoice subtotal.
l Pay Taxes Last applies debit memos to the invoice subtotal first;
l Do Not Apply does not apply any debit memos to the tax total.
Assign Invoice Number to Determines if the system assigns the next invoice number in the
Credit Notes master invoice counter to a credit note. Assigning an invoice number
also makes the transaction available to the Solomon Accounting
Interface. Refer to External Accounting Systems in the Billing and
Receivables chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide or the
Solomon Accounting Interface document for more information.
l Yes assigns the next invoice number. (Default.)
l No does not assign an invoice number.

Table 84. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Accounting Options (continued)
Option Description
Unassigned Credits master invoice counter to an unassigned credit. Assigning an invoice
number also makes the transaction available to the Solomon
Accounting Interface. Refer to External Accounting Systems in the
Billing and Receivables chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide or
the Solomon Accounting Interface document for more information.
Unassigned Payments master invoice counter to an unassigned payment. Assigning an
invoice number also makes the transaction available to the Solomon
accounting interface. Refer to External Accounting Systems in the
Billing and Receivables chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide or
the Solomon Accounting Interface document for more information.
Create Credit Note when Determines if the system automatically creates a credit note when
Reversing Invoices reversing an invoice transaction.
l Yes automatically creates a credit note. (Default.)
l No does not create a credit note.
Make A/R Transactions Determines at what point a transaction is marked as ready for export
available to Solomon upon to an external file used by the Solomon accounting interface.
l Not Applicable does not automatically make transactions
available to the Solomon import; the user must manually flag
transactions using the Available A/R Transactions dialog.
l Transaction Creation makes transactions available to the
Solomon import when the invoice is generated.
l Closing Period makes transactions available to the Solomon
import when the accounting period is closed.
Rounding Precision when Determines the number of decimal places displayed for discounts.
Applying Discounts
(decimals) l Options include 0–5 decimal places.
Reconcile Vendor Invoice Determines the tolerance factor to be used when reconciling. When
Exchange Tolerance the invoice is finished and the 'Reconciled' state is being considered it
will use this as a tolerance factor when comparing the sum of
allocated items against the Invoice total. If the absolute value of
VINVOICE.NET_TOT - (SUM(VINCTLG.NET_TOT)) is less than or
equal to the tolerance value then the invoice will be 'Reconciled'.
Default value is 0.00.

Table 84. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Accounting Options (continued)
Option Description
Allow simultaneous invoice Determines if more than one user can generate invoices at the same
generation by multiple time.
users
l Yes allows more than one user can generate invoices at the same
time.
l No does not allow more than one user can generate invoices at
the same time. (Default.)
Replace Resource Price Determines the level of price protection when a subscribed resource is
Tolerance (%) replaced with another resource. 0% means no tolerance and 100% is
the equivalent of disabling this protection
Examples:
l Tolerance 0%, current booking is $100. The incoming booking
must be at least $100.
must be at least $80.
can be $0, price protection is not enforced.
Percentage (0-100) Default value is 100.
Credit Limit
Table 85. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Credit Limit Options
Option Description
Allow Wk Orders to be Determines if the system allows a work order to be set to the
Completed/Reconciled Completed or Reconciled status levels when the work order price
even if exceeding Credit exceeds the client’s available credit.
Limit
l Yes allows the user to set the status to Completed or Reconciled,
regardless of the client’s available credit.
l No prevents the user from setting the status to Completed or
Reconciled. The work order cannot be invoiced. (Default.)
Consider Unbilled Deposit Determines if the system deducts deposit requests that have not yet
Requests due to be been invoiced from the client’s available credit, when the Due Date
invoiced within the next: falls within the specified period.
l <none> ignores all unbilled deposit requests for the purpose of
determining the client’s unpaid credit amount.
l x days (from 1 day to 365 days) deducts the sum of all deposit
requests that have not been billed but have a Due Date within the
specified period. (Default is 90 days.)

Table 85. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Credit Limit Options (continued)
Option Description
Consider Unassigned Determines if the system adds the sum of all Unassigned Credits to
Credits when calculating the client’s available credit.
Available Credit.
l Yes adds the sum of any Unassigned Credits to the client’s
available credit. (Default.)
l No ignores Unsigned Credits when determining the client’s
available credit. (The amount of the credit will be added to the
available credit once it is applied to a billed item.)
Do not check Credit Limit Determines the period into the future after which booking a work order
when booking a Wk Order does not check the client’s available credit limit.
into the Future.
l <none> includes all future work orders for the purpose of
l x days (from 1 day to 365 days) allows the user to book a work
order after the specified period without checking the client’s
available credit limit. (Default is 120 days.)
For example, selecting 120 days allows a user to book a work order
more than four months into the future, whether or not the client has
sufficient available credit.
When calculating Available Determines the period into the future after which the price of a work
Credit, ignore future Wk order is not deducted from the client’s available credit.
Orders beyond:
l <none> includes all future work orders for the purpose of
l x days (from 1 day to 365 days) ignores work orders beyond the
selected number of days for the purpose of determining the
client’s unpaid credit amount. (Default is 30 days.)
Warn if within a percentage Determines the relative value at which the system displays a credit
of Available Credit Limit (0 warning, based on the base available credit and the available credit
to disable) remaining. For example, if a client’s Available Credit is $100,000, and
the percentage is set to 10, the system generates a warning when the
client’s remaining available credit drops below $10,000 (i.e. all billable
items exceed $90,000).
l 0 does not generate any warning before the client exceeds the
available credit limit.
l Any number from 1 to 100 generates a warning when the
remaining credit drops below the specified percentage of the base
available credit. (Default is 10.)
Credit Limit Exceeded The text to display when the Warn if within a percentage of
warning message insert Available Credit Limit (0 to disable) credit limit warning is triggered.
Enter the text to display.

Active Directory
Table 86. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Active Directory Options
Option Description
Enable Active Directory Determines whether Active Directory user authentication occurs.
Authentication
l Yes allows Active Directory authentication.
l No does not allow Active Directory authentication. (Default.)
Domain Controller Enter the name of the network path of the Active Directory Domain
Services machine.
Domain User Group Enter the name(s) of the Active Directory Group to define which users
can access ScheduALL. For multiple values, the user can use a
comma or semicolon to separate the group names. For ex.,
"SCAusers; Editors;Supervisors”.
Automatically create Determines if the system automatically create a new ScheduALL user
ScheduALL Account account for valid Active Directory users upon first login.
upon Login?
l Yes automatically creates a new user record.
l No does not automatically create a new user record . (Default.)
When set to Yes the Template User Account for Creating New Users
setting is required.
Template User Account Determines the Member ID of an existing user that should be copied
for Creating New Users when new Active Directory users are created. If Automatically create
ScheduALL Account upon Login? is set to Yes, this is a required field.
Email
System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Email Options
These settings allow the supervisor to specify the mail server and account information used to send
e-mail messages. Refer to E-mail Profile in System Preferences.
Note: The Email preferences are not used by the Notification Manager Service. The e-mail server
address used by the Notification Manager service is located in the
SchedEmailManager.exe.config file. Notification Manager system preferences are configured
as described in Notification Manager.
NMS
Requires the NMS module.
Table 87. System Preferences – General, System Options tab, NMS Options
Option Description
Email User Name Determines the options used to connect to an external Network
Email Password Management System (NMS). Refer to the ScheduALL Chorus
Interface User Name documents for more information.
Interface Password
Notification Manager
Requires the Notification Manager module.
Note: As of version 5.00 Notification Manager configuration information is located in the Installation
Guide and Revision History document.

Table 88. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Notification Manager Options
Option Description
Email User Name Determines the e-mail information used by the ScheduALL
Email Password Notification Manager service.
Consolidate mail Setting to determine whether the Notification Manager service
based on Recipient combines messages that have the exact same recipient and are
and Work Order related to the same work order.
l Yes attempts to combine a message with a previous message if
both messages are for the same work order and the Recipient
field is exactly the same.
l No sends one message for each trigger type and recipient.
(Default)
Password Options
Table 89. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Password Options
Option Description
Allow some or all of User Determines if character strings from the user's
Name in Password
user name can be used in the user's password.
l Yes allows character strings from the user's user name to be
used in the user's password. (Default.)
l No does not allow character strings from the user's user name to
be used in the user's password.
l Elective
Minimum Length for User Determines the minimum number of characters, from 1 to 8, for a user
Password password. The default value is 3.
Password Expiration Term Determines the number of days, from 0 to 1,999,999,999, after which
(in Days) the user is forced to change their password. The default value is 0
(password does not expire).
The system starts warning the user that the password will expire
several days before the expiration date. If the password expires, the
user is allowed to log on with the old password but is forced to
immediately change the password.
Note: Changing the existing setting from 0 to any other value
automatically prompts all users, including accounts that were
created before the setting was changed, to change their
password after the specified duration.
Can Reuse the same Determines whether the user can enter any password used within the
Password within a 12 month past year when changing the password.
period
l Yes allows the user to re-enter the current password, or a different
but recent password, as a new password. (Default.)
l No requires the user to create a password unique from any
password applied to that login account within the past 12 months.

Table 89. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Password Options (continued)
Option Description
Keep Password History up Determines the number of previous passwords, from 0 to 20, kept by
to the system.
l 0 allows the user to re-enter the current password, or a different
but recent password, as a new password. (Default.)
l Any number greater than 0 requires the user to create a
password unique from any of the specified number of previous
passwords.
Force User to Change Determines whether the user is forced to change their password after
Password after either the first login (for a new user account created by an
Administrator Change administrator) or after the supervisor has changed or reset the user’s
password.
l No allows the user to keep the existing password assigned by the
administrator. (Default.)
l Yes requires the user to select a new password that is not known
by the administrator.
Require at least 1 Upper Determines whether the user must use at least one capitalized letter in
Case Letter in Password their password.
l Yes requires the user to use at least one capitalized letter.
l No does not require a capital letter. (Default.)
l Elective allows the rule to be used when the Minimum number
of Elective 'in Password' Rules option is set to a number
greater than 0.
Require at least 1 Determines whether the user must use at least one non-capitalized
LowerCase Letter in letter in their password.
Password
l Yes requires the user to use at least one non-capitalized letter.
l No does not require a non-capital letter. (Default.)
greater than 0.
Require at least 1 Determines whether the user must use at least one number or symbol
Non-Alpha Character in their password.
(symbol) in Password
l No allows the password to contain all alphabetic characters (a-z
and A-Z). (Default.)
l Yes requires the user to include at least one number (0-9) or
special character in addition to any alphabetic characters.
greater than 0.

Option Description
Require at least 1 Digit Determines whether the user must use at least one number in their
(0-9) in Password password.
l Yes requires the user to use at least one number.
l No does not require at least one number. (Default.)
greater than 0.
Allow Consecutive Determines whether the user can use the same character as the one
Characters in Password that precedes it.
l No requires each character to be different from the one that
preceded it, such as abc123. (Default.)
l Yes allows any character to be the same as the one that preceded
it, such as aabb11.
Minimum number of Determines the number of "in Password" rules that must be passed
Elective 'in Password' when the user's password is changed. If the value is set to 3, then any
Rules three of the in Password rules that are set to Elective must be met.
Example: 1 Upper Case, 1 Lower Case, and 1 Digit are all set to
Elective. If this value is set to two, then at least two of those rules
must be satisfied.
Days without login to set Determine if the system automatically sets the Account Status to
account to Inactive (0 to InActive when that account that has not successfully logged in within
ignore) the specified number of days.
l Any number greater than 0 blocks a login attempt if the number of
days since the last successful login is greater than the specified
number.
l 0 allows the user to log on regardless of the number of days since
the last successful login.

Option Description
Number of Failed Login Determines the number of times a user can enter an invalid password
Attempts to Lock out a before the user’s account is suspended.
User Account
l Any number greater than 0 suspends the user’s account if the
user enters an incorrect Password the specified number of times.
If the Time period (minutes) allowed for failed login attempts
system preference is also set to some number other than 0, the
account is suspended only if the user exceeds this number within
the specified time period.
l 0 allows the user to enter any number of incorrect passwords, and
does not automatically suspend the user’s account. (Default.)
Note: This permission affects the ScheduALL for Windows
applications, and all ScheduALL components that use the
Common Technical Services (CTS) service, such as
ScheduALL Connector. It does not affect legacy ScheduALL
services, Web services, or Web applications built on the
Microsoft .NET framework.
Time period (minutes) Determines the period of time within which failed attempts are counted
allowed for failed login against the Number of Failed Login Attempts to Disable a User
attempts Account setting.
l Any number greater than 0 resets the number of failed attempts
to 1 after the specified number of minutes if the user has not
exceeded the Number of Failed Login Attempts within the
specified duration. (The user’s account is suspended if the user
exceeds the specified Number of Failed Login Attempts within
the specified duration.)
l 0 suspends the user’s account if the user enters an incorrect
password a number of times equal to the Number of Failed
Login Attempts to Disable a User Account setting,
irrespective of any delay between attempts. (Default.)
Note: This permission affects the ScheduALL for Windows
applications, and all ScheduALL components that use the
Common Technical Services (CTS) service, such as
ScheduALL Connector. It does not affect legacy ScheduALL
services, Web services, or Web applications built on the
Microsoft .NET framework.

Option Description
Automatically clear Locked Determines the amount of time, in minutes, after which a suspended
Out status on user user can again log into the system.
accounts after: (minutes)
l Any number greater than 0 clears the user account lock out
after the number of minutes entered. For example, if the number
entered is 30, then a suspended user can log on again 30 minutes
after the lock out occurred.
l 0 does not automatically clear the user lock out. (Default.)
Send common response for Determines whether a single generic response is displayed if the user
invalid User Name or name or password is entered incorrectly.
Password
l Yes displays the message “Invalid User Name or Password”
when the user enters an incorrect user name or enters an
incorrect password. (Default.)
l No displays the message “Invalid User Name” when the user
enters an incorrect user name and displays the message “Invalid
Password” when the user enters an incorrect password.
PIN Password Options

Table 90. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, PIN Password Options
Option Description
Minimum Length for User Determines the lowest number of digits allowed in a PIN code.
PIN
l Any number requires the user to enter the specified number of
digits (or more) as a PIN code.
PIN Expiration Term (in Determines the number of days after which the user is forced to
Days) change their PIN code. The default value is 0 (PIN does not expire).
The system warns the user that the password will expire several days
before the expiration date. If the password expires, the user is allowed
to log on with the old password but is forced to immediately change
the password.
Can Reuse the same PIN Determines whether a user is allowed to enter the same PIN code as a
within a 12 month period previous PIN value used within the past year.
l Yes allows the user to use the same PIN code more than once in
a 12-month period.
l No requires the user to enter a PIN code different from any code
used within the past 12 months.
Keep PIN History up to Determines the number of previous PIN codes, from 0 to 20, kept by
the system.
l 0 allows the user to re-enter the current PIN code, or a different
but recent PIN code, as a new PIN code. (Default.)
l Any number greater than 0 requires the user to create a PIN
code unique from any of the specified number of previous PIN
codes.

Table 90. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, PIN Password Options (continued)
Option Description
Force User to Change PIN Determines whether the user is forced to change their password after
after Administrator Change either the first login (for a new user account created by an
administrator) or after the supervisor has changed or reset the user’s
password.
l No allows the user to keep the existing password assigned by the
administrator. (Default.)
l Yes requires the user to select a new password that is not known
by the administrator.
Allow Consecutive Determines whether the user can use the same character more than
Characters in PIN once in a string.
l No requires each character to be different from the one that
preceded it, such as abc123. (Default.)
l Yes allows each character to be the same as the one that
preceded it, such as aabb11.

Time Capture/Smart Time Options

Requires the Time Capture and/or Smart Time modules.
Table 91. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Time Capture/Smart Time Options
Option Description
Event Default Event Status (Requires the Time Capture module.) Determines the Status assigned
to a new activity event created in Time Capture.
Events: l None does not set the default event status. (Default.)
Vacation l Submitted sets the default event status to Submitted.
Sick Day l Approved sets the default event status to Approved.
Comp Day Note: These preferences only apply to events created in the Time
Day Off Capture module and in the ScheduALL WebAppSmart Time
Shift tab, and do not apply to activities created directly on the
Other ScheduALL scheduling calendar.
Day in Lieu Note: Settings applied to Sick Day and Day Off are also applied to
Available Block Unpaid Sick Day and Unpaid Day Off activities.
Sabbatical Default
Other Paid Activity 1
Other Non Paid Activity 1
Company Holiday
Move Event Status to Determines whether the status of an event is automatically changed
Modified on time change in to Modified when the time of the event is changed.
Operator Portal?
l Yes automatically changes the event status in Operator Portal to
Modified on time change.
l No does not change the event status on time change. (Default.)

Account Code Defaults

Requires the Pay Translator module.
Table 92. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, Account Code Default Options
Option Description
Event Default Account Code Determines the Account Code assigned to a personnel activity
type.
Activity: Click Browse [...] in the Value field to select the default account
Booking code to associate with the activity type.
Comp Day
Company Holiday
Day Off
Day in Lieu
Shift
Vacation
Available Block
Maint.
Other
Out of Service
Sick Day
Non-Conflicting Activity
Sabbatical
SMS
Table 93. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, SMS Options
Option Description
Primary Gateway Login Determines the user login name required to access the primary SMS
gateway. Enter the login name.
Primary Gateway Password Determines the login password required to access the primary SMS
gateway. Enter the user password.

Table 93. System Preferences – General, System Options Tab, SMS Options (continued)
Option Description
Failover Gateway Login Determines the user login name required to access the failover SMS
gateway. Enter the login name.
The system will attempt to send the SMS message using the primary
gateway for the number of attempts specified in the configuration file.
If the system is unable to deliver the message after that number of
attempts, the Failover Gateway will be used. If the message still
cannot be delivered after the specified number of attempts, the
system returns a message stating that the message is undeliverable.
Failover Gateway Password Determines the login password required to access the failover SMS
gateway. Enter the user password.
Display View for Message Determines the display view that will be used from the body of the
Body SMS message. Refer to Display View Setup for more information
about display views.
Max Message Length Determines the maximum length permitted for SMS messages.
(0=unlimited)
Ingest
Requires the Ingest module.
Table 94. System Preferences – System Options Tab, Ingest Options
Option Description
URL Defines the URL used to connect ScheduALL with an external
system.
Login Required Defines whether login credentials are required to connect ScheduALL
with an external system.
l Yes requires login credentials to log on to an external system.
l No does not require login credentials to log on to an external
system. (Default.)
UserName Defines the user name used to connect ScheduALL with an external
system.
Password Defines the password used to connect ScheduALL with an external
system.
Content Verification System

Requires the Media Manager module.
Table 95. System Preferences – System Options Tab, Content Verification System Options
Option Description
UserName Defines the user name used to connect ScheduALL with an external
system.
Password Defines the password used to connect ScheduALL with an external
system.

Pay Translator/Working Time Manager

Requires the Pay Translator/Working Time Manager module.
Table 96. System Preferences – System Options Tab, Pay Translator/Working Time Manager Options
Option Description
Suppress Compensation Determines whether compensation factors are displayed in the
Factors in Cost Details standard cost details browser. This option applies to Pay Translator.
l Yes does not display compensation factors assigned to an event
in the standard cost details browser.
l No displays compensation factors in the standard cost details
browser. (Default.)
Pay Translator Limits Pay Determines the upper limit external pay status level. Events above
Status to: this level are not processed. This option applies to Pay Translator.
Select a status or select <None> (default) to allow any status.
Prevent Pay Translation Sets a specific external pay status level that prevents pay translation
Status level: when the work order event has been reconciled and as is at this level.
This option applies to Pay Translator.
Select a status or select <None> (default) to allow all statuses.
Pay Translation Interpreted Sets a lower limit external pay status level. Events are not translated
level: when the status is set below this level. This option applies to Pay
Translator.
Roster Activity Type: Assigns a specific activity type that is used to define a roster period.
Other activities outside of the roster may then have a rule applied
against them. This option applies to Pay Translator.
Overlap Account Code When a work order event overlaps a shift activity type event, the time
period segment in the shift is considered an overlap unpaid time period
and that segment is assigned this account code. This option applies to
Pay Translator.
Click the input field and click the [...] button to select an account code,
or click clear ( ) to remove the current code. (Default is blank/empty.)
Member Activities For Work This option applies to Working Time Manager and requires the
Day Working Time Manager module.
Determines which activities can be used in a work day. Click Click to
modify and select (check) each activity to add to the work day. Click
OK.

Table 96. System Preferences – System Options Tab, Pay Translator/Working Time Manager Options
(continued)
Option Description
Exclude WO Cancelled This option applies to Working Time Manager and requires the
events from Work Day? Working Time Manager module.
Determines if a work order with a status of Cancelled is included as
part of a work day.
l Yes does not include events that have a canceled state (events in
the work order can also be canceled).
l No includes canceled events in the work day if the booking
activity has been selected as a member of the work day.
Work Day Filtering This option applies to Working Time Manager and requires the
Condition On Explicit Working Time Manager module.
Confirmed?
Determines whether the system automatically sets the Conditional
filtering flag in the shift work dialog to Yes when the related work order
is set to Explicit Confirmation=Yes.
l Yes automatically sets the Conditional filtering flag in the shift
work dialog to Yes when the related work order is set to Explicit
Confirmation=Yes.
l No does not sets the Conditional filtering flag in the shift work
dialog to Yes, or clears the flag if it is already set to Yes, when the
related work order is set to Explicit Confirmation=Yes. (Default.)
Use Conditional Filtering On This option applies to Working Time Manager and requires the
Work Day Counters? Working Time Manager module.
Determines if the count of work shifts includes only those shifts where
the Conditional filtering flag in a rule set is set to Yes.
l Yes counts only those work shifts where the conditional filtering
flag is set to Yes.
l No does not consider the conditional filtering flag when counting
work shifts. (Default.)
Start of Fiscal Year A one year period that starts on a Day and Month. Click the Start of
Fiscal Year field. The calendar displays. Select the day and month for
the start of a fiscal year that repeats. The year is not used in calendar
selection. For example, if you select 06/01/2001, only 06/01 is
displayed in the field. The start of the fiscal year is set to June 1.

iCalendar Options
Table 97. System Preferences – System Options Tab, iCalendar Options
Option Description
Display Block for Work Determines the information that will be displayed in the work order
Order Subject Subject on a web calendar.
Select a display block or select <None> (default).
Order Location Location on a web calendar.
Order Notes Notes on a web calendar.
Display Block for Activity Determines the information that will be displayed in the activity
Subject Subject on a web calendar.
Display Block for Activity Determines the information that will be displayed in the activity
Location Location on a web calendar.
Display Block for Activity Determines the information that will be displayed in the activity Notes
Notes on a web calendar.
Work Order Statuses to Determines which work orders are displayed by selecting work order
Include statuses. Only work orders at the selected statuses will be included.
Click the Value field (0 statuses is the default) to display the Work
Order Statuses to Include dialog. Select the desired statuses and click
OK.
Activities to Include Determines which activities are displayed by selecting activity types.
Only activities of the selected types will be included.
SSRS Info
Table 98. System Preferences – System Options Tab, SSRS Info
Option Description
User Name Enter the user's log on name for the report server. This name must
match the Windows User created for accessing the report server.
User Password Enter the user's password for the report server. This name must
match the Windows User created for accessing the report server.
Web Service URL Enter the address for the report server web service. This setting is
used to collect available reports and generating reports.
Using Auto-Select
In the System Options section, the new Let Auto-Select use random assignment pattern
preference determines how the system selects resources for automatic assignments:

l Yes selects a resource of the given category or category/type combination using an algorithm
that provides a random result from within the specified pool of resources. This prevents the
system from consistently selecting the same resource if that resource is available, and more
evenly distributes bookings among the specified pool of resources. For example, if a
category/type contains 10 resources and all 10 are available, each resource has an equal
chance of being selected.
l No selects a resource of the given category or category/type combination using the display
order of that category or category/type in the All Resources group. This checks the availability
of each resource in order and selects the first available resource, which effectively
consolidates bookings on the fewest possible resources. For example, if a category/type
contains 10 resources and all 10 are available, the same resource will always be selected (the
first resource in the All Resources group). (Default.)
If this preference is set to No, do the following to view and/or control the order of resource selection:
1. Log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor, or with access to the Resource Setup area
and the <All Resources> group.
2. From the File menu, select Setup and click Rooms & Resources.
3. Select the <All Resources> group.
4. Select the appropriate Category (such as Editors), and select the appropriate Type (such as
Staff).
5. In the Description column, resources will be selected from top to bottom.
l Drag a resource up in the list to increase the likelihood it will be auto-selected.
l Drag a resource down in the list to decrease the likelihood it will be auto-selected.
Note: Changing the order of resources in the <All Resources> list should not affect the display order
of resources on scheduling calendars that use specific resource groups, but may affect the
display order in other places that list resources without other sorting.
System Preferences: System Colors

Color is integral to the ScheduALL program. Colors indicate booking status, overtime hours, and
personnel activity type. The ScheduALL application uses the RGB (red, green, and blue) color model
to create new colors by combining the three base colors.
To change the system colors:
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, select System Preferences, and click
Colors. The Color Selection dialog displays.

Figure 163. Color Selection

2. Select an element from the Color Definition List. The Previous Color box displays the
element’s current color.
3. To change the color of the selected element, do one of the following:
l Drag the Red, Green, and Blue sliders to the right or left to increase or decrease the
proportions (from 0 to 255) of red, green or blue in the new color.
l Click and hold the Color Matcher button and drag the “eyedropper” pointer to a different part
of the display to select an existing color.
l Click Edit Selected Entry to select a new color or change the color definition. Refer to
Editing Color Entry Properties.
4. Click Apply Color Change to apply the new color to the selected element.
5. To return all color definitions to their default colors, click Reset All to Factory.
6. Click the close box to save changes and close the dialog. Changes are applied immediately. If
necessary, select and deselect a booking to force the system to refresh the display.
Editing Color Entry Properties
The Color Entry Properties dialog allows you to select a color for any of the items in the Color
Definition List.
Figure 164. Color Selection, Color Entry Properties

To set item colors using this dialog:
Colors. The Color Selection dialog displays.

2. Select an element from the Color Definition List. The Previous Color box displays the
element’s current color.
3. Click Edit Selected Entry to select a new color or change the color description. The Color
Entry Properties dialog displays.
lTo change the Description of the color, select the text and enter a new description.
l To select a new color, click Select Color [...] to display the Color palette. Click an existing
color or click Define Custom Colors. Click in the color picker box until the desired color is
displayed in the Color|Solid box. To save the color as a custom color, click Add to Custom
Colors. Click OK.
l To change the color of the selected item to its original color, click Reset to Factory.
l To change the color of the selected item to the original color used in version 4.78 or earlier of
ScheduALL click Reset to Classic.
4. Click OK to apply the new color to the selected element.
ScheduLINK Specific Colors
Colors specific to the ScheduLINK application include:
l Move determines the color of an unavailable block during which an antenna is moving from
one satellite or coordinate set to another. (Default value is R:10 G:48 B:44.)
l Client Provided Resource determines the color of a bar drawn underneath resource icons on
the Visual Path browser when a resource is flagged as “Client Provided” in Resource Setup.
(Default value is R:49 G:68 B:52.)
l Operations Manager Detail Window Background and Operations Manager Details
Window Text settings are no longer used. The background color is determined by the user
preference Operations Manager Background Color, and the text is automatically displayed in a
contrasting color.
l Operations Manager New Alert Background determines the background color of the New
Event Alert and New Work Order Alert buttons of Operations Manager when a new event or
work order is detected. (Default value is R:255 G:165 B:0.)
l Operations Manager New Alert Text determines the color of the text on the New Event Alert
and New Work Order Alert buttons of Operations Manager when a new event or work order is
detected. (Default value is R:0 G:0 B:0.)
l Operations Manager Past determines the color of the Past trigger displayed in the Events
pane of Operations Manager. (Default value is R:0 G:0 B:100.)
l Operations Manager Lead determines the color of the Lead trigger displayed in the Events
pane of Operations Manager. (Default value is R:255 G:255 B:0.)
l Operations Manager InProgress determines the color of the In Progress trigger displayed in
the Events pane of Operations Manager. (Default value is R:255 G:0 B:0.)
l Operations Manager Future determines the color of the Future trigger displayed in the
Events pane of Operations Manager. (Default value is R:0 G:255 B:0.)
l Operations Manager Trigger determines the color used to highlight the field currently acting
as the trigger in the Operations Manager dialog. (Default value is R:0 G:255 B:0.)
l Ownership Transfer determines the color of an Available block on the scheduling calendar
during which the resource is controlled or “owned” by a company other than the default
company specified in Resource Setup. (Default value is R:48 G:44 B:48.)
l MCR Status determines the color of a MCR status code.

Colors for Shared Work Order Booking Blocks

If the Shared Work Order booking block is not visible, it may be necessary to adjust the Shared Work
Order and Shared Work Order Text colors as discussed in System Preferences: System Colors.
System Preferences: System Fonts

The ScheduALL for Windows application uses a standard Windows font for a number of existing
controls on the user interface, such as button text, static label text, and check box label text on
dialogs editable by Developers Toolkit.
Font Replacements
The Windows font replaces several existing fonts that were previously configured in System
Preferences, including the following:
l Edit Field Text
l Edit Field Sel Text
l Gadget Default
l Gadget Larger Title
l Gadget Field Title
l Gadget Field Text
l Gadget Large Button
l General Browser Column Titles
l Operations Manager Details Window
l Record Title
l Time Control
Changing ScheduALL Fonts

System Preferences allow the supervisor to change the fonts used to display some screen elements
(such as Edit Box Text, Calendar Date, and Tooltip Text) on a system-wide basis.
To change the fonts on a system-wide basis:
Fonts. The Font Selection dialog displays.

Figure 165. Font Selection

2. Select a screen element and click Edit. The Font dialog displays.
3. Select the new Font, Font style, Size, and Script.
4. Click OK.
5. Click OK on the Font Selection dialog to register the changes in the ScheduALL system. If the
changes are not reflected immediately, close and then reopen the current screen.
User Preferences also allow each user to customize the fonts. Refer to User Preferences: Override
System Fonts. User Preferences override the default fonts and the System Preference font
selections.
Printing System Preferences

When you click Print in the System Preferences dialog, a listing of all of the current General system
preference settings displays. This list is intended for output purposes only. Any changes made in this
list do not change the actual system preference settings. The Import button is used only to add text
from an external file to the dialog, and does not import system preference settings. The Export button
is used only to send the text in the dialog to a text file, and does not export the system preference
settings. Refer to Notes Editor for more information.

User Preferences
Users can tailor select areas of application behavior to their specific needs. User preferences affect
screen display, calendar board navigation, conflict warnings, and automation functions.
Security Permissions determine if a user is allowed to modify his or her own User Preferences. Refer
to Can Change Own Preferences?. A user who has permission to access the user preferences has
access to the General, Desktops, and Override System Fonts options on the User Preferences
menu.
Simple Mode and Advanced Mode

The system offers users the ability to chose between two display modes. Advanced Mode is the
default display mode, and shows all menus, menu commands, and dialog elements to which the user
has security access. Simple Mode is an alternate display mode which can be used to show a more
limited number of options based on custom settings made using Developers Toolkit. (Refer to Using
Developer’s Toolkit.)
To switch to Simple Mode, from the File menu, select User Preferences and click Toggle to
Simple Mode.
To return to Advanced Mode, from the File menu, select User Preferences and click Toggle to
Advanced Mode.
User Preferences: General

This area of User Preferences is used to define options for each system user. To set the general User
Preferences:
1. From the File menu, select User Preferences, and then select General. The General [User]
Preferences dialog displays.
2. Enter information on the appropriate tabs.
3. Click Print to open the standard text editor and view all User Preference selections and their
current settings as plain text. Refer to Printing User Preferences.
Refer to the following for more information:
General User Preferences – Navigation Bar 353

General User Preferences – Scheduling 356
General User Preferences – Cursor Guides 360
General User Preferences – Conflict Warnings 361
General User Preferences – Options 363
General User Preferences, Options Tab, Scheduling Options 363
General User Preferences, Options Tab, Miscellaneous Options 396
General User Preferences, Options Tab, Email Options 405
General User Preferences, Options Tab, Visible Desktops Options 405
General User Preferences, Options Tab, SMS Options 406

Alarms and Locales 406

Printing User Preferences 407
General User Preferences – Navigation Bar

The Navigation Bar tab determines what is displayed when the user clicks the buttons on the
navigation bar. Table 99 describes the available settings. For more information about the Navigation
Bar, refer to Navigation Bar in the Scheduling chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
Figure 166. General (User) Preferences, Navigation Bar Tab

Table 99. General (User) Preferences, Navigation Bar Tab Settings
Option Description
Standard Time Bar Scroll Determines the percentage by which the time line moves forward or
backward when the user clicks the Next or Previous buttons. For
example, if the Default Day View start and end times are eight hours
apart, and this setting is 50%, the time line will advance by four hours
when the user clicks the “Next” button.
l Enter a percentage from 0 to 150. Default is 30.
Show Navigation Bar Determines if the Navigation Bar displays on the scheduling screen.
l Selected (checked) displays the Navigation Bar. (Default.)
l Deselected (cleared) does not display the Navigation Bar.
Default Day View for Determines the hours at which the timeline on the Scheduling
Scheduling Calendar starts and ends.

Table 99. General (User) Preferences, Navigation Bar Tab Settings (continued)
Option Description
Start Time Determines the start time, or left boundary, displayed on the calendar
board for a single day view.
l Enter an hour and minute. Default is 8:00 a.m.
End Time Determines the end time, or right boundary, displayed on the calendar
l Enter an hour and minute. Default is 7:00 p.m.
Alternate Working Day Determines the length of work orders created on the Alternate Day-
Based schedule, described in Alternate Schedule (Day Based) in the
Scheduling chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide . It also
determines the hours shaded as working hours in the TimeCapture
module. Refer to the Time Capture Interface chapter of the
Start Time Determines the start time, or left boundary, displayed on the calendar
l Enter an hour and minute. Default is 8:00 a.m.
End Time Determines the end time, or right boundary, displayed on the calendar
l Enter an hour and minute. Default is 10:00 p.m.

Table 99. General (User) Preferences, Navigation Bar Tab Settings (continued)
Option Description
Activate Now Plus View Allows the user to view a “rolling period” of calendar information based
on the current time and a definable time span, instead of the Default
Day View for Scheduling. This setting is applied to all display
features that normally utilize the Default Working Day settings, such
as the HOME shortcut key.
l Selected (checked) displays the Scheduling Calendar for the
number of hours specified in the Open to Now Plus __ hours
setting, with current time near the left edge of the display.
l Deselected (cleared) displays the Default or Alternate Day View.
Default Working Week Determines start day of the work week when the calendar board
displays a weekly view.
l Drag the mouse pointer from the first day of the work week (on the
top row of days) to the last day of the work week (on the bottom
row of days). The default range is from Sunday to Saturday. For
example, to set the work week to start on Wednesday, click
Weds in the top row and drag to Tues on the bottom row.
The user can select the color in which the Time Scale at the top of the
scheduling calendar displays. Click the color selection bar below a
week day to display the Color palette. Select a color and click OK. To
remove all color assignment, click Clear Color Selections. To
enable the colors selected, refer to Scheduling Menu Commands,
View Menu (Display in User Colors) in the Scheduling chapter of the

General User Preferences – Scheduling

The Scheduling tab determines options for keyboard navigation and other options related to work
orders. Table 100 describes the available settings.
Figure 167. General (User) Preferences, Scheduling Tab

Table 100. General (User) Preferences, Scheduling Tab Settings
Option Description
Keyboard Navigation
Incremental Determines the key combination which corresponds to the “Next” and
“Previous” buttons on the Navigation Bar. When the selected
keyboard combination is pressed, the time line moves forward or
backward along the timeline by the percentage amount defined in the
Standard Time Bar Scroll field on the Navigation Bar tab.
l Left/Right Arrow Keys. (Default.)
l Ctrl + Left/Right Arrow Keys
l Shift + Left/Right Arrow Keys
Day Determines the key combination which corresponds to the “Next Day”
and “Previous Day” buttons on the Navigation Bar. When the selected
keyboard combination is pressed, the time line moves forward or
backward along the timeline by one day (with the start and end times
set on the Navigation Bar page).
l Left/Right Arrow Keys
l Ctrl + Left/Right Arrow Keys. (Default.)
l Shift + Left/Right Arrow Keys

Table 100. General (User) Preferences, Scheduling Tab Settings (continued)
Option Description
Week Determines the key combination which corresponds to the “Next
Week” and “Previous Week” buttons on the Navigation Bar. When the
selected keyboard combination is pressed, the time line moves
forward or backward along the timeline by one week (the default work
week set on the Navigation Bar page).
l Left/Right Arrow Keys
l Ctrl + Left/Right Arrow Keys
l Shift + Left/Right Arrow Keys. (Default.)
Work Order Items Sort Determines the sort order used to display resources on a Work Order
Order resource list. Any selection other than “Use System Default” overrides
the sort order selected in System Preferences.
l Use System Default follows the sort order selected in System
Preferences.
l Do Not Sort sorts resources by the order in which they were
added to the work order.
l Category/Type/Resource groups resources first by category,
and then by type, and then sorts them alphabetically by resource
description.
l By Resource lists resources alphabetically by resource
description.
l People First lists all personnel first, then sorts remaining
resources alphabetically by resource description.
Default Status for Work Determines the default status assigned to new work orders.
Orders
l Options include all work order status settings. Default is
Request.
Note: A user’s Can Change Existing Wk Orders up to: security
setting must be set at or higher than the status selected for this
preference. For example, if Confirmed is selected for the default
status, then the user must have permission to change work
orders of at least Confirmed status. If this is not the case, the
user will see the new work order but it will display in View
Mode, and the user will be unable to edit it. When the user
clicks Cancel, the blank work order will be left on the calendar.
Refer to Can Change Existing Wk Orders up to:.
Note: WebScheduler Users: A work order with a status of Confirmed
requires that a client be assigned. If the user’s default work
order status is set to CONFIRMED, the user must be
associated with a Client in their User Profile or have a default
Client set in User Preferences. Without these settings there is
no means to prompt for selecting a Client and WebScheduler is
unable to complete the booking.

Option Description
Default Status for Quick Determines the default status assigned to work orders created using
Copies the Quick Copy command. Select (check) the box to enable this
feature. Default is Request.
Confirm Mouse Operations On
Session Move Determines if a confirmation dialog is displayed when the mouse is
used to move a Work Order or Activity block.
l Select (check) to display a confirmation dialog before completing
the operation.
l Deselect (clear) to complete the operation without requesting
confirmation.
Session Copy Determines if a confirmation dialog is displayed when the mouse is
used to copy a Work Order or Activity block.
the operation.
confirmation.
Session Drag/Resize Determines if a confirmation dialog is displayed when the mouse is
used to change the start or end time of a Work Order or Activity block.
the operation.
confirmation.
Alarm List Determines the list of resources which generate alarms when an event
containing a specified resource begins. Click the Alarm List button.
The Select Resources dialog displays. Select one or more resources
and click Select. The alarm will occur under the following
circumstances:
l When the alarm list contains a specific resource, and
l that resource is booked into a work order, and
l the User preference Sound Alarm and Open Work Order Upon
Start is set to Yes, then
l one minute before the start of the work order the work order will
open automatically and the Alarm Sound File will play.
Refer to the following for more information::
Sound Alarm and Open Work Order Upon Start.
Alarm Sound File.

Option Description
Default Display View Select the display view to apply to the scheduling calendar upon login.
Refer to Display View Setup for more information.
Resource Select Calendar Determines whether the system filters out bookings displayed on
resource selection dialogs by default. Click Select Items to View to
update the default settings.
l By Status - select (check) the status levels to display bookings
of that status, and deselect (clear) the status levels to hide
bookings of that status.
l Proposals - select (check) this option to display moves that have
been proposed but not committed, or deselect (clear) this option
to hide proposed moves.
l Shifts - select (check) this option to display personnel Shifts, or
deselect (clear) this option to hide personnel shifts.
l Exceptions - select (check) this option to display non-Shift
activities (such as Vacation, Sick Day, Paid Day Off, etc.), or
deselect (clear) this option to hide all non-Shift activities.
l Available Blocks - select (check) this option to display blocks of
time that are available for bookings. or deselect (clear) this option
to hide available blocks.
Note: These settings only determine whether or not an item is visible,
and does not negate or disable availability and conflict logic.
The system triggers conflict warnings if conflicts exist, even if
the booking that causes the conflict is filtered out.
The user can override these default settings in a given session
clicking Select Items to View on the appropriate resource selection
dialog.

General User Preferences – Cursor Guides

The Cursor Guides page determines options used to display visual guides which plot the mouse
pointer’s movements on the scheduling calendar. Table 101 describes the available settings.
Figure 168. General (User) Preferences, Cursor Guides Tab

Table 101. General (User) Preferences, Cursor Guides Items
Item Description
Calendar Cursor Guides Determines the cursor guide type used to plot the mouse pointer
movements on the calendar board screen to aid in precise placement
of bookings and other activities.
l No Guides does not display additional cursor guides. (Default.)
l Small Lines displays horizontal and vertical lines on the time
scale and resource list.
l Large Lines displays horizontal and vertical lines above and to
the left of the mouse cursor on the calendar board.
l Arrows displays small arrows on the time scale and resource list.
l Crosshairs displays horizontal and vertical lines above and
below, and to the left and right of the mouse cursor on the
calendar board.
Colors Determines the color of the selected guide type. The preview box next
to the guide type displays the selected color.
Click to display the Microsoft Windows color palette.
Time Line Color Determines the color of the time line displayed at the current time on
the calendar board.
Click to display the Microsoft Windows color palette.

General User Preferences – Conflict Warnings

The Conflict Warnings tab determines some of the situations which generate conflict warnings.
Figure 169. General (User) Preferences, Conflict Warnings Tab

Table 102. General (User) Preferences, Conflict Warnings Tab Items
Item Description
Source These settings control how the system checks for conflicts when
Target booking a new work order, and when changing the status of an
existing work order.
In the Source area, select (check) each status that should trigger a
conflict when booking a new work order, or when changing the status
of a work order from one status (Source) to another (Target).
In the Target area, select (check) each status that should trigger a
conflict if this is the status to which you are changing the booking.
In each area, select (check) Proposals to include changes that have
not been made final (i.e. Propose a Move).
Example #1: If your initial bookings have the status of “Request” and
you only need to be notified of conflicts when confirming (i.e.,
changing the status from “Request” to “Confirmed”) the booking, you
would deselect the “Request” status in the Source area, and select the
“Confirmed” status in the Target area.
Example #2: If your initial bookings have the status of “request” and
you need to be notified of conflicts right away, you would select the
“request” status in both the Source and Target areas.
Resources Availability Conflicts Items
Warn on Possibly Select (check) to generate a conflict with times marked as Possibly
Available Available in Resource Properties. Refer to Availability Setup.

Table 102. General (User) Preferences, Conflict Warnings Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Warn on Not Available Select (check) to generate a conflict with times marked as Not
Available in the Resource Properties. Refer to Availability Setup.
Stock Select (check) to generate a conflict when the amount of stock booked
into a work order exceeds the amount on hand.
This setting also determines whether the system displays the
Quantity Available total on the Resource Availability indicator of the
scheduling calendar. Refer to Quantity Available.
Consider Overtime Select (check) to generate a conflict warning when booking a resource
Conflicts results in an overtime or similar differential, including Night, Weekend,
Holiday, Short Turn Around, Days Worked per Period, and Time
Differentials.
Time Conflict Items
Consider Lead Time Select which periods the system will include (in addition to the booking
Consider Bumper Time block time) when generating conflict warnings.
Consider Cleanup Time For example the work order shown here includes lead, bumper, and
cleanup times.
When Consider Lead Time is selected, if a user attempts to book a

work order that intrudes into the 12:30 p.m. to 1 p.m. lead time, a
conflict warning is displayed.
When Consider Bumper Time is selected, if a user attempts to book a
work order that intrudes into the 3:00 p.m. to 3:30 p.m. bumper time, a
When Consider Cleanup Time is selected, if a user attempts to book a
work order that intrudes into the 3:30 p.m. to 4 p.m. cleanup time, a
Refer to Booking Block Time Indicators in the Scheduling chapter of
Exclude Deny Explicit Select (check) this option to allow the system to ignore resource
Confirmation events marked as Deny in the Explicit Confirmation field when
checking for conflicts.

General User Preferences – Options

The Options tab contains miscellaneous User Preference settings.
Figure 170. General (User) Preferences, Options Tab

Settings are described in the following sections:
General User Preferences, Options Tab, Scheduling Options

Table 103. General (User) Preferences, Options Tab, Scheduling Settings
Setting Description
Color Code by Status This setting controls the colors used to display work
orders in some browsers, like the Activity by Group. It
does not preset the color method used on calendars.
l (<none>) does not display status colors. (Default.)
l Pay Status displays the work order in the pay status
color.
l Event Status displays the work order in the event
status color.
Display Event Using Template Color Determines if Activities in the Scheduling Calendar and
Personnel Manager dialogs (Activity by Category and
Activity by Person) are displayed using the color
specified in the Activity Template.
l Yes displays activity indicators in the color specified
by the Activity Template used to create the activity.
l No displays activity indicators in the color
associated with the base activity type. (Default.)

Table 103. General (User) Preferences, Options Tab, Scheduling Settings (continued)
Setting Description
Display Visual Flags in Schedule Determines if the Visual Flags configured in System
Calendar Preferences are displayed on booking blocks in the visual
calendar. Refer to Visual Flags (User Defined) for
information.
l Yes displays visual flags.
l No does not display visual flags. (Default.)
Confirm when Abandoning Changes Determines if users are required to confirm any
cancellation of changes when the user clicks the Cancel
button on the Work Order dialog.
l Yes requires the user to confirm that changes made
to a work order should be canceled. (Default.)
l No does not prompt the user to confirm cancellation
of changes.
Show Availability on ‘Add Resources’? Determines if the system displays colored availability
indicators on the Resource List. (From the Work Order
dialog, click the Resource button on the Main tab or
Resources tab. The Resource List displays.)
l Yes displays availability indicators. (Default.)
l No does not display availability indicators.
Mouse Snap-to-Time Increment Determines the incremental value, in minutes from 1 to
(Minutes) 60, by which the mouse pointer increases or decreases
the time when plotting a new booking on the calendar
board. (Default is 15.)
Edit Work Order in Activity by Dub? Determines if double-clicking a dub work order in the
Activity by Dub Order dialog displays the Edit Work Order
dialog.
l Yes displays the Edit Work Order dialog when
double-clicking a dub order.
l No displays the Dub Order dialog. (Default.)
Note: The user must close the Activity by Dub Order
dialog for changes to this preference to take effect.
Display Icons for Open Forms that are in Determines if open dialog windows display an icon in the
Edit Mode status bar. The system allows users to click the icon to
return to the appropriate dialog window.
l Yes displays icons for forms that are open and in edit
mode. (Default.)
l No does not display icons for open forms.

Setting Description
Prompt Service Selection upon Work Determines if the Service list is displayed automatically
Order Creation when a new work order is booked on the calendar dialog.
l Yes automatically displays the Select Services
dialog when creating a new work order, even if the
command used to create the work order does not
display the Work Order dialog.
l No does not automatically display the Select
Services dialog. (Default.)
Prompt Client Selection upon Work Determines if the Client list is displayed automatically
Order Creation when a new work order is booked on the calendar dialog.
l Yes automatically displays the Select Client dialog
when creating a new work order, even if the
l No does not automatically display the Select Client
dialog. (Default.)
Prompt Contract Selection upon Work (Requires Contract Manager.) Determines if the Contract
Order Creation list is displayed automatically when a new work order is
booked on the calendar dialog.
l Yes automatically displays the Select Contract
dialog when creating a new work order, even if the
l No does not automatically display the Select
Contract dialog. (Default.)
Enable Fly-Over Text in Personnel (Requires Personnel Manager.) Determines if fly-over
Manager text displays when the user hovers the mouse over a
work order or activity in any Personnel Manager module
screen.
l Yes enables fly-over text in Personnel Manager.
(Default.)
l No disables fly-over text in Personnel Manager.
Enable Fly-Over Text in Scheduling Determines if fly-over text displays when the user hovers
the mouse over a work order or activity in the scheduling
screen.
l Yes enables fly-over text in the scheduling calendar.
(Default.)
l No disables fly-over text in the scheduling calendar.

Setting Description
Use the Extended Work Order Form by Determines which work order form (standard or extended)
Default is launched by default when a Work Order is created or
edited.
l Yes opens work orders using the Extended Work
Order form.
l No opens work orders using the standard Work
Order form. (Default.)
Select View Colors Determines the color coding scheme used to display
booking blocks associated with work orders.
l Status displays work order blocks by the color of the
work order’s associated status. Refer to System
Preferences: System Colors to define status
colors. (Default.)
l Client displays work order blocks by the color of the
work order’s associated client. Refer to Assign a
Color to this Client.
l Resource Colors displays work order blocks by the
color of the work order’s associated resource.
l Master Resource Colors displays work order
blocks by the color of the work order’s associated
master resource.
Unattended Schedule Refresh Interval Select the time interval to use when refreshing data when
the user is not interacting with the scheduling calendar.
The system adds, modifies, or removes work orders,
activities, and other scheduled items from the calendar
each time the defined interval passes.
l None does not refresh the dialog automatically.
l 60 seconds, 90 seconds, and 5 minutes refresh
the dialog after the specified interval. (Default is 90
seconds.)
Schedule Auto-Sync Interval Select the time interval after which, and by which, the
system advances the time period displayed by the
calendar board. (Also refer to Activate Now Plus View.)
l <none> does not change the time period displayed
by the calendar automatically. (Default.)
l Any value from 30 seconds to 7 days advances the
period displayed on the calendar by the specified
interval, after the specified interval. For example, 1
hour moves the display by one hour after each one
hour interval.

Setting Description
Method for Displaying Overlapping Determines the method used to display work orders that
Bookings have been booked for the same resource at the same
time.
l Equal Height divides the available space evenly
between all booking blocks.
l Prioritized displays the work order with the highest
Status level as the tallest. (Default.)
Activity Reminder Interval (0 to disable), Determines the time delay in minutes) after which an
minutes activity reminder is repeated. Activity reminders are
specified in the Client Activity Log, described in Entering
Client Activities in the Scheduling chapter of the
l Enter a number from 1 to 120 to specify the interval
in minutes. (Default is 1.)
l Enter 0 to disable reminders.
Show Meals in Schedule Determines if meal periods are displayed as a shaded
area when meals have been scheduled as part of a
resource booking or Shift activity.
l Yes displays meals on the work order block.
l No does not display meals on the work order block.
(Default.)
Show Breaks in Schedule Determines if break periods are displayed as a shaded
area when breaks have been scheduled as part of a
resource booking or Shift activity.
l Yes displays breaks on the work order block.
l No does not display breaks on the work order block.
(Default.)
Show Meals for all other activities Determines if meal periods are displayed as a shaded
area when meals have been scheduled as part of non-
Shift activities.
l Yes displays meals on the activity block.
l No does not display meals on the activity block.
(Default.)
Show Breaks for all other activities Determines if break periods are displayed as a shaded
area when breaks have been scheduled as part of non-
Shift activities.
l Yes displays breaks on the activity block.
l No does not display breaks on the activity block.
(Default.)

Setting Description
Show Current-Time Guide in Schedule Determines if the system displays a dashed vertical line
to indicate the current time as defined by the Windows
system clock. The color of the line is selected in General
User Preferences – Cursor Guides.
l Yes displays a time guide. (Default.)
l No does not display a time guide.
Animate Bookings that are in Progress Determines if the scheduling calendar draws a blinking
border around work orders when the current time is
between the work order’s start time and end time for the
correct date.
l Yes displays the border animation effect.
l No disables animation. (Default.)
Warn if modifying schedule within Determines if the system generates a warning when the
user attempts to modify a work order when the remaining
time until the start of the work order is less than the
specified interval.
l Options include intervals from 30 seconds to 7 days
l <None> disables this warning. (Default.)
Sound Alarm and Open Work Order Determines if the system plays the specified alarm file
Upon Start and opens the Work Order dialog when a work order
contains a resource on the alarm list. Refer to Alarm List
and Alarm Sound File.
l Yes plays the specified alarm file and opens the
Work Order dialog to the appropriate work order
automatically.
l No does not play the alarm file or open the Work
Order. (Default.)
Alarm Sound File Specifies the sound file (WAV file format) used as an
alarm when Sound Alarm and Open Work Order
Upon Start is enabled.
Refer to Specifying an Alarm File for information about
selecting an alarm file. (Default is blank/empty.)
Work Order Activity Reminder, check Determines how often the system checks for conflicting
every work orders within a certain amount of time from now.
l Selecting an interval from 1 minute to 4 hours
displays the Find Work Order by Status (with
Reminder) dialog at the specified interval if a work
order exists within the Display work orders within
setting on the dialog.
l <None> disables the reminder. (Default.)

Setting Description
Meal1 Duration (User Override 1) Allows the system to automatically assign the specified
Duration (min) to Meal 1 when a user books a work
order that is longer than the specified Threshold (min).
For example, if Duration is 30 and Threshold is 239, any
work order booked for four hours (240 minutes) or more is
assigned a 30 minute meal period by default.
If Meal1 Duration (User Override 2)Meal1 Duration
(User Override 2) is enabled, the Override 1 duration will
be applied to work orders that have a duration greater
than the Override 1 Threshold, and less than the Override
2 Threshold.
Note: The system only assigns default meal periods
when the Work Order is created. If a Work Order is
later changed to be above or below specified
thresholds, meals are not automatically
recalculated.
Duration (min) Enter the value assigned to Meal 1, from 0 to 9999
minutes. (Default is 0.)
Threshold (min) Enter the minimum work order duration for which the
system assigns the specified meal, in minutes from 0 to
9999. (Default is 0.)
The Work Order duration must be longer than the
Threshold value. For example, set the Threshold to 239 to
automatically assign a meal to work orders of 4 hours
(240 minutes) or more.
Meal1 Duration (User Override 2) Allows the system to automatically assign the specified
This setting overrides Meal1 Duration (User
Override 1)Meal1 Duration (User Override 1) if the
work order duration exceeds the Override 2 Threshold
value, allowing the user to create a tiered meal structure.
Note: The system only assigns default meal periods
thresholds, meals are not automatically
recalculated.
Duration (min) Enter the value assigned to Meal 1, from 0 to 9999

Setting Description
system assigns the specified meal, in minutes from 0 to
This value must be greater than the Threshold value
specified for Meal1 Duration (User Override 1)Meal1
Duration (User Override 1).
automatically assign meals to work orders of 6 hours (360
minutes) or more.
Break1 Duration (User Override 1) Allows the system to automatically assign the specified
Duration (min) to Break 1 when a user books a work
If Break1 Duration (User Override 2)Break1 Duration
(User Override 2) is enabled, the Override 1 duration will
be applied to work orders that have a duration greater
than the Override 1 Threshold, and less than the Override
2 Threshold.
Note: The system only assigns default break periods
thresholds, breaks are not automatically
recalculated.
Duration (min) Enter the value assigned to Break 1, from 0 to 9999
system assigns the specified break, in minutes from 0 to
automatically assign a break to work orders of 4 hours

Setting Description
Break1 Duration (User Override 2) Allows the system to automatically assign the specified
This setting overrides Break1 Duration (User
Override 1)Break1 Duration (User Override 1) if the
work order duration exceeds the Override 2 Threshold
value, allowing the user to create a tiered break structure.
Note: The system only assigns default break periods
thresholds, breaks are not automatically
recalculated.
Duration (min) Enter the value assigned to Break 1, from 0 to 9999
Threshold (min) Enter the minimum duration of the work order, in minutes
from 0 to 9999, after which the system assigns the
specified break duration. (Default is 0.)
This value must be greater than the Threshold value
specified for Break1 Duration (User Override 1)Break1
Duration (User Override 1).
automatically assign breaks to work orders of 8 hours
Ignore Requirements in selective Determines if open requirements will trigger a conflict
Conflict Check? warning when a user checks the conflicts for a selected
booking. (Refer to Check for Conflicts in the Scheduling
chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .)
l Yes indicates a resource conflict if an open
requirement exists in the selected work order.
l No does not display a conflict warning for an open
requirement. (Default.)

Setting Description
Override Browser Flyover for Rooms Determines the resource-based display view used to
Override Browser Flyover for General generate mouse flyovers for room blocks, general
Resources resource blocks, personnel resource blocks, or
Override Browser Flyover for Personnel BandPLAN blocks on the scheduling calendar, to tailor
Override Browser Flyover for the displayed information to the resource classification.
BandPLAN Resources These settings override the Default Browser Flyover
for system preferences (described in Default Browser
Flyover for ... and other corresponding system
preferences) for the current user.
l <none> displays the resource display block
specified in System Preferences. (Default.)
l Any resource display block displays the
information defined in the block when the user floats
the mouse over a resource description of the
appropriate classification in the Scheduling calendar.
Refer to Display Blocks for Resources for more
information.
Show Availability in Work Order Determines if the system displays an indication of a
Category/Type Resource Tree resource’s availability in a specific tree control of a Work
Order dialog.
l Yes displays a colored block indicating the resource
availability in the “Additional Available” on the Work
Order Category Type Resource Tree control. (This
control does not display on standard Work Order
dialogs, but can be added using Developers Toolkit.)
l No does not indicate resource availability on certain
resource dialogs. (Default.)
Enable conflict checking in the past for Determines if the system generates conflict warnings
day-based activities when a day-based activity is scheduled prior to the
current date and time, and the activity conflicts with
existing work orders or activities.
l Yes generates a conflict warning when the specified
type of conflict occurs. (For example, the system
generates a warning if a supervisor attempts to
create a Vacation day in the past, on a day when a
personnel resource was assigned to a work order.)
l No does not generate conflict warnings for the
specified type of conflict. (Default.)

Setting Description
Clear Work Order Library Template on Allows the user to copy a work order without copying the
Copy details that were saved into the library template for that
work order.
l Yes copies the associated record from the original
library template to any new work orders that are
being created from a copy.
l No does not copy the associated record from the
original library template. (Default.)
Enable Extended Fly-Over Determines if the Personnel Manager Activity by
Person and Activity by Category dialogs and the
Scheduling Extended Resource and Extended Monthly
Views dialogs display additional information in the
booking flyover, including the Project Name and Project #
fields. (The Enable Fly-Over Text in Personnel
Manager user preference must also be set to Yes to
display extended information.)
l Yes displays extended flyover information.
l No displays standard flyover information. (Default.)
Operations Manager Background Color (Requires ScheduLINK.) Determines the background
color of the Operations Manager and Operations Manager
WO dialogs. (Text colors can also be customized; refer to
System Preferences: System Fonts and User
Preferences: Override System Fonts.)
l Black displays the Operations Manager with a black
background and white and light-colored text.
(Default.)
l Gray displays the Operations Manager with a light
gray background and black or dark-colored text.
Operations Manager Refresh Interval (Requires ScheduLINK.) Determines the number of
(Seconds) seconds after which the Operations Manager and
Operations Manager WO dialogs automatically check for
updated information.
l Options include any number from 0 (refresh once per
second) to 60 (refresh once per minute). (Default is
20.)
Suppress Info Only Events In Operations (Requires ScheduLINK.) Determines whether
Manager? Information Only events are displayed in Operations
Manager.
l Yes displays Information Only events.
l No does not display Information Only events.
(Default.)

Setting Description
Default Work Order Mode upon Creation Determines the Work Order form displayed when a new
from browsers work order is created from within a browser dialog.
l ScheduALL uses the ScheduALL work order form.
Refer to Standard Work Order in the Scheduling
chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide . (Default.)
l ScheduLINK uses the ScheduLINK work order
form. Refer to the ScheduLINK Users Guide.
Use Browser Mode as override for all Determines if the browser mode specified in the Default
Calendars? Work Order Mode upon Creation from browsers
preference is displayed when creating a work order on
any calendar dialog.
l Yes uses the specified browser mode and ignores
the default calendar mode. For example, if Default
Work Order Mode is set to ScheduLINK, creating a
work order on any calendar automatically uses the
ScheduLINK work order form.
l No uses the dialog associated with the calendar and
resource group. (Default.)
Work Order Dialog used to Edit/View Determines the form dialog used to display a work order.
existing Work Orders
l Creation Mode displays work orders in the form
used to create the work order. (Default.)
l Follow Calendar displays work orders in the form
appropriate to the calendar display and selected
resource group. For example, if the user opens a
work order from the ScheduLINK calendar, the work
order is displayed in the ScheduLINK work order
form.
l ScheduALL displays work orders in the ScheduALL
work order form, and ignores creation mode and
current calendar.
l ScheduLINK displays work orders in the
ScheduLINK work order form, and ignores creation
mode and current calendar.
Scheduling screen to open when booking Determines the scheduling calendar opened when the
Work Order from Quote/Prj/Operation user clicks a “New Work Order” icon from within the
Mng Quotes Manager, Project Manager, or Operations
Manager modules.
l Scheduling Calendar opens the standard
Scheduling calendar board. (Default.)
l Extended Scheduling Calendar opens the
ScheduLINK calendar board. (Requires
ScheduLINK.)
l Story Schedule – Reserved.

Setting Description
Show partial capacity conflicts? Determines whether the system reports a capacity
conflict if some (but not all) of the Total Capacity
assigned to a resource is already booked. (Refer to the
ScheduLINK Users Guide for more information on
resource Total Capacity settings and capacity-based
work orders.)
l Yes displays conflict messages if any portion of a
capacity resource is already booked.
l No displays conflict messages only if all of a
capacity resource is already booked. (Default.)
Note: This setting does not affect work orders utilizing
the BandPlan functionality of the ScheduLINK
system.
Remove resource children upon replace Determines whether the system removes resources from
a work order when the user replaces a resource that is the
master resource, or the parent resource for other
resources.
l Yes removes all children of a resource from the work
order when the master or parent resource is
replaced.
l No retains additional resources in the work order
when a master or parent resource is replaced.
(Default.)
Default Resource for Work Order Determines the resource used to create the master event
Creation of a work order, when creating a work order from a
browser, the Operations Manager, or interface other than
a scheduling calendar.
Click the input field and click the [...] button to select a
resource, or click Clear ( ) to remove the current
resource. (Default is blank/empty.)
Suppress Default Resources from (Requires ScheduLINK.) Determines whether the Visual
Visual Path? Path diagram in the ScheduLINK work order form
excludes the resource selected in the Default Resource
for Work Order Creation user preference.
l Yes removes the Default Resource from the Visual
Path diagram if no other transmission resources
exist in the work order,
l No displays the Default Resource in the Visual Path
diagram. (Default.)

Setting Description
Highlight Billable Resources in Visual Determines whether the Visual Path diagram displays a
Path? visual flag on a billable resource’s icon to identify billable
resources differently from non-billable resources.
l Yes displays a visual flag on billable resource icons.
Refer to Visual Path Browser in the Work Orders and
Activities chapter of the ScheduLINK Users
Guide.
l No ignores billable status when displaying visual
flags and icons on the Visual Path diagram. (Default
setting.)
Suppress the following Resources Determines which resources are hidden or removed from
from Visual Path (when the Visual Path display when those resources are booked
Master Event) as the master event (e.g. the first resource in a Work
Order).
l Resource - select one or more resources to remove
them from the Visual Path display when the resource
is booked as the Master Event.
l <None Selected> displays all circuit resources in
the Visual Path per any pre-existing rules, such as
the transmit role and the Suppress Default
Resource from Visual Path preference. (Default.)
Default Resource for Library Work Order Determines the resource used to create the master event
Creation: of a work order, when creating a work order from within
the Media Manager System.
Default Resource for Scan Work Order Determines the resource used to create the master event
Creation: of a work order, when creating a work order using the
results of a scan operation.
Default Scan Location: Determines the default location displayed in the “Location
Scan” (or “Scan Batch”), “Location Scan for Assets”, and
“Inventory Scan” dialogs.
location, or click Clear ( ) to remove the current location.
(Default is blank/empty.)

Setting Description
Default Check-In Scan Location: Determines the default location displayed in the “Location
Scan for Assets (Check In)” dialog.
Default Check-Out Scan Location: Determine the default location displayed in the “Location
Scan for Assets (Check Out)” dialog.
Note: Assign a location that supports check out
operations.
Default Destroy Location: Determines the default location displayed in the Reason
for Destroy dialog when destroying a library entry.
Default action for Barcode Scan input on Determines the action taken by the system when the
Scheduling Calendar user scans a barcode from the Scheduling Calendar (i.e.
with no additional dialogs currently active).
l Location Scan displays the Location Scan dialog,
and allows the user to scan resources to a specific
location.
l Work Order Search displays the work order list and
attempts to find a work order for which the work order
number matches the barcode scan. (Default.)
l Open Scanned Item WO opens an new work order
and adds the scanned item as a resource.
l Prompt User displays a dialog in which the user
selects an action when the user scans a barcode.
l Location Scan for Assets displays the Location
Scan for Assets dialog, and allows the user to scan
resources to a specific location.
Warn if scanning existing Resource Determines whether the system displays a warning when
during Requirement Scan an item scanned into a work order using a Requirement
Scan is already assigned to the work order. (A
Requirement Scan is used to replace a requirement with
the scanned resource.)
l Yes displays a warning if the scanned resource
already exists in the work order.
l No does not display a warning if the scanned
resource already exists in the work order. (Default.)

Setting Description
Default to Now when using 'New Work Determines whether the system uses the current time as
Order(Manual)' the work order time when the user creates a work order
using the New Work Order (Manual) process.
l Yes automatically applies the current date (today) as
the Start Date and End Date of a new work order
when booked using the New Work Order (Manual)
process.
l No prompts the user to select a date for a new work
order when booked using the New Work Order
(Manual) process. (Default.)
Maintain 15-Minute Increment in Determines whether the system always displays
Scheduling Calendar markers at 15-minute increments on the scheduling
calendar and visual reports time lines.
l Yes always displays markers at 15-minute intervals
if space allows.
l No displays markers scaled to even increments of
10, 15, or 20 minutes as necessary. (Default.)
Allow Meals dragging in Scheduling Determines whether the user can use the mouse to
Calendar select and drag the start and end times of meals within a
resource booking or activity directly from the scheduling
calendar.
l Yes allows the user to select a meal and drag it to a
different time within a booking block in the visual
calendar. (The Show Meals in Schedule option
must also be set to Yes.) The user cannot create a
meal from the visual calendar, and cannot change
the duration of the meal.
l No prevents the user from changing meal times from
the scheduling calendar. The user must open the
work order to change meal times. (Default.)
Allow Breaks dragging in Scheduling Determines whether the user can use the mouse to
Calendar select and drag the start and end times of breaks within a
resource booking or activity directly from the scheduling
calendar.
l Yes allows the user to select a break and drag it to a
different time within a booking block in the visual
calendar. (The Show Breaks in Schedule option
must also be set to Yes.) The user cannot create a
break from the visual calendar, and cannot change
the duration of the break.
l No prevents the user from changing break times
from the scheduling calendar. The user must open
the work order to change break times. (Default.)

Setting Description
Warn when moving items in a container? Determines whether the user must confirm removing an
item from a container.
l Yes a warning message '‘Remove this item from
parent container ({Container})? Yes/No” displays for
each item that is being scanned. (Default.)
l No does not display a warning message. The item
will be removed from its container when scanned.
Show Conflict Check Reminder every Determines the interval, in minutes, after which the
(mins) system displays the Conflict Check Reminder dialog
when conflicts exist within the check duration. By
default, the check duration is 30 minutes; users can
modify the default duration when the Conflict Check
Reminder dialog displays. (If the Conflict Check
Reminder dialog is already open, the system updates the
dialog after the specified reminder interval.)
l <none> disables the Conflict Check Reminder
dialog. (Default.)
l x minutes (from 1 to 720) displays the Conflict
Check Reminder dialog after the specified duration if
any conflicts exist within the check duration. If the
dialog is already open, the system updates the list as
necessary.
Date/Time span when changing Determines whether scheduling calendars retain the
Desktops currently selected time span when displaying a different
Desktop, or if they reapply the time span specified in the
Desktop entry.
l Follow Desktop displays the date and time span
according to the fixed value saved in the desktop.
(Default.)
l Follow Calendar displays the date and time span
according to the current span displayed on the
calendar; the calendar is not repositioned every time
a Desktop is changed.
Automatically Assign Vendor to P.O. on Determines whether the system automatically selects
Single Vendor Resource the vendor when generating a payable or purchase order
(PO) for a resource that only has one associated vendor.
l Yes automatically assigns the appropriate vendor to
the payable or purchase order if the resource only
has one associated vendor. (If the resource has
multiple vendors, the user must still select the
vendor manually.)
l No requires the user to manually select the vendor
for all purchase orders. (Default.)

Setting Description
Show $0 Allocations in Vendor Invoice Determines whether the system shows or hides
Entry allocations that do not have a positive Amount Billed
dollar value in the Purchase Order Allocation browser of
the Vendor Invoices Entry dialog.
l Yes displays items with an Amount Billed of $0 in the
allocations browser.
l No hides items with an Amount Billed of $0 from the
allocations browser. (Default.)
Note: This preference is not retroactive; the visibility of
an allocation is determined by the user preference
at the time the Closed? column for the unallocated
cost is set to Yes in the Unallocated Costs dialog.
Display Transmission Role Change Determines whether the system displays a confirmation
Confirmations message when an Insert Before or Insert After operation
needs to change the Transmission Role of a Source or
Destination resource within a work order. For example, if
the selected resource is booked as a destination, the
Insert After command automatically attempts to change
the role of the selected resource to Relay Point.
l Yes displays a warning that the transmission role for
the selected resource will be changed by the
operation. (Default.)
l No does not display a warning when automatically
changing the transmission role of a resource in a
work order.
Allow Auto Apply on Scheduling Determines whether the current user can enable the Auto
Calendar Apply setting on the Scheduling menu and/or toolbar.
Refer to Booking Work Orders in the Scheduling chapter
of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more information.
l Yes allows the user to enable the Auto Apply setting
on the scheduling toolbar. (Default.)
l No automatically disables the Auto Apply setting on
the Scheduling menu and/or toolbar, and prevents
the user from enabling it.
Conflict Dialog Display View Determines the Display View entry used to display
information on booking blocks in the Conflicts List dialog.
l <none> displays the information based on the
default Display View. Refer to Default Display
View.(Default.)
l Any display view displays information on Conflict
List booking blocks using the selected Display View
entry.

Setting Description
Conflict Dialog Flyover Display View Determines the Display View entry used to display
information in the flyover view of booking blocks in the
Conflicts List dialog.
l <none> displays the information based on the
display view selected in the Conflict Dialog
Display View preference, or based on the Default
Display View if Conflict Dialog Display View is
set to <none>. (Default.)
l Any display view displays information on Conflict
List booking blocks using the selected Display View
entry.
Default Library Release Status Determines the default value assigned to the Release
Status field of new Library items.
l Options include each status level available to
Release Status. Refer to Library Dialog, Traffic Tab
Settings in the Media Manager chapter of the
ScheduALL Users Guide. (Default is Allowed.)
Disregard antenna position warnings (Requires Antenna Matrix module)
unless Lead/Start overlap
Determines whether the warning "Antenna is currently
pointed at a different satellite") is displayed.
l Yes does not display the warning unless the Lead or
Start time of a work order intersects another work
order booking for the same antenna.
l No displays the antenna position warning.
Trouble Ticket Room: (Requires Trouble Ticket module.) Determines the Room
resource used by default when creating trouble ticket
work orders.
Default ‘Change Selected’ option in Determines if the Change Selected Only check box on
Event Times Form to Off the Main (Actual) tab of the Change Time dialog is
selected by default.
l Yes leaves the check box deselected (cleared) and
disables the check box. The user cannot select the
check box. Times for all items in the work order will
be changed.
l No selects (checks) the check box. (Default.) With
this setting, times are changed only for the items
selected in the Resource list on the work order. The
user can deselect (clear) the check box to change
times for all items in the work order.

Setting Description
Warn when adding resource(s) to Work If the preference is set to Yes, and the scanned RESID
Order Via Scan does not exist in the work order and does not satisfy any
requirements, the system displays the following warning:
"Item and/or Matching Requirement do not exist in
Work Order.
Add Item to Work Order?"
"Yes" - adds the resource to the current work order and
creates a scan record.
"No” - Update Location only" only creates a scan record.
l Yes displays the warning. (Default.)
l No does not display the warning.
Set Work Order Source Location as Determines whether the system updates the search
Search Location location based on the source location.
l Yes updated the search location.
l No does not update the location. (Default.)
Display only Preferred Compatible Determines whether the Resource Group list filters the
Resource Groups when Booking list of available groups based on the Preferred Groups
(Link only) defined in resource setup during Insert Before and Insert
After operations.
The setting applies to Insert Before operations when the
(Validation Type) is set to Validate and the resource has
one or more groups in the Preferred Groups (browser) list
on the Room Properties – Predecessor tab.
The setting applies to Insert After operations when the
(Validation Type) is set to Validate and the resource has
one or more groups in the Preferred Groups (browser) list
on the Room Properties – Successor tab.
l Yes displays only the resource groups listed in the
Preferred Groups list, plus the <All Compatible
Resources> and <Unrestricted Resources> groups.
l No displays all resource groups.
Default Transmission Resource Determines whether the system displays the availability
Browser to Extended View calendar on the Uplink, Downlink, or Relay Point tabs
(Link only) when inserting resources into a transmission circuit using
the Insert Before or Insert After commands.
l No displays the list of resource descriptions with no
calendar. (Default.)
l Yes displays the list of resource descriptions with an
Extended Scheduling calendar.

Setting Description
Activate Automatic Resource Selection Determines whether all resources assigned to a booking
in Scheduling Screens are selected when one resource is selected.
l Yes automatically selects all resources in a booking
when one resource is selected. This is the
recommended setting. (Default.)
l No does not automatically select other resources in
the booking when one resource is selected.
Default Client when creating Work Determines the client that is automatically selected when
Orders the user creates a work order.
client, or click Clear ( ) to remove the current entry.
Default Company to assign when Determines the company assigned by default to items
creating entries created by the user, such as work orders, quotes, and
projects. If necessary, the user can change the company
to any other company to which they have access.
company, or click Clear ( ) to remove the current entry.
Note: This preference is overridden by the Link to
Company preference. To use this preference, clear
the Link to Company entry. Refer to Link to
Company.
Note: To use Company-Specific Rooms and
Company-Specific Work Order Counters in the
Multi-Company Module, this preference must be
cleared.
Default Company Selection for Queries Determines the company that is automatically selected
and Reports when the user runs a query or report.
company, or click Clear ( ) to remove the current entry.
(Default is 0 Companies, which does not automatically
select a company. This setting will result in a query or
report that includes all companies available to the user.)
Allow Vertical Move on Scheduling Determines whether a user can reassign rooms,
Calendar personnel, or equipment bookings by moving them
vertically on the scheduling calendar.
Note: This preference requires the Compatible
Resources license.

Setting Description
Flag Change Start and End times in Determines if the Change Start Time and Change End
Event Times Dialog per default Time check boxes on the Main (Actual) tab of the Change
Time dialog are selected by default.
l Yes automatically selects (checks) the check
boxes. (Default.)
l No leaves the check boxes deselected (cleared).
Flag Change Meal times in Event Times Determines whether the Change Meals check box control
Dialog per default is selected (checked) by default. When the check box is
selected (checked), changes to the meal fields on the
Event Times dialog are applied to the work order and/or
individual bookings in the work order.
l Yes selects (checks) the Change Meal check box,
and applies any specified changes in meal times to
the work order and/or bookings.
l No deselects (clears) the Change Meal check box,
and ignores any specified changes in meal times.
Flag Change Break times in Event Times Determines whether the Change Break check box control
Dialog per default is selected (checked) by default. When the check box is
selected (checked), changes to the break fields on the
Event Times dialog are applied to the work order and/or
individual bookings in the work order.
l Yes selects (checks) the Change Break check box,
and applies any specified changes in break times to
the work order and/or bookings.
l No deselects (clears) the Change Break check box,
and ignores any specified changes in meal times.
Prompt user to notify vendors upon time Determines if the system displays a reminder dialog to
change from within a Work Order notify the affected vendors when the duration of an event
or work order that contains an external cost is changed.
l Yes displays a reminder dialog to notify the affected
vendors.
l No does not display a reminder dialog to notify the
affected vendors. (Default.)
Set Bumper Time to zero at Completed Determines whether the Bumper Time field in the Change
status? Time dialog is changed to zero when the work order
status is set to Completed.
l Yes changes the Bumper Time to zero when the
work order status is set to Completed.
l No does not change the Bumper Time to zero when
the work order status is set to Completed. (Default.)

Setting Description
Set Clean-Up Time to zero at Completed Determines whether the Clean-Up Time field in the
status? Change Time dialog is changed to zero when the work
order status is set to Completed.
l Yes changes the Clean-Up Time to zero when the
work order status is set to Completed.
l No does not change the Clean-Up Time to zero
when the work order status is set to Completed.
(Default.)
Display Work Order list following Quick Determines whether a browser list of all copied work
Copy? orders displays at the completion of a Quick Copy
operation.
l Yes displays a browser list.
l No does not display a browser list.
Display Work Order list following Determines whether a browser list of all copied work
Extended Copy? orders displays at the completion of an Extended Copy
operation.
l Yes displays a browser list.
l No does not display a browser list.
Pending Satellite Tx. Params Visual Flag Determines whether a visual flag is displayed in a
(Link only) booking block when the following occurs:
l satellite parameters for a resource are set to Always
Pop-Up or Only When Mandatory, and
l there are mandatory parameters, and
l Transmission Parameters is suppressed.
Keep Satellite TX Params upon Determines whether the ScheduLINK system clears all
Changing Transponder/Channel existing values in the Satellite Transmission Parameters
settings when the user replaces a satellite or transponder
with a different satellite or transponder, or moves a work
order to a different satellite or transponder on the
Scheduling Calendar:
l <Prompt> displays a confirmation dialog (“Do you
wish to keep the Tx information?”) and allows the
user to select Yes or No for each operation.
l Yes automatically retains specific Satellite
Transmission Parameter values.
l No automatically resets specific transmission
parameters; if any parameters are required and not
populated, the user will need to add required values
again. (Default.)
Refer to Edit Transmission Parameters in the Work
Orders chapter of the ScheduLINK Users Guide for
more information.

Setting Description
Display Resource List during User Displays a list of resources previously assigned to the
Select (Service or Additional Resource) work order when the user the user selects a service or
Operations additional resources.
l Yes displays a list of resources previously assigned
to the work order.
l No does not display a list of resources previously
assigned to the work order. (Default.)
Note: This preference is only applicable to Pivot
Services. For information regarding Pivot
Services, refer to the ScheduLINK Users Guide.
Discount % Entry Type Defines how the discount percentage entered is applied:
l Both applies the discount to both the List Discount
% and the Current Discount %. (Default.)
l List Discount % only applies the discount to the
List Price as shown on the Pricing tab of the work
order.
l Current Discount % only applies the discount to
the Extended price as shown on the Pricing tab of
the work order.
Display style for existing BandPlan Determines how the availability calendar on the Extended
bookings in Add and Replace resource tab of the Resources List dialog displays booking blocks
browsers for BandPLAN resource Work Orders and activities,
(Link only) when adding resources to, or replacing resources in, a
Work Order.
l <Frame Only> displays an outline of the booking
blocks. Text is displayed according to the
appropriate Display View.
l <Solid> displays a solid booking block. The fill color
or gradient corresponds to either the Status of the
corresponding Work Order, or the type of the
corresponding Activity. Text is displayed according
to the appropriate Display View.

Setting Description
Warn when booking duplicate resources Determines whether the ScheduLINK system displays a
in Path warning when the same resource is booked more than
once in the same Work Order path; for example, when
adding a second segment on same resource to a Work
Order.
l Yes displays Resource Description is already
booked. Book again?” to indicate that the same
resource is being booked twice, even if the resource
has enough capacity available to accept both
bookings.
l No allows the user to book a resource twice in the
same work order; the system only displays a
warning if the required capacity exceeds the
resource’s available capacity, or the selected
segment has some other existing conflict.
Clear Billable time upon Extended Work Determines whether the billable time is removed when
Order Copy using Extended Copy to copy work orders.
l Persistent retains the values from the (Extended)
Copy Work Order dialog the last time it was used.
(Default.)
l Yes always checks the Clear Billable Time
checkbox on the (Extended) Copy Work Order
dialog.
l No always clears the Clear Billable Time checkbox
on the (Extended) Copy Work Order dialog.

Setting Description
Preserve Settings on Replacement Determines whether the following settings are transferred
from a Requirement to the Event that replaces a
requirement:
l Standard (Do not Bill)
l Tax % (First Tax)
l Tax % (Second Tax)
l Tax % (Third Tax)
l Taxable? (First Tax)
l Taxable? (Second Tax)
l Taxable? (Third Tax)
l Overage
l External Cost
l Shippable
l Hold for Review
l Explicit Confirmation
l Problem
l Yes transfers the settings.

l No does not transfer the settings. (Default.)
Resizing of User select dialog to be Determines whether the current user session retains any
persistent changes to the height and/or width of certain dialogs.
l Yes retains any changes to the height and width of a
given dialog, until the user logs out.
l No always displays dialogs related to service
selection at the default height and width, even if they
were previously resized during the current user
session. (Default.)
This setting applies to the following dialogs:
l Select Services – displayed when selecting a
service from inside a work order.
l User Select Resource – displayed when assigning a
normal (non-transmission) service that contains a
User Select entry for resources.
l User Select Resource – displayed when assigning
an Uplink or Pivot service that contains a User
Select entry for transmission resources.

Setting Description
Resizing of Library Extended Query Determines whether the Extended Library Query dialog
dialog to be persistent retains the size defined by the user when the dialog is
closed and then opened again.
l Yes retains the dialog size defined by the user when
the dialog is closed and then opened again.
l No does not retain the dialog size defined by the user
when the dialog is closed and then opened again.
The dialog reverts to its default size. (Default.)
Use Enhanced library label dialog Determines whether the enhanced or standard Library
Labels dialog is displayed when the Print Labels
command is issued.
l Yes displays the enhanced Library Labels dialog.
l No displays the standard Library Labels dialog.
(Default.)
Clear label touchup after print? Determines whether changes made by the user to labels
using the Touch Up command are removed after the
labels are printed.
l Yes removes all changes made with the Touch Up
command. (Default.)
l No does not remove changes.
Clear Work Order Library Template? Determines whether the system retains information in
fields related to templates used to print labels for Library
Media Assets.
l Yes retains the specified values only while the Work
Order form is open, and clears the values when the
user exits the work order form. (This prevents values
specific to the stock of one work order from being
copied into a new work order when a user copies a
work order with Work Order Library Template
information.)
l No saves the specified values for future sessions. If
the work order is copied, the library template
information is copied as well, and may need to be
cleared or updated in the target work order(s).
(Default.)

Setting Description
Disable calendar fading on unselected Determines whether the Scheduling Calendar changes
events the appearance of other booking blocks on the calendar
when the user selects one or more blocks.
l Yes changes the appearance of booking blocks that
are currently selected:
l using highlight color, border, and font settings
l changing the appearance of overlapping, non-
selected booking blocks using dimmed color,
border, and font settings
Does not change the visibility of other, non-selected
and non-overlapping booking blocks.
l No (default) changes the appearance of booking
blocks that are currently selected using highlight
color, border, and font settings, and
Changes the appearance of all other non-selected
booking blocks using dimmed color, border, and font
settings.
Keep Company assignment on Determines whether the system retains the current
copy/move to new room? Company when the user performs a “Quick” (i.e. not
Extended) Move or Copy operation.
l Yes retains the Company currently assigned to the
Work Order.
l No re-evaluates the Company assigned to the Work
Order based on the default company of the Room
resource to which the Work Order is being moved or
copied. (Default.)
Allow meals/breaks outside of event Determines whether the user is allowed to set the time of
time? meals or breaks beyond the time booked for the work
order or activity.
l Yes allows the user to book meals and breaks
outside of the event time. (Default.)
l No does not allow the user to book meals and breaks
outside of the event time. An Invalid Time message
is displayed.
Default to ‘Extended’ tab on the User- Determines whether the Extended tab of the Resources
Select browser? List is automatically selected when selecting resources
for a work order.
l Yes selects the Extended tab of the Resources List
when selecting resources for a work order.
l No selects the By Description tab of the Resources
List when selecting resources for a work order.
(Default.)

Setting Description
Enable wide borders on work orders? Determines whether the system displays a wide border
on work order booking blocks on the scheduling calender.
Refer to Calendar Border Width Setting.
Enable wide borders on activities? Determines whether the system displays a wide border
on activity booking blocks on the scheduling calender.
Enable wide borders on selected work Determines whether the system displays a wide border
orders? on selected work order booking blocks on the scheduling
calender.
Enable wide borders on selected Determines whether the system displays a wide border
activities? on selected activity booking blocks on the scheduling
calender.
Display stock available quantity Determines the stock quantity available value that is
shown on the scheduling calendar. By default a stock
item is not removed from the available quantity amounts
until the booking in which the item is booked moves into
the past.
l Date Based displays the quantity of stock items on
hand and those currently booked in open bookings.
(Default.)
l Absolute displays the quantity of stock items on
hand minus those items already booked in active
work orders.
Production Timeline - Default Display Determines the level of detail that is displayed by default
Level when the Production Timeline is displayed.
l Project displays only the project names. Other
levels can be viewed by expanding the project
listing.
l Phase displays the project name and all phases in
the project. The work order level can be viewed by
expanding the phase listing. (Default.)
l Work Order displays the project name with all
phases expanded, showing the work orders in each
phase.

Setting Description
Use Projects time frame for calendar Determines whether the calendar displays the time frame
displays on filter/highlight by project or by the default time frame.
l Yes sets the start and end of the calendar time scale
between the first and last work order assigned to the
project. (Default.)
l No maintains the user’s present time scale.
Default Resource Group Determines the Resource Group assigned to the user.
l <Group> selects the resource group to assign to the
user.
l <none> does not link the user to a resource group.
(Default.)
Populate user notes When work order is Determines whether the reason for work order
cancelled cancellation and the initials of the person authorizing the
cancellation is recorded in the User Text 1 field.
l Yes records the reason for work order cancellation
and identifies the person authorizing the
cancellation.
l No does not record the reason for work order
cancellation. Cancellation details are recorded only if
a specific resource is cancelled. (Default.)
Default Earliest Start time for smart Allows the user to specify the default Time value of the
Work Order/Process Earliest Start setting when creating a new smart Work
Order from the ScheduALL for Windows and ScheduALL
WebApp applications. (The Date portion is determined by
the system using the current date.) Default value is 09:00
a.m.
Default Deadline time for smart Work Allows the user to specify the default Time value of the
Order/Process Deadline setting when creating a new smart Work Order
from the ScheduALL for Windows and ScheduALL
WebApp applications. (The Date portion is determined by
the system using the current date.) Default value is 05:00
p.m.
Default to Quoted tab on service Displays the Quoted tab automatically when the Select
selection Services dialog displays.
l Yes displays the Quoted tab automatically. The tab
lists only services that have been assigned to the
Quote associated with the booked room.
l No displays the All tab. (Default.)

Setting Description
Enable Use Selected Only on Work Determines whether the user can perform extended
Order Query Operations? operations on all orders resulting from a work order query
when no work orders are selected.
l Yes disables extended operations on all work orders
when none are selected. The 'Selected only' check
box on the Results tab of the Work Order Query
dialog is automatically checked and disabled when
the dialog loads. The Operations button is disabled
unless one or more work orders is selected.
l No allows extended operations on all work orders
listed in the Results tab of the Work Order Query
dialog when none are selected. (Default.)
Create Package from Quote? Determines whether projects created from quotes by the
user are Packages (have the option Bill as a Package
selected) or Projects (do not have the option Bill as a
Package selected).
l Yes creates a Package type project from the quote
(Billed as Package). (Default.)
l No creates a Project from a quote (not Billed as
Package).
Open Work Order in Read Only Mode? Determines whether the work orders opened by the user
display in Edit Mode or View Mode.
l Yes sets all work orders opened by the user to View
Mode. If the user has permission to edit the work
order, they can click Edit to change to Edit Mode.
While in Edit Mode, the user has the options to save
the work order (OK), Cancel the work order, or return
to View Only mode.
l No sets all work orders opened by the user to Edit
Mode. (Default.)

Setting Description
Change WO from Confirmed to Determines whether the system changes the status of a
Unconfirmed upon Time Change work order from Confirmed to UnConfirmed when a work
order is moved. “Moved” in this case refers to any of the
following:
l Moved – change of both Start and End
l Extended – moving Start or End out
l Shortened – moving Start or End in
A system preference exists with the same title. These
two preferences interact in the following ways:
l If the user preference is set to Follow System
Preference, then the setting in the system
preference is used.
l If the user preference is set to any other option,
then the user preference overrides the system
preference setting.
Select an option from the list:

l Follow System Preference allows the system
preference with the same name to set the option.
l <none> retains the Confirmed status when a work
order is moved. (Default.)
l 1 hour to 72 hours defines the period within which a
work order can be moved and remain the Confirmed
status.
l always sets a Confirmed work order to Unconfirmed
any time the work order is moved.
If a time period is specified (1–72 hours) and the start of
the work order, or the end of the work order, or both, are
changed by more than the specified amount, then the
work order is changed to UnConfirmed. Example: A work
order is scheduled from 2 p.m. to 6 p.m., and the time
period is set to one hour. If the start time is changed to
4 p.m. (a change of more than one hour) the status is
changed to UnConfirmed.

Setting Description
Note: If the start time and the end time are changed by
less than the specified period and the combined
time of those changes is more than the period
specified, then the status is not changed.
Example: Start time is 2 p.m. and end time is
6 p.m. Start time is changed to 1:15 p.m. (45
minute change) and end time is changed to
6:45 p.m. (45 minute change). The time period is
set to one hour. The combined time change is 1.5
hours, but since neither the start or end time
changed by more than an hour, the status is not
changed.
A system preference exists with the same title. These
two preferences interact in the following ways:
l If the user preference is set to Follow System
Preference, then the setting in the system
preference is used.
l If the user preference is set to any other option,
then the user preference overrides the system
preference setting.
Refer to Change WO from Confirmed to

Unconfirmed upon Time Change.
Auto-Deactivate SP Discount l Yes changes the state of SPDISCOUNT in a work
order from SP Discount Active to
SP Discount De-Activated. This change occurs
when a work order is opened in Edit Mode or is
modified using any method (timeline drags, API call,
etc.). The de-activated state persists unless the user
modifies the state manually. If the work order is
opened in Edit Mode and the user clicks Cancel, the
changes are not preserved. Any extended operation
could cause the flag to be modified. If the work order
is copied the state is set to its value based on the
type of account used to make the copy (client or non-
client).
l No does not automatically change the state of
SPDISCOUNT in a work order from
SP-Discount Active to SP Discount De-Activated.
(Default.)

Setting Description
Use Selected Booking as Parent for l Yes allows one of the following:
new Library Bookings? l uses the selected event as the parent of the new
(Library) event when an existing event is selected,
OR
l uses the Master Event as the new event's parent
if no event is selected.
l No always uses the Master Event as the new
(Library) event's parent. (Default.)
General User Preferences, Options Tab, Miscellaneous Options

Table 104. General (User) Preferences, Options Tab, Miscellaneous Settings
Setting Description
Confirm ScheduALL Exit Determines whether the system requests confirmation to exit the
application.
l Yes requests user confirmation before closing the application.
(Default.)
l No closes the application without requesting confirmation.
Note: Regardless of this setting, the system will display a
confirmation message if the user has unsaved data.
Key to Select within Determines the keystroke or key combination used to select items
browsers within a browser.
Desktop to automatically Determines the desktop displayed each time the application is started.
load when ScheduALL When set to “None” the Main screen is displayed.
starts
Options include all available desktops. ScheduLINK users can select
a desktop for the ScheduLINK calendar, the Ops Manager interface, or
the Ops Manager (WO) interface. Refer to User Preferences:
Desktops.
On Monthly Calendars, Determines the day on which a week starts for certain monthly
Week starts on calendars, such as the Pop-Up Calendar, Floating Calendar,
Extended Resource View, Extended Move, and Extended Copy
dialogs.
Options include all days of the week.
Weekend starts on Determines which days are highlighted as a weekend in Personnel
Manager. Select the starting day of the weekend from the list. The day
selected and the following day will be highlighted on the Personnel
Manager calendar. For example, if Friday is selected, Friday and
Saturday are indicated as weekend days.

Table 104. General (User) Preferences, Options Tab, Miscellaneous Settings (continued)
Setting Description
Re-Evaluate Extended Determines if the system updates a price based on quantity pricing
Price upon Quantity Change when the Billable Quantity is changed. For example: A VTR is priced
at $120 when booked from 1 to 10 hours, and $100 when booked from
11 to 20 hours. If the VTR is booked into a work order lasting 8 hours,
the price is $120 per hour.
l Yes automatically recalculates the price if a changed booking
time or quantity results in the quantity price jumping to the next
pricing level. In the stated example, when the session is extended
to last 12 hours, the price changes to $100 per hour.
l No does not change the price upon quantity change. In the stated
example, when the session is extended to last 12 hours, the price
remains $120 per hour.
Re-Evaluate Cost upon Determines whether the system automatically recalculates cost
Quantity Change values (including Vendor Cost pricing methods) based on changes to
Cost Quantity. By default, the Cost Quantity matches the Used
Quantity.
l Yes automatically recalculates cost values when the Cost
Quantity is changed.
l No does not recalculate cost values when the Cost Quantity is
changed. Users can manually recalculate costs as necessary.
Preferred Language Determines the language selected by default at the Log In dialog. The
selection made at the Log In dialog determines the field and button
labels displayed by the application. Refer to Using Developer’s
Toolkit for information on customizing interface text to other
languages.
l Choices include English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, and
Other.
l English is the default selection.
Preferred Language Determine which language is shown on all screens except the login
(WebApp Only) page in WebApp. Choices include:
l English (Default.)
l French
l Spanish
User Time Zone Select the time zone in which the user operates, if they are in a
different region from the server system. (Refer to Base Region.)
Choices include all time zones defined in the Multi-Region Settings of
System Preferences.
l Select a time zone to assign the user to that time zone.
l Select <None> to allow the system to use the time zone
specified in the operating system as the user’s default time zone.

Setting Description
Consider Requirements Determines the behavior when a user attempts to assign a resource to
a work order, and the category and type of the resource match an
existing Requirement in the work order.
l Prompt User allows the user to select “Yes” to replace the
matching requirement with the resource, or select “No” to retain
the open requirement add the resource as a separate item.
l Always Assign automatically replaces an existing requirement in
the work order with the actual resource.
l Never Assign retains the open requirement and adds the
resource as a separate item.
Show Home Page Determines whether the background area of the application displays
the specified Home Page File.
l Yes displays the Home Page file as the application background.
l No displays a gray application background.
When this preference is set to Yes, the Home page is displayed. The
user can also click Show Home Page from the Window menu.
Maximizing a window within the application will hide the Home page.
Changing this setting requires the user to log out and log in again or
use the menu command. Refer to Custom Home Page.
Home Page File Identifies the file (HTM or HTML) or the website address to be
displayed as a home page within the background area.
An optional component in the installation process copies a default
home page file to the \html\Homepage\index.html folder of the
specified installation folder.
Disregard Pad Settings Determines whether the Lead, Ready, Bumper, and Cleanup options
from Room/Master Event? are selected when the Change Times dialog is displayed. This also
determines whether the system automatically assigns the Bumper,
Lead, and Clean-up times from the Room properties to resource
bookings created in that Room.
l Yes displays the Lead, Ready, Bumper, and Cleanup options as
cleared and assigns the appropriate settings for the room to
resources booked in the room. If the resource has assigned
Bumper, Lead, and Clean-up times, the room settings override the
resource settings.
l No displays the Lead, Ready, Bumper, and Cleanup options as
selected and does not apply room-based periods to the resource.
If the resource has assigned Lead, Ready, Bumper, and Cleanup
times, the resource settings are applied.
Show week number during Determines whether certain dialogs (such as the Pop-Up Calendar,
calendar selection Extended Copy, and Extended Move dialogs) display a navigator
interface based on the number of weeks in the year. For example, the
first week in June generally occurs during Week 23 of the year.

Setting Description
Use 'To' instead of 'BCC' Determines whether the system puts target e-mail address into the To
when sending E-Mails field or the Blind Carbon Copy (BCC) field when sending notifications
and reports.
l Yes puts target addresses into the To field. Each recipient will
see the e-mail addresses of all other recipients on the e-mail.
l No puts target addresses into the BCC field. Recipients will see
only their own e-mail address. (Default.)
Show Availability in Determines whether the system displays the number of resources
Extended Monthly available in the header row of the Extended Monthly Resource View
Resource View? dialog. Refer to Extended Monthly View in the Scheduling chapter of
the ScheduALL Users Guide for more information.
Use Client default Shipping Determines whether the default shipping address of the client
Address? assigned to a work order is automatically applied as the shipping
address for a parcel created by the work order.
l Yes automatically applies the client’s default shipping address to
a parcel created by the work order.
l No allows the user to select the parcel’s shipping address.
(Default)
Sort Library Traffic from (Requires Media Manager System.) Determines the order in which the
latest to earliest? Traffic Activity browser lists Check In, Check Out, and Move To
entries. (By default this browser is located on the History/Other tab in
the Media Manager System.)
l Yes lists the most recent date at the top of the list, and the oldest
date at the bottom.
l No lists the oldest date at the top of the list, and the most recent
date at the bottom. (Default.)
Sort Library Tiered (Requires Library System.) Determines the order in which the items on
Locations by Tiered the Library Location Hierarchy dialog are listed.
Description?
l Yes sorts by the Tiered Location Description column.
l No sorts by the Description column. (Default.)
Launch Dub Order/Source Determines whether the DUB Order dialog automatically displays
form upon booking onto when a duplication service is booked into a work order using the
Work Order? Duplication tab of the Work Order dialog.
l Yes displays the DUB Order dialog.
l No does not display the DUB Order dialog. (Default.)

Setting Description
Warn if Booking Resource Allows the system to generate a warning when the user attempts to
without Requirement add a resource to a work order when there is no open Requirement that
corresponds to the resource.
l Yes generates a warning when the user attempts to add a
resource to the work order, and the work order does not have a
matching open requirement.
l No allows the user to add resources without checking for a
matching requirement. (Default.)
Default Holiday Region Determines the holiday region and associated holidays applied to the
scheduling calendar. Refer to Holiday Regions for more information.
l Options include all configured holiday regions.
l <Base> uses the default holiday region specified by the system
preferences. (Default.)
First Week of Year Starts Determines how the system identifies the first week of the year for
on week numbering.
l January 1st - Week 1 is the week in which January 1st falls.
(Default.)
l First 4 Days Week - Week 1 is the first week of the year that is at
least 4 days long.
Use Extended Library Determines whether the system displays the standard Library Query
Query? dialog, or a larger query dialog with additional fields, browsers, and
information.
l Yes displays the expanded query with additional fields.
l No displays the standard Library Query dialog.
Open Extended Library (Media Manager only) Determines whether the system automatically
Query By Default opens both the Standard and the Extended Library Query forms when
a user initiates a Library Query.
l Yes opens both the Standard and the Extended Library Query
forms when a user initiates a Library Query.
l No opens only the Standard Library Query form when a user
initiates a Library Query.
Display only Projects With Determines whether the Project Manager dialog displays the full list of
Self as Project Supervisor projects, or a limited list of projects.
l Yes displays only the list of projects assigned to the Producer
entry linked with the current login (as described in Link to
Producer). If the current login does not have a Producer
assigned, the Project Manager displays the full list of projects.
l No displays all projects in the system. (Default.)
Type-Ahead Delay for Determines the delay between when a user stops typing and when the
Browser Searches system attempts to locate matching entries in certain text input fields
(milliseconds) (such as the Client and Project fields in the Work Order dialog).

Setting Description
Base Server Locale Determines the values set in the Custom Short Time Format, Custom
Long Time Format, Custom Short Date Format, and Custom Long
Date Format preferences, if they are not already set.
Note: This setting does not override any manually set values in the
fields listed.
l <None> displays time information in the format specified for the
local machine’s current locale. (Default.)
l Any locale displays time information in the format specified for
the selected locale in Windows Regional Settings. For example,
Argentina (Spanish) displays time in the format hh:mm:ss (i.e.
12-hour format with “a.m.” and “p.m.” identifiers), while Sweden
(Swedish) displays time in the format H:mm:ss (i.e. 24-hour
format).
Refer to Specifying a Regional Locale for more information.
Use Time Format from Overrides the base regional setting and specifies the time format
Server Locale displayed by the ScheduALL application. The setting affects only the
format of the displayed information, and does not adjust the actual
time or date values.
l <None> displays time information in the format specified for the
local machine’s current locale. (Default.)
l Any locale displays time information in the format specified for
the selected locale in Windows Regional Settings. For example,
Argentina (Spanish) displays time in the format hh:mm:ss (i.e.
12-hour format with “a.m.” and “p.m.” identifiers), while Sweden
(Swedish) displays time in the format H:mm:ss (i.e. 24-hour
format).
Custom Short Time Format Overrides the base regional setting and specifies the short time format
(ScheduALL WebApp Only) (hours and minutes) displayed by the ScheduALL application. The
setting affects only the format of the displayed information, and does
not adjust the actual time values.
l <none> does not use custom settings and displays the base
regional setting.
l H displays the hour without a leading zero, such as 9:30.
l HH displays the hour with a leading zero, such as 09:30.
l mm displays minutes in two digits, such as 09:30.
l tt displays a.m. or p.m. format, such as 9:30 p.m.

Setting Description
Custom Long Time Format Overrides the base regional setting and specifies the long time format
(ScheduALL WebApp Only) (hours, minutes, and seconds) displayed by the ScheduALL
application. The setting affects only the format of the displayed
information, and does not adjust the actual time values.
l <none> does not use custom settings and displays the base
regional setting.
l H displays the hour without a leading zero, such as 9:30.
l HH displays the hour with a leading zero, such as 09:30.
l mm displays minutes in two digits, such as 09:30.
l ss displays seconds as two digits, such as 09:30:16.
l tt displays a.m. or p.m. format, such as 9:30 p.m.
Use Date Format from Overrides the base regional setting and specifies the date format
Server Locale displayed by the ScheduALL application. The setting affects only the
time or date values.
l <None> displays date information in the format specified for the
local machine’s default locale. (Default.)
l Any locale displays date information in the short date and long
date formats specified for the selected locale in Windows
Regional Settings. For example, Argentina (Spanish) displays
short dates in the format dd/MM/yyyy (i.e. day, month, and year,
separated by the “/” character), while Sweden (Swedish) displays
short dates in the format yyyy-MM-dd (i.e. year, month, and day,
separated by the “-” character).

Setting Description
Custom Short Date Format Overrides the base regional setting and specifies the short date format
(ScheduALL WebApp Only) displayed by the ScheduALL application. The setting affects only the
date values.
l <none> does not display a custom format and displays the base
regional setting.
l d displays a single digit day without a leading zero, such as
6-5-2005.
l dd displays a single digit day with a leading zero, such as
06-05-2005.
l M displays a single digit month without a leading zero,
such as 6-25-2005.
l MM displays a single digit month with a leading zero, such as
06-25-2005.
l MMM displays an abbreviation for the month, such as
15-Aug-2005.
l yy displays the year in two digits, such as 06-05-12.
l yyyy displays the year in four digits, such as 06-05-2012.
Custom Long Date Format Overrides the base regional setting and specifies the long date format
(ScheduALL WebApp Only) displayed by the ScheduALL application. The setting affects only the
date values.
l <none> does not display a custom format and displays the base
regional setting.
l dd displays day with a leading zero, such as 06-05-2005.
l dddd displays day in text, such as Thursday, August 16, 2005.
l MMMM displays the full month, such as 15-August-2005.
l yyyy displays the year in four digits, such as 06-05-2012.
Use Number and Currency Overrides the base regional setting and specifies the general number
Format from Locale and currency number formats displayed by the ScheduALL
application. The setting affects only the format of the displayed
information, and does not adjust the actual numeric values.
l <None> displays date information in the format specified for the
local machine’s default locale. (Default.)
l Any locale displays number and currency information in the
formats specified for the selected locale in Windows Regional
Settings. For example, English (United States) uses a comma
(,) to group numbers and a period (-) to indicate a decimal, while
Swedish uses a space ( ) to group numbers and a comma (,) to
indicate a decimal.

Setting Description
Display Available Volume (Requires Rental module) Determines whether the available quantity
When Assigning Resources of volume-based resources are displayed on the Resources List
dialog.
l Yes displays the available quantity of each resource.
l No does not display the available quantity of each resource.
(Default.)
Extended Volume Resource Reserved.
View Flyover
Consider Service Reserved.
Requirements
Disable Destination Missing (Requires ScheduLINK) Determines if a destination missing warning
warnings? when saving an event if the event is not an adjustment booking and
the first event is a transmission source.
l Yes does not display a destination missing warning.
l No displays a destination missing warning. (Default.)
Legacy Web Application Determines the date and time number format used for legacy web
Time/Date/Number Format applications.
l Follow Server Localeapplies the date and time format used by
the server on which IIS is running.
l Follow Web Browser applies the date and time format used by
the web browser being used. (Default.)
Apply default lead, bumper Determines whether the new resource’s lead, bumper, and cleanup
and cleanup time of new time values are applied when replacing a booked resource. Refer to
resource upon replace? General Resource – Other and Room Properties – Other.
l Yes replaces the lead, bumper, and cleanup times in the work
order with the new resource’s default times. These times are
displayed on the Main tab of the resource booking dialog
(double-click the resource in the work order’s resource browser).
l No does not replace the indicated times. (Default.)
Select default library Determines the template which is used when the Block Update using
template for block Template command is issued.
updates...
Click the input field and click the [...] button to select an account code,
or click clear ( ) to remove the current code. (Default is blank/empty.)
Batch Scanner Type Determines the scanner type attached to the work station.
l Standard selects the Standard scanner type. (Default.)
l Percon selects the Percon scanner type (includes PSC and
Datalogic scanners).
Alarm Scan File Determines the sound file to be played when the prompt Scanned item
could not be found. Create new Library Item? dialog is displayed. Click
to select the sound (.wav) file.

Setting Description
Use consolidated pick list in Determines how Job Numbers are listed when the user clicks Manual
reports and queries? Selection for Job Numbers on the Jobs tab of a report dialog or on the
Work Orders tab of the Work Order Query.
l Yes displays the Select Job # dialog listing only the job numbers
found in the system.
l No displays the Select Job # dialog with a browser list of all work
orders found in the system. (Default.)
Show Future Scans in Determines whether the browser on the Traffic tab of the Library Entry
library traffic browser? screens show “WO Future Booking” scans.
l Yes includes “WO Future Booking” scans in the traffic browser
on the Traffic tab, in addition to other scan types, such as
Location and Inventory Scans. (Default.)
l No suppresses “WO Future Booking” scans from the traffic
browser on the Traffic tab. The browser only shows other scan
types, such as Location and Inventory Scans.
Prompt Compensation Determines if the Select quantity for... dialog is displayed when adding
Factor Quantity? an external compensation factor against a booked resource.
l Yes displays the dialog when adding an external compensation
factor against a booked resource. (Default.)
l No does not display the dialog.
General User Preferences, Options Tab, Email Options

Refer to E-mail Profile in User Preferences for information on configuring these preferences.
General User Preferences, Options Tab, Visible Desktops Options
The Visible Desktops preferences determine if the listed desktop is available to the user on the
Desktops menu. The list of menu items depends on the products that are licensed to your site and
also on desktop customizations done by an administrator. Table 105 describes some examples of
available desktops.
Table 105. General (User) Preferences, Options Tab, Visible Desktops Settings
Setting Description
Terrestrial Network Determines if the Terrestrial Network List desktop is available to the
user on the Desktops menu. This desktop is used in the ScheduLINK
module.
l Yes displays the desktop name on the Desktops menu. (Default.)
l No does not display the desktop name on the Desktops menu.
Operations Manager (WO) Determines if the Operations Manager (WO) desktop is available to
the user on the Desktops menu. This desktop is used in the
Operations Manager module with ScheduLINK.
l Yes displays the desktop name on the menu. (Default.)
l No does not display the desktop name on the menu.

Table 105. General (User) Preferences, Options Tab, Visible Desktops Settings (continued)
Setting Description
Rental Determines if the Rental desktop is available to the user on the
Desktops menu. This desktop is used in the Rental module.
l Yes displays the desktop name on the menu. (Default.)
l No does not display the desktop name on the menu.
General User Preferences, Options Tab, SMS Options

Table 106. General (User) Preferences, Options Tab, SMS Settings
Setting Description
Display View for Message Determines the Display View used for the body of an SMS message.
Body
l <none> does not use a Display View for the message body.
(Default.)
l Display View name uses the selected Display View for the body
of an SMS message.
Alarms and Locales

Alarm files are WAV audio files played through a user’s computer sound card for specified events.
Locales are defined by the Regional Settings of the Microsoft Windows operating system.
Specifying an Alarm File

To select the alarm sound file (the default is blank):
1. From the File menu, select User Preferences and click General.
2. Click the Options tab.
3. In the Scheduling section, click the box next to Alarm Sound File.
4. Enter the path and file name of the alarm sound file, OR
Click the Browse button ( [...] ) to open a standard Windows file dialog and select a file.
5. Click the preview button to play the file.
6. Click OK.
Specifying a Regional Locale

Locales are defined by the Regional Settings of the Microsoft Windows operating system. To select a
locale as an override in the User Time Local or User Date Locale preferences:
1. From the Windows Start menu click Control Panel.
2. Double-click Regional Options.
3. On the General tab, select a language and country from the Your locale (location) list box.
(While Windows settings display locales by language and then country, the ScheduALL
system displays locales by country and then language.)
4. Click the Time tab to view the time format of that locale, or
Click the Date tab to view the date format of that locale.
Note: The ScheduALL system uses the default settings for the selected locale only. It is not
necessary to install an input locale for use in the Windows system.

Printing User Preferences

When you click Print in the General [User] Preferences dialog, the User Preferences dialog displays.
The dialog contains all of the current General user preference settings and is intended for output
purposes only. Any changes made in this dialog do not change the actual user preference settings.
The Import button is used only to add text from an external file to the dialog, and does not import user
preference settings. The Export button is used only to send the text in the dialog to a text file, and
does not export the user preference settings. Refer to Notes Editor for more information.
User Preferences: Desktops

The ScheduALL system allows the user to save selected display settings as desktops. The user
selects the screen, displays the desired information, and saves the display as a desktop. Desktops
provide a convenient way of instantly returning to a screen display, tailored to a user’s job functions.
For example, a user could create the following desktops:
l The scheduling screen, with a one-day view of the schedule for the Production resource group.
l The scheduling screen, with a one-day view of the schedule for the Satellite – Ku-band
resource group. (Link only)
l The Personnel Manager Activity by Category screen, with all editors displayed.
l The extended resource view for a room.
l The Operations Manager dialog, with custom pane sizes and resource groups selected. (Link
only)
To create a new desktop refer to Creating a New Desktop. Desktops are divided into two types,
Public and Private:
l A Public desktop is available to all users in the system, and is managed through the Desktop
Maintenance dialog described in Desktop Maintenance - Public Desktops.
l A Private desktop is only available to the user that created it, and is managed through the
Desktop Maintenance dialog described in Desktop Maintenance - Private Desktops.
The following security settings control how users interact with desktops:
l Can Modify Desktops (Public and Private/Self)?
l Can Edit Private Desktops of ALL Users?
Creating a New Desktop

To create a new desktop:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system with the appropriate permissions to create or modify
desktops. (Refer to Can Modify Desktops (Public and Private/Self)?.)
2. Use the scheduling calendar or other navigation tools to display the desired dialog as it should
appear each time you display the desktop.
Note: Scheduling calendars saved as desktops display the resource group selected when the
desktop was saved. Dialogs display the top-level dialog, but do not display sub-dialogs.

3. From the Desktops menu, click Create a New Desktop. The New Desktop dialog displays.
Figure 171. Desktop Properties Dialog

4. Enter the Desktop Name, from 1 to 29 characters (letters, numbers, or special symbols), to
clearly identify the desktop in the desktops list.
5. Select Public to create a desktop available to all users (default), or
Select Private to create a desktop that is not available to other users.
6. Click Set Icon to select an optional icon to display next to the desktop entry on the Desktops
menu. The Select Icon window displays.
l Select an icon from the list, and click Select, or
Click Cancel to close the window without selecting an icon.
l Click Clear Icon to remove the current icon from the current desktop entry.
7. Select the Hotkey Definition field, and press the desired keys on the keyboard to define a
hotkey combination used to launch the desktop. Do not use the SHIFT and CTRL keys in the
same combination. Click Clear to remove a defined hotkey for the current desktop entry.
Note: It is not necessary to enter or clear information in the “Details” section of the New
Desktop dialog. This information is intended for use with Developers Toolkit.
8. Click OK when you have finished entering the desktop properties.
9. View the Desktops menu to make sure the new desktop is listed.

Desktop Maintenance - Public Desktops

To modify a desktop that is visible to all users:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system with the appropriate permissions to create or modify public
2. From the File menu, select User Preferences and click Desktops. The Desktop Maintenance
dialog displays.
Figure 172. Desktop Maintenance Dialog

3. Select a desktop entry and click Properties to view the desktop settings. The Desktop
5. Select Public to create a desktop available to all users (default), OR
l Select an icon from the list, and click Select, OR
It is not necessary to enter or clear information in the “Details” section of the New Desktop
dialog. This information is intended for use with Developers Toolkit.
To delete a desktop that is visible to all users:

CAUTION: Deleting a desktop does not prompt the user for confirmation, and it is not
possible to undelete a desktop.
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system with the appropriate permissions to create or modify public
2. From the File menu, select User Preferences and click Desktops. The Desktop Maintenance
dialog displays.
3. Select a desktop and click Delete to permanently remove the desktop entry.

To manage the list of desktops:

l Click Move Up or Move Down to change the order of the list.
l Click Sort to sort the list alphabetically.
Desktop Maintenance - Private Desktops

To modify a private desktop that belongs to another user:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system with the appropriate permissions to create or modify private
2. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click Edit Private Desktops. The
Private Desktop Maintenance dialog displays.
Figure 173. Private Desktop Maintenance Dialog

3. Select a user name. The list of private desktops for that user displays.
To change the properties of a desktop:

1. Select a desktop and click Edit Properties. The Desktop Properties dialog displays.
3. Select Public to create a desktop available to all users (default), OR
l Select an icon from the list, and click Select, or
It is not necessary to enter or clear information in the “Details” section of the dialog. This
information is intended for use with Developers Toolkit.

To change the appearance of a desktop:

1. Select a desktop and click Edit Desktop.
2. Change the appearance of the desktop.
3. From the Window menu, select Private Desktops Maintenance.
4. Click Save Desktop.
To manage the list of desktops:

l Click Move Up or Move Down to change the order of the list.
l Click Sort to sort the list alphabetically.
User Preferences: Change Password

A user with the appropriate permissions can change his or her login password at any time. Passwords
may contain letters, numbers, and special characters, and are not case-sensitive. The System
Preferences Allow some or all of User Name in Password and Minimum Length for User
Password affect the password field.
To change a user password:
1. From the File menu, select User Preferences and click Change Password. The Change
Password dialog displays.
Figure 174. Change Password Dialog

2. Enter the current password in the Old Password field.
3. Enter the new password in the New Password field.
4. Enter the new password again in the Confirm New Password field.
5. Click OK to save the changes and exit the dialog.
Note: The ScheduALL Supervisor can also change the user’s login password through the User
Profiles and Security settings.
User Preferences: Override System Fonts

User Preferences allow each user to change fonts used to display various screen elements. These
font selections override the system fonts, if the user has permission to change their own preferences.
(Refer to Adding ScheduALL Users.)
To override the system fonts at the user level:
1. From the File menu, select User Preferences and click Override System Fonts. The Font
Selection dialog displays.
2. Select the screen element to change, and click Edit. The Font dialog displays. Select another
Font, Font style, Size, or Script.

The ScheduALL system allows the supervisor to change fonts used to display various screen
elements on a system-wide basis. (Refer to System Preferences: System Fonts.)
Custom Home Page

The ScheduALL system allows a user to display a custom home page as the application background,
within the ScheduALL application but behind any active dialogs. The home page supports any valid
HTML content, including text, graphics, and links to Web sites on the intranet or Internet, as well as
customized links to specific areas of the ScheduALL application. This allows users or supervisors to
create a single page with links to the majority of frequently used ScheduALL commands, as well as
external content such as a department intranet site.
An optional component in the installation process copies a default home page file (index.html) and
command reference (Cmnds.html) to the \html\Homepage\ folder of the specified installation folder. A
website address can also be specified. The default home page file serves as a sample template for
administrators. From the Window menu, click Show Home Page to display the home page. User
Preferences control the display of the home page. Refer to Show Home Page and Home Page File.

User Profiles and Security

Overview
The powerful ScheduALL security features control the level of access users have to different areas,
features, and information in the system. A profile refers to a set of access rights and permissions.
Table 107. User Profiles
Profile Description
User User accounts identify each login name and password used to access the
ScheduALL system. The administrator can set individual permissions in the
user’s profile, or select a Parent Profile and/or Group Template to adopt access
rights and permissions from the profile of a Group entry. If the user is assigned
to a Group, permissions for the user are set only at the Group level and the
Profile button for the user’s account is disabled. Refer to Permissions.
Group Group profiles establish common access rights and permissions for related job
functions. The administrator assigns security settings to the group, and then
applies the group name to user accounts as either a Parent Profile or a Group
Template. When a user is assigned to a group, the group name is displayed
after the user’s name, such as MARY (SCHEDULERS). A user group should
not contain more than 999 users in a single group. Refer to Permissions.
l The administrator selects a Group entry as a Parent Profile to apply all
access rights and permissions from the group’s profile. The group profile
overrides all user profile settings, unless the System Preference Allow
User Profile Overrides is set to Yes.
l The administrator selects a Group entry as a Group Template to apply only
the Room & Resource Groups, Client Groups, Companies, and Vendor
security settings from the group profile. These settings override the user
profile settings, and the appropriate section of the Parent Profile if one is
assigned.
Client Client profiles identify login names and passwords related to a Client entry,
described in Client, Contact, and Agency Setup. A client profile determines
what areas of the system to which a clientXXXspecific user has access, and
whether the user can view and/or modify bookings and information related to
other clients.
Agency Agency profiles identify login names and passwords related to an Agency entry,
described in Client, Contact, and Agency Setup. An agency profile
determines what areas of the system to which an agencyXXXspecific user has
access, and whether the user can view and/or modify bookings and information
related to the agency, and clients associated with that agency.
Note: Create user, group, client, and agency profiles after the rooms, resource groups, client groups,
and companies (if licensed for the Multi-Company module) are created in the ScheduALL
database.

ScheduALL User Accounts

ScheduALL version 5.04 introduced several improvements and options in the area of user account
licensing. There are now four types of user accounts, and licensed account seats, for the purposes of
licensing and session management.
Table 108. User Account Types
Account Type Description

Regular User Regular User accounts count against the pool of Regular User
account seats. If all seats in the Regular User pool are already taken,
a Regular User account cannot log in until another Regular User
account logs out.
Named User Named User accounts are accounts that do not count against any
other pool, and can log in even if the seats in all other pools are already
taken.
Client User Client User accounts are linked to a Client or Agency, and count
against the pool of Client User account seats.
l If the license does not specify a separate pool of Client User
seats, any user linked to a Client or Agency is counted against
the Regular User pool.
l If a license specifies a separate pool of Client User seats, any
user linked to a Client or Agency can log in only if there are seats
available in the Client User pool.
Read-only User Read-only User accounts are identified as a View Only User in the
account configuration, and count against the pool Read-Only User
seats. Read-only Users can view information in the ScheduALL
system, but cannot create, modify, or delete any information in the
system.
For existing facilities, license counts are applied as follows:

l ScheduALL User, .NET User, and Web User accounts are all now considered Regular User
accounts.
l .NET View-Only User and Web View-Only User accounts are now considered Read-only User
accounts.
l If a user account is configured with more than one account type setting (Named Seat, Link to
Client or Agency, and View Only User), the user is counted against a pool as follows:
l An account with the Named Seat option selected (checked) is always a Named User,
regardless of other settings.
l An account linked to a Client or Agency that also has the View Only User option selected
(checked) is counted as a Read-only User.
l Administrators can allocate Regular User account seats to administrator-defined logical
groups, and then identify the group to which a user account belongs. Any licenses not
allocated to groups remain in a general or shared pool. These allocations can be used to
guarantee a certain number of seats for specific departments or operational groups. Refer to
Login Groups.

Adding ScheduALL Users

Users are the people who work in the ScheduALL system. You can assign each user to a user group
with a parent profile, or you can assign a totally unique profile to an individual user.
Note: It is recommended that you limit the number of individual users with unique security profiles
(not assigned to a parent profile) in order to better manage the security settings in ScheduALL.
To add a user:
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click User Profiles & Security.
2. Click the Users tab to bring that page forward.
3. Click Add User. The Add User dialog displays.
Figure 175. Add User Dialog

4. Enter the information about the new user.

Table 109. Add User Dialog Items
Item Description
Username Determines the name used to log on to the ScheduALL
system. This name must be unique, and is not case-
sensitive.
Password Determines the password used to validate the Username.
The password can consist of letters, numbers, and special
characters, and is not case-sensitive.
l The System Preferences in Password Options affect
the values allowed in the Password field.
l The Security setting Can Change Own Password?
determines whether the user can change his or her own
password.
Confirm Verifies that the Password was entered correctly.
PIN Determines the Personal Identification Number used to
validate the current user.
l The System Preferences in PIN Password Options,
affect the values allowed in the PIN field.
l The System Preference Login Method for Switch
User Feature:, determines the method used to validate
the current user.
Confirm PIN Verifies that the PIN was entered correctly.
Employee ID Identifies the employee ID number assigned to the user.
Email E-mail address for the user.
Parent Profile To add the user to a user group, select (check) Parent
Profile and select the group from the list.
To specify individual permissions without adding a user to a
group, deselect (clear) Parent Profile, and click Profile to
access the User Permissions dialog.
Refer to Add User Groups and Define a Parent Profile
for instructions on defining a profile for a user group.
Note: User groups should not contain more than 999 users
in a single group.
Group Template Select (check) Group Template and select a user group to
assign the group as a template. The current profile adopts
only the security settings for the Room and Resource
Groups, Client Groups, Companies, and Vendor sections
from the specified group.

Table 109. Add User Dialog Items (continued)
Item Description
Supervisory Rights Select (check) Supervisory Rights to grant the user full
supervisory rights (the user cannot be assigned a parent
profile to be granted supervisory rights). Enabling this option
allows the user the same access as the Supervisor
account.
Note: Supervisory rights cannot be granted to Client or
Agency account logins.
View Only User Select (check) View Only User to allow the user to view
information according to the access policies defined in the
appropriate user/security profile, but prevent the user from
adding, modifying, or removing any item in the system.
View Only user accounts are licensed separately from
“standard” users, and connections are managed using a
separate license pool.
Web Service Login Only Select (check) to create an account that can be used to
log on to the ScheduALL system from a Web service, but
cannot be used to log on to the system from the ScheduALL
for Windows client application. A Web Service Only Login
that connects to the ScheduALL system through an external
service has the equivalent of supervisor-level access.

Item Description
Account Status Displays the current status of the user logon account, and
determines whether or not the user account can log on to the
ScheduALL for Windows application.
l Active indicates that the user account has logged in
within the inactivity limit specified by the system
preference, or has been manually changed to allow the
user to log on. If the user attempts to log on, the system
allows the user to log on normally.
l InActive indicates that the user has exceeded the
inactivity limit specified by the system preference, or
has been manually changed to disallow access. If the
user attempts to log on, the system displays the
message “User is Inactive” and prevents the user from
logging in using the current account.
l Locked Out indicates that the user will not be able to
log on after a number of unsuccessful attempts. The
supervisor must then manually reset the user’s account
status. The number of attempts is set in the Number of
Failed Login Attempts to Lock out a User Account
system preference. Refer to Number of Failed Login
Attempts to Lock out a User Account.
l Revoked indicates that the user account has been
manually changed to disallow access. If the user
attempts to log on, the system displays the message
“User access has been revoked” and prevents the user
from logging in using the current account.
Named Seat Determines if this user is guaranteed a login into the
system. Select (check) Named Seat to make this a
guaranteed user. A user with a named seat can always log
on regardless of how many other users are currently logged
on.
Note: Requires the Named Seat license. The license
determines how many named seats are available. If
the license is not installed, or the maximum number
of named seats are assigned, the Named Seat option
is not available.
Login Group Defines the Login Group to which the user belongs. Refer to
Login Groups.
Note: A user cannot belong to a login group and have the
Named Seat option selected. If the user belongs to a
login group and the Named Seat option is selected,
the login group is removed.

Item Description
Smart Time Only User Defines the user as one who only has access to the Smart
Time tab in the WebApp program. The user is not able to
access the ScheduALL system. When logged in, this user
will be added to the number of simultaneous Smart Time
Only users.
Password never expires Prevents the system from prompting this user to change
their password. This option overrides the password
expiration system preference. Refer to Password
Expiration Term (in Days).
SSO/Active Directory User Determines if the user account participates in Active
Directory authentication. User accounts that are not flagged
as SSO/Active Directory User will not attempt to
authenticate against the Active Directory domain controller.
Select (check) this option to set the user as an Active
Directory user.
Note: This option must be selected for users using Active
Directory or Single Sign On to authenticate.

Item Description
Link to Resource Displays the Select Resource dialog and allows the
supervisor to associate a user login to a specific resource
entry (such as linking the Mary login to the Mary White
personnel resource in sample data).
Linking a login to a resource limits the user’s access to the
activities for the specified resource in certain dialogs and
circumstances, and/or automatically opens the activity
screen specific to the selected resource when the user
displays certain dialogs.
Dialogs which use this preference include:
l Activity by Resource dialog
l Activity by Person dialog (in the Personnel Manager
module)
l Time Capture dialog (in the Time Capture module)
Assigning a resource to a user profile provides these
benefits:
l In Personnel Reports and Resource Utilization
Reports, preselects the specified resource.
l In Personnel Manager, when selecting resources to
display, preselects the specified resource.
l In TimeCapture, preselects the specified resource; if
user does not have access to view Other it also
hides the Select Resource button.
l If the user does not have access to edit other
Personnel Resource bookings ("Can Edit Other
Personnel Resources" = No), the user cannot edit
events in a work order for any resource other than the
assigned resource. Refer to Can Edit Other
Personnel Resources.
Click Release ( ) to remove the link to the resource.

Item Description
Link to Producer Displays the Select Producer dialog and allows the
supervisor to associate a user login to a specific Producer
entry. Linking a login to a producer adds the Producer entry
to the list of production supervisors.
Click Release ( ) to remove the link to the producer.
Note: Each producer can only be assigned to one user. If
the selected producer has been linked to another user
a message displays.

Item Description
Link to Company (Requires Multi-Company Module.) Displays the Select
Company dialog and allows the supervisor to associate a
user login to a specific Company entry. When linked to a
company, any work orders created by that user account
default to the specified Company, though the user can
manually override the Company selection for the work order
if necessary. (If user permissions are set by company, the
list of companies may be limited.)
Note: As of version 4.66, for facilities that have more than
one company defined in the MultiCompany module,
any user account not previously linked to a Company
are now by default linked to the <Unassigned
Company> entry. By default, this setting will override
the access permissions defined in the Permissions
dialog and restrict the user to the <Unassigned
Company> only. To allow users to gain access to
one or more companies based on Permissions
settings, modify each user account on the Users,
Clients, and Agencies tab. Click ( ) to the right of
the Link to Company field for each account linked to
<Unassigned Company> to clear the field.
Note: To use Company-Specific Rooms and
Company-Specific Work Order Counters in the
Multi-Company Module, this preference must be
cleared.
Note: This preference overrides any “No Access” or “View
Only” settings in the user’s room permissions in the
Company section of User Profiles and Security. For
example, if the user is linked to the Engine Room
company, but that room is set to No Access in
security, the user will still be able to create a booking
associated with the Engine Room company. The
company is automatically assigned when the booking
is created due to the user-company link. However,
the user will not be able to edit the work order
because of the security settings. Refer to
Companies.
Link Client/Agency Displays the Select Client/Agency dialog and allows the
supervisor to associate a user login to a specific client or
agency entry to create a Client User. When linked, any work
orders created by that user account default to the specified
client or agency, though the user can manually override the
selection for the work order if necessary.

Item Description
Profile Displays Permissions dialog (and all security settings) for
this group or user. Refer to Permissions.
Preferences Displays the User Preferences dialog for this user. Refer to
User Preferences for more information.
Note: The Supervisor can block the user’s access to his
user preferences. Refer to User Preferences for
instructions. If the user is not allowed to change his
user preferences, the Supervisor must set the
preferences.
Note: To activate the Preferences button, the user account
must first be saved and then modified.
PO Limit Displays the PO Limit dialog, which allows the supervisor to
enter a dollar amount limit for Purchase Orders for the user.
If the user attempts to create a PO that exceeds the limit,
the system generates a warning. This limit is also used by
the optional Notification Manager module to generate
notifications when a user exceeds the PO Limit dollar
amount.
Print Displays the Print dialog, and sends the full list of profile
items and the settings for the current user to the selected
printer. The listing is approximately six (6) pages long.
Reset Login Attempts Resets the number of login attempts by the user to 0.
User Groups and Profiles Overview

When you establish a user group, you will create a profile. The profile defines the access rights and
permissions for the group, and for all users assigned to the group. Only users with Supervisory Rights
can create and modify users, user groups and client accounts as well as modify profile settings.
An overview of the User Profiles and Settings screen is provided in this section. The procedures for
setting up user groups, users, and client users are described in detail later in this chapter.
From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click User Profiles & Security. The User
Profiles & Settings dialog displays.

Figure 176. User Profiles & Settings
User Account and Profile Tasks

To modify user accounts and profiles, click the Users tab. Perform one of the following functions:
1. Click Add User to add a new user account. Refer to Adding ScheduALL Users.
2. Select a user account and click Remove to delete the user account. If an account is identified
as a supervisor, it cannot be removed. (Click Modify and deselect (clear) the Supervisory
Rights check box to enable the Remove button for the user account.)
3. Select a user account and click Modify to change the user account settings.
4. Select a user account and click Duplicate to create a new account with the same settings as
the selected account.
5. Select a user account and click Profile to change the profile settings. Refer to Base Region
for information about individual profile items. If a user account is assigned a Parent Profile or is
identified as a supervisor, the profile settings for that user account cannot be modified
individually.
6. Click All Profiles to view and modify the profile settings for all users and groups.
If any of the groups displayed contains more than 999 users an error message displays. You
must move some of the users into another group or edit each user in the group individually.
7. Click All Preferences to view and modify general user preferences for all user accounts in the
system. These settings correspond to the Options tab of the General Preferences dialog.
(From the File menu, select User Preferences, and click General.)
8. Click Print List to send the list of user accounts and their Parent Profiles to a printer. To print
only accounts with a certain account state, select the state from the list at the top of the
dialog. Select Active, All, Inactive, Locked Out, or Revoked. The default is All.
9. Click OK to save changes and exit the dialog, or click Cancel to exit without saving any
changes.

Managing User Groups

The Groups tab of the User Profiles & Security dialog allows you to manage user groups. The
following tasks can be accomplished.
l Add
l Remove
l Modify
l Duplicate
l Change permissions
To access the dialog, from the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click User Profiles &
Security. The User Profiles & Settings dialog displays. Refer to User Account and Profile Tasks to
view the dialog.
To modify group account settings, click the Groups tab and perform one of the following functions:
1. Click Add Group to add a new group. The Add Group dialog displays.
Figure 177. User Profiles & Settings, Add Groups Dialog

2. Enter the Group name.
3. To temporarily suspend the group, click Disabled Group. Users in the group will not be able
to log on.
4. To show only users in the group that are assigned a group template, select (check) Show
Group Template Members.
5. Select a group and click Remove to delete the group. The Supervisor group cannot be deleted,
and if a group is selected as a Parent Profile, it cannot be deleted.
6. Select a group and click Modify to view a list of the group members and access the group
profile settings.
7. Select a group and click Duplicate to create a new group with the same profile.
8. Select a group and click Profile to change the profile settings for all users who have the group
assigned as a Parent Profile.
10. Click Print List to send the list of groups to a printer.
changes.

Managing Client Users

The Clients tab of the User Profiles & Security dialog allows you to manage client users. The
following tasks can be accomplished.
l Add
l Remove
l Modify
l Duplicate
To access the dialog, from the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click User Profiles &
Security. The User Profiles & Settings dialog displays. Refer to User Account and Profile Tasks to
view the dialog.
To modify client user profile settings, click the Clients tab and perform one of the following functions:
1. Click Add Client to add a new client access account. System Preferences determine
whether client accounts with an Inactive or Closed status are displayed in the selection
browser. Refer to Status of Clients to suppress from display in Selection browsers.
2. Select a client account and click Remove to delete the account.
3. Select a client account and click Modify to change the client account settings.
4. Select a client account and click Duplicate to create a new account with the same settings as
the selected account.
6. Click Print List to send the list of groups to a printer.
changes.
Add User Groups and Define a Parent Profile
There are two methods to define user groups and set profiles. The All Profiles method, which allows
the supervisor to define the profiles for all user groups at one time, is described here. This is the most
efficient method to use when new security settings have been added in a ScheduALL update. You
can also name a user group and set the profile for each group one at a time.
ScheduALL allows you to define a daily access schedule for each user group. You must define the
access schedule for each user group individually (you cannot access this feature through the All
Profiles dialog). The Security Settings tree lists options for all ScheduALL modules. It is not
necessary to set options for modules which have not been purchased.
To create user groups and define their profiles:
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click User Profiles & Security. The
User Profiles and Settings dialog displays.
2. Select the Groups tab to bring that page forward.
3. Click Add Group.
4. Enter the name of the group in the Group text box.
5. Click Profile to set the security profile for this group.

6. Click OK to save the changes, or click Cancel to exit without saving any changes.
If you want to enter the individual users now, click the Users tab to bring that page forward.
Click Add User, and enter the user name and password. If the user is to be associated with a
user group, select (check) Parent Profile, and then select the user group for this user. If the
user has a unique security profile that does not fit a parent profile, deselect (clear) Parent
Profile, and click Profile. For a more detailed explanation of the procedure for adding users,
refer to Adding ScheduALL Users.
7. Repeat the steps above to add additional groups. When you have finished entering your user
groups, click All Profiles on the User Profiles and Settings dialog. The Users Permissions
dialog displays.
Figure 178. User Permissions Dialog, All Profiles

8. Click the Expand icon ( ) next to the program area you want to access. The tree expands to
display a series of questions you must answer to determine the rights and permissions for
each user group. In this example, the Project Manager area is expanded.
Figure 179. Project Manager Expanded

9. Click the Expand icon ( ) next to each question. The tree expands further to display the name
of each user group. Because each user group may require different settings, take the time to
go through each question and define the profile accordingly. In this example, the Can Print
Projects? question is expanded.
Figure 180. Can Print Projects? Expanded

If you make a selection in the text box on the question line, that value is applied to all of the
user groups. In this example No was selected and applied to all of the user groups. If a
selection is made in the text box for one or more user groups then the entry for the question is
removed. In this example, Managers and Schedulers are allows to print projects, so the text
box for Can Print Projects? is blank.
Figure 181. Can Print Projects?, Multiple Selections

When you have finished with a profile question, you can collapse the tree to gain more display
area on your screen.

Defining User Group Access Levels

Some security settings, such as Vendor Groups, control whether users in specific user groups have
permission to access certain areas.
Follow these steps to set these access permissions.
1. Click the Expand icon ( ) next to the desired area and then expand an item below it.
2. To assign access to user groups make a selection in the top text box. In this example access
to the Vendor Group is blocked for all user groups.
Figure 182. Vendor Group, No Access for All User Groups

3. To assign access to specific user groups make a selection in the text box to the right of the
group name. In this example View Only access was granted for users in the Managers group.
Figure 183. Vendor Group, View Only Access for Managers User Group

4. Select the security setting for each user group to determine user access, as described in
Table 110.
Table 110. Access Levels
Setting Description
Follow Profile Follows the settings in the various module areas for this resource
group. For example, if the settings in the Scheduling module area
allow the user or group to access the scheduling module, and
allow them to create, edit and delete work orders, the user or
group has permission to carry out these actions for all resources
assigned to this resource group.
View Only Allows the user or group to view the schedule for this resource
group. Users cannot open, edit or delete work orders scheduled
for this resource group.
No Access Prevents the user or group from accessing any information
related to the resource group. The resource group is not listed on
the scheduling screen, in the report setup dialog, or in any other
part of the system that displays information related to resource
groups.
5. To print a list of current security settings, click Print at the bottom of the Users Permissions
dialog. Refer to Printing Security Settings.
Printing Security Settings
When you click Print in the Group Permissions dialog, the Security Profile dialog displays. The dialog
contains all of the current group permission settings and is intended for output purposes only. Any
changes made in this dialog do not change the actual settings in the profile. The Import button is used
only to add text from an external file to the dialog, and does not import security settings from another
group or user. The Export button is used only to send the text in the dialog to a text file, and does not
export the security settings. Refer to Notes Editor for more information.
Client and Agency Users

To allow clients or agencies to access your ScheduALL system you can set up client or agency user
logins. These are similar to User account logins. Clients and agency users are automatically
prevented from seeing information related to other clients or agencies. If you enter client or agency
users as individuals, you will need to set a profile for each user. To facilitate permissions
management, you may want to set up a “Clients” or “Agencies” user group with a defined profile.
Adding a new client or agency user, and assigning the user to the appropriate group, automatically
grants the permissions of the group.
For instructions on how to set up a user group, please refer to User Groups and Profiles Overview.
Note: The procedure for adding Client users is the same for adding Agency users.
To add a client or agency user:
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click User Profiles & Security. The
User Profiles and Settings dialog displays.

2. To add a client user, click the Clients tab to bring that page forward. To add an Agency user,
click the Agencies tab. The Clients tab is shown here.
Figure 184. User Profiles & Settings Dialog, Clients Tab

3. Click Add Client or Add Agency. The client or agency list displays.
Note: System Preferences determine whether client or agency accounts with an Inactive or
Closed status are displayed in the selection browser. Refer to Status of Clients to
suppress from display in Selection browsers.
4. Select a client or agency and click Select, or double-click the name. The Add Login dialog
displays.
Figure 185. Client or Agency User, Add Login Dialog

5. For descriptions of the login fields, refer to Adding ScheduALL Users.
Note: Supervisory rights cannot be granted to Client or Agency account logins.
6. Click Print to print the profile settings for this client or agency user.

Daily Access Schedule

In addition to limiting user rights and permissions through the user’s or user group’s profile, you can
also limit access to your system by setting a daily access schedule.
This security feature can aid in scheduling regular program maintenance. You can block access to the
system during select time ranges, and then run the necessary program maintenance utilities (program
maintenance is covered later in this chapter).
You define access schedules on a user group level, and for individual users who are not assigned to a
group.
To define access schedules:
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click User Profiles & Security.
2. To modify access schedules for groups:
a. Click the Groups tab.
b. Select a group, and click Profile. The Permissions dialog displays.
c. Click Hours at the bottom of the Permissions dialog. A weekly schedule dialog
displays.
Figure 186. Scheduling, Access Hours

3. To modify access schedules for a user account that is not assigned to a group:
a. Click the Users tab.
b. Select a user, and click Profile. The Permissions dialog displays.
c. Click Hours at the bottom of the Permissions dialog. A weekly schedule displays.
4. On the week grid, click and hold with your mouse pointer and drag across and/or down on the
hours you want to select.
l Click Profile to enforce the profile settings normally.
l Click View Only to allow the user to open the ScheduALL application in view mode during
the selected hours.
l Click No Access to block access to the ScheduALL application during the selected hours.
The system informs the user that access is denied when the user attempts to log On.
5. Click OK when you have finished defining the access schedule, or click Cancel to exit without
saving any changes.

Permissions
ScheduALL system. The list of permissions is divided into the following areas:
In This Section
Scheduling Area Profile 435

Project Manager 463
Quotes Manager 467
Invoicing 470
External Costs Manager 472
Library 476
Duplication 482
Maintenance & Setup Areas 483
Shipping 494
Time Capture/Smart Time 494
Location Types 500
Administrative Options 501
Contract Manager 503
SMS Agent 504
Connector 504
Security for WebApp Project Templates 504
Room and Resource Groups 505
Client Groups 507
Companies 508
MCR 508
Vendor Group 509
External Pay Status 510
Trouble Ticket Status 510
Extended Operation Labels 510

Contract Types 511

Room and Resource Groups Cost Access 511
Client Groups Cost Access 513
Client Groups Cost Access Level 513
Report Groups 514
Client Groups External Cost Access 514
Note: After making changes to security permissions, the Administrator must log off and log back on
for the changes to take effect.
Scheduling Area Profile
Table 111. Security Settings, Scheduling Area Profile
Permission Description
Allow Access into Scheduling Determines if the user can open and use the Scheduling module of the
Module? ScheduLINK and ScheduALL applications, as well as Web-based versions of
the scheduling module.
l Yes allows the user to use the Scheduling module.
l No prevents the user from using the Scheduling module.
Can Add Work Orders? Determines if the user can create new work orders.
l Yes allows the user to add new work orders to the scheduling calendar.
(Default.)
l No prevents the user from adding new work orders.
Can Access Smart Work Orders? Determines if the user can create new smart work orders.
l Yes allows the user to add new smart work orders to the scheduling
calendar. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from adding new smart work orders. The New Work
Order (smart) item is not displayed on the Scheduling menu.
Limit Access to Work Orders Determines if a user is prevented from viewing work orders based on who
Booked Only by: created the work order.
l No allows the user to view any work order. (Default.)
l Self limits the user to view only work orders created by the user.
l Group limits the user to view only work orders created by the user or other
members of the user’s Group.
Note: Reversing an invoice overwrites security limitations of the previous
work order "owner".

Table 111. Security Settings, Scheduling Area Profile (continued)
Limit Changes to Work Orders Determines if a user is prevented from modifying work orders based on who
Booked Only by: created the work order.
l No allows the user to modify any work order. (Default.)
l Self limits the user to modify only work orders created by the user.
l Group limits the user to modify only work orders created by the user or
other members of the user’s Group.
Note: Reversing an invoice overwrites security limitations of the previous
work order "owner".
Can View Detail for Existing Wk Determines if a user is prevented from viewing work order details based on the
Orders up to: status of the work order.
l Options include all work order status levels. Selecting a single status level
prevents the user from viewing details for any work order with a status
level above the specified level.
l All allows the user to view details for any work order status.
l None prevents the user from viewing details for any work order status.
(Default.)
Can Change Existing Wk Orders up Determines if a user is prevented from viewing work order details based on the
to: status of the work order.
l All allows the user to modify any work order.
l Individual status levels prevent the user from modifying any work order
with a status level above the specified level.
l None prevents the user from modifying any work order status. (Default.)
Note: This setting must be set at or higher than the status selected for the
user’s Default Status for Work Orders preference. Refer to Default
Status for Work Orders.
Can Change Cancelled Work Orders Determines if a user can modify a work order that has been set to the status
and Cancelled Events? level of Cancelled.
l Yes allows the user to modify a cancelled work order. (Default.)
l Only ones Booked by Self allows the user to modify a cancelled work
orders only if the user created it.
l No prevents the user from modifying a cancelled work order.
Request Reason for Time Changes Determines if a user is presented with a confirmation dialog when changing a
to Wk Orders From: work order time.
l None does not request confirmation. (Default.)
l Individual status levels request confirmation for any work order with a
status level at or above the specified level.
l All requests confirmation for all time changes.

Request Reason for Deletion of Wk Determines if a user is presented with a confirmation dialog when deleting a
Orders From: work order.
l None does not request confirmation. (Default.)
l Individual status levels request confirmation for any work order with a
status level at or above the specified level.
l All requests confirmation for all deletions.
Can Change Work Order Status to Determines if a user can change a work order to the specified status.
Status
l Yes allows the user to change all work orders to this status.
(... where Status is Request, First
Hold, Second Hold, Third Hold, l Only ones Booked by Self allows the user to change a work order to this
Fourth Hold, and Unconfirmed, status only if the user created it.
Completed Reconciled, Cancelled) l Only ones Booked by Group allows the user to change a work order to
this status only if it was created a member of the user’s Profile Group.
l No prevents the user from changing work orders to this status. (Default.)
Can Confirm Work Orders? Determines if a user can change a work order to the Confirmed status.
l Only ones Booked by Self allows the user to change a work order to this
status only if the user created it.
l Only ones Booked by Group allows the user to change a work order to
Can Reconcile/Unreconcile Work Determines if a user can set a work order to the Reconciled status, which
Orders? locks the work order and adds it to the invoicing queue. It also determines if a
user can unreconcile a work order, which removes the work order from the
invoicing queue and returns it to its previous status. Refer to Work Order Life
Cycle in the Work Orders chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more
information.
Can Close Wk Orders (Do not Send Determines if a user can close a work order that has no pricing or cost
to Billing)? information, without sending it to the billing queue.
l Yes allows the user close all applicable work orders.
l Only ones Booked by Self allows the user to close a work order only if
the user created it.

Can Cancel Existing Wk Orders? Determines if a user can set a work order to the Cancelled status. Refer to
Work Order Life Cycle in the Work Orders chapter of the ScheduALL Users
Guide for more information.
See also: Can Cancel Work Orders in the Current Date?.
Can Delete Existing Wk Orders? Determines if a user can permanently remove a work order from the database.
l Yes allows the user to delete work orders.
Disallow changes to bookings which Determines the criteria by which the system prevents the user from changing
end prior to: work orders and resource bookings.
l No allows changes without checking the end date and time of a work
order. (Default.)
l Current Date prevents the user from modifying any work order or activity
that ended before the beginning (midnight/12:00 a.m./00:00) of the current
day. (Default.)
l Current Time prevents the user from modifying any work order or activity
that ended before the current time.
Can Move Work Orders in the Determines if a user can change the date and time of work orders for which the
Current Date to another Day? start date is the current date.
l Yes allows the user to move bookings scheduled on the current date.
l No prevents the user from moving work orders scheduled on the current
date. (Default.)
Can Cancel Work Orders in the Determines if a user can change the work order status to Cancelled if the start
Current Date? date of the work order is the current date.
l Yes allows the user to cancel work orders scheduled on the current date.
l No prevents the user from canceling work orders scheduled on the current
date. (Default.)
Can not view bookings in WebApp Limits the number of days in the future that bookings can be made by the user
after <Days> from Current Date & in WebApp. The calendar will only display the number of days selected.
Time:
<none> limits the user to view the current day only.
[# of days] limits the user to view the number of days selected.

Can not Book within <duration> from Determines the minimum duration from the current date within which a user
Current Date & Time: cannot create a work order.
l n/a allows the user to create work orders at any time. (Default.)
l 4 hours or 8 hours prevents the user from creating work orders within the
specified number of hours from the current date.
l 1 day, 2 days, ..., or 7 days prevents the user from creating work orders
within the specified number of days from the current date.
Can not Book After <duration> from Determines the maximum number of hours, days, weeks, or months from the
Current Date & Time: current date after which a user cannot create a work order. For example, if the
current date is January 1st, select 2 months to prevent users from booking
work orders that start after the last day in February.
l n/a allows the user to create work orders at any time. (Default.)
l 4 hours or 8 hours prevents the user from creating work orders past the
specified number of hours.
l 1 day, 2 days, ..., or 7 days prevents the user from creating work orders
past the specified number of days.
l 2 weeks or 4 weeks prevents the user from creating work orders past the
specified number of weeks.
l 2 months, 3 months, 4 months, or 6 months prevents the user from
creating work orders past the specified number of months.
Can Create Bookings In The Past Determines if the user can create new bookings on days prior to the current
date.
l Always allows the user to create bookings on days prior to the current
day. (Default.)
l Never prevents the user from creating bookings on days prior to the
current day.
l Current Day allows the user to create bookings after the start of the
current day, but prevents the user from creating bookings before the start
of the current day (midnight). For example, if the current time is 3 p.m. and
this setting is selected, then the user can create bookings from midnight
onward of that day.
Can View Pricing Information? Determines if the user can view pricing information for resources and services.
l Yes allows the user to view price information.
l No prevents the user from viewing pricing information. (Default.)
Can Change Pricing Information? Determines if the user can modify default pricing information for resources and
services.
l Yes allows the user to modify price information.
l No prevents the user from modifying price information. (Default.)

Can View Cost Information? Determines if the user can view cost information for resources and services
that do not require special security.
l Yes allows the user to view cost information.
l No prevents the user from viewing cost information. (Default.)
Can View Hidden Cost Information? Determines if the user can view cost information for resources and services
that require special permissions, as determined by the Require Special
Security to See Cost setting in Resource Properties.
l Yes allows the user to view hidden cost information. (Can View Cost
Information? must also be set to Yes.)
l No prevents the user from viewing hidden cost information. (Default.)
Can Change Cost Information? Determines if the user can modify default (per-unit) cost information for
resources and services.
l Yes allows the user to modify cost information.
l No prevents the user from modifying cost information. (Default.)
Can Change Hidden Cost Determines if the user can modify default (per-unit) cost information for
Information? resources and services, when the cost information requires special
permissions. Refer to Requires Special Security to See Cost.
l Yes allows the user to modify cost information. (Can Change Cost
Information? must also be set to Yes.)
l No prevents the user from modifying cost information. (Default.)
Can Change Reconciled Work Determines if the user can modify a work order that has been reconciled when
Orders in an Open Package? it is part of a project or package that is still open.
l Yes allows the user to modify reconciled work orders that are part of an
open project or package.
l No prevents the user from modifying reconciled work orders that are part
of an open project or package. (Default.)
Can access Package Extended Determines if the user can change pricing in the Project Properties dialog when
Pricing Tools? a project that is flagged as a package. (Pricing for non-packages must be
changed at the work order level.)
l Yes allows the user to change pricing in the Project properties dialog. Can
Change Pricing Information? must also be set to Yes.
l No prevents the user from changing package pricing. (Default.)
Can Change Account Executive for Determines whether the user can assign or change the Account Executive in a
a Wk Order? Work Order. Refer to Standard Work Order - Other (Account Executive) in the
l Yes allows the user to change the Account Executive field in a work order.
l No prevents the user from changing the Account Executive field.
(Default.)

Can Change Wk Order Billing Determines whether the user can assign or change Billing Terms in a Work
Terms? Order. Refer to Work Order, Main Tab Settings (Terms) in the Work Orders
l Yes allows the user to change the Billing Terms field in a work order.
l No prevents the user from changing the Billing Terms field. (Default.)
Can Book Conflicts Determines whether the user can override conflict warnings using the “Book
(i.e.: “Book Anyway”)? Anyway” button on the Conflicts List dialog. Refer to Resource Conflicts in the
Scheduling chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
l Yes allows the user to override conflict warnings and book a work order or
activity even if conflicts exist.
l No prevents the user from overriding conflict warnings. (Default.)
Can Print Scheduling Reports? Determines whether the user can generate, view, and print schedules. These
reports generally include Visual Schedules, Schedules by Work Order,
Schedules by Resource, and Resource Schedule Conflict Reports available
from the Reports menu in the Scheduling module.
l Yes allows the user to generate, preview, and print scheduling reports.
l No prevents the user from viewing or printing reports. (Default.)
Can Print Work Orders / Billing Determines whether the user can generate, view, and print work order and
Authorization? billing authorization reports. These reports are generally available from the
Reports menu in the Scheduling module as Print Work Orders & Billing
Authorizations.
l Yes allows the user to generate, preview, and print work orders and billing
authorizations.
l No prevents the user from viewing or printing work orders and billing
authorizations. (Default.)
Can Print Resource Reports? Determines whether the user can generate, view, and print work order and
resource reports. These reports are generally available from the Reports menu
in the Scheduling module as Other Resource Based Reports.
l Yes allows the user to generate, preview, and print resource reports.
l No prevents the user from viewing or printing resource reports. (Default.)
Can Print Other Work Order Determines whether the user can generate, view, and print work order and
Reports? resource reports. These reports are generally available from the Reports menu
in the Scheduling module as Other Work Order Based Reports.
l Yes allows the user to generate, preview, and print work order reports.
l No prevents the user from viewing or printing work order reports. (Default.)
Can Print Production Reports? Determines whether the user can generate, view, and print work order and
resource reports. These reports are generally available from the File menu in
the Production Reports submenu.
l Yes allows the user to generate, preview, and print production reports.
l No prevents the user from viewing or printing production reports. (Default.)

Can Print Miscellaneous Reports? Determines whether the user can generate, view, and print work order and
resource reports. These reports are generally available from the File menu in
the Miscellaneous Reports submenu.
l Yes allows the user to generate, preview, and print miscellaneous reports.
l No prevents the user from viewing or printing miscellaneous reports.
(Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete [activity] Determines whether the user can create, modify, or permanently remove the
specified activity.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, and remove the specified activity.
l No prevents the user from booking the specified activity. (Default.)
o Vacation
o Unpaid Sick Day and Paid Sick Day
o Comp Day
o Unpaid Day Off and Paid Day Off
o Shift
o Out of Service
o Maintenance
o Other
o Day in Lieu
o Sabbatical
o Company Holiday
o Available Block
o Antenna Move (Refer to Creating a Move Antenna Activity in the
Note: The Sick Day permission also controls access to Unpaid Sick day
activities. The Day Off permission controls access to Unpaid Day Off
activities. For Smart Time users, the permission Can Add Sick Day
must be set to Yes. Refer to the following:
l Can Add [Activity Type]
l Can book paid sick?
l Can book unpaid sick?
l Can book paid day off?
l Can book unpaid day off?
Can access e-mail Reports? Determines if a user can generate Work Order e-mail reports from the Reports
(Clients, Operators, Acct Exec, menu (such as E-mail to Client, E-mail to Operators).
Producers)
l Yes allows the user to access and send e-mail reports. The system must
be configured to send e-mail; refer to E-mail Services.
l No prevents the user from viewing or sending e-mail reports. (Default.)

Can access e-mail Work Order Determines if a user can generate notifications, such as Work Order and
Notification Reports? Vendor Notification reports on the Work Order menu.
l Yes allows the user to access and send work order notification reports.
The system must be configured to send e-mail; refer to E-mail Services.
l No prevents the user from viewing or sending work order notification
reports. (Default.)
Can View Client Pop-Up Notes? Determines if the system displays the Schedule Notes for (Client) dialog when
a user books the (Client) in a work order.
l Yes displays the Schedule Notes for (Client) dialog.
l No does not displays the Schedule Notes for (Client) dialog. (Default.)
Can Book Inactive Clients? Determines if a user can assign a client to a work order when the Client Status
is Inactive.
l Yes allows the user to assign an inactive client, in addition to active and
open clients.
l No prevents the user from assigning an inactive client. (Default.)
Can Book Closed Clients? Determines if a user can assign a client to a work order when the Client Status
is Closed.
l Yes allows the user to assign a closed client, in addition to active and
open clients.
l No prevents the user from assigning a closed client. (Default.)
Can assign Client from View Only Determines if a user can assign a client that is assigned to a Client Group to
Client Groups? which the user only has View Only rights.
l Yes allows the user to assign a client in a view-only group. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from assigning a client in a view-only group.
Can Add/Edit/Delete Display Views? Determines if a user can create, modify, or remove display views. Refer to
Display View Setup.
This option also determines if a user can create, modify, or remove Library
Freehand Defaults used for Media Manager System reports. Refer to Library
Label Freehand Defaults in the Library chapter of the ScheduALL Users
Guide .
In the ScheduLINK system, this option allows a user to save custom settings
for the Ops Manager dialogs.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove display
views and display blocks.
l No prevents the user from creating, modifying, or removing display views.
(Default.)

Can Change Display View? Determines if a user can select a different display view from the View menu.
l Yes allows the user to select a different display view.
l No prevents the user from adding new work orders to a closed project or
package. The user will only see the default display view set in the User
Preferences. (Default.)
Can View Fly-Overs in Browser Determines if the user receives flyover labels for browser columns.
Columns?
l Yes displays flyover text on browser columns. (Default.)
l No does not display browser flyover text on browser columns.
Allow Normal Operation While In Determines which work orders a user can edit when the system is in Crisis
Crisis Mode up to: Mode, based on the work order status level.
l All allows the user to edit any work order.
l None prevents the user from editing work orders of any status. (Default.)
l Individual project status levels allow the user to edit work order of the
selected status, or a status lower in the hierarchy.
Note: If the user displays a work order with a status above the status selected
in this field, the system displays the work order in View mode.
Client Logins: Hide Other Client's Determines how the system displays bookings assigned to any client that
Bookings? does not match the client record associated with the current user login. Refer
to Client and Agency Users.
l Yes conceals any information regarding items such as work orders,
projects, and library items that belong to any client. The scheduling
calendar displays booking blocks to indicate availability, but conceals any
display views and flyover text. Browser lists also conceal any information
not related to the appropriate client.
l No displays information based only on the security settings in the
Resource Group and Client Group sections of the security profile.
(Default.)
Can Force Log Off? Determines whether the user is allowed to force other users to log off of the
ScheduALL system by using the Force LogOff button on the View Active
Users dialog. (Can View Active Users? must also be set to Yes.)
l Yes allows the user to force other users to log off of the ScheduALL
system.
l No prevents the user from forcing other users to log off of the ScheduALL
system. (Default.)
Can View Who has a Record Determines whether the user is allowed to view the appropriate user name
Locked? when another user has a work order open in Edit mode.
l Yes allows the user to view the user name. From the Work Order menu,
select Administration and click Who has this Work Order Locked.
l No prevents the user from viewing the user name. (Default.)

Can Release a Locked Work Order? Determines whether the user is allowed to remotely close a work order when
another user has a work order open in Edit mode. Releasing the work order
makes it available for editing.
l Yes allows the user to release the work order. From the Work Order
menu, select Administration and click Force another User to Release
this Lock.
l No prevents the user from releasing the work order. (Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Library Tapes Determines whether the user is allowed to add, edit, or delete library items in a
in Work Order? work order’s Resources tab.
l Yes allows the user to add, edit, or delete library items in a work order.
(Default.)
l No prevents the user from adding, editing, or deleting library items from a
work order. An error message displays.
Can Change Work Order Status to Determines if a user can change a work order to the specified status.
Pending Approval
Can Move Work Orders in the Future Determines if a user can perform a move operation on a work order that is
booked in the future.
l Yes allows the user to move a work order that is booked in the future.
(Default.)
l No prevents a user from moving a work order that is booked in the future.
An error message displays.
Request Reason for Changing Work Determines the status level at (or above) that displays the “Reason for this
Order Status from: Operation” dialog. The user must enter a reason and their name before
proceeding.
l Options include all work order status levels.
l <none> does not display the Reason dialog. (Default.)
For example, select First Hold to prompt the user for a reason when changing
to that status or a higher status level.
Can Drag Items Within a Work Determines whether the user can move items within work order browsers by
Order? dragging with the mouse.
l Yes allows moves by dragging. (Default.)
l No does not allow moves by dragging. The error message “Cannot Drag
Resources, Action Not Authorized” displays.

Can Proceed through “Out of Determines whether the user can proceed to book a work order with a certain
Service” Conflict? status if a resource’s overtime limit will be exceeded.
l Yes displays an overtime limit warning and displays “Proceed Anyway?”
with Yes and No buttons.
l No displays an overtime limit warning but prevents the user from
proceeding. (Default.)
Can Override Credit Limit Conflicts? Determines whether the user can proceed to book a work order with a certain
status if the client’s credit limit will be exceeded.
l Yes displays a credit limit warning and displays “Proceed Anyway?” with
Yes and No buttons.
l No displays a credit limit warning but prevents the user from proceeding.
(Default.)
Note: Additional system preferences and client properties affect credit limit
conflicts. Refer to Client Properties – Billing Information, Calculate
Credit Limit Including WorkOrders starting From:, Check Credit
Limit upon reaching the following Status:, and Credit Limit.
Limit Extended Query Operations to Limits the extended query operations to a range of days, from the current date
to n days, weeks, or months into the future. For example, if the setting is 30,
and the user enters an end date for the query that is 34 days into the future,
then the query is not allowed and an error message is displayed.
l n/a does not limit the extended query operation.
l time span sets the extended query limit. Select the desired time frame
(days, weeks, months).
Can book Work Orders without a Determines whether the user is allowed to create a work order on the
Room on the ScheduALL Calendar? ScheduALL calendar for a resource other than a room (personnel or
equipment).
l Yes allows the user to create work orders for a resource other than a room.
(Default.)
l No prevents the user from creating work orders for a resource other than a
room and displays the Select Room list to select a room for the booking.
Note: This setting requires the Allow WO without a Room? license. If this
license is not present, the setting does not display in the Permissions
list.

Can book Work Orders without a Determines whether the user is allowed to create a work order on the Extended
Room on the Extended Calendar? calendar for a resource other than a room (personnel or equipment).
l Yes allows the user to create work orders for a resource other than a room.
(Default.)
l No prevents the user from creating work orders for a resource other than a
room and displays the Select Room list to select a room for the booking.
Note: Systems licensed for ScheduLINK include this setting by default. This
setting is also tied to the Allow WO without a Room? license. If neither
of these licenses are present, the setting does not display in the
Permissions list.
Can swap Requirement Conflict to Determines whether, in the event of a resource conflict, the user can substitute
Resource from different Category? from a category other than that of the resource being replaced.
For example, if Randy Jones (Editor) has a booking conflict, the user can only
substitute another resource from the Editor category if this setting is No.
l Yes allows the user to substitute a resource from any category.
l No allows the user to substitute only resources from the category of the
conflicting resource. If the user attempts to use a resource from a different
category, the message “This substitution is not allowed” displays.
(Default.)
Allow booking of Requirements to Determines whether the user can replace a conflicting resource with a
resolve conflicts? requirement when adding resources in a work order.
l Yes allows the user to replace a conflicting resource with a requirement.
l No prevents the user from replacing a conflicting resource with a
requirement. The Requirement button does not display on the Conflict List
dialog. (Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Requirements Determines whether the user can book and manage resource requirements on
in Work Orders the Resources tab of the Work Order dialog.
l Yes allows the user to book and manage resource requirements. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from booking and managing resource requirements.
The Add Requirement button is disabled.
Override Resource and Determines whether the user can replace a requirement with a different
Requirement settings to allow requirement under the following circumstances:
Requirement replacement? When user permission Allow booking of Requirements to resolve Conflicts? is
set to No, and
When user permission Can Add/Edit/Delete Requirements in Work Orders is
set to No.
l Yes allows the user to replace a requirement if there is no conflict. They
will not be allowed to add, edit, or delete requirements.
l No does not allow the user to replace a requirement. (Default.)

Can Add/Edit/Delete people in Work Determines whether the user can add, edit, or delete personnel resources
Orders? booked in a work order.
l Yes allows the user to add, edit, or delete personnel resources booked in a
l Only ones Booked by Self allows the user to perform the indicated
action only in work orders that the user created.
l No prevents the user from adding, editing, or deleting personnel resources
booked in a work order.
Can Add/Edit/Delete rooms in Work Determines whether the user can add, edit, or delete room resources booked in
Orders? a work order.
l Yes allows the user to add, edit, or delete room resources booked in a
l No prevents the user from adding, editing, or deleting room resources
Can Add/Edit/Delete equipment in Determines whether the user can add, edit, or delete equipment resources
Work Orders? booked in a work order.
l Yes allows the user to add, edit, or delete equipment resources booked in
a work order. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from adding, editing, or deleting equipment
resources booked in a work order.
Can Add/Edit/Delete stock in Work Determines whether the user can add, edit, or delete stock resources booked
Orders? in a work order.
l Yes allows the user to add, edit, or delete stock resources booked in a
l No prevents the user from adding, editing, or deleting stock resources
Can [___] services in Work Orders? Determines whether the user can add, edit, or delete personnel resources
[Add] booked in a work order.
[Edit] l Yes allows the user to add, edit, or delete personnel resources booked in a
[Delete] work order. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from adding, editing, or deleting personnel resources

Can Add/Edit/Delete in Path Determines if the user can add resources in the work order path management
Management? interfaces (Visual Path and Path Detail).
(Link only)
l Yes allows the user to add, replace, and remove elements in the Path
Detail list and Visual Path display.
l Only ones Booked by Self allows the user to add, change, or remove
path management elements in a work order only if the user created the
work order.
l No prevents the user from adding, replacing, or removing path
management elements in a work order.
Can Add/Edit/Delete Work Order Determines if the user can create, modify, or permanently remove a template
Template? in the Work Order Template module, and/or use a template to create multiple
work orders using a template.
l No Access prevents the user from displaying, creating, modifying, or
removing work order templates. It also prevents the user from creating
work orders based on a work order template. (Default.)
l View Only allows the user to display a work order template, but prevents
the user from creating, modifying, or removing a work order template.
l Full Access allows the user to display, create, modify, and remove work
order templates, and book work orders using the template.
Can Add ScheduALL Work Orders Determines whether the user can create a new work order on the ScheduALL
scheduling calendar.
l Yes allows the user to create ScheduALL work orders. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from creating ScheduALL work orders and a “Action
not Authorized” message is displayed.
Can Add ScheduLINK Work Orders Determines whether the user can create a new work order on the ScheduLINK
scheduling calendar using the ScheduLINK work order form.
l Yes allows the user to create ScheduLINK work orders. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from creating ScheduLINK work orders and a
“Action not Authorized” message is displayed.
Note: If the user has security permissions to modify the appropriate resource
group, the user may be able to create a work order using the ScheduALL
calendar and work order form.
Allow deletion if Work Order or Determines if the user can delete a work order or remove a resource from a
Event has cancellation charges? work order when the cancellation charges have been associated with the work
order or resource.
l Yes allows a user to delete a work order, or remove a resource from a
work order, when cancellation fees have been assigned. The setting “Can
Delete Existing Work Orders” must also be set to Yes.
l No prevents a user from deleting a work order, or deleting. (Default.)

Allow deletion of Work Orders or Determines if the user can delete a work order or remove a resource from a
Events if they are within range for work order when the cancellation charges have been associated with the work
cancellation charges? order or resource.
l Yes allows a user to delete a work order, or remove a resource from a
work order, when cancellation fees have been assigned and the interval
between the current date/time and the work order start date/time is within
a cancellation rate interval. The setting “Can Delete Existing Work Orders”
must also be set to Yes.
l No prevents a user from deleting a work order, or deleting. (Default.)
Can Change setting of “Bill Determines if the user can select or deselect the “Bill Cancellation Charges”
Cancellation Charges” flag? option in the cancellation dialog and override default “Bill when Cancelled”
settings.
l Yes allows a user to select or deselect the “Bill Cancellation Charges”
option during the cancellation process.
l No prevents a user from selecting or deselecting the “Bill Cancellation
Charges” option. (Default.)
Can Assign WorkOrder Level Client Determines if the user can split the pricing of a work order between two or more
Allocation? clients. Refer to Allocate a Work Order to Multiple Clients in the Work Orders
l Yes allows the user to allocate work order prices to multiple clients.
(Default.)
l No allows the user to assign one, and only one, client to a work order.
Can Reconcile Work Orders in the Determines if the user can set the work order status to Reconciled before the
Future work order start date/time has passed.
l Yes allows a user to set a work order status to Reconciled before the work
order start date/time has passed.
l No prevents a user from reconciling a work order in the future. The user
will not be able to invoice cancelled work orders. (Default.)
Can Edit Other Personnel Determines whether a user can display the Time Capture dialog for any
Resources Personnel resource other than the one linked to the user name. It also
determines whether the user can change resource bookings for any Personnel
resources other than the one linked to the user name.
l Yes enables the Resource selection button in the Time Capture dialog,
and allows user to modify bookings for non-linked personnel resources.
l No prevents a user from selecting a different Personnel resource in Time
Capture, and prevents a user from changing bookings for unlinked
personnel resource. (Default.)

Can Change Quantity for Pricing? Determines whether the user can change the quantity of a resource in a
resource booking. This permission complements the Can Change Pricing
Information? permission, allowing the supervisor to control both parts of the
total price (quantity x price) computation.
l Yes allows the user to modify the Quantity figure used to calculate prices.
l No prevents the user from modifying the Quantity figure used to calculate
prices. (Default.)
Can Change Quantity for Cost? Determines whether the user can change the quantity of a resource in a
resource booking. This permission complements the Can Change Cost
Information? permission, allowing the supervisor to control both parts of the
total cost (quantity x cost) computation.
l Yes allows the user to modify the Quantity figure used to calculate costs.
l No prevents the user from modifying the Quantity figure used to calculate
costs. (Default.)
Can Add Reconciled Notes up to Determines whether a user can append messages to the information stored by
the Update Reconciled Note 1 and Update Reconciled Note 2 commands:
l All allows the user to add text to the read-only Reconciled Notes fields.
l None prevents the user from adding any text to the read-only Reconciled
Notes fields. (Default.)
l Request, Fourth Hold, ... Cancelled (individual status levels) specify
the highest status level at which a user can add text to the read-only
Reconciled Notes fields.
l Pending Approval allows the user to add text to the read-only
Reconciled Notes fields at any status level, including Reconciled.
Force dropping of all resources Determines the lowest work order status level at which the system
upon WO copy from WO status: automatically drops all resources, except for the room/master event, from the
target work orders when the user creates a copy of a work order.
l None allows the user to copy a work order of any status level, without
dropping additional resources. (Default.)
l Request, Fourth Hold, ... Cancelled drops additional resources when
the user copies a work order at the selected status level, or any status
level higher in the status hierarchy.
l All drops additional resources when the user copies a work order at any
status level.

Force dropping of WO Billing Notes Determines the lowest work order status level at which the system
upon WO copy from WO status: automatically drops all work order billing notes from the target work orders
when the user creates a copy of a work order.
dropping billing notes. (Default.)
l Request, Fourth Hold, ... Cancelled drops billing notes when the user
copies a work order at the selected status level, or any status level higher
in the status hierarchy.
l All drops billing notes when the user copies a work order at any status
level.
Force dropping of WO Shipping Determines the lowest work order status level at which the system
Instructions upon WO copy from WO automatically drops work order shipping instructions from the target work
status: orders when the user creates a copy of a work order.
dropping shipping instructions. (Default.)
l Request, Fourth Hold, ... Cancelled drops shipping instructions when
the user copies a work order at the selected status level, or any status
level higher in the status hierarchy.
l All drops shipping instructions when the user copies a work order at any
status level.
Force dropping of WO Special Determines the lowest work order status level at which the system
Instructions upon WO copy from WO automatically drops work order special instructions from the target work orders
status: when the user creates a copy of a work order.
dropping special instructions. (Default.)
l Request, Fourth Hold, ... Cancelled drops special instructions when the
user copies a work order at the selected status level, or any status level
higher in the status hierarchy.
l All drops special instructions when the user copies a work order at any
status level.
Can Access Operations Manager (Requires ScheduLINK) Determines whether the user can open the Operations
Manager or Operations Manager (WO) dialog.
l Yes allows the user to view the Operations Manager dialogs. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from viewing the Operations Manager dialogs.
Can Complete and Goodnight from Determines whether the user can change an event to Complete or Goodnight in
Operations Manager? Operations Manager.
l Yes displays the Complete WO and Goodnight buttons on the Operations
Manager window. (Default.)
l No does not display the Complete WO and Goodnight buttons on the
Operations Manager window.

Can not Book or Modify Work Determines a period from the current time, during which a user cannot create or
Orders within <duration>: modify a work order that starts within the specified period:
l None allows the user to create or make changes to work orders within any
period from the current time, assuming no other security permission
prevents it. (Default.)
l 1, 5, 10 ... 60 (minutes) prevents the user from creating or changing any
work order that starts within the specified period from the current time.
Can Edit Work Order from Conflict Determines whether the user can open and modify a work order from the
Reminder? Conflict Reminder dialog:
l Yes allows the user to open the Work Order dialog directly from the
Conflict Reminder dialog.
l No prevents the user from opening the Work Order dialog directly. The
user must locate the work order manually using a Scheduling calendar,
Find By browser, or other method. (Default.)
Can View Locations Determines whether the user can view locations in the Locations list.
l Yes allows the user to see locations when clicking the View button in the
Select Location dialog.
l No prevents the user from seeing locations when clicking the View button
in the Select Location dialog. (Default.)
Note: Other security settings also determine the user’s permissions regarding
locations. Refer to Maintenance & Setup Areas and Location Types
Can Add Locations Determines whether the user can add locations in the Locations list.
l Yes allows the user to add new locations when clicking the Add button in
the Select Location dialog.
l No prevents the user from adding new locations when clicking the Add
button in the Select Location dialog. (Default.)
Can Delete Locations Determines whether the user can delete locations in the Locations list.
l Yes allows the user to delete locations when clicking the Delete button in
the Select Location dialog.
l No prevents the user from deleting locations when clicking the Delete
button in the Select Location dialog. (Default.)

Can Book Inactive Vendors? Determines whether the user can assign a vendor with a status of Inactive to a
resource booking within a work order.
l Yes allows the user to assign a vendor with a status of Inactive to a
resource booking by selecting Vendor from the Assign list on the Work
Order menu.
l No prevents the user from assigning a vendor with a status of Inactive to a
Order menu. If the user selects an Inactive vendor, an error message
displays. (Default.)
Note: Additional settings determine the user’s access to vendors. Refer to
Can Change Vendor Or Delete/Replace Resources with Vendor
Id?Can Change Vendor Or Delete/Replace Resources with
Vendor Id?Can Change Vendor Or Delete/Replace Resources
with Vendor Id? and Vendor Group.
Note: The Vendor command in the Assign list does not display on the standard
Work Order menu, but can be added using Developers Toolkit.
Can Book Closed Vendors? Determines whether the user can assign a vendor with a status of Closed to a
resource booking within a work order.
l Yes allows the user to assign a vendor with a status of Closed to a
Order menu.
l No prevents the user from assigning a vendor with a status of Closed to a
Order menu. If the user selects a Closed vendor, an error message
displays. (Default.)
Note: Additional settings determine the user’s access to vendors. Refer to
Can Change Vendor Or Delete/Replace Resources with Vendor
Id?Can Change Vendor Or Delete/Replace Resources with
Vendor Id?Can Change Vendor Or Delete/Replace Resources
with Vendor Id? and Vendor Group.
Note: The Vendor command in the Assign list does not display on the standard
Work Order menu, but can be added using Developers Toolkit.
Trouble Ticket Memo Field 1–5 (Requires Trouble Ticket module) Determines the access the user has to the
access rights memo fields on the Notes tab of the Trouble Ticket Work Order dialog.
l Follow Profile assigns access rights from the profile of the User Group to
which the user belongs.
l Append Only allows the user to add information to the Notes field. The
user is not allowed to change any existing information.
l View Only allows the user to view the information in the Notes field.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing the Notes field. (Default.)

Can Create Trouble Tickets? Determines whether the user can create trouble tickets.
l Yes allows the user to create trouble tickets.
l No prevents the user from creating trouble tickets. (Default.)
Can Add Contract In Work Order? Determines whether the user has access to the Assign Contract command on
the Work Order menu.
l Yes displays the Assign Contract command on the Work Order menu.
l No does not display the Assign Contract command on the Work Order
menu. (Default.)
Can Add Attachments to Projects Determines whether the user can select existing files in the database to attach
and Work Orders? to the work order or project Attachments tab.
l Yes allows the user to attach files.
l No prevents the user from attaching files. (Default.)
Can Delete Attachments to Projects Determines whether the user can delete files from the database that are listed
and Work Orders? on the work order or project Attachments tab.
l Yes allows the user to delete files.
l No prevents the user from deleting files. (Default.)
Can Release Attachments from Determines whether the user can remove files from the work order or project
Projects and Work Orders? Attachments tab. The files themselves are not deleted, only removed from the
attachments list.
l Yes allows the user to delete files.
l No prevents the user from deleting files. (Default.)
Can Upload Attachments to Determines whether the user can upload files to the database to be attached to
Projects and Work Orders? the work order and project Attachments tab.
l Yes allows the user to upload files.
l No prevents the user from uploading files. (Default.)
Can View Project Attachments in Determines whether the user can open and view files attached to a project
Work Orders? from the work order Attachments tab.
l Yes allows the user to view files attached to a project.
l No prevents the user from viewing files. (Default.)
Can View Work Order Attachments? Determines whether the user can view attached files shown in the
Attachments tab of the Work Order dialog.
l Yes allows the user to open attached files.
l No does not allow the user to open attached files. The user will see the
files shown in the Attachments tab, but will receive an error message
when attempting to open them. (Default.)

Work Order Special Instructions Determines whether the user has access to the Special Instructions text box
access rights on the work order Main tab.
l Follow Profile assigns access rights from the profile of the User Group to
which the user belongs.
l Append Only allows the user to add information to the Special
Instructions field. The user is not allowed to change any existing
information.
l View Only allows the user to view the information in the Special
Instructions field.
l No Access restricts all access to the Special Instructions field. (Default.)
Can Book Outside Rolling Window Determines if a scheduler is able to book orders at or below a certain status if a
up to: resource has a Rolling Window. Select a status from the list. Default is None.
Allow override of client ‘Cannot Use’ Determines whether the user can proceed to book a resource in a work order if
resource restrictions? the assigned client is not allowed to use that resource.
l Yes displays a “cannot use” warning and displays “Proceed Anyway?”
with Yes and No buttons. (Default.)
l No displays a “cannot use” warning but prevents the user from
proceeding.
The Cannot Use feature is used to prevent the user from booking certain
resources in work orders that have a specific assigned client. Resources that
are restricted for a client are listed In the Preferences tab of the client setup
dialog.
Can Change Vendor Or Determines whether the user can assign or change the vendor assigned to a
Delete/Replace Resources with resource booking or replace a resource with another resource with an assigned
Vendor Id? vendor.
l Yes allows the user to assign or change the vendor assigned to a resource
booking or replace a resource with another resource with an assigned
vendor.
l No prevents the user from assigning or changing the vendor assigned to a
resource booking or replace a resource with another resource with an
assigned vendor. (Default.)
Can Add a Stock Resource to a Determines whether a user is allowed to enter a quantity of a stock resource in
Work Order with a Negative Quantity a work order of zero or a negative number.
l Yes allows the user to enter a quantity of a stock resource in a work order
of zero or a negative number.
l No does not allow the user to enter a quantity of a stock resource in a
work order of zero or a negative number. The quantity entered cannot be
less than the Minimum Quantity Sold value set in the Other tab of the
resources Setup dialog. (Default.)

Can Persist Browser Height Determines whether the user’s changes to the height of browser rows (such as
Changes? the resource rows on the scheduling calendar) will remain in effect the next
time the browser is displayed.
l Yes allows the user’s changes to remain in effect the next time the
browser is opened.
l No does not allow the user’s changes to remain in effect the next time the
browser is opened. (Default.)
Can Modify Event Description in Determines whether the user can change the description of an event within a
Work Orders? work order.
l Yes Allows the user to change the event description. (Default.)
l No Prevents the user from changing the event description.
Access for Producer Assignment Determines which types of producers the user can assign to a Client (as the
default Producer) or to a Work Order on the Main tab of the Work Order dialog.
l All indicates the user can assign any producer, whether or not they are
associated to an agency or client record. (Default.)
l Agency Specific Only indicates the user can only assign a producer
associated to the agency assigned to the current item (client, work order,
etc.). If an agency has not been assigned, the Producer list will be empty
and the user will not be able to select a producer.
l Client Specific Only indicates the user can only assign a producer
associated to the client assigned to the current item (work order, project,
etc.). If a client has not been assigned, the Producer list will be empty and
the user will not be able to select a producer.
l General Only indicates the user can only assign producers that are not
associated to an agency or client.
Can Assign View Only Company to Determine whether the user can assign a companies to which the user has
entries? View Only access to a resource booking, work order, project, external cost,
payable, or quote.
l Yes allows the user to assign companies to which they have View Only
access to certain items. (Work orders assigned to a view-only company
are created in View Mode and cannot be edited by the user after initial
creation.) (Default.)
l No prevents the user from performing actions related to companies to
which they have View Only access.

Allow users to change Confirmed Determine whether users can change the status of an existing work order from
WO to non-Cancelled status (after Confirmed to anything other than Cancelled.
initial creation)
l Yes allows the user to change the status from Confirmed to any other
status to which they have permissions. This setting works in conjunction
with other security settings, such as the Limit Changes Only to Work
Orders Booked by: and Can Change Existing Wk Orders up to security
settings. (Default.)
l No allows the user to change an existing work order status from
Confirmed to Cancelled only; the user cannot assign any other status.
Can Change Stock Booked Qty to Determines whether the user is allowed to set a quantity for a stock item in a
less than minimum Qty? work order to less then the minimum quantity set in the stock resource
properties.
l Yes allows the user to set the quantity for a stock item in a work order to
less than the Minimum Quantity Sold. This quantity is determined by the
value entered on the Other tab of the Stock Properties dialog during setup
of the stock resource.
l No does not allow the user to set the quantity for a stock item in a work
order to less than the Minimum Quantity Sold. (Default.)
Force Client Selection upon Work Determines whether the user is required to select a Client in order to create a
Order Creation new work order.
l Yes requires the user to select a client for the work order.
l No allows the user to save the new work order without selecting a client.
(Default.)
Force Contract Selection upon Work Determines whether the user is required to select a Contract in order to create
Order Creation a new work order. (Requires Contract Manager.)
l Yes requires the user to select a contract for the work order.
l No allows the user to save the new work order without selecting a
contract. (Default.)
Can Manage Report Groups Determines whether the user can add, modify, and delete report groups.
Modifying a report group includes changing the name of the group, assigning
reports to a report group, and removing reports from a report group.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, and delete report groups.
l No prevents the user from creating, modifying, or deleting report groups.
(Default.)
Can On Air in Operations Manager Determines whether the operator can access the On Air button in Operations
Manager, which sets the start time of the work order.
l Yes Allows the operator to set the work order On Air time. (Default.)
l No does not allow access to the On Air function.

Can Complete WO in Operations Determines whether the operator can set the work order status to Complete.
Manager
l Yes Allows the operator to set the work order status to Complete.
(Default.)
l No does not allow access to the Complete status.
Can Clear Ack’d in Operations Determines whether the operator can clear items that have been
Manager acknowledged from the display.
l Yes allows the operator to clear acknowledged items. (Default.)
l No does not allow the operator to clear acknowledged items.
Can Ack/Clr in Operations Manager Determines whether the operator can acknowledge displayed items and also
clear items that have been acknowledged from the display.
l Yes allows the operator to clear acknowledged items. (Default.)
l No does not allow the operator to clear acknowledged items.
Can Remove Resource With Edited Determines whether the user can remove, swap, or replace a resource in a
Contract? work order if the Contract Edited flag for the resource is set to Yes.
l Yes allows the user to remove, swap, or replace a resource in a work order
if the Contract Edited flag for the resource is set to Yes. (Default.)
l No does not allow the user to remove, swap, or replace a resource in a
work order if the Contract Edited flag for the resource is set to Yes.
Can Change Edited Contract Flag Determines whether the user can change the Contract Edited flag for a
for a Resource? resource.
l Yes allows the user to select or clear the Contract Edited flag for a
l No does not allow the user to select or clear the Contract Edited flag for a
resource.
Can change Event Status when Determines whether the user can:
Confirmation ‘Needs Confirmation’?
l change the status of a resource event in the Time Capture tab of the event
dialog of a work order in the Time Capture tab of the event dialog when
l the Explicit Confirmation setting on the Main tab of the event dialog is set
to Needs Confirmation.
l Yes allows the user to change a resource event when the Explicit
Confirmation setting is set to Needs Confirmation. (Default.)
l No does not allow the user to change a resource event.

Confirmation ‘Confirmed’?
to Confirmed.
Confirmation setting is set to Confirmed. (Default.)
Confirmation ‘Not Needed’?
to Not Needed.
Confirmation setting is set to Not Needed. (Default.)
Track Time changes on Status Determines whether the Planner Start and Planner End fields are populated
Levels when the actual start or end times of a booking are modified and the work order
status is tracked.
Click the field labeled 0 statuses to display the Track Time changes on Status
Levels dialog. Select (check) all statuses to track. Click OK.
The Planner Start Time and Planner End Time need to be added to the
Resource browser of the Work Order form and the Event Times form.
Allow Employee State Changes on Determines a user’s level of access to make changes to resource details in
Completed Work Orders? work orders at Completed status level.
Note: The user must have permission to change Completed work orders.
Refer to Can Change Existing Wk Orders up to:.
l Level 0 allows the user to make changes to all fields.
l Level 1 allows the user to make changes to the following:
o Explicit Confirmation
o Event Status levels
o All fields that can result in a time change
l Level 2 allows the user to make changes to the following:

o Event Status levels – Submitted, Re-Submitted, and Modified only
o All fields that can result in a time change in the resource details
dialog. Time changes from other entry points are disabled, such as
Block Change, Extended Operations, and the scheduling calendar.

Work Order does not require Determines at which work order status a service must be assigned.
service assignment up to:
l Status Level – Options include all work order status levels. A service
must be assigned when the work order status reaches this level.
l None requires assignment of a service for any status level.
l All does not require assignment of a service. (Default.)
Work Order does not require Quote Determines the lowest status level at which the system requires a Work Order
up to: to have an associated Quote. This setting is only enforced when the No Quote
Required flag at the Work Order level is deselected (cleared). Refer to Work
Order, Other tab items in the ScheduALL Users Guide.
l Status Level – requires the Work Order to have an associated Quote at
the selected status, and any status above the selected status. (List
includes all Auxiliary Status levels configured in General Labels.)
l None requires the Work Order to have an associated Quote at all status
levels.
l All allows the user to assign any status level to a Work Order without
having an associated Quote. (Default.)
Work Area Visibility (ScheduALL Determines which tabs display in the ScheduALL WebApp application and in
WebApp Only) what order they display. Click the # selected field to display the order.
l Order – Determines the order in which the tabs display on the main page.
Enter a number for each tab to set the order. The tab with 1 in the order
column becomes the default tab displayed to the user when entering the
ScheduALL WebApp. To suppress the display of a tab, enter 0 in this
column. If no order is entered, all of the tabs display in default order.
l Column – Displays the name of each tab on the ScheduALL WebApp
main page.
Note: Some of the items on this list, such as Workflow and Smart Time,
require specific license points.
Can book paid sick? Determines whether the user can create an activity for a resource and select
the Sick Day activity type. This setting applies to both ScheduALL and
ScheduALL WebApp.
l Yes allows the user to select the Sick Day activity type when creating a
resource activity. (Default.)
l No does not allow the user to select this activity type.
Can book unpaid sick? Determines whether the user can create an activity for a resource and select
the Unpaid Sick Day activity type. This setting applies to both ScheduALL and
ScheduALL WebApp.
l Yes allows the user to select the Unpaid Sick Day activity type when
creating a resource activity. (Default.)

Can book paid day off? Determines whether the user can create an activity for a resource and select
the Day Off activity type. This setting applies to both ScheduALL and
ScheduALL WebApp.
l Yes allows the user to select the Day Off activity type when creating a
resource activity. (Default.)
Can book unpaid day off? Determines whether the user can create an activity for a resource and select
the Unpaid Day Off activity type. This setting applies to both ScheduALL and
ScheduALL WebApp.
l Yes allows the user to select the Unpaid Day Off activity type when
creating a resource activity. (Default.)
Can use column filters? Determines whether the contents of browser columns can be limited by certain
criteria in the column.
l Yes allows the user to use column filters.
l No does not display filters on any browsers.
Can Add Portal Booking? Determines whether the user can initiate a portal booking.
l Yes allows the user to create portal bookings. (Default.)
l No does not allow the user to create this type of booking.
Allow Ad-Hoc Portal Booking? Determines if the user is allowed to create ScheduALL Portal bookings without
selecting a service.
l Yes allows the user to create portal bookings without selecting a service.
l No does not allow this type of portal booking. (Default.)
Allow Deadline Based Bookings? Determines whether the user can create bookings with a deadline end time
instead of fixed start and end times.
l Yes allows the user to create deadline based bookings.
l No does not allow the user to create this type of booking. The user must
select start and end times or specify a duration for the booking. (Default.)
Disable Portal Start Time Changes Determines whether the user can modify the start time of a portal booking.
l Yes does not allow the user to modify the start time of existing portal
bookings. (Default.)
l No allows the user to modify the start time of existing portal bookings.
Disable Portal Satellite Alternate Determines whether the Alternate Booking Selector is displayed when creating
Booking Selector a portal booking.
l Yes does not display the Alternate Booking Selector. (Default.)
l No displays the Alternate Booking Selector if needed when a portal
booking can not be completed.

Allow User to Shorten Portal Determines whether the user can set the end time of a portal booking to a value
Booking? earlier than the original end time.
l Yes allows the user to set the end time of a portal booking to a value
earlier than the original end time.
l No does not allow the user to set the end time of a portal booking to a
value earlier than the original end time. (Default.)
Project Manager
Table 112. Security Settings, Project Manager
Allow Access into Project Manager? Determines the extent to which the user can utilize the Project Manager dialog.
l No prevents the user from opening the Project Manager dialog. (Default.)
l View Only allows the user to open the Project Manager dialog in VIEW
ONLY mode. The user can view a project, but cannot create, edit, delete,
or duplicate a project.
l Yes allows the user to view, create, modify, or delete projects, if the
action-specific security settings allow it.
Note: Users with a No setting are able to assign work orders to a project.
Can Print Projects? Determines whether the user has access to project-based reports described in
Project Reports in the Project Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users
Guide , and Other Project Based Reports available within the scheduling
calendar.
l Yes allows the user to generate, view, and print project-based reports.
l No prevents the user from generating project-based reports. (Default.)
Can Delete Projects up to: Determines which projects a user can delete, based on the project status level.
Refer to Status in the Project Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users
Guide for the status hierarchy.
l All allows the user to delete any project.
l None prevents the user from deleting projects of any status. (Default.)
l Individual project status levels allow the user to delete projects of the
Can Edit Projects up to: Determines which projects a user can modify, based on the project status
level. Refer to Status in the Project Manager chapter of the ScheduALL
Users Guide for the status hierarchy.
l All allows the user to modify projects of all status levels. (Default.)
l None prevents the user from modifying projects of any status level.
l Individual project status levels allow the user to modify projects of the

Table 112. Security Settings, Project Manager (continued)
Can Add Work Orders to Completed Determines if a user can assign an existing work order to, or create a work
Project/Package? order within, a project (or project billed as a package) after the project status
has been changed to Complete.
l Yes allows the user to add a work order to a Project or Package that is set
to the Complete status.
l No prevents a user from adding a work order to a Project or Package that
is set to the Complete status. (Default.)
Can Change Project Status to Determines whether the user can assign this project status to a project.
Unconfirmed?
l Yes allows the user to assign this status to any project. (Default.)
l Only ones Booked by Self allows the user to assign this status only to
projects the user originally created.
l No prevents the user from assigning this status to any project.
Note: If access to a status is set to No, that status will not display in the
status list in Project Manager. If access is set to Only ones Booked by
Self and the user is editing a project that they did not create, that status
will also not display in the status list.
Pending?
Initiated?

Confirmed?
l Note: If access to a status is set to No, that status will not display in the
status list in Project Manager. If access is set to Only ones Booked
by Self and the user is editing a project that they did not create, that
status will also not display in the status list.
Completed?
Can Change Project Status to/from Determines whether the user can assign the Reconciled status to a project, or
Reconciled? change the project status from Reconciled to a different status. Refer to
Reconcile a Project in the Project Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users
Guide.
Cancelled?
See also: Can Cancel Existing Wk Orders?, and Can Cancel Work Orders
in the Current Date?.

Can Create Project without a Quote? Determines whether the user can create a project in Project Manager.
l Yes allows the user to create a new project in Project Manager. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from creating a project in Project Manager. The user
must create a quote in Quote Manager and convert the quote into a
Package.
Can add Work Orders to Cancelled Determines if the user can assign existing work orders to, or create new work
Projects? orders in, a project in the Cancelled status.
l Yes allows a user to associate new or existing work orders with a project
in the “Cancelled” status. (Default.)
l No prevents a user from deleting a work order, or deleting.
Can View Master Projects? Determines whether the user can open the Master Project dialog and display
Master Project properties.
l Yes allows the user to open the Master Project dialog from the list of
Master Projects.
l No prevents the user from opening the Master Project dialog. However, if
Allow Access into Project Manager? is set to Yes or View Only, the
user can view the list of Master Projects, and view the list of work orders
attached to a Master Project. (Default.)
Can Add Master Projects? Determines whether the user can create a new Master Project, or duplicate an
existing Master Project. (The Allow Access into Project Manager?, Can
View Master Projects?, and Can Edit Master Projects? options must be set
to Yes.)
l Yes allows the user to create a new Master Project, or duplicate an
existing Master Project.
l No prevents the user from creating or duplicating Master Projects.
(Default.)
Can Edit Master Projects? Determines whether the user can modify an existing Master Project. (The
Allow Access into Project Manager? option must be set to Yes. This setting
automatically overrides the Can View Master Projects? option to Yes.)
l Yes allows the user to view and modify an existing Master Project.
l No prevents the user from modifying a Master Project. (Default.)
Can Delete Master Projects? Determines whether a user can remove a Master Project record.
l Yes allows the user to remove Master Project records.
l No prevents the user from removing Master Project records. (Default.)
Access Level for Projects without Determines the abilities a user has when working with a project that does not
Project Supervisor? have an assigned supervisor.
l None prevents the user from viewing or changing projects.
l View allows the user to open projects, but prevents the user from making
modifications.
l Edit allows the user to open and modify projects. (Default.)

Access Level for Projects with Determines the changes a user can make to a project that has an assigned
Project Supervisor other than self? supervisor other than the user.
l None prevents the user from viewing or changing projects.
l View allows the user to open projects, but prevents the user from making
modifications.
l Edit allows the user to open and modify projects. (Default.)
Can Edit Approval Fields on Determines whether a user can modify the Approval list selections in the
Projects Master Project dialog. Refer to Approvals Required in Master Project Dialog,
Main Table Settings in the Production Workflow Manager chapter of the
l Yes allows the user to set who must approve a project.
l No prevents the user from setting who must approve a project. (Default.)
Project can have negative Work Determines whether a user can save a project when the project contains a
Order value? work order with a negative value.
l Yes allows the project to be saved with a work order with a negative value.
l No does not allow the project to be saved with a work order with a
negative value. A warning message displays. The user must make
adjustments to remove the negative work order value. (Default.)
Quotes Manager
Table 113. Security Settings, Quotes Manager
Allow Access into Quotes Area? Determines whether the user has access to the Quotes Manager dialog.
l Yes allows the user to access Quotes Manager features from the File
menu Quotes Manager section, or from a package linked to a quote.
l No prevents the user from accessing Quotes Manager features from the
File menu Quotes Manager section, or from a package linked to a quote.
(Default.)
Can Create Quotes? Determines whether the user can create new quotes.
l Yes allows users to generate new quotes.
l No does not allow users to generate new quotes. (Default.)
Can View Quotes up to: Determines whether a user can view existing quotes, and determines which
quotes the user can view based on a maximum status level.
Limit Access Only to Quotes Created by: also affects the quotes a user can
view.
l All allows the user to view quotes of any status. (Default.)
l None prevents the user from viewing any existing quotes.
l Individual status level allows the user to view quotes at or below the
specified status in the status hierarchy.

Table 113. Security Settings, Quotes Manager (continued)
Can Edit Quotes up to: Determines whether a user can modify existing quotes, and determines which
quotes the user can modify based on a maximum status level.
modify.
l All allows the user to modify quotes of any status. (Default.)
l None prevents the user from modifying any existing quotes.
l Individual status level allows the user to modify quotes at or below the
Can Delete Quotes up to: Determines whether a user can permanently remove existing quotes, and
determines which quotes the user can remove based on a maximum status
level.
remove.
l All allows the user to permanently remove quotes of any status. (Default.)
l None prevents the user from permanently removing any existing quotes.
l Individual status level allows the user to remove quotes at or below the
Can Change Quote Status up to: Determines the maximum status level a user can assign to a new or existing
quote.
l All allows the user to change the quote status to any setting. (Default.)
l None prevents the user from changing the quote status.
l Individual status level allow the user to change the quote status to the
specified maximum. Refer to Status in the Quotes Manager chapter of the
ScheduALL Users Guide for the status hierarchy.
Can View Pricing Information in Determines whether the user can view the individual and summarized prices of
Quotes? sections, services, and resources in a quote.
Can View Quotes up to: must be set to something other than None.
l Yes displays price information in the Quote dialog.
l No hides price information by displaying asterisks instead of numbers.
(Default.)
Can Change Pricing Information in Determines whether the user can modify pricing information in a quote.
Quotes?
Can Edit Quotes up to: must be set to something other than None. It may
also be helpful to set Can View Pricing Information in Quotes? to Yes.
l Yes allows the user to change pricing information in quotes.
l No prevents the user from changing pricing information in quotes.
(Default.)

Table 113. Security Settings, Quotes Manager (continued)
Can View Cost Information in Determines whether the user can view the view the individual and summarized
Quotes? costs of sections, services, and resources in a quote.
l Yes displays cost information in the Quote dialog.
l No hides cost information by displaying asterisks instead of numbers.
(Default.)
Can Change Cost Information in Determines whether the user can modify cost information within the quote.
Quotes?
Can Edit Quotes up to: must be set to something other than None. It may
also be helpful to set Can View Cost Information in Quotes? to Yes.
l Yes allows the user to modify cost values within the quote.
l No prevents the user from modifying cost values within the quote.
(Default.)
Limit Access Only to Quotes Determines the quotes to which the user has access, based on who originally
Created by: created the quote.
l Self allows the user to only view quotes created by himself or herself.
l Group allows the user to only view quotes created by a user in the same
user group.
l No allows the user to view quotes regardless of who created the quote.
(Default.)
Limit Changes Only to Quotes Determines the quotes which the user can modify or delete, based on who
Created by: originally created the quote.
Can Edit Quotes up to: must be set to something other than None.
l Self allows the user to only modify or delete quotes created by himself or
herself.
l Group allows the user to only modify or delete quotes created by a user in
the same user group.
l No allows the user to modify or delete quotes regardless of who created
the quote. (Default.)
Limit Copy Quotes: Determines which quotes the user can copy.
l No permits the user to copy any quotes that they have access to.
l Self permits the user to copy their own quotes only.
l Group permits the user to copy quotes in their user group only.
Can View Hidden Costs in Quotes? Determines whether the user can view the hidden costs in a quote.
l Yes displays hidden cost information in the Quote dialog.
l No hides hidden cost information by displaying asterisks instead of
numbers. (Default.)
Can Edit Hidden Costs in Quotes? Determines whether the user can edit the hidden costs in a quote.
l Yes allows the user to change hidden costs in the quote.
l No prevents the user from changing hidden costs in the quote. (Default.)

Invoicing
Table 114. Security Settings, Invoicing
Allow Access into Invoicing Module? Determines whether the user has access to the Accounts Receivable
Navigator dialog using the A/R Navigator menu option. By default this option
is located on the File menu under Receivables.
Note: Depending on other permissions, the user may be able to access certain
features directly from the File menu, without using the Accounts
Receivable Navigator dialog.
l Yes allows the user to display the Accounts Receivable Navigator dialog.
l No prevents the user from opening the Accounts Receivable Navigator
dialog. (Default.)
Can Print (Generate) Invoices? Determines whether the user has access to the Generate Invoices menu
option to create or reprint invoices. By default this option is located on the File
menu under Billing.
l Yes allows the user generate or reprint invoices.
l No prevents the user from generating or reprinting invoices. (Default.)
Can Post Payments? Determines whether the user is allowed to post payments against existing
invoices (by invoice number, by client, or by date), against multiple invoices, or
to a client’s account.
Note: As part of this process, the user will be able to view the list of invoices
and other transactions, with amounts.
l Yes allows the user to post payments.
l No prevents the user from posting payments. (Default.)
Can Post & Print Credits? Determines whether the user is allowed to post credit notes, general credits, or
batch credits against invoices or to client accounts; reprint credits; and post
debit memos.
l Yes allows the user to post credits and debit memos.
l No prevents the user from posting credits and debit memos. (Default.)
Can Void Invoices? Determines whether the user is allowed to reverse an unpaid invoice in its
entirety.
l Yes allows the user to reverse transactions.
l No prevents the user from reversing a transaction. (Default.)

Table 114. Security Settings, Invoicing (continued)
Can Print Ageing & Statements? Determines whether the user is allowed to preview and print statements,
ageing reports, and dunning letters.
See also Can View & Print Reports?.
l Yes allows the user to print invoicing reports and related correspondence.
l No prevents the user from viewing or printing invoicing reports and related
correspondence. (Default.)
Can Close A/R Periods? Determines whether the user can close an accounts receivable period, along
with any open transactions within that period.
l Yes allows the user to close an accounts receivable period.
l No prevents the user from closing an accounts receivable period.
(Default.)
Can Close A/P Periods? Determines whether the user can close an accounts payable period, along with
any open transactions within that period.
l Yes allows the user to close an accounts payable period.
l No prevents the user from closing an accounts payable period. (Default.)
Can View & Print Reports? Determines whether the user is allowed to preview and print general invoicing
and ledger reports.
See also Can Print Ageing & Statements?.
l Yes allows the user to print general invoicing and ledger reports.
l No prevents the user from printing invoicing and ledger reports. (Default.)
Can Change Method for Allocating Determines whether the user can change the tax distribution when posting
Taxes? payments, such as to multiple invoices.
l Yes allows the user change the tax distribution.
l No does not allow the user change the tax distribution. The Tax
Distribution options are disabled. (Default.)
Can Edit Ledgers? Determines whether the user is allowed to change the currency amounts of
allocations, and the ledger accounts to which they are allocated.
l Yes allows the user to change allocations and ledger accounts.
l No prevents the user from changing allocations. (Default.)
Allow Changes to Ledgers in Closed Determines whether the user is allowed to change the currency amounts of
Period? allocations, and the ledger accounts to which they are allocated, for
transactions in a closed accounting period.
l Yes allows the user to change allocations and ledger accounts. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from changing allocations.
Can Access Accounts Receivable Determines whether the user is allowed to open the A/R Central dialog to view
Central? all invoices, payments, credits, transactions, and ageing by client.
l Yes allows the user to open the A/R Central dialog. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from opening the A/R Central dialog.

Table 114. Security Settings, Invoicing (continued)
Allow Set/Reset of Solomon Determines whether the user is allowed to prepare or reset transactions for
A/R Transactions? export to the Solomon accounting interface, as described in Manage A/R
Transactions in the Billing and Receivables chapter of the ScheduALL Users
Guide .
l Yes allows the user to set or reset Solomon transaction flags.
l No prevents the user from setting or resetting Solomon transaction flags.
(Default.)
Allow Clearing of Solomon Allows a user to view and modify transactions with an existing Solomon
Generated Batch Numbers? generated batch number (or any value other than null, R, or X) in the
INVOICES.EXT_BATNBR field. (The Allow Set/Reset of Solomon A/R
Transactions? permission must be set to Yes for this permission to take
effect.)
l Yes allows the user to view and modify transactions with an existing
Solomon generated batch number.
l No prevents the user from viewing and modifying transactions. (Default.)
External Costs Manager

Table 115. Security Settings, External Costs Manager
Allow Access into External Costs Determines if the user has access to the External Cost Manager, either from
Manager the External Cost Manager section of the File menu, or from external cost
features on the Work Order and Project menus.
l Yes allows a user to access External Costs Manager menus, dialogs, and
features.
l No does not allow access to the External Costs Manager. (Default.)
Can Add Payables Determines if the user can enter payables into the External Costs Manager.
l Yes allows the user to enter payables.
l No prevents the user from entering payables. (Default.)
Can Edit Payables up to: Determines the maximum status a user can assign to an external cost entry
when creating the entry.
l Individual status levels allow a user to edit a payables up to (but not
including) the specified status.
l All allows a user to edit payables of any status.
l None prevents a user from editing any External Cost Entry. (Default.)
Can Delete Payables up to: Determines which payable entries a user is allowed to permanently remove.
l Individual status levels allow a user to delete payables up to (but not
including) the specified status.
l All allows a user to delete payables of any status.
l None prevents a user from deleting any External Cost Entry. (Default.)

Table 115. Security Settings, External Costs Manager (continued)
Can Generate Vendor Notifications? Determines whether a user can generate vendor notifications.
l Yes allows a user to generate vendor notifications. The “Can Access e-

mail Work Order Notification Reports” option must also be set to “Yes”.
l No prevents a user from generating vendor notifications. (Default.)
Can View Vendor Invoices? Determines whether a user has access to the Vendor Invoice features from the
External Cost Manager section of the File menu. This includes the Vendor
Invoices, Vendor Invoice Reports, and Find Vendor Invoices items.
l Yes allows the user to access the Vendor Invoice dialog.
l No prevents the user from viewing vendor invoices. (Default.)
Can Delete Vendor Invoices? Determines whether a user can remove Vendor Invoices from the External
Cost Manager.
l Yes allows the user to remove Vendor Invoices. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from removing Vendor Invoices.
Can Assign Vendors in Work Orders Determines which vendors the user can assign in work orders.
from:
l All Vendors allows the user to assign all vendors in work orders.
(Default.)
l Group Profiles allows the user to assign vendors specified in their
group’s profile.
Can Override Payable Limit Determines whether the user can enter payables over the limit set in their User
Conflicts Profile.
l Yes allows the user to override the payable limit.
l No prevents the user from overriding the limit. (Default.)
Can Edit Payable Determines if the user can edit payables.
l Yes allows the user to edit any payable. (Default.)
l Only ones Booked by Self allows the user to only edit payables that
they have created.
l No prevents the user from editing payables.
Can View Payable Determines if the user can view payables.
l Yes allows the user to view any payable. (Default.)
l Only ones Booked by Self allows the user to only view payables that
they have created.
l No prevents the user from viewing payables.
Can Delete Payable Determines if the user can delete payables.
l Yes allows the user to delete any payable. (Default.)
l Only ones Booked by Self allows the user to only delete payables that
they have created.
l No prevents the user from deleting payables.

Table 115. Security Settings, External Costs Manager (continued)
Allow Generation of Vendor Determines whether the user can generate vendor notifications if booking
Notification Upon Conflicts conflicts exist.
l Yes allows the user to generate vendor notifications if booking conflicts
exist.
l No not allow the user to generate vendor notifications if booking conflicts
exist. (Default.)
Personnel Manager
Table 116. Security Settings, Personnel Manager
Allow Access into Personnel Determines if the user has access to the Personnel Manager option of the
Manager? File menu.
l Yes displays the Personnel Manager option on the File menu and allows
the user to access the module.
l View Only allows the user to access the Personnel Manager with View
permissions only.
l No removes the Personnel Manager option from the File menu for the
specified user. (Default.)
Can Print Personnel Hour Report? Determines whether the user has access to the Personnel Payable Time
Reports option from the Personnel Manager option of the File menu.
l Yes allows the user to print Personnel Payable Time Reports.
l No removes report generation option from the Personnel Manager menu.
(Default.)
Can Access Rotation Determines whether the user can add, modify, or remove personnel rotation
Maintenance? patterns. Refer to Personnel Shift Rotations/Patterns in the Personnel
Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
l Yes Allows the user to access Rotation Maintenance.
l No prevents the user from accessing Rotation Maintenance. (Default.)
Can Access Rotation Assignment? Determines whether the user can assign personnel to rotations, and release
personnel from rotations. Refer to Personnel Shift Rotations/Patterns in the
Personnel Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
l Yes Allows the user to access Rotation Assignments.
l No prevents the user from accessing Rotation Assignments. (Default.)
Can View Personnel Summaries? Determines whether the user can view the summaries of personnel
information. Refer to Summary Views in the Personnel Manager chapter of the
l Yes allows the user to view the summaries of personnel information.
l No prevents the user from viewing the summaries of personnel
information. (Default.)

Table 116. Security Settings, Personnel Manager (continued)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Other Paid Determines whether the user can book, modify, or permanently remove the
Activity 1 – 3? designated paid activities.
l Yes allows the user to book, modify, or permanently remove the
designated paid activities.
l No prevents the user from booking, modifying, or permanently removing
the designated paid activities. (Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Other Non Determines whether the user can book, modify, or permanently remove the
Paid Activity 1 – 3? designated unpaid activities.
l Yes allows the user to book, modify, or permanently remove the
designated unpaid activities.
the designated unpaid activities. (Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Determines whether the user can access non-conflicting activities on the
Non-Conflicting Activity? scheduling calendar.
l Yes allows the user to book, modify, or permanently remove
non-conflicting activities.
non-conflicting activities. (Default.)
Can User Access Pay Scales? Determines whether the user can access Pay Scales Setup from the
Personnel Manager selection of the File menu.
l Yes allows the user to select Pay Scales Setup.
l No does not allow the user to select Pay Scales Setup. The menu item is
hidden. (Default.)
Can User Create Pay Scales? Determines whether the user can add Pay Scales from the Personnel Manager
selection of the File menu.
l Yes allows the user to add new Pay Scales.
l No does not allow the user to add Pay Scales. The New button is hidden.
(Default.)
Can User Edit Pay Scales? Determines whether the user can modify Pay Scales from the Personnel
Manager selection of the File menu.
l Yes allows the user to modify Pay Scales.
l No does not allow the user to modify Pay Scales. The Edit button is
hidden. (Default.)
Can User Delete Pay Scales? Determines whether the user can remove Pay Scales from the Personnel
Manager selection of the File menu.
l Yes allows the user to remove Pay Scales.
l No does not allow the user to remove Pay Scales. The Delete button is
hidden. (Default.)

Table 116. Security Settings, Personnel Manager (continued)
Allow Period Left to Right Overtime Determines whether the user can recalculate overtime for all events within a
Recalculations? time period.
l Yes allows the user to recalculate overtime using the Recalculate
Overtime menu command.
l No does not allow the user to use the Recalculate Overtime menu
command. (Default.)
Working Time Manager

Table 117. Security Settings, Working Time Manager
Lock Work Day? Determines whether a user has access to the work day and can create work
days on the calendar if they require that functionality.
l Yes opens the Work Day in Edit mode and allows access to the New Shift
Work function.
l No opens the Work Day in View mode and the New Shift Work function is
disabled. Work Day start and end times are still managed by member
events. (Default.)
Security Option 1–10 Determines how the associated rules will be handled for this profile.
l Rule Not Run – This profile will not run the associated rules.
l Proceed Allowed – This profile will run the rule and, if triggered, a dialog
displays that will allow the user to proceed.
l Proceed Not Allowed – This profile will run the rule and, if triggered, a
dialog displays that will not allow the user to proceed with the modification
or new booking. When the first alarm is reached when running rules,
processing will be suspended.
Library
Table 118. Security Settings, Library
Can Add, Edit, and Delete Audio Determines whether the New, Edit, and Delete buttons in the Assign Audio
Entries? dialog are displayed.
l Yes displays the New, Edit, and Delete buttons in the Assign Audio
dialog.
l No does not display the New, Edit, and Delete buttons in the Assign
Audio dialog. Only the Select and Exit buttons are available.(Default.)
Allow Access into Library Module? Determines whether a user can view the Media Manager System within the
ScheduALL application, either from the Media Manager System option on the
File menu and Toolbar, or from Library features on the Work Order and Project
menus.
l Yes allows the user to access Library features.
l No prevents the user from accessing Library features. (Default.)

Table 118. Security Settings, Library (continued)
Can Add New Entries? Determines whether the user can create new library entries.
l Yes allows the user to create new library entries.
l No prevents the user from creating new library entries. (Default.)
Can Modify Existing Entries? Determines whether the user can edit existing library entries.
l Yes allows the user to modify existing library entries.
l No prevents the user from modifying existing library entries. (Default.)
Can Delete Entries? Determines whether the user can permanently remove existing library entries.
l Yes allows the user to permanently remove library entries.
l No prevents the user from permanently removing library entries. (Default.)
Can Recycle Tapes? Determines whether the user can mark existing library entries for re-use.
l Yes allows the user to mark existing library entries for re-use.
l No prevents the user from marking existing library entries for re-use.
(Default.)
Can Check Items In & Out? Determines whether the user has access to the Check In and Check Out
features of the Library. Refer to Library Tasks in the Media Manager chapter of
l Yes allows the user to check items into and out of the Media Manager
System.
l No prevents the user from checking items into and out of the Media
Manager System. (Default.)
Can Maintain Media Formats List? Determines whether the user has access to the Library Media Formats setup
option. (From the File menu, select Setup.) This option also determines if the
user has access to the Add, Edit, and Delete options of the Assign Media
Format dialog. (Can Modify Existing Entries? must also be set to Yes.)
l Yes allows the user to add, modify, or delete media formats.
l No only allows the user to select the media format from the given list.
(Default.)
Can Maintain Library Locations Determines whether the user has access to the Library Locations setup option.
List? (From the File menu, select Setup.) This option also determines if the user has
access to the Add, Edit, and Delete options of the Assign Storage Location
dialog. (Can Modify Existing Entries? must also be set to Yes.)
l Yes allows the user to add, modify, or delete locations.
l No prevents the user from adding, modifying, or deleting locations.
(Default.)

Can Maintain Categories? Determines whether the user has access to the Library Categories setup
option. (From the File menu, select Setup.) This option also determines if the
user has access to the Add, Edit, and Delete options of the Select Library
Category dialog. (Can Modify Existing Entries? must also be set to Yes.)
l Yes allows the user to add, modify, or delete categories.
l No prevents the user from adding, modifying, or deleting categories.
(Default.)
Can Print Library Reports? Determines whether the user has access to report features within the Library
module, including general and traffic reports. Refer to Library Reports in the
Media Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
l Yes allows the user to print general and traffic reports.
l No prevents the user from printing Library reports. (Default.)
Can Print Library Labels? Determines whether the user has access to label features within the Library
module. Refer to Library Labels in the Media Manager chapter of the
l Yes allows the user to print Library labels.
l No prevents the user from printing Library labels. (Default.)
Can Print Packing Slips? Determines whether the user is able to print packing slip reports as part of the
Check In and Check Out processes. Refer to Library Tasks in the Media
l Yes allows the user to print packing slips.
l No prevents the user from printing packing slips. (Default.)
Can Access Library System from Determines whether a user can view the Media Manager from an application
the Internet? outside the ScheduALL application, such as one of the ScheduALL Web-based
client applications built on the Microsoft .NET framework.
l Yes allows the user to access the Media Manager from outside the
ScheduALL application.
l No prevents the user from accessing the Media Manager from any
external applications. (Default.)
Can Modify Client/Tape Traffic Determines whether the user can change the following settings:
Status?
1. Release Status on the Traffic tab of the Library dialog
2. Tape Release in the Billing Information tab of the Client setup dialog
l Yes allows the user to . (Default.)
l No prevents the user from

Can Approve Release? Determines whether the user can approve a Check Out operation when the
Release Status is set to Requires Approval. Refer to Release Status in the
Library Dialog, Traffic Tab Settings section of the Media Manager chapter of
l Yes allows the user to approve a check out of restricted items.
l No prevents the user from approving a check out of restricted items.
(Default.)
Can Edit Tapes up to: Determines which tapes the user can modify, based on the Edit Access
setting, allowing the supervisor to provide access to only certain items. Can
Modify Existing Entries? must be set to Yes.
l All indicates the user can modify any library item. (Default.)
l Level # indicates that the user can modify any tape at, or below, the
specified level.
l None indicates the user cannot modify any library item.
Can Check Out Tapes to Multiple Determines whether the user can select more than one client in the same
Clients at Once? Check Out operation.
l Yes warns the user when adding an asset to the Check Out list if the
asset’s Client does not match the Client of Record, but allows the user to
override the warning for one or all assets in the operation. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from adding an asset to the Check Out list if the
asset’s Client does not match the Client of Record (i.e. the client of the
first asset in the list).
Can Change Library Release Determines whether the user can modify the Release Status field on the
Status? Traffic tab of the Library entry dialog.
l Yes allows the user to select a release status from the list. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from selecting a release status from the list
Prevent Creation and Modifications Determines whether a user is required to enter their PIN number when
of Bookings for Assets? attempting to create a media asset, change the properties of a media asset, or
book the asset in a work order. This validates the current user.
l Yes requires the user to enter their PIN number each time the user
attempts to perform certain actions. The Login Method for Switch User
Feature: system preference must be set to PIN Number.
l No allows the user to perform actions on a Library entry (if they have the
appropriate security to do so) without providing their PIN number.
(Default.)
Can Save/Delete Custom Queries Determines whether the user can save or delete custom queries.
l Public and Private/Self indicates the user can save or delete all public
queries and any private queries that they created. (Default.)
l No indicates that the user cannot save or delete any custom queries.
l Private/Self Only indicates the user cannot save or delete public queries
but can save or delete private queries that they created.

Can Add/Edit/Delete Media Determines whether the user can manipulate media classifications.
Classifications
l Yes allows the user to add, edit, or delete media classifications.
l No prevents the user from adding, editing, or deleting media
classifications. (Default.)
Allow access to Title Management? Determines whether the user can display the Title Setup dialog.
l Yes allows the user to display the Title Setup dialog.
l No does not all the user to display the dialog. (Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Title? Determines whether the user can create, modify, or remove titles in the Title
Setup dialog. (Requires Title Manager.)
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or remove titles.
l No does not allow the user to create, modify, or remove titles. (Default.)
Can Book Inactive Titles Determines whether the user can see inactive titles in the selection dialog, and
if they are able to assign inactive titles via the MediaAssetCreate/Modify
commands.
l Yes allows booking inactive titles. (Default.)
l No does not allow booking inactive titles. They will not be able to assign
inactive titles via the MediaAssetCreate/Modify commands.
Can Assign/Release Restricted Determines whether the user can add or remove titles that are marked as
Titles to Library Items? Restricted to a media item. (Requires Title Manager.)
l Yes allows the user to add or remove titles that are marked as Restricted
to a media item.
l No does not allow the user to add or remove titles that are marked as
Restricted. (Default.)
Can Assign/Release ‘Enforce Determines whether the user can add or remove categories with Enforce
Restriction’ Categories to Library Restriction to media items. (Requires Title Manager.)
Items?
l Yes allows the user to add or remove categories that are marked as
Enforce Restriction to media items.
l No does not allow the user to add or remove categories that are marked as
Enforce Restriction. (Default.)
Can modify Release date of Library (Requires Title Manager.)
item?
Determines if the user change enter or change any of the following dates:
l Domestic Theatrical Release Date
l Domestic DVD Release Date
l International Theatrical Release Date
l International DVD Release Date
l Yes allows the user to enter or edit these dates.
l No does not allow the user to enter or edit these dates. The fields are
dimmed and read-only. (Default.)

Can move Restricted Records up to Determines if the user can move the asset to another location if the current
Domestic Theatrical Release Date? date is before the Domestic Theatrical Release Date. (Requires Title
Manager.)
l Yes allows the user move the asset before the Domestic Theatrical
Release Date.
l No does not allow the user to move the asset. (Default.)
Can move Restricted Records from Determines if the user can move the asset to another location between the
Domestic Theatrical up to DVD Domestic Theatrical Release Date and the Domestic DVD Release Date.
Release Date? (Requires Title Manager.)
l Yes allows the user move the asset between the Domestic Theatrical
Release Date and the Domestic DVD Release Date.
l No does not allow the user to move the asset between these dates.
(Default.)
For example:
l Domestic Theatrical Release Date = 07/10
l Current date = 07/15
l Domestic DVD Release Date = 07/20
If this setting is Yes, the user can move the asset, since the current date is
between the Domestic Theatrical Release Date and the Domestic DVD
Release Date.
Prevent Location Scan Move to a Determines whether a user is allowed to perform a Move scan using a Check
Check Out Location? Out Location.
l Yes prevents the user from performing a Location (Move) Scan using a
location for which the “Check Out Location” setting is selected.
l No allows the user to perform a Location (Move) Scan using a location for
which the “Check Out Location” setting is selected.
Can Move Items? Determines whether a user is allowed to use the Location Scan for this Asset
command to move an item to a new library location.
l Yes enables the Location Scan this Asset button on the Library Main tab.
l No disables the Location Scan this Asset button on the Library Main tab.
(Default.)
Can Destroy Library Items? Determines whether the user is allowed to mark an asset as destroyed using
the Destroy Item command.
l Yes enables the Destroy command.
l No disables the Destroy command. (Default.)
Can Restore Library Items? Determines whether the user is allowed to use the Restore Item command to
restore an asset that was previously marked as destroyed.
l Yes enables the Restore command.
l No disables the Restore command. (Default.)

Can Add/Edit/Delete Library Determines if the user can create, change, or remove library templates.
Template
l Yes allows the user to create, change, or remove library templates.
l No prevents the user from creating, changing, or removing library
templates. (Default.)
Duplication
Table 119. Security Settings, Duplication
Allow Access into Duplication Determines if the user has access to the Duplication submenu from the
Module? File menu. The user may be able to view duplication information from the
Work Order form, based on work order security settings, and may be able
to modify duplication settings through the work order form based on other
duplication security settings.
l Yes allows a user to access Duplication menus, dialogs, and
features.
l No does not allow access to Duplication features. (Default.)
Can Add New Dub Orders? Determines if the user can create Dub Orders.
l Yes allows the user to create Dub Orders.
l No prevents the user from creating Dub Orders. (Default.)
Can Delete Dub Orders? Determines if the user can permanently remove Dub Orders.
l Yes allows the user to remove Dub Orders.
l No prevents the user from removing Dub Orders. (Default.)
Can Modify Existing Dub Orders? Determines if the user can change existing Dub Orders.
l Yes allows the user to edit Dub Orders.
l No prevents the user from editing Dub Orders. (Default.)
Can Confirm Dub Orders? Determines if the user can set the Dub Order status to Confirmed. Dub
order status is independent of Project status and Work Order status. Refer
to Status in the Dub Order, Main Page Settings section of the Duplication
l Yes allows the user to confirm Dub Orders.
l No prevents the user from confirming Dub Orders. (Default.)
Can Complete Dub Orders? Determines if the user can set the Dub Order status to Completed. Dub
order status is independent of Project status and Work Order status. Refer
to Status in the Dub Order, Main Page Settings section of the Duplication
l Yes allows the user to complete Dub Orders.
l No prevents the user from completing Dub Orders. (Default.)

Table 119. Security Settings, Duplication (continued)
Can Change Pricing for Dub Order? Determines if the user can modify pricing information for Dub Orders.
l Yes allows the user to change price information for Dub Orders.
l No prevents the user from changing price information for Dub Orders.
(Default.)
Can Change Cost for Dub Order? Determines if the user can modify cost information for Dub Orders.
l Yes allows the user to change cost information for Dub Orders.
l No prevents the user from changing cost information for Dub Orders.
(Default.)
Can Open Work Order From Activity Determines if the user can open a work order with the Edit Work Order
By Dub Order button or menu selection in the Activity By Dub Order browser.
l Yes allows the user to view the work order in this manner.
l No prevents the user from opening work orders from the browser.
(Default.)
Maintenance & Setup Areas

Table 120. Security Settings, Maintenance & Setup Areas
Allow access to Connector Determines if the user has the ability to configure the Connector section of
Administration? WebApp.
l Yes allows the user to configure the Connector section.
l No prevents the user from configurine the Connector section. The
message “Insufficient Permissions” displays when the user tries to log on.
(Default.)
Allow Access into Rooms & Determines if the user has access to the “Rooms & Resources” item of the
Resource Maintenance? Setup section of the File menu.
l Yes allows the user to access room and resource information.
l No prevents the user from accessing room and resource information.
(Default.)
Can Create Categories and Types Determines if the user can add new resource categories or resource types.
l Yes allows the user to add new resource categories or resource types.
l No prevents the user from adding new resource categories or resource
types. (Default.)
Can Edit Categories and Types Determines if the user can modify existing resource categories or resource
types.
l Yes allows the modify to add new resource categories or resource types.
l No prevents the user from modifying new resource categories or resource
types. (Default.)

Table 120. Security Settings, Maintenance & Setup Areas (continued)
Can Delete Categories and Types Determines if the user can permanently remove existing resource categories or
resource types.
l Yes allows the user to remove resource categories or resource types.
l No prevents the user from removing resource categories or resource
types. (Default.)
Can Add Rooms? Determines the user’s permissions to create, display, modify, or permanently
Can View Rooms? remove resources designated as a Room.
Can Edit Rooms? l Yes allows the user to create, display, modify, or permanently remove
Can Delete Rooms? room resources.
l No prevents the user from creating, displaying, modifying, or permanently
removing room resources. (Default.)
Can Add/Release Rooms to Determines the user’s permissions to associate a room to a category and type
Category/Type? combination, or to remove the category and type association.
l Yes allows the user to associate a room to a category and type
combination, or to remove the category and type association.
l No does not allow the user to change or delete the room category/type
association. (Default.)
Can Add Services? Determines the user’s permissions to create, display, modify, or permanently
Can View Services? remove general services.
Can Edit Services? l Yes allows the user to create, display, modify, or permanently remove
Can Delete Services? services.
removing services. (Default.)
Can Add BandPlans? Determines the user’s permissions to create, display, modify, or permanently
Can View BandPlans? remove BandPlan resources in the Rooms & Resources Setup area.
Can Edit BandPlans? l Yes allows the user to create, display, modify, or permanently remove
Can Delete BandPlans? services.
removing services. (Default.)
Can Add/Release BandPlans to Determines the user’s permissions to associate a BandPlan resource to a
Category/Type? category and type combination, or to remove the category and type
association.
l Yes allows the user to associate a stock resource to a BandPlan and type
l No does not allow the user to change or delete the BandPlan resource
category/type association. (Default.)

Shipping Services Determines the user’s permissions to create, permanently remove, or modify
Can Add Shipping Services? services using the “Is Ship Service?” flag of the Accounting tab in the Service
Can Delete Shipping Services? Properties dialog.
Can Edit Shipping Services? l Yes allows the user to create, permanently remove, or modify shipping
services.
l No prevents the user from creating, permanently removing, or modifying
shipping services. (Default.)
Can Add Duplication Services? Determines the user’s permissions to create, modify, or permanently remove
Can Edit Duplication Services? services using the “Is Dub Service?” flag of the Accounting tab in the Service
Can Delete Duplication Services? Properties dialog.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove duplication
services.
l No prevents the user from creating, modifying, or permanently removing
duplication services. (Default.)
Can Add Resources? Determines the user’s permissions to create, display, modify, or permanently
Can View Resources? remove a resource designated as a general resource.
Can Edit Resources? l Yes allows the user to create, display, modify, or permanently remove
Can Delete Resources? general resources.
removing general resources. (Default.)
Can Add/Release Resources to Determines the user’s permissions to associate a general resource to a
association.
l Yes allows the user to associate a general resource to a category and type
l No does not allow the user to change or delete the general resource
Can Add People? Determines the user’s permissions to create, display, modify, or permanently
Can View People? remove a resource designated as a Personnel resource.
Can Edit People? l Yes allows the user to create, display, modify, or permanently remove
Can Delete People? personnel resources.
removing personnel resources. (Default.)
Can Add/Release People to Determines the user’s permissions to associate a personnel resource to a
association.
l Yes allows the user to associate a personnel resource to a category and
type combination, or to remove the category and type association.
l No does not allow the user to change or delete the personnel resource

Can Add Stock? Determines the user’s permissions to create, display, modify, or permanently
Can View Stock? remove a resource designated as a Stock resource.
Can Edit Stock? l Yes allows the user to create, display, modify, or permanently remove
Can Delete Stock? stock resources.
removing stock resources. (Default.)
Can Add/Release Stock to Determines the user’s permissions to associate a stock resource to a category
Category/Type? and type combination, or to remove the category and type association.
l Yes allows the user to associate a stock resource to a category and type
l No does not allow the user to change or delete the stock resource
Can View Agency Information? Determines the user’s permissions to display, create, modify, or permanently
Can Add Agencies? remove Agency entries accessed from the Setup menu or from other dialogs.
Can Edit Agencies? Refer to Client, Contact, and Agency Setup.
Can Delete Agencies? l Yes allows the user to display, create, modify, or permanently remove
agencies.
l No prevents the user from displaying, creating, modifying, or permanently
removing agencies. (Default.)
Can View Client Information? Determines the user’s permissions to display, create, modify, or permanently
Can View Client Attachments in remove Client entries accessed from the Setup menu or from other dialogs.
Projects and Work Orders? Refer to Client, Contact, and Agency Setup.
Can Add Clients? l Yes allows the user to display, create, modify, or permanently remove
Can Edit Clients? client related information.
Can Delete Clients? l No prevents the user from displaying, creating, modifying, or permanently
removing client related information. (Default.)
Can View Contact Information? Determines the user’s permissions to display, create, modify, or permanently
Can Add Contacts? remove Contact entries accessed from the Setup menu or from other dialogs.
Can Edit Contacts? Refer to Client, Contact, and Agency Setup.
Can Delete Contacts? l Yes allows the user to display, create, modify, or permanently remove
contact related information.
removing contact related information. (Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Account Determines the user’s permissions to create, modify, or permanently remove
Executives? Account Executive entries accessed from the Setup menu or from other
dialogs, as described in Producers, Account Executives, and Directors.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove account
executive related information.
account executive related information. (Default.)

Can Add/Edit/Delete Tax Determines the user’s permissions to create, modify, or permanently remove
Structures? tax structures. Refer to Tax Structures.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove tax
structure information.
tax structure information. (Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Client Terms? Determines the user’s permissions to create, modify, or permanently remove
Billing Terms entries accessed from the Setup menu or from other dialogs, as
described in Client Properties – Billing Information.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove client
terms.
client terms. (Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Producers? Determines the user’s permissions to create, modify, or permanently remove
Producer entries accessed from the Setup menu or from other dialogs, as
described in Producers, Account Executives, and Directors.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove producer
related information.
producer related information. (Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Rate Cards? Determines the user’s permissions to create, modify, or permanently remove
Rate Card entries accessed from the Setup menu or from other dialogs, as
described in Adding a Rate Card.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove rate card
information.
rate card information. (Default.)
Can Change Own Password? Determines if the user can change his or her own password and modify their
own display, navigation and options settings.
l Yes allows the user to change his or her own password.
l No prevents the user from changing his or her own password. (Default.)
Can Change Own Preferences? Determines if the user can access the User Preference area and modify their
own display, navigation and options settings.
l Yes allows the user to access the User Preference area.
l No prevents the user from accessing the User Preference area. (Default.)
Can Change Conflict Preferences? Determines if the user can change his or her own User Preferences for conflict
warnings, as described in General User Preferences – Conflict Warnings.
l Yes allows the user to modify his or her own User Preferences for conflict
warnings.
l No prevents the user from modifying his or her own User Preferences for
conflict warnings. (Default.)

Can Add/Modify/Delete Resource Determines the user’s permissions to add, modify, or remove resource groups
Groups? as described in Resource Group Setup.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove resource
groups.
resource groups. (Default.)
Can View Audit Trail? Determines if the user can access the View Audit Trail option on the File
menu. Refer to Audit Trail.
l Yes allows the user to view the audit trail.
l No prevents the user from viewing the audit trail. (Default.)
Can Access Pay Category Setup? (Requires Personnel Manager.) Determines the user’s permissions to add,
modify, or remove pay categories in the Personnel Manager module as
described in Pay Categories in the Personnel Manager chapter of the
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove pay
categories.
pay categories. (Default.)
Can Change Report and Data Determines whether the user can access the Set Database/Common
Locations? Directory, Set Sample Database Directory, and Set Reports Directory
commands.
l Yes allows the user to change report and data locations.
l No prevents the user from changing report and data locations. (Default.)
Can Maintain Vendors? (Requires External Cost Manager.) Determines whether the user can access
the Vendors option in the Setup submenu. (Can View Vendors?, must also
be set to Yes.) Refer to Vendor Setup in the External Cost Manager chapter of
l Yes allows the user to access vendor information.
l No prevents the user from accessing vendor information. (Default.)
Can Maintain Vendor Groups? (Requires External Cost Manager.) Determines whether the user can access
the Vendor Groups Setup option in the Setup submenu. (Can View
Vendors? must also be set to Yes.) Refer to Vendor Setup in the External
l Yes allows the user to access vendor group information.
l No prevents the user from accessing vendor group information. (Default.)
Can Maintain Alternate Currencies? Determines whether the user can access the Currency Setup option in the
Setup submenu.
l Yes allows the user to access alternate currency information.
l No prevents the user from accessing alternate currency information.
(Default.)

Can Maintain Client Groups? Determines whether the user can add, modify, or remove Client Groups. Refer
to Client Groups for more information about client groups.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove client
groups.
client groups. (Default.)
Can Maintain Generic Pick Lists? Determines whether the user can add or modify items in General Pick List
Entry dialogs.
l Yes allows the user to add or modify items.
l No prevents the user from adding or modifying items. (Default.)
Can Modify Desktops (Public and Determines whether the user can create, modify, or delete custom desktops
Private/Self)? as described in User Preferences: Desktops:
l Public and Private/Self allows the user to create, modify, and delete
desktops that are available to all users (Public) as well as desktops that
are only available to the user that created them (Private/Self). (Default.)
l No prevents the user from creating, modifying, or deleting any desktops.
l Private Only allows the user to create, modify, and delete private
desktops, but prevents the user from creating, modifying, or removing
desktops that are available to everyone.
Can Override Discount Limit? Determines whether the user can override the Discount Limit specified in the
resource properties when booking the resource. For example, if the resource
price is $100 per hour and the Discount Percentage is set to 20%, set Can
Override Discount Limit to Yes to allow the user to book the resource at a
price less than $80 per hour.
l Yes allows the user to book the resource at a price less than the discount
limit.
l No prevents the user from booking the resource at a price less than the
discount limit. (Default.)
Automatic Inactive User LogOff Determines how long the application can remain idle before the user is
(Minutes) automatically logged out of the system. Select a number of minutes
(1 through 50) or hours (1h through 10h) to automatically log the user out, or
select Disabled (default) to allow the user to remain logged in until they
manually log off.
Can View Vendors? (Requires External Cost Manager.) Determines if the user can display, create,
Can Add Vendors? modify, or permanently remove vendor entries used by the External Costs
Can Edit Vendors? Manager module. (Can Maintain Vendors?, must also be set to Yes.) Refer
to Vendor Setup in the External Cost Manager chapter of the ScheduALL
Can Delete Vendors?
Users Guide .
l Yes allows the user to display, create, modify, or permanently remove
vendor information.
removing vendor related information. (Default.)

Can Setup Compensation Factors? Determines if the user can create compensation factors and add or delete them
Can Add Compensation Factors in from work orders.
Work Orders?
l Yes allows the user to create compensation factors and add or delete
Can Delete Compensation Factors them from work orders.
in Work Orders?
l No does not allow the user to create compensation factors and add or
delete them from work orders. (Default.)
Shipping Addresses Determines if the user can modify, display, or permanently remove shipping
Can Edit Shipping Addresses addresses for clients, contacts, or agencies and shipping costs and prices.
Can View Shipping Addresses Can View Shipping Addresses must be set to “Yes” before addresses can be
Can Delete Shipping Addresses edited or deleted.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove shipping
addresses.
shipping addresses. (Default.)
Can Edit Shipping Cost/Price for Determines if the user can modify the cost or price of a service in Service
Ship Service Properties when the “Is Ship Service?” flag is enabled.
l Yes allows the user to modify the cost or price of a ship service.
l No prevents the user from modifying the cost or price of a ship service.
(Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Directors? Determines the user’s permissions to create, modify, or permanently remove
Director entries accessed from the Setup menu or from other dialogs, as
described in Producers, Account Executives, and Directors.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove directors.
directors. (Default.)
Can Access Activity Template Determines if the user can create, modify, or permanently remove activity
Setup? templates from the Setup menu or from other dialogs, as described in Activity
Templates in the Personnel Manager chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide
.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove activity
templates.
activity templates. (Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Cancellation Determines if the user can create, modify, or permanently remove Cancellation
Rate Cards? Rate Card entries, as described in Managing Cancellation Rate Cards.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove rate cards.
rate cards. (Default.)

Can Modify Cancellation Charges? Determines if the user can create, modify, or permanently remove cancellation
charges assigned to individual resources.
l Yes allows the user to create, modify, or permanently remove cancellation
charges.
cancellation charges. (Default.)
Can View Level 1 Locations? Determines if the user can display Locations at the specified level.
Can View Level 2 Locations? l Yes allows the user to create or copy source and destination locations.
Can View Level 3 Locations? l No prevents the user from creating or copying source and destination
locations. (Default.)
Can Add Level 1 Locations? Determines if the user can create new Locations at the specified level, or copy
Can Add Level 2 Locations? existing locations of the specified level, as described in Locations Setup.
Can Add Level 3 Locations? l Yes allows the user to create or copy source and destination locations.
l No prevents the user from creating or copying source and destination
locations. (Default.)
Can Edit Level 1 Locations? Determines if the user can modify Locations at the specified level.
Can Edit Level 2 Locations? l Yes allows the user to modify source and destination locations.
Can Edit Level 3 Locations? l No prevents the user from modifying source and destination locations.
(Default.)
Can Delete Level 1 Locations? Determines if the user can permanently remove existing Locations of the
Can Delete Level 2 Locations? specified level, including all existing relationships.
Can Delete Level 3 Locations? l Yes allows the user to remove source and destination locations.
l No prevents the user from removing source and destination locations.
(Default.)
Can Use Switch User Login? Reserved.
Allow Access To Contract Determines whether the user can view contract information.
Manager?
l Yes allows the user to select Contract Manager from the File menu.
l No prevents the user from selecting Contract Manager from the File
menu. (Default.)
Can Add/Edit/Delete Contracts? Determines whether the user can manage contract information.
l Yes allows the user to manage contracts.
l No prevents the user from managing contracts. Contracts display in View
mode only. (Default.)
Allow Access To External Cost Determines whether the External Cost Manager selection on the File menu is
Maintenance displayed to the user.
l Yes displays the External Cost Manager selection on the File menu to the
user.
l No does not display the External Cost Manager selection on the File menu
to the user. (Default.)

Can Create Class and Sub-Class? Determines whether the user can add classes and sub-classes in the Phases
tab of the Production dialog.
l Yes allows the user to select the New button in the Class and Sub-class
browsers. (Default.)
l No does not display the New button in the Class and Sub-class browsers.
Can Edit Class and Sub-Class? Determines whether the user can modify classes and sub-classes in the
Phases tab of the Production dialog.
l Yes allows the user to select the Edit button in the Class and Sub-class
l No does not display the Edit button in the Class and Sub-class browsers.
Can Delete Class and Sub-Class? Determines whether the user can remove classes and sub-classes in the
Phases tab of the Production dialog.
l Yes allows the user to select the Delete button in the Class and Sub-class
l No does not display the Delete button in the Class and Sub-class
browsers.
Allow Access To Account Code Determines whether the user can enter the Account Code area of Setup.
Setup?
l Yes allows the user to enter the Account Code area of Setup.
l No prevents the user from entering the Account Code area of Setup.
(Default.)
Can Update the Qty of a Stock Determines whether the user can modify the Quantity Arrived field in the Main
Resource? tab of the Stock Properties dialog.
l Yes allows the user to modify the Quantity Arrived field.
l No prevents the user from modifying the Quantity Arrived field. (Default.)
Can Maintain Library Determines whether the user can add, edit, and delete entries in the Library
Season/Library Episode Lists? Season and Library Episode dialogs.
l Yes allows the user to add, edit, and delete entries. (Default.)
l No prevents the user from adding, editing, and deleting entries.
Note: Additional security settings determine the user’s ability to access
Library features. Refer to Library for more information.
Can Purge/Archive Location Scans? Determines whether the user can display the Purge / Archive Location Scans
dialog.
l Yes allows the user to view the Location Scan Archival selection on the
File menu.
l No prevents the user from viewing the Location Scan Archival selection
on the File menu. (Default.)
Can Add Cost Templates? Determines if the user can create new cost templates.
l Yes allows the user to create cost templates.
l No does not allow the user to create cost templates. (Default.)

Can Edit Cost Templates? Determines if the user can modify new cost templates.
l Yes allows the user to modify cost templates.
l No does not allow the user to modify cost templates. (Default.)
Can Delete Cost Templates? Determines if the user can remove new cost templates.
l Yes allows the user to remove cost templates.
l No does not allow the user to remove cost templates. (Default.)
Can Assign/Edit/Release Cost Determines if the user can assign or release an existing cost template to a
Templates? Category/Type or Resource.
l Yes allows the user to assign / release an existing cost template to a
category / Type / Resource.
l No does not allow the user to assign / release an existing cost template to
a category / Type / Resource. (Default.)
Can Access Shift Rules Determines if the user can select Shift Rules in the Personnel Manager menu.
Refer to Shift Rules.
l Yes allows the user to select Shift Rules.
l No does not display the Shift Rules selection in the Personnel Manager
menu.
Can Create Shift Rules Determines if the user can add new Shift Rules.
l Yes allows the user to add Shift Rules.
l No does not allows the user to add Shift Rules.
Can Edit Shift Rules Determines if the user can modify Shift Rules.
l Yes allows the user to modify Shift Rules.
l No does not allows the user to modify Shift Rules.
Can Delete Shift Rules Determines if the user can remove Shift Rules.
l Yes allows the user to remove Shift Rules.
l No does not allows the user to remove Shift Rules.
Can Manage Calendars? Determines if the user can access the Holiday Calendar menu item and
functionality.
l Yes allows the user to see the Holiday Calendar menu item.
l No hides the Holiday Calendar menu item. (Default.)
Note: The user must have Allow Access into Rooms & Resource
Maintenance? set to Yes.
Can Assign Resource Grants to Determines if the user can give permission to share their resources with one or
Clients? more clients.
l Yes allows the user to give permission to clients to share selected
resources.
l No does not allow the user to give clients permission to share resources.
(Default.)
Can Manage Sales Events Reserved.

Shipping
Table 121. Security Settings, Shipping
Allow Access into Shipping Module? Determines whether the user has access to the Shipping dialog.
l Yes allows the user to access Shipping Module features from the File
menu Shipping Module section.
l No prevents the user from accessing Shipping Module features from the
File menu Shipping Module section.
Can Change Pricing for Shipping Determines if the user can modify the pricing information of a booked shipping
Service? service in the Work Order dialog.
l Yes allows the user to modify the pricing information of a booked shipping
service.
l No prevents the user from modifying the pricing information of a booked
shipping service.
Can Change Cost for Shipping Determines if the user can modify the cost information of a booked shipping
Service? service in the Work Order dialog.
l Yes allows the user to modify the cost information of a booked shipping
service.
l No prevents the user from modifying the cost information of a booked
shipping service.
Can Add Shipping Service in Work Determines if the user can book a shipping service in a Work Order.
Orders?
l Yes allows the user to book a shipping service in a Work Order.
l No prevents the user from booking a shipping service in a Work Order.
Can Delete Shipping Service in Determines if the user can remove a shipping service from a Work Order.
Work Orders?
l Yes allows the user to remove a shipping service from a Work Order.
l No prevents the user from removing a shipping service from a Work
Order.
Can Edit Shipping Service in Work Determines if the user can modify a shipping service in a Work Order.
Orders?
l Yes allows the user to modify a shipping service in a Work Order.
l No prevents the user from modifying a shipping service in a Work Order.
Time Capture/Smart Time

The title of this group is determined by the following licensing options:
l Smart Time Options is displayed when Smart Time is licensed.
l Time Capture Options is displayed when Time Capture is licensed.
l If neither Smart Time nor Time Capture is licensed this group is hidden.

Table 122. Security Settings, Time Capture/Smart Time
Access Level Determines the Personnel resource schedules to which the user has access.
l Self allows a user to access only their own schedules, and does not
include manager permissions. The user account must be linked to a
resource in the Add User or Modify User dialog for this setting to apply.
(Default.)
l Other allows a user to access information for any Personnel resource
other than themselves, and includes manager permissions.
l Manager allows a user to access information for any Personnel resource
including themselves, and provides access to manager tools.
Can Access Time Reports Determines whether the user can preview and print reports using the Time
Capture interface.
l Yes provides access to Time Capture reports.
l No does not provide access to Time Capture reports. (Default.)
Can Edit Booking Determines whether the user can modify their own booking times, meals, or
breaks in Smart Time.
l Yes allows the user to change the settings of a booking.
l No prevents the user from changing the settings of a booking; all bookings
are read-only. (Default.)
l In the Past allows the user to change the settings of a booking only if the
event date and time are in the past.
Can Delete Booking? Determines whether the user can remove their own bookings in Smart Time.
l Yes allows the user to remove a booking.
l No prevents the user from removing a booking; all bookings are read-only.
(Default.)
l In the Past allows the user to remove a booking only if the event date and
time are in the past.
Can Edit Bookings up to Work Order Determines the highest work order status level to which the user can make
Status: modifications.
l None prevents the user from modifying any work orders.
l All allows the user to modify work orders of any status.
l Specific Status Levels allows the user to modify work orders up to, and
including, the specified status. Default is Request.

Table 122. Security Settings, Time Capture/Smart Time (continued)
Can Add [Activity Type] Determines if the user can create activities of the specified types.
l Yes allows the user to create an activity of the specified type. The activity
type displays in the Activity list and Activity tab.
l No prevents a user from adding an activity of the specified type. The
activity type is removed from the Activity list and Activity tab. (Default.)
l In the Past allows the user to create an activity of the specified type, only
if the activity date and time are in the past. The activity type displays in
the Activity list and Activity tab.
Note: The permission Can Add Sick Day must be set to Yes for Smart Time
users to be able to book Paid or Unpaid Sick Days. Refer to Can book
paid sick? and Can book unpaid sick?.
Can Edit [Activity Type] Determines if the user can modify activities of the specified types.
l Yes allows the user to create an activity of the specified type. The activity
type displays in the Activity list and Activity tab.
l No prevents a user from adding an activity of the specified type. The
l In the Past allows the user to modify an activity of the specified type, only
if the activity date and time are in the past. The activity type displays in
the Activity list and Activity tab.
Can Delete [Activity Type] Determines if the user can permanently remove activities of the specified
types.
l Yes allows the user to remove an activity of the specified type. The
activity type displays in the Activity list and Activity tab.
l No prevents a user from removing an activity of the specified type. The
l In the Past allows the user to remove an activity of the specified type,
only if the activity date and time are in the past. The activity type displays
in the Activity list and Activity tab.
Can Associate Project To Activity? (Requires Project Manager.) Determines if the user can associate an activity
with a project.
l Yes allows the user to link an activity to a project.
l No prevents the user from linking an activity to a project. The Project list
box and the Projects tab do not display on the Time Capture interface.
(Default.)
Can Edit Event Status None? Determines if the user can modify the details of activities with a status of
None.
l Follow Profile allows the user to change all activity details, as defined by
the permissions settings in other sections of the security profile.
l View Only allows the user to view but not modify the activity details.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing the activity details. (Default.)

Can Edit Event Status Submitted? Determines if the user can modify the details of activities with a status of
Submitted.
Can Edit Event Status Modified? Determines if the user can modify the details of activities with a status of
Modified.
Can Edit Event Status Rejected? Determines if the user can modify the details of activities with a status of
Rejected.
Can Edit Event Status Approved? Determines if the user can modify the details of activities with a status of
Approved.
Can Edit Event Status Determines if the user can modify the details of activities with a status of
ReSubmitted? ReSubmitted.
In The Past Duration Determines how far in the past the user can access activities.
l All allows unlimited access to past activities.
l # Days allows access to activities the specified number of days in the
past.
l # Weeks allows access to activities the specified number of weeks in the
past.

Can Edit Work Orders in the Future Determines if the user can access bookings in the future. A future work order is
defined as a work order having a Start time that is greater than the current time.
l Follow Profile allows the user to access bookings in the future, as
defined by the permissions settings in other sections of the security
profile.
l View Only allows the user to view but not modify bookings in the future.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing bookings in the future.
(Default.)
Allow Mass Submission Allows the user to submit multiple work orders at the same time in Personnel
Portal by checking a box in the work order on the calendar.
l Yes allows users to perform mass submissions.
l No does not allow users to perform mass submissions. (Default.)
Can show booking with Confirmation Determines if a user can view work orders on the Time Capture calendar based
<status> on the Explicit Confirmation status of the resource booking within the work
‘Deny’? order for the resource being viewed. For example:
‘Needs Confirmation’? o if Resource 1 in a work order has Explicit Confirmation set to Deny, and
‘Confirmed’? o Resource 2 has Explicit Confirmation set to Needs Confirmation and
‘Not Needed’? o the permission for Deny is set to No, then
o the work order does not display on the Time Capture calendar for
Resource 1, but will display for Resource 2.
l Yes allows the user to view work orders on the Time Capture calendar for
the selected resource when the booking for that resource is set to the
Explicit Confirmation status. (Default.)
l No does not allow the user to view work orders on the Time Capture
calendar for the selected resource when the booking for that resource is
set to the Explicit Confirmation status.
Enable Sunday Unpaid Warning In Determines if the user receives a message when editing a Sunday work order
Personnel Portal in the past. “This Sunday will be paid because you did not check the "Time Off
In Lieu" box.
l Yes displays the warning message.
l No does not display the warning message. (Default.)
Select Days to Allow Mass Determines which days of the week mass submissions are allowed when
Submissions Allow Mass Submission is enabled. Refer to Allow Mass Submission .
Click the input field to display the Select Days to Allow Mass Submission
dialog. Select (check) the desired days and click OK.
Can Add Compensation Factors? Determines if the user is able to assign a compensation factor to a resource
activity.
l Yes allows the user to assign compensation factors. (Default.)
l No does not allow the user to assign compensation factors.

Can Remove Compensation Determines if the user is able to delete compensation factors from a resource
Factors? activity.
l Yes allows the user to assign compensation factors. (Default.)
l No does not allow the user to delete compensation factors.
Can Set Event Status [Status] Determines if the user can select each event status.
None l Yes allows the user to set the event status. (Default.)
Submitted l No does not allow the user to set the event status.
ReSubmitted
Modified
Rejected
Approved
Use Claimed Times? Determines if the time submitted by the employee in the Smart Time section of
ScheduALL WebApp is stored in the Claimed Time fields. This allows a
supervisor to compare the original booking time with the claimed time. The
supervisor then has the option to replace the actual booking time with the time
entered by the employee.
l Yes stores the time entered by the employee in the Claimed Time fields.
(Default.)
l No does not store the time entered by the employee in the Claimed Time
fields. The time entered in Smart Time becomes the actual booking time.
This feature requires the Pay Translator license. For information on adding the
required fields for this feature, refer to Adding Claimed Time Fields.
Can set Confirmation to: Determines if the user can change the confirmation setting of a booking for
Deny each setting.
Not Needed l Yes allows the user to set confirmation to the status.
Needs Confirmation l No does not allow the user to set confirmation to the status. (Default.)
Confirmed
Can Manage Account Code Determines if the user can delete the account code associated with a shift.
Assignment?
l Yes allows the user to delete the account code associated with a shift.
l No does not allow the user to delete the account code associated with a
shift. (Default.)

Location Types
Table 123. Security Settings, Location Types
<All Locations> Determines if the user has access to the <All Locations> group, which automatically
includes all locations to which the user has access.
l Follow Profile allows the user to access all locations, as defined by the
permissions settings in other sections of the security profile.
l View Only allows the user to view but not modify all locations.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or modifying all locations. (Default.)
Inactive Determines whether the user can view, add, edit, or delete locations of type Inactive.
l Follow Profile allows the user to access inactive locations, as defined by the
l View Only allows the user to view but not modify inactive locations.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or modifying inactive locations.
(Default.)
General Determines whether the user can view, add, edit, or delete locations of type General.
l Follow Profile allows the user to access general locations, as defined by the
l View Only allows the user to view but not modify general locations.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or modifying general locations.
(Default.)
Rental Determines whether the user can view, add, edit, or delete locations of type Rental.
l Follow Profile allows the user to access rental locations, as defined by the
l View Only allows the user to view but not modify rental locations.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or modifying rental locations. (Default.)
Media Determines whether the user can view, add, edit, or delete locations of type Media.
l Follow Profile allows the user to access media locations, as defined by the
l View Only allows the user to view but not modify media locations.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or modifying media locations.
(Default.)
Broadcast Determines whether the user can view, add, edit, or delete locations of type Broadcast.
l Follow Profile allows the user to access broadcast locations, as defined by the
l View Only allows the user to view but not modify broadcast locations.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or modifying broadcast locations.
(Default.)

Table 123. Security Settings, Location Types (continued)
Satellite Determines whether the user can view, add, edit, or delete locations of type Satellite.
l Follow Profile allows the user to access satellite locations, as defined by the
l View Only allows the user to view but not modify satellite locations.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or modifying satellite locations.
(Default.)
Tax Jurisdiction Determines whether the user can view, add, edit, or delete locations of type Tax
Jurisdiction.
l Follow Profile allows the user to access tax jurisdiction locations, as defined by
l View Only allows the user to view but not modify tax jurisdiction locations.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or modifying tax jurisdiction locations.
(Default.)
Administrative Options
Table 124. Security Settings, Administrative Options
Can Change User Profiles Determines if the user has access to the User Profiles & Settings dialog. This
& Security? permission grants a limited version of abilities normally reserved to Supervisor
accounts. Refer to User Groups and Profiles Overview.
From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, and click User Profiles & Security.
Can Add/Edit/Delete Users? Determines whether the user can create, modify, or permanently remove individual
user logins in the User Profiles & Settings dialog. (Can Change User Profiles &
Security? must also be set to Yes.) This permission grants a limited version of abilities
normally reserved to Supervisor accounts. Refer to User Groups and Profiles
Overview.
From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, click User Profiles & Security.
Click the Users tab to bring that page forward.
Can Add/Edit/Delete Group Determines if the user can create, modify, or permanently remove user groups and
Profiles? profiles in the User Profiles & Settings dialog. (Can Change User Profiles &
Overview.
Click the Groups tab to bring that page forward.
Can Access All Determines if the user can click the All Preferences button to display the User
Preferences? Preferences of all users and user groups in the system. (Can Change User Profiles &
Overview.
Click the All Preferences button.

Table 124. Security Settings, Administrative Options (continued)
Can Change System Determines if the user has access to the System Preferences dialog. This permission
Preferences? grants a limited version of abilities normally reserved to Supervisor accounts.
From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, select System Preferences, and
click General.
Can View Active Users? Determines if the user has access to the View Active Users dialog. This permission
grants a limited version of abilities normally reserved to Supervisor accounts. Refer to
Viewing Active Users.
From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, and click View Active Users.
Can Purge/Archive Audit Determines if the user can archive, or archive and remove, items from the Audit Trail.
Trail? This permission grants a limited version of abilities normally reserved to Supervisor
accounts. Refer to Audit Trail.
From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, and click Purge/Archive Audit
Trail.
Can Purge History from Determines if the user can permanently remove old items from the ScheduALL
Database? database. This permission grants a limited version of abilities normally reserved to
Supervisor accounts. Refer to Other Supervisor Options and the Database Purge
Guide for more information.
Can Purge Interop Determines if the user can permanently remove old items from the ScheduALL Interop
Payloads? related messages. Refer to the Database Purge Guide for more information.
Can Set SQL Supervisor Determines if the user can change the password used by the ScheduALL server to
Password (schedwin)? attempt to connect to a SQL or Oracle database via the ‘schedwin’ database user
account. This permission grants a limited version of abilities normally reserved to
Supervisor accounts. Refer to the ScheduALL Technical Reference for more
information.
Can Set SQL User Determines if the user can change the password used by the ScheduALL server to
Password (scheduser)? attempt to connect to a SQL or Oracle database via the ‘scheduser’ database user
account. This permission grants a limited version of abilities normally reserved to
Supervisor accounts. Refer to the ScheduALL Technical Reference for more
information.
Can Run Report Catalog Determines if the user has access to the Report Catalog Maintenance dialog. This
Maintenance? permission grants a limited version of abilities normally reserved to Supervisor
accounts. Refer to Report Catalog Maintenance.
Can Access Developers Determines if the user can access Developers Toolkit to modify dialogs, menus, and
Toolkit? toolbars. It also determines if the user can modify columns and column properties for
browser windows on existing dialogs outside of Developers Toolkit. (All Developers
Toolkit features require a valid license for Developers Toolkit.) This permission grants a
limited version of abilities normally reserved to Supervisor accounts.
Can Update License Determines whether the user has access to the Update License Information option on
Information? the Supervisor Options menu. This option allows the user to apply a new license file to
the ScheduALL system. The default value is No.
Refer to Other Supervisor Options.

Table 124. Security Settings, Administrative Options (continued)
Can Access Company Determines if the user can access the Company Setup dialog. This permission grants a
Setup? limited version of abilities normally reserved to Supervisor accounts. Refer to Company
Setup in the Multi-Company Module chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide .
Can Edit Private Desktops Determines if the user can change the properties of private desktops created by other
of ALL Users? users. Refer to Desktop Maintenance - Private Desktops.
Can Access Determines if the user can log in to the SchedWebService API.
SchedWebService API?
l Yes Allows the user to log in to the SchedWebService API.
l No does not allow the user to log in to the SchedWebService API. (Default.)
Can Access Connector Determines if the user can access Connector Mapping Setup. Refer to ScheduALL
Field Mappings? Connector Mapping Setup.
l Yes allows the user to access Connector Mapping Setup.
l No does not allow access to that feature. (Default.)
Contract Manager
Table 125. Security Settings, Contract Manager
Can change Contract Determines if the user can change the status of a contract to Pending.
Status to Pending
l Yes allows the user to assign the Pending status to a contract.
l No prevents the user from assigning the Pending status to a contract. (Default.)
Note: When access to a status is set to No, that status does not display in the status
list.
Can change Contract Determines if the user can change the status of a contract to Confirmed.
Status to Confirmed
l Yes allows the user to assign the Confirmed status to a contract.
l No prevents the user from assigning the Confirmed status to a contract. (Default.)
list.
Can change Contract Determines if the user can change the status of a contract to Approved.
Status to Approved
l Yes allows the user to assign the Approved status to a contract.
l No prevents the user from assigning the Approved status to a contract. (Default.)
list.
Can change Contract Determines if the user can change the status of a contract to Completed.
Status to Completed
l Yes allows the user to assign the Completed status to a contract.
l No prevents the user from assigning the Completed status to a contract. (Default.)
list.

Table 125. Security Settings, Contract Manager (continued)
Can change Contract Determines if the user can change the status of a contract to Cancelled.
Status to Cancelled
l Yes allows the user to assign the Cancelled status to a contract.
l No prevents the user from assigning the Cancelled status to a contract. (Default.)
list.
SMS Agent
Table 126. Security Settings, SMS Agent
Can User Generate SMS Determines if the Send SMS Notification item displays on the shortcut menu when
Notification? the user right-clicks a booking block.
l Yes displays the Send SMS Notification item in the shortcut menu.
l No does not display the item in the shortcut menu. (Default.)
Note: This setting only affects the behavior of the shortcut menu. If SMS Notification
buttons were added to the Work Order dialog, this setting does not affect them.
Connector
Table 127. Security Settings, Connector
Allow Resource Replace for Determines if the user is allowed to perform a vertical move for transactional events in
Connector Bookings? the scheduling calendar.
l Yes allows the user to perform a vertical move for transactional events in the
scheduling calendar.
l No does not allow the user to perform a vertical move. (Default.)
Can shorten Transactional Determines if a subscriber user (or subscriber user group) is able to reduce the time of a
Bookings? work order or available block that is booked on a published resource. This includes
transactions in the past.
l Yes allows a subscriber user (or subscriber user group) to reduce the time of a
work order or available block that is booked on a published resource.
l No does not allow a subscriber user (or subscriber user group) to reduce the time
of a work order or available block. (Default.)
Security for WebApp Project Templates

Table 128. Security Settings, Security for WebApp Project Templates
Can Determines if the user can create, modify, or permanently remove project templates.
Create/View/Edit/Delete
Project Templates l Yes allows the user to manage project templates in the WebApp system.
l No does not allow the user to manage project templates. (Default.)

Room and Resource Groups

Table 129. Security Settings, Room and Resource Groups
<All Resources> Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to resources in the <All Resources> group.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to resources in the <All Resources>
group, as defined by the permissions settings in other sections of the security
profile. By default, access to this group provides access to any resource in any
group not specifically denied by another Room and Resource Groups entry, as
well as resources that are not assigned to a resource group.
l View Only allows the user to view information related to resources in the <All
Resources> group (subject to other permissions settings in other sections of the
security profile), but prevents the user from changing information or settings.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or changing information for any
resources unless specifically allowed by another Room and Resource Groups
entry.
<Unrestricted Resources> Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to resources in the <Unrestricted Resources> group.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to resources in the <Unrestricted
Resources> group, as defined by the permissions settings in other sections of
the security profile. By default, access to this group provides access to any
unrestricted resource not specifically denied by another Room and Resource
Groups entry, as well as resources that are not assigned to a resource group.
l View Only allows the user to view information related to resources in the
<Unrestricted Resources> group (subject to other permissions settings in other
sections of the security profile), but prevents the user from changing information
or settings.
entry.
<All Compatible Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
Resources> information related to resources in the <All Compatible Resources> group.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to resources in the <All Compatible
Resources> group, as defined by the permissions settings in other sections of
the security profile. By default, access to this group provides access to any
compatible resource not specifically denied by another Room and Resource
Groups entry, as well as resources that are not assigned to a resource group.
l View Only allows the user to view information related to resources in the <All
Compatible Resources> group (subject to other permissions settings in other
sections of the security profile), but prevents the user from changing information
or settings.
entry.

Table 129. Security Settings, Room and Resource Groups (continued)
All Personnel Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to any personnel resource.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to personnel resources, as defined by
l View Only allows the user to view information related to personnel resources
but prevents the user from changing information or settings.
personnel resources unless specifically allowed by another Room and Resource
entry.
All Rooms Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to any room resource.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to room resources, as defined by the
l View Only allows the user to view information related to room resources but
prevents the user from changing information or settings.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or changing information for any room
resources unless specifically allowed by another Room and Resource entry.
GroupName Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to resources in the specified group. Refer to Resource Groups for
more information on resource groups.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to resources in the specified resource
group, as defined by the permissions settings in other sections of the security
profile.
l View Only allows the user to view information related to resources in the
specified resource group, but prevents the user from changing information or
settings.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or changing information for
resources in the specified group, unless specifically allowed by another Room
and Resource Groups permission.

Client Groups
Table 130. Security Settings, Client Groups
<All Clients> Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to clients in the <All Clients> group.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to clients in the <All Clients> group, as
defined by the permissions settings in other sections of the security profile. By
default, access to this group provides access to any client in any group not
specifically denied by another Client Group entry, as well as clients that are not
assigned to a client group.
l View Only allows the user to view information related to clients in the <All
Clients> group (subject to other permissions settings in other sections of the
security profile), but prevents the user from changing information or settings.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or changing information for any clients
unless specifically allowed by another Client Group permission.
Note: To limit access to any clients, do not grant access using All Clients. Create
client groups and grant access by GroupName.
GroupName Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to clients in the specified group. Refer to Client Groups for more
information about client groups.
Note: If no Client Groups are defined in Setup, only the <All Clients> entry will display.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to clients in the specified client group, as
defined by the permissions settings in other sections of the security profile.
l View Only allows the user to view information related to clients in the specified
client group, but prevents the user from changing information or settings.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or changing information for clients in
the specified group, unless specifically allowed by another group permission.

Companies
Table 131. Security Settings, Companies
<Unassigned Company> (Requires Multi-Company Module.) Determines the level of access granted to a user
when attempting to view or modify information related to an record with no specified
company.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to all companies, as defined by the
permissions settings in other sections of the security profile. By default, access to
this group provides access to information associated to any company, as well as
to information not associated to a specific company.
l View Only allows the user to view information related to any company (subject to
other permissions settings in other sections of the security profile), but prevents
the user from changing information or settings.
company unless specifically allowed by another Company permission.
l Reports, queries, and invoicing can also be restricted to specific companies. Refer
to the Multi-Company Module chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more
information on companies.
CompanyName (Requires Multi-Company Module.) Determines the level of access granted to a user
when attempting to view or modify information related to the specified company. Refer
to the Multi-Company Module chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more
information on companies.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to the specified company, as defined by
l View Only allows the user to view information related to the specified company,
but prevents the user from changing information or settings.
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or changing information for the
specified company.
Note: The Link to Company setting overrides the CompanyName security settings.
Refer to Link to Company.
MCR
Table 132. Security Settings, MCR
Link to MCR Determines the Master Control Room associated with the user or resource group.
Select a MCR Name from the list.

Vendor Group
Table 133. Security Settings, Vendor Group
<All Vendor> Group (Requires External Costs Manager.) Determines the level of access granted to a user
when attempting to view or modify information related to all vendors.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to all vendors, as defined by the
l View Only allows the user to view information related to any vendor (subject to
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or changing information for any vendor
unless specifically allowed by another vendor group permissions.
Note: When assigning Vendor Group security, the following scenario applies:
If a user has permission to set up vendors (add, edit, delete, etc.)

-and-
the user’s permission to the <All Vendor> Group is set to No Access
-and-
the user’s permission to all other vendor groups are set to No Access
-then-
the user will still be able to view all vendors.
Given this scenario, the user must be granted Follow Profile or View Only
permission to at least one vendor group to limit the vendors that the user can
see.
VendorGroupName Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to the specified vendor group. Refer to Vendor Setup in the External
l Follow Profile allows the user access to information related to the specified
vendor group, as defined by the permissions settings in other sections of the
security profile.
l View Only allows the user to view information related to the specified vendor
group, but prevents the user from changing information or settings.
specified vendor group.
Note: When assigning Vendor Group security, the following scenario applies:
If a user has permission to set up vendors (add, edit, delete, etc.)

-and-
the user’s permission to the <All Vendor> Group is set to No Access
-and-
the user’s permission to all other vendor groups are set to No Access
-then-
the user will still be able to view all vendors.
Given this scenario, the user must be granted Follow Profile or View Only
permission to at least one vendor group to limit the vendors that the user can
see.

External Pay Status

Table 134. Security Settings, External Pay Status
Access Level for Determines which actions the user is allowed to perform with respects to the External
ExternalPayStatus Pay Status field.
l Edit allows the user to view and change the external pay status for the selected
status.
l View allows the user to view, but not change, the external pay status for the
selected status.
l None prevents the user from viewing or changing the external pay status for the
selected status.
Can Set External Pay Determines each individual External Pay Status level the user is allowed to select.
Status to (The Access Level for ExternalPayStatus preference must also be set to Edit.)
ExternalPayStatus
l Yes allows the user to set the External Pay Status field to the specified status.
l No prevents the user from setting the External Pay Status field to the specified
status.
Trouble Ticket Status

Table 135. Security Settings, Trouble Ticket Status
Can change Trouble Ticket Determines if a user can change a trouble ticket work order to the specified status.
to Status
(... where Status is
Confirmed, Unconfirmed, l No prevents the user from changing work orders to this status. (Default.)
Cancelled, First Hold,
Second Hold, Completed,
Reconciled, Request,
Third Hold, Pending
Approval, and Fourth
Hold)
Extended Operation Labels

Table 136. Security Settings, Extended Operation Labels
Extended Operation Labels Allows an administrator to show or hide each Extended Operation option.
(Hide Label for... l Yes prevents the user from seeing and/or using the specified entry in the Extended
Add Personnel Allocated
Operations dialog.
To Room, Add
Requirements, etc.) l No allows the user to see and use the specified entry from the Extended
Operations dialog. (Default.)

Contract Types
Table 137. Security Settings, Contract Types
<All Contracts> Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to all contracts.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to all contract types, as defined by the
permissions settings in other sections of the security profile. (Default.)
contract types unless specifically allowed by other contract type permissions.
Contract Type Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to the specified contract type.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to contracts with the specified contract
type, as defined by the permissions settings in other sections of the security
profile. (Default.)
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or changing contracts with the
specified contract type unless specifically allowed by other contract type
permissions.
Room and Resource Groups Cost Access

Table 138. Security Settings, Room and Resource Groups Cost Access
<All Resources> Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to costs for all resources.
l Edit allows the user access to change cost information for all resources (subject to
other permissions settings in other sections of the security profile).
l View allows the user to view cost information for all resources (subject to other
permissions settings in other sections of the security profile), but prevents the user
from changing information or settings.
l Deny prevents the user from viewing or changing cost information for all resources
unless specifically allowed by the permissions settings in other sections of the
security profile.
l None allows the user access to cost information for all resources, as defined by
the permissions settings in other sections of the security profile. (Default.)

Table 138. Security Settings, Room and Resource Groups Cost Access (continued)
<Unrestricted Resources> Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
cost information related to resources in the <Unrestricted Resources> group.
l Edit allows the user access to change cost information for all unrestricted
resources (subject to other permissions settings in other sections of the security
profile).
l View allows the user to view cost information for all unrestricted resources
(subject to other permissions settings in other sections of the security profile), but
prevents the user from changing information or settings.
l Deny prevents the user from viewing or changing cost information for all
unrestricted resources unless specifically allowed by the permissions settings in
other sections of the security profile.
l None allows the user access to cost information for all unrestricted resources, as
(Default.)
<All Compatible Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
Resources> cost information related to resources in the <All Compatible Resources> group.
l Edit allows the user access to change cost information for all compatible
resources (subject to other permissions settings in other sections of the security
profile).
l View allows the user to view cost information for all compatible resources (subject
to other permissions settings in other sections of the security profile), but prevents
l Deny prevents the user from viewing or changing cost information for all
compatible resources unless specifically allowed by the permissions settings in
other sections of the security profile.
l None allows the user access to cost information for all compatible resources, as
(Default.)
<GroupName> Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to costs of rooms and resources assigned to a specific resource
group.
l Edit allows the user access to change cost information for rooms or resources in
the selected resource group (subject to other permissions settings in other
sections of the security profile).
l View allows the user to view cost information for rooms or resources in the
selected resource group (subject to other permissions settings in other sections of
the security profile), but prevents the user from changing information or settings.
l Deny prevents the user from viewing or changing cost information for rooms or
resources in the selected resource group unless specifically allowed by the
l None allows the user access to cost information for rooms or resources in the
selected resource group, as defined by the permissions settings in other sections
of the security profile. (Default.)

Client Groups Cost Access

Table 139. Security Settings, Client Groups Cost Access
information related to client costs.
l View allows the user to view cost information for all clients (subject to other
permissions settings in other sections of the security profile), but prevents the user
from changing information or settings.
l Deny prevents the user from viewing or changing cost information for all clients
unless specifically allowed by the permissions settings in other sections of the
security profile.
l None allows the user access to cost information for all clients, as defined by the
<ClientGroupName> Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to client costs for clients assigned to the selected client group.
l View allows the user to view cost information for the selected client group (subject
to other permissions settings in other sections of the security profile), but prevents
l Deny prevents the user from viewing or changing cost information for the selected
client group unless specifically allowed by the permissions settings in other
sections of the security profile.
l None allows the user access to cost information for the selected client group, as
(Default.)
Client Groups Cost Access Level

Table 140. Security Settings, Client Groups Cost Access Level
<All Clients> Determines the level at which client group costs can be accessed.
l Project allows the user to view cost information for all clients at the project level.
l Category allows the user to view cost information for all clients at the category
level.
l Type allows the user to view cost information for all clients at the type level.
l Resource allows the user to view cost information for all clients at the resource
level. (Default.)
<ClientGroupName> Determines the level at which client group costs can be accessed.
l Project allows the user to view client group cost information at the project level.
l Category allows the user to view client group cost information at the category
level.
l Type allows the user to view client group cost information at the type level.
l Resource allows the user to view client group cost information at the resource
level. (Default.)

Report Groups
Table 141. Security Settings, Report Groups
<All Reports> Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to a report group.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to all reports, as defined by the
l No Access prevents the user from viewing or changing information for all reports
unless specifically allowed by other contract type permissions.
<ReportGroupName> Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to a report group.
l Follow Profile allows the user access to all reports, as defined by the
selected report group unless specifically allowed by other contract type
permissions.
Client Groups External Cost Access

Table 142. Security Settings, Client Groups External Cost Access
information related to client external costs.
l Edit allows the user to change external cost information for all clients (subject to
other permissions settings in other sections of the security profile).
l View allows the user to view external cost information for all clients (subject to
l Deny prevents the user from viewing or changing external cost information for all
clients unless specifically allowed by the permissions settings in other sections of
the security profile.
l None allows the user access to external cost information for all clients, as defined
by the permissions settings in other sections of the security profile. (Default.)

Table 142. Security Settings, Client Groups External Cost Access (continued)
<ClientGroupName> Determines the level of access granted to a user when attempting to view or modify
information related to external costs for clients assigned to the selected client group.
l Edit allows the user to change external cost information for clients in the selected
group (subject to other permissions settings in other sections of the security
profile).
l View allows the user to view external cost information for clients in the selected
client group (subject to other permissions settings in other sections of the security
profile), but prevents the user from changing information or settings.
l Deny prevents the user from viewing or changing external cost information for
clients in the selected client group unless specifically allowed by the permissions
settings in other sections of the security profile.
l None allows the user access to external cost information for clients in the selected
client group, as defined by the permissions settings in other sections of the
security profile. (Default.)
Configuring Maximum Number of Users

The maximum number of user connections is configured in the Vizuall.Servicehost.exe.config file
located the ScheduALL5\SchedAppServices folder. To set the maximum number of connections, edit
the file and change the <value> setting shown below.
<setting name="MaxConcurrentSessions" serializeAs="String">
<value>100</value>
</setting>
Viewing Active Users

The Active Users screen offers several functions to manage the ScheduALL database. It allows the
supervisor to force users to log off of the system, view which records users have open, and close the
system to new logins.
To view the Active Users:
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click View Active Users. The Active
Users dialog displays a list of all users currently logged in to the system.

Figure 187. Active Users Dialog

2. Select a single user or multiple users by clicking each user’s name.
Selects all items in the list.
Clears all selections.
3. Click Force LogOff to log the selected users out of ScheduALL. Users are notified that they
have 60 seconds before they are logged off the system.
4. Click Get Locked Records to display an open work order in edit mode.
5. Click Sync Time to synchronize the time on selected user’s machine with the time on the
server machine.
6. Click Disable Logins to prevent other users from logging in to the system, in order to run
system maintenance.
Note: Only the supervisor who disables login activity can enable login activity.
7. Click Enable Logins to allow other users to log on to the system after maintenance is
complete.
8. Click Print List to send the list to an available printer.
9. Click Refresh to update the list of active users.
10. Click Close to close the dialog.
Table 143. Active Users Dialog Settings
Field/Button Description
System Session If the session is being used from a Windows service, Web Service, or
other component this column displays Yes. Users logged in to the
local system via the ScheduALL ScheduALL Connector are also
considered System sessions.
Session Type Displays the type of user in the session.
l Client – session is used by a client user
l Pooled – session is used by a non-named, non-client user
l System – an internal session. This type does not occupy a seat
count.
User Name Displays the name of the user currently logged in.
Logged In Displays the date and time that the user logged in.

Table 143. Active Users Dialog Settings (continued)
Field/Button Description
Computer Name Displays the machine name of the computer used to access the
system.
Client Name Displays the name of the client linked to the user as defined in the
user’s account.
Resource Description Displays the name of the resource linked to the user as defined in the
user’s account.

Audit Trail
The ScheduALL system records system and work order activity into an audit trail. Items logged by
the audit trail include:
l user log in and log off
l beginning and ending of database maintenance
l work order creation, modification, and deletion
l accounts receivable operations
l Media Manager operations
Work Order Audit Trail

To view the audit trail for a particular work order:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor, or with permissions to view the audit trail.
(Refer to Can View Audit Trail?.)
2. From the File menu, select ScheduALL and click ScheduALL Screen. The Schedule dialog
displays.
3. Open a Work Order. The Work Order dialog displays.
4. Click the History tab to bring that page forward.
The Action column describes the change to the work order at the displayed time. If the Description
shows an added resource then the method that was used is also listed. The method could show Work
Order Dialog (meaning that a user added the resource directly from the dialog) or may list an external
command.
When a user proposes to move for the work order it is listed in the Proposals section.
Figure 188. Work Order, Audit Trail (History Tab)

System Audit Trail

To view the audit trail for the entire system:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor, or with permissions to view the audit trail.
(Refer to Can View Audit Trail?.)
2. From the File menu, click View Audit Trail. The Audit Trail dialog displays.
Figure 189. Audit Trail Dialog
3. To locate a record in the browser list, click a sortable column (identified with the key graphic)
and enter text in the Find window, OR
Click the [...] button to perform an extended search. Refer to Extended Search in the
Scheduling chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more information.
4. Select an entry and click View to display the details of that entry.
5. Click Close to exit the Audit Trail dialog.
l The administrator can customize the Audit Trail browser to display dates and times
adjusted to one or more time zones by adding columns for specific time zones.
l The administrator can customize the individual Audit Trail (item) View dialog to display time
stamps and item descriptions adjusted to all appropriate time zones.
l If a User Group shares a common time zone, the administrator can customize the Audit
Trail (item) View dialog by user group, allowing the dialog to display time stamps and item
descriptions adjusted to the user group’s specific time zone.
Note: The Audit Trail stores time stamps as unformatted, timezone-independent values instead of
using the individual user’s time zone. This allows the Audit Trail to display consistent times,
and allows the administrator to customize displayed information to specific time zones.

Purge and Archive the Audit Trail

The audit trail can rapidly grow to a large size and consequently affect program performance.
ScheduALL allows you to purge this audit trail. You can choose to archive the items into a text file
(.txt file type), or delete them.
To purge or archive the audit trail:
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click Purge/Archive Audit Trail. The
Purge/Archive Audit Trail dialog displays.
Figure 190. Purge/Archive Audit Trail

2. In Affect Transactions Before, enter a date in DD/MM/YYYY format, or click the Calendar
button to select the cutoff date. The archive process will affect all Work Order and Project
transactions recorded before the specified date.
3. Select Archive and Delete to archive the transactions into a text file in the ScheduALL data
folder. The path and file name are displayed in the Archive Name text box, OR
Select Delete to delete transactions without creating a text archive.
Note: Entries that are deleted without being archived cannot be recovered.
4. Select (check) Only Affect Closed Work Orders to archive or purge only information related
to Work Orders that were set to the Closed status. (Work orders that are set to Closed are not
billed.)
5. Click OK to purge the audit trail, or click Cancel to exit without saving any changes.
Extended Trail
The Extended Trail records specific information for interfaces to external applications and services.
Information is recorded only for resources that are configured to record information on the Extended
Trail.

To access Extended Trail Settings:

1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, then select System Preferences, and then
click General.
2. Click Settings in the Extended Trail section. The Extended Trail Settings dialog displays.
Refer to General System Preferences. (Configuration settings are described in the
Figure 191. Extended Trail Settings Dialog

Table 144. Extended Trail Settings Dialog Settings
Option Description
A) Track Only If: Determines the base status levels for all audit entries.
Note: At least one status level must be selected to generate extended
trail entries.
B) Track Changes To: Determines which status levels trigger a trail entry, in conjunction with
(A to B) the Track While section. When the user changes a work order status,
the change is recorded in the trail when the starting status is enabled
(checked) in Track While, and the ending status is selected in this
section.
C) Track Changes From: Determines which status levels trigger a trail entry, in conjunction with
(C to A) the Track While section. When the user changes a work order status,
the change is recorded in the trail when the starting status is enabled
(checked) in this section, and the ending status is selected in Track
While.
Extended Trail Events Determines the trigger types for which entries are generated, when the
appropriate status rules apply.

Report Catalog Maintenance

The report catalog identifies the reports used in the ScheduALL system. Custom reports purchased
from Net Insight AB or created using the Crystal Reports™ software must be added to report catalog
using the Report Manager to make them available within the ScheduALL application. The Report
Manager also allows authorized users to:
l Identify the menu area from which a new or custom reports is available. (The applicable area
for standard ScheduALL reports cannot be changed using the Report Manager.)
l Specify user-defined descriptions for reports.
l Find specific reports by title, by report description, or by user description.
l Remove extraneous reports from the ScheduALL system.
Note: After upgrading to a new version of ScheduALL, perform an Update to add any new reports to
the catalog list.
To open Report Manager:
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click Report Catalog Maintenance.
The Report Manager dialog displays. If the ScheduALL application was closed when a report
was added to the shared Reports folder, opening Reports Manager automatically adds the
report to the catalog.
Figure 192. Report Manager Dialog

2. From the Reports Manager File menu, click Update, or click the Update button in the toolbar,
to scan the shared Reports folder and add any new reports to the catalog list if the ScheduALL
application was open when a report was added to shared Reports folder.

3. To print a list of the displayed reports, click File, and then click Print. The Print Report List
dialog displays. Click Print to print the list.
Figure 193. Print Report List Dialog

4. To display the detailed listing, from the Reports Manager View menu, click Details. The detail
view displays the following information about report files:
l File Name lists the name of the report file defined by the operating system. Reports in
ScheduALL have the .RPT file extension.
l Description displays the Description field of the Crystal Reports properties.
l User Description displays optional information defined in the Reports Manager.
l Applicable Areas displays the menu or dialog area from which the report is accessed.
5. To find a report in the list:
a. From the Reports Manager Search menu, click Find, or click the Find button on the
toolbar. The Find Report dialog displays.
b. In the Find What field, enter the text (word or partial word) for which to search.
c. Click (select) By Filename to match the specified text to the File Name field, OR
Click (select) By Description, to match the specified text to the Description field, OR
Click (select) By User Description to match the specified text to the User Description
field.
d. Click Find to locate the first instance of the specified text.
e. On the toolbar, click the Find Next button to locate the next instance of the specified
text.

6. To add a user description, double-click a report. The Properties dialog displays. Enter the
description in the User Description text box and then click OK.
Figure 194. Report Catalog Maintenance Properties, General Tab

7. To make a new or custom report available through a specific menu:
a. Double-click the report to display the report properties dialog.
b. Click the Applicable Areas tab to bring that page forward.
Figure 195. Report Catalog Maintenance Properties, Applicable Areas

c. Select the applicable work area in which to make the report available, OR
Select None to remove a report from all ScheduALL menus.
d. Click Close to close the properties dialog.

8. To save all changes, from the Report Manager File menu, click Save, or click Save on the
toolbar.
9. From the Report Manager File menu, select Exit to close the dialog.
Set SQL Passwords

The ScheduALL system uses three database-level logins (schedwin, scheduser, and schedguest) to
connect to the ScheduALL database, which resides on a SQL or Oracle database server. These
database logins are handled internally by the ScheduALL system, are not visible to the end-users,
and users do not need to be aware of them. Once the ScheduALL application has authenticated a
user's login and password, it internally establishes a connection to the SQL or Oracle Server via
either the schedwin login for supervisor-level access, or the more limited scheduser login for user-
level access.
Each database login has a password assigned inside the database server, and external applications
(such as the ScheduALL system) must submit a valid login and password to establish a connection to
the database. The Set SQL Supervisor Password (schedwin) and Set SQL User Password
(scheduser) commands allow supervisors to configure the password that the ScheduALL system
uses to connect to the SQL database for the respective database logins. These commands are
available in the Supervisor Options selection of the ScheduALL File menu.
An alternate method of configuring passwords is to use the command line parameter using the
following steps.
1. Stop the ScheduALL Application Services.
2. Change the database password using your database management program.
3. Start ScheduALL using the change password command line parameter changepassword or
changeuserpassword).
4. Start the ScheduALL Application Services.
Database login passwords must match between the ScheduALL system and the database server.
Change the password in the ScheduALL system first, then change the password for the appropriate
login in the database server. Refer to the ScheduALL Technical Reference for more information.
Other Supervisor Options

The following Supervisor Options menu commands are not covered in this chapter:
l Purge History from Database is used to specify a cutoff date and permanently remove old
items, such as activities, work orders, projects, and invoices, from the database and audit
trail. Refer to the Database Purge Guide for more information.
l Developers Toolkit provides access to Developers Toolkit. Refer to Using Developer’s
Toolkit.
l Update License Information updates the system’s license file in order to expand existing
capabilities, add new modules, or enable additional features. Administrators receive a license
key file from ScheduALL. Refer to Apply the License File in the Installation/Update Guide and
Revision History.
l Company Setup allows the supervisor to define the companies used by the Multi-Company
module. Refer to the Multi-Company Module chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for
more information on companies.

l Connector Mapping Setup allows transparent data exchange when booking through
Connector without requiring additional forms or data entry. Refer to ScheduALL Connector
Mapping Setup.
File Operations
During initial setup or ongoing maintenance, it may be necessary to point the program to the
appropriate data and reports directories. From the File menu, select File Operations, and select one
of the following options:
l Click Set Database/ Common Directory to enter the path to the facility’s shared data folder.
l Click Set Sample Database Directory to enter the path to the sample data that is included in
a typical ScheduALL installation. This directory is set up during program installation, but must
be changed if the directory is moved.
l Click Set Reports Directory to enter the path to the shared reports directory.
E-mail Services
This section provides information on the e-mail services available in the system.
E-mail Services Overview

The ScheduALL system contains limited, send-only e-mail functionality, including the ability to do
the following:
l Send Work Order reports to clients.
l Send Schedule reports to operators, such as personnel resources.
l Send Work Order Summary reports to Producers and Account Executives
Reports are attached to e-mail messages. When generating an e-mail report, the scheduler specifies
the Subject line, Message body, and Signature. Client and producer e-mail addresses are stored in
the client and producer records within the ScheduALL database. Operator e-mail addresses are
specified in resource records. Refer to E-mail Reports in the Reports chapter of the ScheduALL
Users Guide for information on sending e-mail reports.
Note: These e-mail features are separate from the features and capabilities offered by the
ScheduALL Notification Manager service, built on the Microsoft .NET Framework.
E-Mail Requirements
To send notifications, the ScheduALL system requires:
l Access to an SMTP-compliant mail server. (The e-mail server must have a connection to the
Internet if mail is to be sent outside the corporate network to Internet e-mail addresses.)
l A valid account (login and password) on the mail server. If the account is created specifically
for the application, request that the Mail Server recalculate its routing table (Message Transfer
Agent).
l Valid authentication settings. Authentication should be enabled in the ScheduALL e-mail
settings only if the mail server requires authentication.
l A valid e-mail profile configured in System Preferences. Refer to E-mail Profile in System
Preferences.

l A valid e-mail profile configured in User Preferences. Refer to E-mail Profile in User
Preferences.
l Valid recipients defined in the resource and client setup areas:
l For resources, edit the resource properties and select (check) Include in Notifications,
and enter an E-mail Address. Refer to Managing Resources for more information.
l For clients, contacts, and agencies, edit the properties and enter an E-mail Address for
each recipient. Refer to Client, Contact, and Agency Setup for more information.
All outgoing e-mail will use the settings as configured in the System Options unless overridden by
settings in the Advanced User tab.
E-mail Profile in System Preferences

System-wide e-mail configuration is controlled through Supervisor Options.
Note: The Email preferences are not used by the Notification Manager Service. The e-mail server
address used by the Notification Manager service is located in the
SchedEmailManager.exe.config file. Notification Manager system preferences are configured
as described in Notification Manager.
2. Click the System Options tab.
3. Scroll down to the Email section.
Figure 196. System Preferences, System Options

4. Click the field next to “Profile initialized”. (If no information has been configured, the field
displays Click to Initialize. If e-mail profile information has been configured previously, the field
displays Click to Modify.) The Email Supervisor Profile dialog displays.
Figure 197. E-mail Supervisor Profile

5. Enter the required information as described in Table 145.
7. To send emails through the Notification Manager select Yes in the Send Application Email to
Notification Manager? field. The default is No. If set to Yes, the Email Supervisor Profile can
be displayed but the information is not used.
8. Select the display view to use for the e-mail subject line from the Display View for subject
line of work order email notifications list.
9. To automatically select the work order client as a recipient for e-mail notifications, select Yes
in the Default client selection for E-mail Notifications option.
If the following fields display, select settings for each field:
l Click the field next to “Automatic Email Report File” to select the automatic report
template.
l Select the template from the list and click OK.Click the field next to “Automatic Email
Format” and select an e-mail format from the list.
Table 145. E-mail Supervisor Profiles
Item Description
Mail Server Determines the address of the mail server used to send outgoing
mail.
l Enter the valid and complete address of the outgoing mail
server. Contact your mail server administrator for more
information.
SMTP Port Determines the network port number used by the mail server to
send mail using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).
l Enter the SMTP port number used by the outgoing mail
server. Contact your mail server administrator for more
information.

Table 145. E-mail Supervisor Profiles (continued)
Item Description
Authentication Required Determines if the mail server requires a valid user login and
password to send mail.
l Select (check) this option if the mail server requires the
Login User ID and Password information to send mail.
l Deselect (clear) this option to send mail without providing
any authentication information to the mail server.
E-mail Comment Determines a text string inserted into the header information of
all outgoing e-mails. This information is not visible within the
body of the e-mail; if the recipient's e-mail program has the
capability, this information is displayed as 'Internet headers'
when viewing mail options.
E-mail Profile in User Preferences

Configuring the system for the individual user is done through the User Preferences menu.
1. From the File menu, select User Preferences and click General. The General Preferences
dialog displays.
2. Click the Options tab.
3. Scroll down to the Email section.
4. Double-click the Click to Initialize field opposite Profile Initialized. The E-mail Profile dialog
displays.
5. Enter information in the User Info or Advanced tabs as described below.
User Info Tab
Enter the user's e-mail information as described in Table 146.
Figure 198. E-Mail User Profile, User Info

Table 146. E-mail Profile, User Info
Item Description
Login User ID Determines the user login ID used to access the server in order to
send mail. This entry is required unless configured in System
Preferences.
l Enter the user login for the e-mail account, from 1 to 255
characters.
Note: If the system preference Send Application Email to
Notification Manager? is set to Yes then this field is
disabled.
Password Determines the password used to access the mail server in order
to send mail. This entry is required unless configured in System
Preferences.
l Enter the user password for the e-mail account, from 1 to 255
characters.
Note: If the system preference Send Application Email to
Notification Manager? is set to Yes then this field is
disabled.
E-mail Address (Required) The address used to designate the origin of the user's
outgoing mail. This address is used to populate the From: line in
the e-mail.
l Enter a valid e-mail address.
Reply To (Required) Determines the address designated as the 'Reply To'
field. This allows the mail recipient to automatically reply to an e-
mail account that is different from E-mail Address field, above.
Full name Determines the name displayed in the 'From' field of an e-mail.
l Enter a name, from 1 to 255 characters.
Always BCC Specifies an address to which a Blind Carbon Copy (BCC) is sent
anytime the system generates an outgoing e-mail.
Advanced Tab
Note: If the system preference Send Application Email to Notification Manager? is set to Yes then
the fields on this tab are disabled.
1. Click the Advanced tab to override the e-mail server information entered into the E-Mail
Supervisor Profile dialog. The Advanced tab displays.
2. Enter the information for the user as described in Table 147.
3. To return to the supervisor defaults, click Clear on the Advanced tab, and verify all user
information on the User Info tab.

Figure 199. E-Mail User Profile, Advanced

Table 147. E-mail User Profile, Advanced
Item Description
Mail Server (Required) Determines the address field of the alternate mail
server.
l Enter the valid, complete address of the e-mail server.
Contact your mail server administrator for more information.
SMTP Port (Required) Determines the network port number used by the mail
server to send mail using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).
l Enter the mail server SMTP port number. Contact your mail
server administrator for more information.
Authentication Required Determines if the mail server requires a valid user login and
password to send mail.
l Select (check) this option to use the Login User ID and
Password information from the User tab to send mail.
l Deselect (clear) this option to send mail without providing any
authentication information to the mail server.
Email User Preferences

The Email section on the Options tab of the User Preferences, General Preferences dialog contains
miscellaneous user e-mail settings. Table 148 describes the available settings.

Table 148. Email User Preferences
Preference Definition
Profile initialized Refer to E-mail Profile in User Preferences.
Use Display View for Determines if the value stored in the Email-Subject display block of a
subject line of work order display view is used for the subject line of work order e-mail
email notifications notifications. The display view used is determined by system
preferences (refer to E-mail Profile in System Preferences). The
Room setting of the display view must be set to Email-Subject. An
existing display view can be used, or a new display view can be
created by copying an existing view and changing the Room setting.
Refer to Display View Maintenance for the Schedule Calendar.
l Yes uses the value from the display block as the subject line.
l No uses the value from the Subject field on the Document tab of
the Work Order Notification Reports dialog. (Default.)
Note: Security settings determine whether a user can access e-mail
notifications. Refer to Can access e-mail Work Order
Notification Reports?.
Keep Work Order open Determines if the Work Order dialog remains on the screen after e-mail
after emailing Reports? reports have been sent.
l Yes keeps the dialog open.
l No closes the dialog after e-mails have been sent. (Default.)
Clear Account Executive Determines if the previous value in the Account Executive field on the
field in Work Order Other tab of the Work Order Notification Reports dialog is deleted.
Notification Reports
Dialog? l Yes deletes the previous value in the field.
l No retains the previous value in the field. (Default.)
Clear Producer field in Determines if the previous value in the Producer field on the Other tab
Work Order Notification of the Work Order Notification Reports dialog is deleted.
Reports Dialog?
l Yes deletes the previous value in the field.
Clear Subject field in Work Determines if the previous value in the Subject field on the Document
Order Notification Reports tab of the Work Order Notification Reports dialog is deleted.
Dialog?
Clear Message field in Work Determines if the previous value in the Message field on the
Order Notification Reports Document tab of the Work Order Notification Reports dialog is
Dialog? deleted.
Clear Signature field in Determines if the previous value in the Signature field on the
Work Order Notification Document tab of the Work Order Notification Reports dialog is
Reports Dialog? deleted.

Ch. 3 ScheduLINK Setup
This chapter includes setup information specific to the ScheduLINK system. It includes detailed instructions for
creating standard items, and links to instructions in other chapters for creating items used by ScheduLINK.
In This Chapter
General Resource Properties for ScheduLINK 534

Room Resource Properties for ScheduLINK 548
BandPLAN Resource Setup 566
Band Plans 582
Operations Manager Setup 598
Predefined Circuit and Circuit Group Setup 601
Satellite Transmission Parameters Setup 601
Master Control Room Setup 602
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Ch. 3 ScheduLINK Setup
General Resource Properties for ScheduLINK

This section describes General resource properties for ScheduLINK resources.
General Resource – Satellite

The Satellite tab (Link only) displays information about resources that serve as satellite transponders
or other subset of a full satellite. Table 149 contains descriptions of the fields and buttons appropriate
to the ScheduLINK system.
Figure 200. General Resource Properties, Satellite Tab

Table 149. General Resource Properties, Satellite Tab Settings
Item Description
Generic Satellite Identifies the current satellite as a generic satellite, and allows the
user to determine transmission parameters at the time of booking
rather by defining all properties in resource setup. Refer to Edit
Transmission Parameters in the Work Orders and Activities chapter of
the ScheduLINK Users Guide.
Satellite TX Parameters Determines if the Transmission Parameters prompt is displayed when
Prompt this resource is booked. Refer to Edit Transmission Parameters in the
Work Orders and Activities chapter of the ScheduLINK Users
Guide.
l Not Used does not automatically display the Transmission
Parameters dialog when the resource is booked and does not
populate the Resource Booking Extension table with any default
transmission parameters. The dialog cannot be displayed
manually.
l Always Pop Up automatically displays the Transmission
Parameters dialog when the resource is booked.
l Only When Mandatory automatically displays the Transmission
Parameters dialog only when any of the parameters are
mandatory.
l Don’t Pop Up does not automatically display the Transmission
Parameters dialog but populates the Resource Booking
Extension table with default transmission parameters. The dialog
can be displayed manually by selecting the resource in the work
order and selecting Transmission Parameters from the Work
Order menu.
Satellite Identifies the resource as part of an satellite. When selected, the
Transponder/Channel system compares uplink parameters to assigned trucks and fixed
dishes, and includes this resource in satellite/uplink-based reports. If
Satellite Transponder/Channel is deselected (cleared), the system
ignores all settings on this tab.
(Description) Displays the description of the satellite.
Carrier ID Displays the satellite provider’s unique identifying name or number for
this transponder configuration.
Analog Path Identifies whether the path is intended to be used as analog. The
system compares this setting to the uplink chosen in a work order for
technical compatibility, and generates a conflict warning if the paths
do not match.
Digital Path Identifies whether the path is intended to be used as digital. The
do not match.

Table 149. General Resource Properties, Satellite Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Digital Information
Data Rate Displays the speed at which data is transferred by digital
transmissions on this path. Enter a value only if the value is fixed.
FEC Displays the Forward Error Correction (FEC) value used in digital
Symbol Rate Displays the symbol rate used in digital transmissions on this path.
Enter a value only if the value is fixed.
Modulation Displays the modulation scheme used in digital transmissions on this
path. Enter a value only if the value is fixed.
PID Displays the program identifier characters displayed on Integrated
Receiver/Decoder (IRD) at the receive end. Enter a value only if the
value is fixed.
Frequency Band Displays the frequency range to which this transponder or channel
belongs, such as C-band, Ku-band, or Ka-band.
Bandwidth Displays the total bandwidth of this specific path.
Orbital position Displays the position of the satellite within the geosynchronous arc.
UPLINK Frequency Displays frequency of uplink transmission.
UPLINK Polarity Identifies the polarity of the uplink signal. The system compares this
polarity to the Polarity Requirement of a Fixed Dish or Satellite Truck
for technical compatibility, and generates a conflict warning if the
polarity settings do not match the requirements.
l Horizontal indicates the signal is polarized horizontally.
l Left-hand indicates the polarity is polarized in a left-hand (or
counter-clockwise) rotation.
l None indicates that the signal is not polarized.
l Right-hand indicates the polarity is polarized in a right-hand (or
clockwise) rotation.
l Vertical indicates the signal is polarized vertically.
DOWNLINK Frequency Displays frequency of downlink transmission.
DOWNLINK Polarity Identifies the polarity of the downlink signal. The system compares
this polarity to the Polarity Requirement of a Fixed Dish or Satellite
Truck for technical compatibility, and generates a conflict warning if
the polarity settings do not match the requirements.

Table 149. General Resource Properties, Satellite Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
L-Band Displays the L-Band frequency.
Int. Freq Displays the intermediate frequency used internally.
Access Center Displays the name of the facility which confirms uplink signals and
approves transmission.
Access Rules/Hours Displays the hours or rules related to the access center’s operations.
Satellite Access Calls Displays the telephone number of the access center used for access-
related calls.
Non-Access Calls Displays the telephone number of the access center used for calls not
related to access.
Access Center Fax Displays the fax number of the access center.
Booking Open Displays the vendor’s time frame for accepting new bookings, such as
quarterly, 30-day rolling window, etc.
Notes Displays notes or other related information. Refer to Notes Editor.
General Resource – Uplink Path/Downlink

The Uplink Path/Downlink tab displays information about resources that serve as an individual
antenna or path. Figure 201 contains descriptions of the fields and buttons appropriate to the
ScheduLINK system.
Figure 201. General Resource Properties, Uplink Path/Downlink Tab

Table 150. General Resource Properties, Uplink Path/Downlink Tab Settings
Item Description
Uplink Truck Identifies the resource as part of an uplink truck. When selected, the
system compares uplink parameters to assigned satellites, and
includes this resource in satellite/uplink-based reports. If Uplink
Truck, Fixed Uplink, and Downlink are all cleared (deselected), the
system ignores all settings on this tab.
Fixed Uplink Identifies the resource as part of a permanent uplink facility. When
selected, the system compares uplink parameters to assigned
satellites, and includes this resource in satellite/uplink-based reports.
If Uplink Truck, Fixed Uplink, and Downlink are all cleared
(deselected), the system ignores all settings on this tab.
Downlink Identifies the resource as part of a downlink facility. When selected,
the system compares downlink parameters to assigned satellites, and
includes this resource in satellite reports. If Uplink Truck, Fixed
Uplink, and Downlink are all cleared (deselected), the system ignores
all settings on this tab.
system compares this setting to the Analog Path setting in the
Satellite properties; if settings do not match, the resources cannot be
booked into the same work order.
system compares this setting to the Digital Path setting in the Satellite
properties; if settings do not match, the resources cannot be booked
into the same work order.
POLARITY RULES
Dual-Path Polarity Refer to Room Properties – Uplink Truck for trucks or Room
Restriction Properties – Fixed Dish for fixed uplinks or downlinks.
Single-Path Polarity l Identifies the technical parameters checked for a single uplink
Requirement path when compared to the satellite chosen in a work order.
l None indicates there is no requirement.
l Requires Horizontal, Requires Left Hand, Requires Right
Hand, and Requires Vertical indicate the necessary type of
Uplink polarity on the Satellite Transponder/Channel.
Digital Information
Digital Encoder Displays the brand and model of the device used to encode the
transmission.
Software Version Displays the version of software installed in the encoder.
Cell Phones Displays the telephone numbers of cellular phones aboard the uplink
truck or at the facility.
Sat Phones Displays the telephone number of a satellite phone aboard the uplink
truck or at the facility.
Rings in Cab Displays the telephone number which rings in the cab of the uplink
truck, for calls while the truck is in transit.

Table 150. General Resource Properties, Uplink Path/Downlink Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Fax Displays the telephone number of the fax machine aboard the uplink
truck.
Other Comms System Displays whether or not other communication systems are used.
System Type Displays the communication system’s type.
To Call Truck Displays the information necessary to call the uplink truck via the
other communications system.
General Resource – Path Management

The Path Mgmt tab displays information about the role of the resource in a data path. Figure 202
describes the available settings. This tab is specific to the ScheduLINK system. Path management
features use resource properties defined on this tab to enforce rules and restrictions when building a
data or transmission path.
Figure 202. General Resource Properties, Path Mgmt Tab Settings

Table 151. General Resource Properties, Path Mgmt Tab Settings
Item Description
Description Displays the name or other text used to identify the resource.
Engineering Description Displays an alternate description of the resource required for task-
oriented identification, such as the Internet Protocol (IP) Address for
connectivity and routing.
Classification Identifies the path management classification to which the element
belongs. The classification determines the visual elements used to
represent the element and connecting lines in the Visual Path. Refer to
Resource Classification Setup for more information.
Default Transmission Role Identifies the transmission function performed by this resource. The
system assigns this role if the resource is added to a work order
directly, and not booked as part of a service or added as a source or
destination.
Joinable Refer to Joinable (Circuit Bookings).
Satellite Footprint Displays a map of the area that receives the satellite signal. Click the
Satellite Footprint button (shown at left) to select an external image
file.
Can be a Source Identifies the resource as a possible source. When selected, this
resource appears in the list of available resources when the Add
Source button is clicked in a work order.
Can be a Destination Identifies the resource as a possible destination. When selected, this
Destination button is clicked in a work order.
Can be a Relay Point Identifies the resource as a possible relay point. When selected, this
Allow Cascading From this Determines if additional elements can be added to the path after this
Element element. When enabled, the system allows this resource to be booked
as a relay point.
Extended Trail Enabled Determines whether or not the resource logs entries to the Extended
Trail. Refer to the ScheduALL Users Guide for information on the
Extended Trail.
Max Destinations Identifies the total number of possible destinations from this element.
When set to 0, the number of maximum destinations is unlimited. The
system generates conflict warnings when a user attempts to book
more destinations than the element supports.
Total Capacity Identifies the total capacity of the resource, either in a single work
order, or when multiple intersecting usages are totaled (such as in an
ATM network). The system generates conflict warnings when a user
attempts to book more capacity than a path can support.
Default Capacity Required Identifies the value which is subtracted from the resource's total
capacity for the duration of a work order, if capacity used is undefined
when the resource is added to the work order.

Table 151. General Resource Properties, Path Mgmt Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Capacity Unit of Measure Displays the Unit of Measure for frequency or capacity.
Track Carrier Up in Ops Determines whether the resource allows the user to specify the carrier
Manager up time, date, and notes using the Carrier Up button in the Ops
Manager and Ops Manager (WO) dialogs. Refer to Carrier Up Time in
the Scheduling chapter of the ScheduLINK Users Guide for more
information.
External Reference Displays information that relates this resource to an external system.
For Chorus users enter the information by which an external system
identifies this resource.
External Web Service Select whether the device is part of an external web service.
l <Does not participate> – Is not a part of a web service.
l <Various> – Participates in multiple web services.
l [service name] – Identifies the name of the web service name.
Capability Lists the resource capability selections assigned to the resource.
Assign Capability Click to display the Resource Capability Selection dialog. Select the
desired capabilities and click Select.
Release Capability Select a capability in the list and click to remove it from the resource.

General Resource – Circuit

Figure 203. General Resource Properties, Circuit Tab

Table 152. General Resource Properties, Circuit Tab Settings
Item Description
Description Displays the name or other text used to identify the resource.
Select Source Node Click to select the source node, used by Lines, Decoders, and
Encoder/Decoders.
(Clear) Click ( ) to remove the assigned the source node.
Source IP Address Enter the IP address of the source node.
Lat: Deg/Min/Sec Displays the latitude of the selected source node. See Latitude
below.
Long: Deg/Min/Sec Displays the longitude of the selected source node. See Longitude
below.
Select Destination Node Click to select the destination node.
(Clear) Click ( ) to remove the assigned destination node.
Destination IP Address Displays the IP address of the selected destination node.
Lat: Deg/Min/Sec Displays the latitude of the selected destination node. See Latitude
below.

Table 152. General Resource Properties, Circuit Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Long: Deg/Min/Sec Displays the longitude of the selected destination node. See
Longitude below.
Map Co-ordinates
Is Node Label (for map) Identifies the resource as a node that can be mapped on the Graphical
Map. This setting must be selected (checked) in order for the resource
to appear in the Select Source Node and Select Destination Node
browsers when configuring a Line resource.
Latitude Determines the distance from the Earth’s equator to the source node
in degrees (Deg), minutes (Min), and cardinal direction (Card). For
example:
New York City, United States is located near latitude 40° 43’ N.
Vienna, Austria is located near latitude 48° 13’ N.
Lima, Peru is located near latitude 12° 02' S.
Sydney, Australia is located near latitude 33° 51’ S.
l Deg determines the distance in degrees (°), from 0 to 179,
between the resource and the Equator.
l Min determines the distance in minutes (‘), from 0 to 59, added to
the degree (Deg) of latitude for greater precision.
l Card determines the direction north (N) or south (S) of the
equator.
Longitude Determines the location compared to the Prime Meridian in degrees
(Deg), minutes (Min), and cardinal (Card) direction. For example:
New York City, United States is located near longitude 74° 00’ W.
Vienna, Austria is located near longitude 16° 22’ E.
Lima, Peru is located near longitude 77° 01' W.
Sydney, Australia is located near longitude 151° 12’ E.
l Deg determines the distance in degrees (°), from 0 to 179,
between the resource and the Prime Meridian.
l Min determines the distance in minutes (‘), from 0 to 59, used to
subdivide a degree (Deg) of longitude for greater precision.
l Card determines the direction east (E) or west (W) of the Prime
Meridian.
Override Same Select this option to remove the same line or node restriction for a
Line/Node Restriction for protected path.
Protected Path
Override Same Node Select this option to remove the node restriction for a protected path if
Restr for Protect Path if selecting the resource is the last option available.
Last Option
Is Node (Router) Identifies the resource as a Node for the purposes of network circuits.
Refer to Circuit Selection Setup for more information.

Item Description
Is Line Identifies the resource as a Line for the purposes of network circuits.
Refer to Circuit Selection Setup for more information.
Is Encoder Identifies the resource as an Encoder for the purposes of network
circuits. Refer to Circuit Selection Setup for more information.
Is Decoder Identifies the resource as a Decoder for the purposes of network
circuits. Refer to Circuit Selection Setup for more information.
Is End Node (Router) Identifies the resource as one where traffic originates or terminates,
and does not carry pass-through traffic.
Is Other Circuit Device Identifies the resource as an unclassified device for the purposes of
network circuits.
Is Converter Identifies the resource as a device that converts one audio and/or
video format standard to another format standard.
Is Ethernet Identifies the resource as one that supports bi-directional circuits by
booking a return path using same nodes as the outgoing path.
<no> indicates that the service is not an Ethernet service.
<unrestricted> indicates that this is an Ethernet service with no
restrictions on the types of bookings that the service supports.
E-LAN indicates that this is an Ethernet service connecting a source
to multiple destinations, where the path to each destination is
considered a separate circuit with potentially different bandwidths.
E-Line indicates that this is an Ethernet service connecting one
source to one destination only in a point-to-point booking.
E-Tree indicates that this is an Ethernet service connecting a source
to multiple destinations as one circuit with multiple branches, all with
the same bandwidth.
Refer to Modifying Dialogs for Is Ethernet for more information and
for information on adding the controls required for this feature.
Is Bundled Circuit Identifies the resource as resources that are bundled by the
parent/child process.
Is Module/Card Select the option to designate which resource bundled inside the
encoder and decoder port resources is the module/card resource so
that its presence can be positively verified.
External ID Identifies the resource as a device that is external to the circuit. This
type of device is used in the Chorus system. Enter the IP address of
the external device.

Item Description
Load Balance Group Click to select a Load Balance Group for this resource, which is used
for sorting circuit resources by availability. This option is for circuit
selection only.
Node Cluster ID Provides a method to assign chassis (Nodes) which are co-located as
belonging to the same Parent Node. This allows the different routing
restrictions and hop count rules to be applied when a feed originates or
terminates on a member of the same Parent Node, as opposed to
when a feed is passing through the entire Parent Node as an
intermediate node.
Enter the desired identification.
Additional Web Services Lists any web services that may be affected by this resource.
Impacted (Also Notify)
Add Impacted Web Click to select an Impacted Web Service from the Select Web Service
Service dialog. The service(s) added will be provided information about
bookings related to the resource.
Release Select an Impacted Web Service in the Web Service list and click
Release to remove it.
General Resource – Sub-Resources

The ScheduLINK system allows the administrator to define parent-child relationships between certain
resources in order to subdivide a single resource, such as a satellite, into multiple channels. This
allows the system to automatically manage multiple fixed bandwidth relationships and provide
conflict warnings. The bandwidth interplay is also displayed on the visual Scheduling Calendar as
described in Sub-Resources and Availability in the Scheduling chapter of the ScheduLINK Users
Guide, allowing a scheduler to immediately identify available satellite bandwidth and the possible
configurations.
Note: Sub-Resource Relationships are an alternative to the Band Plan features described in Band
Plans. Only one method should be applied to any given resource.
The ScheduLINK system allows a parent resource to own a maximum of five levels of sub-resources.
To display sub-resources on the main calendar board, configure a Resource Group with the parent
resource and all sub-resources.
The Sub-Resources tab displays information about resources that serve as a sub-division of the
current resource. Sub-resources are used to determine the availability of resources above and below
a resource in the sub-resource tree. Refer to Sub-Resources and Availability in the Scheduling
chapter of the ScheduLINK Users Guide for information.
The Sub-Resources tab for both General and Room properties are identical. The General Resource
Properties dialog is shown here.

Figure 204. Sub-Resources Tab

Table 153. Sub-Resources Tab Settings
Item Description
Add Opens the resource list and allows the user to select one or more
resources to serve as sub-resources.
Select only General Resources as sub-resources.
Release Removes the relationship between the current resource and the
selected sub-resource.
General Resource – Predecessor

The Predecessor tab lists the resources that can be selected when using the Insert Before command
within a ScheduLINK work order. Controls and options are identical to Room Properties –
Predecessor. This tab is specific to the ScheduLINK system.
General Resource – Successor

The Successor tab lists the resources that can be selected when using the Insert After command
within a ScheduLINK work order. Controls and options are identical to Room Properties –
Successor. This tab is specific to the ScheduLINK system.
General Resource – Uplink Predecessor

from an Uplink resource within a ScheduLINK work order. Controls and options are identical to Room
Properties – Predecessor but used for uplinks only. This tab is specific to the ScheduLINK system.
General Resource – Uplink Successor

from an Uplink resource within a ScheduLINK work order. Controls and options are identical to Room
Properties – Successor but used for uplinks only. This tab is specific to the ScheduLINK system.
General Resource – Antenna Matrix

The Antenna Matrix tab displays the properties associated with an earth-based fixed satellite, and
used by Antenna Matrix validation logic. Refer to Room Properties – Antenna Matrix. This tab is
specific to the ScheduLINK system.
Note: When configuring a resource as an antenna, deselect (clear) the Check Availability setting on
the Main tab. Antennas configured using Antenna Matrix use a different availability logic.


The Satellite 2 tab displays information about the resource as a satellite in conjunction with
BandPLAN functionality. Refer to General Resource – Satellite. This tab is specific to the
ScheduLINK system.

Room Resource Properties for ScheduLINK

This section describes Room resource properties for ScheduLINK resources.
Room Properties – Satellite

The Satellite tab (Link only) displays information specific to an orbital satellite resource. Table 154
describes the available settings. This tab is specific to the ScheduLINK system.
The Satellite, Uplink Truck, and Fixed Dish tabs each define different kinds of rooms. These room
types are mutually exclusive, and only one of these tabs will be used per resource—if a room is
identified as a Satellite, it should not be identified as an Uplink Truck or Fixed Dish.
Figure 205. Room Properties, Satellite Tab

Table 154. Room Properties, Satellite Tab Settings
Item Description
Generic Satellite Identifies the current satellite as a generic satellite, and allows the
user to determine transmission parameters at the time of booking
rather by defining all properties in resource setup. Refer to Edit
Transmission Parameters in the Work Orders and Activities chapter of
the ScheduLINK Users Guide.
Satellite Identifies the room as a satellite. When selected, the system
Transponder/Channel compares satellite parameters to assigned uplinks (Uplink Trucks or
Fixed Dishes), and includes this resource in satellite-based reports.
When deselected, the system ignores all other settings on this tab.

Table 154. Room Properties, Satellite Tab Settings(continued)
Item Description
Satellite TX Parameters Determines if the Transmission Parameters prompt is displayed when
Prompt this resource is booked. Refer to Edit Transmission Parameters in the
Guide.
Not Used does not display the Transmission Parameters dialog and
does not populate the Resource Booking Extension table with any
default transmission parameters.
Always Pop Up displays the Transmission Parameters dialog in all
cases.
Only When Mandatory displays the Transmission Parameters dialog
only when the parameters are mandatory.
Don’t Pop Up does not display the Transmission Parameters dialog
but populates the Resource Booking Extension table with default
transmission parameters.
Carrier ID Displays the satellite provider’s unique identifying name or number for
this transponder configuration.
do not match.
do not match.
Data Rate Displays the speed at which data is transferred by digital
Modulation Displays the modulation scheme used in digital transmissions on this
path. Enter a value only if the value is fixed.
PID Displays the program identifier characters displayed on Integrated
Receiver/Decoder (IRD) at the receive end. Enter a value only if the
value is fixed.
Bandwidth Displays the total bandwidth of this specific path.
Parent HPA Power Displays the wattage of the parent High-Powered Amplifier (HPA)
transmitting the return signal from the satellite.

Table 154. Room Properties, Satellite Tab Settings(continued)
Item Description
Uplink Frequency Displays frequency of uplink transmission.
Uplink Polarity Identifies the polarity of the uplink signal. The system compares this
Horizontal indicates the signal is polarized horizontally.
Left-hand indicates the polarity is polarized in a left-hand (or counter-
None indicates that the signal is not polarized.
Right-hand indicates the polarity is polarized in a right-hand (or
Vertical indicates the signal is polarized vertically.
Downlink Frequency Displays frequency of downlink transmission.
Downlink Polarity Identifies the polarity of the downlink signal. The system compares
Horizontal indicates the signal is polarized horizontally.
Left-hand indicates the polarity is polarized in a left-hand (or counter-
None indicates that the signal is not polarized.
Right-hand indicates the polarity is polarized in a right-hand (or
Vertical indicates the signal is polarized vertically.
L-BAND Displays the L-Band frequency.
INT. FREQ Displays the intermediate frequency used internally.
related calls.
related to access.
Bookings Open Displays the vendor’s time frame for accepting new bookings, such as
Notes Displays notes or other related information. Refer to Notes Editor.
Inclined Orbit Displays whether the satellite is in an inclined orbit, and requires a
tracking dish or additional attention to signal strength.

Room Properties – Uplink Truck

The Uplink Truck tab displays information specific to satellite uplink vehicles. Table 155 describes
the available settings. This tab is specific to the ScheduLINK system.
identified as an Uplink Truck, it should not be identified as a Satellite or Fixed Dish.
Figure 206. Room Properties, Uplink Truck Tab Settings

Table 155. Room Properties, Uplink Truck Tab Settings
Item Description
Uplink Truck Identifies the room as an uplink truck. When selected, the system
compares uplink parameters to assigned satellites, and includes this
resource in satellite/uplink-based reports. When deselected, the
system ignores all settings on this tab.
Band Displays the frequency range to which this transponder or channel
Polarity Rules, Dual-Path Uplink ONLY

Table 155. Room Properties, Uplink Truck Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Dual-Path Polarity Identifies the technical parameters checked when two intersecting
Restriction paths are booked from the same uplink. “Must Be” options generate a
warning for any conflict, and do not allow the user to Book Anyway.
“Prefer” options generate warnings for any conflict; users with
appropriate permissions can select Book Anyway.
Multiple paths must be designated as sub-resources.
l <none> indicates there is no polarity restriction.
l Must Be Opposite requires single-band restrictions to be exact
opposites (Horizontal/Vertical or Left Hand/Right Hand).
l Must Be The Same requires single-band restrictions to be
identical.
l Prefer Opposite requires single-band restrictions to be exact
opposites.
l Prefer Same requires single-band restrictions to be identical.
Polarity Rules, Single-Path Uplink ONLY
system compares this setting to the Digital Path setting in the
Single-Path Polarity Identifies the technical parameters checked for a single uplink path
Requirement when compared to the satellite chosen in a work order.
Hand, and Requires Vertical indicate the Uplink polarity on the
Satellite Transponder/Channel must be the specified type.
Digital Encoder Displays brand and model of the device used to encode
transmissions.
Truck Manufacturer Displays the name of the truck’s manufacturer.
Dish Size Displays the size of the transmit dish.
Dimensions (LxHxW) Displays the measurements and proportions of the uplink truck. The
recommended format is Length by Height by Width.
Gross Weight Displays the total weight of the uplink truck.
External Power Req’d Displays the configuration required when truck is powered externally
(shore power).
Other Displays notes or other related information.

Table 155. Room Properties, Uplink Truck Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Cell Phone Displays the telephone number of a cellular phone aboard the uplink
truck.
Sat Phones Displays the telephone number of a satellite phone aboard the uplink
truck.
Rings in Cab Displays the telephone number which rings in the cab of the uplink
truck, for calls while the truck is in transit.
Fax Displays the telephone number of the fax machine aboard the uplink
truck.
Other Comms System Displays whether or not other communication systems are used.
System Type Displays the communication system’s type.
To Call Truck Displays the information necessary to call the uplink truck via the
other communications system.
Edit Configuration Displays the configuration and formats of any edit systems aboard the
uplink truck.
Tape Playback Formats Displays the tape formats which can be played to the satellite from the
uplink truck.

Room Properties – Fixed Dish

The Fixed Dish tab (Link only) displays information specific to a stationary satellite uplink. This tab is
specific to the ScheduLINK system. Table 156 describes the available settings.
identified as a Fixed Dish, it should not be identified as a Satellite or Uplink Truck.
Figure 207. Room Properties, Fixed Dish Tab

Table 156. Room Properties, Fixed Dish Tab Settings
Item Description
Fixed Uplink Identifies the room as a fixed uplink transmission. When selected, the
system compares uplink parameters to assigned satellites, and
includes this resource in satellite/uplink-based reports. When neither
Fixed Uplink nor Downlink are selected, the system ignores all uplink
and downlink settings on this tab.
Downlink Identifies the room as a downlink transmission. When selected, the
system compares downlink parameters to assigned satellites, and
includes this resource in satellite reports.
Band Displays the frequency range to which this transponder or channel
Polarity Rules, Dual-Path Uplink ONLY

Table 156. Room Properties, Fixed Dish Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Dual-Path Polarity Identifies the technical parameters checked when two intersecting
Restriction paths are booked from the same uplink. “Must Be” options generate a
warning for any conflict, and do not allow the user to Book Anyway.
“Prefer” options generate warnings for any conflict; users with
appropriate permissions can select Book Anyway.
In order to use this feature, multiple paths must be designated as sub-
resources as described in General Resource – Sub-Resources.
l <none> indicates there is no polarity restriction.
l Must Be Opposite indicates that single-band restrictions at the
resource level must be exact opposites (Horizontal/Vertical or
Left Hand/Right Hand).
l Must Be The Same indicates that single-band restrictions at the
resource level must be identical.
l Prefer Opposite indicates that single-band restrictions at the
resource level should be opposite.
l Prefer Same indicates that single-band restrictions at the
resource level should be identical.
Polarity Rules, Single-Path Uplink ONLY
system compares this setting to the Digital Path setting in the Satellite
properties; if settings do not match, the resources cannot be booked
into the same work order.
Single-Path Polarity Identifies the technical parameters checked for a single uplink path
Requirement when compared to the satellite chosen in a work order.
Non-Steerable Dish Indicates that the dish is a fixed antenna that cannot be repositioned.
Required Satellite Displays the satellite at which the non-steerable dish is pointed.
Dish Size Displays the size of the transmit dish.
Digital Information
Digital Encoder Displays the brand and model of the device used to encode the
transmission.
Tape Playback Formats Displays the tape formats which can be played to the satellite from the
uplink facility.

Table 156. Room Properties, Fixed Dish Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Phone at Uplink Displays the telephone number of the uplink facility.
Fax at Uplink Displays the telephone number of the fax machine at the uplink
facility.
Other Displays notes or other related information.
Room Properties – Path Management

The Path Mgmt tab contains information about the role of the room in a data path. This tab is specific
to the ScheduLINK system. Table 157 describes the available settings.
Path management features use resource properties defined on this tab to enforce rules and
restrictions when building a data or transmission path.
Figure 208. Room Properties, Path Mgmt Tab

Table 157. Room Properties, Path Mgmt Tab Settings
Item Description
Description Displays the description of the room.

Table 157. Room Properties, Path Mgmt Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Default Transmission Role Identifies the most common transmission function performed by this
resource (Destination, Relay Point, Source, or N/A). The system
assigns this role if the resource is added to a work order directly, and
not booked as part of a service or added as a source or destination.
resource appears on the Source tab when attempting to add or insert
nodes in a work order.
resource appears on the Destination tab when attempting to add or
insert nodes in a work order.
resource appears on the Relay Point tab when attempting to add or
insert nodes in a work order.
Allow Cascading From This Determines if additional elements can be added to the path after this
as a relay point.
Extended Trail.
Circuit Provider Determines whether or not the resource is a circuit provider.
Satellite Footprint button to select an external image file.

Table 157. Room Properties, Path Mgmt Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
information.
External Reference Displays information that relates this resource to an external system.
For Chorus users enter the information by which an external system
identifies this resource.
Web Service Name Displays the names of impacted web services.
Add Impacted Web Click to select an Impacted Web Service from the Select Web Service
Service dialog.
Release Select an Impacted Web Service in the Web Service list and click
Release to remove it.
Room Properties – Sub-Resources

The ScheduLINK system allows the administrator to define parent-child relationships between certain
resources in order to subdivide a single resource, such as a satellite, into multiple channels. This
allows the system to automatically manage multiple fixed bandwidth relationships and provide
conflict warnings. The bandwidth interplay is also displayed on the visual Scheduling Calendar as
described in Sub-Resources and Availability in the Scheduling chapter of the ScheduLINK Users
Guide, allowing a scheduler to immediately identify available satellite bandwidth and the possible
configurations.
Note: Sub-Resource Relationships are an alternative to the Band Plan features described in Band
Plans. Only one method should be applied to any given resource.
The ScheduLINK system allows a parent resource to own a maximum of five levels of sub-resources.
To display sub-resources on the main calendar board, configure a Resource Group with the parent
resource and all sub-resources.
The Sub-Resources tab displays information about resources that serve as a sub-division of the
current resource. Sub-resources are used to determine the availability of resources above and below
a resource in the sub-resource tree. Refer to Sub-Resources and Availability in the Scheduling
chapter of the ScheduLINK Users Guide for information.
The Sub-Resources tab for both General and Room properties are identical. The General Resource
Properties dialog is shown here.

Figure 209. Sub-Resources Tab

Table 158. Sub-Resources Tab Settings
Item Description
Add Opens the resource list and allows the user to select one or more
resources to serve as sub-resources.
Select only General Resources as sub-resources.
Release Removes the relationship between the current resource and the
selected sub-resource.
Room Properties – Predecessor

The Predecessor tab (Link only) displays the resources that can serve as valid predecessors to the
current resource when the current resource is booked as any role other than an uplink. A ‘valid
predecessor’ is any resource which should not generate compatibility errors when a user adds the
predecessor using an Insert Before command in the Work Order dialog. This tab is specific to the
Compatible Resource feature.Table 159 describes the available settings.
Figure 210. Room Properties, Predecessor Tab

Table 159. Room Properties, Predecessor Tab Settings
Item Description
(Validation Type) The validation type determines, at the resource level, whether the
system will check the compatibility of resource selections when other
resources are inserted before the current resource in a transmission
path.
Passive allows the validation settings specified at a higher level (i.e.
at the resource category or resource type) to apply to the current
resource. This setting disables most controls on the current dialog;
compatible resources should be selected at the category or type level.
Validate checks the compatibility of any resource inserted before the
current resource in a transmission path.
Don’t Validate does not check the compatibility of any resource
inserted before the current resource in a transmission path.
Assign Predecessor Allows the user to select one or more Rooms or General Resources
that can serve as compatible predecessors.
Assign Capacity Resource Allows the user to select one or more BandPLAN Resources or Band
Segments that can serve as compatible predecessors.
Assign Antenna Allows the user to select one or more antenna. Resources that can
serve as compatible predecessors.
Copy from Existing Imports the list of compatible predecessors from another similar
Resource resource.
Release Predecessor Allows the user to remove one or more resources from the list of
compatible predecessors.
(Predecessor browser)
Category Displays the resource category in which the predecessor resource will
be booked.
Type Displays the resource type in which the predecessor resource will be
booked.
Resource Displays the text description of the predecessor resource.
Ch Displays the band segment description of the predecessor resource.
Edit Preferred Groups Allows the user to add groups to, or remove groups from, the Preferred
Groups list.
Preferred Groups (browser) Displays the list of preferred groups.

Room Properties – Successor

The Successor tab displays the resources that can serve as valid successors to the current resource
when the current resource is booked as any role other than an uplink. A ‘valid successor’ is any
resource which should not generate compatibility errors when a user adds the successor using an
Insert After command in the Work Order dialog. This tab is specific to the ScheduLINK system.
Figure 211. Room Properties, Uplink Successor Tab

Table 160. Room Properties, Successor Tab Settings
Item Description
(Validation Type) The validation type determines, at the resource level, whether the
system will check the compatibility of resource selections when other
resources are inserted after the current resource in a transmission
path.
l Passive allows the validation settings specified at a higher level
(i.e. at the resource category or resource type) to apply to the
current resource. This setting disables most controls on the
current dialog; compatible resources should be selected at the
category or type level.
l Validate checks the compatibility of any resource inserted after
the current resource in a transmission path.
l Don’t Validate does not check the compatibility of any resource
inserted after the current resource in a transmission path.
Assign Successor Allows the user to select one or more Rooms or General Resources
that can serve as compatible successors.

Table 160. Room Properties, Successor Tab Settings(continued)
Item Description
Assign Capacity Resource Allows the user to select one or more BandPLAN Resources or Band
Segments that can serve as compatible successors.
Assign Antenna Allows the user to select one or more antenna. Resources that can
serve as compatible successors.
Copy from Existing Imports the list of compatible successors from another similar
Resource resource.
Release Successor Allows the user to remove one or more resources from the list of
compatible successors.
(Successor browser)
Category Displays the resource category in which the successor resource will
be booked.
Type Displays the resource type in which the successor resource will be
booked.
Resource Displays the text description of the predecessor resource.
Ch Displays the band segment description of the predecessor resource.
Edit Preferred Groups Allows the user to add groups to, or remove groups from, the Preferred
Groups list.
Preferred Groups (browser) Displays the list of preferred groups.
Room Properties – Uplink Predecessor and Successor

Uplink Predecessor
The Uplink Predecessor tab displays the resources that can serve as valid predecessors to the
current resource when the current resource is booked as an Uplink. Settings are identical to the
Predecessor tab but used differently. This tab is specific to the ScheduLINK system. Refer to Room
Properties – Predecessor.
Uplink Successor
The Uplink Successor tab displays the resources that can serve as valid successors to the current
resource when the current resource is booked as an Uplink. This tab is specific to the ScheduLINK
system. Refer to Room Properties – Successor.

Room Properties – Antenna Matrix

The Antenna Matrix tab displays the properties associated with an earth-based fixed satellite, and
used by Antenna Matrix validation logic. This tab is specific to the ScheduLINK system. Table 161
Note: When configuring a resource as an antenna, deselect (clear) the Check Availability setting on
the Main tab. Antennas configured using Antenna Matrix use a different availability logic.
Figure 212. Room Properties, Antenna Matrix Tab

Table 161. Room Properties, Antenna Matrix Tab Settings
Item Description
Is Antenna Identifies the current resource as an antenna and enables Antenna
Matrix validation logic.
Capabilities Defines what roles the antenna can perform, uplink, downlink or both.
At least one option must be selected (checked).
Uplink Identifies the current resource as a valid uplink.
Downlink Identifies the current resource as a valid downlink.
Polarity Defines which satellite polarity the antenna uses, either Linear
(horizontal or vertical), Circular (left-hand or right-hand, or clockwise or
counter-clockwise). Only one option must be selected (checked).
Linear Polarity Allows the antenna to send feeds to and/or receive feeds from a
satellite that supports linear (horizontal or vertical) polarities.

Table 161. Room Properties, Antenna Matrix Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Circular Polarity Allows the antenna to send feeds to and/or receive feeds from a
satellite that supports circular (left-hand or right-hand) polarities.
Frequency Bands Defines the bands with which the antenna is compatible. Select all
that apply. At least one option must be selected (checked).
C-Band Allows the antenna to send feeds to and/or receive feeds from a
satellite that supports C-band frequencies.
Ku-Band Allows the antenna to send feeds to and/or receive feeds from a
satellite that supports K-under band frequencies.
Ka-Band Allows the antenna to send feeds to and/or receive feeds from a
satellite that supports K-above band frequencies.
Disregard Sat Location, Determines whether the Antenna Matrix logic ignores certain conflict
Port Validation, and Overlap checks, including the Arc Range, Port Restrictions, and overlapping
booking restrictions. This allows the user to validate basic vendor
properties without requiring in-depth technical checks.
Restrict Overlaps to Band Enforces (selected) or ignores (cleared) Antenna Matrix logic whereby
all bookings that intersect or overlap are required to occur on the same
frequency band (such as C, Ku, or Ka).
Uplink
Number of Ports Defines the number of ports available on the antenna that can be used
as uplink ports. This value is used to validate that there is an available
uplink port in order to book the satellite as an uplink.
Single Port Restriction Identifies the technical parameters checked for a single uplink path
when compared to the satellite chosen in a work order.
Downlink
Number of Ports Defines the number of ports available on the antenna that can be used
as downlink ports. This value is used to validate that there is an
available downlink port in order to book the satellite as an uplink.
Single Port Restriction Identifies the technical parameters checked for a single downlink path
when compared to the downlink chosen in a work order.

Table 161. Room Properties, Antenna Matrix Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Arc Range
Degrees East Defines the full possible arc for the antenna in degrees east of the
East Limit Prime Meridian. (Arc range should be defined as either Degrees East
West Limit or Degrees West, depending on the location of the antenna.)
Degrees West Defines the full possible arc for the antenna in degrees west of the
East Limit Prime Meridian. (Arc range should be defined as either Degrees East
West Limit or Degrees West, depending on the location of the antenna.)
(Obstacles browser) Lists all of the portions of the full Arc Range that are not available due
to obstacles.
Add Allows the user to add one or more ranges within the current arc range
to identify obstacles such as buildings or trees.
Edit Allows the user to modify a selected obstacle arc.
Delete Allows the user to remove a selected obstacle arc.

BandPLAN Resource Setup

BandPLAN™ resources are satellite or data equipment which generate transmission signals or send
data over a network connection. BandPLAN resources are defined as part of band catalogs and band
plans, and offer an alternative to Sub-Resources.
Adding or Editing BandPLAN Resources

To add or edit a BandPLAN Resource entry:
2. Select a BandPLAN resource and click Edit,
-or-
click New in the Description column. Select BandPLAN in the Resource Types dialog and
click OK. Select the resource Category and Type to which the resource will belong. (This
resource type is specific to the ScheduLINK system.)
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Main

the resource belongs, access to billing and cancellation rates, and the specified billing, tax, and
cancellation options. Table 162 lists the available settings.
Figure 213. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Main Tab

Table 162. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Main Tab Settings
Item Description
Description Enter the descriptive name of the resource, such as the satellite name
and transponder designation.
Total Bandwidth Enter the full amount of bandwidth available to the resource.
Category and Type Lists the category group and type group to which the resource
Add belongs. (It is not recommended to add a BandPLAN resource to more
Release than one category or type.)
l Click Add to associate this resource with additional categories
and/or types.
the association.
user security settings. Refer to Can Add/Release BandPlans to
Price Maintenance dialog displays.
Note: Billing rates should be set at the band plan level.
Category Overrides Click this button to set ledger account numbers for a single resource,
or all resources of the same type, and override resource ledger
numbers entered on the Accounting page. The Resource Catalog
To report revenue and costs to the specified ledger, enter the
appropriate ledger numbers and click OK. A confirmation dialog
displays.
l Click Yes to ripple (change all) resources in the same category
and type to the ledger account numbers.
l Click No to set the ledger account for this individual resource
only.
resource. Refer to the ScheduALL Users Guide for more
information.
item by default.

Table 162. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Main Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
used. For example, use this option for a resource shared between two
sites so that schedulers know to confirm the resource’s availability.
l The system sets the Explicit Confirmation field on the resource
booking dialog to Needs Confirmation, and displays the Needs
Confirmation flag ( ) on the calendar block and resource
browsers.
l When a scheduler changes the Explicit Confirmation field to
Confirmed, the system displays the Confirmed flag ( ) on the
calendar block and resource browsers.
Notify Engineering Select (check) to include item in reports which detail schedules by
resource. These reports are designed to allow engineering staff to plan
equipment maintenance.
From the Report menu, click Print Schedules by Resource to run
the report.
Availability Available Block defined in order to book the resource. Refer to the
ScheduALL Users Guide for more information on the Available
Block resource activity.
charges, if a booking which contains the resource is canceled.
Joinable Select (check) to allow additional resources in a resource path to
make use of this resource.

Table 162. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Main Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Hold Determines whether the system prevents the resource from being
invoiced until after it has been reviewed.
l No does not set the Hold for Review flag automatically for any
reason. (Users can set the flag manually for resource bookings
assigned to a Work Order.)
l Always automatically sets the Hold for Review flag when the
resource is booked in a work order.
l Only when Cancelled automatically enables the Hold for
Review flag when the resource’s booking in a work order is
canceled.
Band Plan Catalogs Lists the Band Catalogs associated with the resource.
(browser)
Description Displays the Band Catalog description.
Effective and Expiration Displays the date on which the Band Catalog takes effect, and the
date on which the band plan expires, respectively.
Start and End Displays the time at which the Band Catalog takes effect each day,
and the time at which the band plan expires each day, respectively.
Days Displays whether the Band Catalog is applied to certain days of the
week (M, T, W ... S) and certain times of the day (Start and End).
M, T, W ... S Displays the days of the week on which the Band Catalog takes
effect.
New BandPLAN Click to create a new BandPLAN Catalog. The BandExt Catalog
dialog displays. Refer to BandPLAN Catalogs.
Edit BandPLAN Click to modify the selected BandPLAN catalog. The BandExt
Catalog dialog displays. Refer to BandPLAN Catalogs.
Delete BandPLAN Click to permanently remove the selected BandPLAN catalog and
remove the relationship between the current resource and the
appropriate BandPLAN. (Deleting a catalog does not delete the band
plan or band segments associated with the catalog.)
Edit Bandwidth Click to modify the BandPLAN assigned to the selected Catalog. The
BandExt dialog displays. (The BandExt must already exist and be
assigned to the catalog.) Refer to Band Extensions.

BandPLAN Catalogs
The Band Extension (BandExt) Catalog dialog defines the times, days, and dates during which a
band plan takes effect for the current resource.
Figure 214. Band Extension Catalog Dialog

To create a new Band Plan Catalog:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor, or with permissions to configure band plans.
(In the Security Maintenance & Setup area, users must have access to Add, View, Edit, and
Delete Resources to perform the corresponding actions for band plans.)
3. Select a Category, select a Type, and double-click an existing capacity resource.
4. Click New BandPLAN. The Band Extension (BandExt) Catalog Properties dialog displays.
5. Enter the BandPLAN Description of the catalog, such as Standard, Weekend, or Special
Event.
6. Click Create New Bandwidth Model to create a new Band Plan (BandExt) entry and
associate it with this catalog. The Band Extension (BandExt) Properties dialog displays. Refer
to Band Extensions.

7. Click Edit Current Bandwidth Model to modify the band plan entry associated with this
catalog. The Band Extension (BandExt) Properties dialog displays. Refer to Band
Extensions.
8. Click Assign or Copy Existing Bandwidth Model to associate an existing band plan entry
to the current resource. The Select BandExt browser also allows you to create a copy of an
existing band plan entry and associate it to the current resource.
Note: This applies an exact, existing band plan (BandExt) to the catalog. Changing the BandPLAN
via any associated Catalog changes all associated Catalogs.
9. Click Clear ( ) to unassign a band plan entry from this catalog. The band plan can still be
assigned to other catalogs.
10. Select (check) Use Effective Dates to apply the catalog only during a specific period.
l Enter the start date, or click the calendar button to select the date.
l If the band plan expires, enter the end date or click the calendar button to select the date.
11. Select (check) Use Days & Times to apply the catalog only to specific days of the week and
hours of the day.
l Select each day of the week (Monday, Tuesday, etc.) on which the catalog will apply.
l Optionally set the Time Period (start time and end time) during which the catalog applies.
12. Click OK to save all changes to the catalog.
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Satellite

The Satellite tab contains information specific to a satellite resource. Figure 215 describes the
available settings.
Figure 215. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Satellite Tab Settings

Table 163. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Satellite Tab Settings
Item Description
Satellite Identifies the room as a satellite. When selected, the system
Transponder/Channel compares satellite parameters to assigned uplinks (Uplink Trucks or
Fixed Dishes), and includes this resource in satellite-based reports.
When deselected, the system ignores all other settings on this tab.
Inclined Orbit Displays whether the satellite is in an inclined orbit, and requires a
tracking dish or additional attention to signal strength.
Uplink Polarity Identifies the polarity of the uplink signal. The system compares this
Downlink Polarity Identifies the polarity of the downlink signal. The system compares
related calls.
related to access.
Booking Open Displays the vendor’s time frame for accepting new bookings, such as

Table 163. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Satellite Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Satellite Transmission Determines if the Transmission Parameters prompt is displayed when
Parameters this resource is booked. Refer to Edit Transmission Parameters in the
Guide.
l Not Used does not display the Transmission Parameters dialog
and does not populate the Resource Booking Extension table with
any default transmission parameters.
l Always Pop Up displays the Transmission Parameters dialog in
all cases.
l Only When Mandatory displays the Transmission Parameters
dialog only when the parameters are mandatory.
l Don’t Pop Up does not display the Transmission Parameters
dialog but populates the Resource Booking Extension table with
default transmission parameters.
Legacy Installations (prior to v4.54)a
New Installations (v4.54 and above)
C-Band Indicates the antenna supports C-band frequencies.
Ku-Band Indicates the antenna supports K-under band frequencies.
Ka-Band Indicates the antenna supports K-above band frequencies.
Satellite Location Identifies the logical location of the satellite. This setting is used to
determine when an uplink or downlink antenna must perform an
Antenna Move between two bookings on different satellites.
Satellite Name Alternate name or description of the satellite.
Transponder Name Name or description of the transponder.
a The “Legacy Installation” section displays fields used by the ScheduLINK system prior to v4.54. Newer installations do not
need to configure the Legacy information; it is provided as information to allow administrators to update configurations to use
newer functionality.

BandPLAN Resource Properties – Accounting

The Accounting tab contains displays billing, invoicing, and accounts/receivable information. Table
164 describes the available settings.
Figure 216. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Accounting Tab

Table 164. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Accounting Tab Items
Item Description
Billing Description Enter the resource description for invoice and billing reports.
Default Company (Multi-Company module only.) Click to assign the room to a specific
company. Click Clear ( ) to remove the assignment.
Default Cost Enter the cost to the facility or business to provide this stock. Select
the unit of measure from the list to the right of the currency amount.

Table 164. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Accounting Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Rolling Determines a period after which a resource cannot be booked, based
expiration period. For example, if Rolling Access is set to 7, any
attempt to book a resource 8 or more days from today generates a
conflict warning.
Commission % Enter the percentage of commission, from 0.001 to 99.99, that the
Account Executive will receive for a booking which uses this
resource.
Maximum Discount Enter the maximum percentage by which the price of this resource can
be reduced or discounted. The Limit Discounts option must be
selected (checked) to enforce this value.
pointing arrow.
External Costs Manager module allows the system to further track
external costs.
Generate an Automatic P.O. Select (check) to automatically generate a purchase order for this
resource.
Requires Vendor (Requires External Cost Manager module.) Select (check) to display
Notification the vendor notification flag ( ) on the calendar block and resource
browsers after a Purchase Order has been created for the resource
booking.
The system also generates a vendor notification for the booking when
the user opens a work order, selects the Work Order menu, and
clicks Send Pending Vendor Notifications.
Not Commissionable Select (check) if the resource does not generate any commission.

Table 164. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Accounting Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Sales Ledgers Enter the ledger account numbers for Sales and Costs entries for
Cost Ledgers Internal Clients and External Clients.
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Services

The Services tab lists the services which can be performed using the BandPLAN resource. Table
165 lists the available settings.
Note: The Capable Rooms tab of the Service Properties dialog also allows users to associate
available services to BandPLAN resources. Changes made to either dialog are automatically
reflected in the other dialog.
Figure 217. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Services Tab

Table 165. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Services Tab Items
Item Description
Services Available Lists the services that can be carried out in this BandPLAN
resource. Refer to the ScheduALL Users Guide for more
information on services.
Add Click to make a service available in the current BandPLAN
resource. The Select Service for Room dialog displays. Select a
service and click Select.
Release Click to remove the association with the selected service.

BandPLAN Resource Properties – Other

The Other tab contains miscellaneous resource properties. Table 166 lists the available settings.
Figure 218. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Other Tab Items

Table 166. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Other Tab Items
Item Description
Engineering Description Description for engineering department. This field can be displayed on
reports using Developers Toolkit.
Minimum Qty Sold Enter the smallest allowed quantity of the resource that can be
booked. The System Preference “Use Minimum Quantity/Quantity
Increment” determines whether the system enforces this setting.
Minimum Increment Enter minimum allowed increment value and unit of measure. The
System Preference “Use Minimum Quantity/Quantity Increment”
determines whether the system enforces this setting.
Notifications
Include in E-Mail Determines whether the system sends a notification to the specified
Notifications E-Mail Address when a user generates an e-mail report which
includes addressees linked to resources (All Resources, or the
appropriate Category, Type, or Resource).
Generate Alarms for E- Determines whether the system generates an entry in the appropriate
mail Notifications alarm table for notifications for this resource.

Table 166. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Other Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
E-Mail Address E-mail address to which e-mail notifications are sent for this resource.
Assign MCR Click the named button and select a Master Control Room to
associate with this resource.
Vendor Name Lists the vendors that supply the resource if it is rented or purchased
from an outside vendor.
Assign Vendors Click to access the Vendor browser and select one or more vendors
for this resource.
Edit Costs Click to access the Vendor Cost Maintenance dialog, and edit the
costs of renting or purchasing the resource.
Notes Editor.
Pop-Up Notes to Scheduler Select a method to trigger Notes to display for schedulers when a user
books the resource.
l None does not display notes to the scheduler. (Default.)
l Internal and External displays notes to both internal and
external schedulers.
l Internal Only displays notes to internal schedulers only.
Default Lead Time (Mins) Enter the default number of minutes to reserve for this resource before
a booking begins.
Default Bumper Time (Mins) Enter the default number of minutes to reserve for this resource after a
booking ends, and before any cleanup time.
Default Clean Up Time Enter the default number of minutes to reserve for this resource after a
(Mins) booking ends, and before any cleanup time.

BandPLAN Resource Properties – Path Management

The Path Mgmt tab contains properties related to the resource points for a transmission between the
source and destination points. Table 167 lists the available settings.
Figure 219. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Path Mgmt Tab

Table 167. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Path Mgmt Tab Settings
Item Description
Description Displays the description of the resource.
Default Transmission Role Identifies the transmission function performed by this resource. The
system assigns this role if the resource is added to a work order
directly, and not booked as part of a service or added as a source or
destination.
Satellite Footprint button (shown at left) to select an external image
file.

Table 167. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Path Mgmt Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Source button is clicked in a work order.
Allow Cascading From this Determines if additional elements can be added to the path after this
as a relay point.
Extended Trail.
information.
TX Offset Refer to Setting Transponder Offset Values.
RX Offset Refer to Setting Transponder Offset Values.

BandPLAN Resource Properties – Connector

The Connector tab displays information about published or subscribed resources used in the
Connector module. Table 168 describes the available settings. To display this dialog, refer to
Managing Resources.
Note: If the Connector license is not installed, this tab does not display.
Figure 220. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Connector Tab

Table 168. BandPLAN Resource Properties, Connector Tab Item Descriptions
Item Description
Subscribed Resource
Publisher Displays the name of the publisher (owner) of the subscribed
resource. This value displays only on the subscriber’s system.
Publisher Settings
Explicit Availability Select (check) this option to restrict the availability of the resource to
Required at Subscriber certain times that the publisher identifies by creating Available blocks
on the scheduling calendar. If a subscriber tries to book the resource
outside of an available block, they will receive a message stating that
the resource is not available.
Informational Bookings Select (check) this option to indicate that when this resource is
Required for Subscriber booked by a subscriber a read-only copy of the booking is placed on
Blocks the publisher's calendar. This informs the publisher about the booking,
but the publisher cannot edit the booking.
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Resource Questions

Refer to Category Maintenance Dialog for more information and an illustration of this tab.

BandPLAN Resource Properties – Predecessor

within a ScheduLINK work order. Refer to Room Properties – Predecessor. This tab is specific to
the ScheduLINK system.
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Successor

within a ScheduLINK work order. Refer to Room Properties – Successor. This tab is specific to the
ScheduLINK system.
BandPLAN Resource Properties – Trail

Band Plans
This section describes how to define the ways in which fixed-channel capacity channels, such as
multiple channels within a satellite transponder, are available for bookings. Band plans are a feature
of the ScheduLINK system. The general term “band plans” incorporates three actual levels of
configuration:
l Band Extensions (or “bandwidth models”) determine the overall bandwidth available. For
example, a common band extension might provide 54MHz of total bandwidth.
l Sub-Bands define the general patterns by which the bandwidth extension is divided, including
the capacity in each subdivision and its relative “location” within the overall bandwidth. For
example, a 54MHz bandwidth can be divided into sub-band patterns of 18MHz, 9MHz, and
4.5MHz each.
l Band Segments determine the specific properties of each instance of a sub-band, including
the uplink and downlink frequencies and the carrier ID. For example, if a 54MHz bandwidth is
divided equally into three 18MHz bandwidths, the first 18MHz band segment will have
different frequencies and carrier ID than the second 18MHz band segment.
Each resource that can support capacity management, known as a BandPLAN Resource, is
associated to one or more non-overlapping Band Plan definitions using a Band Catalog. Band
Catalogs define the periods (dates, days, and times) during which a Band Plan is available to a
specific resource.

Band Extensions
The Band Extension (BandExt) Properties dialog defines the band plan associated with one or more
band plan catalogs. Figure 221 describes the available settings.
Note: To book by capacity, each BandPLAN Resource must have at least one Band Catalog entry
associating the resource to at least one Band Plan that contains at least one Sub-band.
To display the Band Extension (BandExt) Properties dialog:
2. Select a Category, select a Type, and double-click an existing capacity resource. The
BandPLAN Resource Properties dialog displays. Refer to BandPLAN Resource Setup.
3. Click New BandPLAN. The Band Extension (BandExt) Catalog Properties dialog displays.
4. Enter the BandPLAN Description of the catalog, such as Standard, Weekend, or Special
Event.
5. Click Create New Bandwidth Model to create a new Band Plan (BandExt) entry and
associate it with this catalog.
Figure 221. Band Extension (BandExt) Properties Dialog

Table 169. Band Extension (BandExt) Properties Dialog Items
Item Description
Description Displays the description of the band plan.
Bandwidth Displays the total bandwidth for the current band plan. By default, this
value is the same as the Bandwidth specified for the capacity
resource, and this value should not exceed the resource capacity.

Table 169. Band Extension (BandExt) Properties Dialog Items (continued)
Item Description
Sub-Bands (browser)
(Color) Displays the color assigned to the sub-band pattern, which
corresponds to the color displayed in the segment browser and in the
sub-band’s graphical representation.
BandWidth Displays the standard bandwidth of each band in the sub-band pattern.
Step Interval between the start of one segment and the start of the next
segment. If the Step is less than the segment Bandwidth, segments
overlap. If the Step is greater than the segment Bandwidth, a “gap”
exists between each segment.
Offset Displays the amount of bandwidth between 0 (the “top” of the band)
and the start of the first segment.
Limit Displays the amount of bandwidth between the end of the last
segment and the maximum bandwidth (or “bottom” of the band).
Price Category Displays the name of the Resource Category used to assign pricing.
Refer to BandPLAN Pricing.
Price Type Displays the name of the Resource Type used to assign pricing. Refer
to BandPLAN Pricing.
Def (Default) Indicates which sub-band pattern is used as the default pattern on the
extended Scheduling calendar.
Sub-Band (buttons)
New Displays the Sub-Band dialog to create a new Sub-Band pattern.
Refer to Sub-Bands.
Add New Segment
Edit Displays the Sub-Band dialog to modify the selected Sub-Band
pattern. Refer to Sub-Bands.
Note: Editing the sub-band pattern will overwrite any custom
properties at the segment level without warning or confirmation.
Delete Removes the selected Sub-Band pattern from the band plan.
Note: The system does not request confirmation before deleting a
sub-band.
Set Color Displays the Select Color dialog to assign a color to the selected Sub-
Band pattern.
Set Default Bandwidth Sets the selected Sub-Band pattern to be the default pattern displayed
on the extended Scheduling calendar.
Pricing Category/Type Displays the Category and Type Selection dialog, and allows the
supervisor to select a resource category/type for pricing.
Band Segments (browser)
(Color) Displays the color assigned to the segment, which corresponds to the
color displayed in the sub-band browser and in the sub-band’s
graphical representation.

Item Description
Bandwidth Displays the bandwidth of the specific segment. The bandwidth value
determines the size of the segment. Together with the Start value, the
bandwidth determines the bottom of the segment.
Start Displays the value at which a segment begins. The start value
determines where in the segment is displayed within the band.
Description Displays and edits the description of the individual segment.
Carrier ID Displays and edits the Carrier ID specified for a segment.
Uplink Freq Displays and edits the Uplink Frequency specified for a segment.
Currently this is a text value for reference only.
Downlink Freq Displays and edits the Downlink Frequency specified for a segment.
Currently this is a text value for reference only.
Band Seg ID Displays the unique ID assigned to the band segment.
Band Segments (buttons)
Rolling Window Settings Displays the Select Clients dialog to set the client(s) that override the
Rolling Window period configured at the resource level.
CAUTION: Rolling Window settings previously applied to the
selected segment, either using this button or the
corresponding button on the Band Segment
(Channel) Properties dialog, are not displayed as
default values in the Select Clients dialog when
launched from this button.
On the Select Clients dialog:
l None does not override the rolling window; users cannot create
bookings outside the rolling window without special security
permissions. (Default setting.)
l All overrides and disables the rolling window; users are
allowed to create work bookings outside the rolling window
without special security permissions.
l Selected overrides and disables the rolling window for
bookings of specific clients only; users are allowed to create
bookings outside the rolling window without special security
permissions only when those bookings are assigned to the
selected clients. Users cannot create bookings with no client,
or with clients not selected in the override settings, without
special security permissions.
Click Select Clients to display the list of clients, hold the
CTRL key, and click the clients to which rolling window
settings will apply, and click Select.
Validate Verifies that any bookings or work orders in the future for the selected
band segment are compatible with the current band segment settings.
Edit Displays the Band Segment dialog to edit an individual band segment.
Refer to Band Segments.

Item Description
Delete Removes the selected band segment from the sub-band pattern.
Note: If the selected segment has been booked into work orders
and/or activities, the system will display an error message, as
shown below.
Band Segments on Day Determines the date for which available segments are displayed on
Start the Graphical Display. Segments that are deactivated as of midnight
(12:00 a.m.) on the specified date do not appear on the Graphical
Display; refer to Segment Deactivation.
(Graphic Display) Displays a graphical representation of the configured sub-band
patterns and segments, including any customized segments. Each
segment is displayed at the appropriate Offset, Step, and Limit, using
the color assigned to the appropriate Sub-Band and a relative
comparison between the total bandwidth of the resource and the
segment’s bandwidth.
Sub-Bands
The Sub-Band dialog defines the sub-band patterns which make up a band plan.
Sub-Band Properties – Main
The Main tab defines the sub-band patterns which make up a band plan. Table 170 describes the
available settings.
Note: Currently the Sub-band browser and graphic display on the Band Extension dialog list items in
the creation order. For aesthetic purposes, specify the sub-bands from largest to smallest, or
from smallest to largest, in a consistent pattern.

To display the Sub-Band dialog, display the Band Extension Properties dialog and double-click an
entry in the Sub-Bands browser, or click New to create a new Sub-Band. Refer to Band Extensions.
Figure 222. Sub-Band Dialog - Main Tab

Table 170. Sub-Band Dialog - Main Tab Items
Item Description
Description Text description of this sub-band. This description is displayed on the
Bandwidth Selector of the Scheduling Calendar to allow the user to
select (and book on) a specific sub-band even if more than one sub-
band has the same Bandwidth value.
Note: If a sub-band does not have a description, users will be unable
to create bookings on that sub-band if another sub-band has the
same bandwidth value.
Bandwidth Capacity of the individual segments. This value must be less than or
equal to the maximum Bandwidth specified for the Band Plan.
Step Interval between the start of one segment and the start of the next
segment. The Step must be greater than 0 for any segment that does
not match the full capacity of the resource.
l If Step is less than the segment Bandwidth, segments overlap.
l If Step is greater than the segment Bandwidth, a “gap” exists
between each segment.
Offset (Top) Amount of bandwidth between 0 (or the “top” of the band) and the start
of the first segment. This value is optional, and must be less than the
resource’s total Bandwidth.

Table 170. Sub-Band Dialog - Main Tab Items (continued)
Item Description
Limit (Bottom) Amount of bandwidth between the end of the last segment and the
maximum bandwidth (or the “bottom” of the band). This value is
optional, and must be less than the resource’s total Bandwidth.
Analog Select (check) to identify this sub-band and all segments in it as an
Analog channel.
Notes Enter any notes for this sub-band or its segments. Refer to Notes
Editor.
Pop-up to Schedulers Determines whether the information in the Notes field is displayed
when a scheduler creates a booking (work order or activity) for any
segment in the sub-band from the ScheduLINK for Windows
application.
l Internal and External displays pop-up notes to users who log
on to the system internally as well as external clients who log
on to the system remotely.
see pop-up notes.
l None does not display the Notes information when a booking is
created; notes are visible only in the Setup area or if
specifically added to a dialog, browser, or display view (using
the Sub-Band Notes function field), or to a BandPlan-
compatible report.

Sub-Band Properties – Default TX Parameters

The Default TX Parameters tab defines the default values when booking a segment in this sub-band.
Figure 223 describes the available settings. To display the Sub-Band dialog, display the Band
Extension Properties dialog and double-click an entry in the Sub-Bands browser, or click New to
create a new Sub-Band. Refer to Band Extensions.
Figure 223. Sub-Band Dialog, Default TX Parameters

Table 171. Sub-Band Dialog, Default TX Parameters Items
Item Description
Data Rate Determines the speed at which data is transferred by digital
Modulation Determines the modulation scheme used in digital transmissions on
this path. Enter a value only if the value is fixed.
Modulation Standard Determines the property used by the satellite and other transmission
hardware to modulate the
MPEG Displays the Moving Picture Experts Group (MPEG) audio and video
compression and transmission layer (if any) associated with the
transmission.
Packet Size Determines the amount of data being transmitted.
Video Bit Rate Determines the speed at which video data is transferred.
Audio 1 Bit Rate Determines the speed at which audio data is transferred on the first
channel.
Audio 2 Bit Rate Determines the speed at which audio data is transferred on the second
channel.
Low Power Determines the power setting at which a satellite transmission is
initiated.

Band Segments
The Band Segment (Channel) Properties dialog allows the administrator to specify and customize
individual band segments. To display the Band Segment dialog, display the Band Extension
Properties dialog and double-click an entry in the Band Segment browser. Refer to Band
Extensions.
Band Segment (Channel) Properties – Main Page

The Main page allows the administrator to specify and customize individual band segments. Table
172 describes the available settings.
Figure 224. Band Segment (Channel) Properties Dialog - Main Page

Table 172. Band Segment (Channel) Properties Dialog - Main Page Settings
Setting Description
Description Text description of the individual segment.
Carrier ID Carrier identifier of the band segment. This field is a text label only,
and is not used for conflict checking.
Uplink Frequency Frequency of the segment when used as an uplink. This field is a text
label only, and is not used for conflict checking.
Downlink Frequency Frequency of the segment when used as an downlink. This field is a
text label only, and is not used for conflict checking.

Table 172. Band Segment (Channel) Properties Dialog - Main Page Settings (continued)
Setting Description
Bandwidth The bandwidth capacity of a specific segment. By default, this value
is equal to the Bandwidth set in the Sub-Band definition. Changing this
value modifies the segment browser and sub-band display. On the
calendar display, the sub-band appears as a separate bandwidth
selection.
For example, in a pattern of 9MHz bands, changing a single segment
to 4.5MHz results in a separate 4.5MHz option on the band selector
list of the extended Scheduling calendar.
Bandwidth Start Distance from the “top” of the main bandwidth, at which the segment
begins.
Billing Bandwidth Optional information displayed as billing information.
Analog Segment Flag to indicate if the segment is an analog segment (selected) or
digital segment (deselected).
Frequencies
Ch. 1 Uplink (Optional) Uplink and downlink frequencies for the first
Ch. 1 Downlink communications channel within the segment.
Ch. 2 Uplink (Optional) Uplink and downlink frequencies for the second
Ch. 2 Downlink communications channel within the segment.
Additional Resources to Displays resources that will be automatically added to a work order
Book when the current segment is added to the work order.
Category Displays the resource Category under which the additional resource
will be booked.
Type Displays the resource Type under which the additional resource will be
booked.
Resource Displays the resource description of the additional resource.
TX Role Displays the transmit role (if any) of the additional resource when
added to a work order.
Add Click to add a resource to the Additional Resources to Book list.
Edit Click to modify the settings of an existing additional resource.
Remove Click to remove a resource from the list of additional resources.
Rolling Window Settings Click to define a period relative to the current date during which
bookings can be created.
Days Enter the number of days into the future during which bookings can be
created for the band segment.

Table 172. Band Segment (Channel) Properties Dialog - Main Page Settings (continued)
Setting Description
Active Displays the type of rolling window settings that are active for this
band segment:
l None - no segment-level overrides are applied; Rolling Window
settings from the BandPlan Resource level (if any) are enforced.
l All Clients - Segment-level overrides are applied for all clients;
Rolling Window settings from the BandPlan Resource level (if
any) are ignored for this segment.
l Client Specific - Segment-level overrides are applied for one or
more clients; Rolling Window settings from the BandPlan
Resource level (if any) are ignored for this segment when a user is
associated to one of the selected clients.
Segment Deactivation
Start Date/Time Displays the date and time on which a deactivation period begins.
End Displays the date and time on which a deactivation period ends.
Add Click to add a new deactivation period.
Edit Click to edit an existing deactivation period.
Delete Click to remove an existing deactivation period; the segment will be
considered available during that period.
Deactivate Click to deactivate the current segment starting from now, with no end
date.
Band Segment (Channel) Properties – Notes Page

The Notes page allows you to enter additional information about the band segment.
Figure 225. Band Segment Properties Dialog – Notes Page

Table 173. Band Segment Properties dialog – Notes Page Settings
Setting Description
Note 1 Optional information associated with the band segment. Click the
filled square to display the ScheduALL Editor window to compose,
import, or export text. Refer to Notes Editor.
Pop-up Note 1 to Scheduler This list box allows the administrator to determine what types of users
can view Note 1 information:
l None does not display notes as a pop-up when the resource is
booked.
l Internal Only displays notes as a pop-up when the resource is
booked by an in-house client.
l Internal and External displays notes as a pop-up when the
resource is booked by any client, in-house or external.
Note 2 Optional information associated with the band segment. Click the
filled square to display the ScheduALL Editor window to compose,
import, or export text. Refer to Notes Editor.
BandPLAN Pricing
Billing rates for non-BandPLAN resources are generally determined for the entire resource; price
points are set for a particular rate card and a particular resource (or resource type or category), and the
full price is determined by what resource is booked and how (i.e. in what category/type).
By comparison, billing rates for a BandPLAN resource needs to be determined by the bandwidth used
for a particular booking, instead of by the category, type, or resource booked. As a result, the
information used for billing must be configured separately from the resource information used for
booking. This is accomplished by creating special Resource Category and Type entries, defining the
billing rates for the Category/Type, and assigning a Billing Category/Type to each Sub-band of the
appropriate size.
Defining Billing Rates for BandPLAN Resources
To define the billing rates for BandPLAN resources:
3. Click New at the bottom of the Category column. The Category Maintenance dialog displays.

4. Enter the Category name, such as Sat - Ku-band Pricing, and click OK. Having one
category for each band range keeps the pricing structure organized, and adding “Pricing” to the
name of the category differentiates between the Category/Types used for booking and those
used for billing.
Figure 226. Category Maintenance Dialog

5. Click New at the bottom of the Type column. The Create a New Resource Type dialog
displays.
6. Select the Category with which the new type will be associated, enter the Description for the
new type, such as 18MHz, and click OK.
7. Double-click the new Type entry. The Resource Type Setup dialog displays.
8. Click Type Level Billing Rates to set billing rates for the appropriate band type and
bandwidth (in this case, Ku-band at 18MHz). The Price Maintenance dialog displays.
Figure 227. Resource Type Setup Dialog and Price Maintenance Dialog

10. In the Description column, click a rate card name, and click Add to create a new pricing entry
for that rate card.
11. Specify the pricing information, including the Unit of Measure, Unit Price/Markup %.

12. Add pricing to each rate card as necessary until pricing entries are defined for all rate cards.
14. Click New at the bottom of the Type column to define a new bandwidth value and repeat the
process above. For example, define Type entries for 9 MHz, 27 MHz, 36 MHz, and 54 MHz,
with pricing for each entry.
Assigning Billing Entries to BandPLAN Sub-Bands
To assign billing entries to BandPLAN Sub-Bands:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click BandPlan Setup. The BandPlan Maintenance
dialog displays.
2. Double-click a BandPLAN entry, OR
Select a BandPLAN entry and click Edit.
The Bandwidth Extension (BandExt) Properties dialog displays.
3. In the Sub-Bands browser, select the entry for a particular bandwidth (such as 18.000) and
click Pricing Category/Type. The Category & Type Selection dialog displays.
Figure 228. Band Extension (BandExt) Properties

4. In the top right corner, optionally select the Resource Group to which the pricing Category and
Type entries belong.
5. Select the Category used for billing (such as Sat - Ku-band Pricing), select the Type that
matches the appropriate bandwidth (such as 18 MHz), and click OK.
6. Repeat as necessary for each entry in the Sub-Bands browser.

7. Click OK to save the Band Extension properties.

8. Repeat as necessary for each entry in the BandPlan Maintenance dialog.
BandPLAN Vendor Assignments

External costs for non-BandPLAN resources are generally determined for the entire resource;
vendors and costs are set for a particular rate card and a particular resource (or resource type or
category), and the full cost is determined by what resource is booked and how.
By comparison, external cost information for a BandPLAN resource needs to be determined by the
bandwidth used for a particular booking, instead of by the category, type, or resource booked. As a
result, the information used for external costs must be configured separately from the resource
information used for booking. This is accomplished by adding external cost information to the
Resource Type information used to determine BandPLAN pricing. (The process of adding these
Resource Types is described in BandPLAN Pricing.)
Note: Vendor costs defined at the Type level apply to BandPLAN resources ONLY.
Configuring Vendor and External Cost Information for BandPLAN Entries

3. In the Category column, select the Category used for billing, such as Sat - Ku-band Pricing.
4. In the Type column, double-click the Type entry used to determine pricing for a particular
bandwidth, such as 18 MHz. The Resource Type Setup dialog displays.
5. Click Assign Vendor. The Select Vendors dialog displays.
6. Hold the Ctrl key and click each vendor entry that provides the specified bandwidths on one or
more BandPLAN resources, and click Select. The selected vendors are added to the Vendor
list.
Figure 229. Resource Type Setup and Select Vendors Dialogs

7. Click Edit Costs. The Vendor Cost Maintenance dialog displays.
Figure 230. Vendor Cost Maintenance Dialog

8. Select the Default Unit of Measure.
9. Select a vendor and click Add to create a cost entry for that vendor. In Figure 230 a new entry
has been added for Bob’s Diner. Specify the appropriate cost information (Unit of Measure,
Unit Cost, etc.).
10. Repeat as necessary until each vendor has the appropriate cost information.
11. Click OK.
BandPLAN Resource Settings

In the BandPLAN resource’s setup properties:
l The External Cost setting must be selected (checked) to select a vendor and generate
external costs. Refer to External Cost.
l The resource should have at least one (1) Vendor assigned to the resource to trigger the
vendor associations at the Type level. Refer to Assign Vendors.
l The vendor costs must not be assigned at the resource setup level. (Vendor costs at the
resource level will take precedence, and bandwidth will be ignored.)
External Resource Bookings

When the user creates a payable for a BandPLAN booking of an external resource:
l If the properties in Resource Setup identify one (and only one) vendor, the system
automatically selects that vendor without prompting the user, and displays the Payables
dialog. The system automatically calculates the Estimated Cost using the selected vendor
and the costs configured at the Type level used for billing the appropriate bandwidth.
l If the properties in Resource Setup identify more than one vendor, the system asks the user if
she wants to select a Vendor, and displays the Select Vendor dialog. The Assigned Vendor
tab displays only the vendors associated to the resource, and the General Vendors tab
displays all vendors to which the user has access. If the user selects a vendor, the system
displays the Payables dialog. The system automatically calculates the Estimated Cost using
the selected vendor and the costs configured at the Type level used for billing the appropriate
bandwidth.
l If the properties in Resource Setup do not identify any vendors for the resource, the system
asks the user if she wants to select a Vendor, and displays the Select Vendor dialog with a
blank Assigned Vendor tab. The user must pick a vendor from the General Vendors tab, and
manually specify the Estimated Cost; no cost information is brought in from the Type level.

Operations Manager Setup

The Operations Manager interface is displayed by clicking ScheduLINK from the File menu, and then
clicking Operations Manager.
In addition to customizing the trigger types and periods, the Ops Manager interfaces allow each
operations center to tailor the display properties and information content to suit specific needs or
preferences.
l User Preferences determine the background color of the Ops Manager and Ops Manager (WO)
dialogs. Refer to Operations Manager Background Color
l System Preferences determine the background color of the New Event button, and text and
background colors for the Details Window. Refer to System Preferences: System Colors.
l System Preferences and User Preferences determine the font settings of the Ops Manager
and Ops Manager (WO) dialogs, as well as the New Event button and Details window. Refer
to System Preferences: System Fonts and User Preferences: Override System Fonts.
l Create a Desktop for each dialog to save pane settings, such as the Action and Events Pane
sizes, font settings, row height, color scheme, Resource Group selection, and Rules settings.
Restore the settings by using the Desktop to open the appropriate Operations Manager
interface. Refer to the ScheduALL Users Guide for more information.
Configuring Browser Columns

The Developers Toolkit (DTK) allows the supervisor to add, modify, reorder, or remove columns from
the Action and Events browser windows. For example, add the Resource Category and Resource
Type columns to display the Category and Type to which a resource belongs.
At the end of a session in which columns were added, moved, or modified, the system generates a
Browser Form Modified confirmation message when the user closes the Ops Manager. Click Yes to
save all changes, or click No to abandon all changes made during the session.
Add or Modify a Column

To add a new column to the Action or Events browsers, or modify an existing column:
1. Right-click the title of an existing column.
l Click Insert New Column to add a column before the first (left-most) column.
l Click Append New Column to add a column after the last (right-most) column.
l Click Column Properties to modify the selected column.
The Column Properties dialog displays.

Figure 231. Column Properties Dialog

2. Select the Source table, table extension (TE:), or table reference (TR:) from the drop-down list
box.
3. Select the source type:
l Select Fields to retrieve data from the selected field of the specified table. For example, in
the Resource Bookings (Events) table, “Capacity Used” contains numeric data.
l Select Functions to retrieve the result of a predefined action, such as calculations, counts,
or other formulas. For example, in the Resource Bookings (Events) table, “Start Time (At
Client Region)” calculates the start time according to the client’s time zone.
l Select References to retrieve information from a field in a related or linked table. For
example, in the Resource Bookings (Events) table, “Resource Category” retrieves
information stored in the Resource table.
4. Select the appropriate field, function, or reference from the drop-down list. The system
populates the Title, data type, Field Length, Decimal Length, and Justified fields with default
values.
Table 174. Sample Columns
Source Type Field Data Type

Resource Bookings (Events) Reference Resource Category String
Resource Bookings (Events) Functions Client Color Color
Resource Bookings (Events) Functions Details Window Checkboxa
TR: Booking Resource Field Resource Color Color
5. Modify the Title field to change the text displayed in the column heading row.
6. Select Left Justified to align column text to the left side of the column, or select Right
Justified to align column text to the right side of the column.
Refer to the ScheduALL Users Guide for more information on the Column Properties dialog.
a For the Details Window control, click the Advanced tab and select (check) Editable.

Moving a Column
To move or reorder an existing column, right-click the column title and then click Move Column. The
mouse pointer changes to a column move mode. Click a column. The system moves the original
column to the left of the selected column.
Removing a Column
To remove an existing column from the display, right-click the column title and click Delete Column.
The system removes the column without requesting confirmation.
Restoring the Factory Defaults

To reset a browser element to the last saved configuration and remove recent changes, right-click the
column title of any column in the browser and click Reset to Factory Defaults.
Resize Row Height

Row heights in Operations Manager and Operations Manager (WO) browsers are independent from
other browsers in ScheduALL. Operations Manager has its own font settings. These font settings are
Operations Manager and Operations Manager Details. Refer to System Preferences: System Fonts
for information on changing these settings.
Note: Row heights may vary between Room and Abstract resources.
To change the height of data rows in the Action and Events panes:
1. Display more than one item in either the Action pane or the Events pane.
2. Hold the Shift key on the keyboard, and use the mouse to drag the horizontal divider between
two rows up to make rows smaller, or down to make rows larger. All rows resize to the
selected row height.
Figure 232. Resize Row Height

3. From the Desktops menu, click Create a New Desktop or Save to Selected Desktop to
assign the new settings to a desktop.
CAUTION: Row height settings must be saved to a desktop. Since Operations Manager
relies on a desktop to save and apply settings such as row heights, rules tab,
status filters, and resource groups, it should always be launched from a desktop.
Refer to the ScheduALL Users Guide for more information about Desktops.
Fly-Over Text
The Developers Toolkit (DTK) allows the supervisor to define fly-over text for each field in the Ops
Manager, based on the field’s column. Fly-overs greatly increase the amount of information that is
displayed from one screen without adding new columns. For example, fly-overs can display the
contact telephone number of a client as a fly-over for the Client field. Fly-overs can also display a
complete view of the field text if the column is not wide enough to see all of the available text. Refer to
Display View and Flyover Display View.

Events Pane Multi Sort

The Column Sort dialog allows the user to sort the Events Pane using multiple columns in a user-
defined order of priority. To display this dialog, click Multi in the Operations Manager interface. Refer
to Operations Manager Setup.
Figure 233. Operations Manager, Column Sort dialog

Note: By default, the first item in the Column Sort dialog has no Column description. This item
corresponds to the “Stoplights” column.
To specify a custom sort order:
1. Click the Order field to the left of the highest priority Column. The dialog displays the number
“1” in the Order column to indicate that it is the first priority.
2. Click the Order field to the left of the next-highest priority Column. The dialog displays the
next available number in the Order column to indicate the appropriate order in the priority list.
Repeat as necessary to specify additional sort criteria.
3. Click the Asc/Desc field for a Column entry to specify the sort method used to display events.
The column displays “ASC” for Ascending (lowest value to highest value), or “DESC” for
Descending (highest value to lowest value).
4. To reset the order and remove all sort methods, click Clear Order.
5. Click OK to save all changes and sort the Events Pane using the new settings.
Predefined Circuit and Circuit Group Setup

The ScheduLINK system allows a supervisor or authorized user to configure predefined circuits to
identify specific source-to-destination connections. Refer to Predefined Circuit Setup and Circuit
Group Setup.
Satellite Transmission Parameters Setup

Refer to Edit Transmission Parameters in the Work Order and Activities chapter of the ScheduLINK
Users Guide.

Master Control Room Setup

The Master Control Room (MCR) Setup area allows the supervisor to define the operations centers or
control rooms that manage circuit- and transmission-related resources.
To add MCR entries to the ScheduLINK system:
1. Log on to the ScheduLINK system as a supervisor or with permission to access Operations
Manager.
2. From the File menu, select Setup and click MCR Setup. The MCR Setup dialog displays.
Figure 234. MCR Setup Dialog, MCR List

3. To create a new MCR, click New, OR
To edit an existing MCR, select the entry and click Edit.
4. The MCR Setup dialog displays. Enter or edit the Description of the MCR, and click OK.
Figure 235. MCR Setup Dialog, New Entry

To delete an existing MCR, select the entry and click Delete. MCR entries that are associated to
users or resources cannot be deleted.

Ch. 4 Module Specific
Setup
This chapter describes the setup procedures necessary for some of the ScheduALL modules.
In This Chapter

Media Manager 605
Barcode Scanner 622
Multi-Company 627
External Cost Manager 654
Shipping 668
Trouble Tickets 673
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Ch. 4 Module Specific Setup
Production Workflow Manager

This section describes setup procedures for using the Production Workflow Manager module.

The Production Workflow Manager dialog uses existing user logins and security profiles, but some
additional administration is necessary. Link the login account to a Producer entry to automatically
display the appropriate projects for a user login. Refer to Producers, Account Executives, and
Directors and Adding ScheduALL Users.
System Preferences
The following system preferences apply specifically to the Production Workflow Manager module:
l Master Project Status.
l Project/Master Project Approval StatusProject/Master Project Approval Status.
User Preferences
The following user preferences apply specifically to the Production Workflow Manager module:
l Display only Projects With Self as Project Supervisor.
Master Project Form Setup

Master Project forms provide additional customization by allowing the system to maintain up to six
separate Master Project dialog formats (the standard default form, and one to five custom forms).
Note: Modifying a Master Project Form requires the appropriate permissions and licensing for
Developers Toolkit.
To create custom Master Project forms:
1. Log on to the system as a supervisor.
2. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, and select System Preferences, and click
3. Click the General tab to bring that page forward.
4. Scroll down to the Master Project Forms section.
5. Click the input field to the right of Form 1, and enter a form title for the first custom form.
6. Click the input field to the right of each additional form field, and enter form titles as necessary.
For example, enter “TVSeries” in Form 1 and “TVCommercial” in Form 2.
0The system always displays Form titles in the form order (Default, Form 1, Form 2, etc.). To display
custom forms in alphabetical order, for example, enter the titles for Form 1 through Form 5 in
alphabetical order. If a form is given a title, but the form itself is not modified, the default form is
displayed if the user selects that form. For example, if Form 3 is given the title “Backlot Filming”, but
the form is not edited in Developers Toolkit, when a user selects that form the default form is
displayed.
8. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, select Developers Toolkit, and click
Dialog Editor.
9. Select Master Project Setup from the list of dialogs.

10. From the Form list, select the appropriate form.

11. Click Edit. The Master Project Setup dialog displays in BUILD MODE. Refer to Customizing
a Dialog for information about adding display elements and controls to a dialog.
Media Manager
This section describes setup procedures for using the Media Manager module.
Asset Media Manager Setup Sequence

It is recommended that the Asset Media Manager be set up in the following manner to facilitate the
association of dependent items. For example, categories are associated with classifications, so
creating categories first will make the them available when creating classifications.
Create media assets in the following order:
1. Stock Resources - Media Stock Resources are raw, unused stock items that are needed to
create new media assets, such as 60-minute VHS tape, etc. For more information, refer to
Rooms and Resources and Stock Resource Setup.
2. Media Formats - Media formats contain descriptions of media asset types, such as DVD-
RW, VHS, BetaCam, etc.
3. Media Categories - Categories are designations of media assets that have a common
purpose.
4. Media Classifications - This is the highest level identifier for media assets. Examples of
classifications are Bin, Cart, House Reel, and Box.
System Preferences
The following system preferences are used to set how the Media Manager system is displayed and
how it functions:
Library Navigation and Traffic Mode

This system preference is used to select the Media Manager or Library interface.
Enforce Library Classification

This system preference determines whether the Select Library Classification dialog is displayed each
time the user adds a new media asset.
To change the preference:
1. Log into ScheduALL for Windows as a supervisor.
2. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click System Preferences.
3. Click the System Options tab and locate the Enforce Library Classification preference.
4. Click the option and select Yes to display the dialog when adding media assets or No to not
display the dialog.

Enforce ‘In Care Of’ Assignment for Library Location Scan

This system preference determines whether the Primary Location (In Care of) information on the
Location Scan for Assets dialog must be entered when performing an asset scan.
3. Click the System Options tab and locate the Enforce ‘In Care Of’ Assignment for Library
Location Scan preference.
4. Click the option and select Yes to display the dialog when adding media assets or No to not
display the dialog. When set to Yes, information in at least one of the four fields in the Primary
Location (In Care of) section must be entered.
Figure 236. Location Scan for Assets, Primary Location (In Care of) section
Initial Record Count to Load in Library Query

This system preference determines the number of records returned when a query is run. 100 is the
default.
3. Click the System Options tab and locate the Initial Record Count to load in Library
Query preference.
4. Click the option and enter the number required.
Open Library Result Records in View Mode

This system preference determines if the initial library record displayed from a query is displayed in
View Mode. This allows the user to view the record while other users can still edit the record.
3. Click the System Options tab and locate the Open Library Result Records in View Mode
preference.
4. Click the option and select Yes to display the query result in View Mode or No to display the
result in Edit Mode.
Note: This preference only affects library records displayed by double-clicking the record in the query
results area or selecting a record and clicking Go to. Subsequent records displayed by using
the navigation buttons are displayed in View mode.


The Media Manager System uses existing user logins and security profiles, but some additional
administration is necessary. Security settings specific to the Media Manager System are described in
Security Settings, Library .
Modifying Library Label Freehand Defaults

Library Label Freehand information allows the user to add notes to label-based reports using
predefined templates. Change the contents of the freehand notes by adding or deleting fields from the
freehand notes. (Access to Library Label Freehand Defaults is controlled by user permissions. Refer
to Can Add/Edit/Delete Display Views?.)
To modify the defaults:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Library Label Freehand Defaults. The Library
Freehand Maintenance dialog displays.
Figure 237. Library Freehand Maintenance and Properties Dialogs

2. Select one of the freehand notes and click Edit. The Library Freehand Properties dialog
displays.
3. Click Add to insert a new field, or select a field and click Edit to modify an existing field. The
Library Freehand dialog displays. Select a library entry field from the list and click OK to apply
the field.
4. Select a field and click Delete to remove the field from the freehand note.

Defining Library Media Formats

The Library Media Format Setup allows a user to define properties of physical media, such as
magnetic tapes or optical media. (Access to the Library Media Format setup is controlled by security
profiles; refer to Can Maintain Media Formats List?.)
To define a media format:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Library Media Formats. The Media Format
2. Click New to create a media format, or select an existing format and click Edit. The Media
Format Setup dialog displays.
Figure 238. Media Format Setup Dialog

3. Enter the Media Type/Format name or description.
4. Enter the number of Audio Channels (1-12).
5. Enter the Maximum Recycle Count to specify the maximum number of times the item can be
recycled before it should be discarded. Recycle count is an experimentally determined number
based on the trade-off between recording quality and tape cost. The Library tracks the number
of times an item has been recycled, and generates a warning when an item exceeds the
maximum recycle count.
6. Enter the Next Library # to specify a format-specific counter for the Tape Number. This
counter overrides the master Library counter and the Category-specific counter.
7. Click Set Default Label Template to select a label template for the format. This label format
is selected (highlighted) automatically in the Library Labels dialog when printing labels.
8. Click Set Secondary Label Template to select an alternate label template for the format.

9. To assign multiple format lengths or sizes for a format (such as 30 and 60-minute video tapes),
click Create in the Available Media Format Lengths/Sizes area. The Media Length dialog
displays.
Figure 239. Media Length Dialog

10. Enter a label for the format length in the Description field.
11. Enter the Media Format Size and Unit of Measure settings for the format. For example, for a
30 minute video tape, enter 30 in the Length field and minute in the Unit field.
12. Click OK. The new format is displayed in the Length/Size and Unit list in the Media Format
Maintenance dialog.
13. To change a format length or size entry, select it in the Length/Size and Unit list and click Edit.
Change the settings as needed and click OK.
14. To remove a format length or size entry, select it in the Length/Size and Unit list and click
Delete. Click Yes to confirm.
Defining Library Media Categories

The Library Category dialog allows a user to define unique categories to which library entries are
assigned. (Access to the Library Category setup is controlled by security profiles; refer to Can
Maintain Categories?.)

Library Categories - Main

To define a library category:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Library Categories. The Library Category
Figure 240. Library Category Maintenance Dialog

2. Click New to create a category, or select an existing category and click Edit. The Library
Category Form dialog displays.
Figure 241. Library Category Form Dialog, Main Tab

3. Enter the Category name or description.
4. Select (check) Use a Separate Counter to assign Tape Numbers based only on a category-
specific counter, independent of other categories. For example, use category-based counters
to number all Master tapes starting with 100000, and number all Raw Footage tapes starting
with 300000 to make it easier to identify the tape type by the number.

5. The Last Library # field identifies the highest number assigned to a tape of this category. The
next item in this category will be assigned the next number
6. Select a Stock Type from the list.
l None identifies a non-stock category.
l Raw identifies a blank or unused tape, film, etc.
l Coded identifies bar-coded items.
l Recycled identifies the item as used but can be re-used for new content.
l Client Stock identifies stock provided by the client.
7. Click Copy User Labels from Another Category and select a different category to import
custom labels. If more than one category uses the same custom field, it is recommended to
configure those fields consistently across all appropriate categories. This allows a user to use
the Query dialog to search one common user field. For example, if Director is defined for most
categories, configure it as Label 1 for all appropriate categories.
8. Enter Labels 1 through Label 20 to customize the label text which displays on the Library
entry dialog. Refer to Library Categories - User Fields for information on where these fields
are displayed in Library entry dialogs. The dialog only displays user fields if the category has a
label specified; if a Label field is left blank, the field does not display.
9. User Field (#) text must be deleted if the field is not to be displayed on the Library entry dialog.
Library Categories - User Fields
The User Fields 21-30 tab are used to customize the label text which displays next to the appropriate
user field on the Library entry dialogs. The dialog only displays user fields if the category has a label
specified; if a Label field is left blank, the field does not display.
Note: The User Field (#) text must be deleted if the field is not to be displayed on the Library entry
dialog.
Library Categories - Classifications
The Classifications tab is used to define the classifications to which the current category is assigned.
Figure 242. Library Category Form Dialog, Classifications Tab
To assign a classification:

1. Click Assign. The Select Classifications for (Category) dialog displays.

2. Select the classifications to assign and click Select.
3. To remove a classification, select it and click Release.
Library Categories - Formats Tab
The Formats tab allows the user to identify the media formats that are available to a category.
Available formats are defined using Media Format Setup.
Figure 243. Library Category Form Dialog, Formats Tab

To assign media formats:
1. Click Assign. The Select Media Format dialog displays.
2. Select the formats to assign and click Select. A Format must have at least one Size
associated with it before it can be assigned to a Category. Refer to Defining Library Media
Formats for more information.
3. To remove a format, select it and click Release.
4. When a format is assigned, all related Format Sizes for the format are listed. By default, they
are not flagged as Available. To include format sizes, select them in the list and click Include
selected. A check mark is displayed in the Avail column for the selected sizes. To exclude
format sizes, select them in the list and click Exclude selected. The check mark is removed
from the Avail column.
5. To assign a stock resource to the format, click Assign Stock Resource. The Select Stock
Resource dialog displays. Select a resource and click Select. To remove stock resources
from the list, select them and click Release Stock Resource.
6. To assign the quantity of the stock resource that has been ordered (but not yet in-house), click
Assign Qty on Order. This value is displayed in the Available column,

Media Classification
The Classification dialog allows a user to define unique classifications to which library entries are
assigned. (Access to the Media Classification setup is controlled by security profiles. Refer to
Security Settings, Library .
To define a media classification:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Library Classifications. The Classification
2. Click New to create a classification, or select an existing category and click Edit. The Media
Classification Properties dialog displays.
Figure 244. Media Classification Properties Dialog

3. Enter the Classification name.
4. Select a type from the Container Type list. Refer to Container Type Hierarchy.
l Bin - Media storage containers
l Cart - Mobile media storage or transport containers
l House Reel - A compilation of master spots or cuts for dubbing purposes. These may
include spots from different clients. Items with this classification cannot be batch scanned.
l None - The asset is not a container.
5. To assign categories to the classification, click Assign and select one or more categories, OR
to release assigned categories, select them in the Category Description list and click
Release.
6. Click OK.
Container Type Hierarchy
The following hierarchy applies to container types:
l A Cart can contain a Bin, and a Bin can contain a Tape.
l A Cart can contain a Tape that is not in a Bin.
l A Bin (not associated with a Cart) can contain a Tape.
l A Bin cannot contain a Cart.

Library Storage Locations

The Locations Setup dialog allows a user to create locations from which library entries are sent or to
which library entries are sent. This includes information such as location name, code, level, address,
etc. This dialog is also used by other modules such as the Rental module.
To add or modify a location:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Location Setup. The Location Setup dialog
displays.
2. Click New to create a new entry, or select a list item and click Edit to modify an existing entry.
The Locations Setup dialog displays.
Figure 245. Locations Setup Dialog

This dialog is used in conjunction with the Media Manager module to identify locations used for library
items and to identify locations that can be used for check out when using the Location Scan feature.
For additional information, refer to Locations Setup.
Library Location Hierarchy

The Location Hierarchy feature of the Library System allows a user to define a simplified multi-tiered
structure of locations to which library entries are assigned. Each location in the Tiered Location
structure is optionally assigned a parent location. By default, the Library Entry dialog displays the
assigned location, preceded by the “parent” and “grandparent” location.
Note: The list and structure of Tiered Locations is separate from the list of Library Storage
Locations and list and structure of Locations Setup.

To add or modify a Location Hierarchy:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Library Location Hierarchy. The Library
Location Hierarchy dialog displays.
2. Click New to create a new entry, or select a list item and click Edit to modify an existing entry.
The Library Location dialog displays.
Figure 246. Library Location Dialog

3. Enter a Description to identify the location in lists and browsers.
4. Enter a Bar Code to allow a user to assign the location to a library asset using a bar code scan
operation.
5. Click Parent Location to associate the current location with another location at a higher tier.
Updating the Media Manager Interface

This section details changes to the Media Manager dialogs for specific purposes.
Adding Open Container Child Controls
In the Library Entry dialog, when viewing the contents of a container, the new Open Container Child
command allows a user to open an item in that container for editing.
To add the controls required for this feature, log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with
permissions to the DTK module, and modify the Library Entry (Modern) dialog by adding the following
controls:
Control Type Control Details Notes

Picture Button Caption: Edit Child Recommended location: On
Control Command: Open Container Child the Container Contents tab, near
the Child Assets for this Library
Asset browser.
Adding the Location Scan Archival Menu Item

The Location Scan Archival command allows a user with the appropriate permissions to move old
location scan records from the Location Scan table to the Location Scan History table. In facilities
that have a high number of location scans, this helps preserve performance when selecting resources
and media assets.
l The Can Purge/Archive Location Scans security option determines whether the menu
command is visible to a user.
l In the Location Scan Query window, select (check) the Query Location Scan Archive
checkbox to return scan records for both Location Scan and Location Scan History table, or
deselect (clear) the setting to return only records from the Location Scan table.

To add this option to the File menu, log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with
permissions to the Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the specified menu by adding the
following command.
Toolbar / Menu Command Notes

Main Menu 1 Location Scan Archival Recommended location: Under the Supervisor
Options or File Operations submenu.
Adding the Revision Number

The Revision Number field in the Library (LIBRARY) table now allows a user to identify the revision
number of a given media asset.
permissions to the Adaptive Framework (DTK) module, and modify the specified forms by adding the
following controls:
Library Entry (Modern) Edit Control Source: Library Recommended location:
Type: Fields On the Main tab, near the
Field: Revision Number Version field.
Updating the Audio Tab

A new browser can be added to the Audio tab of the Library Entry (Modern) dialog to display and
manage audio channels. If you are currently using the existing Audio 1-12 fields on that tab it is
suggested that you create a new tab for audio channels. If you are not using the Audio 1-12 fields you
may remove them from the Audio tab and replace them with the new content.
Browser Selection: Audio Recommended location:
Channels Audio tab or add new tab.
Recommended columns:
Source: Library Audio
Type: Fields
Fields: Channel Number, Description, Format, Version, Language, User
Fields (as needed)
Picture Button Caption: Add Audio Channel
Command: Add Audio Channel
Picture Button Caption: Add Audio Channel (Simple)
Command: Add Audio Channel (Simple)
Picture Button Caption: Edit Audio Channel

Command: Edit Audio Channel
Picture Button Caption: Delete Audio Channel
Command: Delete Audio Channel

Creating a Library Audio Form

The Library Audio dialog can now be updated allowing you to add or edit entries in the LIB_AUDIO
table. The license for the Library system is required. Log into the Core application as SUPERVISOR
or a user who has rights to edit Library entries. Configure the dialog as suggested below.

Read-only Edit Control Source: TR: Library Entry Add Static Controls for labels
Type: Fields as necessary.
Field: Library Entry Id

Edit Control Source: Library Audio l Numeric, Field Length: 7
Type: Fields l Decimal Length: 0
Field: Channel Number
Edit Control Source: Library Audio l Multi-Line: Checked
Type: Fields l Scrollers: Checked
Field: Description
Add any other fields from the LIB_AUDIO table or the Table Reference to the LIBRARY table.
Updating the Library Metadata Dialog

The factory Library Metadata dialog is a simplified version of the Library Entry (Modern) form, and
contains some of the fields needed by default. This dialog is used to edit the booking-specific
template information, and should contain controls for all of the properties expected to be set or
customized at the booking level. This includes information in the Library Entry (LIBRARY) and Library
Audio (LIB_AUDIO) tables. Users should add the controls listed in this topic to the existing controls.
To add the controls required for these features, log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or
with permissions to the Adaptive Framework (DTK) module, and modify the Library Metadata dialog
by adding the following controls:
Control Type Details Notes
Browser Audio Channels
Column Source: Library Audio
Fields
Channel Number
Title: CH #
Column Source: Library Audio
Fields
Description
Title: Description
Column Other Library Audio columns as necessary e.g.
Format, Audio Bit Rate, Configuration,
Language, etc.
Button Caption: Create Channel
Command: Add Audio Channel


Button Caption: (none) Make a small button to the
Button Text Style: Icon Only side of the “Create
Channel” button.
Icon: Dialog Editor
Command: Add Audio Channel (Simple)
Button Caption: Edit Channel
Command: Edit Audio Channel
Button Caption: (none)
Button Text Style: Icon Only
Icon: Cancel Work Order
Command: Delete Audio Channel
An example of how this dialog can be formatted is displayed below.
Figure 247. Library Metadata Dialog Example

Updating Dialogs for Library Template Association

with permissions to the Adaptive Framework (DTK) module, and modify the Service Setup dialog
and, if desired, the General Resource Setup dialog, by adding the following controls:

Button Caption: Library Template
Command: Associate to Library Template
Read Only Edit Source: TR:Library Template
Field: Title
Eraser Control Source: Resource Base
Type: Fields
Field: Library Template ID
An example of how these controls can be added is displayed below.
Figure 248. Service Properties, Associate to Library Template Control Example

Updating Work Order Dialogs for Templates

These changes can be made to normal Work Order dialogs, such as Work Order Form (Standard) or
Work Order Form (Extended). It is recommended to make a new tabbed page specifically to work
with these items. Suggested tab name is Asset Templates.
Control
Details Notes / Information
Type
Browser Resources Assigned to this Work Order Add to top half of new “Asset Templates”
tab.
Column Source: Resource Bookings (Events) Exists on factory Resources tab
References
Resource Category
Title: Category
References
Resource Type
Title: Type
Fields
Resource Description
Title: Resource
Fields
Start Time
Title: Start
Fields
End Time
Title: End
Column Source: Resource Bookings (Events)
Fields
Template ID
Title: Template
Type: Check Box
Column Source: Resource Bookings (Events)
Fields
Library Entry ID
Title: Created
Type: Check Box

Control
Details Notes / Information
Type
Button Caption: Assign Template Add to middle of “Asset Templates” tab.
Command: Assign Library Template for
Creation
Button Caption: Template Touchup Existed in older versions. Add to middle
Command: Library Template Touchup of “Asset Templates” tab.
Button Caption: Create from Template Add to middle of “Asset Templates” tab.
Command: Create Media Asset from
Template for Selected Resource
Button Caption: Associate to WO Add to middle of “Asset Templates” tab.
Command: Associate Library Item to Work
Order
Button Caption: Remove Existed in older versions. Add to middle
Command: Remove Selected Resource(s) of “Asset Templates” tab.
Button Caption: Edit Existed in older versions. Add to middle

Command: Library: Edit Tape of “Asset Templates” tab.
Button Caption: Pull from Library Existed in older versions. Add to middle
Command: Library: Manually Select Tapes of “Asset Templates” tab.
Browser Library Items for this Work Order Add to bottom half of “Asset Templates”
tab.
Columns Copy columns from “Media Produced” browser on factory “Media” tabbed page.
Figure 249. Work Order Templates Tab

Barcode Scanner
The ScheduALL Media Manager System is designed to interact with a barcode scanner to automate
many Media Manager System and Rental Module functions. This can improve check-in and check-
out speed and improve overall accuracy.
Many commercial barcode scanners can be connected to your system. Typically, the scanner
connects to the computer through a serial port or through an attachment to the keyboard cable. But
there are many different types of scanners and methods of connection. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for connecting the scanner and loading the software drivers.
Consider three areas when implementing a bar-coding system: the scanning hardware, the actual
codes to be scanned, and the requirements and configuration specific to the target application (in this
case, the ScheduALL system).
Scanning Hardware
Scanning hardware translates an optical or magnetic code into standard character values that can be
understood by a target application. These codes may be represented in virtually unlimited ways,
ranging from printed barcode symbols based on a common barcode protocol (such as CODE-39 and
CODABAR) to extremely complex patterns that include proprietary symbols or magnetic stripes.
In general terms, it is usually not important for the application to be aware of the code or medium
itself, as it is a function of the scanner to resolve this and feed standard character values to the
application.
Most modern scanners support all popular protocols, and can automatically switch between them.
While there is a wide variety of devices in the market, the most common can be divided into four
categories:
1. Wands are pen-like, LED-based instruments. They require that the operator move the wand
over the code to be scanned at a very close range. Wands are popular due to their low cost,
but they have significant drawbacks. These drawbacks include a comparatively poor scan
ratio, and the likelihood of “rubbing-off” the barcode as operators often to allow the wand to
make contact with it.
2. CCD Guns are hand-held LED-based devices. They are extremely easy to operate, as they
require no contact or side-scanning movement from the operator. They have a very good scan
ratio and are moderately priced (roughly twice as much as a wand). One possible drawback in
some environments is that they require close proximity to the barcode. CCD guns are the
most popular scanners used with the ScheduALL application.
3. Laser Guns offer all the benefits of CCD guns with the added advantages of faster, more
reliable reads, and the ability to operate at a greater distance from the barcode. They are not as
popular due to their higher price (roughly twice as much as a CCD Gun).
4. Card/Swipe scanners may be optical or magnetic, and operate by having the code “swiped” or
approached to the device (a Credit Card reader is an example). These devices are impractical
for most ScheduALL scanning applications, except personnel badge reading.
An additional consideration is the method by which a device connects to the host computer. Most
devices use a serial interface, or a “wedge” adapter that connects to the keyboard. The keyboard
wedge is simpler to install, and does not require hardware setup or device drivers.
For more information on supported scanner hardware and other related issues, refer to the Barcode
Scanners section of the ScheduALL Minimum System Requirements.

Barcode Protocols and Requirements

In the ScheduALL application, barcodes must be unique, must all conform to the same barcode
protocol, and the barcode length cannot exceed twenty (20) alphanumeric characters.
There are several popular barcode protocols. Applications such as the ScheduALL system most
commonly use the Code-39 and CODABAR protocols. Barcode labels may already exist from a
previous or external source, they may be printed directly from the ScheduALL system, or they may be
purchased as pre-printed rolls from a vendor.
To read a barcode, the scanner must support the protocol that was used to generate the barcode.
To print a barcode, generally a string requires some protocol-specific preparation prior to conversion.
This preparation should include verification that the chosen barcode protocol supports all the
characters in the string. Some protocols do not support non-numeric or lower case characters.
For example, to print a barcode with a value of ABC1001 from the ScheduALL system, use the
“Barcode (Code-39)” function to format the value properly. Attempting to print ABC1001 as a barcode
directly might result in a barcode that appears invalid, but the scanner will fail to detect it, as it does
not contain any protocol identifiers. Using the ScheduALL “Barcode (CODABAR)” function would
also result in an invalid barcode, because the CODABAR protocol does not support alpha characters.
Note: Some scanners send an extra carriage return after the scan (referred to as a “terminator”) by
default. This may cause errors during scanning. To eliminate this problem, change the
terminator from CR to None.
Barcode Fonts
Barcode labels print automatically with certain templates if the barcode fonts are installed for
ScheduALL. If the barcode is not printing properly, install the fonts as follows.
1. Open the drive and folder containing the ScheduALL program files.
2. Open the Schedwin folder.
3. Select the barcode fonts similar to those shown.
Figure 250. Add Barcode Fonts

4. Right-click one of the selected files and select Install.
Scanner Configuration
The preamble (start) and postamble (stop) characters allow the barcode scanner to indicate to an
application where a barcode begins and ends. In general the same character is used for both values,
and may be specified as a factory default.
If the preamble or postamble characters are not specified as a factory default, or if the default
characters conflicts with a character used in a normal barcode, it may be necessary to configure a
new preamble/postamble using the setup program for the scanner. The process of programming a
scanner, and the barcodes used to program the scanner, are provided in the manufacturer's
documentation. This process generally resembles the following:
1. Scan the manufacturer’s barcode for begin configuration.
2. Scan the barcode to enable the Code39 protocol.

3. Scan the barcode to configure the start and stop character for the Code39 protocol.
4. Scan the preamble/postamble (start and stop) character.
5. Scan the barcode for end configuration.
6. Scan the barcode to save configuration changes.
Note: When selecting the preamble/postamble character, make sure to avoid any character that may
appear as part of a barcode. For example, if your facility uses alphanumeric barcodes, do not
use any letters, numbers, spaces, or other characters that might be used as part of a valid
barcode that can be scanned. Using a preamble/postamble character that appears in the
barcodes being scanned will result in incomplete reading of the barcodes.
Once the scanner itself is set up the procedure that allows the device to communicate with the
ScheduALL system must be performed. Refer to ScheduALL Barcode Scanner Setup.
ScheduALL Barcode Scanner Setup
To set up a system barcode scanner:
1. From the File menu, select Setup, and then click Barcode Scanner Setup. The Barcode
Scanner Setup dialog displays.
Figure 251. System Barcode Scanner Setup Dialog

2. Delete any text in the Barcode (Scan For) field.
3. Scan a barcode.
4. Click Start.
5. Scan the same barcode again. The ScheduALL system detects the particular Preamble and
Postamble for the specific scanner and stores it for later use by the system.
6. Click Finished. A confirmation dialog displays. If the utility fails to detect either value, the
user must program them into the scanner by following the specific instructions from the
scanner manufacturer.
If a Library item has a pre-existing barcode, open the Library item in Edit mode, place the cursor in the
Barcode field, and scan the existing barcode to link the barcode with the item entry.
When printing or reading barcodes, the ScheduALL system attempts to use any user-provided value
in the Barcode field. If no value exists, the system automatically assigns a barcode number.

Configuring the Local Barcode Scanner

Local Barcode Scanner Setup allows the user to configure a scanner that will be used in only one
location.
To set up a local barcode scanner:
1. From the File menu, select Setup, click Local Scanner, then click Local Scanner
Configuration. The Local Barcode Scanner Setup dialog displays.
Figure 252. Local Barcode Scanner Setup Dialog

2. Delete any text in the Barcode (Scan For) field.
3. Scan a barcode.
4. Click Start.
5. Scan the same barcode again. The ScheduALL system detects the particular Preamble and
Postamble for the specific scanner and stores it for later use by the system.
6. Click Finished. A confirmation dialog displays. If the utility fails to detect either value, the
user must program them into the scanner by following the specific instructions from the
scanner manufacturer.
If a Library item that has a pre-existing barcode, open the Library item in Edit mode, place the cursor
in the Barcode field, and scan the existing barcode to link the barcode with the item entry.
When printing or reading barcodes, the ScheduALL system attempts to use any user-provided value
in the Barcode field. If no value exists, the system automatically assigns a barcode number.

Configuring the Local Scanner Location

Local Scanner Location Configuration allows the user to identify a location for the local scanner. The
available locations are maintained in Location Setup. Refer to Location Setup for more information.
To configure a local scanner location:
1. From the File menu, select Setup, click Local Scanner, then click Local Scanner Location
Configuration. The Select Local Scanner Location dialog displays.
Figure 253. Select Local Scanner Location dialog

2. Select a location from the list.
3. Click Select.
Enabling and Disabling a Local Scanner
The local scanner feature can be temporarily disabled. When the local scanner is disabled, the
system scanner becomes the default scanner.
To enable or disable the local scanner:
1. From the File menu, select Setup, click Local Scanner, then click Toggle Local Scanner
Configuration.
2. A confirmation dialog displays showing the local scanner status as enabled or disabled.
Enable/Disable a Local Scanner Location
The local scanner location feature can be temporarily disabled. When the local scanner location is
disabled, the user can scan or manually enter a location. If no location is entered, the user’s default
location is used.
To enable or disable the local scanner location:
1. From the File menu, select Setup, click Local Scanner, then click Toggle Local Scanner
Location.
2. A confirmation dialog displays showing the local scanner location status as enabled or
disabled.

Multi-Company
To begin using the Multi-Company Module, set up the companies that make up the enterprise, and
then configure company-specific counters.
Migrating from a Single-Company System

If the ScheduALL system was configured with rooms and resources for a default company prior to the
installation of the Multi-Company Module follow these steps to change it to a multi-company system.
1. Create a Company entry for the original company, as described in Company Setup.
2. Determine the method for sharing rooms and resources:
l To use company-specific rooms, define counters as described in Company-Specific
Counters and assign existing rooms to the original company as described in Company-
Specific Rooms and Shared Resources.
l To share all rooms and resources among all companies, define counters as described in
Company-Specific Counters and assign existing rooms to the original company as
described in Shared Rooms and Resources.
3. Create a Company entry for each additional company, as described in Company Setup.
Company Setup
The Company Setup dialog allows the supervisor to create the company entries used by the
Multi-Company Module.
Displaying the Company Setup Dialog
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click Company Setup. The Company
Figure 254. Company Setup Dialog

2. Click New to add a new company, OR

Select a company and click Edit to modify an existing company. The Company Setup dialog
displays.
Figure 255. Company Setup Dialog
Entering Company Information

1. The ScheduALL Company ID is used to track company-specific information and is assigned
automatically by the system.
2. Enter the Short name alias for the company. For example, a short name for Atwater
Publishing might be AtPub.
3. Enter the Company or Department name (60 characters maximum).
Setting Counters
1. Enter the Next Work Order # used to identify the work orders for this company. Enter a
number from 1 to 99,999,999 to assign work order numbers based on company specific
counters. For example, enter 10000 for Company 1 and enter 20000 for Company 2. The
system prepends the Company ID to the Work Order number to identify the company-specific
counter. To use company-specific counters, the Use Company Specific Counters system
preference must be selected (checked). Refer to Company-Specific Counters.
2. Enter the Next Invoice # used to identify the work orders for this company. Enter a number
from 1 to 99,999,999 to assign invoice numbers based on company-specific counters. For
example, enter 10000 for Company 1 and enter 20000 for Company 2. The system prepends
the Company ID to the Invoice number to identify the company-specific counter. To use
company-specific counters, the Use Company Specific Counters system preference must be
selected (checked). Refer to Company-Specific Counters.
Selecting Default Rate Card and Company Color
1. Click Default Rate Card to assign a default rate card to the company.
2. Click Company Color to assign a display color for the company. To remove the color
assigned to the company, click ( ) to the right of the Company Color button.
Click OK when done. Repeat as necessary for the total number of companies in your enterprise.

Company-Specific Counters
By default, the ScheduALL system assigns the work order number by incrementing the master work
order number counter, and assigns invoice numbers by incrementing the master invoice number
counter.
The Multi-Company Module allows the system to create a separate counter for each company, and
assign work order numbers and invoice numbers based on the company-specific counter.
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor, or with the appropriate rights to the
Company Setup area.
General. The Main tab displays.
Figure 256. System Preferences, Main Tab

3. Select (check) Use Company specific counters to use the Next Work Order # and Next
Invoice # counters defined in the Company properties to generate Work Order and Invoice
numbers.
Note: If custom counters are not defined for a particular company, work order and invoice numbers
for that company are determined on the ScheduALL master counter, and the Company ID is
not be prepended to that company’s Work Order or Invoice numbers.
Note: If the work order has been assigned a company and company-specific counters are used, the
company number is prepended to the work order number. If the company assigned to the work
order is changed after the work order is created, the Company ID in the work order number
displayed on the scheduling calendar does not change. The correct company will display
elsewhere.
Note: To use custom counters, the following setup options must be cleared:
l Link to Company - refer to Link to Company.
l Default Company to assign when creating entries - refer to Default Company to assign
when creating entries.

Company-Specific Rooms and Shared Resources

In this scenario, rooms are assigned to a specific company within the enterprise, while other
resources are available to all companies. When you assign a default company to a room, the counters
for that company are used for work order numbers and invoice numbers. This method of sharing
allows the system to assign work order numbers at the request stage, since the work order numbering
is tied to the company-specific room.
To associate a room with a company:
2. Select a resource category in the Category column.
3. Select a resource type in the Type column.
4. Double-click a room in the Description column. The Room Properties dialog for the selected
room displays.
5. Click the Accounting tab to bring that page forward.
6. Click Default Company to access the list of companies.
Figure 257. Room Properties, Accounting Tab

7. Double-click the company to be assigned to this room, OR
Select the company name and click the Select button at the bottom of the dialog.
8. To remove the company/room association, click the Delete ( ) to the right of the Default
Company text box.
Shared Rooms and Resources
In this scenario, all resources and rooms are shared across all companies.
When sharing all rooms and resources among multiple companies, the system cannot assign work
order numbers at the Request stage. As a result, it is necessary to change the System Preference
which determines the status at which work order numbers will be assigned.

To change the appropriate system preference:

2. On the Main tab, change the Begin Assigning Work Order Numbers From setting from
Request to another status.
3. Click OK to save the changes, or click Cancel to exit the dialog without saving changes.
Default Company Assigned by User Login
Company-specific work orders can also be created by linking a user to a company. When the user
creates a work order, the work order Company field defaults to the company linked to the user.
To link a company to a user login:
1. Log on as Supervisor or as a user with supervisory rights.
2. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, then User Profiles & Security.
3. Click the User tab to bring that page forward.
4. Double-click a user account. The Modify User dialog displays.
5. Click Link to Company. The Select Company dialog displays.
6. Select a company and click Select.
7. Click OK to close the Modify User dialog.
8. Click OK to close the User Profiles & Security dialog.
Refer to Link to Company for more information about this setting.

Personnel Manager
To begin using the Personnel Manager module:
l Review the preference and permission settings specific to the Personnel Manager module.
l Configure pay categories.
l Configure shifts and rotations.
l Configure activity templates.
l Configure sub-activities.
Personnel Manager Preferences and Permissions

Several preferences and permissions in the System Preferences, User Preferences, and Security
Settings administration areas apply directly to the Personnel Manager.
System Preferences
To modify the settings which control system-wide behavior of the Personnel Manager module:
1. Log on as a supervisor.
2. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, select System Preferences and click
3. Click the Overtime tab to bring that page forward. Select the status levels to ignore in
Overtime as described in System Preferences – Overtime Tab. The system will not check
for resource overtime conditions for work orders at the selected status(es).
4. Click the General tab to bring that page forward.
5. Modify the Overtime Types section as necessary.
User Preferences
To modify the user profile settings related to the Personnel Manager module:
1. Log on as a supervisor.
2. From the File menu, select User Preferences, and click General. The General Preferences
dialog displays.
3. Click the Conflict Warnings tab to bring that page forward.
4. Locate the Consider Overtime Conflicts setting.
l Select (check) this option to generate warnings based on overtime differentials, OR
Deselect (clear) this option to allow a user to book a work order or activity in an overtime
period without generating a warning.

The Personnel Manager uses existing user logins and security profiles, but some additional
administration is necessary. Personnel Manager describes security settings specific to the
Personnel Manager module, while other tables, such as Maintenance & Setup Areas describe other
security settings (such as Can Access Pay Category Setup?) that also affect Personnel Manager
workflow.

Pay Categories
Personnel Manager gives you tremendous flexibility to set up and maintain multiple pay categories.
To track an employee’s pay information, a pay category must be assigned to the employee. A pay
category can have hundreds of employees assigned to it, or just one individual.
You set up pay categories to establish the payroll rules of your personnel, including those covered by
different union contracts. When you set up your pay categories, you will enter the base pay rate,
overtime triggers and rates, night, weekend, and holiday differentials, and any travel or mileage
compensation rates. The ScheduALL Personnel Manager offers you great flexibility to customize
additional differentials and bonus pay situations to fit your needs.
Pay Category Setup
To create, modify, copy, or delete pay categories:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Pay Categories. The Pay Category Setup dialog
displays. Access this list any time you need to make changes to existing pay categories,
delete a pay category, or create a new category.
Figure 258. Pay Category Setup Dialog

2. To create a new pay category, click the New button. The Pay Category Setup dialog displays.
The dialog displays the following tabs:
Personnel Pay Category Setup – Overtime 634

Personnel Pay Category Setup – Other 641
3. To change an existing pay category, select the category from the list, and then click Edit.
Make any necessary changes and then click OK.
4. To delete an existing pay category, select the category from the list, and then click Delete.
Answer “Yes” at the prompt.
5. To copy an existing category and create a new one, select the category from the list, and then
click Copy. The Personnel Pay Category Setup dialog displays. The Pay Category name field
displays the name of the category you copied followed by (Copy). For example, Sr. Editor
(Copy).
a. Replace the name in the Pay Category field with the name of the category you are
creating.
b. Make any additional changes and click OK to create the new category.

Personnel Pay Category Setup – Overtime

The Overtime tab displays basic information such as base pay, pay period type, and overtime
definitions. Personnel Manager provides up to four overtime levels, and the ability to pay overtime on
a daily basis, a period basis (weekly, for example), or a combination of both. Table 175 describes the
available settings.
Figure 259. Personnel Pay Category Setup Dialog, Overtime Tab

Table 175. Personnel Pay Category Setup Dialog, Overtime Tab Settings
Item Description
Pay Category Name of pay category.
Pay Period Type Choose type of pay period for this pay category.
Choose from: Daily, Weekly, Biweekly, 1st and 15th of Month,
15th and Last of Month, Monthly, and 12 Weeks.
User Defined Period Length Enter the number of days that defines the Pay Period Type. For
(Days) example, enter 7 to define the Weekly pay period type as a 7-day
week.
Hourly Cost Enter the base hourly pay for the entire pay category.
Paid during Meals Select (check) to include any duration specified as a meal in cost
calculations, OR
Deselect (clear) to deduct any time specified as a meal from cost
calculations.
When selected, the additional meal duration may trigger (or cause
other durations to trigger) overtime or differentials.

Table 175. Personnel Pay Category Setup Dialog, Overtime Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Paid during Breaks Select (check) to include any duration specified as a break in cost
calculations, OR
Deselect (clear) to deduct any time specified as a break from cost
calculations.
When selected, the additional break duration may trigger (or cause
other durations to trigger) overtime or differentials.
Date Pay Period Started Enter the date on which the pay period goes into effect.
Minimum Hours Paid/Period Optional field. Enter the minimum hours for which the employee is
paid in a period. If the employee worked fewer than the minimum
hours, the employee’s pay is adjusted for the difference when the
pay period is reconciled. The employee is always paid for
minimum.
For example, if the minimum is set to 40 hours per period, but the
employee only worked 30 hours, the system creates a 10-hour
adjustment (at the straight time rate) upon pay period
reconciliation.
Target Hours/Day Enter the number of hours employee should work per day.
Display Day Events In Select Days or Hours to define the display of events.
Holiday Region Select the region to which the employee belongs. Refer to
Holiday Regions for more information.
Use Tiered Hourly Cost Determines whether the system pays employees for a minimum
amount, regardless of number of hours worked.
For example, if there are 4 hours in a half day:
l Select (check) Pay as Half Day and set Hrs in a Half Day
to “4” to force the system to pay the employee a half day’s
wage for any increment up to four hours. An employee who
works for 1.5 hours is paid for 4 hours.
l Select (check) Sale as Half Day to force the system to bill
the client a half day’s prices for any increment up to four
hours. If an employee works for 1.5 hours, the client is billed
for 4 hours.
Note: To enable tiered hourly cost, do not enter an amount in the
Hourly Cost field.
Overtime Levels ScheduALL offers four overtime levels per pay category, based on
hours worked per day or per week.

Table 175. Personnel Pay Category Setup Dialog, Overtime Tab Settings (continued)
Item Description
Hourly Triggers Use Day triggers to calculate overtime based on the number of
hours worked in a day.
Use Period triggers to calculate overtime based on the number of
hours worked within a pay period.
Note: Overtime differentials an all other Personnel Pay Category
calculations apply only to bookings based on the “hour” unit
of measure. The selection between Day and Period
determines only the interval at which the number of hours is
compared to the differential; i.e. the total number of hours
per day or the total number of hours per billing period.
To use both types of triggers, refer to Period Overtime Trigger.
Multipliers Enter numerical multiplier to apply to base rate for each overtime
level (1.5 for time and a half, for example).
Enter Cost multipliers to calculate employee overtime pay (the
cost to you).
Enter Sale multipliers to charge your client for incurred overtime.
The multiplier you enter here is applied to the billing rate you set
for the employee in Personnel (Resource) Setup.
Important: Enter 0.0 to not charge the client any premium for
overtime.
Note: The system allows the user to set overtime rates in pay
category setup, but decide on a per client basis AND a per work
order basis whether to apply the overtime charges.
Note: The system allows the user to disable overtime warnings for bookings based on their status.
Refer to System Preferences – Overtime Tab.
Personnel Pay Category Setup – Differentials Page 1
The Personnel Manager module offers several built-in and customizable differentials and activity
overlaps.
This page displays the following settings:
l Night. Enter the times to which the differential applies in the Differential applies from and to
fields.
l Weekend. Enter the start day and time of the weekend in the From fields, and the end day and
time in the To fields.
l Observed Holiday

Figure 260. Personnel Pay Category Setup, Differentials Page 1

Table 176. Differential Page 1 Item Descriptions
Item Description
Enable ... Differential Select (check) this option to provide the employees assigned to this
pay category additional pay for:
l Night - working nighttime hours.
l Weekend - working weekend hours.
l Observed Holiday - working on observed holidays. Refer to the
Holiday Calendar and Region Setup for information about
observed holidays.
Pay Flat Amount Select (check) Pay Flat Amount to offer the employee a flat dollar
amount when the differential is triggered.
Note: When selecting Pay Flat Amount, the Cost must be entered
(not zero). The Sale amount can be entered as needed. The
Method alternative is ignored
Cost Enter the Cost amount to specify the monetary amount paid to the
employee.
Sale Enter the Sale amount to specify the monetary amount charged to the
client.
Method Select a Method to specify the time for which the employee will be
paid the differential or overlap. Refer to Defining the Payment
Method.
Note: When selecting a Method, Pay Flat Amount must be
deselected (cleared). A Cost Multiplier must be entered (not
zero). The Sale Multiplier amount can be entered as needed.

Table 176. Differential Page 1 Item Descriptions (continued)
Item Description
Cost Multiplier Enter the numerical Cost Multiplier to set the differential rate paid to
the employee to offer the employee a percentage rate applied to their
base pay.
Sale Multiplier Enter a Sale Multiplier to be applied to the billing rates for this
employee when the differential is triggered. Important:Enter 0.0 if
you will not charge the client for the differential.
Differential applies from/to Enter the time span during which the differential is in effect.
From/To Enter the day and time span during which the weekend differential is in
effect.
Do Not Apply if on Overtime Select (check) the Do Not Apply if on Overtime option to prevent
the multiplier from being applied to the overtime portion of the
employee’s hours.
Deselect (clear) this option to apply the multiplier to all the hours
employee worked, regardless of overtime. The system calculates the
differential on both the employee’s straight time rate and any overtime
portions.

This page displays Time Differentials 1-3.

Table 177. Differentials Page 2 Items Descriptions
Item Description
Enable Time Differential Select (check) this option to offer the employees assigned to this pay
category additional pay for:
l Time Differential 1-3 - the specified hours.
employee.
client.
Method.
base pay.
employee’s hours.
portions.

l Time Differential 4. Enter the times to which the differential applies in the Differential applies
from and to fields.
l Short Turnaround. Enter the number of hours to trigger the differential in the text box. The
number of hours entered must be five or greater to trigger the short turnaround differential. The
second shift or booking must start at least four hours after the end of the first shift or booking to
trigger the short turnaround differential.

l Days Worked/Period Differential. Enter the number of days to trigger the differential in the text
box.

Table 178. Differentials Page 3 Item Descriptions
Item Description
Enable ... Differential Select (check) this option to offer the employees assigned to this pay
l Time Differential 4 - the specified hours.
l Short Turnaround - shifts and bookings scheduled close
together.
l Days Worked/Period - extended hours worked in a period.
employee.
client.

Table 178. Differentials Page 3 Item Descriptions (continued)
Item Description
Method.
base pay.
employee’s hours.
portions.
Apply when booked less Enter the number of hours to trigger the differential in the text box. The
than __ hours apart number of hours entered must be five or greater to trigger the short
turnaround differential. For example, if 8 is entered and the employee
returns to work 6 hours after their last shift, then the differential would
be triggered.
Apply when booked more Enter the number of days to trigger the differential in the text box. The
than __ days in a period period is defined in the resource's pay category.
Personnel Pay Category Setup – Other

l Activity Overlap
l Travel and Mileage

Figure 263. Personnel Pay Category Setup, Other Tab

Table 179. Other Tab Item Descriptions
Item Description
Enable Activity Overlap Select (check) this option to offer the employees assigned to this pay
l Activity Overlap - working an event or shift on a day off.
l Travel and Mileage - Cost and billing for traveling expenses or
vehicle use.
employee.
client.
Select Activity Overlap An activity overlap occurs when a shift or booking is created during the
same time as an activity. For example, an Activity Overlap would be
used when a 'Day Off' activity is booked for a resource and then a shift
is booked on top of it. In this scenario, the resource had a scheduled
day off, but worked an event anyway and is paid extra for working on
their day off.
Click Select Activity Overlap. The Select Desired Event dialog
displays. Select (check) the event to trigger the overlap. Click OK.

Table 179. Other Tab Item Descriptions(continued)
Item Description
Method.
employee.
client.
employee’s hours.
portions.
Travel Enter information related to travel expenses for this pay category.
Unit Enter a unit of measure, such as Day.
Cost Enter the cost per unit associated with the travel.
Bill Enter the amount per unit to be billed for the travel.
Mileage Enter information related to vehicle mileage traveled for this pay
category.
Unit Enter a unit of measure, typically mile or kilometer.
Cost Enter the cost per unit associated with the mileage.
Bill Enter the amount per unit to be billed for the mileage.

Defining the Payment Method

From the Method list on the Personnel Pay Category Setup dialog (refer to Personnel Pay Category
Setup – Differentials Page 1), select a time frame (use only when applying a Multiplier to the
employee’s base rate).
Payment Method - Intersected Time Only

If any differential or overlap hours occur within the booking time, the multiplier is applied only to those
hours. An example of an individual booked for six hours of work is shown in Figure 264. The
individual has a pay differential of time-and-a-half for any work done between the hours of 5 a.m. and
7 a.m. Since the booking starts at 6 a.m., the differential time intersects the booking time for a period
of one hour (6 a.m.-7 a.m.). Using the Intersected Time Only method, the individual is paid one hour at
the differential rate (6 a.m.-7 a.m.) and five hours at the base rate (7 a.m.-12 p.m.).
Figure 264. Pay Differential, Intersected Time Only Method
From Trigger On
Once a booking moves into differential or overlap-defined hours (nighttime hours, for example), the
multiplier is applied from that point forward. Figure 265 shows an example of an individual booked for
six hours of work. The individual has a pay differential of time-and-a-half for any work done between
the hours of 7 a.m. and 9 a.m. Using the From Trigger On method, the individual is paid one hour at
the base rate (6 a.m. to 7 a.m.) and five hours at the differential rate (7 a.m.–12 p.m.).

Entire Booking
If any part of booking falls into differential or overlap-defined hours, the multiplier is applied to the
entire booking. Figure 265 shows an example of an individual booked for six hours of work. The
individual has a pay differential of time-and-a-half for any work done between the hours of 7 a.m. and
9 a.m. Using the Entire Booking method, the individual is paid all six hours at the differential rate.
Figure 265. Pay Differential, From Trigger On and Entire Booking Methods
Adding Warn If Cancelled Within (hours)

The Warn if Cancelled Within setting in Personnel Pay Category Setup allows the system to
automatically create a shift for a personnel resources when a booking for that resource is canceled
within the specified number of days. For example, if the Warn if Cancelled Within field for the
Senior Editor pay category is set to 14, any work order Cancelled within 14 days of the scheduled
Start Date/Time will automatically create a shift for the editor, separate from the booking associated
with the Cancelled work order. The Start Time and End Time of the shift match the Start Time and
End Time of the original booking.
with permissions to the Adaptive Framework (DTK) module, and modify the specified forms by
adding the following controls to the Personnel Pay Category Setup dialog.
Static Control Warn if Cancelled Within (days) Location: Any tab.
Edit Control Source: Pay Categories
Type: Fields
Field: Warning Cancellation Within
To add the Warn if Cancelled Within field to the Personnel Pay Category Setup dialog:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor, or with permissions to Pay Category Setup.
(In the Permissions dialog, Can Access Pay Category Setup must be set to Yes.)
2. From the File menu, select Setup and click Pay Categories. The Pay Category Setup dialog
displays the list of existing pay categories.
3. Double-click an existing pay category. The Personnel Pay Category Setup dialog displays.
4. Click the Other tab (or the appropriate tab) to bring that page forward.

Assign Personnel to Pay Categories

After creating pay categories, assign them to personnel resources. This could be a single-role
resource, or a multi-role resource.
Single-Role Personnel
3. Select a personnel resource, and click Edit. The Personnel Properties dialog for the selected
employee displays.
5. Click Pay Category to assign a pay category. The Select Pay Category dialog displays.
6. Select a category and click Select. The employee is assigned to the pay category.
Multi-Role Personnel
Personnel who perform more than one job type may require more than one pay category, depending
on the work they are performing.
To assign an additional pay category based on a different job type:
3. Select a personnel resource, and click Edit. The Personnel Properties dialog displays.
4. On the Main tab, click the Add button next to the list of categories and types to which the
employee is assigned.
5. Select the additional category and type, and click OK. The additional entry is listed on the
Personnel Properties dialog. In this example, Andy Greene is both a Freelance Editor and
Graphic Artist.
Figure 266. Personnel Properties, Add Job Type

6. Select the new category and type listing and click Category Overrides. The Resource
Catalog Setup dialog displays. The employee’s category, type, and name are displayed at the
top of the dialog.
Figure 267. Resource Catalog Setup Dialog

7. Click Pay Category. The Select Pay Category dialog displays.
8. Double-click the pay category to apply to the employee when booked as this category and
type.
9. Click OK to save the category overrides and return to the personnel information for the
selected employee. A confirmation dialog displays.
l Click Yes to ripple (change all) resources in the same category and type to the pay category
selected. If ledger numbers were entered, a you will be asked if you want to ripple those
changes as well.
l Click No to set the pay category for this individual resource only.
Personnel Shift Rotations and Patterns

Personnel Manager provides the flexibility to establish shift rotations and patterns. If you schedule
your personnel through the use of shift rotations, you will need to set up the rotations and patterns,
and then assign personnel to them.
Note: The user permission Can Add/Edit/Delete Shift? does not affect the ability to create a shift
using Rotation Assignment. Refer to Permissions.

Overview
A shift rotation is pre-defined pattern of activities that starts on a specified date, end on a specified
date, and contain a repeating series of one or more repeating activities within the specified period. For
example, sample data contains an Engineering Rotation that starts on January 1 of one year and ends
on December 31 of the following year. The rotation contains three activity patterns. Each pattern is 7
days long (i.e. repeats every 7 days), with no activities on Saturday or Sunday, and the following
additional activities:
l Daytime contains five Shift activities from 7 a.m. to 4 p.m., Monday through Friday
l Middle contains five Shift activities from noon to 8 p.m., Monday through Friday
l Night contains five Shift activities from 7 p.m. to 2 a.m., Monday through Friday
Assigning personnel to rotations automatically creates the specified activities for the specified
personnel using the pre-defined pattern within the assignment dates. For example, assigning Randy
Jones to the Engineering Rotation (Daytime) from March 1 to March 31 creates the specified shifts for
Randy on the specified days.
Adding or Modifying a Shift Rotation
To add or modify a shift rotation:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Personnel Shift Rotations / Patterns. The
Rotation Maintenance dialog displays the list of shift rotations.
Figure 268. Rotation Maintenance Dialog

Do one of the following to display the Rotation Details dialog shown:
l Click New to create a new shift rotation.
l Select a shift rotation and click Edit to modify an existing rotation.
l Select a shift rotation and click Copy to create a duplicate of an existing rotation and modify
it. For example, to set up two similar rotations for specific time spans, define the first
rotation, copy it, and change the name and effective dates.

Figure 269. Rotation Details Dialog

2. Enter the Rotation Name to identify the rotation.
3. Set the Effective Dates for the rotation to be in effect. The effective dates determine the
pattern, so enter a start date that falls on a Monday to begin a pattern on a Monday.
4. Click the New button to set up the first pattern in the rotation. The New Rotation Pattern dialog
displays.
Figure 270. New Rotation Pattern Dialog

a. Enter the Name of the pattern.
b. Enter the Number of Days the pattern will cover.
c. Click OK. The pattern tree displays the appropriate days. Refer to Set the Day
Properties.
5. Select a rotation pattern and click Edit to modify all the days in an existing pattern. Refer to
Set the Day Properties.
6. Select a rotation pattern and click Copy to create a duplicate of an existing pattern and modify
it.
7. Select a rotation pattern and click Delete to remove the pattern.
Set the Day Properties
1. From the Rotation Maintenance dialog and click Edit. The Rotation details dialog displays.
Refer to Adding or Modifying a Shift Rotation.

2. Select a Pattern name to modify all days in a rotation pattern, or select one or more days within
a pattern that have the same properties, and click Edit. The Day Properties dialog displays.
Figure 271. Day Properties Dialog

3. Modify the Pattern Name if necessary. (Modifying the Pattern Name of any day in a pattern
will modify the name of the entire pattern.)
4. Select the Day Type from the list.
5. Select the Activity Template from the list to apply a template to the day properties. Refer to
Activity Templates for more information.
6. Click in the Start and End times to set the beginning and ending times. Type or use the up and
down arrows to set values.
7. Enter the Activity Description. (The Sub-Activity buttons do not display if the Assign Sub-
Activity system preference is set to No.)
l To assign a sub-activity as the Activity Description, click Set Sub-Activity. The Select
dialog displays. Select a sub-activity and click Select. The sub-activity name is displayed
in the Activity Description field.
l To remove a sub-activity, click Release Sub-Activity. The sub-activity name is removed
from the Activity Description field.
8. Enter meal and break information.
l Enter the Duration (in minutes) for a meal or break to define an unscheduled or “floating”
meal or break.
l Enter a Start and End time for a meal or break to define a meal or break that takes place at a
specific time. Click in the Start and End times to set the beginning and ending times. Type
or use the up and down arrows to set values.
l Click Clear Meal or Clear Break to reset the meal or break information to the defaults.
9. Click OK to save all changes. The Rotation Details dialog displays the updated information.
Once all required rotations are defined, assign personnel to rotations as described in the Personnel

Deleting a Shift Rotation

To remove a shift rotation:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Personnel Shift Rotations/Patterns. The list of
rotations displays.
2. Select the rotation from the list, and click Delete. A confirmation dialog displays.
3. Click Yes to delete the rotation.
Activity Templates
Activity Templates define several common elements of a Shift activity, including Start and End
times, meals, and breaks. The template reduces administration tasks by allowing authorized users to
create shifts that follow a preset pattern without entering the same information repeatedly.
Add or Edit an Activity Template

To create an Activity Template:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Activity Template. The Activity Template dialog
displays.
2. Click New to create a new activity template, or select an activity template and click Edit to
modify an existing template. The Activity Template dialog .
Figure 272. Activity Template Dialog

3. Enter the Description of the activity.
4. Enter the Start and End time for the Activity.

5. Enter meal and break information for Meal, Meal 2, Break, and Break 2.
l Enter the Duration (in minutes) for a meal or break to define an unscheduled or “floating”
meal or break, OR
l Enter a Start and End time for a meal or break to define a meal or break that takes place at a
specific time. Click in the Start and End times to set the beginning and ending times. Type
or use the up and down arrows to set values.
l Click Clear ( ) next to a meal or break to clear the fields for that item.
6. To assign a color to the template, click Select Activity Template Color to display the
standard Windows color palette, select an activity color, and click OK. The selected color
displays to the right of the button. To remove a color association from the template, click Clear
( ) to the right of the color preview.
Delete an Activity Template

To permanently remove an Activity Template:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Activity Template. The Activity Template dialog
displays.
2. Select an Activity Template and click Delete. A confirmation dialog displays.
3. Click Yes to remove the template.
Note: Shifts created using the template retain the start time, end time, meal definitions, and break
definitions specified in the template. Shift rotations which were assigned an Activity Template
revert to the base activity type but retain the start time, end time, meal definitions, and break
definitions specified in the template.
Sub-Activities
Sub-Activities allow the system to differentiate between multiple types of the same basic activity,
and define a custom calendar display color and account code override for each sub-type. For
example, configure Day Edit, Night Edit, Engineering Shift, and Audio Mixing sub-activities for Shifts
to determine job roles at a glance on the scheduling calendar.
System Preferences determine whether a user is allowed, or required, to select a sub-activity. Refer
to Assign Sub-Activity. The scheduler assigns the sub-activity when booking a resource activity.
The sub-activity list is managed only by the system supervisor, or a user with supervisory rights.
Non-supervisor users cannot add, edit, or delete sub-activities.
Adding or Editing a Sub-Activity

To create a sub-activity:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Sub-Activities. The Select Activity Type dialog
displays.
2. Select an existing activity type, and click OK. The Sub-Activities dialog displays.

3. Click New to create a new sub-activity, or select a sub-activity and click Edit to modify an
existing entry. The Sub-Activity Setup dialog displays.
Figure 273. Sub-Activity Setup Dialog

4. Enter the Description of the sub-activity.
5. Enter the Account Code Override, from 1 to 5 characters, used to replace the standard
Account Code assigned to the main activity type. (Refer to Acct. Codes for Paid Activities
and Acct. Codes for Unpaid Activities.)
6. Click Sub-Activity Colorto select a custom color for the sub-activity.
Deleting a Sub-Activity
To permanently remove a Sub-Activity:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Sub-Activities. The Select Activity Type dialog
displays.
2. Select an existing activity type, and click OK. The Sub-Activities dialog displays.
3. Select a sub-activity and click Delete.
Adding the Overtime Mode Menu Option

The Overtime Mode menu option allows the user to display overtime in Personnel Manager and
display the regular shift and overtime segments of the activity in Event Status colors. When Overtime
Mode is on and the user right-clicks a day on the Personnel Manager calendar then the event status
colors are displayed.
To add the Overtime Mode menu option:
1. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, select Developers Toolkit and click
Toolbar & Menus. The Preferences Editor dialog displays.
2. Select Personnel Manager and then click Edit Menu.
3. Click Personnel Manager and then right-click an existing menu item. Click Insert New Item.
The Insert New Menu Item dialog displays. The system adds the new item above the
selected item.
4. Select Overtime Mode from the list.
5. To enter a customized menu caption, use the Edit Menu Caption field.
6. Click OK, and then click OK to close the editor.

External Cost Manager

The setup process for External Cost Manager is similar to the setup for internal resources. Enter
resources by Category, Type, and line item Description – the three browser columns on the left side
of the scheduling view.

External Costs module. Refer to User Profiles and Security for general information. Refer to
External Costs Manager and Vendor Group for permissions which apply specifically to the
External Costs module.
Vendor Setup
The Vendor Setup area defines the companies or individuals from which external costs resources are
purchased, rented, or leased. The Vendor setup area is accessible only when External Cost Manager
is installed, and the user has the appropriate security permissions. (Refer to Can Maintain
Vendors?.)
Adding or Editing a Vendor
To add a vendor to the vendor catalog, or edit an existing vendor:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Vendors.
2. The Select Vendor dialog displays.
Figure 274. Select Vendor Dialog

3. Click New at the bottom of the dialog to create a new vendor, OR
Select an existing vendor and click Edit to modify the vendor. The Vendor properties dialog
displays.
4. Enter the vendor properties.
Deleting a Vendor
To permanently remove a vendor from the vendor catalog:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Vendors. The Select Vendor dialog displays.
2. Select an existing vendor and click the Delete button at the bottom of the dialog. A
confirmation dialog displays.
3. Click Yes to delete the vendor.

Vendor Properties – Main

The Main tab displays general business and contact information for the vendor. Table 180 describes
Figure 275. Vendor Properties, Main Tab

Table 180. Vendor Properties, Main Tab Options
Item Description
Vendor Name of the vendor.
Address, City, State, Street or mailing address of the vendor. (Refer to Payment Address,
Zip City, State, Zip for a different payment address.)
Contact Name of the primary contact person.
Alternate Name of an alternate contact person.
Website The World Wide Web site address of the vendor.
Product Category The general category of product or services supplied by the vendor. Enter
a category, or click the Find [...] button to select an existing category.
Status The account status with the vendor.
l Active indicates there is an ongoing relationship with this vendor.
l Inactive indicates no further orders are expected for this vendor.
Account # The account number supplied by the vendor.
Currency The currency used by the vendor.
Fax The fax telephone number of the vendor.
Phone The main telephone (voice) number of the vendor.
Alt Phone The alternate telephone (voice) number of the vendor.
E-Mail The e-mail address of the vendor.

Table 180. Vendor Properties, Main Tab Options (continued)
Item Description
Cost Calculation The method of calculating costs for the vendor.
l Actual Times indicates that the vendor is paid for the original time of
the booking only. This does not include Lead, Bumper, or Cleanup
times.
l Billable Times indicates that the vendor is paid for a specific amount
of time for providing a service. This time is specified on the Billable
Time tab of the Change Time dialog.
l Maximum Duration indicates that the vendor is paid for the original
time of the booking as well as any Lead, Bumper, and Cleanup times.
Notes Notes about the vendor. Enter text or click the small filled square to
access an internal text editor to type notes. Refer to Notes Editor.
Vendor Properties – Payment Information

The Payment Information tab displays the address and billing information used to submit payments to
the vendor. Table 181 describes the available settings.
Figure 276. Vendor Properties, Payment Information Tab

Table 181. Vendor Properties, Payment Information Tab Options
Item Description
Pay Attention to Name for the Attention line on the invoice.
Payment Address, City, Payment address, if different from the mailing address specified on the
State, Zip Main tab.
Credit Limit Maximum amount of goods and services that can be acquired from this
vendor before a payment is required.

Table 181. Vendor Properties, Payment Information Tab Options (continued)
Item Description
Payment Terms Billing terms by which the vendor is paid.
User Field 1 and 2 Optional user-defined fields.
Goodnight Email E-mail address for vendor notification when a work order is “Goodnighted”.
The Enforce Vendor Notifications upon Goodnight system preference
must be set to Yes. Refer to Enforce Vendor Notifications upon
Goodnight.
Goodnight Phone Phone number for vendor notification when a work order is “Goodnighted”.
The Enforce Vendor Notifications upon Goodnight system preference
must be set to Yes. Refer to Enforce Vendor Notifications upon
Goodnight.
Late Charges Apply Indicates if the vendor will charge late fees for payments received after the
indicated Payment Terms.
P.O. Required Indicates whether a purchase order is required to order from this vendor.
Vendor Properties – Resources Provided

The Resources Provided tab displays list of resources provided by the vendor. Table 182 describes
Figure 277. Vendor Properties, Resources Provided Tab

Table 182. Vendor Properties, Resources Provided Tab options
Item Description
Description Displays the resources provided by this vendor (alphabetically).
Vendor Catalog
Assign Displays the Select Resources dialog.
Select one or more resources and click Select to associate the resource
with the current vendor.
Release Removes a selected resource from the list.
Costs Displays the Vendor Cost Maintenance dialog.
Resource Base

Table 182. Vendor Properties, Resources Provided Tab options (continued)
Item Description
Insert Inserts a new type of resource for this vendor.
Delete Deletes the selected resource for this vendor.
Edit Edits the selected resource for this vendor.
Vendor Properties – Aliases

The Aliases tab tracks alternate trade or company names for the vendor. Vendor browsers display
both the actual name, and any aliases associated with a vendor.
To assign an alias name to a vendor:
1. Display the desired vendor. Refer to Adding or Editing a Vendor.
Figure 278. Vendor Setup, Main

2. Click the Aliases tab and then click Add Name. A dialog displays that allows you to enter the
alias name.
3. Enter an Also known as value to create an alias for the vendor. Click OK.
Figure 279. Vendor Setup, Add Alias Name

4. The alias is added to the Also Known As list. Select a name and click Delete Name to remove
an alias from the vendor.
Figure 280. Vendor Setup, Aliases Tab

5. The vendor name from the Main tab and the alias name are both shown on vendor browsers.
The alias name is dimmed.
Figure 281. Vendor Setup, Vendor Name and Alias

Vendor Properties – Other

The Other tab displays notes and shipping information. Table 183 describes the available settings.
Figure 282. Vendor Properties, Other Tab

Table 183. Vendor Properties, Other tab settings
Item Description
Notes to Scheduler Free-form notes to the scheduler. Click the small filled square to
ScheduALL ID (Read only.) Unique identification number for this vendor assigned by
the system. This field is for information purposes only.
External ID Another externally assigned identification number for this vendor.
Ship Via Type of preferred carrier.
Shipping Account # Account number for shipping via the preferred carrier.
Shipping Notes Free-form shipping notes. Click the small filled square to access an
Created by Name of user creating the vendor entry.
[Date] Date the entry was created.
Last Modified by Name of user modifying the vendor entry.
[Date] Date the entry was modified.

Managing Vendor Groups

Vendor groups combine vendors for security, filtering, and reporting purposes. Vendors can belong to
more than one group. Several dialogs, screens, and reports offer the ability to filter vendors by group,
and display small groups instead of long lists containing dozens of vendors. For example, group
vendors by vendor product, such as electronics, lighting, and catering, or group vendors by
geographic area to find services by regional availability.
Security permissions determine whether a user has access to vendors in vendor groups. Refer to
Security Settings, Vendor Group .
Viewing Vendor Groups

To display the Vendor Group Maintenance dialog:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Vendor Groups Setup.
2. Select a group from the Current Group list.
Figure 283. Vendor Group, Group Maintenance

Adding a Vendor Group

To create a new vendor group:
1. Display the Vendor Group Maintenance dialog as described in Viewing Vendor Groups.
2. Click New. The Group Name field displays.
Figure 284. Add Vendor Group

3. Enter the name of the new group and click Save.
Editing a Vendor Group

To modify a vendor group:
1. Display the Vendor Group Maintenance dialog as described in Viewing Vendor Groups.
2. Select a group from the Current Group list and click Edit.
3. Modify the Group Name if desired.
4. Select vendors in the Vendors list and click Add to add the vendors to the group. The selected
items display in the Item Description list.
5. To remove vendors from the group, select a vendor name in the Item Description list and click
Remove.
Copying and Deleting Vendor Groups

To create a new vendor group based on an existing group:
1. Select the group on which the new group will be based from the Current Group list.
2. Click Edit.
3. Type a name for the new group in the Group Name field.
4. Add vendors to or remove vendors from the Item Description list.
5. Click Save As to save the new vendor group.
To permanently remove a vendor group:
1. Select the group from the Current Group list.
2. Click Delete.
3. A confirmation dialog displays. Click Yes to permanently delete the vendor group.
Note: Deleting a vendor group does not delete the vendor entries assigned to the group. Refer to
Vendor Setup for information on deleting individual vendors.
External Cost Resource Setup

Resources provided by an external vendor are created and maintained using the same process and
setup dialogs as other (internal) resources.

Adding an External Cost Resource

This process describes how to configure a resource as an external cost. For additional information on
resource configuration, refer to Rooms and Resources.
3. Click New at the bottom of the Description column. The Resource Types dialog displays.
4. Select the Resource Type and click OK. The appropriate properties dialog displays.
5. Enter information on the Main tab:
a. Enter the Description.
b. Select Independent Confirmation to request an independent confirmation of resource
availability whenever the resource is booked.
c. Click Billing Rates to define the prices charged to a client. Set Markup Price? to Yes and
configure a markup percentage to base the client’s price on a markup of the vendor’s cost.
Refer to Service Setup for more information. Click OK.
a. Select (check) External Cost to identify the item as an External Cost.
b. Select (check) Requires Vendor Notification to indicate that the resource is supplied by
an outside vendor who requires notification when the resource is booked.
c. Select (check) Generate an Automatic P.O. to enable the automatic generation of
Purchase Orders for this resource. A purchase order is required to reconcile a resource
booking with a vendor invoice. Refer to Auto PO Generation Method.
7. Click the Identification tab (Personnel resources only) to bring that page forward.
a. Enter an External Reference to specify an optional reference number or description used
for other purposes to identify this resource. For example, enter the vendor’s invoice or part
number for the resource.
8. Click the Other tab to bring that page forward.
a. Click Select Vendors to select the vendors who provide this resource. The Select
Vendor dialog displays. Select a vendor and click Select to assign them to the resource.
b. Click Edit Costs to open the Vendor Cost Maintenance dialog, and specify the rates
charged by the vendor for this resource. Refer to Configuring Vendor Costs.
c. To remove the association between a vendor and the resource, select a vendor and click
Release. (Note: The vendor costs for the vendor remain in the system; if the vendor is
reassigned to the resource, the system assigns the existing prices by default.)
Configuring Vendor Costs
The Vendor Cost Maintenance dialog, shows the cost of the resource as charged by all vendors who
provide the resource. These are the fees paid to the vendor to acquire the resource. To display this
dialog, click Edit Costs on the Other tab of the Resource Setup dialog. Refer to Adding an External
Cost Resource for more information.

Figure 285. Vendor Cost Maintenance Dialog

To set the cost methods for this item:
1. Select the Time Method.
l Select Day/Night to define one cost for daytime hours, and a second cost for night or
non-business hours. The system enforces night costs for a specific period of time defined
for the entire system in System Preferences. Refer to General System Preferences.
l Select Time of Day to set two or more costs that take effect during specified hours. The
system enforces Time of Day costs during the specified hours on a per-resource basis,
allowing each resource to have different Time of Day periods.
2. Select the Quantity Pricing Method for the resource. Quantity pricing determines the cost
based on the number of items ordered, and is generally used to establish volume discount
costs for larger orders. For example, a vendor may charge $10 per unit for 1 to 10 units of VHS
tapes, and $8 per unit for 11 to 20 units. Absolute and Progressive methods affect all costs for
all vendors assigned to the resource, and require at least one absolute or progressive cost
entry for each rate card.
l Select Do not use to disable quantity pricing. The vendor bills all items at the same rate
regardless of the volume.
l Select Absolute to apply the cost of the highest applicable quantity category to all items. In
the VHS tape example given, if 20 tapes are ordered from the vendor, the total price is $160
(20 x $8.00). When using Absolute pricing, it is recommended set the system to re-evaluate
the price a quantity is changed (refer to Re-Evaluate Extended Price upon Quantity
Change).
l Select Progressive to apply each applicable level of quantity pricing to the appropriate
number of items. In the VHS tape example given, if 20 tapes are ordered, the total price is
$180 ((10 x $10.00 = $100) + (10 x $8.00 = $80)).
3. Select the Default Unit of Measure for all costs assigned to this item. This setting is used to
populate the Unit Of Measure column of individual cost entries.
4. Select (check) Extend Decimal Precision to extend the precision of the Unit Cost field to
five places to the right of the decimal point. (The default precision is two places to the right of
the decimal point.)
5. Select a vendor, and click Add to create a new vendor cost entry. Refer to Cost Entry Setup.
6. Select an existing cost entry and click Delete to remove an existing cost entry.

Cost Entry Setup

Table 184 describes the available settings for vendor cost entries. Refer to Configuring Vendor
Costs for an example of this dialog.
Table 184. Cost Rate settings
Column Description
Description Displays a tree structure. The first level of the tree structure displays
the vendor names for all vendors associated with the resource or
service. The second level of the tree structure displays individual cost
entries assigned to each vendor.
Unit of Measure Specifies the standard of measurement used to evaluate the numeric
Quantity.
Note: The Unit Of Measure specified for a cost entry overrides the
Default Unit of Measure set in System Preferences.
Quantity The number of units for which the cost will apply.
This column displays only when Quantity Price Method is set to
Absolute or Progressive.
Unit Cost The amount charged by the vendor for the booked Quantity.
Night Unit Cost The amount that the client will be charged for the booked Quantity
during the hours when Night Rates are in effect.
This column displays only when Time Method is set to Day/Night.
Zero Cost Determines if the cost of a specific rate entry is set to no charge. This
allows the vendor to set regular costs under certain conditions, and no
costs under other conditions.
l Select Yes and enter “0” in Unit Cost to verify that the price is “0”
for this rate.
l Select No if the Unit Cost field is any value other than “0”.
(Default.)
Effective Date Calendar date on which the rate takes effect.
specify a date.
Expiration Date Calendar date after which the rate no longer applies.
specify a date.
Start Time at which the cost takes effect. The Start and End times of one
cost cannot overlap the Start and End times of different cost on the
same day.
l Enter a time, or use the up or down arrows to specify a time.

Table 184. Cost Rate settings (continued)
Column Description
End Time after which the cost no longer applies.
M, T, W, T, F, S, S Days of the week on which the cost takes effect.
Currency Displays the currency in which the vendor will be paid.
Premium Determines if this cost entry is used to charge an initial amount based
on the time period in which the work order begins. Only the first
applicable Premium cost is applied to a work order if the work order
spans more than one Time of Day definition.
The Start and End times of a premium cost may overlap the Start and
End times of a non-premium cost on the same day.
The Start and End times for two premium costs cannot overlap on the
same day, and the Start and End times for two non-premium costs
cannot overlap on the same day.
For example, specify normal costs from 6 a.m. to 10 p.m., specify a
$150 premium cost from 6 a.m. to 8 a.m., and specify a $100 premium
cost from 8 a.m. to 9 a.m. The vendor charges the $150 premium plus
normal costs for a work order from 7 a.m. to 3 p.m. The vendor
charges the $100 premium plus normal costs for a work order from
8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.
This column displays only when Time Method is set to Time of Day
and Quantity Price Method is set to Progressive.
Created Info. Displays the name of the user who created the cost entry and the date
and time it was created.
Modified Info. Displays the name of the user who last updated the cost entry and the
date and time it was updated.
Organizing External Cost Resources

External cost resources offer the same flexibility as standard resources, and are defined by the same
three levels of organization: Category, Type, and Description. However, external cost resources may
be more expensive than standard resources, and may require additional management tasks to book,
such as requesting the item from a vendor and generating vendor invoices. To emphasize when items
are external costs and avoid using them except when necessary, it may be helpful to set up special
Categories and Types for external cost resources. The system allows the administrator to use any of
the following methods, or a combination of these methods.
Organizing by Category
Set up two Categories, one for internal cost items and one for external cost items. For example, in the
table below, the Cameras category contains cameras owned by the business, while the Cameras,
Rental category contains cameras rented from a vendor. This allows the scheduler to look for an
internal camera first, and makes it difficult to accidentally schedule a rental camera.

Category Type Internal External

Cameras Digital Cams Yes
Still Cams Yes
Cameras, Rental Digital Cams Yes
Still Cams Yes
Organizing by Type
Set up a general Category, and set up separate Types for internal and external cost items. For
example, in the table below, the Cameras category includes Types for internal items (Digital Cams,
Steady Cams, and Still Cams) as well as Types for external items (Digital Cams, Rental, etc.). This
allows a scheduler to find all cameras using the same category, and clearly indicates which
resources are internal and external.

Cameras Digital Cams Yes
Digital Cams, Rental Yes
Still Cams Yes
Still Cams, Rental Yes
Mixed Category and Type

Set up general Categories and Types, with internal and external cost items intermixed. For example,
in the table below, the Cameras category includes Types for different kinds of cameras, with both
internal and external resources in each Type. This allows a scheduler to view a list of all cameras of
the same type at the same time.

Cameras Digital Cams Yes Yes
Still Cams Yes Yes

Shipping
Shipping setup allows you to enter the people and addresses to which parcels will be shipped. This feature requires the
optional Shipping Module.
Shipping Setup Tasks

Perform the following setup tasks in the order presented.
Categories and Types – Create groupings of shipping items for ease of scheduling and reporting.
Categories identify broad groups of similar items, while Types identify more closely related items
within a Category. Refer to Resource Category Setup and Resource Type Setup.
Resources – Identify the General Resources or Stock items which can be shipped from the facility.
On the Accounting tab of the General Resource Properties or Stock Properties dialogs, select (check)
Shippable Item. Refer to Rooms and Resources.
Rooms – The repository for scheduled jobs. Rooms are the container where jobs can be scheduled,
tracked, and billed. Create a shipping room to perform shipping work separately from other jobs. Refer
to Rooms and Resources.
Work Order Form – The work order is the scheduled job in a room.
Shipping Services – Shipping services are a major component of the shipping process. In the
ScheduALL system, services are bundled resources that automate the booking of the same
combination of resources. In the Shipping module, services are used to distinguish the carrier, the
pricing, and the shipping priority. Examples of shipping services are: Priority Service, Federal Priority
Standard, and Priority Overnight. Refer to Is Ship Service?.
Client – In addition to the account information about clients, such as billing terms, credit limits,
special discounts, and contact information, the ScheduALL system maintains client-specific shipping
destination information. Refer to Adding Client Shipping Information.
Shipping Addresses – Recipient’s addresses. You can also enter shipping instructions and default
shipping services at the setup level. Refer to Adding a Shipping Address.
User Profiles and Security – Two areas of the Permissions dialog contain options related to the
Shipping module:
l Maintenance & Setup Areas contains permissions related to the setup of shipping services
and addresses, including:
l Can Add Shipping Services?, Can Delete Shipping Services?, and Can Edit Shipping
Services?. Refer to Shipping Services.
l Can Edit Shipping Addresses, Can View Shipping Addresses, and Can Delete
Shipping Addresses. Refer to Shipping Addresses.
l Can Edit Shipping Cost/Price for Ship Service. Refer to Can Edit Shipping
Cost/Price for Ship Service.
l Shipping contains permissions related to the use of shipping services in work orders. Refer to
Security Settings, Shipping .
Adding a Shipping Service

To create a new shipping service:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and then click Services. The Service Maintenance dialog
displays.
2. Click New at the bottom of the dialog. The Service Properties dialog displays.

3. Enter the pertinent information in the Main page, described in Service Properties – Main.
4. Click the Accounting tab to bring that page forward, and select (check) Is Ship Service? to
make the service available to the Shipping areas of the Work Order and Dub Order forms.
Figure 286. Service Properties Dialog, Accounting Tab

5. On the Other page, if the shipping service is provided by an outside vendor, such as a postal
carrier or shipping company, specify the vendor information:
a. Click Add Vendor to select one or more carriers that provide the current service.
b. Select a vendor and click Edit Costs to specify the cost charged by the external
vendor.
6. Enter any pertinent information in the Capable Rooms and Service Questions pages. Refer to
Service Properties – Capable Rooms and Service Properties – Service Questions.
7. Click OK to save all changes and close the Service dialog.
Adding Client Shipping Information

To display the Client Properties dialog, from the File menu, select Setup and then select Clients,
Contacts & Agencies. Refer to Client, Contact, and Agency Setup for information about creating
client entries.
The Shipping tab of the Client Properties dialog contains shipping information for the client. The
Shipping tab of the Contact Properties dialog contains the same fields for the Contact.
Note: A recipient is not necessarily a client. It is the person or company to receive the shipped items.
Figure 287. Client Properties Dialog, Shipping Tab

Table 185. Client Properties Dialog, Shipping Tab Items

Item Description
Client Ship Addresses Displays the addresses of the recipients of the client.
Browser
Add this Client Click to display the current client as a recipient and the corresponding
shipping information.
Select Click to select an existing shipping address from the shipping address
list. A new shipping address may be added at this time.
Release Click to release existing shipping address assigned to the client.
Delete Click to delete an existing shipping address from the screen. This will
delete the shipping address from the master list.
Default Ship Address Click to select the default address to be used when shipping.
Contact Ship Addresses Displays the shipping addresses of the client’s contact.
Browser
Adding a Shipping Address

Shipping addresses can be assigned to existing clients, or create new shipping addresses for
recipients who are not listed in your client list.
To add a shipping address of a recipient who is a client:
2. Select an existing client record and click Edit.
3. Click the Shipping tab to bring that page forward.
4. Click Add this Client to establish the client as a shipping destination.
To add a shipping address of a recipient who is not a client:
1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Shipping Addresses. The Shipping Addresses
Setup dialog displays. This command is available only under the following conditions:
l When the Shipping license is enabled, AND
l the permissions “Allow Access into Shipping Module?” and “Can View Shipping
Addresses” are set to Yes.
2. Click New to create a recipient. The Shipping Address Setup dialog displays.
3. Enter information on the following tabs:
l Shipping Address Setup - Main
l Shipping Address Setup - Other
Shipping Address Setup - Main
The Main tab contains address and shipping service information.

Figure 288. Shipping Address Setup Dialog, Main Tab

Table 186. Shipping Address Setup Dialog, Main Tab Items
Item Description
Recipient Displays person or company to receive shipped items.
From Displays the client name.
Address, City, State, Enter the client’s address, phone and fax numbers and e-mail address.
Zip, Zone, Country,
Phone, Fax, Alt Phone,
Email
Default Ship Service Click to select a default shipping service.
Ship Via Enter shipping method for client.
Account # Enter client’s account number for their shipping vendor.
Shipping Instructions Enter any notes relevant to shipping. Click the small filled square to
access an internal text editor.

Shipping Address Setup - Other

The Other tab contains user defined fields, external reference information, notes, and a log of when
the shipping destination was created and last modified.
Figure 289. Shipping Address Setup Dialog, Other Tab

Table 187. Shipping Address Setup Dialog, Other Tab Items
Item Description
User 1/User 2 Enter user-defined field. Change the names of the labels with
Developers Toolkit.
External Ref Add additional reference information.
Notes Enter any notes relevant to the shipping address. Click the small filled
square to access an internal text editor.
Created Displays the date when the entry was created.
Created by Displays the name of the user who created the entry.
Modified Displays the date when the entry was modified.
Modified by Displays the name of the last user who modified the entry.

Trouble Tickets
Prior to using the Trouble Ticket module for the first time, it is necessary to configure certain
parameters in the system. Refer to the topics in this sections for setup information.
Setting Up the Trouble Ticket Room

In the ScheduALL system, trouble ticket work orders are associated with a special trouble ticket
room. Trouble ticket rooms are assigned to a user or user group in User Preferences. This allows
users to add trouble tickets to a specific trouble ticket room related to their facility or area.
To set up a trouble ticket room:
1. If necessary, create a room to assign as the trouble ticket room. Refer to Rooms and
Resources.
2. To set up a trouble ticket room for a user, from the File menu, select User Preferences, select
General, then click the Options tab to bring that page forward, OR
To set up a trouble ticket room for a user group, from the File menu, select Supervisor
Options, then click User Profiles and Security. Click the Groups tab to bring that page
forward. Select a group and click All Preferences. The General Preferences dialog displays.
3. Locate the Trouble Ticket Room: entry and click the Value field.
4. Click the ... button and select All Rooms from the Select Group list.
5. Select the room to be used as the trouble ticket room and click Select.
6. Click OK.
For more information, refer to User Preferences and User Profiles and Security.
Setting Up Trouble Ticket Access

Access to trouble ticket information can be limited by user or user group. For example, you may want
one user group to be able to view trouble ticket notes, but not be able to change them.
Refer to Scheduling Area Profile for settings related to editing and viewing trouble ticket notes and
permission to create trouble tickets.
Refer to Trouble Ticket Status for trouble ticket status permissions.
Setting Up Trouble Ticket System Preferences

Refer to System Preferences – System Options Tab, System Options section for information on
setting up trouble ticket defaults.
Setting Up Trouble Ticket Filters

When creating trouble tickets, users will select filter values. Before using the Trouble Ticket module,
configure the list of values for the following fields:
l Cause
l Service Type
l Control Center
l Problem Source
l TX Type
l Impact
l Severity

To create or modify a list of values for a trouble ticket field:

1. From the File menu, select Setup and click Trouble Ticket Setup. The Trouble Ticket Filters
dialog displays.
Figure 290. Trouble Ticket Filters Dialog

2. Click the button for the list you want to modify. The Select dialog displays.
Figure 291. Trouble Ticket Filters, Select Dialog

3. To create a new entry for the list, click New. To modify an existing entry, click the entry and
click Edit. The General Pick List Entry dialog displays.
Figure 292. Trouble Ticket Filters, General Pick List Entry Dialog

4. Enter a new value or modify the existing value.
5. Click OK.
6. To delete an entry, select it and click Delete.

Ch. 5 Using Developer’s
Toolkit
This chapter describes Developers Toolkit, and includes instructions on customizing ScheduALL dialogs,
toolbars, menus, and reports.
In This Chapter
Developers Toolkit Overview 676

Customizing a Browser Column 676
Customizing a Dialog 680
Dialog Format Conventions 700
Customizing a Toolbar 705
Customizing a Menu 712
Customize a Report 714
Standard Settings 715
Import or Export DTK Forms 716
Predefined Hotkey Combinations 716
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Ch. 5 Using Developer’s Toolkit
Developers Toolkit Overview

The ScheduALL Developers Toolkit (DTK, also known as Adaptive Framework) allows the supervisor
to customize nearly 90% of the elements displayed to users. The Toolkit allows the supervisor to
modify and tailor dialog screens for the different user groups in your facility. Use the Developers
Toolkit to make changes to dialogs, toolbars, menus, and reports.
The DTK dialogs indicate which elements have been customized and which correspond to the
standard defaults. The DTK also offers the option to view the default version of the dialog or menu,
and reset a custom dialog or menu to the default.
Access to the Developers Toolkit requires supervisory rights, or the appropriate permissions to
access the DTK. For information on customizing the ScheduLINK interface, refer to Updating the
ScheduLINK Interface.
From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click Developers Toolkit.
l Click Dialog Editor to modify dialog screens. Refer to Customizing a Dialog.
l Click Toolbar & Menus to add or remove toolbar buttons or menu items. Refer to
Customizing a Toolbar and Customizing a Menu.
l Click Crystal Reports to launch the Crystal Reports™ application and create reports
customized for your facility. Refer to Customize a Report.
Customizing a Browser Column

The Developers Toolkit allows a user with supervisory rights to modify the columns of a browser element directly in an
open dialog window, in addition to modifying the dialog by opening the Developers Toolkit Dialog Editor. The user can
add or delete a column, or change the properties of an existing column from a right-click menu in an open dialog.
Displaying Column Commands

Right-click any column header in a browser. A shortcut menu displays.
Figure 293. Right-click Commands

Table 188. Right-click Command Settings

Command Action
Column Properties Allows the supervisor to view or modify the current column settings,
including the data source and format. Refer to Column Properties.
Delete Column Removes the selected column.
Insert New Column Adds a new column to the left of the selected column, and allows the
supervisor to specify column settings, including the data source and
format. Refer to Column Properties.
Move Column Allows the user to select a second column, and moves the original
column to the left of the second column.
Append a New Column Adds a new column in the right-most position in the browser, and
allows the supervisor to specify column settings, including the data
source and format. Refer to Column Properties.
Reset to Factory Defaults Erases all changes and returns the column to the original ScheduALL
standard settings.
Save Current Setup Saves the modified browser configuration and optionally assigns it to a
user group.
Load Another Setup Imports a browser configuration assigned to a different user group.
Column Properties
The Column Properties dialog, determines what is displayed in a single column of a browser element,
and how it is displayed.
Figure 294. COLUMN PROPERTIES DIALOG

To define the column properties:
1. Select the Source. The Source field lists the names of database tables that contain the
information to be displayed. The list of sources varies based on the purpose of the dialog. For
example, the Work Order form is linked to work order and resource booking information.

l Tables contain primary information directly related to the dialog.

l Records (R:) provide data objects which are centralized, unique, and linked to many other
items, such as the Resource Base table.
l Virtual Records (VR:) provide data objects in sub-tables of a Record table, such as the
Resource sub-tables (Equipment, Personnel, Room, and Stock tables).
l Table Extensions (TE:) provide extended information directly related to the dialog. For
example, Work Order dialogs contain extensions for Duplication work orders.
l Table References (TR:) provide secondary information related to the dialog. For example,
Work Order dialogs provide references to certain client information.
2. Select one of the following Source table options to define the data to be displayed:
l Fields reference the data contained in a field in a ScheduALL database table. For example,
the Name field in the Client table contains the client’s name).
l Functions describe actions performed on information, such as a calculation, a count, or
other type of formula. For example, “Unit Price * Quantity” arrives at a calculated total.
l References are fields in a related or linked table. For example, the “Account Executive
Name” reference uses the Account Exhaustive ID to determine the name of the account
executive.
3. Select the data element to display in the column from the list.
4. Enter a Title to specify the default column heading.
5. Select column options from the following tabs: Main, Language, and Advanced. Some
elements have specific functions, and are only for use in certain areas of the ScheduALL
application. Table 189 describes the available settings.
Table 189. Column Properties Dialog Settings
Item Description
Main
[Data Type] Choose the data type from the list. The available choices are determined
by the selected source field, function, or reference. For example, if the
Absolute End Time field is the source, the data type list contains time and
date types.
Field Length Determines the number of digits in a numeric field.
Decimal Length Determines the number of characters to the right of the decimal point in a
numeric field.
Left Justified Determines the alignment of the displayed data compared to the
Right Justified boundaries of the column. Columns displaying numeric values are
automatically right justified. Columns displaying text are automatically left
justified.
Language
English, Spanish, Enter column titles in alternate languages. The system displays alternate
French, etc. titles when the user selects the language on the ScheduALL Log In dialog.
Advanced
Set Icon Select an icon to add to the column heading on the side opposite the text
justification. For example, if the text is Left Justified, the icon displays on
the right side of the column.

Table 189. Column Properties Dialog Settings (continued)
Item Description
Clear Icon Remove the assigned icon from the column heading.
Editable Select (check) to allow a user to type new information directly into the
browser column.
PickList Select (check) to display a list of appropriate selections. (The Editable
option must be selected.)
Multiline Select (check) to allow text to wrap to the next line. Row height changes
based on the number of lines displayed.
Deselect (clear) to force all text to remain on one line. Text longer than the
column width is not visible, and row height remains constant.
Don’t Indent Select (check) to force all text to the left of the line. Child/Parent hierarchy
is not displayed by indenting lines.
Fly-Over Text? Select (check) to display information when the user hovers the mouse
pointer over the column entry.
Select a Source and select Fields, Functions, or References to display a
single item in the flyover.
Select a Display View to apply a display view template. (Option is only
available on the Description column of the main Schedule dialog. Refer to
Display View for Resource Flyover - ScheduALL and Display View
for Resource Flyover - ScheduLINK.)
Column Size
To resize a column, drag the line that separates column headings to the left or right until the column
reaches the desired size.
Figure 295. Re-size a Column

Customizing a Dialog
Dialog windows are the backbone of the ScheduALL user interface. Dialogs display information from various tables in
the ScheduALL database, and enable users to view and modify entries. Each dialog is made up of controls, and may
use tabs to organize the information.
Editing a Dialog
The Dialog Editor is used to make changes to the default dialogs in ScheduALL (also known as
factory dialogs). Follow these steps to open and modify a dialog.
Dialog Editor. The Select Dialog displays.
Figure 296. Select Dialog Dialog

2. Select a dialog name. A dialog name displays in red if the dialog has been modified previously.
3. Select the User Group or Room that will use the customized dialog (optional).
4. Select (check) Simple Mode to modify the dialog displayed when the user toggles Simple
Mode on (optional).

5. Click Edit. The DTK displays the dialog in “Build Mode” and allows the supervisor to add,
reorder, or remove tabs; add new fields; and modify or remove existing fields.
Figure 297. Dialog Editor Dialog
Right-Click Menu
Right-click any blank space in the dialog to access dialog-wide menu commands. Right-click a dialog
element to access item-specific commands. These commands are listed in Table 190.
Table 190. Right-Click Menu Options
Menu Option Description

Dialog-Wide Commands
Form Properties Renames the dialog, as displayed in the Dialog Editor only. For example,
edit the Work Order dialog for the Schedulers User Group, and name the
modified form “Schedulers Work Order.”
Make New Tab Insert a new tab as the last page of the dialog.
Delete Current Tab Removes the currently active tab from the dialog.
Move Current Tab... Specifies the location for the active page in the page order. The DTK
numbers the pages from left to right. For example, to make the current
page the third page from the left, enter the number 3 and click OK.

Table 190. Right-Click Menu Options (continued)
Menu Option Description

Move Current Tab Moves the currently active page one position to the right in the page order.
Forward
Move Current Tab Moves the currently active page one position to the left in the page order.
Backward
Change Tab(Page) Renames the tab. Enter the new name when prompted and click OK.
Name
Grid Size Specifies the spacing between points of the design grid displayed on the
Dialog Editor screen. The maximum grid size is 35 points.
Show Grid Displays the background design grid. This menu option only displays if the
Grid Size is between 6 and 36, and the grid is currently hidden.
Hide Grid Removes the background design grid. This menu option only displays if
the Grid Size is between 6 and 36, and the grid is currently visible.
Save Format Saves all changes.
Select Room Displays the Room Selection dialog, and allows the user to assign the
current dialog to one or more Rooms as a room-specific dialog.
Item-Specific Commands
Object Properties Displays the appropriate object Properties dialog.
Bring to Front Displays the selected element in front of all other display elements.
Send to Back Displays the selected element behind all other display elements.
Delete Object Permanently removes the element from the dialog.
Cut Removes the element from the dialog and holds it in memory.
Copy Creates a duplicate of the selected element and places it on the Clipboard.
Paste Places an element from the Clipboard onto the dialog at a new location.
This menu option only displays when the clipboard contains information
that can be pasted.
Control Tools
The Control Tools toolbar is located along the left edge of the Dialog Editor screen, and allows the
user to add buttons, fields, and visual separators to a dialog.
In This Section
Activating Control Tools 683

Picture Button Control 686
Static Control 687
Edit Controls 688
Checkbox Control 689
Time and Date Controls 690

Listbox and Combobox Controls 691

Horizontal and Vertical Line Controls 691
Browser Controls 692
Set Tab Order 692
Pick List Controls 693
Picture Control 694
Multimedia Controls 695
Linked PickList Button 695
Activating Control Tools

Click a tool to activate it. The cursor displays the tool icon, indicating the currently active tool. Click
and drag the mouse to “draw” the control on the dialog, and if necessary, drag the bounding box to
resize the control. Table 191 contains a list of all available control tools.
Figure 298. Drawing and Resizing Controls

Table 191. Control Tools
Icon Control Name Description

Selection Tool Selects, moves, and resizes dialog elements.
Picture Button Adds a button that carries out a specified command when clicked. The
Control button consists of a graphic, some text, or both. Refer to Picture
Button Control.
Static Control Adds text labels to describe information displayed in another control,
and rectangular borders which can be used as visual dividers. Refer to
Static Control.
Edit Control Adds a field that displays text or number information, and allows the
user to enter new information or modify existing information. Refer to
Edit Controls.
Read-Only Edit Adds a field that displays text or number information, but does not
Control allow the user to enter new information or modify existing information.
Refer to Edit Controls.

Table 191. Control Tools (continued)

Checkbox Control Adds a button that consists of a check box and a text label. The check
box indicates whether an option is true (enabled, checked, or selected)
or false (disabled, cleared, or deselected). Refer to Checkbox
Control.
Time Control Adds a spin box that displays the time in hours and minutes, with
controls to increase or decrease a selected portion of the time. Refer
to Time and Date Controls.
Time with Seconds Adds a spin box that displays the time in hours, minutes, and
Control seconds, with controls to increase or decrease a selected portion of
the time. Refer to Time and Date Controls.
Date Control Adds a field that displays the date with a calendar button to launch the
Pop-Up Calendar. Refer to Time and Date Controls.
Timecode Control Adds a spin box that displays a field of data in hours, minutes,
seconds, and frames, with controls to increase or decrease a selected
portion of the time. Refer to Time and Date Controls.
Listbox Control Adds a graphic area that displays a preview of an image, audio, or
other external file. Refer to Listbox and Combobox Controls.
Combobox Control Adds a field that displays a selected item, with a list box to view all
available selections. Refer to Listbox and Combobox Controls.
Horizontal Line Adds a horizontal line to the dialog as a visual separator. Refer to
Control Horizontal and Vertical Line Controls.
Vertical Line Adds a vertical line to the dialog as a visual separator. Refer to
Control Horizontal and Vertical Line Controls.
Browser Control Adds an empty browser object which displays columns and rows of
data and allows the user to specify browser columns. The control is
also used to display other specialized browsers, such as tree
structures. Refer to Browser Controls for more information.
Set Tab Order Displays the order in which display elements are highlighted or
selected when the user presses the Tab key, and allows the
supervisor to change the order. Refer to Set Tab Order.
PickList Button Adds a button that launches a dialog box that allows the user to select
an item from a general pick list, and add, edit, or delete list items in the
general pick list. General pick-lists are tied to a particular table and
field from the database, usually a “User” field, and provide the same
values and selections for all forms/dialogs in the system. Refer to
Pick List Controls.

Table 191. Control Tools (continued)

PickListEx Button Adds a button that launches a dialog box that allows the user to select
an item from a context-specific list, and add, edit, or delete items in
the context-specific list. Context-specific pick-lists are tied to a
particular table and field from the database, usually a “User” field, and
provide different values or selections for each form or dialog in the
system. Refer to Pick List Controls.
Picture Control Adds a viewing window that displays either a static icon or the color
setting of a field, such as a selected Activity Color. Refer to Picture
Control.
Mufti-Media Control Adds a viewing window that displays an image, sound, or animation
file. Refer to Multimedia Controls.
Clear Field Value Adds a button which clears all information from the specified data field
Control on the current dialog. This control is not necessary for a combo box
control which allows the user to type the first few letters of an entry to
display a filtered list ("type ahead" combo box controls). This type of
control has a built in clear button.
Note: Some fields have related custom clear field value controls.
These controls may have additional functionality, such as
clearing related fields. When a field has a custom clear field
value control, it should be used in place of the generic control
discussed here.
Linked PickList Adds a pick list that is filtered based on the values stored in another
Button field, usually a text (Edit Control) field. Refer to Linked PickList
Button.
Bitmap Control Adds a viewing window that displays an image in the Bitmap (.bmp)
format. Files used as bitmap controls should be placed in a shared
network location.
Notes Control Adds a viewing window that displays the contents of a text file in .txt
format. Files used as notes controls should be placed in a shared
network location.

Picture Button Control
The Picture Button Control adds a button that carries out a specified command when clicked. The
button consists of a graphic, text, or both.
To place a Picture Button Control on a dialog or tab:
1. Click Picture Button Control on the toolbar.
2. Click and drag to draw the button. The Button Properties dialog displays.
Figure 299. Button Properties Dialog

3. Enter a Caption for the button in the desired language.
4. Select a Command from the list.
5. Click the Button Layout tab to bring that page forward, and choose a layout option for the
button from the following styles:
l Text Only displays text with no icon.
l Icon Only displays an icon with no text.
l Icon Left displays an icon aligned to left edge of button, with text to the right of the icon.
l Icon Right displays an icon aligned to right edge of button, with text to the left of the icon.
l Icon Top displays an icon above the text, centered horizontally.
l Icon Bottom displays an icon below the text, centered horizontally.
6. Click the Button Text FX tab to bring that page forward, and choose a format for the button
text:
l 2D displays simple black text.
l 3D and Raised makes the text appear higher than the surrounding dialog.
l 3D and Indented makes the text appear lower than the surrounding dialog.
7. Click the Button Icon tab to bring that page forward, and select an icon image (optional).
For each Picture Button on the dialog, it is also necessary to add a control to display the results of the
action. Refer to Edit Controls or Time and Date Controls.

Static Control
The Static Control adds text labels to describe information displayed in another control, and
rectangular borders which can be used as visual dividers.
To place a Static Control on a dialog or tab:
1. Click Static Control on the toolbar.
2. Click and drag to draw the button. The Add Static Text dialog displays.
Figure 300. Add Static Text Dialog

3. Select the Justify setting (Left, Center, or Right) to determine the location.
4. Select the Border Style:
l Plain draws a single line around the text area.
l None does not draw a visible border around the text area.
l Raised makes the control appear higher than the surrounding dialog.
l Dipped makes the control appear lower than the surrounding dialog.
5. Enter Text in the desired language.
6. Click OK to save the static control properties.

Edit Controls
The Edit Control adds a field that displays text, and allows the user to enter new information or modify
existing information. The Read-Only Edit Control adds a field that displays text, but does not allow
the user to enter new information or modify existing information.
To place an Edit Control or Read-Only Edit Control on a dialog or tab:
1. Click Edit Control or Read-Only Edit Control on the toolbar.
2. Click and drag to draw the button. The Field Properties dialog displays.
Figure 301. Field Properties Dialog

3. Select the Source table, record (R:), virtual record (VR:), table extension (TE:), or table
reference (TR:). Available sources vary based on the dialog to which an element is being
added.
4. Click Fields, Functions, or References to display the available fields in the Field list.
5. Select the Field from the list.
6. On the Main tab, select the Data Type from the list.
l Set the Field Length and Decimal Length if appropriate.
l Select (check) Multi-Line to allow text to “wrap” to new lines inside a text area.
l Select (check) Scrollers to display horizontal and/or vertical scroll bars when the text in the
field does not fit into the visible text area.
l Select (check) Read Only to prevent the user from changing the field.


8. Select (check) Mandatory option to force the user to make an entry into an Edit Control before
closing the dialog. (This option is not applicable for a Read-Only Edit Control.)
l Enter a User Prompt to customize the message that displays when the user attempts to
exit the dialog without making an entry.
l Use Apply Mandatory From to assign a status after which a selection is required.
9. Enter a Default Initial Value for the field, if applicable.
l Enter a Field Mask to format displayed data using a field-specific template without altering
the stored data. The data must correspond to a fixed number of characters.
l “A” displays only alphabetic characters.
l “N” displays only alphabetic or numeric characters.
l “X” displays any character.
l “9” displays only numeric characters.
l Use any other character to create the display mask. For example, if a user field stores a
two-character building identifier and three digit room identifier (such as DG125, DG127,
DG129 etc.), enter “Bldg. AA Room 999” to format the information.
10. Click OK to save the field properties.
Checkbox Control
The Checkbox Control adds a button that consists of a check box and a text label. The control
indicates if an option is true (enabled or checked) or false (disabled or cleared).
To place a Checkbox Control on a dialog or tab:
1. Click Checkbox Control on the toolbar.
2. Click and drag to draw the control. The Field Properties dialog displays. Refer to Edit
Controls.
Figure 302. Field Properties Dialog, Checkbox Control

added.
Note: Select the Field from the list. A field that is associated with a Boolean data type will
automatically display “Numeric” on the Main tab, and display “1” in Field Length.
Note: The term “Flag” in the field name generally indicates a field that is compatible with a
check box control.
5. Enter a Title for the control. The system assumes text in the Title box is an English-language
title.
6. Select (check) Read Only to prevent the user from changing the field setting.
8. Select (check) Mandatory option to force the user to make an entry into an Edit Control before
closing the dialog. (This option is not applicable for a Read-Only Edit Control.)
l Enter a User Prompt to customize the message that displays when the user attempts to
exit the dialog without making an entry.
l Use Apply Mandatory From to assign a status after which a selection is required.
9. To select (check) the check box by default, enter “1” in the Initial Default Value field. The
new default value only applies to items created after the dialog is saved. For example, if a
check box is added to the work order, only new work orders use the new default.
10. Click the Language tab to bring that page forward. Enter titles in additional languages. The
system displays alternate titles based on the language selected in the ScheduALL Log In
dialog.
Time and Date Controls
The Time Control adds a spin box that displays the time in hours and minutes, with controls to
increase or decrease a selected portion of the time. The Time with Seconds Control adds a spin box
that displays the time in hours, minutes, and seconds, with controls to increase or decrease a
selected portion of the time. The Date Control adds a field that displays the date with a calendar
button to launch the Pop-Up Calendar. The Timecode Control adds a spin box that displays a field of
data in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames, with controls to increase or decrease a selected portion
of the time.
To place a time or date control on a dialog or tab:
1. Click Time Control, Time with Seconds Control, Date Control, or Timecode Control on
the toolbar.
Controls.
added.

5. From the Field list, select the appropriate field. A field or function that is associated with a
time or date data type offers format choices for Date Short Format (mm/dd/yy), Date/Time,
Day of Week, Time, Time with Seconds, and Unformatted Time.
6. Select (check) Read Only to prevent the user from editing the time or date setting.
8. Select the Mandatory option with a User Prompt and enter an Initial Default Value if
applicable.
10. Place a Static Control to label the time or date control. Refer to Static Control.
Listbox and Combobox Controls
The Listbox Control adds a graphic area that displays a preview of an image, audio, or other external
file. A Combobox Control adds a field that displays a selected item, with a list box to view all
available selections.
To place a Listbox or Combobox Control on a dialog or tab:
1. Click Listbox Control or Combobox Control on the toolbar.
Controls.
added.
Horizontal and Vertical Line Controls
The Horizontal Line Control adds a horizontal line to the dialog as a visual separator. The Vertical Line
Control adds a vertical line to the dialog as a visual separator. Use lines to organize elements on a
dialog by arranging them in logical groups or by separating unrelated elements.
To place a horizontal or vertical line on a dialog:
1. Click the Horizontal Line Control or Vertical Line Control on the toolbar.
2. Click and drag to draw a line on the dialog. The line is 2 points wide, and remains centered in
the specified bounding box.
3. Resize or move the line as necessary.
5. To place a 2D or 3D box on a dialog or tab, refer to Static Control.

Browser Controls
The Browser Control adds an empty browser object which displays columns and rows of data and
allows the user to specify browser columns. The control is also used to display other specialized
browsers, such as tree structures.
To place a browser Control on a dialog or tab:
1. Click Browser Control on the toolbar.
Click and drag to draw the control. The Browser Filter Selection dialog displays. Filters group
together information from the ScheduALL database tables, and determine what information
can be added to the browser as columns.
2.
Figure 303. Browser Filter Selection Dialog
3. Select a filter and click OK. A blank browser Control object displays.
4. Standard browsers display a column heading area, Select All and Deselect All buttons, a scroll
bar, and To Top, Scroll Up, Scroll Down, and To Bottom buttons. These browsers display
information similar to a spreadsheet view with columns and rows.
5. Tree browsers display default columns, and do not offer the selection and scrolling controls of
a standard browser. These browsers display information in a tree structure, with subordinate
items indented below their “parent” item.
6. Non-standard browsers display specialized buttons, controls, and viewing areas.
7. Right-click the solid black heading bar and click Append a New Column. The Column
Properties dialog displays. Refer to Column Properties.
8. Add columns to the browser as described in Customizing a Browser Column.
Set Tab Order
The Set Tab Order Control displays the order in which display elements are highlighted or selected
when the user presses the Tab key, and allows the supervisor to change the order.
To change to the order for elements on a dialog or tab:

1. Click Set Tab Order to display the tab order setting for each existing element.
Figure 304. Tab Order Display

2. To change the tab order for a single element, click the display element. The element changes
the priority of “1” (first to be selected) and each subsequent click moves the priority of the
element down the priority list (“2” for second, “3” for third, etc.). All other elements on the dialog
automatically adjust in the priority list.
3. To change the tab order for multiple elements, click each element in order. The first element is
assigned the priority of “1” (first to receive focus) and each subsequent element is assigned
the next available priority (“2” for second, “3” for third, etc.). All other elements on the dialog
automatically adjust in the priority list.
Pick List Controls
The PickList Button Control adds a button that presents the Select dialog and allows the user to
select an item from a list. List entries are based on the associated database field, independent of the
current context (form or dialog). For example, a PickList button for “User Field 1" (in the Work Order
table) offers the same entries when it is added to the Work Order Form (Standard) and Work Order
Form (Extended) dialogs.
The PickListEx Button control adds a button that presents the Select dialog and allows the user to
select an item from a list. List entries are based on the associated database field, specific to the
current context. For example, a PickList button for “User Field 1" (in the Resource Base table) offers
different entries when it is added to the Room Setup and Personnel Setup dialogs.
Both controls allow the user to add, edit, or delete list items in the pick list.
Figure 305. Select Dialog

To place a PickList Button on a dialog or tab:
1. Click PickList Button to create a general pick list button, or click PickListEx Button to
create a context-specific pick list button.
2. Click and drag to draw the button. The Field Properties dialog displays. Refer to Checkbox
Control.

added.
4. Select Fields, Functions, or References to display the available fields.
5. Select the Field.
6. Enter a Title for the button. The system assumes that text entered in the Title box is an
English-language title. Click the Language tab to enter a title in another language.
7. Change the data type and specify a Field Length and Decimal Length if necessary.
l Select (check) Multi-Line to allow text to “wrap” to new lines inside a text area.
l Select (check) Scrollers to display horizontal and/or vertical scroll bars when the text in the
field does not fit into the visible text area.
l Select (check) Read Only to prevent the user from changing the field.
8. Add an Edit Control to display the associated field and allow the user to enter a different value
manually, or add a Read-Only Edit Control to display the associated field and force the user to
chose from the pick list. Refer to Edit Controls.
Picture Control
To add a picture control to display an icon on a dialog or tab:

1. Click Picture Control on the toolbar.
2. Click and drag to draw the control. The Picture Type dialog displays.
3. Click Select Icon and click OK. The Select Icon dialog displays.
4. Click an icon and click Select.
To add a picture control to display a color field or external image file on a dialog or tab:
1. Click Picture Control on the toolbar.
2. Click and drag to draw the control. The Picture Type dialog displays.
3. Click Select Field and click OK. The Field Properties dialog displays. Refer to Edit Controls.
added.
5. Select Fields, Functions, or References to display the available fields.
6. Select the Field. (Fields which store a color value generally contain the word “Color”, such as
Activity Color or User Color 1. Fields which contain an external file name generally contain the
words “Bitmap” or “File”, such as User Bitmap 1 or Associated File 1.)

Multimedia Controls
The Multimedia Control adds a viewing window that displays a preview of an associated file. The path
of the associated file is retrieved from the specified field in the database; It is recommended to place
all associated files in the same folder. The combined path and file name must be less than 59
characters. Supported file types include the following:
l Bitmap images: Windows Bitmap images (BMP) and JPEG images (JPG, JPEG, JPE)
l Audio files: WaveAudio (WAV) and MIDI (MID)
l Movie files: Microsoft AVI (AVI), Quicktime (MOV), and MPEG (MPG, MPEG, MPE)
l Text, word processing, or spreadsheet: Plain Text (TXT), Microsoft Word (DOC), and
Microsoft Excel (XLS)
Image files display a preview image. Audio files and movie files display a Media Control Interface
preview; click Play to preview the file. Text, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel documents display
a document icon; double-click the icon to open the file in the appropriate application.
To place a Multimedia Control on a dialog:
1. To display the path and file name, place a Read-Only Edit Control on the dialog. Select the
field name (e.g. Associated File 1) from the list of available fields.
2. Click the Multimedia Control tool, and drag to draw the control on the dialog. In the Field
Properties dialog, select the field name (e.g. Associated File 1) from the list of available
fields.
4. To launch the operating system’s standard Open File dialog box, add a Picture Button Control.
Choose “Select Associated File” from the list of available commands; commands which
launch the Open File dialog generally start with the word Select. Refer to Picture Button
Control.
5. To display the path and file name add a Read-Only Edit Control. Refer to Edit Controls.
Linked PickList Button
The Linked PickList Button allows an administrator to add a button that presents the Select dialog and
allows the user to select an item from a list. List entries are filtered based on the value in a separate
field. The value selected from the list is stored in a text field.
To add a Linked PickList Button to a dialog:

1. Log on to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with permissions to Developers Toolkit.
2. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options, select Developers Toolkit, and
click Dialog Editor.
3. Select a dialog and click Edit.
4. On a tab, locate or add a text input field (Edit Control) to serve as the field in which the
selected value will be stored.

5. Click the Linked PickList Button tool and draw a new button on the dialog. The Field
Figure 306. Field properties Dialog

6. Apply the following settings:
a. In the Source list, select the current table (the table on which the dialog is based).
b. Click Fields to select the source type.
c. In the Field: list, select the field in which the selected value will be stored.
d. Enter a Title to be displayed on the button.
7. Click the Data Binding tab to bring that page forward. Apply the following settings:
a. In the Table list, select the current table (the table on which the dialog is based).
b. In the Column list, select the field by which the pick list will be filtered.
c. Click OK.
8. Click OK to save the dialog.
9. Click Close to close the Select dialog.
To use the new control:

1. Open the form on which the Linked PickList button was placed.
2. Enter a value in the field by which the pick list will be filtered.
3. Click the Linked PickList button that was created in Step above. The Select dialog displays.
Figure 307. Select Dialog

Figure 308. General Pick List Dialog

5. Enter the Pick-List Value to be display in the filter list. Click OK.
6. Select the new item in the Description column and click Select. The field used to store the
value displays the new value.
7. Enter a different value in the field by which the pick list will be filtered.
8. Click the Linked PickList button. The Select dialog displays.
10. Enter the Pick-List Value to display in the filter list. Click OK.
11. Select the new item in the Description column and click Select. The field used to store the
value displays the new value.
12. In the field by which the pick list will be filtered, enter the original value entered in Step above.
13. Click the Linked PickList button. Note that the pick list item changes. Select the item and click
Select.
14. In the field by which the pick list will be filtered, enter the value originally entered in Step
above.
15. Click the Linked PickList button. Note that the pick list item changes. Select the item and click
Select.
Note: If an ID field is used as the Data Binding source, the reference filter must be entered as the ID
value, not the resolved ID text.
Working with Controls

This section describes how to select, move, resize, and align controls on a dialog or tab.
Selecting Controls
Click a control once to select it. A bounding box displays around the control to indicate it is selected.
To select multiple controls:
l Hold the Shift or Ctrl keys and click multiple controls, OR
l Click and drag to draw a selection or “marquee” box around multiple items to select each
control touched by the box.
To deselect all controls, click an unoccupied area of the dialog or tab. To deselect one control from a
group of selected controls, hold the Ctrl key and click the control.
Moving a Control
Select one or more controls. A bounding box displays around each selected control. Drag from any
point inside a bounding box to move the controls. Controls can also be moved one pixel at a time by
pressing any of the arrow keys on the keyboard.

Resizing a Control
Select a control. A bounding box displays around the control.
l Drag the top or bottom of the bounding box to resize the height of the element.
l Drag the left or right side of the bounding box to resize the width of the element.
l Drag the corners of the bounding box to size both height and width of the element.
Deleting a Control
Note: The Undo Last Action button on the DTK toolbar does not apply to deleting a control.
To delete one or more controls, select the control or group of controls and press the Delete key, or
use the right-click menu.
Using Cut, Copy, and Paste

To duplicate a control or move the control to another tab:
1. Right-click a control.
2. Click Cut to place the control on the clipboard and remove the original, OR
Click Copy to place a duplicate of the control on the clipboard and leave the original intact.
3. Right-click the new destination, and click Paste.
To copy or move a control to another dialog, the target dialog must have access to the appropriate
tables or commands. For example, the Agency Form, Client Form, and Contact Form dialogs all have
access to the Client Table, so it is possible to copy controls that reference the Client Table between
these dialogs. However, it is not possible to copy controls between the Client Form and the Client
Activity Log dialogs, because the dialogs do not have access to the same tables.
Overlapping Controls
Two commands are used to stack or overlap controls, so that all controls are visible and usable. This
is particularly helpful when using a Static Control as a border box.
l Right-click a control and click Bring to Front to place the control in front of all other controls.
l Right-click a control and click Send to Back to place the control behind all other controls.

Aligning and Sizing Controls

The alignment tools align and size controls to each other. For example, these tools allow the
supervisor to align a Picture Button and an Edit Control side by side, and make the controls the same
height. To use an existing control as the base, hold Shift and click the control; the bounding box
displays a darker gray for the item with specific priority. If no control is selected using the Shift key,
the system uses a default base.
Table 192. Align and Size Controls
Icon Name Description

Align Along Left Aligns the left edges of all selected controls to the base. The default
base is the control furthest to the left.
Center Horizontally Aligns the horizontal center of all selected controls to the base. The
in Selection default base is the halfway point between the two controls furthest
away from each other.
Center Horizontally Aligns the horizontal center of all selected controls to the horizontal
in Dialog center of the dialog.
Align Along Right Aligns the left edges of all selected controls to the base. The default
base is the control furthest to the right.
Size Height of Changes all selected controls to the base height. The default base is
Selection the height of the control closest to the top left corner of the dialog.
Align Along Top Aligns the top edges of all selected controls to the top edge of the
base. The default base is the control closest to the top of the dialog.
Center Vertically in Aligns the vertical center of all selected controls to the base. The
Selection default base is the halfway point between the two controls furthest
away from each other.
Center Vertically in Aligns the vertical center of all selected controls to the vertical center
Dialog of the dialog.
Align Along Bottom Aligns the top edges of all selected controls to the bottom edge of the
base. The default base is the control closest to the bottom of the
dialog.
Size Height and Changes all selected controls to the base height and width. The
Width of Selection default base is the height and width of the control closest to the top left
corner of the dialog.
Size Width of Changes all selected controls to the base width. The default base is
Selection the width of the control closest to the top left corner of the dialog.

Dialog Format Conventions

Customizing a dialog window is accomplished using the free-form Dialog Editor. Although labels and
controls can be placed anywhere in the dialog window, following the formatting guidelines described
in this section can greatly improve the appearance of your custom dialogs.
Controls in ScheduALL are generally defined as objects. A Static Control (Label) is an object that is
not mapped to a field in the database. It is used to describe the contents of an adjacent data control.
Label text is right aligned. Other control types are objects that collect data, performs a function or
calculation on data, or provides functionality to ScheduALL.
Refer to Control Tools for more information on labels and controls.
Refer to Aligning Labels with Their Associated Controls for an example of the following
conventions.

Controlling Height and Width

As a general rule, all controls should be 20 pixels in height. A height of 20 pixels ensures all parts of a
letter (i.e. lower case y) are visible. Larger controls such as browser controls and large note fields
should have a minimum height of 45 pixels, divisible by five, and be able to line up alongside
neighboring objects.
All controls should have a pixel width that is divisible by five. This makes it easy to align controls
making the dialog easier to read. It is advisable to define the maximum amount of data a control is
going to collect in order to determine the optimum width of a control. A control should generally not be
larger than 300 pixels in width. If necessary, increase the height to 45 or 70 to display all of the data.
Larger controls such a browser controls do not adhere to the maximum width rule, but should be
divisible by five.
Pixel to Character Equivalents
The following table shows the approximate number of characters that can be displayed in a control
with a specific width in pixels.
Table 193. Pixel to Character Equivalents
Width in Pixels Characters (Approximate)

30 3
60 5
100 10
125 15
175 20
200 25
250 30
300 40
Aligning, Sizing, and Positioning Controls

This section describes the best practices for sizing and placing controls.
Positioning Controls Vertically

Controls should be five pixels apart vertically. This general rule makes it easy to line up controls.
Logical groupings of controls (i.e. client info, location info) should be separated by ten pixels to
visually indicate a new set of logically grouped data.
Determining Control Size and Position

The size and position of a control is shown in the bottom left of the Dialog Editor window. As you
create, move, or resize a control, the size and position (in pixels) displays.
Figure 309. Dialog Editor - Position and Size Indicators

The position numbers refer to the left, top, right, and bottom position of the control relative to the entire
window. In this example, the left edge of the control is positioned 75 pixels from the left side of the
dialog, the top of the control is positioned 240 pixels below the top of the dialog, etc. The control is
220 pixels wide and 20 pixels high. Note that these figures are divisible by five.
Aligning Labels with Their Associated Controls

ScheduALL uses the side-by-side method of associating labels to controls. This wastes the least
amount of space in the dialog. A label should be five pixels from a control. This provides a visually
obvious association between them. This design makes objects easy to align with others. To maintain
a border around the dialog, do not place controls closer than ten pixels to the top, bottom, or sides of
the dialog.
Figure 310. Dialog Conventions
Spacing Label and Control Pairs

When placing label and control pairs adjacent to each other in the same column, separate the pairs by
5 pixels.

Displaying Columns
Objects in ScheduALL should be organized into columns for the most effective use of the available
space in a dialog. Columns of objects should be separated by 15 pixels horizontally.
Figure 311. Column Spacing
Using Group Boxes and Group Box Labels

Group boxes are a more advanced way of visually grouping objects into logical units of information.
For example, controls that collect and display client information should be displayed in a group. Group
boxes should follow the same rules as other objects in that they should be sized in increments
divisible by five and be ten pixels apart from other objects. It may be easier to create a group of
controls and then create the group box and label.
Creating a Group Box

To create a group box:
1. In the Dialog Editor, click the Static Control. Refer to Control Tools.
2. Draw a box of the appropriate size in the dialog. The Add Static Text dialog displays.
3. In the Border Style section, select Plain. Do not enter any text.
4. Click OK.
5. Right-click the box and select Send to Back from the menu.
Creating a Group Box Label

To create a group box label:
1. In the Dialog Editor, click the Static Control. Refer to Control Tools.
2. Draw a box 20 pixels high and wide enough to accommodate the label text. The Add Static
Text dialog displays.
3. In the Justify section, select Left.
4. In the Border Style section, select None.
5. Enter the label text.
6. Click OK.
7. Move the label so that the left edge of the label box is positioned ten pixels from the left border
of the group box. Position the top edge of the label ten pixels above the top of the group box.
8. If necessary, resize the label box so there is no extra space after the text.

Dialog Height and Width

The maximum height and width of a dialog should be no more than 800 x 600 pixels. Although most
monitors can display 1024 x 768 pixels, the smallest monitor size is 800 x 600. It is important that
ScheduALL can accommodate this smaller visual display. To be sure the maximum height and width
of 800 x 600 pixels are not exceeded, the following elements must be considered:
l Title bar of the dialog
l The tab order row at the top of the dialog
l The OK/CANCEL row at the bottom of the dialog
l Left and right borders of the dialog
These elements of a dialog all take up some amount of the maximum viewable space. The maximum
position of the right edge of a control should be no more than 770 pixels and the maximum position of
the bottom of a control should be no more than 495 pixels. Refer to Aligning Labels with Their
Associated Controls for an example as shown in the Last Control field.

Customizing a Toolbar
Different areas in the ScheduALL system display toolbars specific to that area of work. The
Developers Toolkit allows a supervisor to create new toolbars for quicker access to commands, or
modify existing toolbars by adding, changing, or removing buttons or dividers.
Creating or Editing a Toolbar

To create or modify a toolbar:
Figure 312. Preferences Editor Dialog

2. Select a Task Area. Area descriptions generally include the module name or the dialog to
which they apply. The Main Menu 1 toolbar is displayed when no modules or dialogs are
displayed. The Main Menu 2 toolbar is appended to the end (right side) of each individual
toolbar.

3. Click Edit Toolbar. The Toolbar Editor dialog displays.
Figure 313. Toolbar Editor Dialog

4. This dialog is divided into the following pages:
l Toolbar Configuration determines the buttons on the toolbar.
l Button Layout determines the positioning of text and images on a button.
l Button Widths determines the size of buttons which include text.
l Button Text determines the text displayed on the button, and on the fly-over.
l Icon Selection determines the icon image displayed on a button.
5. The Sample Toolbar at the bottom of the page displays the toolbar for the Task Area,
including changes as they are applied.
6. Click the Reset button at any time to reset the toolbar to the standard default settings.

Toolbar Configuration
The Toolbar Configuration tab allows you to select which buttons display on the toolbar.
Figure 314. Toolbar Editor, Toolbar Configuration Tab

To modify the buttons on the toolbar:
l To add an item to the toolbar, select a button in the Master Button List and click Add.
l To add all buttons to the current toolbar, click Add All.
l To add a space with a vertical line between buttons, select Separator in the Master Button
List and click Add.
l To remove an item from the toolbar, select a button in the Buttons Selected for Toolbar list
and click Remove.
l To remove all buttons from the toolbar, click Remove All.
l To reorder items, click once in the Buttons Selected for Toolbar list:
l Drag an item up to move the item to the left in the toolbar.
l Drag an item down to move the item to the right in the toolbar.

Button Layout
The Button Layout tab allows the supervisor to apply a uniform layout style to all buttons in a toolbar,
or to modify the layout of a single button.
Figure 315. Toolbar Editor, Button Layout Tab

The Toolbar Styles section applies a uniform style to all buttons in the toolbar:
1. Select one of the following styles:
l Icon Left displays an icon aligned to left edge of button, with text to the right of the icon.
l Icon Right displays an icon aligned to right edge of button, with text to the left of the icon.
l Icon Top displays an icon above the text, centered horizontally.
l Icon Bottom displays an icon below the text, centered horizontally.
2. Click Apply to All Buttons. A confirmation dialog displays.
3. Click Yes to confirm the change. The Sample Toolbar displays buttons using the new settings.
The Individual Button Override section applies the selected style to a single button:
1. Select a button on the Sample Toolbar.
2. Select one of the following styles:
l Both displays an icon and text, arranged according to the Toolbar Style.
3. Click Apply to Current Button. The Sample Toolbar displays the button with the new
settings.

Button Widths
The Button Widths tab specifies the width of buttons (in pixels) which contain both an icon and text.
Class A is the default button class assigned to all new buttons. Class B is an optional setting that
allows the supervisor to specify an alternate standard width.
Note: Buttons set to “Icon Only” have a fixed default width.
Figure 316. Toolbar Editor, Button Widths Tab

To specify a button width:
1. Select the button from the Sample Toolbar.
2. Under Currently Selected Button Is, select Class A or Class B to identify width class
applied to the selected button.
3. Specify the Text Only width, from 0 to 150 pixels, for both Class A and Class B.
4. Specify the Icon Left/Right width, from 0 to 150 pixels, for both Class A and Class B.
5. Specify the Icon Top/Bottom width, from 0 to 150 pixels, for both Class A and Class B.
6. Click Apply. The Sample Toolbar displays the button with the new settings.

Button Text
The Button Text tab specifies the text displayed on the button for Text Only or Text and Icon buttons.
It also specifies the text displayed as “fly-over” text when the mouse pointer hovers over the button,
and in the status bar at the bottom of the ScheduALL program screen.
Figure 317. Toolbar Editor, Button Text Tab

To customize and format button text:
1. Select the button from the Sample Toolbar.
2. Enter the Button Text to override the default text (the title of the command).
3. Select (check) Show in Simple Mode to display the command in advanced mode and Simple
Mode. Deselect (clear) Show in Simple Mode to hide the command in Simple Mode.
4. Select the Text Style:
l 2D displays text with no shading.
l 3D shades the text to create the three-dimensional effect specified by the Text FX.
5. Select the Text FX:
l Raised makes the text appear higher than the surrounding dialog.
l Indented makes the text appear lower than the surrounding dialog.
6. Enter the Fly-Over Text. The system displays alternate fly-over text when the user selects the
corresponding language on the ScheduALL Log In dialog.
7. Click Apply.

Icon Selection
The Icon Selection tab specifies the icon displayed for each button in the toolbar. The Sample Toolbar
displays the icons currently assigned to the toolbar being edited.
To customize the icon assigned to a button:
1. Select the button that you want to change from the Sample Toolbar. In this example the
Legend (?) button is being changed.
2. Select an icon from the Master Icon List.
Figure 318. Toolbar Editor, Icon Selection Tab

3. Click Apply. The icon for the Legend button is changed to the Alternate Query 2 icon.
Figure 319. Legend Button Changed


Customizing a Menu
The Developers Toolkit allows the supervisor to modify existing menus by adding, modifying, and removing menu
commands and submenu entries.
Modifying a Menu
To modify a menu:
2. Select a Task Area. Area descriptions generally include the module name or the dialog to
which they apply. The Main Menu 1 task area includes the File (&File) and Edit (&Edit) menus.
The Main Menu 2 task area includes the Desktops, Window, and Help menus.
3. Click Edit Menu. The Menu Editor displays.
Figure 320. Menu Editor

4. Click a menu title to display the contents of that menu.
5. To modify the commands and submenus of a main menu entry, select the menu title. The
menu commands for that menu display.
l Drag a menu item up or down in the menu to change the item order.
l Right-click a menu item and click Properties to modify an existing menu command. Refer
to Defining Menu Item Properties.
l Right-click a menu item and click Insert New Item to add a new menu command. Refer to
Inserting a New Command.
l Right-click a menu item and click Insert Separator to add a separator line above the
selected item to group commands together.
l Right-click a menu item and click Insert Popup Menu to create a new submenu. Refer to
Inserting a Popup Menu.
l Right-click a menu item and click Delete Item to remove the command, separator, or popup
menu. Deleting a pop-up menu (denoted by a solid black arrowhead) removes the main
popup entry and all related commands and submenus.
l Right-click a menu item and select Restore Default to remove all customization and reset
the menu to the standard default settings.

Defining Menu Item Properties

To modify existing menu items:
1. Right-click the item and click Properties. The Menu Item Properties dialog displays.
Figure 321. Menu Item Properties Dialog

2. To rename the menu, change the English Description field.
3. Add alternate language titles in the appropriate Description fields as needed. The system
displays alternate languages when the user selects the corresponding language on the
ScheduALL Log In dialog.
4. Select (check) Show in Simple Mode to display the command in Advanced Mode and
Simple Mode. Deselect (clear) Show in Simple Mode to hide the command in simple mode.
5. Click Set Icon to add a new icon or modify the existing icon. The Select Icon dialog displays.
Select an icon and click Select.
6. Click Clear Icon to remove an existing icon from the menu item.
7. Click in the HotKey Definition text box, and press the key or key combination on the
keyboard to assign a hotkey combination. HotKey Definitions cannot be assigned to a pop-up
menu, only to a menu command. Hotkeys must be defined as one of the following:
l Any function key (F1 through F12).
l Ctrl and another key, Ctrl + Shift and another key, or Ctrl + Alt and another key.
l Alt and another key, or Alt + Shift and another key.
Inserting a New Command

1. Right-click an existing menu item. The system adds the new item above the selected item.
2. Click Insert New Item. The Insert New Menu Item dialog displays.
3. Select an item from the list.
4. To enter a customized menu caption, use the Edit Menu Caption field.
5. Click OK.

Inserting a Popup Menu

The Popup Menu item is used to create a submenu which contains similar menu commands or
additional submenus. Popup menu items display an arrow on the right side of the menu to indicate
that additional items are available, and displays the submenu contents when the user hovers over or
clicks the popup title.
To insert a pop-up menu:
1. Right-click an existing menu item and click Insert Popup Menu. The system adds the new
popup above the selected item.
Figure 322. Menu Editor, Insert Popup Menu

2. Right-click the popup title and click Properties to change the title and icon. The Menu Item
Properties dialog displays. Refer to Defining Menu Item Properties.
3. To add a menu item to the new popup menu, right-click the popup and click Insert New Item.
To add additional menu items, right-click an existing item and click Insert New Item. Refer to
Inserting a New Command.
4. Click the popup to display the contents, right-click an item in the popup contents, and click
Insert New Popup Menu to add another level of submenu.
Customize a Report
If the Crystal Reports application is installed locally, the Developers Toolkit menu may contain a link
to the application. Refer to the Reports chapter of the ScheduALL Users Guide for more information
on creating or importing custom reports. Refer to the ScheduALL Technical Reference for
information on customizing reports, including information on custom Crystal Reports functions and
ScheduALL database tables. Refer to the Crystal Reports documentation for more details on the
Crystal Reports application.

Standard Settings
In addition to allowing authorized users to modify the user interface, the Developers Toolkit provides
the ability to view the standard dialogs, as well as reset customized browsers, dialogs, toolbars, and
menus to the standard settings. Administrators should review standard dialogs under the following
conditions:
l After an update, review standard dialogs to determine whether tabs, buttons, fields, or other
items were added in the newer version.
l After a license update, review standard dialogs to determine whether tabs, buttons, fields, or
other items that were previously hidden are now accessible.
l After a dialog has been customized, review the standard dialog if interface elements do not
behave as expected. For example, the standard dialog may indicate when to use a Reference
(such as Client Name) instead of a straight Field (such as Client ID, which displays a number).
To view the standard version of a dialog:
Dialog Editor. The dialog Select Dialog displays.
2. Select a dialog name. Dialogs that contain customizations are displayed in red text.
3. Click View Factory Dialog to display the default standard version of the selected dialog, and
the title bar displays FACTORY DLG to indicate that any changes made to the dialog will be
discarded.
4. Check for new or unfamiliar tabs, new or modified buttons, changes to browser heading rows,
etc. Refer to Column Properties or Working with Controls for more information on viewing
the properties of individual items.
5. Click Close to exist the standard dialog.
To reset a dialog to the standard settings:

1. Perform a full backup of the ScheduALL database.
Dialog Editor. The dialog Select Dialog displays.
3. Select a dialog name. Dialogs that contain customizations are displayed in red text.
4. Click Reset to Factory to completely overwrite the existing (customized) dialog with the
current standard dialog, OR
Click Reset All to Factory to completely overwrite all existing (customized) dialogs with the
current standard dialogs.
To reset a menu or toolbar to the standard settings:

Toolbar & Menus. The Preferences Editor displays.
2. Select a Task Area.
3. To reset a toolbar, click Edit Toolbar and click Reset.
4. To reset a menu, click Edit Menu, click the menu title, right-click any menu item, and click
Restore Defaults.

Import or Export DTK Forms

The SchedXport utility allows the administrator to save all dialogs to XML format files for backup
purposes, to request dialog customization, or to implement customized dialogs received from the
ScheduALL Development Team.
Refer to Exporting and Importing Data with SchedXport in the ScheduALL Technical Reference for
information on importing and exporting DTK forms.
Predefined Hotkey Combinations

This topic lists the hotkey combinations configured at installation. These combinations can be
customized using the Developers Toolkit, as described in Defining Menu Item Properties. For a list
or recommended hotkey combinations refer to Recommended Hotkeys.
Table 194. Predefined Hotkeys
Hotkey Menu Equivalent

Task Area: Main 1
Alt + F4 &File, Exit
Task Area: Main 2
F1 &Help, Contents
Task Area: Scheduling Calendar
Ctrl + M &Scheduling, Move, Extended Move
Ctrl + C &Scheduling, Copy, Copy
Ctrl + X &Scheduling, Copy, Extended Copy
Tab &Scheduling, Navigate, Pop-Up Calendar
Ctrl + W &Scheduling, Find, Work Order by Work Order #
Ctrl + P &Scheduling, Find, Work Order by Project
Ctrl + L &Scheduling, Find, Work Order by Client
Ctrl + N &Scheduling, Find, Work Order by Job #
Ctrl + J &Scheduling, Find, Work Order by Job Name
Ctrl + O &Scheduling, Find, Work Order by Purchase Order
Task Area: Library Module
Ctrl + F &Library Entry, Find Tape
Ctrl + Q &Library Entry, Extended Query
Ctrl + P &Library Entry, Library Reporting submenu, General Library Reports
Ctrl + L &Library Entry, Library Reporting submenu, Print Labels
Ctrl + I &Library Entry, Tapes, Insert
Ctrl + E &Library Entry, Tapes, Edit

Recommended Hotkeys
This topic lists the hotkey combinations recommended by the Implementation Department. These
combinations are not required, but can be added using the Developers Toolkit, as described in
Defining Menu Item Properties.
Table 195. Recommended Hotkeys
Hotkey Menu Equivalent

Task Area: Main 1
Alt + A &File, ScheduALL, Alternate Day Based Schedule
Alt + C &File, Setup, Clients, Contacts & Agencies
Alt + D &File, Supervisor Options, Developers Toolkit, Dialog Editor
Alt + G &File, Setup, Resource Groups
Alt + M &File, Supervisor Options, Developers Toolkit, Toolbar & Menus
Alt + P &File, Supervisor Options, User Profiles & Security
Alt + R &File, Setup, Rooms & Resources
Alt + S &File, Setup, Services
Alt + T &File, Supervisor Options, Developers Toolkit, Toolbar & Menus
Alt + U &File, User Preferences, General
Alt + V &File, Setup, Vendors
Alt + Y &File, Supervisor Options, System Preferences, General

Ch. 6 Updating the
ScheduALL Interface
This chapter includes information on using the Developers Toolkit to update the existing ScheduALL dialogs,
menus, toolbars, and reports to support specific features. For more information on using Developers Toolkit, refer
to Using Developer’s Toolkit.
In This Chapter
Modifying Dialogs for Smart Work Orders 719

Modifying Dialogs for Smart Time 721
Modifying Dialogs and Menus for Setup 722
Modifying Work Order Dialogs 727
Updating Browsers and Dialogs for Capabilities 731
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Ch. 6 Updating the ScheduALL Interface
Modifying Dialogs for Smart Work Orders

This section discusses how to add controls to allow the user to change between standard and smart work orders.
Adding the Toggle and Save/Change Properties Buttons

To enable the user to change between work order types, add a Picture Button control for the "Save
and Toggle Between Standard and smartWO" command. To enable the user to update the properties
used by smart work orders (Earliest Start, Deadline, Duration, Scheduling Window, and Freeze
Duration) add a Picture Button control for the "Save and Change smartWO Properties" command.
a supervisor or with permissions to the Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the Work Order Form
by adding the specified controls:
Picture Button Caption: Toggle Location: Main tab, to the right of
Command: Save and Toggle Between the Change button.
Standard and smartWO
Icon: Recycle
Picture Button Caption: Update Location: Main tab, to the right of
Command: Save and Change the Toggle button.
smartWO Properties
Icon: Smart Work Order
When the user clicks the Toggle button, the message Save and Convert from Standard to smartWO?
displays. When the user clicks Yes, the Auto Schedule Properties dialog displays.
Figure 323. Auto Schedule Properties Dialog

Adding Date and Duration Fields

If desired, you can also add read-only controls for the following Function Fields to the Work Orders
dialog. To add the controls required for these features, log in to the ScheduALL system as a
supervisor or with permissions to the Adaptive Framework (DTK) module, and modify the Work
Order Dialog by adding the following controls:
Date Source: Work Orders Create Static controls for titles.
Type: Functions Location: Main tab
Field: Earliest Start
Time Source: Work Orders
Type: Functions
Field: Earliest Start
Date Source: Work Orders
Type: Functions
Field: Deadline
Time Source: Work Orders
Type: Functions
Field: Deadline
Read-only Edit Source: Work Orders
Type: Functions
Field: Duration(Extended Units)
Combobox Source: Work Orders
Type: Functions
Field: smartWO Duration UOM

Modifying Dialogs for Smart Time

If desired, you can add controls for the Claimed Time feature to the Resource Activity dialog. This
feature requires the Pay Translator license and the user permission Use Claimed Times? must be set
to Yes. Refer to Use Claimed Times?. Issuing the Update from Claimed Time command moves the
employee's claimed time entries to the actual booking times.
Example
Employee Mary White was booked for a shift activity from 3 p.m. to 11 p.m. She actually worked until
11:30, so she adjusted the time in Smart Time and set the Event Status to Submitted.
When her supervisor views this activity in the ScheduALL application the original schedule of 3-11 is
shown along with Mary's claimed time of 3-11:30.
If the supervisor agrees that the claimed time is the time actually worked, then the Update From
Claimed Time command is issued. This moves the claimed time to the actual booking time. Note that
the Original Schedule does not change.

Modifying Dialogs and Menus for Setup

This section describes updating Setup dialogs to add specific features.
Modifying Dialogs for Ignore Conflicts

The Ignore Conflicts in Same Work Order setting in the Resource Setup area now allows an
administrator or authorized user to prevent the system from generating a conflict message when a
resource is booked twice within the same work order. Refer to Ignore Conflicts in Same WO.
Note: Use this setting with caution and only when necessary for specific cases. In general it is
preferable to receive conflict warnings for booking a resource at the same times in the same
work order; this option is designed to address specific cases.
permissions to the Developers Toolkit module, and modify the following dialogs by adding the
indicated controls:
l General Resource Setup
l Personnel Setup
l Room Setup

Checkbox Control Source: Resource Base Recommended location: On the
Type: Fields General tab, near the Check
Field: Ignore Conflicts in Same Work Availability setting.
Order Create Static control for title.
Title: Ignore Conflicts in Same WO
Modifying Dialogs for Resource Category/Type Flags

The ScheduALL system allows the administrator or other authorized user to assign a visual flag (icon)
to a specific Resource Category/Resource Type combination for a specific resource. The assigned
icon is then displayed on any booking block in which the specified resource is booked under the
appropriate Category/Type combination.
Note: This feature observes the Display Visual Flags in the Scheduling Calendar option in User
Preferences. If the option is set to No for the current user, booking blocks will not display the
visual flag (icon).
permissions to the Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the Resource Catalog Setup dialog by
adding the following controls:
Picture Button Command: Assign Icon Recommended text: Visual Flag
Picture Control Type: Select Field
Source: Resource Catalog
Field: Icon ID
Edit Control Source: Resource Catalog
Field: Icon Description
Picture Button Command: Release Icon Style: Icon Only
Recommended icon: Delete

Note: The visual flags described here are shown for specific Resource Category/Resource Type
combination for a specific resource. To configure visual flags and icons for all resources, refer
to Visual Flags (User Defined).
Modifying Dialogs for Alternate Contact Catalog

a supervisor or with permissions to the Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the Client Form dialog
by adding the specified controls:
Browser Name: Alternate Contacts for this Suggested Columns:
Client TR:Contact>Fields>Name OR
TR:Contact>Functions> First and
Last Name
TR:Contact>Fields>Voice Phone
Picture Button Caption: Select
Command: Alternate Contacts: Add
Contact
Icon: Client 1 or Client 2
Picture Button Caption: Release
Command: Alternate Contacts:
Release Contact
Icon: Delete
Browser Name: Alternate Clients for this Suggested Columns:
Contact TR:Client>Fields>Name OR
TR:Client>Functions> First and
Last Name
Picture Button Caption: Add Client
Client
Picture Button Caption: Release Client
Release Client
Icon: Delete
Browser Name: Alternate Resources for this Suggested Columns:
Contact TR:Resources, Fields, Description
Picture Button Caption: Add Resource
Resource
Icon: Select Personnel and Resources


Picture Button Caption: Release Resource
Release Resource
Icon: Delete
Browser Name: Alternate Contacts for this Suggested Columns:
Resource TR:Client>Fields>Name OR
TR:Client>Functions> First and
Last Name
Picture Button Caption: Add Contact
Client
Picture Button Caption: Release Contact
Release Client
Icon: Delete
Picture Button Caption: Default Contact
Command: Assign Default Contact
Edit Control Source: TR: Default Contact
Type: Field
Field: Name
OR
Type: Functions
Field: First and Last Name
Picture Button Caption: Default Contact 2
Command: Assign Default Contact 2
Edit Control Source: TR: Default Contact 2
Type: Field
Field: Name
OR
Type: Functions
Picture Button Caption: Contact
Command: Assign Event Contact
Edit Control Source: TR: Booking Contact
Type: Field
Field: Name
OR
Type: Functions


Picture Button Caption: Contact 2
Command: Assign Event Contact 2
Edit Control Source: TR: Booking Contact 2
Type: Field
Field: Name
OR
Type: Functions
Adding the Unidirectional Ethernet Checkbox

To add the ability to book Unidirectional Ethernet service in ScheduALL Circuit Selection, add the
Ethernet (Unidirectional) checkbox to the Path Management tab of the Service Setup dialog. To
create the dialog controls required for or related to this feature, log in to the ScheduALL system as a
supervisor or with permissions to the Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the Service Setup
dialog by adding the specified controls:
Checkbox Source: Service Room Catalogue Location: Path Management tab
Type: Fields
Field: Ethernet (Unidirectional)
Title: Ethernet (Unidirectional)
Adding Agency field to the Media Manager Main Dialog

Controls related to the Agency field have been added to the factory Library Entry (Modern) dialog. A
Picture Button Control displays the list of Agencies in the system to which you have access, and a
modified Edit Control serves as an AutoComplete type control with the ability to type a few
characters and be prompted with a list of matching Agencies.
permissions to the Adaptive Framework (DTK) module, and modify the Library Entry (Modern)
dialog by adding the following controls:
Picture Button Control Command: Assign Agency Recommended location: On the
Caption: Agency Main tab, above the Client button.
Combobox Control Source: Library Recommended location: On the
Type: Fields Main tab, near the Client field.
Field: Agency ID
Adding the Permission Required Option

If a terminal or destination can only be used by certain clients the Permission Required option must
be selected. This option must be added if it is not displayed on the appropriate setup dialogs.
Note: As of release 5.10 this option was added to factory dialogs.
a supervisor or with permissions to the Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the General
Resource Setup and Room Setup dialogs by adding the specified control:


Checkbox Source: Resource Base Location: Main tab
Type: Fields
Field: Permission Required
Title: Permission Required
Adding Pricing Points Setup

To add the menu item required for this feature, log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with
permissions to the Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the specified menu by adding the
following command:
Toolbar/Menu Command Notes
Main Menu 1 Pricing Points Recommended location: Setup
Setup

Modifying Work Order Dialogs

This section describes updating work order and work order related dialogs to add specific features.
Displaying the Chorus Listener Log Tree

The Work Order dialog can display the Chorus Listener Log Tree by adding a tab to the dialog and
adding the Listener Log Tree control to the tab. To create the dialog controls required for or related to
Toolkit Module, and modify the Work Order Form (Standard) dialog by adding the specified tab and
control:

Browser Selection: Chorus Message Log Tree Recommended location: New
tab.
Recommended name: Chorus
Msg.
Adding Create Quote to the Work Order Form

You can now create a quote from the Work Order form. To do this, a button needs to be added to the
form. To create the dialog controls required for or related to this feature, log in to the ScheduALL
system as a supervisor or with permissions to the Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the Work
Order Form (Standard) dialog by adding the specified control:

Picture Button Caption: Create Quote Recommended location: Main
Command: Create Quote tab.
Icon: Notes 6
To use the button, refer to Creating a Quote from the Work Order Form in the Quotes chapter of the
Adding Release Successor Controls

In Work Order forms, the new Release Selected Successor command allows an authorized user to
remove the association between the current work order and a selected successor.
permissions to the DTK module, and modify the specified dialogs by adding the following control:
l Work Order Form (Standard) and (Extended)
l Work Order Rental Form (Standard) and (Extended)
l ScheduLINK - Work Order Form (Standard) and (Extended)
l ScheduLink Alt. - Work Order Form (Standard) and (Extended)
l Work Order Form (Request)
l Trouble Ticket Work Order (Standard) and (Extended)


Picture Button Caption: Release Selected Suggested location: On the same
Control Successor tab as the Successors of this Work
Command: Release Selected Order browser.
Successor
Button Icon: Alternate Delete
Adding the Print Work Order Command

Administrators can now add a Print Work Orders command to the toolbar. This command button is
available in the Activity by Resource, Activity by Group, and Work Orders by Group dialogs. This
command allows the user to print Work Order and Billing Authorization reports for one or more work
order bookings selected in the appropriate list. (Bookings related to activities do not generate Work
Order reports.)
To create the toolbar button required for this feature, log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor
or with permissions to the Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the specified form by adding the
following command:
Toolbar / Menu Command Notes
Activity by Resource / Print Work Orders Recommended text: Print Work Orders
Group Recommended icon: Print
To use the new command:

1. Log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor, or with permissions to view the appropriate
Activity by list and print Work Order reports. (The security settings Allow Access into
Scheduling Module and Can Print Work Orders / Billing Authorizations must be set to Yes.)
2. From the File menu, select Alternate Schedules, and
l Click Activity by Resource, and select a resource, OR
l Click Activity by Group or Work Orders by Group and select a resource group.
3. Press Tab to display the Pop-up Calendar, select a day (or range of dates) that contain work
orders for the selected resource/group, and click OK.
4. Click to highlight a work order, OR
Click the filled square in the top right corner to select all work orders in the browser.
5. From the toolbar, click Print Work Orders. The Work Order Reports dialog displays.

Adding Secondary Agency, Client, and Contact

Users can now assign a Secondary Agency, Secondary Client, and Secondary Contact to a
Work Order for informational purposes only. These fields respect System Preferences regarding
“ownership” rules consistent with the standard Agency, Client, and Contact fields, but do not provide
any other additional functionality normally provided by those fields such as invoicing, report filtering,
etc.
The Secondary Contact ID field is separate from the Contact 2 field (Assign Contact 2 command and
Contact 2 ID) and the list of additional contacts (Add Contact to List command and Additional
Contacts of this Work Order) assigned to the work order.
permissions to the Developer’s Toolkit Module, and modify the specified dialogs by adding the
following controls:
l Work Order Form (Standard)
l Work Order Form (Extended)
l Work Order Form (Request)
l Work Order Rental Form (Standard)
l Work Order Rental Form (Extended)
l ScheduLink - Work Order Form (Standard)
l ScheduLink - Work Order Form (Extended)
l ScheduLink Alt. - Work Order Form (Standard)
l ScheduLink Alt. - Work Order Form (Extended)
l Trouble Ticket Work Order (Standard)
l Trouble Ticket Work Order (Extended)

Picture Button Command: Assign Secondary Agency Displays the list of agencies and
allows the user to select one.
Combobox Control Source: Work Orders > Fields Allows the user to enter or select the
Field: Secondary Agency ID Agency name, and clear the
association.
Edit Control(s) Source: TR: Work Order Secondary Provides read-only access to
Agency > Fields additional fields in the Agency
Field: Any field in the Agency record, record.
such as Voice Phone.
Picture Button Command: Assign Secondary Client Displays the list of agencies and
Field: Secondary Client ID Client name, and clear the
association.
Client > Fields additional fields in the Client record.
Field: Any field in the Client record, such
as Voice Phone.
Picture Button Command: Assign Secondary Contact Displays the list of agencies and


Field: Secondary Contact ID Contact name, and clear the
association.
Contact > Fields additional fields in the Contact
Field: Any field in the Contact record, record.
such as Voice Phone.

Updating Browsers and Dialogs for Capabilities

This section contains instructions for modifying browsers and dialogs for use with the Capabilities feature.
Prize Resource and Load Balancing

To add the following control to the Resource Capabilities Setup browser, from the File menu click
Setup and click Resource Capabilities Setup:
Resource Capabilities Setup Column Source: Support
(browser) Type: Fields
Field: Counter 1
Title: Use Last
Column Source: Support
Type: Fields
Field: Counter 2
Title: Load Balance
Use the Adaptive Framework (DTK) to add the following controls:

Resource Capabilities Setup Checkbox Source: Support Recommended location:
Type: Fields Below the Description input
Field: Counter 1 field.
Title: Use Last
Checkbox Source: Support Recommended location:
Type: Fields Below the “Use Last”
Field: Counter 2 checkbox described above.
Title: Load Balance
General Resource Setup PickList Control, or Source: Resource Base Recommended location: On
PickListEx Control Type: Fields the Circuit tab
Field: Load Balance Group
Title: Load Balance Group
Edit Control, or Source: Resource Base Recommended location: On
Read Only Edit Type: Fields the Circuit tab
Control Field: Load Balance Group
Capabilities Assigned
The new Capabilities Assigned function field displays a comma-separated list of capabilities
assigned to the appropriate resource. This allows an administrator to identify a resource’s
capabilities, and allows resource-based browser controls to display resources with their supported
capabilities.
This function field can be added to any browser that supports a Source that maps to the Resource
Base table, such as:
l Resource Base
l R: Resource Base
l TR: Booking Resource
l TR: Resource for this Segment

Adding to Display Blocks

It can also be added to Display Blocks used by Display Views in the Scheduling, Resource, and
Band Segments lists. For example, to add the function field to a new Resource display block:
1. Log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor, or with an account that has the Can
Add/Edit/Delete Display Views? permission set to Yes.
2. From the File menu, select Setup and click Display View Maintenance. The Display Views
screen displays.
3. Click the Resources tab to bring that page forward, and click New. The Display Block
Properties screen displays.
4. Enter a Display Block Name, such as Capabilities.
5. Click inside the Display Block Properties area, and click Add Field. The Column Properties
screen displays.
6. Select the Source Resource Base, Functions, Capabilities Assigned, and click OK.
7. Click OK to save the new view.
If the system already uses one or more display blocks on the Resource tab, repeat the process above
to add the Capabilities Assigned function field as desired.
Assigning to the Resources List

To assign the display view to the Resources List used to add resources to a Work Order:
1. Log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with permissions to the Adaptive
Framework (DTK) module.
2. From the File menu, select ScheduALL and click ScheduALL Screen. The scheduling
calendar displays.
3. Double-click an existing work order. The Work Order screen displays.
4. Click the button used to add resources to the work order (e.g. Resource). The Resource List
screen displays.
5. Right-click the Description column, and click Column Properties. The Column Properties
screen displays.
6. In the bottom half of the screen, click the Advanced tab to bring that page forward.
7. Select (check) the Fly Over Text? setting.
8. Change Source to R: Resource Base, select Display Views, and select the appropriate
display view block (such as the Capabilities block created above).
9. Click OK to save the column properties.
10. Click Close to exit the resources list. The system displays the “Browser form modified, save
changes?” message.
11. Click Yes to save the changes, and click OK to save the browser format.
12. On the Work Order screen, click Resource. The Resource List screen displays.
13. Place the cursor over the name of a resource to which capabilities have been assigned. The
flyover displays the list of capabilities for that resource.
permissions to the Adaptive Framework (DTK) module, and modify the specified forms by adding the
following controls:


General Resource Setup Browser Control Selection: Resource Capabilities Recommended location: Add
BandPLAN Resource a new tab named Capabilities.
Room Setup
Personnel Setup Recommended columns:
l Description - TR: Resource Capabilities Catalog Capability,
Fields, Description
Picture Button Caption: Assign Capability
Control Command: Assign Capability
Browser Control Selection: Resource Capability Recommended location:
Requirements Capabilities tabbed page.
Recommended columns:
l Description - TR: Resource Capabilities Catalog Capability,
Fields, Description
Picture Button Caption: Capability Requirement
Control Command: Assign Capability
Requirement

Ch. 7 Updating the
ScheduLINK Interface
This chapter includes information on using the Developers Toolkit to update the existing ScheduLINK dialogs,
menus, toolbars, and reports to support specific features. For more information on using Developers Toolkit, refer
to Using Developer’s Toolkit.
In This Chapter
Band Segment Information 735

Client Form 738
Master Control Rooms 739
Circuit Selection and Network Graphical Map 744
Pivot Services 750
Resource Setup 751
Modifying Dialogs for Is Ethernet 752
Modifying Dialogs for Port Affinity 753
Adding Settings for Variable Capacity 754
Adding Settings for Multi-Stream Services 756
Adding the Move Antenna Command 757
Adding Settings for File Size Conversion 757
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Ch. 7 Updating the ScheduLINK Interface
Band Segment Information

As of version 4.72, several areas of the ScheduLINK application that provide access to Band
Segment information provide references to information for the BandPlan resource to which the band
segment is associated. Each reference provides access to all Fields, Functions, and References
from the specified Source related to the appropriate Band Segment. These references include:
l TR: Resource for this Segment provides access to the related information in the Resource
Base (RSRCE) table. For example, the system can display the Resource Description or
Engineering Description for the main resource to which the band segment is associated.
l TR: Resource Link for this Segment provides access to the related information in the
Resource Link (RES_LINK) table. For example, the system can display the telephone
numbers for access or technical problems for the main resource to which the band segment is
associated.
l TR: Resource User for this Segment provides access to the related information in the
Resource User (RES_USER) table. For example, the system can display the User Fields,
User Flags, or User Dates for the main resource to which the band segment is associated.
Information in the Resource, Resource Link, and Resource User tables is generally defined in the
Resource Setup dialog when the resource is added to the system.
To make use of the new capabilities, ScheduALL recommends reviewing the BandExt and Band
Segment dialogs, as described in Recommended Changes to Dialogs, and reviewing Display
Views used by band segments, as described in Recommended Changes to Display Views. The
new table references do not provide or require any changes to menus, toolbars, or reports.

Recommended Changes to Dialogs

ScheduALL recommends adding band segment information to the Band Segment dialog:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with permissions to access the
Developers Toolkit module.
Dialog Editor. The Select Dialog screen displays.
3. Select BandExt and click Edit. The Band Extension (BandExt) Properties screen displays in
BUILD Mode.
4. In the Band Segments (Channels) browser, right-click a column heading, click Append
Column, and add any of the following columns (or columns for any Field, Function, or
Reference available in the specified TR: entry) as necessary:
Source Type Field
TR: Resource for this Segment Fields Description
TR: Resource Link for this Segment Field Access Center
TR: Resource User for this Segment Field User Date 1
Note: The fields listed are examples intended to demonstrate the available Sources (the
Resource, Resource Link, and Resource User table records related to the current
segment). Each facility should add the information from the specified sources that the
facility uses and needs the most.
5. Click OK to save the dialog. The Select Dialog screen displays.
6. Select Band Segment and click Edit. The Band Segment (Channel) Properties dialog
displays in BUILD mode.
7. Add the following controls (or controls for any Field, Function, or Reference available in the
specified TR: entry) as necessary:
Label Text: Resource Description
Read Only Edit Source: TR: Resource for this Segment
Control
Type: Fields
Field: Description
Label Text: Access Center
Read Only Edit Source: TR: Resource Link for this Segment
Control
Type: Field
Field: Access Center
Label Text: Call at Up?
Read Only Edit Source: TR: Resource User for this
Control Segment
Type: Field
Field: User Flag 1

Note: The fields listed are examples intended to demonstrate the available Sources–that is,
the Resource, Resource Link, and Resource User table records related to the current
segment. Each facility should add the information from the specified sources that the
facility uses and needs the most.
8. Click OK to save the dialog.
9. Click Close to exit the Dialog Editor.
Recommended Changes to Display Views

In Display View Maintenance, display blocks created on the Band Segment tab can now display
information related to the parent resource. To modify display blocks:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with permissions to Add/Edit/Delete
Display Views.
2. From the File menu, select Setup, and click Display View Maintenance. The Display Views
screen displays.
3. Click the Resources tab to bring that page forward.
l Locate any display blocks designed to display information for BandPlan resources, such as
the Transponder Info block in sample data.
l Select the display view and click Edit.
l Write down the fields in the display block.
Table 196. Display Blocks - New Field Blocks for Band Segment Display Views

Resource Base Field Description String
TE: Resource Link Fields Uplink Frequency Numeric
Resource Base Reference Polarity Mode String
TE: Resource Link Field Downlink Frequency Numeric
TE: Resource Link Reference Downlink Polarity Mode String
Resource Base Fields Transponder/Channel is Boolean (Flag)
Analog
Resource Base Fields Transponder/Channel is Boolean (Flag)
Digital
TE: Resource Link Fields Orbital Position String
Inclined Orbit Boolean (Flag)
Parent Bandwidth String
Parent HPA Power String
Access Center String
Satellite Access Calls String
Non-Access Calls String
Access Center Fax String
Access Rules/Hours String
Other Satellite Notes String
4. Click the Band Segments tab to bring that page forward.

5. Select a display block from the list and click Edit. The Display Block Properties screen
displays.
6. Click Add Field to add a new field block to the display view, and add the following items (or
item for any Field, Function, or Reference available in the specified TR: entry) as necessary:
Table 197. Display Blocks - New Field Sources for Band Segment Display Views
Sources for Resources Blocks Sources for Band Segments Blocks

TE: Resource Base TR: Resource for this Segment
TE: Resource Link TR: Resource Link for this Segment
TE: Resource User TR: Resource User for this Segment
7. Add static text as necessary to serve as labels for each appropriate field.
8. Click OK to save the display block.
9. Edit any other blocks as necessary, OR
Click OK to exit Display View Maintenance.
Refer to the ScheduALL Users Guide for more information on editing Display Views and Display
Blocks.
Client Form
The Location function offers additional functionality if the administrator makes changes to the Client
Form dialog. Modify the Client Form dialog to add controls for default client Source and Destination:
3. Select Client Form and click Edit. The Client Properties screen displays in BUILD Mode.
4. Add the following controls:
Table 198. Client Properties - New Controls

Picture Button Caption: Default Source Location
Control Command: Select Default Source Location
Edit Control Source: TR: Client Source Location
Type: Fields
Field: Location Name
Picture Button Caption: Default Destination Location
Control Command: Select Default Destination Location
Edit Control Source: TR: Client Destination Location
Type: Fields
Field: Location Name

Master Control Rooms

The Master Control Room (MCR) functionality described in the Master Control Room Setup and
the Graphical Map chapter of the ScheduLINK Users Guide requires changes to the Main menu,
the MCR Setup dialog, General Resource Setup dialog, and the Operations Manager (WO)
dialog. Additional changes are recommended to display information on display views and flyovers.
Required Changes to Menus

To add the required items to menus and toolbars:
3. Select Main Menu - 1 and click Edit Menu. The Menu Editor dialog displays.
4. Click &File to display the file menu, and click Setup to expand that submenu.
5. Right-click an existing menu entry and click Insert New Item. The Insert New Menu Item
dialog displays.
6. Select MCR Setup, optionally modify the Menu Caption, and click OK.
a. Right-click the new entry and click Properties. The Menu Item Properties dialog displays.
b. Enter the Description text for all languages used in the facility.
c. Click Set Icon to specify an icon for this menu option (such as “Equipment 5” or the same
icon used for the Operations Manager WO menu item). This icon displays to the left of the
menu option in the appropriate menu.
d. Use the Hotkey Definition field to set a keyboard shortcut for this menu option.
e. Click OK to save the new menu item.
7. Click OK to save all changes and exit the menu editor.
8. From the File menu, select Setup, and click MCR Setup. The MCR Setup dialog displays.
9. If there are no column headings visible, right-click the heading area and click Append New
Column. The Column Properties dialog displays.
10. Add the control shown in the table below and click OK to save all changes.
11. Click the Close [X] button. The system displays the “Browser Form modified. Save
Changes?” prompt.
12. Click Yes. The Save Browser Format dialog displays.
13. Click OK to save changes.
Table 199. MCR Form - New Controls

Browser Column Source: Support
Type: Fields
Field: Description
Title: Description

Required Changes to Dialogs

Modify the following forms to add controls for Circuit Selection functionality.
3. Edit each of the following dialogs:
l General Resource Setup
l MCR Setup
l ScheduLINK Work Order Forms
General Resource Setup
Modify the General Resource Setup dialog to add controls for MCR functionality:
1. In the Developers Toolkit Select Dialog window, select General Resource Setup and click
Edit. The General Resource Properties screen displays in BUILD Mode.
3. Add the following control and click OK to save all changes.
Table 200. General Resource Properties Form, Path Management Tab - New Controls

Picture Button Caption: Master Control Recommended Icon: Equipment
Control Command: Assign MCR 5 (or same as Ops Manager menu
icon)
Read-Only Edit Source: Resource Base
Control Type: Reference
Field: MCR
Figure 324. General Resource Properties Form - Path Management Tab

MCR Setup
Modify the MCR Setup dialog to add controls for MCR functionality:
1. In the Developers Toolkit Select Dialog window, select MCR Setup and click Edit. The
General Pick List Entry screen displays in BUILD Mode.
2. Add the following controls, resize the dialog as necessary, and click OK to save all changes to
the MCR Setup dialog.
Table 201. MCR Setup Form - New Controls

Static Control Text: MCR Description
Edit Control Source: Support
Type: Fields
Field: Description
Figure 325. MCR Setup Form
ScheduLINK Work Order Forms

The ScheduLINK system uses the following versions of the Work Order form:
l ScheduLINK - Work Order Form (Extended)
l ScheduLINK - Work Order Form (Standard)
l ScheduLINK Alt. - Work Order Form (Extended)
l ScheduLINK Alt. - Work Order Form (Standard)
Modify the ScheduLINK Work Order form dialogs to add controls for MCR functionality:
1. In the Developers Toolkit Select Dialog window, select the appropriate form and click Edit.
The appropriate Work Order screen displays in BUILD Mode.
2. Add the following controls, resize the dialog as necessary, and click OK to save all changes to
the MCR Setup dialog.
Table 202. ScheduLINK Work Order Forms - New Controls

Picture Button Caption: MCR Status
Control Command: Assign MCR Status
Read Only Edit Source: Work Orders Location: Close to the Assign
Control Type: Functions MCR Status button
Field: MCR Status Description
Picture Button Caption: MCR Filter
Control Command: MCR Filter
Location: Visual Path tab
Recommended Changes to Ops Manager (WO)

Displaying MCR Information

To modify the browsers in the Ops Manager (WO) dialog to display MCR information:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with permissions to access Operations
Manager and Developers Toolkit.
2. From the File menu, select ScheduLINK and click Operations Manager (WO). The
Operations Manager (WO) dialog displays.
3. Right-click a heading cell in the Actions pane and click Insert New Column to add a column
to the left of the selected column, OR
Right-click a heading cell in the Actions pane and click Append New Column to add a
column to the right of the last column in the browser.
4. Add the following browser columns, and resize the other columns or Action Pane as
necessary:
Table 203. Operations Manager (WO) Form - New Controls

Browser Column Source: Work Orders
Type: Functions
Field: Get MCR Status for MCR
Title: special, see below.
5. In the Title field, edit the default value (parameters, title) by replacing the word parameters
with the exact name of the first MCR entry to track, and replacing the title with the desired
column caption. For example, if the MCR entry is ‘US East Coast’ and the column heading
should be ‘USEast’, enter the following:
“US East Coast”, USEast
Note: The text that replaces the parameters value is not validated against the existing list of
MCR entries. If the user-defined value does not exactly match an MCR entry, the
column does not display any status information.
6. To track an additional status for a different MCR entry, add another column as specified in
Table 203. In the Title field, edit the default value (parameters, title) by replacing the word
parameters with the exact name of the second MCR entry to track (keeping the value inside
double quotation marks), and replacing the title with the desired column caption. For example,
if the MCR entry is ‘US West Coast’ and the column heading should be ‘USWest’, enter the
following:
“US West Coast”, USWest
7. Click the Close [X] button. The system displays the “Browser Form modified. Save
Changes?” prompt.
8. Click Yes. The Save Browser Format dialog displays.
9. Click OK to save changes.
Note: If more than one browser was modified, the Save Browser Format dialog displays
again; click OK to save changes to the second browser.
Displaying Booking State

To modify the browsers in the Ops Manager (WO) dialog to display Booking Status:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with permissions to access Operations
Manager and Developers Toolkit.
2. From the File menu, select ScheduLINK and click Operations Manager (WO). The
Operations Manager (WO) dialog displays.

3. Right-click a heading cell in the Actions pane and click Insert New Column to add a column
to the left of the selected column, OR
Right-click a heading cell in the Actions pane and click Append New Column to add a
column to the right of the last column in the browser.
4. Add the following browser column, and resize the other columns as necessary:
Table 204. Operations Manager (WO) Form - New Controls

Browser Column Source: Work Orders
Type: Functions
Field: Booking State
Title: Booking State
The background of this column changes to red when the booking is in Edit mode, and lists the name
of the user who has the booking locked.
Recommended Changes to Display Views

In Display View Maintenance, display blocks created on the Schedule Calendar and Resource tabs
can now display information related to the MCR assigned to the resource. To modify display blocks:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with permissions to Add/Edit/Delete
Display Views.
2. From the File menu, select Setup, and click Display View Maintenance. The Display Views
screen displays.
3. On the Schedule Calendar tab:
a. Select or create a display view designed to display information for network circuit
bookings, and click Edit.
b. Select the display view and click Edit.
c. Select or create a display block designed to display information for network circuit
d. Add the following fields in the display block.
Table 205. Display Blocks - New Field Blocks for MCR Display Views, Schedule Calendar

Resource Base Reference MCR String
Work Orders Functions MCR Status Description String
4. Click the Resource tab to bring that page forward.

a. Locate any display blocks designed to display information for BandPlan resources,
such as the Transponder Info block in sample data.
b. Select the display view and click Edit.
c. Select or create a display block designed to display information for network circuit
d. Add the following fields in the display block.
Table 206. Display Blocks - New Field Blocks for MCR Display Views, Resource Tab

Resource Base Reference MCR String

Circuit Selection and Network Graphical Map

The Circuit Selection and Network Graphical Map functionality described in the Graphical Map
chapter of the ScheduLINK Users Guide requires changes to the Main and Work Order menus
and/or toolbars, the General Resource Setup dialog
Required Changes to Menus and Toolbars

To add items to the menus and toolbars:
3. Select Main Menu - 1 and click Edit Menu. The Menu Editor dialog displays.
4. Click &File to display the file menu, and click ScheduLINK to expand that submenu.
dialog displays.
6. Select Network Graphical Map, optionally modify the Menu Caption, and click OK.
l Right-click the new entry and click Properties. The Menu Item Properties dialog displays.
l Enter the Description text for all languages used in the facility.
l Click Set Icon to specify an icon for this menu option (such as “Equipment 14”). This icon
displays to the left of the menu option in the appropriate menu.
l Use the Hotkey Definition field to set a keyboard shortcut for this menu option.
l Click OK to save all changes.
7. Click Setup to expand that submenu.
dialog displays.
9. Select Graphical Map Files, set the Menu Caption to “Graphical Map Setup”, and click OK.
Right-click the new entry and click Properties to specify the alternate language captions,
icon, or keyboard shortcut combination for this menu option.
10. Click OK to save changes to the Main Menu - 1 menu.
11. Select Work Order Form and click Edit Menu.
dialog displays.
13. Select Graphical Map of Network, optionally modify the Menu Caption, and click OK.
14. Right-click the new entry and click Properties to specify the alternate language captions,
icon, or keyboard shortcut combination for this menu option.
15. Click OK to save changes to the Work Order menu.
16. With Work Order Form selected, optionally click Edit Toolbar. The Toolbar Editor displays.

17. In the Master Button List, scroll roughly 3/4 of the way down, select Graphical Map of
Network and click Add. The text for the new button displays on the toolbar preview at the
bottom of the window.
a. Click the Icon Selection tab to bring that page forward, click the Graphical Map of
Network button in the toolbar preview, click an icon in the Master Icon List (such as
“Equipment 14”), and click Apply.
b. Click the Button Layout tab to bring that page forward, click Icon Only, and click Apply
to Current Button (to change only the Graphical Map button), OR
Click Icon Only, and click Apply to All Buttons to change all existing buttons on this
toolbar.

Modify the following forms to add controls for Circuit Selection functionality.
3. Edit the Client dialog as described in Updating the Client Form for Circuit Selection.
Updating the Client Form for Circuit Selection
Modify the Client Form dialog to add controls for Circuit Selection functionality:
1. In the Developers Toolkit Select Dialog window, select Client Form and click Edit. The
Client Properties screen displays in BUILD Mode.
2. Click the Custom Pricing tab to bring that page forward.
3. Optionally rearrange the existing buttons, and add the following control:
Table 207. Client Form - New Controls

Picture Button Caption: New Circuit Service Price Recommended Icon: Ripple
Control Command: Add New ScheduLINK
Service Rate
Figure 326. Client Form - Custom Billing Tab

Updating Dialogs for VLAN Mode

ScheduALL Circuit Selection now supports Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) identifiers in Ethernet
bookings. This allows the scheduler to assign one or more VLAN ID for each path, so that network
hardware that support VLAN tagging can route specific frames within a given feed to specific
destinations. It also allows a service to have a default VLAN ID that can be overridden for a particular
booking.
l In the Service setup, the VLAN Mode option determines if the user will be prompted (and
required) to enter VLAN information when booking the given Circuit Selection service.
l Transparent matches legacy behavior of not prompting for (or requiring) any VLAN entry. This
is the default value.
l VLAN Required prompts the user to enter at least one valid VLAN ID or range of VLAN IDs
when booking the service. The user must provide a value in the VLAN ID field to proceed.
l VLAN + Default VLAN Required prompts the user to enter both a VLAN ID and a Default
VLAN ID when booking the service. The user must provide both values to proceed.
permissions to the Adaptive Framework (DTK) module, and modify the Service Setup dialog by
Combobox Control Source: Service Room Catalog Recommended location: On the
Type: Fields Path Mgmt tab. Add Static Controls
Field: VLAN Mode for labels as necessary.
Edit Control Source: Service Room Catalog
Type: Fields
Field: VLAN IDs
Type: Fields
Field: Default VLAN
Edit Control Source: Resource Base
Type: Fields
Field: External Id (Return)
In addition to the fields added to Service setup, it is also recommended that the VLAN and Default
VLAN fields be added to the to the following areas:
l Columns in Events browser inside the work order
l Fields in the Resource Booking Properties dialog
The VLAN and Default VLAN are editable only in the Resource Booking Properties of the FORWARD
route in a bi-directional Ethernet feed. These fields are read-only in the Return route as they must be
the same as the Forward route in the initial booking detail sent to Nimbra Vision.
ScheduALL allows editing of VLAN and Default VLAN, but Nimbra Vision currently has a restriction
that modifications to VLAN and Default VLAN values made AFTER the booking has been received
by Nimbra Vision are NOT respected as this is currently unsupported behavior once a Profile has
been loaded.

To add the VLAN and Default VLAN fields to the Events browser, add columns and configure them as
shown here.
Figure 327. VLAN ID Column Properties
Figure 328. Default VLAN Column Properties

To add these field to the Resource Properties, edit the Resource Booking Properties dialog using the
Developer's Toolkit and add the two fields.
Figure 329. Resource Properties, Path Mgmt Tab

Required Changes for Pre-defined Circuit with Path Protection

with permissions to the Adaptive Framework (DTK) module, and modify the Pre-Defined Circuit
dialog by adding the following controls:
Tab Page Description: Protected
Picture Button Command: Select Source Recommended location:
Control (Protected Route) On new “Protected” tabbed
Caption: Select Source page.
(Protected)
Edit Control Source: TR: Protected Source Recommended location:
Station with the “Select Source
Type: Fields (Protected)” button
Field: Description
Picture Button Command: Select Destination Recommended location:
Control (Protected Route) On new “Protected” tabbed
Caption: Select Destination page.
(Protected)
Edit Control Source: TR: Protected Recommended location:
Destination Station with the Select Destination
Type: Fields (Protected) button
Field: Description
Picture Button Command: Add to Circuit Recommended location:
Control (Protected Route) below the “Select
Caption: Add to Circuit Destination (Protected)”
(Protected Route) button.
Picture Button Command: Unassign from Recommended location:

Control Circuit (Protected Route) near the “Add to Circuit
Caption: Unassign from (Protected Route)” button.
Protected
Browser Control Filter: List Resources to Recommended location:
Explode with this Circuit Below the “Add to Circuit
(Protected Route) (Protected Route)” button.
Read-Only Edit Source: Pre-Defined Circuit Recommended location:
Control Type: Functions Below the “List Resources
to Explode” browser control
Field: Circuit Path (Protected
Route)

Pivot Services
As of version 4.76, Pivot Service functionality requires changes to the Service Setup and
Resources to Bundle dialogs, as described in Required Changes to Dialogs.
Pivot Service functionality does not provide or require any changes to menus, toolbars, or display
views. However, recommended report changes are described in Recommended Changes to
Reports.

Modify the Service Setup dialog to add controls for Pivot Service functionality:
3. Select Service Setup and click Edit. The Service Properties screen displays in BUILD Mode.
Table 208. SERVICE SETUP - NEW CONTROLS

Checkbox Control Caption: Is Pivot Service? Recommended location: Path
Source: Resource Base Mgmt tab
Type: Fields
Field: Pivot Service
Checkbox Control Caption: Book Backwards from Recommended location: Path
Pivot then Forward Mgmt tab
Source: Resource Base
Type: Fields
Field: Book backwards from Pivot,
then forward
5. Widen the Resources to Include browser:

a. Drag the right edge of the Service Setup screen by one to one-and-a-half inches, to a total
with of roughly 800 pixels.
b. Move the Add, Requirement, BandPLAN, Edit, and Remove buttons to the right edge.
(These buttons map to the Add to Explosion List, Add Requirement to Explosion List, Add
BandPLAN Resource to Explosion List, Modify in Explosion List, and Unassign from
Explosion List, respectively.
c. Drag the right edge of the Resources to Include browser to the right to fill the available
space.
6. Right-click the browser heading bar, and click Append a New Column. The Column
Properties screen displays. Add the following columns, repeating the Append a New
Column command as necessary:

Table 209. Service Setup - Resources to Include Browser, New Columns
Control Details Notes

Source: Resource Explosion Table Recommended location: To the right of the
Type: References Qty column.
Field: Transmit Type
Title: Tx Type
Control Type: Checkbox
Source: Resource Explosion Table Recommended location: To the right of the
Type: Fields Tx Type column.
Field: Is Pivot Resource
Title: Is Pivot?
Control Type: Checkbox

8. Select Resources to Bundle and click Edit. The Resources to Auto-Include screen displays
in BUILD Mode.
Table 210. Service Setup - New Controls

Checkbox Control Caption: Pivot Resource Recommended location: LINK
Source: Resource Base tab
Type: Fields
Field: Is Pivot Resource
11. Click Close to exit the Dialog Editor.
Recommended Changes to Reports

To provide information about Pivot Service settings on existing or custom reports, ScheduALL
recommends modifying the following report files:
l Add a column for the Is Pivot Service field to the following reports available from File menu,
Miscellaneous Reports, Other:
l Service List (RESLIST7.RPT)
l Add a column for the Is Pivot Resource field to the following reports available from File menu,
Miscellaneous Reports, By Resource:
l Resource Bundle Setup - 2 Tiers (RESLIST24.RPT)
l Service Bundle Setup - 2 Tiers (RESLIST25.RPT)
Resource Setup
In Resource Setup, the new Override Same Node Restriction for Protected Paths when Last
Option flag indicates that if a primary path is booked with a given node that belongs to a given
cluster, and no other backup path is possible, then as a last resort the algorithm can ignore the
“Permit Booking through Same Node for Protected Paths” restriction for a clustered intermediate
node, and use a node in the same cluster as a backup path.
permissions to the DTK module, and modify the specified forms by adding the following controls:


General Resource Setup Checkbox Source: Resource Base Recommended location: On
Type: Fields the Circuit tab.
Fields: Override Same Node Recommended label:
Restriction for Protected Paths Override Node/Path
when Last Option Restriction Last Option
If the Override Same Seg/Node Restriction for Protected Paths setting is enabled, and a node is
automatically added to both the primary and secondary or protected paths, the Joined flag is
automatically applied to the corresponding node events in both paths.
Modifying Dialogs for Is Ethernet

The ScheduLINK system supports the ability to identify certain services, network encoder ports, and
network decoder ports as Ethernet services or ports. This allows a ScheduLINK circuit to support a
duplex Ethernet feed that consists of a Forward route (similar to a non-Ethernet circuit), and a Return
route that shares the source port, the destination port, and some or all of the same intermediate
nodes.
permissions to the Developers Toolkit module, and modify the specified forms by adding the following
controls:
Service Setup Checkbox Control Source: Service Room Recommended location: On
Catalogue the Path Mgmt tab.
Type: Fields
Field: Ethernet Service
Title: Ethernet Network Service
Static Text Text: Return Capacity Layer 1 Recommended location: On
Edit Control Source: Resource Base the Path Mgmt tab, near the
Type: Fields Default Capacity Required
Field: Ethernet Return Capacity setting.
Layer 1
Static Text Text: Return Capacity Layer 2
Type: Fields
Field: Ethernet Return Capacity
Layer 2
Static Text Text: Return Capacity Layer 3
Type: Fields
Field: Ethernet Return Capacity
Layer 3
General Resource Setup Combobox Control Source: Resource Base Recommended location: On
Type: Functions the Circuit tab, adjacent to the
Field: Is Ethernet Is Node, Is Line, Is Encoder,
Title: Is Ethernet Port and Is Decoder settings.


Resource Booking Properties Static Text Text: Paired Path ID Recommended location: On
Edit Control Source: Resource Bookings the Path Mgmt tab, below the
(Events) existing controls.
Type: Fields
Field: Paired Path ID
Static Text Text: Path Type
Read-only Edit Source: Resource Bookings
Control (Events)
Type: Functions
Field: Path Type Description
ScheduLINK - Work Order Form Picture Button Caption: Display Ethernet Return
(Extended) Control Command: Graphical
ScheduLINK - Work Order Form Source/Destination: Display
(Standard) Ethernet Return
ScheduLINK Alt. - Work Order Button Icon: Generic
Form (Extended) Backwards/Previous
ScheduLINK Alt. - Work Order
Form (Standard)
Modifying Dialogs for Port Affinity

1+1 Circuit Protection uses two different encoder ports and two different destination ports, with
diverse routes between each. To allow providers to define business rules for which port in the second
path can be used with which port in the first path, a Circuit Protection Port Affinity catalog has been
added to Resource Setup.
permissions to the Developers Toolkit module, and modify the General Resource Setup dialog by
adding the controls shown below.
Browser Port Affinity List Recommended location:
On the Circuits tab.
Column Source:TR: Primary Resource
Type: Fields
Field: Description
Column Source:Port Affinity
Type: Fields
Field: Affinity
Column Source: TR: Primary Resource Link
Type: Fields
Field: Uplink Frequency
Column Source: TR: Primary Resource User
Type: Fields
Field: User Field 1
Column Source: TR: Backup Resource
Type: Fields
Field: Description


Column Source: TR: Backup Resource Link
Type: Fields
Field: Downlink Frequency
Column Source: TR: Backup Resource User
Type: Fields
Field: User Field 2
Button Caption: Assign Port Affinity Recommended location:
Command: Add Port Affinity Above browser.
Button Caption: Release Port Affinity Recommended location:
Command: Remove Port Affinity Above browser.
Adding Settings for Variable Capacity

Several new settings have been added to support variable capacity services in the Service Setup
properties:
l Capacity is Variable indicates the default capacity from the Service Setup default values can
be modified at initial booking and/or in existing bookings.
l Capacity for Ethernet Return is Variable indicates the default Return Capacity (for bi-
directional Ethernet bookings) from Service Setup can be modified at initial booking and/or in
existing bookings.
l Capacity Minimum Value and Capacity Maximum Value set limits on the lowest and
highest capacity values (respectively) considered valid for the current service.
l Capacity Conversion Stored Procedure determines the name of the stored procedure in the
database used to do capacity conversions (e.g. Mbps to DTM).
To make the corresponding changes, log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with
adding the following controls to the Path Management tab:
Control Type Control Details
Checkbox Source: Service Room Catalog
Type: Fields
Field: Variable Capacity
Title: Capacity Is Variable
Checkbox Source: Service Room Catalog
Type: Fields
Field: Variable Ethernet Return Capacity
Title: Capacity for Ethernet Return is Variable
Static Control Text: Minimum Capacity

Type: Fields
Field: Minimum Capacity
Static Control Text: Maximum Capacity

Control Type Control Details

Type: Fields
Field: Maximum Capacity
Static Control Capacity Step

Type: Fields
Field: Capacity Step
Browser Control Source: Resource Capacity Steps
Browser Column Source: Capacity Step

Type: Fields
Field: Step
Title: Capacity Steps
Picture Button Command: Add Resource Capacity Step
English: Add Capacity Step
Picture Button Command: Remove Resource Capacity Step
English: Remove Step

Adding Settings for Multi-Stream Services

ScheduLINK now supports the ability to book high-definition feeds, such as 4K (and theoretically 8K)
streams, using a service configured as a Multi-Stream Service. A multi-stream service automatically
allocates multiple encoders on the source side, and multiple decoders on the destination side, to
coordinate a single transmission across multiple streams.
Service Setup Check Box Source: Service Room Catalogue Recommended
Type: Fields location: Path
Mgmt tab
Field: Multi-Stream Service
Caption: Multi-Stream Service
Edit Control Source: Service Room Catalogue
Type: Fields
Field: Multi-Stream Count
Type: Fields
Field: Multi-Stream Variant Capacity Layer 1
Type: Fields
Type: Fields
Check Box Source: Service Room Catalogue
Type: Fields
Field: Module/Card Validation Required
Caption: Module/Card Validation Required
General Resource Edit Control Source: Resource Base Recommended
Type: Fields location: Circuit
tab
Field: External ID (Multi-Stream Variant Path)

Adding the Move Antenna Command

The Move Antenna command can be added to the Extended Scheduling Calendar menu, toolbar, or
both. (Refer to Creating a Move Antenna Activity in the ScheduLINK Users Guide.)
Toolbar/Menu Command Notes
Extended Scheduling Move Antenna Recommended location: Scheduling area of
Calendar menu menu.
Extended Scheduling Recommended icon: Satellite
Calendar toolbar
Refer to Creating a Move Antenna Activity in the ScheduLINK Users Guide.
Adding Settings for File Size Conversion

Two settings can be added to support File Size Conversion Stored Procedures in the Service Setup
properties:
l Conversion Stored Procedure – Converts from Layer 1 Capacity to Layer 2 Capacity
l File Size to Duration Stored Procedure – Calculates available capacity for Web Service
API
To make the corresponding changes, log in to the ScheduALL system as a supervisor or with
Edit Control Source: Service Room Catalog Recommended location:
Type: Fields Path Mgmt tab
Field: Conversion Stored Procedure

TitleLayer 1 Conversion SP
Type: Fields
Field: File Size to Duration Stored
Procedure
TitleCalc. Available Capacity

Ch. 8 Labor Manager
This chapter includes setup information for the Pay Translator and Working Time Manager features of ScheduALL.
In This Chapter
Labor Manager Overview 759

Pay Translator 760
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Ch. 8 Labor Manager
Labor Manager Overview

Labor Manager encompasses two ScheduALL modules licensed and sold separately:
l Pay Translator
l Working Time Manager
Pay Translator
The Pay Translator module calculates the cost and billing of the hourly paid employee at any time
interval of the daily working cycle. Pay rules are used to interpret the costing and pricing for any
segment of the work day. Refer to Pay Translator for more information on this module.
The Working Time Manager allows you to configure the work day rules appropriate to the following:
l Labor legislation in your area
l Industry regulations mandated by the government, state, or region
l Internal policies mandating maximum working hours, breaks, or wellness checks
Refer to Working Time Manager for more information on this module.

Pay Translator
Pay Translator Overview
The Pay Translator module calculates the cost and billing of the hourly paid employee at any time
interval of the daily working cycle. Generally, the employee is paid a base hourly rate and is paid
additionally when they exceed specific limits. Additional payment is triggered by certain events, such
as working overtime hours. These triggers are very flexible and can changed as needed.
Employee scheduling takes into account the entire day or even the day before or after the event to
determine how a specific event needs to be paid and even if it might affect other adjacent
assignments. ScheduALL has a locking system to ensure that the event that is being manipulated
cannot be modified by another user during that period. Pay Translator utilizes a back-end service to
gather all of the possible affected assignments, lock them, and then re-interpret the costs and prices
for these assignments.
The pay rule interpretation process is tied to the costing and pricing structures in ScheduALL so that
sales and cost values can be determined for any segment of the work day. Each working day is an
independent interpretation and produces a sequence of records that can be forwarded to a financial
system to handle recovery and time based payment records. Each segment of the employee’s day
that is unique in some way will be captured. A unique segment is one that has the same price and
cost and activity for a period of time. Any change triggers a new segment. It also handles additional
payments that can overlap these segments, if a penalty rule has also been set to be triggered for that
segment.

Pay Translator System Preferences

System Preferences determine how Pay Translator functions. These preferences are found in the
Pay Translator / Working Time Manager. The preferences specific to Pay Translator include:
l Suppress Compensation Factors in Cost Details
l Pay Translator Limits Pay Status to:
l Pay Translation Interpreted level:
l Roster Activity Type
l Overlap Account Code
Setting Account Codes

Account codes are used to provide an accounting code structure for Pay Translator. These codes link
a set of disassociated work events together into a working day. This structure is used to perform
calculations against similar assignments. Account codes must be set up before any Pay Translator
rules can be created. Refer to Account Code Setup for more information.
The security permission Allow Access to Account Code Setup? determines whether the user can
enter the Account Code area of Setup. This setting is located in the Maintenance & Setup area of
Permissions.
Adding Compensation Factors

Compensation Factors provide a method to add additional details to activities and events that affect
resource payment. For example, these factors can be used to provide additional payment or to waive
certain factors such as holiday or overtime pay. These are additional lines items added to the auxiliary
event details used to guide in the interpretation when exceptions may be required. They are normally
used to ‘disable’ or delay an interpretation for a period of time. Refer to External Compensation
Factors for more information.
Compensation Factors can have different purposes:
l Cause the interpreter to change the code path. These are known as Disable Factors.
l Special factor to identify a "call back" (a situation where an employee finishes work but returns
before their next regular shift.
l Add additional ad hock costs to an assignment.
To enable a user to enter a quantity for a compensation factor set the user preference Prompt
Compensation Factor Quantity? to Yes. Refer to General User Preferences, Options Tab,
Miscellaneous Options.
The following security settings affect the permissions a user has to use compensation factors:
l Can Setup Compensation Factors?
l Can Add Compensation Factors in Work Orders?
l Can Delete Compensation Factors in Work Orders?
Refer to the Maintenance & Setup area of Permissions.
Assigning Overtime Type Labels

Pay Translator is designed to use the existing overtime types in an assignable way so that each rule
will use an assigned level. They do not need to follow a specific order and you have the option to
override the names in the system labels. Refer to Overtime Types.

Defining Shift Days

Each assignment has a specific local date to which it is associated. This is known as a "shift date".
The translator process will gather all assignment for an employee for a shift date. Refer to Tracking
Employee Working Days.
Accessing Pay Scales

Pay scales are used by Pay Translator to interpret the base cost for an assignment.
Refer to Pay Scale Setup. The security setting Can access Pay Scales? must be set to Yes for a
user to display the Pay Scales setup dialog.
The base cost may be set at some distinct level depending on how complex the system needs to be.
When an assignment is interpreted a function will look for a base cost from these places and when
one is found it will stop looking and use it.
l Pay Scale from assigned band level
l Pay Category assigned at shift style
l Pay category assigned at type override
l Pay Category assigned at resource
l Pay Category assigned at type level
l Resource Cost
l Rule Set default cost
Assigning a Shift Style to a Personnel Resource

A catalog method is available that can assign a shift style to an employee for a period of time. This
allows the employee to be assigned to an interpretation rule set. Users can add, edit and remove a
shift style. These are time periods when a rule is in effect for this employee. You cannot overlap time
periods. Refer to Personnel Properties – Shift Style for more information.
Creating Rule Sets

Each employee via the shift style will be assigned to a rule set. Only a single rule set can be active on
any shift date. A translator rule set contains a set of rules for each account code that could be
assigned to the event. For example, a Work Shift account code could be used for all standard working
assignments like shifts and bookings and that account code would be set as the default for these
events. Refer to Shift Rules for more information.
Security permissions determine if a user can access shift rules:
l Can access Shift Rules?
l Can Create Shift Rules?
l Can Edit Shift Rules?
l Can Delete Shift Rules?
Refer to Maintenance & Setup Areas.
Adding Claimed Time Fields

If desired, you can add controls for the following to the Resource Activity dialog. This feature requires
the Pay Translator license and the user permission Use Claimed Times? must be set to Yes. Refer to
Use Claimed Times?. Issuing the Update from Claimed Time command moves the employee's
claimed time entries to the actual booking times.

Example
Employee Mary White was booked for a shift activity from 3 p.m. to 11 p.m. She actually worked until
11:30 p.m., so she adjusted the time in Smart Time and set the Event Status to Submitted.
When her supervisor views this activity in the ScheduALL application the original schedule of 3-11 is
shown along with Mary's claimed time of 3-11:30.
If the supervisor agrees that the claimed time is the time actually worked, then the Update From
Claimed Time command is issued. This moves the claimed time to the actual booking time. Note that
the Original Schedule does not change.

Other Activity Booking Read-Only Edit Source: TE: Booking Extension Date and Time fields can also
Properties Control Type: Fields be used in place of the edit
Field: Claimed Start Time controls.
Read-Only Edit Source: TE: Booking Extension
Field: Claimed End Time
Picture Button Caption: Update from Claimed Time
Command: Update from Claimed
Time


Working Time Manager Overview
The Working Time Manager allows you to configure the work day rules appropriate to the following:
l Labor legislation in your area
l Industry regulations mandated by the government, state, or region
l Internal policies mandating maximum working hours, breaks, or wellness checks
Once these rules are defined in the system and applied to employees, working time is monitored
when personnel resources are booked into work orders or activities. This provides the following
benefits:
l Guarantee compliance with regulations
l Warn of actions outside of work time rules
l Varying rules can be applied to employees based on department, location and pay
This ScheduALL functionality includes six different rule types:

l Break periods, such as requiring a 20 minute break per 6 hours of work during a work day.
l Rest periods, such as requiring a rest every 6 hours for each 24 hours, or 24 hours for each 7
days.
l Working duration limit, such as warning the scheduler when booking more than 8 hours of
work in a day, and preventing the user from booking more than 12 hours in a day.
l Work Day limits, such as warning the scheduler when a personnel resource has worked more
than a specified number of Sundays in a calendar year.
l Short notice warnings, which identifies if a scheduled item is changed, and the start of the
scheduled item is within a certain threshold from 'now'.
l Wellness checks, such as warning the scheduler if a personnel resource has not completed a
wellness check within the past year.
In addition, the Working Time Manager feature allows the administrator to do the following:
l Enable specific ScheduALL activity types to work with Working Time Manager work days.
l Specify custom names or labels for Working Time Manager rules.
l Create custom groupings of rules, called Shift Styles
l Associate personnel resources to Shift Styles
l Set the effective and expiration dates of a Shift Style
l Link Shift Styles to existing ScheduALL Pay Categories
Working Time Manager features are licensed separately from existing ScheduALL and Personnel
Manager functionality. Contact your ScheduALL sales representative for additional information.
Working Time Manager Setup

ScheduALL system preferences and security profile settings are used to configure Working Time
Manager functionality. This section lists the applicable settings.
Time Directive System Preferences

l Member Activities For Work Day – This preference is used to select the activities that may
be used for a work day event. Refer to Pay Translator/Working Time Manager for more
information.

l Exclude WO Cancelled events from Work Day? – This preference determines if a

canceled work order is included as part of a work day. Refer to Pay Translator/Working
Time Manager for more information.
l Working Time Manager Rules – This section allows an administrator to rename rule labels
for each type of Working Time Manager rules. Refer to Working Time Manager Rules for
more information.
l Working Time Manager Security – This section allows an administrator to rename labels for
working time rule enforcement methods. Refer to Working Time Manager Security for more
information.
Time Directive Security Profile Settings

l Lock Work Day? – This setting allows a user to create and access a work day event. Refer to
Working Time Manager permissions for more information.
l Security Options 1–10 – These settings determine how the associated rules are processed
for this profile. Refer to Working Time Manager Security permissions for more information.
l Shift Rule Access – These settings determine whether the user can Access, Create, Edit, or
Delete shift rules. Refer to Can Access Shift Rules for more information.
Managing Rule Sets

Rule sets are used to determine the pay translation rules that, in certain circumstances, will be used
in place of a resource’s existing pay category. These rules are added to the pay scale as default rule
sets.
Refer to Shift Rules for information on adding and managing shift rule sets:
Managing Time Rules

When an event is created or modified and it is a member of the work day and the employee has a rule
set associated with that day, then the time rules are applied.
Adding a Time Rule
To create a shift Working Time rule:
displays.
2. Select a rule set and click Edit.
3. Click the Time Manager tab.
4. Click Add Time Rule. The Shift WTM Rules dialog displays. Table 211 describes the
available settings.

Figure 330. Shift WTM Rule Dialog

Table 211. Shift WTM Rule Dialog Item Descriptions
Item Description
Title Enter the name of the Shift WTM Rule.
Rule Type Select a rule type for the rule from the list. This determines the core
function of the rule.
Break Periods If an employee works a number of actual work hours (meals and break
excluded) on a work day, they will require a minimum break after a set
number of hours worked.
Work Duration The actual work duration of a Work Day can go beyond a first
threshold (the usual daily actual work duration) but cannot be greater
than the maximum daily actual work duration. A warning message
needs to inform the user when over the usual daily actual work
duration, and a blocking message needs to stop the user when over
the maximum daily actual work duration.
Rest Periods It is mandatory to have a rest for a specific time period (no work) after
a number of hours of actual work on a working time period. Also, to
ensure that a rest period happens after a number of consecutive work
days.
Work Day Limits When the scheduler explicitly confirms a personnel resource on a
Work Order and if the number of Sundays worked by the resource on
the corresponding calendar year goes beyond a threshold, then a
warning message will display, and the user will be given the choice to
proceed or not.

Table 211. Shift WTM Rule Dialog Item Descriptions (continued)
Item Description
Short Notice This will identify if a modification occurs less than the defined period
before the beginning of the scheduled task.
Wellness Checks When a personnel resource is scheduled, a trigger is required to have
control over the date of his last wellness-check.
Acting On Determines how a shift rule collects the items in a work shift .
l Shift Work – Only consider the Shift Work(s)
l Members Only – Only consider the event being saved
l Shift Work and Members – Collect the shift work(s) and all of
the associated events.
Security Method Select a security option for the rule from the list.
Main Trigger Defines the upper and lower values of the main trigger.
Lower Enter the lower limit value and select a unit of measure.
Upper Enter the lower limit value and select a unit of measure.
Secondary Trigger Defines the upper and lower values of the main trigger.
Lower Enter the lower limit value and select a unit of measure.
Upper Enter the lower limit value and select a unit of measure.
Message Enter the message that will be displayed when the rule is triggered.
Click the small filled square to access an internal text editor to type
the message. Refer to Notes Editor.
Memo Internal notes for the rule. Click the small filled square to access an
internal text editor to type the memo. Refer to Notes Editor.
Meals Select (check) to exclude meals from the rule.
Breaks Select (check) to exclude breaks from the rule.
Paid State Determines which events are collected to determine when the rule is
triggered.
l Paid/UnPaid – Both paid and unpaid events will be collected to
determine when the rule is triggered.
l Unpaid Only – Only unpaid events will be collected to determine
when the rule is triggered.
l Paid Only – Only paid events will be collected to determine when
the rule is triggered.
Day Applied 1 The weekday that the rule can be associated with if supported in the
rule type. Select a day of the week from the list or select {None}.
Day Applied 2 The weekday that the rule can be associated with if supported in the
rule type. Select a day of the week from the list or select {None}.
Period The period of time that the rule would use.
N/A Not applicable.
Daily A single shift day.

Table 211. Shift WTM Rule Dialog Item Descriptions (continued)
Item Description
Weekly A seven day period. Start of week is determined by the user
preference “On Monthly Calendars, Week starts on”.
Yearly The calendar year that starts on 01-January.
Fiscal Year A one year period that starts on a Day and Month. The start day and
month are determined by the system preference “Start of Fiscal Year”.
(The year is not used in calendar selection. You are selecting the day
and month for the start of a fiscal year that repeats.)
Window A period defined in a specific rule that will define a rolling time period
around the explicit event or shift that is being modified.
Changing or Removing Time Rules

To change or remove a time rule:
displays.
2. Select a rule set and click Edit. The Shift Rule Set dialog displays.
3. Click the Time Manager tab.
4. Select a time rule from the list.
5. To change a rule click Edit Rule. The Shift WTM Rules dialog displays. Make any necessary
-or-
to remove a time rule, click Delete Rule. The system does not request confirmation to verify
this action.
Creating a Shift Day
A shift work event is created in one of two ways:
l Manually – a shift work event can be created using the New Shift Work command on the
scheduling calendar. This command can be added to the Scheduling menu using the
Developers Toolkit. After invoking the command, draw a work order block as you would for a
regular work order.
l Triggered by Rule – a shift work event can be created when triggered by a shift work rule that
is associated with a personnel resource. Refer to Rule Triggers.
A shift work event displays on the scheduling calendar as a light green display block. A user can open
the Shift Work dialog by double-clicking the display block. Table 212 describes the available
settings.

Figure 331. Shift Work Dialog

Table 212. Shift Work Dialog Item Descriptions
Item Description
Personnel Displays the name of the person associated with the event.
Shift Date Displays the date to which this shift is associated. The shift work and
the members will have the same shift date.
Start Shift The absolute start and end times of the work day period. These will be
Shift End adjusted automatically based on the associated member minimum
start and maximum end times.
Unpaid Indicates the state of the work day. May be set by a rule.
Created Indicates that the shift work event was manually created. This will lock
the work day to the original created times. A user may clear the
checkbox so that it will allow the shift work day to be fully
automatically maintained based on member times.
Break Quantity A quantity that represents the non-worked period during the work day.
Displays a time quantity (hours/minutes). Updated based on changes
to member periods and shift work period.
Display Calendar Click to display the Individual Monthly Calendar for the resource. The
Shift Work dialog closes.
Edit Event/Activity Click to view or change the event or activity selected in the activity
browser.

Table 212. Shift Work Dialog Item Descriptions (continued)
Item Description
Override Hours Specifies the number of override hours. Refer to Setting Override
Hours.
[Override Hours] Enabled Select this option to allow a scheduler to override the regular daily
hours for a specific day. This functionality only applies to the Pay
Catalog Day method.
[Activity List] Lists the activities associated with this shift work.
Event Details Displays details about the activity selected in the Activity List.
Standard Hours Displays the number of hours paid at the regular rate.
Overtime Displays the number of hours paid at the overtime rate.
Total Hours Displays the number of hours paid at the regular rate and the number of
hours paid at the overtime rate.
Last Modified by Displays the name of the user who last changed the event.
Last Modified Date Displays the date that the event was last changed.
Setting Override Hours

When the Enable Override Hours option is selected the Override Hours field becomes active. Enter
the number of desired override hours. The override value calculates the difference between the
override hours value entered and the first Level 1 Daily quantity (positive or negative) and then adds it
to each level. Refer to [Override Hours] Enabled.
For example, if you normally work an eight hour shift and you enter ten then the offset is +2, which is
then added to all of the levels The interpretations would be like setting up a pay category for this day
to have the following values:
Figure 332. Override Hours

Not enabled would be the default Monday through Thursday. The override hours do not affect the
Period values, if they were used.
Associating an Activity to a Shift Day
Employee activities can be associated to an existing Shift Day or a new Shift Day can be created
from an activity. When this is done the associated activities display on the activity browser in the
Shift Work dialog.
To associate an activity to a Shift Day:
1. On the Scheduling calendar, locate the activity you want to associate with a Shift Day block.
2. Right-click the activity and select Associate to Shift Work. A confirmation dialog displays.

If the activity block is displayed within an existing Shift Day block, then the activity is associated with
that block. If the activity is outside of a Shift Day block, then a new Shift Day block is created with
the start and end times of the activity.
Tracking Employee Working Days

This is a new event type object in the ScheduALL environment that is used to track a working day for
the employee. It will be used as a counter when rules need to determine how many work days the
employee has worked, for example, in a month or a year. It will also be used to determine the full day
working time period that an employee has worked in a single day. The work days hours are
determined by this object's start and end time minus the non-working periods.
Shift Work Period and Break Quantity
As member events are associated with the shift work day they will adjust the start or end time of that
shift work day assignment. The associated members time periods of the shift work day will be
encompassed within the shift work day time period.
l If any event end time is moved later then the shift work period end time will match.
l If any event end time is moved earlier then the shift work period will match the created end
time or the event end time whichever is later.
l If any event start time is moved later then the shift work period start time will be match the
created start time or the event start time whichever is earlier.
l If any event start time is moved earlier then the shift work period start time will match.
The break quantity will be set to reflect any time periods that are non-worked time periods. These
period will be calculated using:
l unpaid meal breaks
l unpaid breaks
l periods in the shift work that are not covered by a member

Rule Triggers
Rule triggers determine when a Working Time Manager rule is enforced. The following rule types are
available:
Rule Type A – Break Periods
This rule will manage the required rest break periods in the work day or on the event. When the rule is
acting on the Work Day or the Work Day and Members it will perform the same function and
determine the break times for the entire work day. If it is acting on the Members Only then it will
consider each event separately and may trigger on the event itself.
Rule Parameters
The following parameters are used:
l Main Upper Level
The threshold for the working durations required. When set the events working duration must
be greater than this value. If acting on the work day then the member events durations is used
(sum of all members). If acting on the members then each member duration is used.
l Secondary Lower Level
This is the required break period. When acting on a work day it is the period of time that does
not have a member time period plus any meals and breaks within the events (if they are also
included). If acting on members only then it would only consider the meal and break times if
included.
l Secondary Upper Level
This will be used only when the acting on is a work day. If the trigger has been fired then it will
set the Break Quantity field to this value or the actual break quantity found (whichever is
greater). If it is using this value then the Break Forced Flag may also be set if the quantity
value was populated with this value.
l Exclude Meals
If set then meal durations are not included in the calculation of the break period.
l Exclude Breaks
If set then break durations are not included in the calculation of the break period.
Rule Type B – Rest Periods

This rule will control the rest periods that must be provided around a work period. Normal work periods
may be event based, daily, weekly or window. The rule can define a minimum working threshold for
the rule to be considered. This includes a time period (minutes, hours, days, or a unit type) which will
act as a counter. A set of parameters are then required to set a rest time period in front of the work
period and behind the work period.
When acting on a Work Day it will:

l Look for the previous and next work day when required for the period.
l If a time duration is required it will be the start and end times of the work day with the duration
based on the time difference minus the beak quantity.
l Supported Acting On periods are Daily, Weekly, or Window. Refer to Managing Time Rules.

When acting on Work Day and Members it will:

l Look for the previous and next work day when required for the period.
l If a time duration is required it will be the start and end times of the work day with the duration
based on a sum of the member minus meals and breaks in all events (if included in the rule).
l Supported Acting On periods are Daily, Weekly, or Window. Refer to Managing Time Rules.
When acting on Members Only it will:

l Look for a previous or next member within the same work day.
l If a time duration is required it will be the start and end times of the event with the duration
being the quantity of the event minus the meals and breaks in the event (if included in rule).
l Supported Acting On period is Daily only. Refer to Managing Time Rules.
Rule Parameters
l Main Upper Level
The threshold for the working durations required. When set the events working duration must
be greater than this value if this is a time value. If acting on the work day then the member
events durations is used (sum of all members). If acting on the members then each member
duration is used. If this is defined in Units then it will count the number of events or the number
of workdays
l Secondary Lower Level
This is the required rest period prior to a working time period. When acting on a work day it is
the period of time that exists between the start of the first work day in the period or window and
the previous work days end time. If acting on members then it would be the period of time that
exists between the triggered events start time and the previous member’s end time within the
same work day
l Secondary Upper Level
This is the required rest period after a working time period. When acting on a work day it is the
period of time that exists between the end of the last work day in the period or window and the
next work days start time. If acting on members then it would be the period of time that exists
between the triggered events end time and the next member's end time within the same work
day.
l Exclude Meals
If this option is selected then meal durations are not included in the calculation of the duration
threshold if it is a time duration that is being used.
l Exclude Breaks
If this option is selected then break durations are not included in the calculation of the duration
threshold if it is a time duration that is being used
Rule Type C – Workday Durations

This will manage the maximum durations of working time periods. A total duration of time worked for a
time period is accumulated. For example, 60 hours within a weekly period of time.

Rule Parameters
l Acting On:
If Members Only then it acts on each event separately and only considers the events
time/count. If Shift Work OR Shift Work and Members then it considers the events for the
entire shift work.
l Main Upper Level:
This will be the target duration.
l Exclude Meals and Breaks
These flags can be used to exclude the durations of any meals and breaks when determining
time period durations.
l Periods allowed:
Daily, Weekly, Yearly, Fiscal Year
Refer to Managing Time Rules.

Rule Type D – Work Day Limits
This rule will be used to count the number of working days in a time period. Additional parameters can
also be used to apply the rule on a specific set of days (limited to 2 days per rule). When the filter on is
used and both are set it will consider either day as a count towards the total count. If for example it is
set to Saturday and Sunday and the employee works on Saturday and again on Sunday OR only on
Saturday OR only on Sunday then it will only count it as one towards the total target value. This
allows the user to set up a rule to govern a case where the employee is only allowed to work a
specific number of weekends.
Rule Parameters
l Acting On:
Shift Work
l MUL
Is the target value count (unit only is used)
l Period
Daily, Weekly, Calendar Year, Fiscal Year
l Filter On
Any day of the week (2 allowed)
Rule Type E – Short Notice

This will produce a message to warn the user that there has been a change in the employee's
schedule within a specific time period from the current time. Any new, modified, or deleted events
should trigger a message if the original or new times are within the specified time period. A separate
parameter is used to manage changes to existing and new events.

Rule Parameters
l Main Upper Level:
The time period when a change to an existing event has been done.
l Secondary Upper Level:
The time period when a new event has been created.
Rule Type F – Wellness Check

This rule is dependent on a new field in the personnel properties for Wellness Date. This will be set by
the personnel manager for the date when a certificate is received. This rule will allow a time period for
when a new certificate is required. Rule is triggered if a booking falls outside of that period (future
date). This will only use the Work Day selection from the Acting on list.
Rule Parameters
l Main Lower Level:
The time period that will be added to the employee wellness date. Normally this is defined in
days.

Displaying Yearly and Monthly Shift Work Counters

On the scheduling calendar, a counter can be displayed for each resource that shows the number of
Shift Work records for the month or year. These counters are added to the calendar’s resource
browser by following the steps below.
1. In ScheduALL display the scheduling calendar.
2. Right-click the Description column of the resource browser and select Insert New Column.
Figure 333. Insert Column, Resource Browser

3. In the Column Properties dialog select Resource Catalog from the Source list.
4. Click Functions and then select Yearly counter (Shift Work). Click OK.
5. Repeat Steps and . Click Functions and then select Monthly counter (Shift Work). Click
OK.
6. The columns are added to the browser.
Figure 334. Yearly and Monthly Shift Work Totals

Ch. 9 Circuit Selection
This chapter includes general information about the Circuit Selection features of ScheduLINK. It includes an
overview of the required setup information.
In This Chapter
Overview 778
Circuit Selection Setup 778
Menu and Toolbar Options 797
Sample Data 798
Worksheets 800
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Ch. 9 Circuit Selection
Overview
The Circuit Selection features in the ScheduLINK system allow a user to quickly create a work order
that includes the network equipment required by a transmission. The user selects the source and
destination of the circuit, optionally selects one node through which the booking must pass, and the
ScheduLINK system determines, based on a pre-built catalog of all the possible relationships
between network nodes, all of the possible paths that can complete the circuit. Depending on
configuration, the system then either selects the “best” circuit path, or prompts the user to select the
desired circuit path from the list of possibilities.
For an overview of Circuit Selection, including circuit components and circuit selection common
tasks, refer to the ScheduLINK Users Guide. This chapter assumes work orders will be created
using a virtual bookings resource (master resource), and that a third-party Network Management
System (NMS) will be used.
Circuit Selection Setup

This section describes how to create and configure the network components and paths in the
ScheduLINK system for use with the Circuit Selection logic.
The following tasks are required in order to use Circuit Selection features:
l Resource Setup describes configuring the resources (nodes, lines, etc.) used to create
circuits.
l Service Setup – Path Management describes configuring the services used to book circuits.
l Pre-defined Circuit Setup describes configuring specific encoder-to-decoder circuits.
l Circuit Group Setup describes configuring groups used to organize Pre-defined Circuits.

Circuit Selection Resource Setup

The ScheduLINK system uses three basic types of resources to build circuit paths: nodes, encoders
or decoders, and lines. In order to build the path catalog and book circuits, a supervisor (or user with
permissions to create and edit resources) must first add information about all of the items in the
network to the ScheduLINK system by creating resources as described in Table 213. To create
circuit resources refer to Circuit Selection Setup.
l For each Node, such as a router or switch, create a General Resource entry and configure it as
shown in the Node column.
l For each line that connects two nodes, create a General Resource entry and configure it as
shown in the Line column.
l For each encoder that provides one-way access into the packet/data network, create a
General Resource entry and configure it as shown in the In Port / Encoder column.
l For each decoder that provides one-way access out of the packet/data network, create a
General Resource entry and configure it as shown in the Out Port / Decoder column.
l For each encoder/decoder that provides two-way access into or out of the packet/data
network, create a General Resource entry and configure it as shown in the In/Out Port
column.
Table 213 summarizes the configuration settings required by the resources used to identify
components in a network.
Table 213. Resource Configuration for Circuit Resources
Tab Field/Parameter Node Line In Port / Out Port In / Out Port

Encoder /Decoder
Main Check Availability YES YES YES YES YES
Path Classification <select> <select> <select>
Mgmt
Default Transmission Relay Point Source Destination Source
Role
Can be a Source YES YES YES
Can be a Destination YES YES YES
Can be a Relay Point YES
Allow Cascading YES YES YES
Extended Trail YES YES YES YES
Enabled
Total Capacity <configure>

Table 213. Resource Configuration for Circuit Resources (continued)
Tab Field/Parameter Node Line In Port / Out Port In / Out Port

Encoder /Decoder
Circuit Is Node YES YES YES YES
Is Node Label YES
Is Encoder YES YES
Is Decoder YES YES
Is Line YES
Latitude and <configure> <same as <same as <same as
Longitude Destination Source Source/Destination
Node> Node> Node>
Select Source Node <select> <select> <select>
Select Destination <select> <select> <select>
Node
Other External ID <Device <Device ID> <Device <Device ID> <Device ID>
ID> ID>
Notes:
l Tabs listed are for default/standard dialogs. It may be helpful to create custom tabs for each
type of network item (Node, Line, Encoder/Decoder) and copy the appropriate settings to
those tabs.
l Joins are not supported in version 4.82 or earlier.
l These settings are required when using the ScheduALL Interop Service interface.
The mappings between the “friendly” labels shown above and the actual Developers Toolkit field
names are shown below.
Table 214. Label to Field Mappings
Tab Resource Setup Parameter Developers Toolkit Field Name

Main Check Availability Check availability flag
Path Management Can be a Source Is source
Can be a Destination Is destination
Can be a Relay Point Is relay point
Allow Cascading Can cascade
Classification Extended trail enabled
Default Transmission Role Default transmission role
Total Capacity Total capacity
Extended Trail enabled (NMS) Extended Trail enabled

Table 214. Label to Field Mappings(continued)

Circuit Is Node Is Node
Is Node Label Is station label
Map Co-ordinates Latitude Degrees, Latitude Minutes,
Latitude Cardinal, Longitude Degrees,
Longitude Minutes, Longitude Cardinal
Is Encoder Is encoder
Is Decoder Is decoder
Is Line Is line
Select source node Select Line Source
Select destination node Select Line Destination
Other External ID (NMS) External ID
Table 215. Label to Field Mappings

Main Check Availability Check availability flag
Path Management Can be a Source Is source
Can be a Destination Is destination
Can be a Relay Point Is relay point
Allow Cascading Can cascade
Classification Extended trail enabled
Default Transmission Role Default transmission role
Total Capacity Total capacity
Extended Trail enabled (NMS) Extended Trail enabled
Circuit Is Node Is Node
Is Node Label Is station label
Map Co-ordinates Latitude Degrees, Latitude Minutes,
Latitude Cardinal, Longitude Degrees,
Longitude Minutes, Longitude Cardinal
Is Encoder Is encoder
Is Decoder Is decoder
Is Line Is line
Select source node Select Line Source
Select destination node Select Line Destination
Other External ID (NMS) External ID

Creating a Node Resource

To configure a resource as a Node (as summarized in Circuit Selection Resource Setup):
1. Log on to the ScheduALL/ScheduLINK system as a supervisor, or with access to Room &
Resource Setup.
2. From the File menu, select Setup, and click Rooms & Resources.
3. Select the appropriate resource Category (such as Circuit Network), or create a new
category to hold only circuit-oriented resources.
4. At the bottom of the Type column, click New, and enter the description, Nodes.
5. Select the Nodes resource type, and at the bottom of the Description column, click New to
create a new resource. The Resource Types dialog displays.
6. Select General Resource and click OK. The General Resource Properties dialog displays.
7. On the Main tab:
l Enter the Description of the resource.
l Select (check) Check Availability.
8. Click the Path Mgmt tab to bring that page forward, and do the following:
l Select (check) Can be a Source and Can be a Destination.
l Click the Circuit tab to bring that page forward, and do the following:
9. Select (check) Is Node (Router).
l Select (check) Is Node Label (for map) and set the Latitude and Longitude values. Refer
to the descriptions for Latitude and Longitude.
l Enter the Device IP Address.
10. Click OK to save the new resource.
Setting Path Priority
After the path catalog has been built, the ScheduLINK system allows an administrator (or authorized
user) to adjust the relative priority of two or more paths between a given Source and Destination. To
view and modify the priority of different paths:
Resource Setup.
3. Select the appropriate resource Category and Type, and double-click a source Node
resource.
4. Click the Circuit tab to bring that page forward.
5. Click Select Destination Node and choose one of the available destinations to display the
possible paths between the selected Source and Destination in the “Show Paths for this
Resource” browser. Paths are displayed in segments using the first four letters of the source
node to first four letters of destination node. For example, a segment from nodes 'Paris' to
'New York' will appear as 'Pari-New ' in the path catalog. Depending on the number of
resources, nodes, and possible paths in the network, this operation may take several minutes.
6. Select a path and click Up to move the path up in the priority list, and make it more likely to be
selected when Book Best is enabled at the service level, OR
Select a path and click Down to move the path down in the priority list, and make it less likely
to be selected when Book Best is enabled at the service level, OR
Click Sort Path Catalogue to clear any custom sorting and reorganize the list of paths based
on the default priority order of shortest path–that is, the lowest number of nodes are higher
priority, and highest number of nodes lower priority.

Creating a Line Resource

To configure a resource as a Line (as summarized in Circuit Selection Resource Setup):
Resource Setup.
4. At the bottom of the Type column, click New, and enter the description, Lines.
5. Select the Lines resource type, and at the bottom of the Description column, click New to
create a new resource. The Resource Types dialog displays.
Main Tab Setup
1. Enter the Description of the resource.
Figure 335. General Resource Properties, Main Tab
Path Management Tab Setup

1. Select (check) Can be a Relay Point.
2. Select (check) Allow Cascading From This Element.
3. Select (check) Extended Trail Enabled to include this resource in messages sent to a third-
party NMS using the ScheduALL Interop Service.
4. Click Classification, and double-click a classification appropriate to a line resource, such as
Line or Backbone. (Refer to Resource Classification Setup for more information.)
5. Set Default Transmission Role to Relay Point.
6. Enter the Total Capacity of the line.

7. Enter the Capacity Unit of Measure, such as Mbit.
Figure 336. General Resource Properties, Path Mgmt Tab
Circuit Tab Setup

1. Select (check) Is Line.
2. Click Select Source Node to select one end of the line; the Select Source Node dialog
displays the list of Nodes in the system for which the Is Node (Router) and Is Node Label
(for map) options are selected (checked). Double-click the appropriate source; the
ScheduLINK system automatically populates the related IP address, Latitude, and Longitude
to match the selected source node.
3. Click Select Destination Node to select the other end of the line; the Select Destination
Node dialog displays the list of Nodes in the system for which the Is Node (Router) and Is
Node Label (for map) options are selected (checked). Double-click the appropriate
destination; the ScheduLINK system automatically populates the related IP address, Latitude,
and Longitude to match the selected destination node.
4. Enter the Device IP Address to identify this resource in messages sent to a third-party NMS
using the ScheduALL Interop Service.

Figure 337. General Resource Properties, Circuit Tab
Disabling an Existing Line Resource

To disable a line from being considered for inclusion in the Path Catalogue:
Resource Setup.
3. Select the appropriate resource Category and Type, and double-click a source node resource.
4. Click the Circuit tab to bring that page forward.
5. Clear the Select Source Node and Select Destination Node selections from the line
resource.
6. Deselect (clear) the Is Line flag.
The next time the Path Catalog is rebuilt, the line will be removed from consideration for the path
catalog, and any circuit using the line will be removed from the catalog.
Creating an Encoder Resource
To configure a resource as an Encoder only (as summarized in Circuit Selection Resource Setup):
Resource Setup.
4. To create a new resource category for encoders, click Newat the bottom of the Type column
and then enter the description, Encoders.
5. Select the Encoders (or other) resource type, and click New at the bottom of the Description
column to create a new resource. The Resource Types dialog displays.

7. On the Main tab:
a. Enter the Description of the resource.
b. Select (check) Check Availability.
a. Select (check) Can be a Source.
b. Select (check) Allow Cascading From This Element.
c. Select (check) Extended Trail Enabled to include this resource in messages sent to a
third-party NMS using the ScheduALL Interop Service.
d. Click Classification, and double-click a classification appropriate to an encoder resource,
such as Encoder/Decoder. (Refer to Resource Classification Setup for more
information.)
e. Set Default Transmission Role to Source.
9. Click the Circuit tab to bring that page forward, and do the following:
a. Select (check) Is Node.
b. Select (check) Is Encoder.
c. Click Select Destination Node to select the target resource that comes after this
resource in a circuit. The Select Destination Node dialog displays the list of Nodes in the
system for which the Is Node (Router) and Is Node Label (for map) options are selected
(checked).
i. Double-click the appropriate destination; the ScheduLINK system automatically
populates the related IP address, Latitude, and Longitude to match the selected node.
d. In the Map Co-ordinates area, enter the Latitude and Longitude values to match the
Latitude and Longitude values of the Destination Node. Refer to the descriptions for
Latitude and Longitude.
e. Enter the Device IP Address to identify this resource in messages sent to a third-party
NMS using the ScheduALL Interop Service.
Creating a Decoder Resource
To configure a resource as a Decoder only):
Resource Setup.
4. At the bottom of the Type column, click New, and enter the description, Decoders.
5. Select the Decoders resource type, and at the bottom of the Description column, click New
to create a new resource. The Resource Types dialog displays.
7. On the Main tab:

a. Select (check) Can be a Destination.
b. Select (check) Extended Trail Enabled to include this resource in messages sent to a
c. Click Classification, and double-click a classification appropriate to an encoder resource,
information.)
d. Set Default Transmission Role to Destination.
b. Select (check) Is Decoder.
c. Click Select Source Node to select the origin resource that comes before this resource in
a circuit. The Select Source Node dialog displays the list of Nodes in the system for which
the Is Node (Router) and Is Node Label (for map) options are selected (checked).
i. Double-click the appropriate source; the ScheduLINK system automatically populates
the related IP address, Latitude, and Longitude to match the selected node.
d. In the Map Co-ordinates area, enter the Latitude and Longitude values to match the
Latitude and Longitude values of the Source Node. Refer to the descriptions for Latitude
and Longitude.
e. Enter the Device IP Address to identify this resource in messages sent to a third-party
Creating a Combination Encoder/Decoder Resource
To configure a resource that can serve as both an Encoder and a Decoder (as summarized in Circuit
Selection Resource Setup):
Resource Setup.
4. At the bottom of the Type column, click New, and enter the description, Encoder/Decoders.
5. Select the Encoder/Decoders resource type, and at the bottom of the Description column,
click New to create a new resource. The Resource Types dialog displays.
7. On the Main tab:

a. Select (check) Can be a Source.
b. Select (check) Can be a Destination.
c. Select (check) Allow Cascading From This Element.
d. Select (check) Extended Trail Enabled to include this resource in messages sent to a
e. Click Classification, and double-click a classification appropriate to an encoder resource,
information.)
f. Set Default Transmission Role to Source.
b. Select (check) Is Encoder.
c. Select (check) Is Decoder.
d. Click Select Source Node to select the origin resource that comes before this resource in
a circuit when this resource is serving as a Decoder.
i. The Select Source Node dialog displays; double-click the appropriate source.
ii. The ScheduLINK system automatically populates the related IP address, Latitude, and
Longitude to match the selected node.
e. Click Select Source Node to select the origin resource that comes before this resource in
a circuit. The Select Source Node dialog displays the list of Nodes in the system for which
the Is Node (Router) and Is Node Label (for map) options are selected (checked).
i. Double-click the appropriate source; the ScheduLINK system automatically populates
the related IP address, Latitude, and Longitude to match the selected node.
f. Click Select Destination Node. The Select Destination Node dialog displays; double-
click the node selected as the Source Node.
g. In the Map Co-ordinates area, enter the Latitude and Longitude values to match the
Latitude and Longitude values of the Source/Destination Node. Refer to the descriptions
for Latitude and Longitude.
h. Enter the Device IP Address to identify this resource in messages sent to a third-party
Creating or Modifying a Predefined Protected Circuit
Creating a predefined protected circuit requires modifications to the Pre-Defined Circuit Setup dialog.
Refer to Required Changes for Pre-defined Circuit with Path Protection.
To create a predefined protected circuit, or modify an existing predefined protected circuit:
1. From the File menu, select Setup, and then click Pre-Defined Circuit Setup.
2. Click the Protected tab.
3. Click Select Protected Source. The Select Source Node dialog displays the list of resources
configured as In Port / Encoder nodes ); double-click the appropriate resource to serve as the
circuit’s source port/encoder. Refer to Circuit Selection Resource Setup.
4. Click Select Protected Destination. The Select Destination Node dialog displays the list of
resources configured as Out Port / Decoder nodes ; double-click the appropriate resource to
serve as the circuit’s destination port/decoder. Refer to Circuit Selection Resource Setup

5. Click Add to Protected Circuit. The Select Next Resource dialog displays the list of lines
that are available from the selected source, with the previous resource and source in the title
bar.
l Select desired Line from the Source node to the next node, and click Select. The Select
Next Resource dialog displays the list of lines that are available from the selected Source.
l Continue to select additional valid hops as necessary. When the selected item has a direct
path to the selected Destination, the Select Next Resource dialog closes automatically.
6. To remove a line from the circuit, select it and click Unassign from Protected Circuit.
7. Click OK to complete the protected predefined circuit.
Service Setup – Path Management

A service is the starting point for a booked circuit, and Circuit Selection functionality requires some
additional information at the service level. The Path Management tab displays information specific to
network services. Table 216 describes the available settings.
Figure 338. Service Properties for Circuit Selection

Table 216. Service Properties for Circuit Selection Options
Item Description
Required Capacity (Layers 1-3) Enter the amount of bandwidth required for the circuit at each
layer.
Units Enter the unit description, such as Mbit, used to evaluate the
amount of capacity.

Table 216. Service Properties for Circuit Selection Options (continued)
Item Description
Ethernet (Unidirectional) Select (check) this setting to identify this as a Unidirectional
(not shown) Ethernet service. To add this feature to the dialog, refer to Adding
the Unidirectional Ethernet Checkbox.
Required Return Capacity Enter the amount of bandwidth required for the return circuit at
(Layers 1-3) each layer.
ScheduLINK Network Service Determines whether the service triggers the circuit selection
functionality.
l Select (check) this setting to identify this as a Circuit-based
service and enable circuit selection functionality.
l Deselect (clear) this setting to disable circuit selection
functionality.
Prompt User for Via Node Determines whether the system allows the user to specify one
additional node between the Source and Destination which must
be included in any paths used for the circuit.
l Select (check) this setting to allow the user to route a circuit
through a specific node when the booking is created.
l Deselect (clear) this setting to disable the service from
participating in circuit selection functionality.
Book Best Determines whether the system automatically selects the
highest-priority path available in the internal path catalog.
l Select (check) this setting to automatically book the highest-
priority path between the selected source and destination. If
the Prompt User for Via Node setting is also selected, the
system automatically books the highest-priority path that
includes the selected Via node.
l Deselect (clear) this setting to allow the user to select a path
when the service is booked by displaying the list of possible
paths between the selected source and destination.

Item Description
Protected Circuit Determines whether the system reserves additional bandwidth to
use if the original circuit path fails.
l <none> No circuit protection.
l 1+1 Circuit Protection automatically reserves a second
circuit with the fewest possible number of common nodes,
using separate source and destination ports. Where it is
necessary to use a common segment, the system
automatically reserves the appropriate amount of additional
bandwidth on that segment.
l 1+1 Path Protection automatically reserves a second circuit
with the fewest possible number of common nodes, using the
same source and destination ports. Where it is necessary to
use a common segment, the system automatically reserves
the appropriate amount of additional bandwidth on that
segment.
l Alt. Path Protection automatically reserves a second circuit
with the fewest possible number of common nodes, using the
same source and destination ports. Where it is necessary to
use a common node, the system does not reserve additional
bandwidth.
Permit Booking Same Node for Determines whether the primary and secondary paths can utilize
Protected Path the same node.
l Select (check) this setting to allow a node to be used in both
paths.
l Deselect (clear) this setting to prevent the same node from
being used in both paths.
Permit Booking Same Segment Determines whether the primary and secondary paths can utilize
for Protected Path the same segment.
l Select (check) this setting to allow a segment to be used in
both paths.
l Deselect (clear) this setting to prevent the same segment
from being used in both paths.
Deny Booking in Opposite Determines whether the primary and secondary paths can utilize
Direction between Two Nodes the same two nodes in reverse direction.
l Select (check) this setting to allow two nodes to be used in
reverse direction from the primary path.
l Deselect (clear) this setting to prevent two nodes to be used
in reverse direction from the primary path.
l Example: When deselected, and the primary path uses nodes
New York to Chicago, the secondary path cannot use
Chicago to New York.

Item Description
Attempt to Preserve Positions Determines whether the order of resources from a service are
(Visual Path) inserted in the appropriate positions in the visual path of a circuit.
l Select (check) this setting to allow the system to re-order the
resources from a service in the visual path.
l Deselect (clear) this setting to allow the system to place the
resources from a service at the end of the visual path.
Ethernet Service Determines the type of Ethernet service. Select the type of
service from the list.
l <no> Not an Ethernet service.
l <unrestricted> Ethernet service.
Carrier Ethernet Service Types
l E-LAN identifies the Ethernet service as E-LAN type.
l E-Line identifies the Ethernet service as E-Line type.
l E-Tree identifies the Ethernet service as E-Tree type.
External Web Service Allows the administrator to identify the Web service to which
Interop messages will be sent for bookings or chains related to
this service; this setting overrides the External Web Service
assigned at the Resource level for all resources bundled under the
service. Available options include all Web Services defined in the
Chorus system via the Spectrum application.
l Does not participate – does not use an optional web
service.
l (service name) – identifies the optional Chorus web service.
Capability Requirements Lists the resource capability selections assigned to the resource.
Assign Capability Click to display the Resource Capability Selection dialog. Select
the desired capabilities and click Select.
Release Capability Select a capability in the list and click to remove it from the
resource.
Predefined Circuit Setup

A predefined circuit identifies a specific, user-defined path between one specific source port/encoder
and one specific destination port/decoder.
CAUTION: Creating predefined circuits is a manual process where no circuit validity checks
are performed until a user attempts to book a predefined circuit. It is important
that a valid circuit is defined to avoid unexpected errors.
Creating a Predefined Circuit

To create a pre-defined circuit, or modify an existing pre-defined circuit:
Resource Setup.

2. From the File menu, select Setup, and click Pre-defined Circuit Setup. The Pre-defined
Circuit Setup browser displays the list of all pre-defined circuits.
Note: The Pre-Defined Circuit Setup option only displays when the system is licensed for
Graphical Map. If you are using Circuit Selection without Graphical Map, contact your
ScheduALL representative.
3. Click New to create a pre-defined circuit, OR
Select an existing pre-defined circuit and click Edit.
The Pre-defined Circuit dialog displays.Table 217 describes the available settings.
Figure 339. PRE-DEFINED CIRCUIT DIALOG

Table 217. Pre-defined Circuit dialog options
Item Description
Description Text that identifies the circuit to the scheduler; this value is
displayed in the Manual Circuit Selection list when the Book
Best option is disabled (cleared) for a Circuit service. (Required.)
Select Source The source node or encoder for the circuit. (Required.)
Select Destination The destination node or decoder for the circuit. (Required.)
Select Circuit Group The group to which this Pre-defined Circuit belongs.
Preferred The numeric ranking of the predefined circuit with respect to
other pre-defined circuits that link same Source and Destination
nodes.
Select Protected Source The source node or encoder for the protected circuit.
Select Protected The destination node or decoder for the protected circuit.
Destination
Add to Circuit Adds a line from the Source node to the next possible node. You
will be prompted to select multiple lines to reach the selected
destination.
Move Down Moves a resource down (later or right) in the circuit path.
Move Up Moves a resource up (earlier or left) in the circuit path.
Unassign from Circuit Removes the selected resource from the current circuit.

Table 217. Pre-defined Circuit dialog options (continued)
Item Description
Add to Protected Circuit Adds a transmission resource path to the current protected
circuit. You may be prompted to select multiple paths to reach
the selected protected destination.
Unassign from Protected Removes the selected resource from the current protected
Circuit circuit.
Resource Browser
Order The numeric indication of where in the circuit path the resource
will fall with respect to other resources.
Resource to Include The resource description of each resource to be booked in the
circuit path.
Circuit Path Displays a text preview circuit’s path by concatenating all of the
resource descriptions in the appropriate order.
4. Enter the Description of the circuit. (Required.)

5. Click Select Source. The Select Source Node dialog displays the list of resources configured
as In Port/Encoder nodes; double-click the appropriate resource to serve as the circuit’s
source port/encoder. (Required.) Refer to Circuit Selection Resource Setup.
6. Click Select Destination. The Select Destination Node dialog displays the list of resources
configured as Out Port/Decoder nodes; double-click the appropriate resource to serve as the
circuit’s destination port/decoder. (Required.) Refer to Circuit Selection Resource Setup.
7. Click Select Circuit Group to associate the current pre-configured circuit with a circuit group.
The list of circuit groups displays; double-click an existing group to associate the pre-
configured circuit to that group. Refer to Circuit Group Setup for more information.
8. Enter a number for the Preferred Circuit Group. This value is the numeric ranking of the
predefined circuit with respect to other pre-defined circuits that link same Source and
Destination nodes.
9. Click Add to Circuit. The Select Next Resource dialog displays the list of lines that are
available from the selected source, with the previous resource and source in the title bar.
l Select desired Line from the Source node to the next node, and click Select. The Select
Next Resource dialog displays the list of lines that are available from the selected Source.
path to the selected Destination, the Select Next Resource dialog closes automatically.
10. To remove a line from the circuit, select it and click Unassign from Circuit.
11. Click OK to complete the pre-defined circuit.
Creating a Predefined Circuit with Path Protection
The ScheduLINK system allows a supervisor or authorized user to create predefined circuits with
path protection. For information on configuring the Pre-defined Circuit Setup dialog for this feature,
refer to Required Changes for Pre-defined Circuit with Path Protection.
To create a Predefined Circuit with Path Protection:
1. Complete the steps in Creating a Predefined Circuit.
2. Click the Protected tab to bring that page forward. Refer to Required Changes for Pre-
defined Circuit with Path Protection for information on adding this tab.

3. (Optional) Click Select Source (Protected); if a specific protected source is not selected, the
circuit logic will use the same source as the original, non-protected path. The Select Source
Node dialog displays the list of available sources. Select the source node and click Select.
4. (Optional) Click Select Destination (Protected); if a specific protected destination is not
selected, the circuit logic will use the same destination as the original, non-protected path.
Select the destination node and click Select.
5. Click Add to Circuit (Protected Route). The Select Next Resource dialog displays the list of
lines that are available from the appropriate source, with the previous resource and Source (or
Protected Source) name in the title bar.
l Select desired Line from the Source (or Protected Source, if specified) to the next node, and
click Select. The Select Next Resource dialog displays the list of lines that are available
from the selected source.
path to the selected Destination (or Protected Destination), the Select Next Resource
dialog closes automatically.
6. Click OK to save the circuit.
When you add or remove a node in a Pre-Defined Circuit, the system validates both the primary path
and the secondary (protected) path. If the system detects any errors, it displays “Your primary circuit
is invalid:” or “Your backup circuit is invalid:” (respectively) with more information. Some possible
errors and their conditions include:
l Circuit does not reach source – The first node in the route does not connect to the selected
Source or Protected Source.
l Node_description does not connect to previous node – A node was removed, and the two
nodes on either side of it have no direct connection.
l Circuit does not reach destination – The last node in the route does not connect to the
selected Destination or Protected Destination.
Deleting a Predefined Circuit

To delete a predefined circuit:
Resource Setup.
2. From the File menu, select Setup, and click Pre-defined Circuit Setup. The Pre-defined
Circuit Setup browser displays the list of all predefined circuits.
Figure 340. Pre-Defined Circuit Setup Dialog

3. Select an existing predefined circuit and click Delete. The predefined circuit is no longer
available and cannot be booked in any new bookings. However, any existing bookings or work
orders that were created using the predefined circuit are not affected.

Circuit Group Setup

Circuit Groups are labels used to organize pre-defined circuits.
Note: The Circuit Group Setup option is visible only when the system is licensed for Graphical Map.
If you are using Circuit Selection without Graphical Map, contact your ScheduALL
representative.
Creating or Modifying a Circuit Group

To create a new circuit group, or modify an existing group:
1. Log on to the ScheduALL/ScheduLINK system.
2. From the File menu, select Setup, and click Circuit Group Setup. The Circuit Group Setup
dialog displays.
Figure 341. Circuit Group Setup Dialog

3. Click New to create a circuit group, OR
Select an existing group and click Edit to modify a group.
The Circuit Group dialog displays the list of available circuit groups.
Figure 342. Circuit Group Setup Dialog

4. Enter a Description of the group and click OK. The group is now available for assignment in
the Predefined Circuit Setup area.
Deleting a Circuit Group

To remove an existing circuit group:
2. From the File menu, select Setup, and click Circuit Group Setup. The Circuit Group Setup
browser displays the list of available circuit groups.
3. Select an existing group and click Delete. The group is no longer available for assignment in
the Predefined Circuit Setup area, and the Circuit Group setting is cleared for any Predefined
Circuits previously associated to the group.

Viewing the Interop Message Log

The Interop Message Log allows the user to view all the messages successfully communicated with
the ScheduALL Interop Service for diagnostic purposes. To display the Interop Message Log:
2. From the Main menu, select View XML Message Log. The Message Log dialog displays.
Figure 343. Interop Message Log Dialog
Menu and Toolbar Options

File Menu Options
The system displays the File menu at all times. This topic lists File menu options and toolbar icons
related to Graphical Map functionality.
Table 218. Menu and Toolbar Options for Work Orders
Menu Command Description

Setup
Circuit Group Setup Displays the list of Circuit Groups in the system, and allows the
user to add new groups, and modify or delete existing groups. (This
option is visible only when the system is licensed for Graphical
Map.)
Pre-Defined Circuit Setup Displays the list of Pre-Defined Circuits in the system, and allows
the user to add new pre-defined circuits, and modify or delete
existing circuits. (This option is visible only when the system is
licensed for Graphical Map.)
Work Order Menu Options

The system displays the Work Order menu when a work order is open in the Work Order Properties
dialog. This topic lists Work Order menu options and toolbar icons related to Graphical Map
functionality. These items may not be included in the standard menu/toolbar setup, but can be added
using Developers Toolkit.

Table 219. Menu and Toolbar Options for Work Orders
Menu Command Icon Description

Add ScheduLINK Service Displays list of ScheduLINK Network Circuit services.
Recommended menu caption: Add Circuit Service
Transmissions: Book Displays the Select Destination browser and books an
additional destination additional path from the current source to the selected
destination.
Transmissions: Remove Allows the user to remove an entire circuit or an additional
Branch destination branch.
Transmissions: Re-route If one or more alternative paths exist between the current
Circuit Source and Destination, attempts to book an alternate path if
there's a conflict with any of the circuit lines.
Request Transmission Manually triggers the ScheduALL Interop Service to send a
Status CircuitSetup XML request with a type of “Status” to the
service. For more information on the CircuitSetup message,
refer to the Chorus Setup and Configuration Guide.
Sample Data
In order to demonstrate Circuit Selection features, the resources and services in these tables
illustrate a fictitious network between technology centers in the five largest metropolitan areas in the
United States.
Table 220. Sample Resources
Description Type Info

New York Node Lat 40° 41’ N, Long 73° 59’ W
Los Angeles Node Lat 38° 4’ N, Long 118° 26’ W
Chicago Node Lat 42° 3’ N, Long 87° 40’ W
Houston Node Lat 38° 42’ N, Long 77° 8’ W
Washington DC Node Lat 29° 42’ N, Long 95° 24’ W
NY_CH1 Line Capacity: 96Mbit
Source Node: New York
Destination Node: Chicago
NY_CH2 Line Capacity: 48Mbit
NY_HO Line Capacity: 96Mbit
Destination Node: Houston
NY_DC Line Capacity: 96Mbit
Destination Node: Washington DC

Table 220. Sample Resources (continued)
Description Type Info

CH_LA1 Line Capacity: 96Mbit
Source Node: Chicago
Destination Node: Los Angeles
CH_LA2 Line Capacity: 48Mbit
CH_HO1 Line Capacity: 96Mbit
CH_HO2 Line Capacity: 32Mbit
DC_CH Line Capacity: 96Mbit
Source Node: Washington DC
DC_HO Line Capacity: 96Mbit
Source Node: Washington DC
HO_LA Line Capacity: 96Mbit
Source Node: Houston
NY_PORT1 through 8 Encoder/Decoder Source Node: New York
Destination Node: New York
Lat 40° 41’ N, Long 73° 59’ W
LA_PORT1 through 8 Encoder/Decoder Source Node: Los Angeles
Lat 38° 4’ N, Long 118° 26’ W
CH_PORT1 through 8 Encoder/Decoder Source Node: Chicago
Lat 42° 3’ N, Long 87° 40’ W
HO_PORT1 through 8 Encoder/Decoder Source Node: Houston
Lat 38° 42’ N, Long 77° 8’ W
DC_PORT1 through 8 Encoder/Decoder Source Node: Washington DC
Destination Node: Washington DC
Lat 29° 42’ N, Long 95° 24’ W
Table 221. Sample Services
Description Capacity Book Best? Via Node? Protection

5 Mbit Auto 5 Yes No None
5 Mbit Auto, Protected 5 Yes No 1 + 1 Circuit
5 Mbit Auto, Via 5 Yes Yes None

Table 221. Sample Services (continued)
Description Capacity Book Best? Via Node? Protection

5 Mbit Auto, Via, Protected 5 Yes Yes 1 + 1 Circuit
5 Mbit Manual 5 No No None
10 Mbit Auto 10 Yes No None
10 Mbit Auto, Protected 10 Yes No 1 + 1 Circuit
10 Mbit Auto, Via 10 Yes Yes None
10 Mbit Auto, Via, Protected 10 Yes Yes 1 + 1 Circuit
10 Mbit Manual 10 No No None
Worksheets
The following worksheets are provided to help gather the data necessary to perform configuration
tasks specific to Circuit Selection features.
l Node Worksheet helps gather the information for creating circuit nodes.
l Line Worksheet helps gather the information for creating lines that connect circuit nodes.
l Encoders / Decoders helps gather the information for identifying the encoder, decoder, and
encoder/decoder ports available at particular nodes.
The worksheets display on the following pages.

Worksheet: Network Nodes for Circuit Selection ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrator’s Guide
Node Worksheet Select (check) the following:

• Can Be Source • Is Node
Page __ of __ • Can Be Destination • Is Node Label
Date __ / __ / ____
Description Latitude Longitude Device ID Notes

__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __
__° __ ’ __ __° __ ’ __

Line Worksheet Select (check) the following:

• Default Xmit Role: Relay Point • Can Be Relay Point
Page __ of __ • Allow Cascading • Is Line
Date __ / __ / ____
Description Capacity Source Node Dest. Node Device ID Notes

Encoders / Decoders Select (check) the following:

• Default Xmit Role: Source • Is Node
Page __ of __ • Can be a Source • Is Encoder and/or Is Decoder
Date __ / __ / ____ • Allow Cascading
Description Enc Dec Source / Dest Node(s) Device ID Notes

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

Ch. 10 Graphical Map
Setup
This chapter includes general information about the Graphical Map features of ScheduLINK. It includes an
overview of the required setup information.
In This Chapter
Overview 805
Graphical Map Files Setup 806
Graphical Map Resource Setup 809
Desktop Setup 809
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Ch. 10 Graphical Map Setup
Overview
This section describes how to create and configure graphical maps. The system must contain at least
one graphical map entry in order to use graphical map features, and should contain at least one
graphical map file for each geographical area of interest.
Due to the difficulties of rendering a spherical world as a flat, two-dimensional image, some maps are
more suitable for use with the ScheduLINK Graphical Map feature. Maps are created using
mathematical projections to create an image with as little distortion as possible. However, projections
can generally preserve only one or two of the aspects of physical relations between locations, such
as size, distance, and relative elevation, and different maps may be based upon different reference
points or geodetic systems. This means two different maps of the exact same area that stress two
different aspects may appear very different.
Also, even though all flat maps contain some distortion, due to the effects of scale on distortion,
ScheduLINK mapping features will be more accurate on larger scale (i.e. more detailed) maps of
smaller areas than smaller scale maps of larger areas.
Graphical Map features in the ScheduLINK system extend the Circuit Selection logic to display a
network circuit, including the source, relay points, and destination, as a line diagram based on global
positioning coordinates, with or without a map background. The ScheduLINK system stores
positional information in latitude and longitude for network resources, and plots the points for
resources in a transmission-oriented Work Order against a map file.
For more information about Graphical Map, including common tasks, refer to the ScheduLINK Users
Guide.

Graphical Map Files Setup

Graphical Map File entries define the background images displayed by the Network Graphical Map
dialog, as well as the geographic or global location for which the file is displayed.
To add or modify graphical map entries:
1. Acquire map files appropriate for use and copy them into a shared network folder accessible
by all ScheduLINK users.
l If possible, maps should be “flat” maps that correctly adjust for the curvature of the Earth
relative to the latitude and longitude measurements.
l The setup process will require the latitude and longitude values of the top left corner and
bottom right corner of each map file.
l The map images used by the Graphical Map features are not stored in the ScheduALL
database and must be accessible over the network from each user machine. It is
recommended to store map files on the same machine as the shared data folder or shared
reports folder, and to include these files in any backup procedures.
2. From the File menu, select Setup and click Graphical Map Setup. The Graphical Map Files
Setup dialog displays the list of graphical map files in the system.
Figure 344. Graphical Maps File Setup Dialog

3. Click New to create a new entry, OR

Select an existing entry and click Edit.
The Graphical Map Setup dialog displays. Table 222 describes the available settings.
Figure 345. Graphical Map Setup Dialog

Table 222. Graphical Map Setup Settings
Field Description
Description Text description of the map. This description is displayed when using
the Select Image command in the Graphical Map dialog.
Is Default Bitmap Determines whether this map is used as the default map. Only one
map file in the system can be identified as the default map.
Top Left

Table 222. Graphical Map Setup Settings (continued)
Field Description
Latitude (Deg, Min, Card) Determines the vertical location (i.e. distance from the Equator) of the
upper edge of the map (value of y in a Cartesian co-ordinate system).
l Deg specifies the number of degrees, from 0 (at the Equator) to
90 (at a Pole).
l Min specifies the number of minutes, from 0 to 60, within a
particular degree.
l Card specifies the cardinal direction, either N (for North) or S (for
South) of the Equator.
Longitude (Deg, Min, Determines the horizontal location (i.e. distance from the Prime
Card) Meridian) of the left edge of the map (value of x in a Cartesian co-
ordinate system).
l Deg specifies the number of degrees, from 0 (at the Prime
Meridian) to 180 (equidistant from the Prime Meridian).
particular degree.
l Card specifies the cardinal direction, either E (for East) or W (for
West) of the Prime Meridian.
Bottom Right
Latitude (Deg, Min, Card) Determines the vertical location (i.e. distance from the Equator) of the
bottom edge of the map (value of y in a Cartesian co-ordinate system).
l Deg specifies the number of degrees, from 0 (at the Equator) to
90 (at a Pole).
particular degree.
l Card specifies the cardinal direction, either N (for North) or S (for
South) of the Equator.
Longitude (Deg, Min, Determines the horizontal location (i.e. distance from the Prime
Card) Meridian) of the right edge of the map (value of x in a Cartesian co-
ordinate system).
l Deg specifies the number of degrees, from 0 (at the Prime
Meridian) to 180 (equidistant from the Prime Meridian).
particular degree.
l Card specifies the cardinal direction, either E (for East) or W (for
West) of the Prime Meridian.
Select File Path Click to select the graphics file used by the system. The file must
comply with the JPG graphics file format (24-bit color image).
The text field displays the path and file name.

Graphical Map Resource Setup

Graphical Map functionality requires the administrator or authorized user to specify some additional
information at the resource level. The following settings and features are used directly by Graphical
Map, and are found in the Setup chapter:
l General Resource – Circuit.
l Is Node Label (for map), Latitude, and Longitude. Refer to Map Co-ordinates.
Desktop Setup
The ScheduALL Desktop feature allows users to save customized instances of the Graphical Map
dialog, including the currently selected map file, Mode (Availability vs. Usage), Time Options
settings, zoom level, background color, and the Detail Size. Refer to the Scheduling chapter of the
ScheduALL Users Guide for more information on creating and maintaining Desktops.

Ch. 11 Database Purge
Guide
This chapter includes instructions for performing a data purge of your database.
In This Chapter:
Overview 811
Qualifying Items 811
Purge Process 813
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Ch. 11 Database Purge Guide
Overview
The Database Purge process of the ScheduALL system is designed to permanently remove items
from the database and audit trail. The process only removes specific items that qualify for removal,
based on predefined criteria and the selected purge options described in this document. Purging the
database affects transactions from the following areas:
l Scheduling – work orders and activities
l Project Manager – projects (and projects billed as packages)
l Billing – invoices
l Accounts Receivable – unassigned credits and unassigned payments
l External Costs – purchase orders/payables and vendor invoices
The Purge process does not create a backup copy of items that are removed. Limited logging
information is available, if logging is enabled for the session during which the purge is performed.
CAUTION: Verify that a full, valid, and recent backup of the ScheduALL database exists
before purging the database.
Qualifying Items
This section describes the criteria used to determine if an item qualifies for deletion. An item, and all
related and dependent items, must meet all specified criteria to qualify for deletion.
Work Orders
Work orders must meet all of the following criteria to be removed:
l Date – The work order End Date must fall before the specified Cut-Off Activity date.
l Status – The work order status must be set to Reconciled or Cancelled. If the option “Include
Uninvoiced Work Orders” is selected, all work order status levels qualify for deletion.
l Related Items – All items related to the work order, such as invoices, projects, and payables,
must qualify for deletion. (Currently, cancellation charges which have not been invoiced will
not disqualify a work order.)
Activities
Activities must meet all of the following criteria to be removed:
l Date – The activity End Date must fall before the specified Cut-Off Activity date.
l Related Items – All items related to the activity, such as payables, must qualify for deletion.
Projects
Projects (and projects billed as Packages) must meet all of the following criteria to be removed:
l Date – The project Closed Date must fall before the specified Cut-Off Activity date.
l Status – Project status must be Reconciled or Cancelled. Packages must be invoiced, and
must be Reconciled or Cancelled. If the option “Include Uninvoiced/Incomplete Projects And
Packages” is selected, all status levels qualify for deletion.
l Related Items – All items related to the project, such as work orders, invoices, and deposit
requests, must qualify for deletion.

Invoices
Invoices must meet all of the following criteria to be removed:
l Date – The Transaction/Stamp Date must fall before the specified Cut-Off Activity date.
l Balance and Status – The invoice must be fully paid and Closed. If the option “Include
Receivables in an Open Period” is selected, invoices must be fully paid but do not need to be
closed.
l Related Items – All items related to the invoice, such as Unassigned Credits or Payments,
and all Work Orders and Projects which carry the invoice number, must qualify for deletion.
Unassigned Credits and Unassigned Payments

Unassigned Credits and Payments must meet all of the following criteria to be removed:
l Date – The Transaction Date must fall before the specified Cut-Off Activity date.
l Balance and Status – All related transactions must balance to 0, and the payment or credit
must be Closed. If the option “Include Receivables in an Open Period” is selected, credits and
payments must balance to 0 but do not need to be closed.
l Related Items – All items related to the credit or payment, such as invoices to which a
payment is applied, must qualify for deletion.
Payables
Payables or Purchase Orders must meet all of the following criteria to be removed:
l Date – The Approval Date must fall before the specified Cut-Off Activity date. If the Approval
Date is empty, then the Transaction Date must fall before the specified Cut-Off Activity date.
(Invoice Date is not considered.)
l Status – The purchase order’s status must be located above the status specified in the “Erase
Payables Starting From” drop-down list.
l Related Items – All work orders, projects, and activities related to the Payable must qualify
for deletion. Note that one payable may be related to more than one booking or activity.
Vendor Invoices
Vendor Invoices must meet all of the following criteria to be removed:
l Date - The Invoice Date must fall before the specified Cut-Off Activity date. If the Invoice Date
is empty, the Transaction date must fall before the specified Cut-Off Activity date.
l Status - The Vendor Invoice must be reconciled.
l Related Items - All items related to the vendor invoice, such as payables, work orders,
projects, and activities, must qualify for deletion. Note that one vendor invoice may be related
to more than one payable, and one payable may be related to more than one vendor invoice.

Purge Process
There are three main steps to performing a database purge:
l Perform a test purge of the database, as described in Test Purge.
l Purge the database as described in Normal Purge.
l If necessary, review the log file as described in Log File.
Test Purge
To perform a test purge:
1. Verify that a full, valid, and recent backup of the ScheduALL database exists.
2. To enable logging, use the “log” command line parameter when launching the ScheduALL
application. For example: C:\Schedwin\Schedwin.exe LOG
3. Log in as a supervisor.
4. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click Purge History from Database. The
Purge Database dialog displays.
5. Select (check) Do Not Erase, Report Only (Test Mode).
Figure 346. Purge Database Dialog

6. Enter the Cut-Off Activity date. This setting defines the date before which an item may qualify
for deletion. All qualifying items with the applicable dates before (or prior to) the specified date
will be deleted. Items with the specified date, or dates after (or more recent than) the specified
date, do not qualify for deletion. The default value is one (1) year prior to the current date.

7. Select the following options to override standard qualification criteria:

l Select (check) Include Receivables in an Open Period to override the Status
qualification requirement and allow the system to delete payables that are Closed, as
well as payables that are not Closed.
l Select Include Uninvoiced Work Orders to override the Invoice requirement for work
orders, and allow the system to delete work orders that have pricing information but
have not been invoiced.
l Select Include Uninvoiced/Incomplete Projects And Packages to override the
Status and Invoice qualification requirements for projects, and allow the system to
delete projects and packages of any status.
8. Select a Erase Payables Starting From: status level to specify the status at and above
which Payable entries qualify for deletion.
9. Click OK. After reviewing the database, the system displays the Operation Completed dialog.
10. Click OK.
11. Review the information in the Records Processed window to verify the following information:
l Database mode (MU for Multiuser, CS for Client Server)
l Cut-Off date
l Deletion of the correct records, and only the correct records
12. Click Close.
Normal Purge
To perform a database purge:
1. Verify that a full, valid, and recent backup of the ScheduALL database exists.
2. To enable logging, use the “log” command line parameter when launching the ScheduALL
application. For example: C:\Schedwin\Schedwin.exe LOG
3. Log in as a supervisor.
4. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click View Active Users. Verify that all
users are logged off the system.

5. From the File menu, select Supervisor Options and click Purge History from Database.
The Purge Database dialog displays.
Figure 347. Purge Database Dialog

6. Enter the Cut-Off Activity date. This setting defines the date before which an item may qualify
for deletion. All qualifying items with the applicable dates before (or prior to) the specified date
will be deleted. Items with the specified date, or dates after (or more recent than) the specified
date, do not qualify for deletion. The default value is one (1) year prior to the current date.
7. Select Include Receivables in an Open Period to allow the system to delete payables that
are not Closed.
8. Select Include Uninvoiced Work Orders to allow the system to delete work orders that have
pricing information but have not been invoiced.
9. Select Include Uninvoiced/Incomplete Projects And Packages to delete those items.
10. Select a Erase Payables Starting From: status level to specify the status at and above
which Payable entries qualify for deletion.
11. Click OK to begin the purge. The Confirm dialog displays.
12. If a full, valid, and recent backup of the database exists, click Yes to continue. The
ScheduALL dialog displays.
13. If it is acceptable for the system to be unavailable for several minutes or more, enter “YES”
and click OK. The time required to purge the database depends on the amount of data in the
database prior to the Cut-Off Activity date. The Operation Completed dialog displays.
14. Click OK. The Confirm dialog displays.
15. Click Yes to run Extended Maintenance. The Proceed with File Maintenance? dialog displays.
16. Click Yes to run Extended Maintenance.
17. Click Close.

Log File
The purge process writes information to the Sched.LOG file if the command line parameters “LOG” is
used for the session during which a purge is performed.
To review the log file:
1. Locate the Sched.LOG file, and open the file using Notepad (or another text editor).
2. From the Edit menu, select Find.
3. Enter “Starting Purging” and click Find Next to locate the beginning of the purge information.
4. Enter “Operation Completed” and click Find Next to locate the end of the purge information.

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide A
Index exchange rate setup 59

alternate working day
A user preference 354
Abstract Resource Setup dialog 135 end time 354
access center 537, 550, 572 start time 354
access rules 537, 550, 572 analog
Account Code dialog 61 satellite properties 535, 549
Account Code Setup dialog 61 signal, fixed uplink 555
account executive signal, uplink path 538
setting up 163 signal, uplink truck 552
Account Executive Maintenance dialog 163 Antenna Matrix tab 546
Account Executive Setup dialog 164 antenna move 381
accounting antenna position 381
setup 54 archive
accounting period audit trail, security permission 502
adding 58 location scans, security setting 492
deleting 58 ASC, column sorting 601
Accounting tab Asc/Desc column 601
General Resource Properties dialog 92 attachment
Active Directory 226 client 182
Active Users dialog 515 file size 182
activity template 363 permission
Activity Template dialog 651 to add 455
Adaptive Framework 676 to delete 455
Add Group dialog 425 to view 486
Add Static Text dialog 687 quote, default file 290
Add User dialog 415 Audit Trail dialog 519
advanced mode, selecting 352 audit trail, archive and purge 518-519
agency Availability Setup dialog 86
copying 192 availability, resource setup 86
deleting 192 B
editing 192
Band Extension (BandExt) Catalog Properties
secondary 729 dialog 583
setup 183 band plan 583
Agency Properties dialog 183 band plan catalog 570
align, dialog controls 701 band segment 590
alternate contact catalog 291, 723 Band Segment (Channel) Properties dialog 590
alternate currency band segment deactivation 592
deleting 59
ScheduALL for Windowsv5.32 Page 817

ScheduLINK for Windowsv5.32
ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide C
band, sub-band 586 default, room properties 112

BandExt 583 Button Properties dialog 686
BandExt Catalog 570 button settings, Toolbar Editor 708
BandPLAN Resource C
in a service 148
calendar
properties 566, 582
cursor guides 360
bandwidth 536, 549
Calendar Enabled 117
barcode
cancel
fonts 623
ESC key 293
local scanner location configuration 626
cancellation
local scanner setup 625
bill when cancelled 90, 106, 137, 568
requirements 623
rate cards and rates 47, 53
system scanner setup 624
system level cancellation 48
barcode labels, font 623
system preferences 313
Barcode Scanner Setup dialog 624
user permissions 436, 438, 449-450, 466
barcode scanner, configuring 623
cancellation rate 47
bill when cancelled 90, 106, 137, 568
adding 50
billing
category level 77
rates
client 178
overview 29
default 169
setup 145
deleting 53
terms 169
editing 51
add, modify, or delete 170
general resource 89
bin
organizer 51
container type 613
overview 50
container type hierarchy 613
resource type 81
media classification setup 613
room 105
book anyway 441
service 148
book now 226
type level 81
Break Quantity 771
work order default 289
breaks 367
cancellation rate card
showing in schedule 367
cancellation maintenance organizer 51
browse, [...] button 83
copying 50
Browser control, Developer’s Toolkit 692
deleting 50
Browser Filter Selection dialog 692
editing 50
bumper time
Cancellation Rate Card Setup dialog 48-49, 51
conflict warnings 362
Cancellation Rate Maintenance dialog 49
default 98
capabilities 731

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide D
capabilities assigned 731 editing 192

capacity permission to use 240
BandPLAN Resources 566 secondary 729
of a resource 540, 557, 580 setting up 165
Capacity Resource Client Form dialog
in services 148 changes to 738, 745
cart client group
container type 613 copying 193
container type hierarchy 613 deleting 193
media classification setup 613 editing 193
Category Maintenance dialog 76 setting up 192
category override Client Group Maintenance dialog 192
general resource 89 Client Maintenance dialog 165
personnel 117 Client Properties dialog 166
room 105 colors
stock 130 ScheduLINK 349
Change Password dialog 411 shared work order booking blocks 350
checkbox control, Developer’s Toolkit 689 system 347
Chorus Listener Log Tree 727 Column Properties dialog 204
circuit group Column Sort dialog 601
setup 601 Combobox control, Developer’s Toolkit 691
setup dialog 796 commission
circuit setup for a resource 93
pre-defined 601, 792 for a room booking 108
Circuit tab for a service booking 154
General Resource Properties dialog 542 for a stock booking 131
Claimed Time 721 for personnel 120
clean-up time company
conflict warnings 362 alias 658
default 99 default
Clear Order button 601 assigned by user login 631
client resource 93
copying 192 room 107
default user preference 383
for e-mail notifications 528 multi-company functionality 627
in trouble ticket 290 specific counters 629
in work orders 383 Company Setup dialog 627
deleting 192 company specific counters 248

confirmation moving 697

external resource availability 663 overlapping 698
to use a general resource 89 resizing 698
to use a room 105, 137 selecting 697
to use personnel 116 copy
conflict warning client, contact, or agency 192
ignore in same work order 722 control, in Developer’s Toolkit 698
conflict warnings display block 208
configuring 361 display view 207
personnel manager, setting 632 producer 164
conflicts resource 83
ignore in same work order 723 resource availability 86
Connector 216 resource group 144
assigning rate card 168, 186 service 162
BandPLAN resource properties 581 shift rotation 648
general resource properties 95 shift rotation pattern 649
personnel properties 128 user labels from another category 611
room properties 109 cost
show rate card in 34 hidden
contact can change in quotes 469
copying 192 security setting
deleting 192 can change in scheduling 440
editing 192 can view in quotes 469
secondary 729 can view in scheduling 440
setup 188 special security to view
Contact Properties dialog 188 general resource 94
container type 613 personnel 120
bin 613 room 108
cart 613 service 154
hierarchy 613 stock 131, 575
house reel 613 counters
Contract Setup dialog 213 company specific 248, 629
control and label alignment, dialog format 702 Crystal Reports
control height and width, dialog format 701 customizing 714
controls See also Developer’s Toolkit report catalog maintenance 522
controls, dialog currency
cut, copy, paste 698 alternate 58
deleting 698

exchange rate column properties

copying 60 fields 678
deleting 60 functions 678
editing 60 references 678
exchange rates 58 source 677
Currency Exchange dialog 59 column properties, defining 677, 679
Currency Setup dialog 58 dialogs, import/export in XML format 716
cursor guides, calendar 360 Menu Editor
customization 267 Toolbar Editor 680
D dialog
factory settings, viewing 715
data rate 536, 549
Dialog Editor 680
database directory 526
control tools 682-683, 685
Day Properties dialog 650
controls
deactivation, band segment 592
aligning and sizing 699
default
Browser 692
company 630-631
checkbox 689
default working week 355
Combobox 691
DESC, column sorting 601
cut, copy, paste 698
desktop
deleting 698
saving display properties 600
Edit 688
desktops
lines 691
auto-loading, user preference 396
lines, horizontal and vertical 691
can modify, security setting 489
linked picklist 695
creating 407
listbox 691
private
moving 697
can edit all, security setting 503
Multimedia 695
modifying 410
overlapping 698
overview 407
pick list 693
public
picture 694
deleting 409
picture button 686
modifying 409
resizing 698
overview 407
selecting 697
time span, user preferences 379
setting tab order 692
destination
Static 687
permission to use 240
Time and Date 690
Developer’s Toolkit 675, See also Dialog Editor
tools 682-683
browser column properties, displaying 676
browser columns, modifying 676, 679

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide E
dialog format creating 206

control height and width 701 e-mail subject, selecting 532
control, size and position 701 maintenance 207
controls, aligning vertically 701 media asset details, defining 211
group boxes and labels, creating 703 properties, defining 208
labels and controls, aligning 702 resource browser flyovers, overriding 372
dialog, customizing 680, 699 resource flyover, selecting 203, 309
factory settings Display Block Properties dialog 208
restoring 715 display view 202
viewing 715 copying 207
field mask, Edit Control, creating 689 creating 206
formatting conventions 700 default, selecting 359
simple mode 680 maintenance 202
working with controls 697-698 selecting 203
differential downlink 538, 554
holiday 194 dub order
night rate 248 status labels, defining 269
night rates 30 duplication service
digital creating 154
encoder 552, 555 permission to add/edit/delete 485
satellite properties 535, 549 E
signal, fixed uplink 555
e-mail
signal, uplink path 538
agency, address 184
signal, uplink truck 552
client, address 167
Direct cost. See external cost 660
contact, address 189
director
general resource, notifications 98
setting up 163
personnel notifications 116
Director Maintenance dialog 163
generate 117
Director Setup dialog 164
include 117
disable manual time entry 234
producer 184
display
producer, address 164
fly-over 204
profile
fly-over text 600
system preference 527
Ops Manager row height 600
user preference 529
save as desktop 600
resource notifications
display block 202
address 98
can add/edit/delete 443
include 98
copying 208

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide F
room notifications 113 export

address 113 dialogs 716
generating 113 marking transactions for export to Solomon
include 113 Accounting Interface 331
security settings 442, 473 notes, to text file 100
services 526 security settings, to a text file 431
system preferences 334 system preferences, to text file 351
To/BCC, user preference 399 user preferences, to a text file 407
user profile extended library query
address 530 opening by default 400
advanced settings 530 extended library query, user preference 400
always BCC 530 extended operations
reply to 530 labels, changing 272
vendor address 655 options, displaying 510
E-mail Profile dialog 529 Extended Trail 540, 557, 580
E-Mail Services Extended Trail Settings dialog 521
User Configuration 529 External Compensation Factors dialog 62
Edit control, Developer’s Toolkit 688 external costs
editor status labels 267
notes 100 F
text 100 FEC. See Forward Error Correction 536
effective date 40, 42-43, 60, 93, 119, 649, 665 field mask, creating 689
Email Supervisor Profile dialog 528 Field Properties dialog 688
Employee Working Days 771 file operations 526
encoder Fixed Dish tab
software version 552, 555 Room Properties dialog 554
encoder, digital 552, 555 fly-over
end time, alternate working day 354 resource 204
ESC key fly-over text 600
abandon changes in dialog 293 flyover
system preference 293 conflict dialog 381
exchange rates default 309
copying 60 display view 203
deleting 60 extended volume resource 404
editing 60 extended, enabling 373
exchange rates, setup 59 holiday name 195
expiration date 41-43, 93, 108, 119, 665 in can view in browser columns 444
explicit confirmation 105, 116, 137, 663 override 372

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide G
resource 203 generate notifications 99

text, displaying 679 Gmail 219
fonts Graphical Map Files Setup dialog 806
barcode 623 Graphical Map Setup dialog 807
display block, applying 209 group boxes and labels, dialog format 703
overriding system fonts 411 H
selecting, in dialogs 246
Help menu 24
system, changing 350
editing 712
user preferences 411
hidden cost
Forward Error Correction (FEC) 549
permissions
frequency 536-537, 549-551, 554, 573
can change in quotes 469
satellite properties 536, 550
can change in scheduling 440
G can view in quotes 469
General (User) Preferences dialog 352 can view in scheduling 440
general ledger require special security to view
offsets 249 general resource 94
general resource personnel 120
explicit confirmation 89 room 108
independent confirmation 89 service 154
needs confirmation 89 stock 131, 575
general resource properties 87, 101 High-Powered Amplifier (HPA) 549
Accounting tab 92 hold for review 569
Antenna Matrix tab 546 at status, system preference 290
Circuit tab 542 general resource 90
Main tab 88 room properties 106, 138
Other tab 96 holiday
Path Mgmt tab 539 company
Predecessor tab 546 label 265
Resource Questions tab 100 conflict
Satellite 2 tab 547 with observed 304
Satellite tab 534 with unobserved 304
Successor tab 546 recurring 195
Uplink Path/Downlink tab 537 region, defining 194
Uplink Predecessor tab 546 setup 195
Uplink Successor tab 546 holiday differential
General Resource Properties dialog 87 triggering 195
General Resource Setup dialog Holiday Maintenance calendar 195
changes to 740

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide I
holiday region J
default 400 job name
pay category setup 635 label 257
Holiday Region Maintenance dialog 194 job number
home page 398 encoding 247
custom background, displaying 412 label 257
hotkeys
K
predefined 716
recommended 717 keyboard navigation, setting user preferences 356
house reel, container type 613 keys
HPA See Parent HPA browser selection 396
shortcut
I
predefined 716
iCal 98, 114, 117 recommended 717
iCalendar 219 tab and enter, enabling in browsers 314
iCalendar Calendars 219
L
Ignore Conflicts in Same Work Order 722
import L-Band 537, 550
dialogs 716 labels 267
license file 502 changing 272
media log file 283 accounting codes 266
resource availability settings 86 accounts receivable 264
service questions 156 contact status 271
text file, into notes editor 100, 351, 407, 431 dialog and report 253
user labels from another category 611 dub order status 269
inclined orbit 550, 572 event status 270
independent confirmation 105, 116, 137, 663 general 256
interop general rental booking status 261
message log 797 general trouble ticket 261
options 329 general work order 260
invoice number 248 overtime types 264
assigning payable status 267
to credit note 330 personnel resources 260
to unassigned credits 331 travel type 270
to unassigned payments 331 units of measure 263
setting next 249 vehicle 270
visual flags 269
extended operation, displaying 510
session types, changing 265

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide M
Labor Manager 759 Library Location dialog 615

language license
translation/localization 678, 686-687, 694 can update 502
lead time import file 502
conflict warnings 362 reviewing factory dialogs, after updating 715
default 98 updating 525
default, room properties 112 View Only users 417
ledger line controls, Developer’s Toolkit 691
category override 85 link to company 383, 422, 508, 629, 631
GL offsets 249 linked picklist control, Developer’s Toolkit 695
names listbox control, Developer’s Toolkit 691
default 54 Local Barcode Scanner Setup dialog 625
default tax 55 location scan archival 615
non-standard entries 294 Location Setup dialog 197
permissions Locations Setup 197, 614
allow changes in closed period 471 lock
can edit 471 work order edit mode 445
reconcile warning 280, 314 work order, viewing user name 444
setup, labels 263 M
tax structure setup 56
Main tab
use internal codes 293
abstract resource properties 136
ledger numbers
agency properties 184
category override
BandPlan resource properties 566
general resource 89
category maintenance 77
personnel 117
client properties 166
room 105
company specific counters 629
stock 130
contact properties 188
default
general resource proerties 88
general resource 95
locations setup 198
personnel 121
personnel properties 115
room 109
resource to auto-include 149
service 155
resource type setup 79
stock 132
room properties 104
library
service properties 146
setting up 605
stock properties 129
stock type 611
sub-band properties 586
Library Category Form dialog 610
system preferences 246
Library Freehand Maintenance dialog 607
vendor properties 655

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide N
max EIRP 241 repricing 308

max TX power 241 move antenna 381
MCR Setup dialog MSMQ 216
changes to 741 Multi-Company module
meals 367 company-specific counters 629
Media Classification Properties dialog 613 company setup 627
Media Format Setup dialog 608 Multimedia control, Developer’s Toolkit 695
Media Manager N
revision number 616
needs confirmation 105, 116, 137, 663
setting up 605
New Desktop dialog 408
setup sequence 605
New Rotation Pattern dialog 649
menu
Next Invoice # counter 629
customizing 712, 714
Next Work Order # counter 629
factory settings, restoring 715
night rates 248
item properties, defining 713
notes
See also Menu Editor 712
agency 184, 187
Work Order 797
client 167
Menu Editor See also Developer’s Toolkit
pop-up to scheduler 177
inserting a command 713
contact 189
popup, inserting 714
Menu Editor dialog 712
personnel
Menu Item Properties dialog 713
internal information 126
Message Log dialog 212, 797
other 127
mobile login
disabling 226
pop-up to scheduler
modulation 536, 549
client 177
move
contact 191
activity, confirm 358
personnel 128
browser column, in Developer’s Toolkit 677
resource 98
controls, in Developer’s Toolkit 697
room 113
current tab, in Developer’s Toolkit 681
service 158
meals and breaks with event 280
stock 134
vertical, allowing 383
resource 97
work orders
resource, pop-up to scheduler 98
confirm 358
room 113
from current date 438
into the future 445
service 157
re-evaluating cost 308
service, pop-up to scheduler 158

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide O
stock 133 can set SQL supervisor 502

pop-up to scheduler 134 can set SQL user 502
vendor 656 content verification 343
shipping 660 e-mail
to scheduler 660 NMS 334
notes editor 100 Notification Manager 335
Notification Manager 99, 117, 335, 423 e-mail profile, setting 530
setup 250, 334 gateway 342-343
system preferences 335 history 336
notifications ingest 343
generate 99 interface 334
O new user, setting 416

options, system preferences 335
observed holiday 195
SQL, setting 525
offsets, general ledger 249
supervisor account, changing 245
online help 24
switching user, login method 288
open container child command 615
user, changing 411
Ops Manager
path management
desktop for 407
resource properties 539, 556
event sorting 601
Path Mgmt tab
row height 600
General Resource Properties dialog 539
Other tab
Room Properties dialog 556
Pay Category Setup dialog 633
Outlook 219
Pay Rates Maintenance dialog 73
overage
Pay Scale dialog 72
default
pay scale setup 71
general resource 89
Pay Scales maintenance dialog 71
personnel 116
Pay Translator 760
resource 106
PDF
service 147
additional documents 23
stock 130
Users Guide 22
Override Hours 770
file location 24
Overtime Mode 653
Periods Setup dialog 58
P permission required
P.O. See purchase order 94 destinations 240
Parent HPA Power 549 terminals 240
password permissions
can change own 487 destinations 240

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Q
supervisor 417 Preferences Editor dialog 705

terminals 240 preferred in pool 240
user profiles and security 244 Price Maintenance dialog 37
view only 417 Price Maintenance organizer 36
web service login only 417 Price Point Setup dialog 44
persistent insert mode 291 pricing methods 37
personnel print
assign to pay category 646 notes field 100
setup 114 Print Report List dialog 523
Personnel Manager print work orders 728
differentials 636 priority
overtime 634 Events Pane sorting 601
pay categories 633 Private Desktop Maintenance dialog 410
pay category setup 633 private desktops
Personnel Properties dialog 114 can edit all users 503
pick list control, Developer’s Toolkit 693 can modify 489
picture button control, Developer’s Toolkit 686 creating 407
picture control, Developer’s Toolkit 694 modifying 410
PID 536, 549 producer
PIN password, setting 339 copy 164
PO. See purchase order 94 copying 164
polarity delete 164
dual-path restrictions 552, 555 edit 164
labels for 267 setting up 163
requirements, labels for 268 Producers Maintenance dialog 163
satellite settings 536, 550, 572 Producers Setup dialog 164
single-path restrictions 552, 555, 564 Production Workflow Manager
pool ID 240 adding a producer 163
position security 604
satellite 536, 549, 573 system preferences 604
Pre-defined Circuit dialog 793 user preferences 604
pre-defined circuit setup 792 profile
Pre-defined Circuit with Path Protection 749 agency 413
Predecessor tab client 413
General Resource Properties dialog 546 e-mail
predecessors system preference 527
system preferences 315 user preference 529
Predefined Circuit with Path Protection 794

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide Q
group 413 extended work order, limiting operations 446

can add/edit/delete 501 Library
parent 416 initial record count 292
defining 426 Project, initial record count 292
scheduling area 435 Quick Add Duration 230
user 413, 415, 423 Quick Add Duration;modifying 230-231
allow overrides 282 QuickAddValue buttons 231
program identifier 536, 549 quote
proposals adding from work order 727
controlling conflict checking 361 create command 727
public desktops Quotes Manager, permissions 467
creating 407 R
deleting 409
R‚ Record prefix 678
modifying 409
rate
purchase order
cancellation 50
applying vendor costs without 318
rate card
assigning vendor automatically 379
adding 34
confirming a work order 169, 186
cancellation 47
generating automatic 108, 154, 190, 278
category level 77
limiting per user 423
type level 81
requiring from vendor 657
company 628
purge
copying 34, 60
audit trail, security permission 502
deleting 34
database 810, 814
editing 34, 60
log file 816
initial setup 27
process 813
overview 33
qualifying items 811
planning 29
test purge 813
public 34
transactions 811
show in Connector 34
history, security permission 502
Rate Card Setup dialog 34
location scans
Rate Maintenance dialog 34
security permissions 492
recurring holiday 195
Purge/Archive Audit Trail dialog 520
recycle
Q maximum number of times, setting 608
query permission 477
default company, selecting 383 stock type, setting 611
extended library 400
opening by default 400

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide S
region Resource Group Maintenance dialog 143

holiday 194 Resource Maintenance dialog 76
default 400 Resource Questions tab
selecting, in pay category 635 General Resource Properties dialog 100
multi-region settings 251 Resource to Auto-Include 149, 151
time zone 176 Resource to Auto-Include dialog 149
release selected successor 727 resource type
report catalog maintenance 522 deleting 81
report group maintenance 79
security 458, 514 modifying 79
Report Group Maintenance dialog 214 setup 79
report group setup 213 Resource Type Setup dialog 79
report manager 522 Resource Types dialog 82
Report Manager dialog 522 resources
reports general, adding 87
resource groups 142 maintenance 81
sample package 23 setup 75, 134
reports directory 526 stock, properties 129
requirements revision number, adding 616
barcodes 623 Rolling Access 575
resource Rolling Window Settings 93, 108, 120
availability 86 Room Properties
capacity resource 566 Fixed Dish tab 554
copying 83 Path Mgmt tab 556
resource availability settings, importing 86 Satellite tab 548
Resource Capabilities Setup 215 Uplink Truck tab 551
Resource Catalog setup 85, 647 rooms and resources
resource category trouble ticket 673
adding or modifying 76 rooms, setup 103, 114
deleting 79 Rotation Details dialog 648
Resource Classification dialog 140 Rotation Maintenance dialog 648
Resource Classification Properties dialog 141 rotations, shift 647
resource conflict row height 600
book anyway 441 Rule Set dialog 64
resource group S
copying 144
sample database directory 526
editing, copying, or deleting 144
sample reports package 23
setup 142

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide T
satellite 535 Personnel Manager 632

frequency 536, 550 Production Workflow Manager 604
position 536, 549, 573 segment 590
required 555 Select Account Code dialog 68
Satellite 2 tab Select Dialog dialog 680
General Resource Properties dialog 547 Select Local Scanner Location dialog 626
Satellite tab Select Target Resource dialog 84
General Resource Properties dialog 534 Select Vendor dialog 654
Room Properties dialog 548 serivce TX power 241
satellite transmission parameters setup 601 service
save and toggle button 719 copying 162
scanner deleting 162
local editing 162
enabling/disabling 626 overview 145
location enabling/disabling 626 setup 146
setup 625 service EIRP 241
system, barcode setup 624 Service Maintenance dialog 162
scanning hardware 622 Service Properties dialog 146
ScheduALL service questions, importing 156
getting help 24 setup
ScheduALL Portal accounting functions 54
disable manual time entry 234 accounting period 55, 57
modifying dialogs 239 agency 183
setup 227 billing rates 145
type list 241 client 165
ScheduALL Portal service client groups 192
creating 236 contact 188
satellite 237 display views 202
terrestrial 236 equipment 87
ScheduLINK external cost manager 654
colors 349 holiday 195
ScheduLINK Work Order form dialog holiday region 194
changes to 741 initial setup 28
SchedXport 716 Notification Manager 250
security settings 413 overview 27-28
billing and accounts/receivable 54 pay scale 71
external costs 654 personnel 114
Library System 607 rate cards 33

resource category 76 Smart Time

resource groups 142 security settings 494
resource type 79 system options 341
resources 75, 81 Smart Time Only users 419
rooms 75, 103 software
services 145 encoder version 552, 555
stock 129 Solomon Accounting Interface 331, 472
tax structure 55 allow reset of A/R transactions 472
trouble tickets 673 assigning invoice numbers for 330-331
vendor 654 making transactions available to 331
shift start EIRP 241
do not book resource without 116 start time, alternate working day 354
shift rotation start TX power 241
adding 648 Static control, Developer’s Toolkit 687
copying 648 status
deleting 651 external costs, labels 267
editing 648 stock
overview 648 can add/edit/delete in work orders 448
shift rotation pattern can update quantity security setting 492
copying 649 conflict 362
creating 649 library setup 605
setting day properties 649 library, stock type 611
shift rotations and patterns 647 overview 75
Shift Rule dialog 68 properties 129
Shift Rule Set dialog 64 resource, adding 82
Shift Work Day dialog 768 security settings 486
Shift Work Period 771 setup 129
Shift WTM Rules dialog 765 sub-activity
shortcut keys color 653
predefined 716 creating 652
recommended 717 deleting 653
simple mode editing 653
alternate display, selecting 352 requiring 281
displaying menu item in 713 Sub-Activity Setup dialog 653
modifying dialogs 680 sub-band 586
Single Sign On 226 Sub-Band dialog 587, 589
size and position, dialog format 701 Sub-Resources tab 545, 558

Successor tab terminal

General Resource Properties dialog 546 permission to use 240
successors text editor 100
system preferences 315 text file
supervisor 245, 417 displaying with notes control 685
account 245 export notes to 100
options, other 525 import, into notes editor 100, 351, 407, 431
symbol rate 536, 549 saving audit trail archive as 520
system preferences Time Capture
edit labels 253 linking login 420
fonts 350 security settings 494
miscellaneous 274 system options 341
Production Workflow Manager 604 Time control, Developer’s Toolkit 690
system colors 347 time entry, disable 234
time zones 251 Time Increment Values 232
work order related 246 time scale color 355
System Preferences dialog 246 time stamp
T adding to notes editor 100

format, in audit trail 519
tab order control, Developer’s Toolkit 692
time zone
tape playback formats 553
base region, system default 252
tax rate
client 176
agency 186
daylight savings time (DST) 252
client 169
displaying in audit trail 519
contact 190
regions 252
tax structure
show in caption bar 277
adding 55
standard (STD) 252
copying 57
user 397
deleting 57
toolbar 705, See also Toolbar Editor
editing 57
configuring 707
setup
customizing 705, 711
ledger names 56
factory settings, restoring 715
Tax Structure Setup dialog 56
Toolbar Editor
Tax Structures Maintenance dialog 55
button settings
TE‚ Table Extension prefix 678
layout 708
telephone number
text 710
access center 537, 550, 572
width 709
in uplink truck 553
icon, selecting 711

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide U
simple mode, displaying button commands in 710 Uplink Truck tab

Toolbar Editor dialog 706 Room Properties dialog 551
TR‚ Table Reference prefix 678 Use Company specific counters 629
translation user colors 355
button text 686 user groups
column titles 678 adding 426
listbox title 694 adding users to 416
static control 687 client and agency users 431
transponder custom dialogs for 680
name 573 disabling 425
offset values 230 displaying browser columns for 677
satellite 535 overview 423
Trouble Ticket Filters dialog 674 trouble ticket access 673
trouble tickets trouble ticket room, assigning 673
room 673 user password, changing 411
setup 673 user preferences
truck 538, 551 access, preventing 352
U general
conflict warnings, setting 361
unit of measure
miscellaneous 396
cancellation rate
navigation bar 353
end of range 53
options 363
start of range 52
scheduling 356, 363
cancellation rate settings, displaying 53
overriding system fonts 411
changing labels 263
overview 352
cost, assigning 288
default, setting 247
User Profiles & Settings dialog 423, 425-426
rate setup, selecting 39
user profiles and security 413
vendor cost rate, setting 665
user profiles, overview 423
uplink
users
fixed dish 538, 554
access limitations 433
truck 538, 551
active, viewing 515
Uplink Path/Downlink tab
adding 415
client and agency, adding 431
Uplink Predecessor tab
Smart Time Only 419
Users Permissions dialog 427
Uplink Successor tab

ScheduALL and ScheduLINK Administrators Guide V
V work orders
vendor inactive, closing 279
assigning work week
to a resource 97 default 355
to a room 114 start day 355
to a service 158 Working Time Manager 764
to personnel 128
to purchase order automatically 379
to resource type 81
to stock 134
requiring notification
general resource 94
personnel 120
room 109
service 154
stock 132
setup 654
Vendor Cost Maintenance dialog 597
Vendor Properties dialog 654
View Only User 417
visual flags
assigning to category/type 85
automatically assigning to bookings 269
category/type 722
Clear Flag option 269
default 269
defining 269
displaying 364
removing 269
ScheduLINK 385
VR‚ Virtual Records prefix 678
wattage 549
Web Service login only 417
Web.config 220, 226, 231-232, 234-235
work order form 252
Work Order menu 797
work order numbers 248


530 ScheduALL AdministratorsGuide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

530 ScheduALL AdministratorsGuide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

530 ScheduALL AdministratorsGuide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What software does this document provide information about?

What software does this document provide information about?

What rights are reserved regarding the content of this document?

What rights are reserved regarding the content of this document?

ScheduALL for Windows

ScheduLINK for Windows

Last Updated December 2018

ScheduALL ® Copyright 1989-2018 by Net Insight AB. All rights reserved.

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 5

Deleting a Cancellation Rate 53

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 6

General Resource – Connector 95

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 7

Service Properties – Capable Rooms 155

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 8

Holiday Setup 195

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 9

Modifying Time Increment Values 232

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 10

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 11

General User Preferences, Options Tab, Miscellaneous Options 396

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 12

Trouble Ticket Status 510

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 13

BandPLAN Resource Setup 566

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 14

Container Type Hierarchy 613

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 15

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 16

Pick List Controls 693

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 17

Ch. 7 Updating the ScheduLINK Interface 734

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 18

Setting Override Hours 770

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 19

Qualifying Items 811

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 20

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 22

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 23

l ScheduLINK Users Guide– contains supplemental information to the ScheduALL Users

Selecting List Items

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 24

Figure 1. Selecting Items in List

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 25

Test Early to Avoid Surprises

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 27

4. Create two services and associate them with the room.

Planning Rooms and Resources

Planning Resource Groups

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 28

Planning Categories and Types

Client Rates and Rate Cards

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 29

Day and Night Rates

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 30

Initial Setup Sequence

Common Setup Areas

ScheduALL for Windows v5.32 Page 31

Table 1. Common Setup Areas (continued)